Chief Architect Manual PDF

Copyright © 1992-2000 by Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in

any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, record-
ing, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing
from Advanced Relational Technology, Inc.
This manual was produced using Chief Architect®, Microsoft® Word and Adobe ®
Framemaker. Screen shots include both Windows® 95 and later formats using Adobe ®
Photoshop. and Jasc ™ Paint Shop Pro.
Registered Trademark Information

Chief Architect® is a trademark of Advanced Relational Technology, Inc.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, and Windows 95 are registered trademarks, and Windows is a
trademark, of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines, Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Framemaker and Photoshop are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
AutoCAD® is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Paint Shop Pro ™ is a trademark of Jasc Software, Inc.
All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Chapter 1: Installing
Important Notice to Existing Users....................................................1
Managing
Minimum System Requirements........................................................1
Files
Recommended System.........................................................................1
Optional Components .........................................................................1
Three-Button Mouse..........................................................................2
17” Monitor .......................................................................................2
Managing
Printers, Plotters, Etc. ........................................................................2
Files
Compatibility with Previous Versions ...............................................2
Installing Chief Architect....................................................................3
Installing Cosmo Player on Your System..........................................8
Installing the Hardware Lock ............................................................8
Managing
Software Security...............................................................................8
Files
Hardware Lock Drivers .....................................................................9
Hardware Lock ..................................................................................9
Deactivate the Chief Architect Password ..........................................9
Chapter 2: Overview
Introduction .......................................................................................11
Chief Architect Terms .....................................................................12
Chief Architect Objects ...................................................................12
Contents
Chief Architect Interface ..................................................................14

Using the Mouse ..............................................................................14
Toolbars ...........................................................................................15
i
Chief Architect 7.0 Reference Guide
The Standard Toolbar ......................................................................15

Menus ..............................................................................................16
Dialogs.............................................................................................16
Entering Dimensions .......................................................................16
Dynamic Defaults ............................................................................17
Keyboard Commands ...................................................................... 17
Function Keys..................................................................................17
Other Shortcut Keys ........................................................................17
Camera Movements ......................................................................... 18
Chief Architect Windows ................................................................18
Getting Started .................................................................................. 19
Selecting Items ................................................................................... 19
Marquee Select (+drag) ...................................................................20
One-by-One Select (+click).............................................................20
Selected Items..................................................................................20
Select and the Zoom Tool................................................................ 21
Editing Selected Items....................................................................... 21
Edit Toolbar.....................................................................................21
How to Draw a Plan .......................................................................... 21
Getting Help.......................................................................................23
Program Tips ...................................................................................23
Help Tips .........................................................................................23
Manual Tips .....................................................................................24
Chapter 3: Menus
Chief Architect Menus ...................................................................... 25
File Menu............................................................................................25
Edit Menu........................................................................................... 27
Build Menu.........................................................................................28
Options Menu ....................................................................................32
3D Menu .............................................................................................34
CAD Menu .........................................................................................35
Tools Menu.........................................................................................37
ii
Window Menu....................................................................................38
Managing
Help Menu..........................................................................................39
Files
Chapter 4: Toolbars
General Information ........................................................................ 41
Managing
Customize Toolbars...........................................................................42
Files
Items Tab .........................................................................................42
Adding Tool Buttons .......................................................................42
Deleting Tools from Toolbars .........................................................43
Toolbar Tab .....................................................................................43
Managing
Restoring Toolbars...........................................................................44
Files
Toolbar Buttons .................................................................................44
General Toolbar Buttons..................................................................44
Dimension Tools..............................................................................45
Text Tools........................................................................................45
Managing
Architectural Toolbar Buttons .........................................................45
Files
Wall & Railing Tools.......................................................................45
Door Tools .......................................................................................46
Window Tools .................................................................................46
Cabinet & Soffit Tools.....................................................................46
Managing
Electrical Tools................................................................................47
Files
Roof & Framing Tools.....................................................................47
3D Tools ..........................................................................................47
Other Architectural Tools ................................................................48
CAD Toolbar Buttons......................................................................48
Edit Toolbar Buttons.........................................................................49
Architectural Edit Toolbar Buttons .................................................49
CAD Edit Toolbar Buttons ..............................................................50
Utility Toolbar Buttons....................................................................51
3D Toolbar Buttons .........................................................................52
Contents
Camera Movement Tools ................................................................52

Available Render Tools ...................................................................53
Layout Tools ...................................................................................53
iii
Chapter 5: File Management

General Overview..............................................................................55
Creating a New Model ......................................................................56
Saving the Model ...............................................................................56
Save & Save As ..................................................................................56
Opening an Existing Model ..............................................................57
Closing Plans and Views ...................................................................58
Exiting Chief Architect ..................................................................... 59
Autosave Files ....................................................................................59
Backup Files .......................................................................................61
Transferring a Plan ...........................................................................61
File Types ...........................................................................................61
Files Required by Chief Architect ................................................... 62
Chapter 6: Preferences & 3D Preferences

Edit Preferences.................................................................................63
Appearance ...................................................................................... 64
Colors...............................................................................................65
Font ..................................................................................................66
Library Browser...............................................................................67
Text Items ........................................................................................67
General.............................................................................................68
CAD.................................................................................................70
CAD Line Properties ....................................................................... 77
Line Style Pattern Scaling ...............................................................78
Special CAD ....................................................................................79
Material List ....................................................................................79
Report Style .....................................................................................80
Master List .......................................................................................81
Categories ........................................................................................83
Render..............................................................................................84
iv
Other Render Settings......................................................................85
Managing
3D Preferences ...................................................................................87
Files
Options Tab .....................................................................................87
Creating Backdrops .........................................................................88
Include Tab ......................................................................................89
Render Tab.......................................................................................90
Managing
Files
Chapter 7: Defaults Setup
General Information .........................................................................91
Plan Defaults Setup ...........................................................................92
Managing
Foundation Defaults Setup ...............................................................93
Files
Foundation Tab................................................................................94
Footings ...........................................................................................94
Monolithic Slab ...............................................................................95
Piers .................................................................................................95
Managing
Materials Tab ...................................................................................96
Files
Wall Defaults Setup...........................................................................97
Working With Walls........................................................................97
System Default Walls ......................................................................97
User Specified Walls .......................................................................97
Managing
Default Wall Type Dialog .................................................................98
Files
Railing Defaults Setup.....................................................................100
Railing Tab ....................................................................................100
Railing Types.................................................................................100
Railing Material Tab......................................................................101
Door Defaults Setup ........................................................................102
General Tab ...................................................................................103
Options Tab ...................................................................................104
Frame & Trim Tab.........................................................................105
Lites Tab ........................................................................................106
Contents
Arch Tab ........................................................................................107

Molding Tab ..................................................................................108
Material Tab...................................................................................109
v
Window Defaults Setup...................................................................109

General Tab ................................................................................... 110
Options Tab ...................................................................................111
Sash & Frame Tab .........................................................................112
Casing Tab.....................................................................................113
Lites Tab .......................................................................................114
Shape Tab ......................................................................................116
Arch Tab ........................................................................................ 117
Molding Tab ..................................................................................118
Material Tab ..................................................................................119
Cabinet Default Setup .....................................................................119
General...........................................................................................120
Base, Full Height, Wall Cabinets ..................................................120
General Tab ................................................................................... 121
Cabinet Front Tab..........................................................................123
Moldings Tab.................................................................................124
Material Tab ..................................................................................126
Floor Defaults Setup........................................................................127
General Tab ................................................................................... 127
Molding Tab ..................................................................................128
Material Tab ..................................................................................129
Framing Defaults Setup .................................................................. 129
Floor Framing Tabs .......................................................................130
Wall Framing Tabs ........................................................................131
Openings Tab.................................................................................132
Headers Tab................................................................................... 134
Roof Tab ........................................................................................135
Trusses Tab.................................................................................... 136
Material Tab ................................................................................. 137
Dimension Defaults Setup...............................................................138
Setup Tab.......................................................................................138
Locate Items Tab ...........................................................................141
Arrowheads Tab ............................................................................ 143
Default Materials Setup ..................................................................143
Default Materials Dialog ...............................................................144
vi
Camera Defaults Setup .................................................................. 145
Managing
Default Tab ....................................................................................145
Files
Master Settings for Profile Plans .................................................. 146
Creating Your Own profile.pl1 ......................................................146
Updating profile.pl1.......................................................................146
Managing
Files
Chapter 8: Layers
New in 7.0 .........................................................................................147
General Information .......................................................................147
Layers Dialog ...................................................................................148
Managing
Layer Tabs .....................................................................................148
Files
Layer Tables ..................................................................................148
Layer Properties.............................................................................149
Layer Sets ......................................................................................150
Current CAD Layer .......................................................................150
Managing
Display Items in Reference Floor...................................................150
Files
Architectural Layers .......................................................................151
System Layers ................................................................................. 152
User Layers ..................................................................................... 152
Managing
Cad Layers .......................................................................................152
Files
Layer Sets .........................................................................................153
Importing Layer Sets ......................................................................154
Layer Sets in Layout .......................................................................154
Chapter 9: Terrain Modeler

Introduction .....................................................................................155
Modeling the Terrain ......................................................................156
Adding Elevation Data ....................................................................156
Contents
Editing Terrain Data ......................................................................156

Elevation Lines and Splines............................................................157
Adding Elevation Data ..................................................................157
vii
Elevation Points ...............................................................................157

Enter Marker Text ........................................................................ 158
Marker Text Attributes ................................................................. 159
Generating Terrain .........................................................................159
Terrain Properties ...........................................................................160
General Tab .................................................................................. 160
Contour Tab.................................................................................. 162
Material Tab ..................................................................................162
Terrain Features.............................................................................. 163
Creating Terrain Features..............................................................163
Terrain Features Dialog.................................................................. 163
General Tab .................................................................................. 164
Material Tab ................................................................................. 164
Terrain in Plan View.......................................................................165
Display Terrain ............................................................................. 165
Terrain and 3D Views .....................................................................166
Terrain and Sun Shadows .............................................................. 166
Clearing the Terrain .......................................................................166
Chapter 10: Multiple Floors

New In 7.0.........................................................................................167
Adding Floors .................................................................................168
Inserting and Deleting Floors .........................................................169
Current Floor/Reference Floor ......................................................170
Reference Toggle ............................................................................. 170
Swap Work-Reference Floor ..........................................................171
Floor Up/ Floor Down .....................................................................171
Change Floor/Reference ................................................................ 171
Reference Floor Color.....................................................................172
Display Items in Reference Floor...................................................172
viii
Chapter 11: Foundations
Managing
Files
New in 7.0 .........................................................................................173
Building a Foundation.....................................................................174
Footings .........................................................................................174
Managing
Monolithic Slab .............................................................................175
Files
Piers ...............................................................................................176
Setting Stem Wall Height by Room ...............................................177
In 3D View ....................................................................................177
Spread Footings ...............................................................................177
Managing
Aligning Stem Wall and Footing...................................................178
Files
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations................................................179
Manually Creating Piers & Pads ...................................................180
Editing Piers & Pads......................................................................180
Managing
Monolithic Slab Foundations..........................................................180
Files
Updating Slab Foundations............................................................181
Slab at top of Stem Wall................................................................181
Room Specification, Structure Tab................................................181
Foundations in Garages ..................................................................182
Managing
Deleting a Foundation Plan ............................................................182
Files
Chapter 12: Room Specification
Room Definition...............................................................................183
Selecting a “Room”..........................................................................184
Room Specification Dialog..............................................................184
General Tab .................................................................................. 185
Molding Tab ................................................................................. 186
Contents
Specifying Custom Moldings ........................................................187

Structure Tab ................................................................................ 187
Material Tab.................................................................................. 188
ix
Materials on Walls.........................................................................188
Specifying Rooms ............................................................................189
Room Types...................................................................................189
Room Labels ....................................................................................190
Editing Room Labels .....................................................................190
Foundations and Room Specifications ..........................................191
Room Sizes .......................................................................................191
Living Area ......................................................................................192
Living Area vs. Footprint ..............................................................192
Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................194
Lowered Ceiling Height ..................................................................196
Cathedral Ceilings ...........................................................................197
Coffered Ceilings .............................................................................197
Other Special Ceilings.....................................................................198
Split Levels .......................................................................................198
Chapter 13: Walls & Railings

New in 7.0 .........................................................................................201
Wall Modes.................................................................................... 201
Drawing Walls .................................................................................202
Create Rooms ................................................................................202
Selecting Walls .................................................................................203
Multiple Select In Plan View.........................................................203
Walls In Section/Elevation ............................................................ 203
Moving and Resizing Walls ............................................................203
Move Handle ................................................................................. 203
Extend Handles..............................................................................203
Wall Offset Handles ......................................................................204
Moving Walls With Dimensions.....................................................205
Break Walls......................................................................................205
Creating a Nook............................................................................. 206
x
Allowed Wall Angles .......................................................................206
Managing
Understanding Wall Assemblies ....................................................208
Files
Layer Spec Tab ..............................................................................208
Wall Layer Definitions ....................................................................209
System Default Walls ....................................................................209
User Specified Walls .....................................................................209
Managing
Creating New Wall Layer Definitions ...........................................210
Files
The Main Layer .............................................................................210
Wall Specification Dialog................................................................211
General Tab ...................................................................................211
Options...........................................................................................211
Managing
Resize About..................................................................................212
Files
Default Wall Heights .....................................................................213
Radius To.......................................................................................213
Roof Tab ........................................................................................213
Foundation Tab..............................................................................214
Managing
Railing Tab ....................................................................................215
Files
Railing Type ..................................................................................215
Layer Spec Tab ..............................................................................217
Railing Material Tab......................................................................219
Wall Heights.....................................................................................219
Managing
Deleting Walls ..................................................................................219
Files
Connecting Walls.............................................................................220
Automatic ......................................................................................220
Fix Connections .............................................................................220
Connect Walls................................................................................220
Repairing Broken Walls ................................................................220
Hatch Walls......................................................................................220
Wall Hatch Dialog .........................................................................221
Railings .............................................................................................221
Using Railings ..................................................................................222
Contents
Exterior Deck.................................................................................222
Interior Stairwell............................................................................223
Invisible Walls..................................................................................223
xi
Editing Walls in 3D .........................................................................224

Where to Use the 3D Wall Editor..................................................225
Setting up the Cross Section View for Wall Editing .....................225
Selecting the Wall..........................................................................225
Adjusting the Top and Bottom ......................................................225
Wall Height Specification ............................................................. 226
Raked Walls .....................................................................................226
Compound Angled Walls ................................................................ 226
Pony Walls........................................................................................227
Creating a Pony Wall.....................................................................227
Changing Wall Types for Pony Walls ...........................................227
Layer Spec Tab for Pony Walls.....................................................228
Layer Alignment Tab for Pony Walls ...........................................229
Displaying in Plan View................................................................229
Stepped Walls & Footings ..............................................................230
Chapter 14: Curved Walls

Curved Walls ...................................................................................231
Chord .............................................................................................231
Center............................................................................................. 231
Radius ............................................................................................232
Working with Curved Walls ..........................................................232
Unlocked Centers .......................................................................... 233
Handles on Curved Walls ..............................................................233
Move Handle ................................................................................. 234
Curvature Handle........................................................................... 234
Extend Handles..............................................................................234
Wall Offset Handles ......................................................................235
Center Handle ................................................................................235
Locked Center.................................................................................. 236
Resize Handles ..............................................................................236
Moving Straight Walls Attached to Curved Walls.......................237
Normal Curved Wall .....................................................................237
xii
Locked Center................................................................................237
Managing
Parallel to Chord ............................................................................237
Files
Aligning Curved Walls Between Floors ........................................238
Which Type of Curved Wall to Use ...............................................238
Curved Wall Edit Toolbar..............................................................238
Roof over a Curved Wall ................................................................239
Managing
Concave Curved Walls & Resulting Roofs ...................................240
Files
Chapter 15: Doors
New in 7.0 .........................................................................................241
Managing
Files
Door ..................................................................................................242
Sliding Doors....................................................................................242
Pocket Doors ....................................................................................242
Managing
Bifold Doors .....................................................................................243
Files
Garage Doors ...................................................................................243
Doorway Library .............................................................................243
Door Library................................................................................... 243
Selecting Doors.................................................................................244
Managing
Files
Blocking Doors and Windows ........................................................244
Door Specification Dialog ...............................................................244
General Tab ...................................................................................245
Options Tab ...................................................................................246
Frame & Trim Tab.........................................................................247
Lites Tab ........................................................................................248
Custom Muntins.............................................................................249
Arch Tab ........................................................................................249
Molding Tab ..................................................................................250
Material Tab...................................................................................251
Contents
Doors in Curved Walls....................................................................252

Curved Options..............................................................................252
Deleting Doors..................................................................................253
xiii
Copying Doors .................................................................................253

Multiple Copies .............................................................................254
Moving Doors...................................................................................254
Using Temporary Dimensions....................................................... 254
Dragging ........................................................................................ 254
Slowing Down the Move ...............................................................254
Typing New Dimension Values ....................................................255
Move Restrictions..........................................................................255
Centering Doors............................................................................... 256
Place Gable Over Door(s) ...............................................................256
Changing Door Swings....................................................................257
Door ..............................................................................................257
Sliding Doors ................................................................................257
Pocket Door .................................................................................. 258
Bifold Door ...................................................................................258
Resizing Doors .................................................................................259
Using the Dialog............................................................................259
Dragging from Handles .................................................................259
Single or Double Doors .................................................................259
Wrapped Openings.......................................................................... 260
Door Thresholds ..............................................................................260
Displaying Door Labels...................................................................260
Adding Transoms above Doors ......................................................260
Show Items in 3D View ...................................................................261
Openings in Railings ....................................................................... 261
Chapter 16: Windows

New in 7.0 .........................................................................................263
General Information ..................................................................... 263
Windows ..........................................................................................263
Selecting Individual Windows.......................................................264
Selecting Multiple Windows .........................................................264
Creating Window Schedules .........................................................264
xiv
Window Specification Dialog..........................................................264
Managing
General Tab ...................................................................................265
Files
Options Tab ...................................................................................266
Sash & Frame Tab .........................................................................267
Casing Tab .....................................................................................269
Lites Tab .......................................................................................271
Managing
Shape Tab ......................................................................................273
Files
Arch Tab ........................................................................................275
Molding Tab ..................................................................................276
Material Tab...................................................................................277
Deleting Windows............................................................................277
Managing
Copying Windows............................................................................277
Files
Moving Windows .............................................................................278
Dragging ........................................................................................278
Typing in Dimension Values .........................................................278
Example .........................................................................................279
Managing
Move Restrictions..........................................................................280
Files
Centering Windows .........................................................................280
Along a Wall..................................................................................280
Centering To Fixtures ....................................................................280
Resizing Windows............................................................................281
Managing
By Dragging...................................................................................281
Files
In the Specification Dialog ............................................................281
Place Gable over Window(s)...........................................................281
Corner Windows..............................................................................282
Windows in Curved Walls ..............................................................282
Custom Muntins ..............................................................................283
Creating Muntins ..........................................................................283
Removing Muntins .......................................................................283
Window Levels.................................................................................284
Stacked Windows.............................................................................285
Contents
Automatically Mulled Units............................................................285

Blocked Units ...................................................................................286
Selecting Blocked Units...................................................................287
xv
Selecting Components ...................................................................287

Group Select Components .............................................................287
Window Specification Dialog for Blocked Units ..........................288
Window Library ..............................................................................288
Bay Window.....................................................................................289
Resizing Components ....................................................................289
Box Window.....................................................................................290
Bow Windows ..................................................................................291
Editing of Bay, Box & Bow Windows and Components..............292
Ceilings and Bench Seats for Bay, Box & Bow Windows ............292
Lowering the Ceiling .....................................................................292
Creating a Bench Seat....................................................................292
Defining Roof Type Above Bay, Box & Bow Windows ...............293
Hip Roofs.......................................................................................293
Place Under Roof Slope ................................................................293
Place Under Roof - Rectangular ....................................................293
Rectangular Hip Roof .................................................................... 294
Gable Roof.....................................................................................294
Drawing Bay, Box and Bow Windows using Walls......................294
Chapter 17: Stairs

New In 7.0.........................................................................................295
Stairs .................................................................................................295
Understanding Stairs......................................................................297
Selecting Stairs.................................................................................298
Handles for Straight Stairs.............................................................298
Handles for Curved Stairs..............................................................298
Handles for Merged Stairs .............................................................299
Resizing Stairs.................................................................................. 299
Moving Stairs ................................................................................... 300
Move By Dragging ........................................................................300
xvi
Unrestricted Movement .................................................................300
Managing
Move Using Dimensions ...............................................................300
Files
Deleting Stairs or Stair Subsections...............................................301
Rotating Stairs .................................................................................301
Copying Stairs..................................................................................301
Landings ...........................................................................................302
Managing
Custom Shaped Landings ...............................................................302
Files
Landing Height ................................................................................303
Unlocked Landings........................................................................303
Locked Landings ...........................................................................304
Merging Stairs without Landings ..................................................305
Managing
Sections with Locked Width..........................................................307
Files
Working with Curved Stairs ..........................................................307
Aligning Ends of Curved Stairs.....................................................307
Curving Enclosed Sections ............................................................308
Curved Stairs Made Tangent .........................................................309
Managing
Aligning Curved Stairs Between Floors ........................................310
Files
Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs..........................................310
Single Section Stairs ......................................................................310
Multiple Subsections .....................................................................310
Matching the Center & Radius ......................................................311
Managing
Files
Creating Winders ............................................................................311
Troubleshooting Winders ..............................................................312
Flared Stairs.....................................................................................315
Creating a Flared Stair ...................................................................315
Symmetrically Flared Stairs ..........................................................316
Curving the Treads ........................................................................316
Softening the Flare Radius.............................................................317
Treads Perpendicular to Flare........................................................318
Starter Treads..................................................................................319
Contents
Stair Specification Dialog................................................................320

General Tab ...................................................................................321
Style Tab........................................................................................324
Materials Tab .................................................................................325
xvii
Creating a Stairwell......................................................................... 326

Viewing Stairs in 3D........................................................................327
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases ..............................................327
Special Stairs & Railings ................................................................328
Solid Railings ................................................................................328
Concrete Stairs .............................................................................. 328
Steel Stringer .................................................................................329
Masonry Stairs ...............................................................................329
Chapter 18: Roofs

New in 7.0 .........................................................................................331
Roof Mode ........................................................................................332
Roof Plane .................................................................................... 332
Gable/Roof Line ........................................................................... 332
Manual Roof Editing.......................................................................332
Drawing Roof Planes.......................................................................333
Editing the Shape of Roof Planes ...................................................333
Dragging the Corners..................................................................... 334
Moving an Edge.............................................................................335
Selecting at a Corner..................................................................... 335
Add an Edge ................................................................................. 335
Join Roof Planes ..............................................................................336
Align Roof Edges .............................................................................337
Change Roof Pitch or Height Dialog .............................................337
Editing the 3D Orientation .............................................................338
Roof Plane Edit Dialog..................................................................338
Height ............................................................................................339
Options.......................................................................................... 340
Roof Planes in Plan View................................................................340
Locating Roof Plane Intersections................................................ 341
Automatic Roof Generator .............................................................342
xviii
Build Roof Dialog..........................................................................342
Managing
Display Tab....................................................................................345
Files
Supply ............................................................................................345
Material Tab...................................................................................346
Roof Styles........................................................................................346
Wall Specification Dialog..............................................................346
Managing
Hip Roofs.......................................................................................348
Files
Base Polylines............................................................................... 351
Editing Base Polylines .....................................................................351
Using Base Polylines ........................................................................352
Gable/Roof Line Tool ......................................................................352
Managing
Dormers .........................................................................................353
Files
Gable Dormer over Windows & Doors .........................................354
Skylights ...........................................................................................355
Ceiling Planes...................................................................................355
Skylights and Ceiling Planes ........................................................ 356
Managing
Restoring Roof Defaults ..................................................................357
Files
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings .......................................357
Chapter 19: Joists & Rafters
Managing
Files
Drawing Framing Members ...........................................................359
Resizing Framing Members............................................................360
Framing in the Material List ..........................................................361
Framing in Section/Elevation Views..............................................362
Automatically Produced Joists and Rafters..................................362
Rafters and Trusses........................................................................362
Framing Reference Markers .........................................................363
Setting Framing Reference Markers ..............................................363
Contents
Using Framing References ............................................................364

Bearing Line.....................................................................................364
Joist Direction Line .........................................................................365
xix
Joist Specification Dialog................................................................366

Using Joist Direction Lines .............................................................367
Wall Framing Details ......................................................................368
Framing Dialog ................................................................................369
Floor Framing Tabs .......................................................................370
Wall Framing Tab.......................................................................... 371
Wall ...............................................................................................372
Plates..............................................................................................372
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls ............................................................372
Openings Tab.................................................................................372
Headers Tab................................................................................... 374
Roof Framing Tabs ........................................................................375
Roof Tab ........................................................................................375
Trusses Tab.................................................................................... 377
Truss Spacing ................................................................................377
Material Tab ................................................................................. 378
Chapter 20: Roof Trusses

Truss Disclaimer.............................................................................. 379
Drawing Trusses ..............................................................................380
Moving and Updating Trusses .......................................................381
Truss Specification Dialog ..............................................................382
Truss Detail ......................................................................................385
Truss Labels .....................................................................................385
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing...............................................386
Truss Base ........................................................................................386
Hip Trusses ..................................................................................... 391
Step Down Hip ................................................................................ 391
Subgirder Hip ................................................................................. 392
Drop Hip.......................................................................................... 393
Advantages and Disadvantages of the Different Hip Systems ....394
xx
Chapter 21: Cabinets
Managing
Files
New in 7.0 .........................................................................................397
General Information ......................................................................397
Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................398
Soffits ................................................................................................399
Managing
Shelves & Partitions ........................................................................399
Files
Custom Counter Tops .....................................................................399
Selecting Cabinets............................................................................400
In Cabinet Mode ........................................................................... 400
Managing
In Select Items Mode .................................................................... 401
Files
Right-click .................................................................................... 401
Cabinet Grips .................................................................................401
Selecting Multiple Cabinets ............................................................401
Selecting Stacked Cabinets............................................................401
Managing
Selection Restrictions ....................................................................402
Files
Modifying Multiple Cabinets..........................................................402
Cabinet Specification Dialog ..........................................................403
General Tab .................................................................................. 403
Cabinet Front Tab ..........................................................................405
Managing
Cabinet Diagram............................................................................405
Files
Face Items..................................................................................... 406
Options...........................................................................................407
Moldings Tab.................................................................................408
Material Tab...................................................................................409
Cabinet Door Style ..........................................................................410
Deleting Cabinets.............................................................................410
Copying Cabinets.............................................................................410
In Plan View ................................................................................. 410
Copying Groups............................................................................ 411
Contents
3D View........................................................................................ 411
Multiple Copies ............................................................................ 411
Using CAD Replicate ................................................................... 411
xxi
Moving Cabinets..............................................................................411
Moving Individual Cabinets ......................................................... 411
In 3D Views.................................................................................. 412
Moving Multiple Cabinets............................................................ 412
Move using Distance Values ........................................................ 412
Move Restrictions......................................................................... 412
Rotating Cabinets ............................................................................ 413
Resizing Cabinets ............................................................................413
By Dragging ................................................................................. 413
Corner Cabinets ............................................................................ 413
Editing in a 3D View .......................................................................413
Displaying Cabinet Module Lines.................................................. 414
Attaching Cabinets .......................................................................... 414
Kitchen Island............................................................................... 415
Moving Walls with Cabinets Attached ..........................................415
Special Shaped Cabinets .................................................................415
Fillers ................................................................................................417
Blind Cabinets.................................................................................. 418
Creating a Bar .................................................................................418
Cabinet Labels .................................................................................419
Chapter 22: Soffits

General Tab for Soffits ..................................................................422
Options Tab for Soffits ..................................................................423
Sloped Soffits ................................................................................424
Moldings Tab.................................................................................425
Material Tab ..................................................................................425
Applications for Soffits ................................................................... 426
Brick Veneer................................................................................. 426
Tile Surrounds .............................................................................. 426
xxii
Chapter 23: Libraries
Managing
Files
New In 7.0.........................................................................................427
Library Browser ..............................................................................427
Library Browser Window...............................................................429
Managing
Toolbar & Status Bar .....................................................................429
Files
Status Bar.......................................................................................430
Library Types ..................................................................................430
Placing an Item ................................................................................431
Managing
Selecting Items .................................................................................431
Files
Multiple Items................................................................................431
Deleting an Item...............................................................................432
Copying a Library Item ..................................................................432
Moving a Library Item ...................................................................432
Managing
Resizing an Item ..............................................................................433
Files
By Dragging...................................................................................433
With Typed in Values....................................................................433
Editing Library Item Attributes ....................................................434
General Tab ...................................................................................434
Managing
Options Tab ...................................................................................435
Files
Material Tab...................................................................................435
Library Items and the Material List..............................................436
Creating New Symbol Libraries.....................................................436
Fixture Library................................................................................436
Deleting Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ....................................437
HVAC ............................................................................................437
Millwork ........................................................................................437
Primitives.......................................................................................438
Sunrooms .......................................................................................438
Contents
Furniture Library............................................................................438
Symbol Library................................................................................439
Windows Library.............................................................................440
xxiii
Doorway Library.............................................................................440
Cabinet Doors .................................................................................. 441
Cabinet Modules.............................................................................. 441
Door Library....................................................................................442
Molding Library ..............................................................................443
Adding a Molding to the Library...................................................443
Drawing the Molding.....................................................................443
Adding the Molding.......................................................................443
Multiple Moldings .........................................................................444
Delete a Molding ...........................................................................445
CAD Block Library .........................................................................445
Images Library ................................................................................446
Moving Images ..............................................................................446
Resizing an Image ......................................................................... 446
Image Specification Dialog .............................................................447
The Transparent Color...................................................................447
Adding Images to Views..................................................................448
Copying Images ...............................................................................448
In Plan View ..................................................................................448
Copying In 3D Views ....................................................................448
Viewing Images................................................................................448
Plan View ......................................................................................448
3D Preferences - Include ...............................................................449
Show Items - 3D Views.................................................................449
Bitmap Images and the Layout Facility ........................................449
Bitmap Directories ..........................................................................449
Textures Library .............................................................................450
Backdrop Library............................................................................450
Adding Images, Textures and Backdrops to the Library ............450
xxiv
Chapter 24: Electrical Items
Managing
Files
Electrical Mode................................................................................451
Outlets...............................................................................................452
Lights ................................................................................................452
Managing
Light Render Data..........................................................................452
Files
Switches ............................................................................................453
Connect Electrical ...........................................................................453
Wiring Schematics...........................................................................454
Managing
Electrical Service Specification Dialog ..........................................455
Files
Service Data Tab............................................................................455
Render Data Tab ............................................................................455
Place Outlets.....................................................................................455
Electrical Library ............................................................................456
Managing
Creating Other Symbols .................................................................456
Files
Selecting Electrical Items................................................................456
Deleting Electrical Items.................................................................457
Copying Electrical Items.................................................................457
Moving Electrical Items ..................................................................457
Managing
By Dragging...................................................................................457
Files
By Using Dimensions ....................................................................457
Rotating Electrical Items ................................................................458
Changing the Height........................................................................458
Displaying Electrical in 2D and 3D................................................459
In 2D Plan View ............................................................................459
In 3D Views...................................................................................460
In Individual 3D Views .................................................................460 Contents
xxv
Chapter 25: Fireplaces

Masonry Fireplaces .........................................................................461
Built into a Wall ............................................................................461
Freestanding...................................................................................462
Fireplace Foundations....................................................................462
Editing Masonry Fireplaces........................................................... 462
Moving a Fireplace ........................................................................462
Resizing a Fireplace.......................................................................462
Changing the Depth .......................................................................462
The Fireplace Specification Dialog ................................................463
General Tab ................................................................................... 463
Fire Box Tab.................................................................................. 464
Material Tab ..................................................................................464
Library Fireplaces ...........................................................................464
Locating the Library Items ............................................................464
Placing a Library Fireplace............................................................465
Projecting Library Fireplaces ........................................................ 465
Chimneys .......................................................................................... 466
Chimneys for Masonry Fireplaces.................................................466
Chimney Chases ............................................................................466
Chapter 26: Dimensions

Diagram of a Dimension Line.........................................................467
Activating the Dimension Tools ....................................................467
Manual Dimensions .......................................................................467
Interior Dimensions .......................................................................468
End-to-End Dimensions ................................................................468
Automatic Dimensions ..................................................................468
Dimension Setup Dialog..................................................................469
Setup Tab.......................................................................................470
Locate Items Tab ...........................................................................472
xxvi
Arrowheads Tab.............................................................................474
Managing
Edit Dimension Line Dialog............................................................475
Files
Changing the Font Style..................................................................476
Moving Dimension Lines ................................................................476
Erasing/Deleting Dimension Lines.................................................476
Modifying Components of a Dimension Line ...............................477
Managing
Handle at a Number .......................................................................477
Files
Handle at Extension Lines to Walls or Openings..........................477
Moving Extension Lines to Other Items........................................478
Deleting Extension Lines...............................................................478
Adding New Extensions Using Handle Suspended in Space ........479
Managing
Precisely Locating Items Using Dimensions..................................479
Files
Moving a CAD Item Using Dimension Lines ................................479
Resize a House With Exterior Dimensions....................................480
Managing
Chapter 27: Text & Schedules
Files
Using Fonts.......................................................................................481
Creating Text Items.........................................................................481
Text Entry Dialog ............................................................................482
Managing
Attributes Tab ................................................................................483
Files
Arrow Tab......................................................................................484
Selecting Text Items ........................................................................484
Deleting Text ....................................................................................485
Reshaping Text Items......................................................................485
Moving Text Items...........................................................................485
Rotating Text Items.........................................................................486
Text on Different Layers.................................................................486
Copy, Cut and Paste ........................................................................486
Contents
Printing Text ....................................................................................487

Tab Spacing......................................................................................487
Text Restrictions..............................................................................487
xxvii
Text in Wall Elevation and Cross Section Views.......................... 488

Text on Layout Pages ......................................................................488
Text Arrows ..................................................................................... 488
Arrow Tool .................................................................................... 489
Special Use Arrow.........................................................................490
Door & Window Schedules.............................................................491
Schedule Specification .................................................................. 491
Attributes Tab ................................................................................492
Label Tab.......................................................................................493
Chapter 28: Callouts & Markers

Callouts.............................................................................................495
Callout Tab ....................................................................................495
Attributes Tab ............................................................................... 496
Arrow Tab ........................................................................................................497
Selecting Callouts ............................................................................497
Pointers, Arrows and Callouts .......................................................497
Editing Callout Attributes .............................................................. 498
Cross Section Lines .......................................................................498
Deleting Callouts ...........................................................................498
Copying Callouts ...........................................................................498
Moving & Rotating Callouts ......................................................... 498
Resizing Callouts ...........................................................................498
Markers ............................................................................................ 499
Marker Tab .................................................................................... 499
Attributes Tab ................................................................................499
Selecting Markers .......................................................................... 499
Deleting Markers ...........................................................................500
Moving Markers ............................................................................500
Rotating Markers ........................................................................... 500
xxviii
Chapter 29: The CAD Facility
Managing
Files
New in 7.0 .........................................................................................501
Overview of the CAD Drawing Tools ............................................501
Using the CAD Toolbar...................................................................503
Managing
Lines..................................................................................................503
Files
Drawing Lines by Keyboard Entry................................................504
Moving a Line................................................................................505
Stretching a Line............................................................................505
Arcs ..................................................................................................506
Managing
Editing Arcs Using Handles ..........................................................506
Files
Drawing Arcs Using Keyboard .....................................................506
Draw Arc About Center.................................................................507
Lock Center Arc ............................................................................507
Polylines............................................................................................508
Managing
Adjusting Polylines........................................................................508
Files
Open vs. Closed Polylines .............................................................509
Editing Polylines............................................................................509
Area of Closed Polylines ...............................................................510
Change Line to Arc........................................................................510
Managing
Make Tangent Button ....................................................................510
Files
Polyline Tools ...................................................................................511
Polyline Union ...............................................................................511
Polyline Intersection ......................................................................512
Polyline Subtract............................................................................512
CAD Arrows.....................................................................................513
Splines...............................................................................................514
Spline Handles ...............................................................................515
Reshaping Splines..........................................................................515
Add a Vertex..................................................................................516
Contents
Splines into Polylines ....................................................................517

Splines with Trim & Extend ..........................................................517
Displaying Control Handles ..........................................................517
xxix
Applications for Splines ................................................................517

Box Tools ..........................................................................................518
CAD Boxes ...................................................................................518
General Framing Members ............................................................518
Cross Boxes ...................................................................................519
Insulation ......................................................................................519
Rectangular Polylines .................................................................... 519
Editing CAD Boxes .......................................................................520
Circles ..............................................................................................520
Draw Circle About Center .............................................................520
Ovals ................................................................................................521
Points ................................................................................................ 521
Setting a Point................................................................................521
Moving CAD Points ......................................................................522
Notes on “From Line End” ............................................................523
CAD Select ....................................................................................... 524
Single Select .................................................................................. 524
Group Select .................................................................................. 524
Next Item ..........................................................................................526
Open Item.........................................................................................526
Moving CAD Items..........................................................................526
Point-to-Point Move ......................................................................527
Click Method .................................................................................527
Drag Method..................................................................................527
Copying .........................................................................................527
Moving Roof Planes ......................................................................527
Move to Framing Reference ..........................................................527
Curved Ttems Affect CAD Stops .................................................. 527
Move and Reshape Using Specified Values..................................528
New Move for CAD items.............................................................528
Copying CAD Items ........................................................................528
Copy Tool ......................................................................................528
Multiple Copy Tool .......................................................................528
Delete ................................................................................................ 529
xxx
Make Parallel/Perpendicular .........................................................529
Managing
Applied to Arcs..............................................................................530
Files
Break.................................................................................................530
Deleting a Polyline Edge ...............................................................531
Selecting CAD Items Using a Fence...............................................532
Trim and Extend..............................................................................532
Managing
Trim ...............................................................................................532
Files
Extend ............................................................................................533
Fence..............................................................................................533
Fillet and Chamfer ..........................................................................533
Fillet...............................................................................................533
Managing
Chamfer .........................................................................................533
Files
CAD Blocks ......................................................................................535
Make Block....................................................................................535
Explode Block ...............................................................................536
CAD Block Management ..............................................................536
Managing
Notes on CAD Blocks ...................................................................537
Files
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks ................................................538
Dimensions .......................................................................................540
CAD Layers......................................................................................540
CAD Layers in Cross Sections ......................................................541
Managing
CAD Preferences .............................................................................542
Files
Rotate/Resize About .....................................................................542
Allowed Angles .............................................................................543
Positioning Unit .............................................................................543
Move Corners ................................................................................544
Concentric......................................................................................546
Resize (Proportional) .....................................................................547
Fillet Edit Type ..............................................................................547
Fillet Notes.....................................................................................548
Auto Snap ......................................................................................548
Contents
Edit Polyline Parts .........................................................................549

Extended POV-ray DXF................................................................549
Block Fill .......................................................................................549
xxxi
Advanced Splines ..........................................................................550

Line Properties Preferences ...........................................................550
The Edit CAD Item Dialog ............................................................. 552
Edit CAD Item - Line ................................................................... 552
Edit CAD Item - Box.....................................................................553
Edit CAD Item - Closed Polyline ..................................................553
Edit CAD Item - Circle..................................................................553
Edit CAD Item - Multiple Items....................................................554
Edit CAD Item - CAD Blocks .......................................................554
Linear Example Using CAD Replicate ..........................................555
Radial Example Using CAD Replicate ..........................................556
Edit Arc Dialog ................................................................................ 557
Line Style Dialog..............................................................................558
Fill Closed Area.............................................................................560
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog................................................... 561
Two Methods of Creating Special CAD Items..............................561
Special CAD Dialog ......................................................................... 562
Gable/Roof Line ............................................................................562
Bearing Lines.................................................................................562
Custom Counter Top .....................................................................562
Slab ................................................................................................563
Slab with Footing...........................................................................563
Holes in Countertops and Slabs.....................................................563
Stair Landing .................................................................................564
Hole in Roof ..................................................................................564
Height and Thickness .................................................................... 564
Footing Height and Width .............................................................564
Material..........................................................................................564
CAD Menu .......................................................................................565
Snap To: (Snap Points) ...................................................................565
Snap to POINT .............................................................................566
Snap to ITEM END .......................................................................566
Snap to INTERSECTION .............................................................567
Snap to ITEM ................................................................................567
xxxii
Snap to LINE MIDPOINT.............................................................568
Managing
Delete Points.....................................................................................568
Files
North Pointer ...................................................................................569
CAD Details......................................................................................570
Creating CAD Details....................................................................570
Special Details ...............................................................................570
Managing
Plan Footprint..................................................................................571
Files
Fix Footprint ..................................................................................572
Layers Dialog.................................................................................572
Line Thickness Visibility.................................................................572
Managing
Files
Chapter 30: Edit Area
Edit Area ..........................................................................................573
Move - Edit Area ...........................................................................573
Rotating an Area ............................................................................573
Managing
Deleting an Area ............................................................................574
Files
Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area ..............................................574
Click Method .................................................................................574
Drag Method..................................................................................574
Copying..........................................................................................574
Managing
Reflecting an Area with Edit Area.................................................574
Files
Copying an Area with Edit Area....................................................575
Copy Restrictions...........................................................................575
Copy - Drag ...................................................................................575
Copy - Click...................................................................................575
Making a Reflective Copy with Edit Area ....................................575
Stacking Copies between Floors with Edit Area ..........................576
Contents
xxxiii
Chapter 31: Zoom & Window Tools

Zoom .................................................................................................577
Undo Zoom.......................................................................................577
Move Out..........................................................................................578
Fill Window......................................................................................578
Aerial View....................................................................................... 579
Panning the Display.........................................................................580
Tiling Views Side-by-Side ...............................................................581
Cascade.............................................................................................582
Arrange Icons ..................................................................................582
Swap Views ......................................................................................582
Closing Views ...................................................................................582
Chapter 32: Perspectives & Overviews

New in 7.0 .........................................................................................583
Perspective Cameras .......................................................................584
Perspective Views.......................................................................... 584
Floor Camera ................................................................................. 585
Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras ..................................585
Camera Tools.................................................................................586
Rotate Camera Views......................................................................587
Setting the Camera.........................................................................587
Keyboard Camera Movements ......................................................587
Moving or Rotating a Camera by Dragging in Plan ....................587
Changing the Camera Settings.......................................................588
Zooming in Perspective Views........................................................589
Recording a 3D Walkthrough ........................................................589
Playing Back a 3D Walkthrough ...................................................590
xxxiv
Overviews .........................................................................................590
Managing
Floor Overview..............................................................................591
Files
Full Overview ................................................................................591
Framing Overview .........................................................................592
Adjusting the View Angle ...............................................................592
View Angle Dialog ........................................................................592
Managing
Show Items .......................................................................................593
Files
3D Fly-by ..........................................................................................593
Color Off - Color On .......................................................................594
Materials in 3D Views .....................................................................594
Speeding up 3D View Generation ..................................................595
Managing
Increase the Number of Panels ......................................................595
Files
Suppress Items in 3D Views..........................................................595
Halt Generation with Esc Key .......................................................595
Editing in a 3D View........................................................................596
Selecting Items in 3D Views .........................................................596
Managing
Delete 3D Surface ............................................................................596
Files
Remove 3D .......................................................................................597
Chapter 33: Section/Elevation Views
Managing
Files
Creating Section/Elevation and Wall Elevation Views ................600
Wall Elevation..................................................................................600
Section/Elevation .............................................................................601
Back Clipping Sections..................................................................601
Lines in Section/Elevation Views ...................................................602
Detailing a Section/Elevation..........................................................603
Saving Section/Elevation Cameras ................................................603
Show Items Button ..........................................................................604
Contents
xxxv
Chapter 34: Render Views

New in 7.0 .........................................................................................605
Creating a Render View..................................................................606
From A Perspective .......................................................................606
Preview vs. Final Render View ......................................................606
Saving a Render View .....................................................................607
Printing a Render View ..................................................................607
Using the Contextual Menu ............................................................607
Camera Movement ..........................................................................608
Rendering Tools...............................................................................608
Texture Painter .............................................................................. 608
Adjust Lights .................................................................................608
Sunlight Toggle .............................................................................608
Final View .....................................................................................608
Save Bitmap................................................................................... 608
Print Image ....................................................................................608
Images, Textures & Backdrops ......................................................609
Materials in a Render View ............................................................609
Editing Materials in Render Views................................................610
Light Sources ...................................................................................610
Ambient Lights ................................................................................611
Light Types ......................................................................................611
Default Interior Lights .................................................................... 611
Default Sun Light ............................................................................612
Light Fixtures .................................................................................. 612
Added Lights....................................................................................613
Sun Angles........................................................................................613
Defining Lights ................................................................................614
Parallel Lights................................................................................614
Point Lights....................................................................................614
xxxvi
Spot Lights.....................................................................................614
Managing
Adjusting Lights ..............................................................................615
Files
In Plan View ..................................................................................615
Adjust Lights Dialog......................................................................615
Light Specification Dialog...............................................................616
Light Specification.........................................................................616
Managing
Sun Angle Render Data...................................................................618
Files
Chapter 35: Importing & Exporting
Managing
Importing 2D DXF Files .................................................................619
Files
Notes on Importing DXF’s ............................................................620
Read DXF File Dialog ...................................................................620
Mapping DXF Layers......................................................................621
Mapping to One Layer...................................................................622
Managing
Exporting 2D DXF files...................................................................622
Files
Write DXF File ..............................................................................623
DXF Current ..................................................................................623
DXF All (floors) ............................................................................623
Layers for 2D DXF Floor Plan ......................................................623
Managing
DXF 2D View................................................................................624
Files
Exporting the 3D DXF Model ........................................................624
Layers for 3D DXF Model ............................................................624
DXF Export Layers........................................................................625
DXF Code......................................................................................625
Exporting Wall Layer Definitions..................................................626
Importing Wall Layer Definitions .................................................627
iwalllay.dat and mwallay.dat..........................................................627
Exporting Bitmap Images...............................................................628
Contents
Importing Bitmap Images...............................................................628

Scaling Bitmaps ...............................................................................629
By Dragging...................................................................................629
xxxvii
Resize Factor .................................................................................629

Resize Bitmap................................................................................629
Exporting Windows Metafiles (WMF) ..........................................630
Exporting the Material List............................................................631
Virtual Reality Modeling Language-VRML.................................632
Exporting VRML Files ...................................................................632
Using the VRML Player..................................................................633
VRML use of Texture & Image Files ............................................634
Exporting & Importing Material Definitions ...............................634
Chapter 36: Printing & Plotting

Introduction to Printing..................................................................635
Different Types of Printers and Plotters .......................................635
Print Drivers .................................................................................... 636
Testing the Printer........................................................................... 636
File Menu.......................................................................................637
Layouts ..........................................................................................637
Printing ..........................................................................................637
Printing Direct ...............................................................................637
Printing from Layout .....................................................................637
Setting up the Printer......................................................................638
Paper Orientation............................................................................ 639
Layout Facility.................................................................................639
Printing Directly from a View ........................................................640
Printing from Layout ......................................................................642
Changing Printer from Layout ......................................................643
Print Image ......................................................................................644
Printing to Scale...............................................................................644
Metric Scales ................................................................................. 644
Printing Across Multiple Pages......................................................645
xxxviii
Printing Color or Black and White................................................645
Managing
Line Weights ....................................................................................645
Files
Defining Line Weight ....................................................................645
3D View Line Weights ..................................................................646
Printing to a File ..............................................................................646
Important Notes about Printing to a Remote Plotter .................... 648
Managing
Files
Chapter 37: Layout Facility
Preparing for Layout ......................................................................650
Managing
Printer Setup....................................................................................650
Files
Creating a Layout File ....................................................................651
The Current Page ............................................................................651
Layout Page Zero ............................................................................651
Managing
CAD and Text in Layout.................................................................652
Files
Testing the Print Area.....................................................................652
Creating Master Layout Files.........................................................653
Creating Borders .............................................................................654
Double-Line Borders .....................................................................654
Managing
Filleted Borders .............................................................................655
Files
Title Block .....................................................................................655
Using Master Layout Files..............................................................655
Opening Layout Files ......................................................................656
Sending Views to Layout.................................................................656
Plan Views and CAD Details ........................................................657
Section/Elevation Views................................................................658
Perspective and Overviews............................................................659
Displaying View Borders ................................................................660
Selecting Layout Views ...................................................................660
Contents
Moving Layout Views ...................................................................660

Rotate Scaled Views ......................................................................660
Deleting Views ..............................................................................660
xxxix
Copying Views .............................................................................. 660

Reactivating Views........................................................................660
Moving Items and Views to a Different Layout Page ..................661
Resizing Views .................................................................................662
Rescaling Views ...............................................................................662
Specify a Scale............................................................................... 662
Changing the Display of Layout Views .........................................663
Plan Views .....................................................................................663
System and User Layers ................................................................663
CAD Items in Elevations & CAD Details .....................................663
3D Items in any 3D View .............................................................. 663
Keeping Layout Views Current .....................................................664
Plan Views and CAD Details ........................................................664
Perspectives and Overviews ..........................................................664
Cross Sections & Elevations..........................................................664
Updating Sections/Elevations........................................................665
Editing Layout .................................................................................665
Adding New Layout Lines ............................................................666
Selecting Layout Lines .................................................................. 666
Deleting Layout Lines ................................................................... 666
Changing Layout Line Length.......................................................666
Edit Layout Lines Dialog ................................................................666
Line Weight Tab............................................................................ 667
Line Color Tab...............................................................................668
Changing the Printing Line Weight in Layout ............................. 668
CAD Items Drawn in Layout.........................................................668
Plan Views Sent to Layout ............................................................668
CAD Items in a 3D View Sent to Layout ......................................668
Architectural Items in 3D Views Sent to Layout ..........................669
Line Color and Plotting ..................................................................669
Finding Missing Files ...................................................................... 669
Layout Files Dialog .......................................................................670
Results of Missing Files ................................................................670
Finding Files from an Opened Layout...........................................670
xl
Printing Layout Files.......................................................................671
Managing
Layout & Printer Relationship.......................................................672
Files
Check Plots ....................................................................................673
Final Plots ......................................................................................674
Changing Plotter for Final Plots ....................................................674
Printing ..........................................................................................674
Managing
Files
Chapter 38: Materials
New in 7.0 .........................................................................................675
Managing
Defining Materials ...........................................................................676
Files
Materials Dialog ............................................................................676
Material Definitions.........................................................................678
General Tab ...................................................................................678
Types..............................................................................................680
Managing
Pattern Tab.....................................................................................682
Files
Texture Tab....................................................................................683
Render Tab.....................................................................................684
Advanced Options .........................................................................685
Applying Materials with the Material Tab ...................................686
Managing
Material Tab...................................................................................686
Files
Adjust Material Definition..............................................................686
Texture Painter................................................................................687
Define Materials...............................................................................687
Defining the Default Materials .......................................................687
Default Materials Dialog ...............................................................688
Exporting & Importing Material Definitions ...............................688
Export Material Definitions...........................................................688
Import Material Definitions...........................................................688
Contents
xli
Chapter 39: Material List

Disclaimer......................................................................................... 689
Estimating Software ........................................................................ 690
Generating a Material List .............................................................690
Calculate From All Floors .............................................................690
Calculate From Area...................................................................... 691
Calculate From Room....................................................................691
Setting up the Material List and the Master List .........................691
Master List ....................................................................................... 691
Updating the Master List ............................................................... 692
Searching the Master List ..............................................................692
Master List Columns .....................................................................692
Material List ....................................................................................693
Adding Information to the Material List ......................................694
Material List Categories .................................................................694
Subcategories.................................................................................695
Columns Tab..................................................................................695
Options Tab ...................................................................................696
Framing and the Material List.......................................................696
Copying the Material List...............................................................696
Exporting the Material List............................................................696
Changing the Font used in the Material List ................................ 697
The Components Dialog.................................................................. 697
Accessories ....................................................................................697
Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits ....................................698
Chapter 40: Other Features

Corner Boards .................................................................................699
Wall Corner Specification Dialog ..................................................700
Quoins...............................................................................................700
xlii
Quoins Dialog...................................................................................701
Managing
Delete Items Dialog..........................................................................701
Files
Rotate Plan View Dialog .................................................................702
Reverse Plan.....................................................................................703
Plan Check .......................................................................................703
Plan Check Dialog .........................................................................703
Managing
Sun Angle & Shadows .....................................................................704
Files
Creating Sun Angles ......................................................................705
Sun Angle Specification ............................................................... 706
Render Data ...................................................................................707
Deleting Shadows.............................................................................708
Managing
Changing CAD Layer for Sun Angle Arrows and Shadow.........708
Files
House Wizard...................................................................................708
Windows Standard Color Dialog ...................................................710
Managing
Chapter 41: General Tutorials
Files
Plot Plan (in a CAD Detail Window):............................................711
Pentagon ...........................................................................................712
Hexagon ............................................................................................714
Managing
Adjusting Angled Walls and Polylines ..........................................715
Files
Positioning Walls .............................................................................715
Chapter 42: Manual Roof Tutorials

Gable Roof....................................................................................... 717
Adding a Gable ................................................................................719
“L” Shaped Roof Planes .................................................................722
Dutch Gable ....................................................................................726
Contents
Adding Attic Walls to Fill Gable....................................................730
xliii
Chapter 43: Auto Roof Tutorials

Story and a Half...............................................................................733
L-Shaped House...............................................................................735
Variations using Full Gable Walls .................................................736
Gable Variation #1......................................................................... 736
Gable Variation #2......................................................................... 736
Gable Variation #3......................................................................... 737
Gable Variation #4......................................................................... 737
Shed Roofs........................................................................................ 737
Alternate Method for Shed Roofs..................................................738
Double Shed Roofs ........................................................................738
Opposing Shed Roofs ....................................................................738
Saltbox Roof.....................................................................................739
Varying Pitches................................................................................739
Mansard Roof .................................................................................. 741
Gambrel............................................................................................743
Gull Wing .........................................................................................744
Half Hip ............................................................................................745
Gable Dormer ................................................................................. 745
Shed Dormer ................................................................................... 746
Glossary ................................................................................. 747
Technical Support ................................................................ 763
Material.txt ............................................................................. 765
Index ....................................................................................... 769
xliv
Chapter 1:
Installing
Installing
Important Notice to Existing Users
Always back up your existing files before Install Chief Architect 7.0 into a different
installing Chief Architect if you currently use directory than your current Chief Architect
Managing
an earlier version. directory.
Files
Minimum System Requirements
In order to install and run Chief Architect, • 32 MB of RAM.
your system must meet the following • CD-ROM Drive
Managing
requirements:
Files
• A 2-button mouse supported by Win-
• A computer capable or running Win- dows.
dows 95, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98
or Windows 2000. • A color VGA, Super VGA, or higher
resolution monitor. Super VGA support-
• 300 MB free of hard disk space. ing 256 colors.
Managing
Files
Recommended System
• An IBM PC, or 100% compatible PC • CD-ROM Drive.
using a 300 MHz processor or better. • A 2-button mouse supported by Win-
Managing
• Windows NT 4.0, or Windows 98 or dows.
Files
Windows 2000. • A video card with support for OpenGL.
• 800 MB free of hard disk space. We highly recommend a video card with
• 64 MB of RAM. OpenGL hardware acceleration.
Libraries
Symbol
Optional Components
While Chief Architect will run under a mini- options may make using the program easier:
mum configuration, the following equipment
1
Three-Button Mouse Printers, Plotters, Etc.

Chief Architect requires a standard 2-button Chief Architect can output plans and 3D
mouse or digitizer pad supported by Win- Views to nearly any type of printer or plotter
dows. However, “mice” with additional but- that supports graphics under Windows—Pro-
tons or toggles can be programmed with vided the device has a CURRENT Windows
timesaving shortcuts using software direct driver. There is a wide variety of printers and
from the device’s manufacturer (for example, plotters available. If you purchase a printer
programming the middle mouse button to or plotter, find one which best meets your
double-click). needs for quality, cost, size, speed, color, etc.
If you do not own a printer or plotter, you can
17” Monitor
output your drawing to a file for someone
The ideal display for Chief Architect is a else to print.
17+” color monitor with 1024 x 768 (or
NOTE: Before purchasing or installing any
higher) resolution and a horizontal refresh
hardware, contact your local computer spe-
rate of 70KHz or better. This displays even
cialist to ensure system compatibility.
the smallest images clearly, eliminates screen
flicker, and enables you to take advantage of
the expanded toolbar capability.
Compatibility with Previous Versions

Always BACK UP YOUR FILES BEFORE • After opening the old file, Rebuild
YOU INSTALL OR UPGRADE! Walls/floors/Ceilings, and Build Fascia,
Plans produced in versions 2.0 through 6.0 gutters.
can be read by Version 7.0. A plan written • If you notice any problems with sym-
using Chief Architect 7.0 cannot be read by bols placed using earlier versions, delete
any previous versions. the symbol and replace it with a new
If you wish to be able to continue to read symbol from a Chief Architect 7.0
your drawings in the earlier version, set aside library.
copies of the drawing files before opening • Stairs show through to the next floor. If
them in Chief Architect 7.0. The copies downward sections from the upper floor
which have never been saved by Chief were created in versions 1.x or 2.x,
Architect 7.0 may still be read by the earlier delete those sections. You will only need
version in which they were created. one set of stairs for every two floors.
There are several steps required to success- • After performing these steps select
fully convert plans to the Chief Architect 7.0 File> Save to save the file.
format.
2
Installing Chief Architect
Installing
1. Turn on your computer and start Win- ROM) before installing Chief Architect.
dows. Some anti-virus programs may cause
2. We recommend that you close all other problems installing software.
programs before installing Chief Archi- 4. Place the Chief Architect CD-ROM into
tect. the CD-ROM disk drive.
3. If you use an anti-virus software pro- 5. The installation should begin after a
gram, disable it (after scanning the CD- brief pause.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
6. When the Chief Architect 7.0 dialog 8. Click the Start button, then click the
opens, select the Install Chief Run… option. Type D:\Setup in the text
Managing
Architect 7.0 button. box and press Enter or click OK.
Files
7. If the installation does not begin, do the
following (assumes CD-ROM drive is
drive D)
Managing
Files
3
Welcome Message
When the installer first starts, the
Welcome dialog will appear on
screen. Please read this and all
other screens carefully. Click
Next to proceed.
Software License Agreement

Please read the Chief Architect
Software License Agreement
carefully. You must click the
Yes button acknowledging
agreement to its terms before
you can continue with the
installation process.
4
Choose Destination Location
Installing
Choose the destination folder for
the program. You may click the
Browse button to navigate the
directories. If you choose to
install Chief Architect on a differ-
ent drive, be sure to enter the
“Chief70” folder name as well.
Otherwise the program may
install into the root of the drive.
This could cause the program to
function incorrectly. Click Next
to proceed.
Managing
Files
Setup Type
Choose the type of setup you
Managing
want. Compact takes up the
Files
smallest amount of space, since
only the minimum required files
are installed.
Custom allows you to choose
Managing
the items you want to install.
Files
Typical installs everything.
Click Next to proceed.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
5
Select Program Folder

Define the name of the program
folder. When you choose Start>
Programs, this is the name you
will see in the program listing.
All the shortcuts for Chief Archi-
tect will be contained in this pro-
gram folder.
Click Next to proceed and the
installation process will begin as
files are copied to your hard disk.
This may take a few minutes.
Setup Complete
When all files have been copied,
the Setup Complete dialog will
open. Select the check box to
Launch Chief Architect. If
you do not select this option you
will return to your desktop.
The first time you start the pro-
gram you must either have your
dongle installed on the computer
or be ready to retrieve your pass-
word from the Internet.
If you did not opt to launch
Chief Architect from the install
screen you can use the Start
menu or the Shortcut on the
desktop to start Chief Architect.
Click the Start button. Select the Programs option, select the program group where Chief
Architect is located, then click the Chief Architect 7.0 shortcut
6
Getting a Password
Installing
The first time you run Chief Architect,
you will need to enter a password. In
order to obtain a password you must:
1. Enter your name.
2. Enter the CD key listed on your
invoice. All letters will be entered as capi-
tals and the dash is required.
3. Once you have correctly entered the
CD key, click the Get Password button.
4. Once you click the button the installer
will launch your Web browser and link
Managing
you to a Web site to retrieve a password.
Files
If you do not have internet access, you
must call ART Customer service at the
number listed in the dialog. (Please have
you CD key and code available).
Managing
Files
At the Web Site
If you have reached the
Web site successfully the
Managing
page should look similar to
the image at the right.
Files
(Additional instructions
will be included). Read the
instructions carefully and
then either copy the text
Managing
under the Your password
Files
for Chief is: to your clip-
board and paste it in, or
write it down and type it
into the Enter field of the
Chief Architect Install
Managing
dialog above.
Files
In this case you would enter ABEN6NL

14AKLE8. Letters must be upper case and
any spaces are required.
7
Installation Successful
Once you have entered
the password correctly
the following dialog
will appear.
Be sure to read the dia-
log box carefully, since
it contains important
information about
what to do if you need
to install Chief again
in the future.
Record your CD key in a safe place. This key will be required for future installs!
Installing Cosmo Player on Your System

If you chose to install Cosmo™
Player, please read all the screens
carefully and follow all the instruc-
tions.
Installing the Hardware Lock

Software Security the hardware lock functions correctly.
Chief Architect 7.0 is available with a hard- If you have the password version you must
ware lock (dongle) or password. You will obtain a password the first time you run
need to install the hardware lock and the Chief Architect.
hardware lock drivers in order to make sure
8
Deactivate the Chief Architect Password
Hardware Lock Drivers Hardware Lock
Installing
Install the hardware lock drivers from the Attach the hardware lock to the parallel port
installation CD by clicking the Install on the computer. Chief Architect must sense
Hardware Lock Drivers button in Chief this hardware lock in order to run.
Architect 7.0 dialog.
Deactivate the Chief Architect Password

The password of Chief Architect must be
deactivated before you can run the software
on another computer. Select Help> Deacti-
vate Password to start the process. The
Managing
Deactivate Password dialog will open.
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Follow the instructions in order to receive a
Deactivation code.
Deactivating the password is not the same as
uninstalling or removing the software from
your computer. Deactivating the password
Managing
will not remove any files from your com-
Files
puter, but it will allow you to run the pro-
gram from another computer.
You can load the software on more than one
computer, but only one computer can use the
Managing
software at any one time. (If you think you

Files
will be using Chief Architect on more than

one computer, the hardware lock version is
recommended).
9
10
Chapter 2:
Overview
Overview
Introduction
Chief Architect is designed to allow builders, Chief Architect ships with all the tools that
architects and other professionals in the automate the task of dimensioning, electrical
building and interior design trades to design outlet placement, the design of roofs, and all
effectively and produce plans rapidly. With other tasks required to produce working
Chief Architect, you can produce plans dur- drawings faster than ever before.
ing meetings with clients. The input and cor- With an accurate 3D model and powerful
rection of design information is extremely rendering tools, you can produce finished
fast and simple. The program allows you to presentation drawings as well as accurate 2D
focus on the client rather than the computer.
Managing
plans.
Overview
Chief Architect enables you to design and lay
Files
The Layout utility allows multiple views of
out buildings in Plan View while the program the model to be combined on a single sheet
creates the 3D model. Manipulating the floor of paper. Two hundred layout sheets are
plan can be done with the client present and available per file, allowing you to assemble
the 3D model is updated automatically. and save complete working drawings. Plan
Managing
Throughout the design and documentation Views, elevations and cross sections are
phase, you can generate Elevations, Sections,
Files
linked to the layout sheets. Changes made in
and Perspectives Views of the model. With the original are automatically reflected on the
these abilities, Chief Architect improves the layout sheets.
communication between client and designer. Once the views of the model are sent to the
Most tools are implemented in Chief Archi- layout sheets they can be specified to print at
Managing
tect with the mouse and keyboard. The lay- any scale. The sheets produced can then be
Files
ing out of rooms and the creation of the sent to any printer or plotter having a current
model is quick and easy. Instead of just Windows® driver or to a file when the
drawing lines Chief Architect allows you to printer or plotter is not physically present.
place objects which are used to create the 3D When working with other CAD programs,
model. Chief Architect supports exporting of both
Libraries
Once schematics are finished, dimensions 2D and 3D .dxf formats and can import 2D
Symbol
can be used to increase the level of accuracy .dxf files or bitmap files. Render Views can
in your design. be used to create VRML files which can be
used for virtual walkthroughs.
11
Chief Architect Terms Both System and User layers are referred to
Mode refers to the two main interfaces of as CAD layers.
Chief Architect - Architectural and CAD 3D Views - Chief Architect is a 3D
mode or the active tool mode such as the modeling program. Much of the creation and
Wall mode, Window mode, etc. Each mode editing of the model is done in Plan View,
has it own set of tools and functions that can but you can also generate and work in many
be performed. different 3D Views. When the 3D objects are
In Architectural mode you can create, viewed in a 3D View, (Perspective,
place and edit 3D objects that are used to Overview, Section/Elevation, or Render
create the 3D model. As you design the View), their appearance depends on the
building, you can work in different views materials assigned to them. Materials can be
with the available Architectural tools. defined with patterns, colors and textures
that will appear in the 3D Views.
CAD mode is similar to many other 2D
drafting programs. In CAD mode you can Textures are bitmap images, applied to
draw 2D objects that help clarify the graphic surfaces that will look like real materials in
information in the views of the model. Some the Render View. Many texture bitmaps have
CAD items have 3D characteristics that been supplied with the program to get you
make them part of the 3D model. started rendering materials.
Layers - The objects drawn in both

Chief Architect Objects
Architectural and CAD mode are placed on
Walls
Layers. The layers can be used to organize
which information displays in 2D. Layers are The first thing you draw in Chief Architect
organized into three tabs in the Layers are walls. Walls can simply be a two line
dialog. Layers that are already named should graphical representation of a wall or they can
not be changed. The Layers on the User tab be drawn to show the entire assembly of the
can be named however you wish. wall. You can define the position and/or
thickness of walls. Once walls are in place
Architectural - These layers mostly contain
other objects can be placed in and around
the 3D objects that are part of the model.
them.
System - These layers mostly contain CAD Floors
items that are drawn by the program. Some
items that are placed on System layers can be Chief Architect creates a file for each floor of
moved to User layers with the Edit CAD the model. The first floor is the most
Item dialog. important floor of the model. It is where you
begin drawing and it contains important
User - These layers can be named and used information for the entire model. Floor
by the user to organize information in the assemblies are defined in the Framing
plan files. dialog. The shape of the floors is defined by
the walls. The program will build the floors
and ceilings based on the layout of walls.
12
Introduction
Rooms opening is removed from a wall, the wall will

fill in the space automatically.
A room is defined by walls. Each room must
have one and only one complete, unbroken Other Objects
boundary that defines it. Rooms can be
Most of the items required to model a
created from a combination of walls,
complete house are available as 3D objects.
invisible walls, railings, and invisible
Some objects must be placed in a wall, while
railings. By naming and specifying rooms
others may be placed anywhere in the model.
Overview
you are identifying which rooms are interior
All the 3D objects may be copied, moved
and exterior and other important information
and resized to represent real world items.
for the program.
Images
Roof Planes
Images are bitmap pictures of real world
Roof planes are CAD items that are easily
objects that can be used to enhance the model
edited in 2D, but they can be assigned with
in 3D Views. They are stored in the Images
3D information such as pitch, thickness, and
library. Many are shipped with the program,
height that enable you to design a 3D roof
but you can also create your own.
plan.
Materials
The program has the capability to
automatically model a roof based on Materials can be defined and assigned to
Managing
guidelines you have defined. You may also objects to graphically represent real world
Files
edit any roof plane individually, or create a materials in 3D Views and quantities of
roof plane from scratch. You are given the materials can be calculated for the Material
tools to easily create the roof you want. List.
Foundation Materials are assigned a Type which is often
Managing
associated with a pattern. The Type defines
The Foundation Plan is the only floor that
Files
how the material will be calculated in the
can be placed under the first floor. The
Material List. The pattern and the color of
program will automatically create a
the material will display in 3D Views other
Foundation plan based on the footprint of the
than the Render View.
first floor and the construction methods you
select. Materials can be assigned a Texture which
Managing
defines how the material will appear in a
Files
If the first floor footprint changes, the
Render View. The texture is represented by a
Foundation will not be updated, but you can
2D bitmap image, which can make a flat
delete it and rebuild it based on the new
surface appear to have 3D qualities.
footprint.
Terrain Modeler
Openings
Managing
In addition to being able to create an accurate

Files
An opening is any item which creates an

3D model of buildings, Chief Architect has
opening in a wall. A door, window, fireplace
the ability to model a 3D approximation of
or bay window is an opening. When an
the building site. The Terrain Modeler
13
allows you to enter elevation data that can be used as the terrain boundary and to represent
used to model the changes in elevation of the property lines in 2D.
finished grade. The Terrain Perimeter can be
Chief Architect Interface

Most work is done in the Plan View of the or right is not specified, the manual refers to
model. Walls, roofs, windows and doors are the left mouse button.
easily created and edited in the Plan View.
While work is being done in Plan View the NOTE: This assumes that the mouse is
programmed for a right-handed person. If
program is creating a 3D model that can also
you are left-handed, and have re-
be viewed from any angle. programmed your mouse, you will need to
Once the 3D model exists, interior and reverse the instructions for left and right
buttons in this manual.
exterior elevations, cross sections and 3D
Views can be automatically generated. The Right button refers to the right
model may be edited in all views. Changes mouse button. In Chief Architect it
made in one view are automatically updated is used as a single-click select. The
in other views. right mouse button will allow you to select
any item from within any drawing mode. For
Using the Mouse example, if you are in Wall mode, you can
Most items (cabinet, door, window, electrical use the right mouse button to select an item
item, etc.) are created by either clicking the such as a cabinet or a piece of furniture.
left mouse button or by dragging the cursor Once an item is selected there are many
from one end of the item to the other (wall, editing options.
dimension line, stairway). The information
window in the toolbar tells which mode is The right mouse button can also be used to
currently active. open a context sensitive menu which
contains additional editing commands. For
Left button refers to the left more information see “Appearance” on page
mouse button, which is the primary 64.
mouse button used in Chief. If left
Middle button: Chief Architect
does not utilize the middle mouse
button on a three-button mouse. It
can be programmed to work as a double-
click if you desire.
14
Drag - means to hold down the left mouse Toolbars

button, move the mouse and then release the Toolbars and tool buttons are the fastest way
mouse button when the move is complete. to access most features in the program. For
each mode a standard toolbar has been
When a moved object gets close to its provided with the tools most often used. You
destination, you can more accurately can customize the toolbars by removing and
position it by temporarily changing the adding buttons to these toolbars or by
moving speed. Select the object to be
Overview
creating your own toolbars from scratch.
moved. Move the cursor over the Move
handle. Click and hold down the left Some tool buttons only appear on child
mouse button as you move the object. To toolbars. A child toolbar is a toolbar that is
slow the move, hit a number key on the
activated when a parent tool has been
keyboard while still holding the left mouse
button. You do not need to hold the selected.
number key down. The cursor now moves
"n" times faster than the object, where “n” Click the Wall button and view the child
is the number you pressed. The object toolbar that appears with other tools that are
moves slowly, making it easy to position generally related to drawing walls.
just right. Release the left mouse button
and the move is completed. This same
technique is also helpfule when you are
Managing
resizing an object.
The Standard Toolbar
Files
A toolbar displays near the top of the main
Move to - means to move the cursor with window. Each button also corresponds to a
the mouse to a certain place on the plan. menu item. Some functions cannot be
Click - means to press and release the accessed from the toolbar, but most functions
specified mouse button. can be. The toolbar is really a short cut that
Managing
allows you to access the most often used
Files
Click on - means to move to cursor to an menu functions more conveniently. Entering
item and then click while the cursor is on the a new mode can cause the toolbar itself to
item. change, allowing options only available in
Double-click - means to click the left the chosen mode.
mouse button twice rapidly. The double-click
Managing
The buttons on the right of the toolbar
speed is programmed in Windows. change according to which of the left buttons
Files
IMPORTANT NOTE: Many toolbar was most recently pressed.
buttons will behave differently when The status bar at the bottom of the main
double-clicked. For example, double-click
window displays the current mode. This
Select Items to bring up the Plan determines what the left mouse button will
Managing
Defaults dialog.
do when pressed. Use the toolbar buttons
Files
whenever possible in order to save time. All

drawing modes may be accessed through the
Build menu.
15
Menus Dialogs
Chief Architect utilizes a standard Windows Dialogs are used to enter sizes and other
Menu format. The Menus appear below the information to move and edit objects within
title bar in the program window. For the the program. Many dialogs have a preview to
purposes of the Reference Guide, the path to show you how the changes made affect the
menus is written as Options> Materials> selected object. To see the picture of the
Define Materials. Define Materials is an object update in the dialog as numbers are
option of the Materials submenu which is in changed, click in a different box or press
the Options menu. the Tab key on the keyboard.
The Materials submenu of the Options menu If the Enter key is pressed, it is equivalent to
is shown below. clicking the OK button and will close the
dialog while updating the object with the
new information.
Entering Dimensions
When using Imperial Units, lengths and
distances may be entered as inches or feet
and inches, in either decimal or fractional
form.
• To enter feet you must include the "’"
If a menu item has a check displayed to its marker otherwise the program will read
left, it is active. inches.
Menu items which have an ellipsis after their • In most cases the program will allow preci-
name, “...”, open a dialog when selected. sion to 1/16th of an inch. Fractional inches
with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are
Menu items with an arrowhead after their allowed.
name have sub-menu that will open when • The program will convert decimals to frac-
they are selected. tions.
Some menu items have function keys or key • If the number in the dialog is followed by a
combinations listed next to them. These can decimal point, the number can be entered
be typed on the keyboard to activate the as a floating point number instead of a
specified command, often saving valuable whole number with fractions. These num-
time. (For example: Ctrl + S=Save, F6 =Fill bers can be entered to a greater precision
than 1/16th of an inch.
Window, F2 =CAD Mode Toggle, F1 =Help
• Millimeters are used for all metric dis-
Contextual menus can be displayed when an tances.
item is selected with the right mouse button. • Angles may be entered as bearings, deci-
Options currently available will pop up on mal degrees, or degrees, minutes and sec-
screen. onds.
16
Dynamic Defaults F3 - Save file. (Same as Ctrl + S).

Dynamic defaults are values that can be set F4 - Close file. (Alt + F4 - Close All files).
or changed globally throughout a model. In a
dialog, you will know if a value is a dynamic F5- Refreshes the display of the current
default if it is followed by a "(D)". This view. (Shift + F5 - Cascade open windows).
indicates that the value can be changed in the F6 - Fills the screen with the extents of the
default setup for that type of item and all current view. (Shift + F6 - Tile open
Overview
items in the model of the same type will be windows).
updated automatically. If an item has one of
these values that has been set to something F7 - Swap Views between the Plan View and
other then the default, it will not be updated the most recently opened 3D View.
when the default value is changed. F9 - Plan Check.
To reset a value to the dynamic default, or to Delete key - Deletes the current selection
check and see if a value is dynamic, type a set.
"d" in an entry box. If a new value appears
with the "(D)" following it, then the value is Other Shortcut Keys
dynamic. If the box will not accept a "d" as
Ctrl + Z - Undo
an entry, the value does not have a dynamic
default. Ctrl + Y - Redo
Managing
Files
For values that do not have dynamic defaults, Ctrl + X - Cut
you can group select related items and
Ctrl + C - Copy
change the settings for all selected items in
the specificationdialog. Ctrl + V - Paste
Ctrl + N - Open new plan file
Managing
Keyboard Commands
Files
Many commands can be initiated directly Ctrl + O - Open existing plan file
from the keyboard. A standard way of Ctrl + S - Save file
opening menus and menu items is using the
Alt + access key. The access key is the Ctrl + W - Close window
underlined letter in a menu name. Ctrl + P - Print
Managing
Files
Function Keys Ctrl + E - Open for edit, (same as Open
Some of the function keys located across the Item button).
top of the keyboard can be used to access Ctrl + L - Open Library Browser
Chief Architect commands.
Ctrl + M - Open Master List
Managing
F1 - Opens the online help file for the

Files
current mode or command.

F2 - Toggles you between CAD and
Architectural modes.
17
Camera Movements in the main window at any given time. When

Camera movement in Perspective and you have multiple windows on your screen,
Render Views can be controlled by the the active window is the one whose title bar
keyboard as well as the toolbars. has the same color and configuration as the
Chief Architect title bar. To activate a
F - Move camera forward. different view, click anywhere in its window.
B - Move camera backward. Here is a list of child window types:
U - Move camera up. 1. Plan View - A 2D view of the model
D - Move camera down. looking from the top. Only one floor can
be current in any Plan View.
L - Move camera left.
2. Wall Elevation - An interior eleva-
R - Move camera right. tion of a wall.
I - Moves camera inward along the line of 3. Section/Elevation - A section cut
sight. through the full model, from foundation
O - Move camera outward along the line of to ridge, Exterior Elevations are also
sight. produced by using the Cross Section
view.
S - In a Render View, the camera spins
4. Perspective View - A perspective
about focal point until the Esc key is hit.
view of the entire model is created with
Left or Right arrow - Rotates the camera to the Full Camera .
the left or right about the view focal point.
5. Floor Camera- A perspective view of
Up or Down arrow - Rotate the camera up or the current floor only.
down about the view focal point.
6. Render View - A render view is simi-
lar to a perspective. It can be generated
Chief Architect Windows
automatically with the Render cam-
Window has two meanings in Chief
era or from a Perspective View.
Architect. First, there is a window that you
place into a wall of your plan. Second there 7. Overview - An isometric view of the
are windows that display views of the 3D entire model.
model.
8. Plan Overview - An isometric view
All work in Chief Architect is done in child of an entire floor. Ceilings are omitted so
windows that are contained within the main you can see the interior from above.
window. The main window is the screen
9. Framing Overview - An isometric
containing the title bar, the menu bar, and the
view of the entire model displaying only
toolbars that you see when Chief Architect is
framing. Framing must be built before
opened.
this is generated.
Up to ten child windows showing different
views of the same or different models can be
18
Getting Started
10. Material List - A spreadsheet of mate- 15. Library Browser - A window which
rials for a specified portion of the model. displays the library items available.
11. CAD Detail - A 2D CAD drawing that 16. Aerial View - A view window which
is saved with the model. allows you to move around the Plan
12. Wall Framing Detail - When framing View quickly.
is built, the program creates a detail for Any combination of child windows can
each wall in the building. display at one time. Multiple windows can
Overview
display different parts of the same plan or
13. Layout File - 200 layout pages consist- unrelated plans. Child windows can be
ing of other view windows arranged for placed on top of one another or tiled so that
printing. all are visible. When you make a change to
14. Walkthrough - A series of pictures the model all windows related to the model
recorded by the Record Walkthrough are updated simultaneously to reflect the
item in the 3D menu. change.
Getting Started
When you open the program, a blank plan can press the F1 key to get more detailed
file opens in a child window within the larger
Managing
information about that item.
main window. The main window contains all
Files
of the menus and toolbars. When you pass The title bar at the top of a child window
the cursor over a toolbar button or above a holds the name of your drawing file followed
pull down menu item, a brief help message by the word Plan. When you first start, the
appears at the bottom of the main window. drawing has no name, so the word Untitled
Whenever you see one of these messages you appears. As you create other views, the name
Managing
of the file and view type can be found in this
Files
area.
Selecting Items
Select refers to selecting an item for
Managing
the Edit toolbar can appear with buttons
editing. You may select a cabinet by clicking specific to the selected item(s).
Files
on it in Cabinet mode or clicking on it in
The Open Item button will appear when
Select Items mode.
something is selected which has a dialog that
The right-click is used to select an item in can be used to edit the item.
any mode or open a context sensitive menu.
Managing
Clicking the Open Item button is the same

Files
When an item is selected one or more as double-clicking on an item while in Select

handles (small red squares or triangles) Items mode or when the item’s mode is
display. Drag from a handle to move, resize active.
or rotate the item. When an item is selected
19
Marquee Select ( Shift +drag) group selecting walls or openings. This

Items may be group selected by one of two method is optional for free-standing items.
methods. The easiest and fastest method is to • Select the first wall or railing. Then
hold down the Shift key while dragging a Shift +click each additional wall or railing
marquee (rectangle) around the items to be to be selected. No other type of item will
selected. The marquee must cross at least one be selected once the first wall or railing is
half of the item for it to be selected. This selected.
method will work for free-standing items
• Select the first opening (window, door or
only, not for walls, windows and doors.
built-in masonry fireplace). Then
In most cases, if you activate the mode for Shift +click each additional opening to be
the type of item you wish to select, then hold selected. Nothing but openings will be
down the Shift key as you drag a marquee, selected once the first opening is selected.
only the items of the same type as the active • Select a free-standing item (cabinet, etc.).
mode will be selected. Then Shift +click each additional free-
• If in Base Cabinet mode, this selects standing item to be selected. Nothing but
only base cabinets. free standing items will be selected once
the first item is selected. This method will
• If in Wall Cabinet mode, this selects not discriminate by type of free-standing
only wall cabinets. item.
• If in Full Height Cabinet mode, this
selects only base, wall and full height cabi- Selected Items
nets. Once an item is selected the cursor will
change, to indicate what can be done with the
• If in a Soffit mode, this selects only sof-
cursor. Move the cursor above the various
fits.
handles to see the possibilities.
• If in Text mode, this selects only text. 1. When the cursor changes to a four-
• If in Callout mode, this selects only headed arrow above a handle (usually
callouts. near the middle of the item), you can
click and drag to move the item.
• If in Image mode, this selects only trees
or images. NOTE: If the item resists moving in that
direction, select the item again, then hold
• In other modes (such as Select Items
mode) CAD items as well as all of the down the Ctrl key before grabbing the
move handle.
above items are selected.
2. When the cursor changes to a two-
One-by-One Select ( Shift +click) headed arrow , you can resize the item
You may instead choose to group select items in either of the two directions indicated
one-by-one. This method is required for by the arrows. (In some circumstances,
20
Editing Selected Items
the two-headed arrow will allow you to Select and the Zoom Tool
do something other than resize the item.) Selected items remain selected when Undo
3. When the cursor changes to a circular Zoom , Zoom Out , Fill Screen , and
arrow click and drag the handle to the scroll bars are used. This allows zooming
rotate the item. in to select items, then zooming out to do a
long move, etc.
Overview
Editing Selected Items
Edit Toolbar If different types of items are selected, Open
When an item has been selected there are Item will normally access the Edit CAD
functions that are only available while it is Item dialog. This allows you to move or
selected. The functions depend on the type of replicate the items by entering specific
item selected, the current view and how the values. It may also offer other capabilities.
item was selected. In most cases the Edit
Cabinets are the exception to this rule.
toolbar will open and tool buttons will be
Although base cabinets, wall cabinets, and
available that allow you to edit the selected
full height cabinets are different types of
Managing
item in some way. Edit toolbars are not
items, they are also similar types. If the
customizable by the user, they are defined by
Files
selection set consists only of these three
the program.
types of cabinets, the Cabinet Specification
If only one type of item is selected, choosing dialog will still be accessed when Open
Open Item will normally access the dialog Item is chosen. This is used for
specific to that type of item. This allows you simultaneously changing the door style of
Managing
to change the parameters for multiple items every cabinet in the entire kitchen. Activate
Files
at the same time. Full Height Cab and use a marquee style
select around the entire kitchen to select all
cabinets and only cabinets.
Managing
How to Draw a Plan
Files
When you are drawing a plan in Chief The program ships with default settings so
Architect, you are not just drawing lines, you that you can immediately start drawing
are placing and/or creating 3D objects that plans. It is recommended that you first
represent building components. Here is a review these default settings and make the
Managing
brief overview of the standard order for you appropriate changes to match your methods
Files
to create your buildings. of drawing and building. For information on

creating default settings see “Master Settings
for Profile Plans” on page 146.
21
1. Go through each of the Defaults Setup 7. Place doorways and windows into the
menu items and define the parts that will walls.
make up your building. (see “Defaults
Setup” on page 91.) Draw walls first and then place
openings in them. Draw straight through
2. Double-click the Roof Plane tool to a doorway, window or other opening. Put
open the Build Roof dialog to define the the opening in later.
parameters of your roofs. (see “Build
Roof Dialog” on page 342.) 8. Define rooms, floor height, and ceiling
heights. This will define the top plate
3. Double-click the Wall tool to define and
height when you model your roof plan
select the wall layer definition to be used
or upper floors. (see “Room Specifica-
in your building. (see “Wall Layer Defi-
tion Dialog” on page 184.)
nitions” on page 209.)
Once your objects have been defined you can 9. Click the Build New Floor button to
start placing them in the Plan View. add a blank upper floor or one based on
the footprint of the first floor. (Repeat
4. Lay out exterior walls first. Always this step to add up to nine floors above
draw your walls in a clockwise direc- the first floor.
tion. This keeps exterior surfaces to the
outside of the building. (see “Drawing 10. Build the foundation plan for your
Walls” on page 202.) model. Use the Foundation Setup dia-
log to define the assembly of your foun-
Draw walls in a Clockwise direction dations. (see “Building a Foundation” on
around the building. Drawing in this page 174.)
direction places the exterior surface of the
wall to the exterior of the building. This is 11. Model your roof plan with the manual
not as important when drawing interior roof tools or with the automatic roof
walls. generator. When the roof plan is correct,
protect it from accidentally being rebuilt
5. Generate automatic exterior dimensions by checking Lock Roof Planes in the
and adjust walls using the dimensions Build Roof dialog, and by locking Sys-
for precision.(see “Moving Walls With tem Layer 10, Roof Planes. (see
Dimensions” on page 205.) “Roofs” on page 331.)
6. Change your default wall type if 12. Place cabinet modules into the kitchen
required, and lay out interior walls, and bathrooms. Place fixtures, appli-
using dimensions to correctly size ances and other electrical items.
rooms.(see “Wall Layer Definitions” on Now that your design has been fine tuned
page 209.) you can use the framing tools to design the
structure of the building and create the
details needed for working drawings.
13. Open the Framing dialog and check the
appropriate boxes to automatically build
22
Getting Help
framing. (see “Framing Dialog” on page 15. Use the Layout facility to properly
369.) present your drawings.
14. Create 3D Views of your model and
send them to a Layout File for printing.
Getting Help
Overview
Program Tips • Any time you see this one line help mes-
When using the program, you will learn a lot sage appear, you may press the F1 func-
by observing how the program functions: tion key and the on-line help will open to
that specific topic. You may also press the
• To draw a linear object such as a wall or
HELP button in any of the dialogs to get a
line or to resize an object Click and Drag.
quick description of the various options
When you release the mouse button the
available within that dialog.
action will be finished.
Help Menu
• To place an object in the model, Click in
the current window. The online Help is also available through the
Help menu. No matter which method you use
Managing
• Double-click toolbar buttons. Many will
display dialogs that are used to set prefer- to access this help, you may find additional
Files
ences for the tool or that can be used to information by doing the following:
modify default objects. • Click on a word or phrase that is under-
• When an item is selected, red handles will lined with a solid green line to jump to a
appear which allow you to move, resize or related topic or to find out more about the
Managing
rotate the item. current topic.
Files
• Click on a word or phrase underlined with
Help Tips a green dashed line to get a pop-up box
There are four forms of on-line help containing a definition, picture, or other
available; Tool Tips, the Help file, the additional information. Click once more to
Manual.pdf, and the ART Web site, make the pop-up box disappear.
Managing
www.chiefarchitect.com. • Select the Index button to search for a
Files
Tool Tips word or topic using key words. Start typ-
ing possible words to search by. When you
• When you move the cursor above any tool- see the topic, double-click on it to display
bar button or menu item, a one-line help (or select the topic, then click the Display
message will appear in the status bar. This button).
Managing
message will say what the item does and

• When you are finished with the on-line
Files
how to use it. A description also appears

in a box above the button. Help, select File>Close or click the Esc
key.
23
Manual Tips Select Window> View Bookmarks when

• The manual is divided into topics. Look in Acrobat to view the bookmarks.
through the Contents at the front of the www.chiefarchitect.com
book to understand how the manual is laid
• Visit the Web site at www.chiefarchi-
out. Chapters are organized by topic.
tect.com and find the answers to com-
• Manual.pdf - Shipped on you installation monly asked Technical Support questions
CD is the entire manual in PDF format. (FAQ’s).
With Acrobat 4.0 you can view book-
marks that act as an online table of con-
tents to help you navigate the document.
24
Chapter 3:
Menus
Managing
Files
Chief Architect Menus
The Chief Architect menu bar appears under Move the cursor above each menu item to get
the main window title bar. Select any one of a brief description of that option in the help
these menu names to open a menu. Once a message area at the bottom of the screen.
Menus
menu is open, you can select a menu option. Press the F1 key to get online Help for that
Menu options followed with a triangle menu item. Menus may be activated at any
open submenus. Menu options followed by time by pressing the Alt key and the first
an ellipsis (...) open a dialog box with more letter of the menu name. Any of the menu
choices. items available may also be activated using
the keyboard by typing in the underlined
letter keys noted in the menu item.
File Menu
The File menu New: Open a new plan file, (Ctrl + N).
Managing
contains all
Open : Open an existing plan file, (Ctrl +
Files
the options
O).
related to
opening files, New Layout: Create a new layout file.
closing files, Open Layout: Open an existing layout file.
saving files,
Managing
Close (F4): Close the current view window.
exporting
If the current view window is a Plan
Files
files, or
View, you will be prompted to close any
printing files.
related 3D Views first.
Close All: Close all view windows.
Save :(Ctrl + S): Save all files related to
Libraries
Symbol
the 3D model except for the layout file.

Save As: Save the 3D model, and all associ-
ated files with another path name.
25
Export: Allows you to export various types Materials Definition: Export the set of
of information from your model. defined materials from the current plan
file. This creates a .dat file that can be
imported into other plan files.
Wall Layers: Export the set of multi-layer
wall definitions from one plan file so that
they may be imported into another.
Import: Allows you to import various types
of information into your model.
DXF Current: Exports a 2D DXF file of
the current Plan View.
DXF All: Exports a 2D DXF file which
includes all floors in Plan View. Items of
different types or on different floors are
given distinct layer names. DXF: Import a 2D DXF file as CAD data.
DXF 3D Model: Only available from a Bitmap File : Import a bitmap image
3D View. Exports the entire model as a into the Plan View, Layout View or
3D DXF. Cross Section/Elevation View.
DXF 2D View: Only available from a 3D Materials Definition: Import a previ-
View. Export the current view as a flat, ously created material definition file.
2D DXF. All 3D information is dis- Wall Layers: Import a file containing wall
carded, and only the visible lines are layer definitions from a different plan
exported. and merge them with the current plan’s
Export VRML: Only available from a wall layer definitions.
Perspective or Render View. Export the Layer Sets: Open a dialog that allows you
entire model in a special format which to import a defined Layer Set from
allows you to create real time Walk- another plan file.
throughs using a VRML plug-in or
import into other graphics programs. Send to Layout: Send the current view to
the open Layout file.
Bitmap File : Export a 3D Render
View as a bitmap file. Print : Open the Print dialog to print
your plan file or layout sheet, (Ctrl + P).
Metafile (WMF): Export a Windows
Metafile of the current view. Print Image : Print the 3D View as a bit-
Materials (TXT,CSV): Export a Material map. Used to print a Render View or a
List as a text file. Only available from a 3D View showing images, such as trees.
Material List. Printer Setup: Opens Print Setup dialog
which is used to specify the settings of
the default Windows printer.
26
Edit Menu
Change Units: Only available when no files Four Plan names: Reopen one of the last
Managing
are open. Change between imperial and four plans accessed when clicked. Only
metric units. available after opening a plan.
Files
Exit ( Alt + F4 ): Exit from Chief Architect.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu a single room, all rooms, or throughout a
contains the whole plan. For more see “Delete Items
options for Dialog” on page 701.
manipulating
Select Items : Activate the mode for
items. Many of
selecting items.
these editing
Menus
options also Open Item : Display the specification dia-
have a toolbar log for the current item selected.
button and/or a
Edit Layout : Available only in a layout
keyboard option
file. Edit Layout mode allows you to
(noted next to
edit any lines from any 3D View that was
the menu item)
sent to layout.
which do the
same thing. Edit Area: Allows you to select objects with
a marquee and then Move or Copy the
Undo ( Ctrl +Z): Allows multiple undos entire area by dragging it to a new loca-
of plan changes depending on your set- tion.
tings in the Preferences dialog.
Managing
Edit Area (All Floors): Group selection tool
Files
Redo ( Ctrl +Y): Redo the last Undo that allows you to Move or Copy an
selected. entire area from all floors.
Cut ( Ctrl +X): Delete the selected item, and Preferences: Define the global preferences
copies it to the clipboard so it may be for Chief Architect. Some of these set-
pasted elsewhere. tings are unique to individual plans.
Managing
Files
Copy ( Ctrl +C): Copy the selected item to the
clipboard so it may be pasted elsewhere.
The original item is left unchanged.
Paste ( Ctrl +V): Paste the last item cut or
copied.
Managing
Files
Delete ( Del ): Delete the selected item.

Delete Items: Opens a dialog which allows
you to delete items of a particular type in
27
Build Menu
The Build menu Curved Railings : Draw curved rail-
accesses the tools used ings.
to build the 3D model
in Chief Architect. Hatch Walls : Fill a wall with a hatch
Here you define and pattern.
select the items to Break Wall : Break a wall into two.
place into your plan. They remain connected until you move
Each arrowhead or delete one of them.
indicates a submenu
Fix Connections: Repair connections of
which offers more
walls whose ends are within a few
choices. Most Build
inches of each other but are not quite
menu items have a
connected.
corresponding button
on the toolbar. 2 Inch Walls - 12 inch walls: Select the
nominally sized walls if you are using a
Wall : Displays a submenu of options for system Default Wall type.
building walls.
Door : Display a submenu for creating dif-
ferent door types.
Door : Place a doorway or swinging

door into a wall.
Sliding Doors : Place a sliding door
Wall : Draw wall type defined in into a wall.
Default Wall Type dialog.
Pocket Doors : Place a pocket door into
Curved Walls : Draw curved walls. a wall.
Invisible Wall: Draw an Invisible wall Bifold Doors : Place a bifold door into a
used to define room areas. wall.
Railings : Draw railings defined in Garage Doors : Place a garage door
Default Railing dialog. into a wall.
28
Build Menu
Door Library : Display a selection of Build New Floor : Creates a new floor
Managing
special doors. in the 3D model.
Files
Doorway Library : Displays a selection Insert New Floor: Inserts new floor in
of special doorway systems. place of the current floor and move all
Door Schedule: Create a door schedule other floors up one level.
for one or all floors in the 3D model. Delete Current Floor: Deletes current
floor. The floor above moves down to
Window : Display a submenu for creating
take the place of the current floor. This
different window types.
option is grayed out when the first floor
is current.
Build Foundation: Create foundation
based on first floor plan.
Menus
Delete Foundation: Deletes current foun-
dation.
Window : Place a window defined by Rebuild Slabs: Rebuilds a monolithic slab
Window Defaults dialog. foundation based on the current first
floor footprint.
Bay Window : Place a bay window into
a wall. Roof: Opens submenu of roof modeling
tools.
Box Window : Place a box window into
a wall.
Bow Window : Place a bow window
into a wall.
Managing
Window Library : Display a selection
Files
of special windows.
Build Roof: Opens Build Roof dialog to
Window Schedule: Create a window specify settings for the automatic roof
schedule for one or all of the floors in generator.
the 3D model.
Managing
Floor: Opens a submenu for adding and Roof Plane : Allows you to manually
Files
deleting floors. place roof planes in Plan View.
Ceiling Plane: Allows you to manually
place ceiling planes in Plan View.
Truss Base: Allows you to define a truss
Managing
base on a roof plane.

Files
Gable/Roof Line : Allows you to draw

a Gable/Roof line in Plan View.
29
Skylight: Allows you to draw closed beams) for automatic framing to break
polyline within a roof plane that will be joists.
defined as a skylight
Joist Direction : Draw a line defining
Structure : Displays submenu with tools to joist direction for next time floor or ceil-
automatically build framing and other ing framing is automatically generated.
structural objects.
Beam: Draw a two line wall to represent a
beam in Plan View.
Round Pier: Place round piers under
foundation walls:
Square Pad: Place a square pad under
foundation walls.
Slab: Draw a slab at grade in Plan View
Slab with Footing: Draw a slab with
thickened footing in Plan View.
The following is a picture of the underside of
a slab and a slab with footing:
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceiling :
Updates 3D model with any recent
changes.
Build Framing : Display the dialog used
to automatically build framing. Also
used to define floor and ceiling platform Slab
thickness and framing spacing. Slab with Footing
Rafter : Manually draw a rafter. Corner Trim: Open a submenu to place
Corner Boards and Quoins on the cor-
Truss : Manually draw a truss. ners of walls.
Joist : Manually draw a ceiling or floor
joist. Type depends on the platform over
which it is drawn. Corner Boards: Click in Plan View to
Bearing Line : Draw a line defining place corner boards.
bearing areas (usually over walls and Quoins: Click in Plan View to place
Quoins at the corner of buildings.
30
Build Menu
Terrain: Opens a submenu related to the Stairs : Activate Stair mode. Drag to cre-
Managing
modeling of the site and terrain. ate an UP stair. Hold the Shift key and
Files
drag to create a DOWN stair.
Cabinet : Display a submenu for creating
different cabinets types.
Create Terrain Perimeter: Create a rect-

angular Terrain Perimeter.
Menus
Elevation Points: Allows you to place an Base Cabinet : Place a base cabinet
Elevation Point with information in Plan defined by Cabinet Default dialog.
View. Wall Cabinet : Place a wall cabinet
Elevation Lines: Allows you to draw a defined by Cabinet Default dialog.
line with elevation data in it.
Full Height : Place a full height or pan-
Elevation Splines: Allows you to draw a try cabinet defined by Cabinet Default
spline with elevation data in it. dialog.
Feature Lines: Allows you to draw a line Soffit : Place a soffit.
or series of lines to create a terrain fea-
ture. Shelf : Place a shelf used in a closet
Managing
Feature Splines: Allows you to draw a Partition : Place a vertical partition.
Files
spline to create a terrain feature.
Custom Counter Top: Create a counter
Build Terrain: Models the terrain based top with a rectangular polyline.
on the elevation data you have entered
with points, lines and splines. This cal- Cabinet Library : Insert a cabinet from
the Cabinet Module library.
Managing
culates terrain data such as contour lines
Files
and the 3D mesh. Cabinet Door Library : Insert a cabinet
Clear Terrain: Clears the plan of the 3D door style into an existing cabinet.
terrain data and the contour lines. To Fireplace : Create a masonry fireplace
restore information you must rebuild the that is free-standing or built into a wall.
terrain.
Managing
Terrain Properties: The Terrain Proper-

Files
ties dialog allows you to specify how the

program approximates the terrain and
draws the contour lines.
31
Electrical : Display a submenu for various Electrical Library : Display a selection

types of electrical symbols. of special electrical items.
Place Outlets : Automatically place
outlets in room.
Connect Electrical : Connect electrical
items into circuits.
Fixture Library : Opens the Library
Browser to the fixture library.
110V Outlet : Place 110V outlets.
Furniture Library : Opens the Library
220V Outlet : Place 220V outlets. Browser to the furniture library.
Light : Place default lights on walls or Image Library : Opens the Library
ceiling. Browser to the Image library to place the
Switch : Place switches. associated bitmap to be seen in 3D.
Options Menu
The Options menu Reverse Plan reverses all floors associ-
contains ated with the current floor. Reversing a
miscellaneous plan will cause the model to be rebuilt
items providing which will close any 3D View windows
various choices currently open.
such as what items Materials: Display a submenu of options
to display, defaults relating to materials and the Material
setup, etc. List.
Some of these may
be accessed by double-clicking a toolbar
button.
Show Items : This will open the Layers
dialog or the Show Items dialog depend-
ing on the view. These dialogs are used to
control the display of items in both 2D
and 3D Views. Define Materials : Define the cate-
Rotate View: Open the Rotate Plan View gory, 3D pattern, etc. for existing materi-
dialog to rotate the current Plan View. als, or create a new material.
Reverse Plan: Reverses your entire plan. Calculate from All Floors : Generate
The plan is reflected about a vertical line. a Material List for all the floors.
32
Options Menu
Calculate from Area: Draw a rectangle Window Defaults: Set or change default
Managing
around an area to generate a Material window type and size.
List for that area.
Files
Cabinet Defaults: Set or change default
Calculate from Room: Select the room, cabinet size, door style, etc.
then this menu option. Generates a Floor Defaults: Set or change default
Material List for the selected room. floor and ceiling height and other set-
Master List : View the current master tings for the current floor.
Material List. Modify the Master List by Framing Defaults: Set the member sizes
making changes to a Material List. for all framing items.
Manufacturers: Display information on Dimension Defaults: Set general parame-
available manufacturers. ters on how dimensions are produced
Components: Opens the Components and displayed, and which items a dimen-
sion will locate.
Menus
dialog for a selected item.
Defaults Setup: Change default settings for Material Defaults: Allows you to define
the current plan. materials to objects that do not have a
default setup.
Camera Defaults: Set or change default
camera height, movement, etc.
Reset to Defaults: Reset part or all the plan
to the original defaults for roof informa-
tion and floor and ceiling heights.
Color Off / Color On : Toggle the color
Managing
on or off. When turned off, 3D Views
appear as a line drawing. Best turned off
Files
for cross sections and elevations.
Plan Defaults: Set general parameters for
CAD Mode On/CAD Mode Off ( F2 ):
a plan including resizing fixtures and
furniture, and setting the nominal wall Toggle between Architectural mode and
thickness and allowed wall angles.
Managing
CAD mode.
Files
Foundation Defaults: Opens Founda-
tion Setup dialog.
Wall Defaults: Set or change default wall
type, or create new types.
Railing Defaults: Set or change default
Managing
railing type.
Files
Door Defaults: Set or change defaults for

interior and exterior doors.
33
3D Menu
The 3D menu controls most information Framing Overview : Create an iso-
related to the 3D Views. metric overview of an entire model dis-
playing only framing. Should only be
used after framing has been built.
Cross Section/Elevation : Cut a cross
section view anyplace in the model to
produce full model cross sections. A
cross section outside the model creates
full model elevations.
Wall Elevation : Create a single floor
elevation view of an interior wall.
View Angle : Adjust the view direction in
an Overview.
Create View : Choose between several dif- Remove 3D : Remove all 3D Views asso-
ferent 3D camera options ciated with the current plan.
Swap Views ( F7 ): This will toggle
between the plan and the most recently
created 3D View.
Show Layout : Toggle between plan and
layout page.
Render : Creates a Render View based
on the current Perspective View using
Full Camera : Create a Perspective the same camera settings.
View of all floors. Final View : Redraws a Render View
Floor Camera: Create a Perspective View with the Final View settings in the Pref-
of the current floor only. erences dialog.
Render Camera : Create Render View Add Lights: Click in Plan View to place
directly from the Plan View. point source light. Click and drag to cre-
ate a parallel light.
Full Overview : Create an isometric
overview of an entire model, including Adjust Lights : Allows you to adjust the
ceilings and roofs. render properties of the lights within the
room. (Only available in a Render
Floor Overview : Create an isometric View).
overview of the current floor, without
ceilings or roofs.
34
CAD Menu
Adjust Material Definition : Change a Stop Recording : Stop recording the
Managing
material definition by clicking on a sur- walkthrough movie.
Files
face. 3D Preferences: Change how 3D Views are
Show Walkthrough : Play back a previ- displayed. Selects which items to sup-
ously recorded walkthrough “movie”. press when generating a 3D View. Con-
trols display of inactive but saved
Record Walkthrough : Record a walk- cameras.
through “movie”.
CAD Menu
The CAD menu is Arc About Center : Activate Arc About
used to access the Center mode where arc is drawn around
Menus
CAD tools. Most of its center point.
these menu items are
accessible from the Rectangular Polyline : Draw a closed
CAD toolbar. Use the rectangular polyline.
CAD menu to Box : Activate Box mode. Drag to create a
quickly draw CAD box.
items while staying
in Architectural Oval : Activate Oval mode. Drag, select
mode. and adjust to draw ovals.
Select CAD Items Circle : Activate Circle mode. Drag to

: Activate CAD draw circles.
Managing
Select Items mode. Circle About Center : Activate Circle
Files
Click on a CAD item mode where the circle is drawn from the
to select, or hold center point.
down Shift key and drag a rectangle
around multiple CAD items to select as a Spline : Click in Plan View to draw a
Spline curve.
group. Hold Shift key and click individual
Managing
CAD items to add to or subtract from CAD Block Mgmt: Insert a CAD block
Files
selection set. from the list of all blocks in CAD Block
Management dialog. Allows deleting
Point : Click to place a CAD point. unused CAD blocks.
Line : Activate Line mode. Drag to create CAD Detail: Open CAD Detail dialog to
lines.
Managing
create new detail or open an existing

detail.
Files
Arc : Activate Arc mode. Drag along

desired curve to draw arcs.
35
Snap To: Snap current Special: Display a sub-

point or current item to menu of special CAD
specified location. utilities.
Point: Snap point to Sun Angle : Draw a
closest other point. Sun Angle arrow to
Item End: Snap point to nearest line/arc show shadow infor-
end or polyline corner. mation at specific place and time and
create a light source in a Render View.
Intersection: Snap point to nearest inter-
section of two lines. North Pointer : Create a North Pointer
Item: Snap point to nearest point on line, from which all bearings are determined.
arc, or other CAD item. Framing : Draw a framing member.
Line Midpoint: Snap point to midpoint of This CAD item will show in 3D Views
nearest line, arc, or item side. and in the Material List.
Delete Points : Delete all CAD points Cross Box : Activate Cross Box mode.
simultaneously. Press the Del key when Drag to create a resizable cross box.
no item is selected to delete the points Insulation : Activate Insulation mode.
one by one. Drag to create a resizable insulation
symbol.
Plan Footprint: Create a basic footprint
of the current plan from within a CAD
Detail window.
36
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Managing
Files
The Tools menu offers various tools for Text: Display a submenu of text tools.
dimensions, text, manipulating reference
floors and modifying toolbars.
Text : Place a text item on screen.

Callout : Place a Callout in Plan View.
Marker : Place a Marker in Plan View.
Arrow : Place a line with an arrowhead
in any view.
Menus
Plan Check: Plan Check is best used when
your floor plan is substantially complete.
It checks for some very basic code com-
pliance issues in the floor plan.
Reference Display On/Off : Superim-
Dimension: Display a
pose the plan of another floor over the
submenu of dimen-
current floor.
sion tools.
Swap Floor/Reference : Switch so that
Dimension : Draw the reference plan becomes the working
manual dimension lines locating items plan, and the working plan becomes the
Managing
as specified under Locate tab of the reference plan.
Files
Dimension Setup dialog.
Change Floor/Reference : Define which
End-to-End Dimension : Draw a is the working floor and which is the ref-
dimension only marking the two end erence floor.
points.
Customize Toolbars: Create new toolbars or
Managing
Interior Dimension : Draw only inte- modify existing ones.
Files
rior dimension lines, only locating inte-
rior surfaces of walls. Hide Toolbars/Show Toolbars( F5 ): Tog-
gle the display of the toolbar on or off.
Automatic Exterior Dimension : Auto-
matically generates exterior dimensions as Library Browser : Display the Library
defined in Dimension Setup dialog. Browser window to access all library
Managing
files.
Files
Add to Library: Use with a CAD polyline

to save it as a Custom Molding profile in
the molding library. Use it with a CAD
37
block to save it as part of the CAD Build House: Builds a 3D model of the
Block library. house based on the organization of
Delete From Library: Use to remove a Cus- Room Boxes that you defined. (Must be
tom Molding profile or CAD Block done for each floor of the building).
from the Library. Show Room Boxes: Turns on the display
House Wizard: Opens a submenu of tools of Room Boxes after they have been
used for the House Wizard feature. hidden. Room Boxes normally display
after they have been created by using the
House Wizard and then hidden after
using the Build House tool.
Hide Room Boxes: Turns off the display
Start House Wizard: Opens the House of Room Boxes after they have been cre-
Wizard dialog which leads you through ated by the House Wizard.
the steps to quickly lay out a floor plan.
Window Menu
The Window Zoom Out : Move back to display twice
menu defines which as much of your plan or view:
window is active
and how it displays. Undo Zoom : Undo the previous zoom.
Some of these Aerial View: Create a resizable aerial view
menu items are of the entire plan in the upper left corner.
common to other A Zoom within this window will adjust
Windows the view of the main plan for editing.
programs.
Tile( Shift + F6 ): A standard Windows option
which shows all open views simulta-
neously on the screen, adjusting the size
Refresh Display F5 : Redraws the cur-
of each view to fit the available space.
rent window. This cleans up extra lines,
missing items, and other random effects Cascade ( Shift + F5 ): A standard Windows
sometimes caused when making changes option which displays all the open views
to a model. If something appears to be in a row, each slightly offset from others.
drawn incorrectly or incompletely, Arrange All: A standard Windows option
refreshing the display will often correct which lines up the icons of the minimized
the problem. views in a row.
Fill Window ( F6 ): Show the entire plan in Names of open views: Lists the open views,
the current window. with a check next to the active view.
Click on any view in the list to make that
Zoom : Zoom in on the defined area. the active view.
38
Help Menu
Help Menu
Managing
Files
The Help menu About Chief Architect: Opens the About
is an extremely dialog that displays the registered
useful but owner’s name, the version number and
usually release date of the program.
underused
resource. Online
Help can be
obtained for
most topics
without resorting to other aids. The Help
menu also provides important customer
information.
Menus
Index: Display an outline of all the help
information. You can then reach any of
the help information from the appropriate
index item.
Contact information for ART is displayed
Basics: Display quick start information. on the More Info tab.
Current Mode( F1 ): Display information
specific to the current mode button.
The F1 function key accesses this same
information, but is more flexible since it
can access information specific to any
Managing
toolbar button or menu item above which
Files
the cursor is held. Most dialogs also have
a Help button which accesses informa-
tion related to their function.
Using Help: Displays information on how to
Managing
use the Help system.
Files
View Manual: Opens the Reference Guide
PDF directly with Acrobat Reader.
Visit Chief Web Site: Opens the Chief
Architect Web page in your default web
browser.
Managing
Files
De-install: Allows to disable the program so

that it can be loaded on another com-
puter.(This is not available if you have a
dongle).
39
40
Chapter 4:
Toolbars
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
General Information
Using the buttons on toolbars is the fastest When you are customizing toolbars, it is
way to access most of the functions in Chief often easiest to first place the system into the
Architect. Most of the functions of the appropriate mode so the toolbar you wish to
program can be accessed this way. change displays. Once you are in the proper
Chief Architect comes with 10 preset mode, choose Tools>Customize Toolbars
toolbars. You can customize all but the Edit and the Toolbar Customization dialog will
toolbars. In addition to customizing the display with the current mode selected.
default toolbars, you can create new ones for
Toolbars
each mode or view.
All of the default toolbars, except for the Edit
toolbars, can be customized or deleted by the
user. In addition to customizing the existing
toolbars, you can easily create your own
toolbars to increase your productivity. For
each mode or active view, there are many
buttons that can be added to existing or new
toolbars.
Some tool buttons have child toolbars that

are associated with them. Child toolbars
Managing
cannot be customized. The only way to
Files
access child toolbars is by having the
parent tool button on a toolbar. When the
parent tool is on a toolbar, the child
toolbar will open when the tool is activated
from the toolbar or its menu item. All child
toobars are displayed in this chapter with
Libraries
the tools associated with them.

Symbol
41
Customize Toolbars
Items Tab
4
1
2 5
Adding Tool Buttons 3 All child buttons related to the selected

parent button display here. You may
1 Drag a button from the Main buttons select a child button and add it to any toolbar.
for area and drop it into an existing
toolbar to add the button. In this example, the Base Cabinet tool
Drag a button from the Main buttons for was selected. In the Child Buttons area,
area and drop it away from an existing the Base Cabinet tool displays, along with
toolbar, outside of the dialog, to create a new the rest of the child buttons. You may add
toolbar. The selected button will be the first Soffits or Wall Cabinets to a toolbar
tool in the new toolbar. The new toolbar will without displaying any child buttons, but if
be named with the current mode followed by
you add the Base Cabinet tool to a
a number.
toolbar, you will display all the child buttons
2 Any button clicked in the Main but- whenever the Base Cabinet tool is
tons for area will display in the Child
activated.
Buttons area. If the button has child buttons
associated with it, they will display to the Modes - Select the mode for which
4
right. The parent tool button will appear as you want to add or customize an
the very first button in each child toolbar. existing toolbar. As you choose from the
42
Customize Toolbars
different window modes, the available tools Deleting Tools from Toolbars
Managing
will change, and the background window
You cannot delete a button from a toolbar
will also change appropriately.
Files
unless the Toolbar Customization dialog is
5 Drag the Information Window into displayed.
any toolbar to have the information
To delete a tool button, drag it out of the
window display in the toolbar.
toolbar while holding down the left mouse
button. Release the mouse button and the
Managing
tool will no longer be in that toolbar.
Files
Toolbar Tab
1 2
3
4
Toolbars
5
6
7
1 A list of all existing toolbars for the 5 Click Reset Toolbars to restore all
given mode is displayed in this area. the toolbars to their original
Select any toolbar by clicking on its name. configuration. This will restore the toolbars
When selected, applicable buttons will that are set in the backup file Custtb.bak.
become activated or deactivated along the
right side of this dialog. Warning: Clicking on the Reset Toolbars
button will delete any toolbar
Managing
2 The mode or window type being customization you have done.
affected is displayed, and may be
Files
changed by selecting another from the list. Display Tool Tips select the check
6
box to have the tool tips pop up when
3 If a selected toolbar is currently you move the cursor above the buttons and
deactivated, the Activate button will
become available. Click Activate to have menu items.
Managing
the selected toolbar become activated again. Lock Toobars - Select the check box
7
Files
and the program will not write changes

4 Click Delete to remove a selected to the custtb.dat file.
toolbar from the list. Once deleted, that
toolbar will no longer be available.
43
Restoring Toolbars Custtb.bak is the file that is used to

remember default settings for the toolbars.
There are three files installed by Chief
When you click the Reset Toolbars
Architect that affect the way toolbars appear,
button in the Toolbar Customization dialog,
toolbar.dat, custtb.dat and custtb.bak.
the program copies this file and saves it as
Toolbar.dat is a Chief Architect program custtb.dat. If you have made changes, and
file, you should not remove it or change it. you prefer them over the installation
Custtb.dat is written by the program any toolbars, create a copy of you custtb.dat file
time you close out of the program. It saves and save it as custtb.bak. The next time you
any changes you made to the layout of your click Reset Toolbars, you will return to
toolbars. your original settings.
Toolbar Buttons
Chief Architect ships with sample toolbars Every toolbar, excepth the Edit toolbars, my
for each possible mode. The toolbar modes, be customized by adding, removing or
(Plan, Elevation, Overview, Perspective, repositioning the buttons. Following is a
Material, CAD, Layout, and Render), are comprehensive list of the toolbar buttons
listed in the Toolbar Customization dialog. available in the program. To see which
These toolbars are made up of the most buttons are availble in which modes select
commonly used toolbar buttons that are Tools> Customize Toolbars and view the
available. choices for each mode.
General Toolbar Buttons

Select Items - Select items for edit- eral Library Browser window, with-
ing. out opening any specific library.
Undo - Allows multiple undos of Floor Down - Moves the current

plan changes depending on your floor one floor down.
settings in the Preferences dialog.
Change Floor/Reference - Opens
Redo - Reverses the last Undo com- the Work/Reference Plan dialog.
mand.
Floor Up to moves the current floor
Show Items - Opens the Layers one floor up.
dialog.
Color On/Off - Toggles on or off
CAD Mode Toggle - Toggles the color display for the current
between CAD mode and View
Architectural mode.
Save - Saves all files related to the
Library Browser - Opens the gen- current floor.
44
Toolbar Buttons
Dimension Tools Automatic Exterior Dimension -
Managing
Automatically dimensions the exte-
rior of the plan based on your
Files
settings in the Dimension Setup
When a Dimension tool is active, you can dialog.
drag a line to create dimensions. The
dimension tools will remain active until Text Tools
another tool is selected.
Managing
Files
Dimension - Draws a dimension
line. (Double-click to access the After clicking one of the text buttons you
Dimension Setup dialog). must click in the current view to place the
End-to-End Dimension - Draws a item.
dimension between the item on Text - Adds text to the current
which you originally clicked to the View.
item to which you dragged.
Callouts - Places a Callout.
Interior Dimension - Draws
dimensions from wall surface to Markers - Places a Marker.
wall surface of all rooms when a
Toolbars
dimension line is drawn.
Architectural Toolbar Buttons
Wall & Railing Tools Curved Railing - Draws curved

railings.
Hatch Wall - Fills the entire length
When a wall tool is selected, click and drag of the wall with cross hatching.
in Plan View to place a wall. The wall tool
Break Wall - Breaks a longer wall
will remain active until another tool is
into two or more sections.
selected.
Managing
Alter Default Wall - Changes the
Files
Wall - Draws walls. (Double-click
width of the Default (wood
to define the default wall type or to
frame 16"OC) wall type.
create a new wall type).
Railing - Draws railings. (Double-

Managing
click the Railing button to define

the current railing type).
Files
Curved Wall - Draws curved walls.
45
Door Tools Box Window - Places a box win-

dow which is edited the same as a
bay window.
When a door button has been selected, click Bow Window - Places a 5-sided
on a wall in Plan View to place the specified bow window.
door type in that wall. The door tool will
remain active until another tool is selected. Windows Library - Opens the
Window library which contains
Door - Places a default door. (Dou- window types such as octagonal
ble-click to open the Door Defaults windows, Palladian windows, etc.
dialog).
Cabinet & Soffit Tools
Sliding door - Places a sliding door.
Pocket door - Places a pocket door.
Bi-fold door - Places a bi-fold door. When a cabinet tool has been selected click
in Plan View to place the specified cabinet.
Garage door - Places a garage Cabinet tools will remain active until another
door. tool is selected.
Doorways Library - Opens the Base Cabinet - Places base cabi-
Doorways Library. nets. (Double-click to access the
Cabinet Defaults dialog).
Window Tools
Wall Cabinet -Places wall cabinets.
Full Height - Places full height cab-

When a window button has been selected, inets.
click on a wall in Plan View to place the Soffits - Places soffits.
specified window type in that wall. The
window tool will remain active until another Shelf - Places a shelf based on your
tool is selected. default settings.
Window - Places the default win- Partition - Places a vertical parti-
dow. (Double-click the Window tion based on your default settings.
button to access the Window
Defaults dialog). Stairs - Draws a Stairway from the
lower floor up to the upper floor.
Bay Window - Places a small bay (Hold the Shift key down and drag
into the wall. to draw the stair from the upper
floor down).
46
Toolbar Buttons
Electrical Tools Bearing Line - Draws a line or
Managing
lines along the walls or beams
which are bearing walls.
Files
Joist Direction - Draws a line
Outlet - Places a 110V duplex wall
inside a platform defining the
outlet.
desired joist direction.
Light - Places a wall light or ceiling
Managing
light. 3D Tools
Files
Switch - Places a wall switch.
Connect - Draws connections

between electrical items. Full Camera - Generates a Per-
spective View of the complete
Place Outlets - Automatically lays structure, including floors, ceilings,
out outlets in a room. and roofs from either the interior or
exterior.
Electrical Symbols Library -
Opens the library of various electri- Cross Section/Elevation - Gener-
cal symbols. ates a section through the complete
Toolbars
multi-story model.
Roof & Framing Tools
Full Overview - Generates an
axonometric view of the entire
multi-story structure, including the
roof.
Roof Plane - Draws individual roof
planes. (Double-click to access the Wall Elevation - Generates an inte-
Build Roof dialog). rior wall elevation for a single room
of a single floor.
Gable/Roof Line - Draws a Gable/
Roof line that defines a partial wall Floor Overview - Generates an
section of a wall to generate a gable axonometric View of the current
Managing
using the automatic roof generator. floor.
Files
Joist - Draws a floor framing mem- Framing View - Generates an
ber or a ceiling framing member. axonometric view of the entire
(Double-click the Joist button to multi-story structure displaying
bring up the Framing dialog). only framing. Framing must already
Managing
be built.
Rafter - Draws a rafter.
Files
Render Camera - Generates a Ren-

Truss - Draws a truss between
der View.
existing roofs and ceilings.
47
Other Architectural Tools to the Furniture Library.
Back clip - Controls the depth of Calculate All Floors - Generates a

view of a Section/Elevation View. Material List for all floors.
Refresh Display - Refreshes the Master List - Opens the Master

screen. (F5 may also be used). Material List.
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings - 220 Volt Outlet - Places 220 volt

Rebuilds the 3D model, updating outlets.
any changes.
Remove 3D - Removes all 3D
Build New Floor - Adds a new Views of the model.
floor to the model, creating a new
Fireplace - Places masonry fire-
.pln file.
places.
Tree - Opens Library Browser to
Add to Library - Adds a CAD
the Tree Image Library.
block or molding profile to the
Fixture - Opens Library Browser to Library.
the Fixture Library.
Delete All Roofs - Deletes all roof
Furniture - Opens Library Browser planes.
CAD Toolbar Buttons
Line (Double-click to draw an arc from

the current point to a keyboard-
specified location).
Arc about center - Draws an arc

Line - Draws CAD lines. (Double- around the current (red) point.
click to draw a line from the current
point to a keyboard-specified loca- Spline - Drag from end to end to
tion). draw a smooth curve passing
through the points.
Arrow - Places a line with an arrow
head at the end.
Box
North Pointer- Places a North
arrow that defines the direction of
true North.
Box - Draws a resizable box.
Sun Angle - Places a Sun Angle.
Framing - Draws a 1-1/2” (38 mm)
Arc - Draw an arc by dragging. wide box. Use for general framing.
48
Edit Toolbar Buttons
Cross Box - Draws resizable box Edit Polyline Parts - Toggles the
Managing
containing a cross. Use for cross- ability to edit individual compo-
section details. nents of polylines.
Files
Insulation - Draws a resizable insu- Restrict Angles/Unrestricted
lation symbol. Use for cross section Angles - Toggles between restricted
details. angles and unrestricted angles.
Managing
Rectangular Polyline - Draws a CAD Mode Toggle - Toggle back
Files
rectangular closed polyline. and forth between Architectural
mode and CAD mode.
Circle
Show Items display the Layers dia-
log.
Layer Down - Moves one CAD
Circle - Draws circle by dragging Layer down.
across diameter.
Current Layer - Opens the Go To
Circle about center - Draws circle CAD Layer dialog.
by dragging from its center out
Layer Up - Moves one CAD Layer
Toolbars
along its radius.
up.
Oval - Draws a circle which can be
resized to an oval. Auto Snap On/Off - Toggles the
auto snap feature on and off.
Point - Places a point. (Double-
click to place a point at a specified Delete Points - Deletes all CAD
distance from the current point). points.

Architectural Edit Toolbar Buttons
Managing
Files
The Edit buttons display only when an item Open Item - Displays the specifica-
or a group of items are selected. Different tion dialog directly related to the
buttons will be available in different item(s) selected.
situations. The CAD tools are discussed in
detail later in the CAD chapter. Some of the Next - Selects next item in the
selection area.
Managing
CAD tools have a compliment tool in the

Files
Architectural mode, and others are Fix Wall Connections - Fixes all
implemented very similar to Architectural unattached wall sections.
tools.
Join Roof Planes - Joins two roof
49
planes. Components - Opens an object’s

Component dialog.
Move to be Coplanar - Move the
selected roof plane to be coplanar Center Item - Centers objects on
(in the same plane) with the next walls.
selected roof plane. The results can
Gable over Window - Places roof/
be easily seen in a section view.
gable line over door or window.
Create Muntins - Turns CAD
Starter Tread - Rounds one of the
block drawn over window or door
bottom two treads of a staircase.
into a custom muntin design.
Flare/Curve Stair - Allows you to
Explode Muntins - Explodes
flare the sides of the selected stair-
muntins into CAD lines and objects
case.
for editing.
CAD Edit Toolbar Buttons

Open Item - Displays the specifica- Point-to-Point Move - Moves
tion dialog directly related to the selected items from start point then
item(s) selected. the end point of the move. You may
also drag from the start point to the
Next - Selects next item in the
end point of the move.
selection area.
Fillet - Creates a rounded fillet of
Copy - Creates a single copy of the
specified size between two lines or
selected item(s). (Double-click to
polylines. (Double-click to set the
make multiple copies).
fillet radius).
Delete - Deletes the selected
Chamfer - Creates a straight bevel
item(s).
of specified size between them.
Make Parallel - Aligns the (Double-click to set the chamfer
selected line or polyline edge with size).
another item (such as a wall or line).
Fence - Selects all items intersect-
Break - Adds a joint-type break to ing a line or polyline.
a line. (Double-click and then click
Extend - Extends CAD items to
on the selected item to completely
boundary. This may be used with
sever the line).
the Fence tool as well.
Block - Links group selected items
into a single unit, or block. Trim - Trims selected CAD items.
This may be used with the Fence
Explode Block - Explodes the
tool as well.
selected block into its individual
parts. Make Tangent - Makes the arc tan-
50
gent to the attached lines/arcs. they are copied to another floor.
Managing
Click first then copy.
Line to Arc - Turns the line into an
Files
arc or the arc into a line. Lock Control Handle Angle -
Locks or unlocks the control han-
Multiple Copy - Creates multiple dles for editing splines.
copies at specified intervals. (Dou-
ble-click to set copy interval.) Straighten Spline Segment -
Managing
Straightens a segment of the spline
Move to Framing Reference -
Files
between two points.
Moves framing members to Fram-
ing Reference marker. Convert Spline to Polyline -
Change the pline into a polyline
Insert Bitmap - Inserts a bitmap made up of straight lines.
into the view.
Polyline Subtract - Subtracts one
Open Wall Detail - Opens a fram- polyline from another to create a
ing detail when you select a wall. new polyline.
Framing must be built.
Polyline Intersection - Creates a
Lock Centers - Locks the centers new polyline around the area in
of Arcs.
Toolbars
common between two polylines.
Reflect About Line - Reflects the Polyline Union - Creates a new
selection set about a selected line. polyline using the entire area of
Hold Position - Copies the selected overlapping polyines.
items directly above or below when
Utility Toolbar Buttons
Not every button displayed above is always Zoom Out - Shrinks everything to
Managing
accessible. The normal zoom tools in the first half size, so twice as much of the
Files
section are always available, but the various plan shows on screen.
view toggles in the second section will only
appear under certain circumstances. Fill Window - Places all the visible
items on the screen.
Zoom - Zooms closer to a specified
Reference Toggle - Turns on and
Managing
area.
off the display of the Reference
Files
Zoom Previous - Reverses the last Plan.

zoom.
Swap Work-Ref - Switches the sta-
51
tus of the Working and Reference Layout Toggle - Toggles to the

floors. open layout page.
Swap Views - Toggles between the Plan Toggle - Toggles to the associ-
plan and the last 3D View opened. ated plan without closing the CAD
Detail window.
3D Toolbar Buttons
Depending on the type of camera used to the same line of sight.
generate the 3D View, different toolbar
options will be available. Move Left - Takes the camera one
step to the left while maintaining
Adjust Material Definition - the same line of sight.
Opens the Define Material dialog
for a particular material. Move Right - Takes the camera one
step to the right while maintaining
View Angle - Adjusts the angle of the same line of sight.
an Overview of the 3D model.
Raise Height -Raises the camera
CAD Mode Toggle - Toggles vertically in space while maintain-
between CAD mode and ing the same line of sight.
Architectural mode.
Lower Height - Lowers the camera
Show Items - Opens the Show vertically in space while maintain-
Items or Layers dialog for the cur- ing the same line of sight.
rent View.
Turn Left - Turns the camera
Delete Surface - Deletes surfaces toward the left while staying in the
from the 3D View. Once surfaces same location.
are deleted, click the button again to
restore them. Turn Right - Turns the camera
toward the right while staying in the
Color On/Off - Toggles on or off same location.
the color display for the current
View Tilt Upward - Tilts the camera
upward while keeping it in the same
location.
Camera Movement Tools
Tilt Downward - Tilts the camera
Move Forward - Takes the camera
downward while keeping it in the
one step forward while maintaining
same location.
the same line of sight.
Rotate Camera Down - Rotates
Move Back - Takes the camera one
camera down around its focal point.
step backward while maintaining
52
Rotate Camera up - Rotates the Available Render Tools
Managing
camera up around its focal point.
Adjust Lights - Opens the Adjust
Files
Rotate Camera right - Rotates the Lights dialog.
camera to the right around its focal
point. Sun Toggle On/Off - Toggles the
sun light on or off.
Rotate Camera Left - Rotates the
Managing
camera to the left around its focal Final View - Renders view based
Files
point. on the Final View settings.
Move Camera In - Moves the posi- Save as Bitmap - Saves current

tion of the camera closer to the focal View as a Windows Bitmap,
point along the line of sight. (.bmp), file.
Move Camera Out - Moves the Print Image - Prints the current
position of the camera away from screen.
the focal point along the line of
Record- Starts recording camera
sight.
moves into a walkthrough file.
Define Materials - Opens the
Record Stop - Stops recording new
Toolbars
Define Material dialog.
screens for the walkthrough file.
Color On/Off - Toggle on or off the
Play - Plays back a walkthrough
color display for the current View.
file.
Render View - Renders the current
Texture Painter - Allows you to
Perspective View.
apply a Texture file to a material
from the Render View.
Layout Tools
Managing
Edit Layout - Select and modify Page Down - Moves the current
Files
any line from any 3D View which page in the layout file down one.
has been sent to layout other than
CAD items. Current Page - Indicates the layout
sheet number which is currently
Rescale Layout - Rescales the active. Click to open the Go To
Managing
view. This appears when a layout Layout Page dialog.

Files
picture containing a Plan View,

CAD Detail, or Wall Elevation, or Page Up - Moves the current page
Section/Elevation view is selected. in the layout file up one.
53
54
Chapter 5:
File Management
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
General Overview
When you open Chief Architect a new first The 3D model is generated from a collection
floor plan is created. The first floor plan file of files with each floor being stored in a dif-
is part of the 3D model. A new model may be ferent plan file. As with all computer files,
Managing
created at any time by selecting File> New. backups should be created often.
Files
If you want to open an existing model select All commands relating to opening, saving
File> Open. Once changes are made, the and closing plans are located in the File
entire model can be saved to disk by select- menu.
ing File> Save.
Create a new model.

Open an existing model.
Create a new layout file.
Management
Open an existing layout file.
Managing
Close current view or window.
Files
File
Close all views or windows.
Save current model and all related files.
Save model with a different name.
Exit Chief Architect.

Last 4 plans accessed. Click name to open. Libraries
Symbol
55
Creating a New Model

A new, blank model is created whenever The first floor plan files of new models are
Chief Architect starts. The first floor plan file created as a copy of the profile.pl1 plan file
is called Untitled.pl1. Unless the model is in the Chief Architect installation directory.
named and saved, it will be lost when you Commonly used settings are included in the
exit Chief Architect. A new model may be profile.pl1 plan file. You should open this file
created at any time by choosing File> New. and change the settings to fit your style of
work For more information see “Creating
Your Own profile.pl1” on page 146.
Saving the Model

The first time you save a model, you will be directory of your installation folder. You can
prompted to give it a name. Once you under- define your own directory to save plan files
stand the file management of Chief Architect in if you prefer.
you should decide upon a naming convention It is a good idea to keep plans separate from
that suits your needs. the support files needed to run Chief Archi-
Choose File>Save to bring up the Save Plan tect. Chief Architect creates and saves many
File dialog. files for each 3D model. To keep files orga-
In the File name text box, type in a name nized, it may be easier if you create a new
for the plan. Chief Architect will automati- folder for each project that you start.
cally attach .pl1 to define this file as the first Click the Save button after the plan is
floor of your model. It may be the only floor, named.
or it may be one of many.
Every model in Chief Architect must have a
first floor, .pl1 file, associated with it. If a
.pl1 file gets deleted from your computer,
important information may be lost.
Note the location where the plan is to be
stored. Unless directed otherwise, the pro-
gram will place plan files in the Plans sub-
Save & Save As

There are two options for saving models; File>Save should be used for saving your
File> Save (Ctrl + S) and File> Save As. work. When you select File> Save, the pro-
gram saves all plan, .pln, (’n’ represents the
56
Opening an Existing Model
floor number) files and CAD (.can) files File> Save As will save all the floors and
Managing
associated with the current model in the same any other files needed for that specific model
directory as the .pl1 file. in the correct directory with the new name.
Files
Any saved Section/Elevation Views and This is the best way to create backups or your
CAD Details associated with the 3D model models.
are also saved with this command. Although the program will warn you if you
File>Save As is used whenever a copy of the try to exit without saving, you should proac-
Managing
work needs to be created. Use File> Save As tively save plan files before exiting the pro-
Files
when a model is to be copied with a new gram.
name in order to create an identical backup,
or when a model needs to be copied to disk in
order to transfer it or store it.
Managing
Files
Opening an Existing Model
Select File>Open to open an existing model, The main window will display all available
layout file or backup plan file. The program files of the requested type.
will automatically browse to the last used
directory.
Chief Architect assumes you want to open
the first floor plan file of the model, and will
show all the available first floor plans located
in the current directory. To open files of a dif-
Management
ferent type, select one from the Files of
type list.
File
To open a Layout file, use File> Open Lay-
out and the program will automatically
browse for .la1 files.
Plan files which were created in an earlier
Managing
version of Chief Architect or in 3D Home

Architect® can be read and modified by
Files
Chief Architect. Once a file is saved by a

later version of the program it cannot be read
by earlier versions.
57
It is recommended that you make a copy of Once any floor of the 3D model is opened,
earlier plans in a new directory before you any other floor of that same model is avail-
begin using a later version of the program. able by using the Change Floor but-
In the Open Plan File dialog, the path to the tons in the toolbar.
directory structure is noted as you change To display the same model but a different
current directories. floor in a new window, use File> Open to
The available files of the type specified will open the same plan again using a different
show on the left. Click any available file, and .pln file than the current floor.
it will show in the File name box. Click Press F6 to tile the two windows. You can
OK to open it. work in either window. As you make
changes, the view in both windows will
update.
The names of the last four plan files you have
opened or saved appear at the bottom of the
File menu. Clicking on these will open the
file, without having to use the Open Plan
File dialog.
Closing Plans and Views

A maximum of 10 Chief Architect windows immediately close the window without sav-
or files can be open at the same time. The ing. Select Cancel if you decide not to close
more windows open, the fewer computer the file at that time.
resources will be available for working. It is
best to minimize the number of windows There is an button in the upper right cor-
open at one time. ner of every window. Click this to close the
Choose File>Close to close the active win- window as well. The in line with the Chief
dow, whether it is a plan, a camera view, a Architect title bar will exit the program, and
CAD Detail window, a layout sheet, or any the below it is for the individual window
other possible window. Select File> Save within the program.
(Ctrl + S) if necessary before closing. If you Choose File>Close All to close all open win-
did not save first, the program will remind dows. If different window types are open for
you to save before it is closed. Select Yes to a given model, all but a plan window are
have the program save it. Choose No to immediately closed. If the model has been
58
Exiting Chief Architect
modified, you may be asked if you want to
Managing
save it before closing. This is done for each
model and view that was opened.
Files
Exiting Chief Architect
Choose File>Exit to exit the program. If you When you exit from the program using File>
Managing
have not saved any open models, you will be Exit, all Autosave files, and Undo files are
Files
prompted to do so. It is better to actively save deleted.
your work before exiting the program than to
save on exit.
Managing
Autosave Files
Files
Chief Architect creates Autosave files for Even with Autosave active, you should man-
all files that you open, once you have worked ually save your work by selecting File>
past the Autosave time. The frequency of Save, or Ctrl+S.
Autosave is set on the General tab of the In the event that your computer shuts down,
Preferences dialog. To use the Autosave fea- you can recover your most recent work by
ture, make sure that Autosave is checked opening the most recent Autosave files cre-
and that a value greater than zero is defined ated by the program.
in the number of minutes.
When you reopen Chief Architect after a
If the file has not been saved, the Autosave computer or system crash, a dialog similar to
Management
files will be named autosave#.pa1, the following will display:
autosave#.pa2, etc., where the # symbol rep-
File
resents the sequence of unsaved files.
Once you save a file and give it a name, the
program will reference the file name in the
Autosave file name. Autosave files will have
an extension of .pan (where ’n’ is the floor
number).
All plans with recent Autosave files will dis-
In addition, numbers will be appended to the play and will be checked. The plans with
file name to guarantee unique names for the checkmarks next to them will be opened
Autosave files. For a file called Johnson.pl1, when you click OK. When you open an
the autosave file may be named Autosave file, the file name will be Unti-
Managing
Johnson900_0.pa1. If you opened the tled.pl1. You must select File>Save and
Files
Johnson file again or opened a file named save the file with its original name before
Johnson.pl1 from a different directory, the continuing your work.
autosave file would be named
Johnson900_1.pa1
59
If you do not want to open the Autosave file, be prompted to open the Autosave file again.
click Cancel, or remove the check box next This dialog will only display the first time
to the file name and click OK. You will not the program starts after an abnormal exit.
General Panel
The Chief Architect Temporary Direc- autosave files will not be deleted. They will
tory is specified on the General panel of the be available immediately after restarting
Preferences dialog. Both the files required Chief Architect.
for multiple undos and the Autosave files are Backup copies which you create will not be
saved in this directory. You must define a overwritten by the program unless you cause
directory on a hard drive with sufficient them to be. A backup copy which the pro-
space to hold these files. gram creates is automatically overwritten by
the program.
The space required for temporary files is
about (N + 1) multiplied by the size on In addition to your plan files, back up the
disk of all the plans you have open at the custtb.dat (customized toolbar), mmaster.mat
same time. ’N’ is the number of Undo (master materials list) and profile.pl1 (master
levels you have set on the General panel plan file) or the profilem.pl1 (metric master
of the Preferences dialog. plan). You can access these files and back
them up using Windows Explorer.
If you exit normally from Chief Architect, Never store your files in the Temporary
any current Autosave and Undo files are Directory. They may get deleted.
deleted. If you exit abnormally, such as with
a system crash or a power failure, the
60
Backup Files
Backup Files
Managing
Files
Every time a model is saved, backup files are this has happened and you need to open a
created by renaming the existing plan files backup file of you model, select File> Open
using ’b’ as the second letter of the file and choose Backup Files (*.PBn) from
extension. The model is then saved in new the File Open dialog. Browse to the direc-
plan files. Any existing files are deleted. This tory where your plan files are saved and
Managing
allows you the ability to recover your data in select the correct backup file to open.
Files
the event of a power failure during a save. If
Transferring a Plan
Managing
The simplest way to transfer a model to disk, automatically copy the files which are dis-
or another directory, is to open the plan in played on the layout. All referenced plans
Files
Chief Architect and select File> Save As, need to be actively saved or copied into the
changing the directory or drive location as new location. Saving a .pln file will update
necessary. The program will make sure that and save any associated layout files, .la1.
all necessary files are saved along with the Individual files can also be copied or trans-
copy. This is a good way to create backups of ferred using Windows Explorer. If Windows
your work. Explorer is used to transfer files, be sure to
This does not work when saving Layout check the copied plans to verify that all nec-
files, (.la1). If a layout file is copied in Win- essary files were copied. Be sure to open the
dows Explorer, the layout and any models copy and look for any error messages about
Management
linked to the layout must be copied into the missing files.
same directory. Copying a layout file will not
File
File Types
The following file types are produced by • .pan: Autosave file for floor “n.” Stored
Chief Architect. These files may be opened, in the temporary directory.
copied, deleted, or modified by the user. • .pbn: Plan backup file for floor “n”.
• .pln: Plan file. “n” is the floor number • .tan: Used to store CAD items when
from “0” to “9” with “A” for 10 and “B” you save a Layout sheet.
for the attic above the 10th floor.
• .tmn: Temporary plan file produced by
• .can: CAD file for floor “n.”
Managing
Undo. Sometimes you can recover this

• .la1: Layout file. file if your plan file is lost or damaged.
Files
• .mat: Material List information. • .wmf: Windows Metafile.
61
• .dxf: Drawing Exchange File. Used for • .csv: Tab delimited file for exporting a
export to CAD programs. Chief Archi- Material List.
tect produces both 2D and 3D • .wrl: VRML file exported from 3D
(3DFACE) DXF files. Views. A VRML 3D model that can be
• .wlk: File produced by Record Walk- viewed with available VRML viewing
through feature. programs.
• .txt: Tab delimited file for exporting a • .dat: Data files that can contain wall
Material List. layer definitions or material definitions.
Files Required by Chief Architect

These file types are necessary to the proper • .l3a, .l3f, .l3s, .l3c: Fixture, furniture,
functioning of the program and should not be electrical and cabinet door 3D item
deleted or changed unless specifically libraries.
instructed to do so by Chief Architect Tech- • .plb: Old Fixture, furniture and symbol
nical Support personnel. libraries, for compatibility with
• .exe: System run file. version 1.2 files.
• .dll: Dynamic Link Libraries (program • .int: Chief Architect error messages.
files). • .hlp: Files used by the Help system.
• .lba, .lbf, .lbs: Fixture, furniture and • .dat: Data files for materials and tool-
symbol libraries. (Old format needed for bars. (custtb.dat is modified by Chief
compatibility with plans written by pre- Architect).
vious systems.)
All .exe, .dll, .int and .hlp files must
• .l2x: Library file, 2D portion, where “x” remain in the same installation directory. The
is a letter indicating library type. .lba, .lbf, .lbs, .l3a, .l3f, .l3s, .l3c, .plb
must remain in the Library subdirectory.
62
Chapter 6:
Preferences &
Managing
Files
3D Preferences
Managing
Files
Edit Preferences
Managing
Files
Choose Edit>Preferences to access the click the “+” to expand the tree so the subcat-
Preferences dialog. In this dialog, you can egories become visible.
define settings which are global to the Chief
Architect application, rather than specific to
a particular plan. The Preferences dialog
Managing
consists of a number of panels. Each panel is
Files
accessed by clicking on its name in the cate-
gory tree along the left side.
The Category tree structure on the left side of
the dialog is similar to other Windows pro-
grams. The main category may have subcate- The “+” then becomes a “-”, and all the sub-
gories to choose from as well. If there is a categories display. To collapse the tree, press
small “+” next to a category, the “-”.
Most of the pages in the Preferences

dialog are global. The CAD panel of the
Preferences
Preferences dialog affects the current
Managing
session of the program only.
Files
63
Appearance
2
4
1 Click Appearance to display the 3 Contextual Menus allow you to

panel for general display settings. access a pop-up menu when you right-
Show Status Bar - Choose one of click in the program. If you right-click on an
2 item, the Contextual pop-up menu displays
the options to specify where and when
the status bar displays. options appropriate to the item. If you right-
click in the window away from any item, a
Always - Displays the status bar at the bot- different menu selection displays. Since
tom of the program, below the scroll bar. The Chief Architect can use the right-click as a
online help appears there when you move general select, you have the option to disable
above a tool or menu item. Always is the or limit the contextual menus.
default and is used by most people.
Enabled - Select the check box to activate
contextual menus. Clear the check box to
disable contextual menus.
Only as needed causes the information to Click twice to display is used in order to
pop-up below the scroll bar whenever you require two right-clicks on an item before the
move above a tool or menu item, but other- contextual menu displays. This allows the
wise will not display. first right-click to be a general select without
having to use the contextual menu. A double
right-click is required to display the contex-
In Title Bar displays the online help in the tual menus.
title bar whenever you move above a tool or
menu item. All the options available in the Edit toolbar
are usually available in the contextual
menu. If you are used to using toolbars,
contextual menus may be more of a
hindrance and you may wish to keep them
disabled.
64
Colors
The following example shows a selected

4 Check Show Line Weight to have
Managing
cabinet with both the Edit toolbar and the the line weight display on screen.
contextual menu displayed. Note that the Because of the monitor’s resolution, the lines
Files
options correspond. may appear on screen to be much wider than
they will print. Zooming closer reflects a
more accurate idea of the actual line width.
The line weight for CAD items may be
Managing
defined individually through the Edit CAD
Files
Item dialog or globally in the Layers dialog.
Colors
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
3
Files
4
1 Click Colors to display the panel that

defines the background and reference
color in Chief Architect.
Background Color - Click the rect-
2
angle to open the standard Windows
Color dialog. Use the dialog to choose the
desired background color for the program.
Preferences
Reference Plan Color - Select a
3
color from the list. The Reference Plan
Color is the color of the lines that the Refer-
ence floor displays in.
Move Color - Select a color from the
4
list. The Move Color is the color of the
lines that represent the object(s) that are cur-
rently being moved.
65
Font
2
1
1 Click Font to display the panel for the the computer and makes those fonts available
font settings in Chief Architect. Fonts for use. Select the desired Font and Font
are set by computer not by plan file. If you style then click OK.
work in an office with more than one license
of the program you may want all of your font
settings to be consistent.
2 Choose Text, Dimension, Materials or

Toolbar to define its font.
Text sets the default font for all text items.
Dimension sets the fonts for all dimen-
sions.
Materials sets the default font for the Mate-
rial List and the Master Material List.
Toolbar sets the font used in the toolbar.
3 Click Change Font to select a new 4 A sample sentence shows how the
font for the specified type of item. The selected font appears.
program finds the currently installed fonts on The reference size of 10 is used for all fonts.
You can set the size of Text items individu-
ally in the Text dialog or globally on the Text
Items panel of the Preferences dialog.
66
Library Browser
Library Browser
Managing
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
3
The settings on the Library Browser panel Hide Preview Pane - Select the
2
control the display of the browser window. check box to hide the pane that shows a
Hide Selection Pane - Select the preview the selected library item.
Managing
1
check box to hide the pane that displays View Panes on Bottom select the
Files
3
possible selections. check box to arrange the Library Tree,
the Selection pane and the Preview pane ver-
tically.
Text Items
Managing
Files
1
2
3
4
Preferences
5
6
7
The settings on the Text Items panel are Attributes - The settings in this section
local settings only. They affect only the sub- affect Text Items.
sequently created text items in the current
plan.
67
Character Height - Sets the height

1 5 Define the default arrow style.
of new text in scaled inches. You need Type - Select an arrowhead style from
to consider your plotting scale when setting the list.
this value in the model.
Fill Color - If the arrowhead style has a fill
In the layout facility you also need to set a area, you can specify the color.
value for Text height. In Layout, the size is in
real world dimensions. Size - This is the length of the arrow head in
real world inches.
Tabs - Set tab spacing for text that is
2 Include Arrow - Select the check box
entered in table form. 6
to include an arrow when creating new
Layer - Text is placed on the Architec-
3 text items.
tural layer Text unless you specify a
Special Use - Select the check box to
User layer here. Select a user layer from 100- 7
199. create Special Use arrows. For more
information See “Special Use Arrow” on
Transparent Background - Select
4 page 490.
the check box to create text items with
transparent backgrounds.
General
The General tab offers various options for Auto Save - Select the Enable check
1
file management. box to use the Auto Save feature.
68
General
Enter a value greater than zero to specify the All plans with recent Autosave files display
Managing
frequency in minutes that Autosave files are and are checked. The plans with the selected
created. check box next to them are opened when you
Files
If the file has not been saved, the Autosave click OK.
files are named autosave#.pa1, When you open an Autosave file, the file
autosave#.pa2, etc., where the # symbol rep- name is Untitled. You must select File>Save
resents the sequence of unsaved files. and save the file with its original name
Managing
Once you save a file and give it a name, the before continuing your work.
Files
program uses the file name in the Autosave If you do not want to open the Autosave file,
file name. Autosave files have an extension click Cancel, or clear the check box next to
of PAn (where n is the floor number). In the file name and click OK. You will not be
addition, numbers are appended to the file prompted to open the Autosave file again.
name to guarantee unique names for the This dialog only display the first time the
Managing
Autosave files. For a file called Johnson.pl1, program starts after an abnormal exit.
Files
the autosave file may be named Undo - Select the Enable check box
Johnson900_0.pa1. If you opened the 2
to activate the multiple undo feature.
Johnson file again or opened a file named Specify how many levels of Undo and Redo
Johnson.pl1 from a different directory the you want to save. You may specify any value
autosave file would be named
Managing
from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved in the
Johnson900_1.pa1 Temporary Directory.
Files
Temporary Directory - Define a
Even with Autosave active, you should 3
frequently save your work to the hard directory for the Autosave files and for
drive by selecting File> Save or ctrl+S. Undo to use. You must define a directory on
a hard drive with sufficient space to hold
In the event that your computer shuts down, these files.
you can recover your most recent work by If you exit normally from Chief Architect,
opening the Autosave file created by the pro- any current Autosave and Undo files are
gram. deleted from this file. If you exit abruptly,
When you reopen the program after a com- such as with a system crash or a power fail-
Preferences
puter or system crash, a dialog similar to the ure, the autosave files are not deleted. They
following displays: are then available immediately after restart-
ing Chief Architect.
The Temporary directory should not be the
Chief Architect installation directory. You
should create a folder for the Temporary
Directory and do not use this directory for
anything else. Do not store plan files here.
Unless defined, the program will use the
Temp folder in your Chief Architect installa-
tion directory.
69
File Locking - Choose whether or not Never Lock Files is the typical choice of
4
to have files locked when they are individual users.
open. This is important when more than one Lock Files if Network Version is the
computer has access to the same set of files typical choice for anyone using the network
at the same time. Locking the file prevents version of the program. (This requires a net-
another user from opening and modifying the work hardware lock as well.)
same file at the same time. If file locking is
enabled, a file with the extension .lck is cre- Always Lock Files is the typical choice of
ated. You are not able to open the plan if that those who run individual versions of the pro-
file exists. If you exit Chief Architect abnor- gram but who are also tied into a network.
mally, that file remains. You need to delete
the .lck file before you can reopen the plan.
CAD
1
4
5
6
2 7
3 8
9
10
11
12
13
The CAD panel is unique to each drawing are quickly toggled on and off from the tool-
file. These are not global settings. The CAD bar itself while others can only be changed
panel defines how many of the tools on the here.
CAD toolbar operate. Many of these settings
70
Rotate/Resize About
This dialog contains the information which
Managing
lays the foundation for everything done with
CAD. These settings are an important aspect
Files
of the CAD facility.
Rotate/Resize About
Managing
Files
Rotate around Rotate around Resize around Resize around Rotate around cur-
Item Center Current Point Item Center Current Point rent Point. Rotate
Managing
Jump=68d
Files
1 The Rotate/Resize About selection Rotate Jump defines the angle increment
defines the point around which an item at which an item or group of items will
or a group of items rotates or resizes. “snap” as it is being rotated. It overrides the
Item center is the default. allowed angle or unrestricted rotation status
Managing
set under Allowed Angles. If set to zero
Current Point is always the red “X” on the the allowed angle or unrestricted rotation sta-
Files
screen. tus set under Allowed Angles are used
Allowed Angles
Comparison between 15 Degree Increments

and Unrestricted Angles Example requiring Unrestricted angles.since the 15
degree restriction will not allow the polyline to close.
Preferences
2 The Allowed Angles option defines tical line when restricted to 15 degree angles.
the angular constraint for any new CAD This setting can also be toggled from the
item being drawn. Keep it set to 15 Degree CAD toolbar using Restricted Angles .
Increments unless Unrestricted is nec-
essary. It is easier to drag a horizontal or ver- Note: Plan Defaults defines angle
restriction on walls. When walls are set to
7-1/2 degree angles, the Allowed Angles
in CAD will be 7-1/2 Degree Increments,
not 15 Degree Increments. Any Additional
angles set in the Plan Defaults dialog are
available as allowed angles when creating
or rotating CAD items.
71
Positioning Unit
Positioning Unit set to 4. Points snapped to Positioning Unit set to 5. Lines are all in incre-
grid. Note that the items drawn diagonally ments of 5" and have jumped to 5" apart.
follow pattern not defined by these points
3 The Positioning Unit creates an Notes:

imaginary snap grid that rotates to the • The Positioning Unit has no affect when
defined angle restrictions as you draw a line the Allowed Angles is Unrestricted.
or CAD item. • The Positioning Unit has no affect on
As you draw, the cursor jumps to a grid arcs.
crossing, and the length of each item snaps to • It is a good idea to reset the Positioning
the specified increments when drawing it. Unit back to 1 inch (or 10 mm) immedi-
Moving items is also affected by this grid. ately after use. Otherwise it affects other
If Rotate Jump is set to 0, When you drawing and editing commands.
Rotate/Resize the first jump is to the near- • Do not use the Positioning Unit to
est point on the grid. It then jumps from grid RESIZE items accurately. Use Concentric
point to grid point. Jump instead.
The Positioning Unit is used to quickly
Always be on the lookout for items
draw lines, circles or boxes at sizes of a spec- seeming to "jump" when drawing or
ified increment. moving. If this gets in your way, you may
need to change the positioning unit for
If there is any other item nearby to snap that action or reset it if it is responding to a
to, the item(s) will snap to the other item changed value.
and not jump to the Positioning Unit grid.
You can turn off Autosnap to prevent
this.
72
Concentric
Edit Type These principles are very important to learn
Managing
and understand.
Files
If you pick an edge adjacent to the corner,
you can only move the corner along this
edge. If you pick an edge opposite the corner,
you can freely move the corner.
Move Corners allows you to change the
Managing
shape of a polyline by adding break points
Files
Select one edge next to a corner and you can
move the corner along the other edge.
(also known as “joints” or “corners” or
“hinge points”) to a polyline. You will use
this often when editing Roofs and Slabs.
Managing
Files
Select opposite edge and you can move
the corner anywhere desired.
Managing
Edit Type - Move Corners is the
Files
4
default Edit Type for closed polylines.
Move corners allows you to relocate any
corner of a polyline, without resizing the rest
of the polyline. The edge you select restricts
how you can move the corner.
Concentric
Preferences
Concentric - Select this edit type to When Concentric Jump is set to 0, you
5
copy or resize a CAD item (except arcs) can resize an item in increments of 1/16”.
at a specified distance from the item's center. When Concentric Jump is set to a specific
Concentric editing affects the entire polyline value other than 0, the item resizes at each
if any corner is grabbed and dragged.
73
increment of the specified amount. This Following is a simple illustration of the

amount overrides the value set under Posi- results with and without selecting the
tioning Unit. Copy button:
Following are several examples of items in
the process of being edited. Concentric Jump
is set to 12 inches. Notice that each new edge
is the same distance away from the original Original box.
edge. This is not a proportional adjustment, Concentric editing.
Resize must be selected for proportional
scaling.
Copying Concentrically
Select Concentric. Select an item, and Results with copy Results without copy.
click the Copy button. Drag a corner of the
selected item. The original item remains
unchanged and a concentric copy is created.
If the Copy button is not selected, the orig-
inal item resizes concentrically when WARNING: Always reset Concentric
Jump to "0". This value will continue to
dragged.
affect editing even if another Edit Type is
selected. Roof sections are also affected
by the concentric jump value. This value
saves with the specific plan, so make sure
to reset it before closing the plan. Watch
for CAD items (including roof sections)
jumping at specific increments, and know
where to go to reset this value.
Resize (Proportional)
Resize is the Edit Type used for pro-

6
portional copying or scaling. To Resize
a closed polyline proportionally, always drag
a corner, not an edge.
74
The Concentric Jump value is used even toolbar. These can be used on lines
Managing
when Resize is the current Edit Type. Below already connected in a polyline.
are some examples. Notice that the resizing
Files
is proportional to the original. Auto Snap
Auto Snap - Select the check box to
Move Corners should be your preferred 8
snap the start and end points of any
edit type, unless you become more
item being drawn to other locations within
comfortable with one of the others. Learn
Managing
to recognize which Edit Type is selected
the specified screen distance. In this case, the
Files
by observing how the system is reacting. snap distance is set to 1% of the screen
width. An item can only be snapped to if it is
visible.
Fillet Edit Type
The snap distance is defined by the percent.
Fillet causes the rounding of corners
7 The value is the percentage of the screen
Managing
of a box or polyline.
width. Because it is based on screen and not
Files
If you use Fillet, all the corners of a box actual or scale distance, zooming in or out is
adjust together when one side or corner is the best way to increase the snapping accu-
dragged to the middle. The radius of each racy.
corner is the same.
Autosnap can be turned off and on from the
Managing
CAD toolbar with the Autosnap toggle
Files
button.
If Auto Snap is checked, the item attempts
to snap to these locations in this order of pri-
Original Drag inward Result
ority:
You can fillet indi-
vidual corners of a 1. A point.
polyline by using the 2. A line end or corner (two line ends com-
Fillet tool from the ing together).
CAD Edit toolbar 3. An intersection.
and selecting two
4. An edge of any item.
Preferences
sides.
5. The imaginary grid defined by the Posi-
Fillet Notes tioning Unit in the Preferences dia-
log.
1. Remember to reset Fillet to Move Cor-
ners as soon as you are finished. If the Auto Snap check box is cleared, only
the Positioning Unit affects the start or end
2. To produce fillets of an exact radius (or
point.
chamfer), it is better to set the Fil-
let/Chamfer radius and use the Fil- When the Auto Snap check box is selected,
lines and arcs drawn end to end merge to
let or Chamfer buttons on the Edit
form a closed polyline.
75
When the Auto Snap check box is cleared, Always leave Auto Snap selected unless it
the lines do not unite automatically. is negatively affecting a specific action by
snapping to an undesired location.
Edit Polyline Parts
Edit Polyline Parts is not checked . The Edit Polyline Parts is checked . Each edge
polyline remains a unit. is an individually editable item.
Edit Polyline Parts - Select the Extended POV-ray DXF

9
check box to edit the individual compo-
nents of a polyline. This setting can also be 10 Check Extended POV-ray DXF to add
information on lights when creating a
toggled from the CAD toolbar with the Edit
3D DXF file which will be read by POV-ray.
Polyline Parts toggle button.
Lines and arcs touching end to end form a
Block Fill
polyline, which limits you to editing the
11 Check Block fill
object as a whole. Sometimes a single edge by item to have
of a polyline needs to be removed, but when component items retain
you click on that edge, the entire polyline is their hatch patter when
selected. Clicking the Delete button would they are made into a
remove the entire polyline. block. Clear the check Unchecked
box and the individual
Above is an illustration of the same polyline
hatch definitions are
being edited without and with Edit Poly-
lost.
line Parts selected.
Notice the difference between the number of Checked
handles for the two items, and the different New Blocks by
cursor shapes. When the item is a polyline 12 Layer - Select the check box to cause
unit, the entire unit picks up red handles newly-created CAD block instances to
when selected. When the polyline is broken default to maintaining the individual charac-
up into its individual components, the han- teristics of the component parts, including
dles relate to the individual component. line color, line style, and hatch or solid fill.
This is the preferred setting.
76
CAD Line Properties
The By layer or By block setting of an If the check box is cleared then only the han-
Managing
existing CAD block can be changed in the dles at the vertices appear and the program
Line Style dialog, which is accessed from will automatically maintain the shape of the
Files
the Edit CAD Item dialog. spline.
Advanced Splines - Select this
13
check box to have all handles appear on
a selected spline. The additional handles
Managing
allow you to customize the shape of the
Files
spline.
CAD Line Properties
Managing
Files
1
2
4
Managing
5
Files
3
Preferences
The Line Properties panel sets the prefer- bers. You can set this higher so that items
ences for displaying lengths and angles of such as Property lines can be easily read at
CAD lines and polyline edges as well as the small scales.
Line Style Pattern Scaling. Display Line Lengths as - Select
2
Number Height - Defines the height either Fractional feet or Decimal
1
of the information displayed for lines in feet. (This setting is not available in metric,
scaled inches. This value is not related to the which always uses millimeters.)
size of other text items or dimension num-
77
Line Style Pattern Scaling

6 Scaling factors have been added to cor-
rect any Line Styles that do not gener-
ate correctly at thicker line weights. For each
factor there is a Printing Only and a Screen
• Fractional • Degrees Only scale factor. In most instances, all Line
Styles should print correctly at all line
weights. In an instance where they are not
correct, try changing the scaling percentages.
Overall Scale Factor - This factor
• Decimal Feet • Bearing lengthens or shortens the line length and the
gap length based on the percentage typed in.
Display Line Angles as - Select
23 The default is 100% which means the line is
either Degrees or Bearings relative
not adjusted. A value of 50% would result in
to the North Pointer. If no North Pointer has
the line lengths and gaps being 1/2 the origi-
been established, north is assumed to be
nal size and a value of 200% would result in
straight up on the screen.
line lengths and gaps being twice the original
Show Arc size. 1 is the minimum value allowed.
4
Centers,
Pattern Space Increase Per Line
Ends - Select the
Thickness - This factor increases the size
check box to display
of all gaps as the line thickness increases.
the centers and ends
The default is 100% which means the line
of arcs. A displayed
gaps are not adjusted as the line thickness
center is a snap
increases which can result in line segments
point.
appearing to merge together as the line thick-
ness becomes too thick. Typing in a value of
Show Arc centers, ends
about 120% results in the gap increasing at a
Fill New reasonable rate. Values between 110% and
5
Framing Members - Select the 130% produce good results, but results may
check box to have all new framing members vary depending on the printer.
drawn with a solid white fill. This makes it
easy to tell which framing member is on the
top, since the items below are blocked by the
solid white fill.
78
Special CAD
Special CAD
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Define a default Latitude, Longitude and
Time Zone to be used when creating Sun
Managing
Angles. For more information See “Sun
Files
Angle & Shadows” on page 704.
Material List
Managing
Files
1
The Material List panel displays the names When a material is entered in the Material Preferences
of all the possible categories and their ID List the program decides what category it
prefix that appears in the Material List. Cate- goes in and assigns an ID which is the code
gories are defined by the program and cannot followed by a number. EX1 would be the
be changed. first instance of an exterior trim piece in the
Material List. The ID is dynamic and is not
79
consistent from one List to another, i.e. the sure which items are listed in which Cate-
components list to the Material List or the gory. It is better to remove Categories from
Master List. individual lists rather than globally. Catego-
Include These Categories - ries may be removed from a Material List by
1 choosing Options> Show Items from within
Check all the categories to display in
every new Material List generated. Before that individual Material List.
you decide to hide Categories you must be
Report Style
Report Style specifies how the Material Id - This is assigned by the program. It is
List displays. This information may also be composed of the Category code and a num-
specified individually per Material List by ber.
choosing Options> Show Items from within Type - Select the check box to display the
that Material List. column that contains the subcategories you
Include These Columns - Check have assigned. If you include the Type col-
1
all the columns to display in the Mate- umn in the Material List you can enter infor-
rial List. mation in that field.
Floor - This is defined by the program. It is
the floor level that the material is used on.
80
Master List
Size - This is defined by the program. For Supplier - This value be entered or refer-
Managing
many items the program references user enced from the Master List.
defined settings to determine material size.
Files
Code - This column holds the Name/Code
Item - This is defined by the program. It field entered for some items.
cannot be edited. Comment - Space for user defined com-
Amount - This is an automatic take-off gen- ments.
erated by the program. It cannot be edited.
Managing
Manufacturer - The manufacturer of the
Extra Amount - This column is used to item.
Files
add waste or a mark up to any item. Querying Suppliers & Manufac-
2 turers - Select an option to narrow or
Units - This is defined by the program and
cannot be edited by the user. If you change broaden your query when you are searching
the Category in the material definition, it the Master List.
Managing
may change the units. Grid - Define whether or not to have
3
Files
Price - Price x Amount x Extra Amount = grid lines display. If lines are desired,
Total Cost. Numbers are rounded to nearest choose to have horizontal, vertical, or both.
dollar. If the lines are turned off, they do not show
on screen or print.
Total Cost - Price x Amount x Extra
Managing
Amount = Total Cost. It cannot be edited.
Files
Master List
Preferences
2
3
4
81
The Master List panel allows you to config- Code - This is the value entered in the
ure the Master List(s) for materials. Multiple Name/Code box on certain objects like win-
Master Lists may be maintained, but only dows. You can also enter a value here.
one may be used at any given time. Comment - Space for user defined com-
Include these columns - Check ments.
1
each column to be displayed in the mas- Manufacturer - This value can be entered
ter Material List. here, or referenced from the Master List.
Id - This is assigned by the program. It is
composed of the Category code and a num-
ber. 2 The name and path of the Master List
currently referenced is displayed. It is
Size - This is defined by the program. For referenced for all subsequently opened plans
many items the program references user when a Material List is generated from any
defined settings to determine material size. model. A Master List contains the price and
Item - This is defined by the program. It manufacturer information for materials.
cannot be edited.
3 Press Choose to select a different
Quantity - This is the quantity that an item Master List. Navigate the directory
is purchased. This is a user defined field. structure until you find the new Master List
Default - This is a user defined yes or no to be used, select it, then click OK.
toggle. If one material has more than one
4 Press New to create a new, blank Mas-
entry, a ’x’ in the Default column directs the ter List. You need to name it and save it
program to use that entry when calculating a in the location of your choice. If a new Mas-
Material List. ter List has been created, it is blank until you
build a Material List, and enter a price, sup-
plier or manufacturer. The Master List is
saved automatically when you close.
82
Categories
Categories
Managing
Files
2
Managing
Files
4
Managing
Files
3
1
Managing
The Categories panel expands the scope of objects which can effectively use this material
Files
the Material List by allowing you to specify subcategory capability. Windows and doors
additional information within each of Chief have the added functionality of the Schedule.
Architect’s main Material List headings. To create or modify a subcategory:
Subcategories are used to define a more
specific type of information needed by each 1 Select the Category from the list.
Category. These subcategories are global,
2 All its existing subcategories display.
available from any plan file.
3 To delete a subcategory, select it and
In the illustration above, the Windows cate- click Delete. To change a subcategory,
gory has two subcategories, GLZ (Glazing) select it and click Edit. Or click Add to cre-
and EXT (Ext Trim). These will be used in ate a new subcategory.
Preferences
the example on page 494 to add additional
material information to the windows, the 4 When the Subcategory dialog displays,
give the subcategory a code name
Window Schedule and Material List. which will appear in the SubCat column of
The extra material information can be added the Material List. This is the name used to
to a selected object only through its Compo- select the material when applying it to an
nents dialog. This is accessed by the Compo- item, so use something logical to you.
nents button when the object is selected.
Doors, windows, cabinets, fixtures and furni- 5 Doors and Windows can generate a
schedule. Any subcategory for doors or
ture items are the only objects with a related windows can appear as a column in that
Components dialog, so these are the only schedule, so name the schedule heading.
83
Render
2
3
4
5
1
The Render panel allows you to set what assigned to the material. The pattern lines
Render capabilities you would like to use that you see in other 3D Views are not drawn
when.These settings have a significant in a Render View.
impact on rendering speed. The Smooth Lines option causes the Ren-
The choices are the same in both the der View to be drawn with anti-aliased edges
1
Preview box and the Final View where two surfaces meet. This removes the
box. infamous “jaggies” that would otherwise
The Use Textures option controls whether appear. This feature is significantly slower
or not surfaces are rendered with textures. because the renderer redraws the scene 8
This only affects surfaces which are defined times and blends the Views together. It is
with a material that has a bitmap texture normally used only for Final Render Views.
assigned to it. When textures are turned off, This option can also be accessed from the
surfaces are rendered using the color Contextual menu in a Render View.
84
Render
The Smooth Faces option generates feature is necessary to get good lighting
Managing
smooth curved surfaces in Render Views. It effects since OpenGL calculates lighting at
uses new surface normals to alter the lighting the corners of surfaces. It only affects the
Files
effects on the surface and make them appear appearance when point or spot light sources
curved. It does not alter the shape of the sur- are being used.
faces. It should only have a minimal impact Max Triangle Size sets the size of the tri-
on rendering speed. This option can be angles modeled by the program. The smaller
Managing
accessed from the Contextual Menu. the maximum triangle size, the more trian-
Files
The Use Multipass option produces better gles that get drawn and the better the lighting
lighting and transparency effects. When will look, but the longer it takes to render.
using textures, you won’t see proper high- The minimum value that you can enter is 6".
lights unless the Use Multipass feature is
used. The program redraws certain surfaces Other Render Settings
Managing
multiple times when this is selected, so it These following settings affect both the Pre-
Files
does slow down rendering. Depending on view and Final View Render Views.
your hardware, this may or may not be a
noticeable delay. 2 The Soft Shadows option causes
shadows to be drawn with soft edges
The Show Images option controls whether instead of hard edges. This feature is only
or not Chief Architect images (landscape,
Managing
used when Show Shadows and Smooth Lines
people, cars, etc.) are drawn in the Render are also selected.
Files
View.
The Show Shadows option controls 3 The Always Rebuild option causes
the 3D model and the render data to be
whether or not the renderer calculates shad- recalculated every time the View is redrawn.
ows. Shadows are extremely complicated to If this is not checked, the program redraws
calculate and slow down rendering speed sig- the screen without recalculating the model.
nificantly. For any View, you can rebuild the model by
Multiple lights can cast shadows at the same hitting F5 on the keyboard or clicking on the
time. Please note that the rendering time Refresh Display button.
increases accordingly, i.e. 2 lights takes twice
When Always Rebuild is turned off, you may
Preferences
as long, 3 lights takes 3 times as long, etc.
notice an incorrect view after a number of
You should experiment with this feature
camera movements, (lighting and surfaces
before you turn it on as a default for Render
may appear wrong). Lighting calculations
Views.
are done for the room in which the camera
This option can also be accessed from the was originally in. When Always Rebuild is
Contextual Menu. It is highly recommended not checked, you are able to view other
that you only set this from the Contextual rooms, but the lights could be calculated for
Menu rather than as a preference. a previous room.
The Use Triangles option takes all large
surfaces (such as walls, floors, and ceilings) 4 The Keep All Surfaces option
causes the Renderer to calculate all sur-
and split them up into smaller triangles. This faces of a model. Turning off this feature
85
speeds up rendering because surfaces that lems if the rendering data for your model is
cannot be seen in the View are ignored. greater than the amount of memory on the
However, if you move the camera into a card. If your computer stops responding
position where a surface that was not origi- when rendering, try clearing the check box.
nally visible is now visible, there is a gap in This slows down the rendering time consid-
the View. It is not necessary to use this fea- erably. If your problems are not fixed, leave
ture when you have specified Always the check box selected.
Rebuild.
6 The information regarding your
For fastest performance in the Render View OpenGL graphics card displays here.
you can select the Keep All Surfaces This information may be important if you are
check box and clear the Always Rebuild having problems generating Render Views.
check box. Your lighting will be wrong when The most important piece of information is
the camera moves between rooms. You must what follows the Acceleration Label. If
use F5 to refresh the screen and update the your video card supports hardware accelera-
lighting. tion for OpenGL this will say "Installed Cli-
Use Optimizations - Select the ent Driver", otherwise it will say "No
5
check box to have your computer save Acceleration". There is a significant differ-
the rendering data to memory. On some ence between rendering with acceleration
OpenGL graphics cards this may cause prob- and not.
86
Options Tab
3D Preferences
Managing
Files
All 3D Views are affected by settings in the whether or not the windows are opaque from
3D Preferences dialog. 3D Preferences are the outside, which items are included in 3D
not global settings. They can be set per plan Views, and much more.
and will be saved with each plan file. The Choose 3D> 3D Preferences from the menu
settings in this dialog define whether a 3D to display the 3D Preferences dialog.
Managing
View generates in color or as a line drawing,
Files
Options Tab
Managing
1
Files
2
3
4 8
5
Managing
Files
10 9
6
7 11
1 Check Opaque glass from outside resources, or to minimize file size when cre-
to make the glass in windows and doors ating a single room 3D Walkthrough
opaque when seen from outside the house. “movie”.
Preferences
This helps simplify elevations and overviews Back Clip Cross Sections only
3
Restrict Camera to Room only affects the Section/Elevation View.
2
affects the Floor Camera accessed by A Section/Elevation View normally displays
selecting 3D> Create View> Floor Camera. everything from the cut line (where the
Check this box to suppress the generation of mouse button was pressed) and beyond.
any item beyond the room containing the Select the Back Clip Cross Sections
camera. If checked, the view through a door- check box to display only the items between
way into another room shows only blank the cut line and the point where the mouse
space. Use this option to maximize computer
87
button was released. This option can be eas- quickly. The view is divided into the speci-
ily toggled on and off with the Backclip fied number of vertical panels going across
button. the screen, and each panel generates in order.
Display inactive Views affects Framing back clip defines the back
4 7
clip for framing members only in any
only saved Wall Elevation or
Section/Elevation View. Framing must be
Section/Elevation cameras. Check this to included in 3D Views to see the effects of
have saved section or elevation cameras this value. A zero value does not back clip at
show in Plan View. Active cameras display all.
in red. Inactive cameras display in green, and
can be reactivated any time. If this box is not 8 A preview of the selected backdrop dis-
checked, it appears as though all saved cam- plays.
9 Click Select Backdrop to choose a

eras have been lost. These cameras never
appear in printed output. background image. This opens the
Default Color Display has check Library Browser window to the Backdrops
5 directory. Choose the desired backdrop.
boxes for each type of 3D View. Select
10 Click Remove Backdrop to change
the check box to specify the View to generate
in color. Clear the check box to have that the backdrop to a solid color. The color
type of View generate as a line drawing. A used is defined on the Render tab of this dia-
colored View can always be changed to a line log for Render Views.
drawing and vice versa by choosing
Options> Color Off/Color On. 11 Select the check boxes to define in what
Views the backdrop is displayed.
No. view panels is normally 1.
6
Increase this number to have the 3D
Views of complex models generate more
Creating Backdrops
New backdrops can be created using a BMP, working in.
JPG, or PNG format. The backdrop is auto- Scanned images from a photograph or digital
matically adjusted to fit the window size. photos can be used to create backdrops of a
You increase your chance of success by cre- specific view site if they can be saved in
ating images that have the same proportions either the BMP, JPG, or PNG format.
of height to width as the window you are
88
Include Tab
Include Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
3
4
Managing
2
Files
5
Display only Framing - Select the
1 On the Include tab, any items checked 3
are calculated for the 3D View. Any check box to display only framing in
item not checked will not have any of its sur- 3D Views. This automatically eliminates the
Managing
faces calculated. The fewer the number of other items. Foundations and soffits are also
Files
surfaces to produce, the faster the 3D View calculated when Display only Framing is
generates. All subsequent Views are affected. selected. To suppress the soffits, choose
If an item is checked on the Include tab, its Options> Show Items from the 3D View,
display can be turned on and off in the Show uncheck Soffits to remove them from the
display.
Items dialog from within the individual
Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
3D View. If Show Items is used to turn 4 ings - Select the check box to have the
off the display of a 3D item, the surfaces are program rebuild floors and ceilings when-
still calculated – but they are not displayed. ever the model must be updated. Floors and
Scroll Bars has check boxes that con- ceilings are rebuilt just before a 3D View or
2
Preferences
trol the display of scroll bars for each elevation is displayed.
type of 3D View. Clear the check box to sup-
Auto Remove 3D - Clear this check
press the scroll bar along the right side and 5
box to have the program retain the 3D
along the bottom of the appropriate 3D View.
model in memory when you are making
This yields more viewing area when using
changes to the model. This can speed up the
smaller display windows.
generation of additional 3D Views of the
When the scroll bars are suppressed, use the model. This may slow down the speed of
keyboard arrow keys to scroll. To pan the working in 2D.
display, hold the Ctrl key and “drag” the cur-
sor across the window. Scroll bars do not
appear in Render Views.
89
Render Tab
1 2
3
4
Background Color - Click on this Daytime Ambient controls the light

1 3
box to set the background color for a overall when you are outside the model
Render View that does not use a backdrop. and the Sunlight Toggle is on.
Interior Ambient controls the overall Nighttime Ambient controls the
2 4
light when a Render View is inside the overall light when you are outside the
model. model and the Sunlight Toggle is off.
90
Chapter 7:
Defaults Setup
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
General Information
In order to familiarize yourself with Chief
Architect it is a good idea to go through the
Managing
entire Options> Defaults Setup menu and
the Preferences dialog. If the program is
Files
new to you, going through the steps of set-
ting up defaults will help you understand
how the program utilizes information and
treats various objects. If you are an existing
Managing
user, browsing this chapter may make you
more familiar with the new functionality of
Files
this version. Each of these topics is covered
in greater detail in specific chapters.
Some of the settings specified here affect all
plan files, while others may be used in spe-
Managing
cific cases. If there are settings that you use
Files
regularly, it is recommended that you save
your settings in the profile.pl1 file. (For more
information, see “Creating Your Own pro-
file.pl1” on page 146.)
In the process of setting up your defaults,
you can specify how 3D objects are created
and how certain tools work. Some tools, like
dimensions, are used in the design and the
documentation process. It is important for
you to understand the workings of these pro-
gram preferences if you are to gain the maxi-
Defaults
mum benefit from using Chief Architect 7.0.

Setup
91
Plan Defaults Setup

1
2
3 9
4 10
5 11
6 12
7
13
8
Select Options> Defaults Setup> Plan Show Lower Pony Wall - Specify
4
Defaults or double-click the Select Items whether the upper or lower section of a
button to open the Plan Defaults dialog. pony wall displays in Plan View.
Much of the information in this dialog is gen- Show Pitch as Degrees - Select
eral and applies to all models created in the 5
this check box to display the roof pitch
program. Other settings may get changed in in degrees.
individual plans depending on your working
Show “Living Area” - Select the
style. 6
check box to display the total Living
Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable Area label in Plan View.
1
- Select the check box to allow the
Allowed Angles - Select either the
resizing of symbols in Plan View or any 3D 7
15 Degree Allowed Angles or 7
View.
1/2 Degree Allowed Angles option for
Ignore Casing for Opening restricted angles. If 7 1/2 is selected, up to
2 Resize - Select the check box to be eight additional angles can also be defined.
able to move openings right up to an inter-
Additional Angles - Specify up to
secting wall. If this is cleared, the program 8
eight additional values. These values
does not allow you to place a door within the
must be between 45 degrees and -45 degrees.
specified trim width of an intersecting wall.
When you enter a value, you also get the val-
Warn Before Delete Selected ues that are 90 degrees, 180 degrees and 270
3
Item - Select the check box to have the degrees off of that angle.
program require confirmation any time an
item is deleted.
92
Foundation Defaults Setup
Unconnected Wall Min. Length - Wall Snap Distance - Walls drawn

9 12
Managing
Define the shortest unconnected wall within this distance to each other, snap
that can be drawn. Walls that are shorter than together. If this value is set to "1", you must
Files
this distance, and are not connected to other click directly on an object to select it. This
walls are deleted. may make selecting items difficult.
Inches Scrolled by Arrow Key - Actual Thickness for Nominal
10 13
Define the number of scale inches that Specify the actual thickness of system
Managing
the Plan View scrolls when you hit one of the defined Default wall types. For more infor-
Files
two buttons at the ends of a scroll bar. mation, see “System Default Walls” on page
Wall Hatch Spacing - Define the 209.
11
spacing for all wall hatching in the Plan
View.
Managing
Files
General foundation settings are defined prior
to building a foundation. Choose Options>
Defaults Setup>Foundation Defaults to
Managing
open the Foundation Setup dialog. This dia-
Files
log also displays when you to choose to build
the foundation.
The Foundation Setup dialog is divided into
two tabs. The Foundation tab covers the
main information about the foundation walls.
Managing
The Materials tab allows you to specify
Files
additional materials used in the foundation.
These settings affect only the Material List,
such as rebar spacing, existence of a mudsill,
etc.
Defaults
Setup
93
Foundation Tab
2 6
3
4
1 8
5
9
7
10
There are three types of foundations which other wall type has its thickness defined on
may be created: Footings, Monolithic the Layer Spec tab in the Wall Specification
Slab, or Piers. Choose the desired type by dialog. See “Layer Spec Tab” on page 217.
selecting the radio button next to its name. Min. Wall Height - Defines the stem
Each foundation type has different options, 3
wall height. If the min. wall height is at
settings and behaviors. least 6’ (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated
above the footing and a Basement ceiling
Footings height notation appear, displaying the dis-
tance from the top of the slab floor to the
1 Selecting Footings generates a foun- basement ceiling. It is the same as the Min.
dation system with a stem wall centered
on a spread footing. Footings will automati- Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness.
cally center below the stem wall. Individual To delete the slab, specify the “rooms” in the
footings may be centered differently. basement as Open Below in the Room
When Footings is selected you can define Specification dialog. See “Room Labels” on
these options: page 190.
Wall Thickness - If the Wall Type is Slab Thickness - Defines the thick-
2 4
set to Default (concrete) this value ness of the slab produced above the
defines the thickness of the stem wall. Any footing or at the top of the stem wall.
94
Slab at Top of Stem Wall - Select Footing Size - Specify the Width
5 7
Managing
the check box to generate a slab with its and Height of the footing.
top flush to the top of the stem wall. The slab
Files
thickness can be defined. To generate a foundation having a stem
wall but no visible footing, set the footing
width to the same dimension as the stem
wall.
Managing
Monolithic Slab
Files
8 Selecting Monolithic Slab builds a
slab foundation with a perimeter foot-
ing. This foundation is the floor platform for
the first floor, but it is visible in the founda-
Managing
tion plan. It can be selected and edited like a
Files
polyline and with the Edit CAD Item dialog.
When you select a Monolithic Slab founda-
tion, the program designates every room on
the first floor as “Slab foundation for this
If Slab at Top of Stem Wall is selected, room” in the Structure tab of the Room
Managing
all rooms on the first floor are automatically Specification dialog. See “Structure Tab” on
Files
set to Floor for this room is supplied by the page 187.
foundation room from the floor below, as
Monolithic Slabs can have the following
noted in the Structure tab in the Room
items specified from the Foundation Setup
Specification dialog. For more information,
dialog:
see “Structure Tab” on page 187.
Managing
Slab Thickness - Specify the thickness of
Foundation Wall Type - Defines the
6
Files
wall layer definition for the stem wall. the slab.
Unless otherwise specified, a Default (con- Footing Size - Specify the Width and
crete) wall is defined. If you plan to turn the Height of the footing. The top of the footing
foundation wall into a pony wall, you must is at the bottom of the slab. The exterior edge
define any other wall type than Default (con- of the footing is at the exterior edge of the
crete). slab which lines up with the exterior main
All wall layer definitions listed in the layer surface of the wall above.
Default Wall Type dialog are in this list. The
outer edge of the main layer of the founda- Piers
tion wall lines up with the outer edge of the
main layer of the wall above.
9 Selecting Piers builds a pier and grade
beam foundation. The floor framing
Defaults
Setup
rests directly on top of the grade beam.
95
The height of the grade beam is defined by

10 Specify the Diameter, Depth and
the Min. Wall Height. The thickness of the Maximum Separation of the piers.
grade beam is defined by the Wall Thick-
ness. The size and spacing of the piers are
specified in the Piers section of this tab.
Materials Tab
2
1 3
The Materials tab can be used with any type Bar Size defines the size (in 1/8ths)
3
of foundation. Some options may be grayed for the rebar. In this illustration, 4 rep-
out depending on the type of foundation resents 4/8”, or 1/2”.
specified. Use Mesh - Select the check box to
4
1 #Bars/Course Specify the number of reinforce the slab floor with mesh
supporting rebar in the Footing per instead of rebar. Clear this check box to use
course in the Stem Walls. If piers are used rebar, the rebar specification for slab
specify how many rebar are used per pier. becomes available.
The rebar does not display in Section/Eleva-
tion views, but is added to the Material List. 5 Check any additional Options desired.
These are added to the Material List,
Course Spacing - Define the Wall but do not display in the model.
2
Horizontal and Wall Vertical spac-
ing for the rebar in the stem wall. If using
rebar in the slab, instead of mesh, the spacing
applies to both directions.
96
Wall Defaults Setup
Wall Defaults Setup
Managing
Files
Working With Walls for interior or exterior walls and railings.
When you draw a Default (Wood frame 16"
When you draw a wall it has a 3D compo-
OC) wall, it is placed on the Normal Walls
nent, or height that is defined in the Floor
layer on the Architectural tab of the Layers
Defaults dialog. It has a 2D representation
Managing
dialog. Default (Concrete) can only be used
that is controlled by the Layers dialog and or
Files
on the foundation plan. When you draw a
the Wall Specification dialog, and it carries
Default (Concrete) wall in the Plan View it is
material information that can be calculated
also placed on the Normal Walls layer.
for take-offs in the Material List or seen in
3D and Render Views. The 2D display of System Default walls is
controlled by the settings in the Layers dia-
Managing
The information for wall layer definitions is
log. If you want these walls to appear differ-
defined in the Default Wall Type dialog.
Files
ently in Plan View, or print differently, you
Select Options> Default Setup> Wall
must make changes to the Normal Walls
Defaults, or double-click the Wall button layer on the Architectural tab.
to access the dialog. This dialog is identical
The program assigns materials and assumes
to the Layer Spec tab of the Wall Specifica-
certain characteristics of these walls when
Managing
tion dialog that is accessed by double-click-
the Material List is generated.
Files
ing on a wall in Plan View. For more
information, see “Understanding Wall
Assemblies” on page 208. User Specified Walls
In the Default Wall Type dialog you can set All other wall layer definitions in the pro-
the current wall layer definition, or create a gram are considered User Specified walls.
Managing
new wall type. Once new wall types are cre- Some User Specified wall layer definitions
Files
ated their wall layer definitions can be are shipped with the program and can be cus-
exported for use in other plans. tomized. Their characteristics and 2D display
qualities are defined in the Default Wall
Type dialog.
System Default Walls
User Specified walls have information
There are two categories of walls in the pro-
placed on two layers on the Architectural
gram: System Default walls and User
tab of the Layers dialog, Wall Layers and
Specified walls. Within these two types
Normal Walls. These layers only control if
there are many different wall layer defini-
the information displays in Plan View, not
tions that are or that can be defined in the
how it displays. The 2D display qualities of
Default Wall Type dialog.
User Specified walls are defined in the
Defaults
There are only two wall layer definitions in Default Wall Type dialog or on the Layer
Setup
the System Default wall set: Default (Wood Spec tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
frame 16" OC) and Default (Concrete).
Default (Wood frame 16" OC) can be used
97
If the display of the Normal Walls layer is can be calculated by the Material List. Mate-
turned off, all walls are turned off in the Plan rials that are applied to the surface layers of
View. If the display Normal Walls is on, and the wall layer definition also define how the
Wall Layers is turned off, User Specified wall appears in 3D and Render Views.
walls are represented by two lines at their There is a great deal of control over User
exterior surfaces. The information describing Specified walls and a lot of information that
their wall layer definition does not display. can be defined in the Layer Spec in the Wall
The properties of those lines are determined Specification dialog. For more information,
by the setting for the Normal Walls layer. see “Wall Specification Dialog” on page 211.
User Specified walls can have up to seven
layers defined, each representing a different
material. All of the materials on these layers
Default Wall Type Dialog
1
2 10
9
11
3
4
5
6
7
1 The list contains all of the defined wall definitions are saved with the model in the
types for the current model. You can .pl1 file. They can also be saved in the pro-
select a wall type from the list or create a file.pl1 file. For more information, see “Cre-
new wall type. These wall types or wall layer ating Your Own profile.pl1” on page 146.
98
Default Wall Type Dialog
To create a new wall layer definition go to Delete - Removes the layer that is currently
Managing
the drop down menu and select <NEW active. The arrow to the right of the wall
ENTRY SPACE> from the bottom of the list, assembly diagram points to the active layer.
Files
and type in a name for the wall layer defini- Line - In this area you can define the
tion. For more information, see “Creating 8
Weight, Color and Line Style for
New Wall Layer Definitions” on page 210. each line in the wall layer definition. Click
Main Layer - If you define more than on the line to edit in the diagram. Any
2
Managing
one layer, you need to assign a layer to changes you make in the dialog immediately
Files
be the main layer. The main layer should be display in the diagram showing how the wall
the layer that you want to dimension to, it is displays in Plan View.
usually the structural component. The main Material - This area displays informa-
layer is longer in the wall diagram in the dia- 9
tion regarding materials that are calcu-
log. lated in the Material List, as well as any fill
Managing
3 The wall layers are listed in order from patterns that you may want to use in 2D.
Files
top to bottom. The exterior layer is
always layer 1. 10 Click either of the two boxes and the
Select Material dialog opens. Specify
Active Layer - The arrow to the right a material for the active layer in the wall
4
of the wall assembly diagram points to layer definition. If a material is applied to a
Managing
the active layer. surface layer, that material displays in 3D
and Render Views.
Files
5 Define a Thickness for each layer.
Fill Style - Use the menu to select a
11
The Framing dialog uses the thickness of hatch pattern for the active layer. Spec-
the main layer to size the studs if Fir Stud ify a Color for the pattern.
16" OC, Fir Stud 24" OC, Metal Stud 16"
This Fill pattern is overridden if you use the
Managing
OC, or Metal Stud 24" OC is assigned.
Hatch button to fill your walls in the Plan
Files
Total - Displays the total thickness of View.
6
your wall layer definition. If you adjust When you are finished defining the wall
the total thickness value, the program will type, Click OK to return to the current view.
compensate by changing the thickness of the The next time you place walls in Plan View,
main layer. the defined wall type is used.
7 Insert - Click the button to add layers To use another wall type, open the Default
to the wall layer definition. You will Wall Type dialog, select another wall layer
create a layer directly above the active layer. definition from the pull-down menu and
The arrow to the right of the wall assembly click OK.
diagram points to the active layer.
Defaults
To insert a layer at the bottom you can click

Setup
near the outside edge of the last layer until

the arrow to the left of the diagram points to
the last line.
99
Railing Defaults Setup

Select Options> Default Setup> Railing can specify the wall layer definition of the
Defaults to open the Default Railing dialog railing system that is modeled when you
(or double-click the Railing button). You select the Railing button.
Railing Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 12
8 13
9 14
10
11
Railing Types 4 Choose Open with

Select Balusters to Middle Rail to cre-
1 ate a railing with a top and
have balusters cre-
ated. a middle rail.
5 Select No Rail to
2 Select Solid to create eliminate the rails,
a solid, wall style rail- leaving only the pillars or
ing. The wall type is posts (and overhead beam,
defined by the current wall if selected).
layer definition.
The following options may be used in combi-
3 Choose Open to cre- nation with each other, and with any of the
ate a railing with Railing Types.
only a top rail.
100
Railing Defaults Setup
6 Check Large 9 Check Exterior Materials to make
Managing
Posts/Pillars to the balusters the same color as the rails,
change the posts or pillars instead of having them be defined separately.
Files
from 5” (125 mm) to 10” You have more flexibility if you define mate-
(250 mm). rials for each part on the Material tab.
7 Check Post to 10 Check Raise Shoe
Overhead Beam to to raise the shoe (bot-
Managing
have the newel posts con- tom rail) about 3-1/2” (87
Files
tinue up to an overhead mm) off the platform.
beam placed just under the
ceiling height. This option 11 Check No Shoe to
eliminate the shoe
is often used in combina- altogether. Balusters go
tion with other options to right to the floor.
Managing
place a cross beam along Define the Railing Height.
12
Files
the top of the railing.
13 Define the Baluster spacing. Balus-
8 Check Pillar to Ceil- ters are laid out at this defined spacing
ing/Beam to change
or less for the selected railing (s).
the square newel posts to
round pillars, and to make 14 Define the Newel spacing. Newels are
Managing
them extend to the ceiling. laid out at this defined spacing or less
for the selected railing(s) even if other rail-
Files
If an overhead beam is also
desired, check Post to over- ings are spaced differently. To eliminate
head beam. newel posts altogether, enter a number larger
than the length of the railing.
Managing
Railing Material Tab
Files
Defaults
The Railing Material tab allows you to these materials when calculating a list. The
Setup
assign materials to the three parts of the Rail- railing pieces are recorded with the interior
ing system. The Material List calculates trim. Use these materials for their rendering
pieces of the railing, it does not reference capabilities only.
101
Door Defaults Setup

It is a good idea to specify the most common The rough opening increase size is not speci-
type of door in the Door Defaults dialog fied in this dialog. Rough opening defaults
before you start placing doors. After doors are set in the Openings tab of the Framing
have been placed in Plan View, you can go dialog.
back and customize individual doors. The values in the Door Defaults dialog are
To define the initial values for interior or exterior doors.
default door They can easily be updated for individual
style, select doors in Plan View. A few, like the casing
Options> width in the Frame & Trim tab, are dynamic
Default Set- specifications and change globally, when you
ups> Door enter a new value. When you change a
Defaults. dynamic default, existing doors in the model
Click Interior Door to display the Defaults update.
for Interior Doors dialog. If you have specified a door with individual
Click Exterior Door to display the setting, you can reset it to the defaults at any
Defaults for Exterior Doors dialog. time by entering a "d" in the appropriate edit
box in the Door Specification dialog. When
Click Done after you have completed setting a value is set to a dynamic default, (D) fol-
the defaults. lows the value. If entering a "d" does not
The settings for both types of doors are simi- work, the setting is not dynamic default.
lar. You should define setting for both types. For more information, see “Dynamic
The program automatically places exterior Defaults” on page 17.
doors in exterior walls, and interior doors, in
interior walls.
102
Door Defaults Setup
General Tab
Managing
Files
1 5
2
Managing
6
Files
3
Managing
Files
6
Door Style - Click the list, and define
1
the Door Style as slab, glass, panel or
Managing
library. Default is the same as Slab.
Files
Select Library from the list and the Door
Library opens. This is the same as clicking
the Library button. Once a library door
has been selected, that door is added to the
Door Style list.
Managing
Door Type - Define the door as a
Files
2
doorway, hinged, slider, pocket, bifold,
garage or library.
3 Specify the Width and Height.

4 Define the door Thickness.
5 A selection of special doors are avail-
able through the Library button.
Click this button to activate the Library
Browser window.
6 Check Show Color to have the picture

Defaults
of the door in the dialog show in color.

Setup
103
Options Tab
1
3
2 4
5
6
1 Hinged, pocket and bifold doors default 4 Check Use Exterior Materials to
to Single Door when less than four have the exterior casing use the same
feet (1200 mm) wide. If the width is greater material as the door.
than four feet, Double Door is the default. Recessed - A door placed in a brick,
These options are grayed out for the default 5
concrete block, or stone wall may be
settings. recessed into the exterior of the wall. If the
Draw Closed draws the door closed wall is a single layer, and it is thicker than a
2
in all 3D Views. typical stud wall, this box would normally be
checked. It cannot be set in the defaults, but
23 You may choose to add an Interior it can be set for individual doors.
Plinth Block and/or an Exterior
Plinth Block to the default door style.
6 Check No Label to suppress the cre-
Plinth blocks do not display in 3D Views, but ation of door labels in Plan View.
are counted in the Material List. Clicking this disables your ability to create a
Door Schedule. You can also turn off the dis-
play of these labels in the Layers dialog for
the Plan View.
104
Door Defaults Setup
Frame & Trim Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
2
Managing
Files
4 6
Managing
Frame - If you have specified a Door as well as flat casings if no custom profile is
1
Files
Style of glass or panel on the General defined. These settings are dynamic defaults.
tab You may specify the dimensions of the They change casings globally.
rail and stiles. Width defines the width of the side or verti-
Frame Width includes the stiles and top or cal casings.
middle rails.
Managing
Top Width defines the width of the top cas-
Frame Bottom - Specify the size of the ing.
Files
bottom rail. Reveal defines the starting point of the cas-
2 Specify Interior or Exterior. These ings from the edge of the operable door.
radio buttons switch all the values Lintel defines a butt joint between the
below as well as the view to the right of the 4
sides and the top casing.
appropriate door. They do not appear for the
interior door specification, which uses the Extends defines the amount the top casing
same values for both sides of the door. extends past the side casings.
Casing - You can specify the size and Wrap returns the top casing to the wall.
3
configuration of the casings with these Suppress Casing hides all casings.
5
values. The active side (interior or exterior) This is usually set for individual doors,
Defaults
is indicated by the active radio button. The not all doors. If you do not want casings to be
Setup
view of the door updates with the current modeled, enter zero values for width.
side. The width defines any custom molding Show Color displays color in the dia-
6
log.
105
Lites Tab
1 4
2
3
5
6
Lites across defines the number of Normal style is the most common, with the
1
horizontal divisions for that window. In muntin bars going horizontally and verti-
a normal style of divided lites, the Lites cally.
across specifies the horizontal number of Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to
evenly sized panes of glass. This value must divide up the lites.
be between one and eight.
Prairie style is based on the normal style,
Lites vertical defines the number of
2 but with all the central muntin bars removed,
vertical divisions for that window. In a leaving only the two outside muntin bars
normal style of divided lites, the Lites verti- both horizontally and vertically. To be effec-
cal specifies the number of evenly sized tive, both the Lites across and the Lites verti-
panes of glass down the window. This value cal should be set between 6 and 8.
must also be between one and eight.
Craftsman style is based on the normal
Muntin Width - Specify the width of
3 style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin
muntins. bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical
Special type: Choose the style of muntin bars above it. To be effective, both
4
divided lites from the list. There are the Lites across and the Lites vertical should
four styles available: Normal, Diamond, be set between 4 and 8.
Prairie or Craftsman. Round Top - Ray Count If the door
5
is defined as circle top or arch top on
the General tab, you may specify up to 10
rays. The rays specify the number of radial
muntin bars, there is one more pane of glass
than the number of rays specified.
Normal Diamond Prairie Craftsman
106
Door Defaults Setup
If rays are added, any Lites across and Lites start at the center point of the radius top and
Managing
vertical which are specified are confined to fan out. If concentric is checked, the rays
the part of the window below the circle top or start from the innermost concentric muntin
Files
arch top. bar. You must have at least three lites across
Managing
Files
Managing
Concentric In Circle top doors only, for this to be used.
Files
6
rays may also be defined as being con-
centric or not. If it is not checked, the rays
Arch Tab
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
3
Files
4
5
1 Specify the Type of arch desired. 3 Radius - Some arches may also need
The choices are Round Top (Full their radii to be defined.
Radius), Broken Arch (Eyebrow), Gothic, Reflect - Selecting the check box
4
Elliptical, Flat top, Tudor, Double, Trifoil, reflects the arch top to bottom. This is
Octagonal, Dog-ear. rarely used for doors, but can be specified for
Height - For most arches you have to windows to create unique configurations.
2
Defaults
define a height of the arch. This is the

Setup
dimension of the top of the arch, (defined by

the height of the door), down to the spring
line of the arch.
107
5 A half-arch door is specified by check-

ing either Arch on Right or Arch on
Left.
Molding Tab
2
3
1
This tab allows you to globally apply custom the molding correctly.
moldings to all doors. Once a custom mold-
ing is applied, the program references the When you specify a custom molding
dimension on the Frame & Trim tab to size profile, the upper left corner of the
molding is placed towards the door panel
or window sash. Keep this in mind when
you are creating new molding profiles with
CAD tools.
108
Window Defaults Setup
Clear returns the casing specifications

1 You can specify if the defined casings 3
Managing
are Exterior or Interior by clicking to a flat casing.
the appropriate option. This also controls the
Files
New moldings may be added to the library.
view of the door in the dialog. For more information see “Adding a Mold-
Choose opens the Library Browser. ing to the Library” on page 443.
2
Select a molding and minimize the
browser to view your selection in this dialog.
Managing
Files
Material Tab
Managing
1
Files
Managing
2
Files
The Material tab allows you to apply a
2 Click Select Material or click in one
material to the various parts of the door. of the boxes to open the Select Mate-
rial dialog.
1 Select the part of the door to define the
material.
Managing
Files
The Window Defaults dialog specifies what a (D) following a value in the Window
type of window is placed in the model when Specification dialog. These settings are:
a window is added in Plan View. Select • Window Type
Options> Defaults Setup> Window • Sash Width
Defaults, or double-click the Window • Sash Depth
button, to open the Window Defaults dialog. • Casing Width.
There are three types of values set in the 2. Initial Values: These only affect new
Window Defaults dialog: windows, and changing the value has no
Defaults
Setup
1. Dynamic Defaults: These values affect on existing windows. These are:

affect all existing and new windows • Width, Height
which are still set to the default specifi- • Floor to Top
cation. The default setting is signified by • Default Level
109
3. Editing Limits: This affects both the Set the Window Defaults dialog to define
creation of new and the modification of the type of window that represents the major-
existing windows/doors. There is one ity of windows in your model. Just like doors
only: you can easily customize any window or
• Min. Separation group of windows in the Plan or 3D View.
General Tab
2
3
4
5
6
1 Choose the default Window Type 2 Specify the initial Width and Height
from the menu. The default window for new windows. This is not a dynamic
pictured is a double hung. This setting can be setting. This setting does not affect existing
dynamically changed later. windows.
110
Floor to Top defines the position of The Minimum Separation is the closest any
3
Managing
the windows in the wall. two windows may be moved together before
being stopped by the program. This measure-
Files
Movable Size- This is the size of the
4 ment does not include the casing. It can only
movable portion of a window. This
number is measured in inches. Enter zero to be set in the defaults dialog.
set the value to be typical for that type of Def. Level is a value used for stacked
6
window. windows and window walls. If a win-
Managing
dow wall has several rows of windows, Def.
5 Define the Min. Separation allowed
Files
between two windows or between win- Level allows you to assign a number for each
dows and doors. row. After you have set the first row of win-
dows and doors and you want to place the
second row of windows, set this number to
one.
Managing
Files
Options Tab
Managing
1 4
Files
2
3 5
Interior Corner Block - Select the most or all of the window's total area should
1
check box to have interior corner be able to be opened for escape in case of
Managing
blocks counted in the Material List. These fire.
Files
will not be displayed in 3D Views. The Plan Check calculations for egress are
Exterior Corner Block - Select the only an approximate guide. Consult your
2 local building and fire code authorities for
check box to have exterior corner
blocks counted for the Material List. These your regional egress window requirements.
will not be displayed in 3D Views. Use Exterior Materials - Select the
4
Egress -Select the check box to label check box to match the exterior sash
3
the window as an egress window in the material to the exterior trim material.
Window Schedule. The letters eg will be No Labels - Select the check box to
appended to the value in the Size column. 5
suppress the label or callout that
The Egress check box can designate that designates a window in Plan View. This also
Defaults
Setup
the entire area of the window is used for prevents the window from appearing in any
egress, not just the movable section. To use window schedule. For more information See
this specification on an undersized window, “Door & Window Schedules” on page 491.
111
Sash & Frame Tab
5 6
Sash Width - You can enter the width Sash Depth is the thickness of the
1 2
for all four sides of the window sash. sash stock from outside to inside.
These settings are dynamic so they can be Sash Inset is the dimension from the
updated globally if a specification has been 3
outermost sash, to the frame or outer
changed. If a window has multiple sash com- edge of the wall main layer.
ponents the Mid value is used. If any value is
Frame Width can be set if the frame
set to “0”, the window has no glass. In an 4
arched window, the top value is ignored and size is included in the nominal size of
the arched portion matches the Side dimen- the window. Entering a positive number in
sion. these boxes decreases the operable dimen-
sions of the sash. If there is no frame, enter a
value of zero.
Frame Depth is measured from the
5
exterior of the wall to the interior of the
wall. The frame is usually thicker than the
sash, but not thicker than the wall layer defi-
nition. If this value is set to zero, the wall’s
main layer thickness is used as the frame
depth.
112
Frame Inset is the distance that the

6
Managing
frame is inset from the exterior of the
wall. If the window frame starts flush with
Files
the exterior of the main wall layer, this value
is “0”.
Casing Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
2
Managing
Files
4
5 8
6 7
Managing
Files
Mfr. Offset - can be set to decrease Reveal is the dimension from the outside of
1
the nominal size of all windows based the sash to the inside of the casings.
on a manufacturer’s standard value. Positive Lintel - Selecting the check box cre-
values decrease the sash size, but keep the 4
ates a butt joint between the side cas-
nominal size the same. ings and the Top casings.
Interior /Exterior radio buttons con-
2 If there is a lintel, you can specify how far it
trol the values below, as well as the Extends beyond the edges of the side cas-
view, to the inside or the outside of the win- ing. A value of 1 extends it to the edge of the
dow. vertical casing.
Casing- Width controls the width Check Wrap to have the head casing mod-
3
Defaults
dimension of the side casings. eled with returns at the ends.

Setup
Top Width controls the width of the Lintel Sill adds a windows sill. You can
or head casing. If your casings are mitered 5
define Extends and Wrap act just like
this value should equal the Width. Lintel.
113
Apron - Selecting the check box adds Suppress Casing - Selecting the
6 7
an apron below the sill. The apron check box creates a window with no
extends with the sill. trim details. The sill remains if you have
specified one.
Show Color - Displays the preview in
8
color.
Lites Tab
5
1
2
3
4
6
Lites Across - Specify the number of Lites in fixed and Lites in mov-
1 4
horizontal lites in each portion of sash. able are check boxes allowing you to
Lites Vertical - Specify the number specify either one or both of applicable win-
2 dow sections to have the divided lites.
of vertical lites in each portion of the
sash.
3
the muntins in the window.
Lites in fixed Lites in moveable
Special Type - Select a configuration preview of each style in the dialog to see how
5
of lites from the menu. You can see a each style is modeled.
114
Normal style is the most common, with the also a 3040 fixed glass arch top window
Managing
muntin bars going horizontally and verti- (arch height 12) with regular rays. The arch
cally. top window cannot have concentric rays.
Files
Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to
divide up the lites.
but with all the central muntin bars removed,
Managing
leaving only the two outside muntin bars
Files
both horizontally and vertically. To be effec-
tive, both the Lites across and the Lites verti-
cal should be set between 6 and 8.
Managing
style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin
bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical
Files
muntin bars above it. To be effective, both
the Lites across and the Lites vertical should Shutters - Check here if you would
7
be set between 4 and 8. like to have shutters on the exterior of
Round Top - A window must be the window.
6
Managing
defined with an Arch to have these Specify Width - Sizes the width of the
Files
options available. shutters.
Ray Count - A circle or arch top window Outside Casing- Check here if you want
may have up to 10 rays. If rays are added, the shutter to be hinged at the outside edge of
any Lites across and Lites vertical which are the side casing.
specified are confined to the part of the win-
Managing
Circle Top Shutters - If your window is
dow below the circle top or arch top. The arched, you have the opportunity to show
Files
rays specify the number of radial muntin arched shutters as well. The arch matches the
bars, so there is one more pane of glass than geometry of the window.
the number of rays specified.
Louver - Select this check box to place lou-
Concentric - In circle top windows only, vers in the central portion of the each shutter.
rays may also be defined as being concentric If this is unchecked they are modeled with
or not. Normally the rays start at the center solid panels. The louvers are the traditional
point of the roadside top and fan out. If con-
centric is checked, the rays start from the
innermost concentric muntin bar.
Following is an example of a 3040 fixed
Defaults
glass window. In all cases, Lites across is set

Setup
to 3, and Lites vertical is set to 3. The circle

top window is shown first with no rays, then
with regular and concentric rays. There is
115
type, positioned to shield the sun when the The following illustrates a few of the possi-
shutters are closed, so they may appear back- bilities for shutters:
wards in the open position.
NOTE: All the window types default to

having 1 lite across and 1 lite vertical, in
both movable and the fixed. Because the
fixed window in a Triple Sliding window is
twice the size of the movable windows,
the fixed section has a vertical muntin bar.
To eliminate this, uncheck Lites in fixed for
triple sliding windows.
Shape Tab
1
2
3
4
6
7
5
Any type of non-library window may be matches the window height.

shaped. Once you customize the shape it
becomes a fixed glass window. 4 Check Top Left Corner to add an
inside left corner or single center peak
The Window Width is displayed. It to the window.
1
may be changed in the General tab. Define the Height of new inside left corner,
Left Height - Specify the height at and the distance From Left where the cor-
2
upper left corner. Unless changed, this ner begins.
matches the window height.
5 Check Top Right Corner to add an
Right Height - Specify the height at inside right corner to the window.
3
upper right corner. Unless changed, this
116
Define the Height of new right inside cor- top window. Both the left and right heights
Managing
ner, and the distance From Left where the are reset to the same value.
corner begins.
Files
Raise Bottom - allows you to raise
7
6 The Revert button restores the win- one of the bottom corners up by a
dow to its original settings for window defined value. Use the At Right or At Left
type and whether it was an arch top or circle option to select which corner is raised.
Managing
Arch Tab
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
3
4
5
Managing
6
Files
Managing
Files
Type - Use the menu to select a type of Reflect - Select the check box to
1 4
arch. reflect the arch from top to bottom and
Height - Controls the height of some remove the window sill.
2
arches. Arch on Left -Select the check box to
5
Radius - Controls the radius of some restrict the shape of the arch to the left
3
Defaults
side of the window. The right leg is straight.

Setup
arches, can be used in conjunction with

Height.
117
Arch on Right - Select the check box

6
to restrict the shape of the arch to the
right side of the window. The left leg is
straight.
Molding Tab
2 3 4
Interior/Exterior radio buttons spec- Lintel - Select Choose to specify a

1 3
ify which side of the window you are custom molding for the head casing.
working on. The view changes to reflect the Select Clear to delete any previously speci-
selections that you have made. fied moldings.
Casing - Select Choose to specify a Sill - Select Choose to specify a cus-
2 4
custom molding from the Library. tom molding for the sill. Select Clear
Select Clear to clear any previous choice to delete any previously specified moldings.
made.
118
Cabinet Default Setup
Material Tab
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
The Material tab allows you to specify a Click Select Material or click in one of
Files
material to the various parts of the window. the preview boxes to open the Select Mate-
First select the part of the window to change. rial dialog.
Cabinet Default Setup
Managing
Files
Each type of cabinet has a default definition Double-click the Cabinet button (or
for height, width, depth, distance from floor, choose Options> Defaults Setup> Cabinet
etc. Default settings are set in the Cabinets Defaults) to set defaults for base, wall and
Defaults dialog. Before you begin placing full height cabinets.
too many cabinets in your plan, you may
Cabinets may be modified individually or in
Managing
want to go through this complete dialog and
a group after they are created.
Files
define as many of the parameters as you can.
Once you place cabinets, you can edit them
individually and make copies of any modi-
fied cabinet. Copies of any modified cabinet
type retains all the modifications made.
Most cabinet default settings are not
dynamic. The following values are dynamic,
and will change whenever the default cabinet
is changed: Separation, Splash Height
and Thickness, Counter Top Over-
hang and Thickness, Toe Kick Height
Defaults
and Depth, and all Materials.

Setup
119
Cabinet Default Dialog

This is the first dialog you see. The General section applies to all cabinets.
The other buttons accesses only the settings
for a particular cabinet type. When you finish
with a dialog box you return to this dialog.
Click Done at the bottom of the dialog to
exit.
General
Under the General tab you can set the Mini-
mum Cabinet Width and the Width
Increment that cabinets snap to when
dragged with the mouse.
You may want to set both of these values spe-

cifically for a particular manufacturers. This
helps you quickly place and resize cabinets
with your mouse.
Base, Full Height, Wall Cabinets

Although these are three different types of may not be available for all three cabinets.
cabinets, each with their own settings, the Go through all three dialogs before you begin
dialogs for each are the same. Some options setting cabinets.
120
General Tab
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
Files
3
4
5
6
Managing
7
Files
8
9 12
10 13
Managing
11
Files
Door Style - Here you can define a Height - This is the measurement from
1 3
door style from the menu, or select a the bottom of the cabinet to the top of
Managing
door style from the library. As you select and the cabinet. For base cabinets, this dimension
redefine door styles, the preview box updates includes the countertop depth.
Files
to show the changes. There are three choices, Width - This is the dimension across
Plain (or slab) doors, or Framed (panel 4
the cabinet as you view it in elevation.
doors), or Library. Selecting Library does the This does not include the counter top
exact same thing as clicking on the Library overhang.
button.
Depth - This is the dimension from
Special - Select a special type to 5
2 front to back of the cabinet. This does
define the shape of the selected cabinet. not include the door thickness.
The options are normal, end cabinet, radius
Floor to Bottom - Specify a
end. pen. radius, or angled front. Library 6
doors cannot be used with radius end or pen. distance. For base and full height
cabinets, this is usually 0. Increase this value
Defaults
radius cabinets.
Setup
by at least 1/16” to eliminate the toe kick. If a

Specification - Depending on the type of toe kick height has been defined, raising a
cabinet (Base, Wall, or Full Height), these cabinet off the floor will not remove the toe
values change. kick.
121
Back Splash Height - On base cabi- Toe Kick Height/Depth - The first
7 10
nets, you can specify the height of the value is the dimension from the floor to
backsplash. This dimension is from the top the top of the toe kick. The second value is
of the countertop to the top of the splash. from the front of the cabinet, back towards
Select the Side check box to have the backs- the wall. This is not an option for wall cabi-
plash return forward the depth of the counter nets.
top. Name/Code - Enter a name here that
11
Back Splash Thickness - This is used in the Material List for this cabi-
8
dimension is the actual thickness of the net.
material used for the backsplash. This value Label - The Cabinet Label is
can also be for a wall cabinet also. 12
printed below its picture in the dialog.
Counter - The first value is the thick- The cabinet label defines the type and size of
9
ness of the counter top. This dimension the cabinet, and is not editable. The labels
starts at the cabinet height and is measured will display in Plan View if Cabinet Labels
down towards the floor. are set to display in the Layers dialog. They
The second field is the counter top overhang. also appear in the Material List unless a
It is measured from the frame of the cabinet Name/Code is entered
box, to the front edge of the counter top. This Show Color - Select the check box to
13
is not an option for wall or full height cabi- display the cabinet in the defined
nets. materials
122
Cabinet Front Tab
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
Files
3 4
Managing
Files
1 When you first open the Cabinet Front height changes the display and the specifica-
Managing
tab, Item Type and Item Height are tion of the cabinet. This value affects only
Files
both grayed out. Click on the preview in the the height of the cabinet front, not the parts
location where a door or drawer would be such as drawer sides.
located. Item Type and Item Height are now Delete - Click here if you wish to
activated, defining the area you clicked on. 3
delete the specified item. When you
delete a face item, the height of the lowest
Managing
The program will make sure that the item is usually increased to make up the
Files
height of your face items will always be difference.
the same as your cabinet face height.
Add New - Click here to add a new
When necessary, the program will insert a 4
blank area at the bottom to fill in any gaps component to this cabinet.
or delete the lowest face item when there
is not enough room. Options
Items 5 The check boxes in the Options section

set features for the cabinet. Other
Item Type - Use this menu to redefine options may be available in the Cabinet
1
an existing component or define a new Specification dialog.
component. Scroll through the menu to see • Inset Doors may be selected for all cabi-
Defaults
your choices. nets. This option will make all door and
Setup
Item Height - Once a part has been drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
2 instead of overlaying it.
defined, you can specify in inches the
height of the component. Changing the
123
• Doors On Back may be selected if the slab doors. It does not affect framed or
cabinet back is not attached to anything. library doors. The bevel width, as viewed
This back will match the front. from the front has a maximum value of 3”.
• Glass Doors may be defined for any Separation - Defines the space between
cabinet. doors, drawers, and face items. A European
• Flat Sides may be added to base and full style cabinet has a zero separation.
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides
eliminates the counter overhang and toe The program will try to maintain a single
kick area on the exposed sides of the separation between all face items. When
cabinet. you add or delete a face item, separations
• Stile Between Doors - Select the will usually be added or deleted with
them.
check box to have double doors and
double drawers separated by a stile.
This has no effect on other item types. Left and Right Stile - Define the exposed
width to the left or right of all face items.
Bevel - Type in a value to apply a beveled
These can be set independently.
edge to edges of drawers and plain doors.
This affects all of the cabinet drawers and
Moldings Tab
1
2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
You can define multiple molding profiles for tops, but a different crown molding that ties
each type of cabinet. For example, you may the tops of the walls cabinets and full height
want a wood edge to go around the counter cabinets together.
124
Molding - Use the menu to select a enter both positive and negative values in
1
Managing
molding for the cabinet. If you have this field, but the molding will not display if
assigned moldings to your default cabinet the it is completely above or below the cabinet.
Files
list has some choices. These moldings are Once an offset is defined, select From Top or
stored with individual cabinets in all other From Bottom to specify a reference.
cases.
From Top is measured between the
Add New - If no moldings have been 8
2 top of the cabinet and the top of the
Managing
selected, or if you want to specify a molding.
Files
new molding click the button to open the
Molding Library. This adds a new molding to From Bottom is measured between the
the list. bottom of the molding and the bottom of the
cabinet.
Delete - Click here to delete the cur-
3 Show Color - Select the check box to
rent selection of molding on the cabi- 9
Managing
net. This does not remove it from the list, but display the preview in color.
Files
it does remove it from being displayed on the
cabinet.
Molding Specification
Managing
This specification allows you to modify a
particular molding profile by increasing or
Files
decreasing its scale.
Choose - Click here to open the
4
Library Browser to the molding library.
If you select a molding using the Choose
Managing
button, you will replace the current molding
Files
in the list. This option substitutes one mold-
ing for another, it does not add a molding to
the list.
Height - This is the vertical dimension
5
for the molding face that attaches to the
cabinet. This value is initially set from the
molding profile that was selected but may be
adjusted to scale the molding vertically.
Width - Specify a width for the hori-
6
zontal extents of the molding profile.
Offset - This value defines the dis-
Defaults
7
Setup
tance that the molding is offset from the

top or the bottom of the cabinet. You can
125
Material Tab
The Material tab allows you to define a To apply a material, select the cabinet com-
material for different parts of the cabinet. For ponent and then click Select Material to
each type of cabinet you must specify the open the Select Material dialog.
material definitions.
126
Floor Defaults Setup
Floor Defaults Setup
Managing
Files
General Tab
Managing
Files
1
2
7
Managing
3
Files
4
Managing
Files
5
6
In this dialog you specify information that

1 Define the Floor Height for the
Managing
the program uses to create the 3D model. Ini- selected floor. If you are on the first
Files
tially you can only set the defaults for the floor, you cannot change this setting. The
first floor of any building. The program uses default height for the first floor is always 0.
the setting from your first floor to create the Zero is the first floor datum reference for the
second floor. Once you build a second or rest of the building.
subsequent floor you can change the floor On upper floors, changing the floor height
defaults by selecting Options>Defaults changes the ceiling height on the current
Setup> Floor Defaults. Other information floor as well as the floor below.
such as molding and finishes can be set in the
Floor Defaults dialog. 2 Define Ceiling Height relative to the
floor height. Once you set the ceiling
Select Options>Defaults Setup> Floor height, the relation is not locked. If you
Defaults to open the Floor 1 Defaults dia-
Defaults
change an intermediate floor height the ceil-

Setup
log. The settings in this dialog are dynamic. ing heights above and below change.
They immediately affect every room on the
floor, unless rooms were modified individu-
ally.
127
Stem Wall Height - Define the Living Area To - Defines what wall
3 6
height of the stem wall for the founda- layer the floor area is calculated to.
tion. This is the height from the top of the This option is only set on the first floor.
footing to the bottom of the floor framing.
7 A cross section diagram displays. The
The Platform Thickness displays. arrows show how the model is adjusted
4
This is set in the Framing dialog. if the various settings are changed.
5 If Use Above Floor’s Platform for

Ceiling is checked, the ceiling height
is set at the bottom of the floor joists.
Molding Tab
1
2
3
4
5
Crown Molding, Chair Rail or If you do not define a custom profile but you
1
Base Molding can be defined per define the Height of the molding, the pro-
floor or per room. Specifying the molding gram places a flat molding profile that
profile in the Floor Defaults dialog defines appears in 3D.
them on the entire floor. This can be overrid-
den by a setting in the Room Specification 2 Use the Choose button to open the
Library Browser to the Molding
dialog. Library. Select a molding profile from the
128
Framing Defaults Setup
Library and minimize or close the browser. A Height - Define the height of the
4
Managing
view of the molding profile displays in the molding. The width does not resize. To
dialog. reset the moldings to the floor defaults, type
Files
a "d" in the box. A zero width defines no
3 Select Clear to delete the selection for molding.
the custom molding profile.
Distance Above Floor - Define the
5
measurement to the top of molding.
Managing
(For baseboard the measurement is to the
Files
bottom of the molding).
Material Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
2
The default settings for materials on the If your Default Wall Type has a material
entire floor are in the Material tab. Any new defined in the surface layers, that material
Managing
rooms which are created are defined with the overrides this specification.
materials specified here. Every room may be
Files
changed individually as well. 1 The parts of the room are displayed
here. Select one.
The default flooring materials for Select Material - Click here to open
Kitchen/Bathrooms and Balconies/Decks are 2
the Select Material dialog.
defined in the Default Materials dialog. For
more information see “Default Materials 3 A preview of the material displays.
Setup” on page 143.

The type of framing, its size and spacing, and blies. When automatic framing is generated,
Defaults
Setup
other details are specified for the major com- the program uses this information to build
ponents of the 3D model in this dialog. The the framing.
components are the floor platforms, the ceil-
ing platforms, the walls, and the roof assem-
129
Select Options> Defaults Setup> Framing Each tab specifies framing that correspond to
Defaults or double-click the Joists or specific floors or assemblies. Since framing
is represented in Plan View drawn over the
Rafters tools to open the Framing walls that support it, their are two options for
Defaults dialog. each floor other than the foundation. Each
The Framing dialog opens to the tab corre- floor can either have a ceiling or a floor plat-
sponding to the current floor. You can switch form framed above it. In the case of the foun-
between tabs to define all of the settings. dation (F) tab, only a first floor platform can
be framed above it.
Floor Framing Tabs
1 1
2
3
4 7
5
6
8
Framing for platforms is defined on Use Framing Reference - The

1 4
tabs that correspond to floors in the starting point for framing layout is the
model. There are two sections for each floor, Framing Reference marker. If a reference has
Ceiling Above and Subfloor for Floor been placed, the center of the first joist is
Above. placed at this point and spacing goes from
Spacing - Enter a value for the spac- there. Rafters will be placed directly above
2 the ceiling joists.
ing of joists. If the platform is a floor
assembly, you can specify a Rim Joist with If you do not select the Use Framing Ref-
the check box. erence check box, the program positions
ceiling joists so that they offset rafters to one
3 Specify if the framing members Lap or side.
Butt over a bearing wall. The lap is
eight inches (200 mm) centered over the sup-
5 The Joist Width box determines the
port. joist's actual thickness.
6 The Joist depth box determines the

joist's actual depth.
130
Subfloor Thickness is the actual Type - Select the type of joist from the
7 8
Managing
thickness for the floor sheathing. menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist,
glulam, engineered lumber, lvl/ steel-I and
Files
The program adds the joist depth to the sub-
floor thickness to determine the platform steel box. Changing the type does not affect
thickness in the Floor Defaults dialog. how the framing is done or how it appears in
Plan View or 3D Views. It does, however,
If the material Concrete has been applied to change the Material List entries for this fram-
the floor, the program gets the platform
Managing
ing.
thickness from the slab thickness in the
Files
Foundation Setup dialog.
Wall Framing Tabs
Managing
Files
3
1 4
2
Managing
Files
6 5
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are changes to individual components. Framing
Managing
all referenced by the program to determine items can be added, deleted, resized and
how walls are framed. The settings on these repositioned within the model.
Files
three tabs define how automatic framing gen- Once you have made changes to the model
erates and how framing is calculated for the that affect framing, and have Rebuilt
Material List. Before you begin drawing a Walls/Floors/Ceilings you must open the
building, take the time and set up your fram- Framing dialog and rebuild any framing
ing settings in this dialog. Although you can areas that are affected. For example if you
change your settings, defining these early move or resize a window, you must rebuild
saves you time. wall framing. If you make the footprint larger
Framing is not built until you open the you must rebuild wall framing and any roof
Framing dialog and select the check box on or platform framing that is affected.
each tab that says Build Wall Framing,
Build Ceiling Framing etc. Once you
Defaults
Setup
have built a framing model you can make
131
Wall Mitre Ends of Angle Walls

Stud Thickness - Specify the actual Mitre Plate Ends - Select the check
1 5
thickness of the studs. The depth of the box to mitre the ends of the top and bot-
stud is set by the wall's main layer thickness tom plates and corners that are not right
if the material is set to one of the Framing angles. If cleared, the top and bottom plates
materials. will be butted together.
Stud Spacing - Specify the spacing Rotate End Studs - Select the check box
2
of the studs. This spacing starts from to have the studs closest to the mitre end be
the framing reference mark. rotated to the angle of the mitre cut. If it is
cleared, the studs will remain perpendicular
Plates to the angle of the walls.
Build Wall Framing Details from
3 Specify The Number of Top 6
Exterior - Select the check box to
Plates. A single bottom plate is
always provided. have framing details for exterior walls be dis-
played from the exterior.
4 Specify the Thickness of top and bot-
tom plates.
Openings Tab
2 5
3 6
4
Add for Rough Opening - sets the If you need to change the rough opening set-
1
default amount to add to nominal open- ting for any window, double-click on it and
ing sizes to produce the rough opening size. change the value in the R.O. box.
Entering a value here defines the value for Trimmer - Define the number of trim-
rough opening, on the General tab of the 2
mers (studs that support headers) on
Window or Door Specification dialogs. each side of an opening. This number may be
increased for various sized openings.
132
Max Bay Trimmers - Trimmers for order to modify it using the Window Speci-
3
Managing
the overall bay or bow window may be fication dialog. You are allowed to resize it
suppressed by entering zero into Max Bay larger, until there is room for the thinner
Files
Trimmers. Enter “1” to have one trimmer on trimmer or for no trimmer at all. Once a com-
each side, and a greater number to have the ponent is resized in this way, it will retain its
number of trimmers determined by the Dou- size if at all possible while the overall bay is
ble Trimmer At and Triple Trimmer At moved or resized. If the bay is resized in
Managing
values used above. such a way that the component becomes too
large to fit at all, the component resumes its
Files
A bay window whose top is lower than the
top of the wall it is in will usually have a default behavior, resizing as its containing
header spanning the entire bay. Trimmers are bay window is resized.
usually not needed for this header since the
5 The Sill Thickness can be set here.
trimmers in the wall will support it. The This is the size of the framing below the
Managing
same holds true for most bow windows. window, not the window sill itself.
Files
Bay Component Thickness -
4 6 A Double Sill may also be specified
Enter the dimensions for a thinner trim- for all windows.
mer which is used if a standard trimmer does
not fit.
Managing
Space can be tight in a bay or bow window,
and the desired size of component window
Files
may not fit into the bay or bow if standard
size trimmers are used. If this is the case, the
program will omit the trimmers, assuming
that a metal bracket or other means is used
Managing
for header support. You may enter the dimen-
sions for a thinner trimmer into Bay Com-
Files
ponent Trimmer, which will be used if it
will fit but a standard trimmer will not. The
default for this is 3/4 inch (20mm).
Bay window components default to a size
that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
is first created. When the bay as a whole is
moved and resized, its components automati-
cally resize such that a standard trimmer fits.
If you select the bay and then use the Tab key
to select the individual component window
Defaults
on which you clicked, you can resize that

Setup
component either by selecting it and drag-

ging from a side handle, or by selecting it
and clicking the Open Item button in
133
Headers Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
4 If the top of the rough opening is closer

Chief Architect does not do any structural to the top plate than the value in Max
analysis, and is dependent upon the Depth, a solid header is produced to fill the
individual user's design input. The entire area. This disables the building of
program has no engineering capabilities, short cripple studs between the top of the
and does not calculate loads or bearings. header top and bottom of the plate. The
The numbers entered here and default
default of 12 1/16 inch works well for 6’8”
values supplied by this system are
hypothetical examples, and are not headers in 8’0” walls.
5 The Type can be set for headers just as

intended for construction purposes.
Consult your local building authorities, or it is for joists.
select a licensed engineer for structural
calculations. Precut - Select the check box to show
6
precut headers in the Material List. If
1 You can specify the header Depth this is cleared, the Material List produces a
dependent on the opening width. total lineal footage for all headers. When
checked, each different length of precut
2 Specify the header Thickness. header is listed separately.
3 Enter the Count of boards required to
fill the cavity. Using this number, the
program generates a count of header stock
for you in the Material List.
134
Roof Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
5
3
Managing
Files
Spacing - Specify the rafter spacing.
1 3 If Angled Dor-
This spacing is used when automati- mer Hole is
cally producing rafters and it also sets the ini- checked, a gable roof
dormer creates a five
Managing
tial offset value for the Multiple Copy
button. sided hole in a roof
Files
plane, with the two top
Use Framing Reference - Select
2 edges formed by the
the check box if you want to use a valleys of the dormer.
defined starting point for rafter layout. An angled double-
header runs between
Managing
The disadvantage of using the framing the doubled rafters on
Files
reference is that common rafters on either
one side to the ridge.
side of a hip rafter will not meet in the
same place. If the framing reference is not On the opposite side, a shorter angled dou-
used the automatic framing utility starts bled header frames the other valley.
common rafter spacing from each end of If the Angled Dor-
the horizontal ridges, which results in
mer Hole check box
common rafters on either side of hip jacks
not meeting. You often want this checked is cleared, a rectangu-
for a gable roof, but may not for a hip roof. lar hole is framed to
contain the dormer
area, with its double
headers placed where
the peak of the dormer
Defaults
Setup
roof meets the main

roof plane. Rafters are
placed within this hole at the top along the
valleys formed by the dormer roof sections.
135
If the top cross headers do not fit within the the plan or 3D Views. It does, however,
roof plane, angled headers are produced change the Material List entries for this fram-
regardless of the state of the check box. ing.
4 The Type of the rafter material can be 5 The Width and Depth for Rafter,
set. Changing the type does not affect Ridge, Fascia, Eave Fascia and
how the framing is done or how it appears in Lookouts may be set in the Roof tab.
Trusses Tab
1 3
2
The parameters set in this tab apply to any Bottom Chord. Changing these values
subsequently drawn trusses. They can be may cause different truss configurations such
overridden for any selected group of trusses as kingpost, queenpost, fink, howe, fan, dou-
in the Truss Specification dialog. The pro- ble fink, double how, etc. to be represented.
gram uses these values to model trusses for Since these are not engineered trusses, you
graphic representation only. These are not can experiment to see what type of truss
engineered trusses. You should consult an might be possible.
engineer to have your trusses designed.
Member Depth - Specify depth of Truss Spacing
1
Top Chord. Specify depth of Bottom To set the spacing you must draw the first
Chord. Specify depth of the Webbing. truss. Once a truss has been drawn you can
specify the spacing by selecting it and dou-
2 For triangular trusses, check Require
Kingpost to require a vertical member ble-clicking on the Multiple Copy button.
from the roof peak to the bottom chord. The Copy Layout Distances dialog will
open. This dialog sets the truss spacing as
3 Under Maximum Span, set the maxi- well as spacing for CAD items. The spacing
mum length between junctions of the
supporting webbing to the Top Chord and
136
for joists, rafters and wall studs displays but
Managing
cannot be set in this dialog. These spacings
are set in the Framing dialog.
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Material Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
2
The Material tab sets the materials used for
3 A preview of the material displays in
framing items appearing in 3D and Render the two boxes.
Views.
1 Select the framing component to

define.
Select Material - Click to select a
2
new material. The program counts indi-
Defaults
vidual pieces of lumber used in the model,

Setup
these material specifications are not be used

for material take-offs.
137
Dimension Defaults Setup

You can control how you use dimensions and The dialog has three tabs: Setup, Locate
how they display in the Dimension Setup Items and Arrowheads.
dialog. This dialog defines the Automatic The settings in this dialog are saved with the
reach distance for items, what size the plan. Once you have the settings correct it is
dimensions should be, arrowheads, etc. A recommended that you save the setting in
solid understanding of the various options your profile.pl1 file for use in future plans.
available in this dialog is important. For more information see “Master Settings
Select Options>Defaults Setup>Dimen- for Profile Plans” on page 146.
sion Defaults, or double-click the Dimen-
sion button to access the Dimension Setup
dialog.
Setup Tab
9
1 10
2
11
3
4 12
13
5
14
15
6 16
7 17
18
8 19
Eighth Inches - Select the check box have an exact equivalent in eighths will be
1
to display dimensions in abbreviated rounded up to the nearest eighth (i.e. 7' 6-
eighths. For instance, 5' 3-1/2” would display 3/16” would round to 7'6"2).
as 5'3" 4, with the 4 representing 4/8” which 1/16 Inches - Select the check box to
is equal to 1/2”. A dimension which does not 2
display dimensions in fraction format.
This is the more precise of the two options.
138
0" - Select the check box to display whole When using the metric system the default
Managing
number of inches even if it is zero, and to value is 10 mm. The maximum value
place a dash between feet and inches. If allowed is 480mm.
Files
1/16th Inches is also checked, the double Unrestricted - Select this option to allow
quote (“) will always appear after the dimen- movement increments of 1/16th inch.
sion.
New Lines Inches Only - Select
For example, when 1/16 Inches is checked 8
the check box to have all subsequently
Managing
but 0" is not checked, the following dimen- created Manual Dimensions show inches
Files
sion would display: 7' 1/2. Yet if 0" is also only (37" instead of 3’-1”). This does not
checked, the same value would display: 7'- 0 affect existing dimensions. Clear the check
1/2”. box to return to drawing Manual Dimensions
3 Check Short Extensions to have using feet and inches.
short, uniform-length extension lines
Managing
Number Height - Specify the scaled
created instead of the extension lines reach- 9
height, in inches or mm, of dimension
Files
ing the item it locates. numbers. 6" will print a 1/8” tall number at
Number Above Line - Select the 1/4’ = 1’ scale.
4
check box to have all the dimensions Min. Number Size - Specifies mini-
display above the dimension line, rather than 10
mum screen size (in pixels) for dimen-
Managing
in the center of the line. sion numbers. The screen dimensions will be
Files
5 Check Imperial and/or Metric to no smaller than this value. This does not
define the units which are used for dis- affect printed output. To see the dimension
playing dimensions. Although Imperial plans numbers on the screen at the printing scale,
always use the Imperial dimensions, dimen- set this value to 0. Changing this value will
sions may be changed to display in Metric affect all dimensions immediately.
Managing
only or in both Metric and Imperial units Moving Speed - (allowed values 1-9)
Files
simultaneously. These options are not avail- defines how closely the mouse and the
able in Metric plans. selected item move together while dragging.
Wall & Opening Snap Unit - “1” means 1:1, or that both move at exactly
6
Defines the incremental units that are the same speed. “8” means 1:8, or that the
allowed when placing walls, doors and win- mouse must move 8 units to make the
dows, or when moving an item with the selected item move by 1 unit. (In other
mouse. The dimensions appear in the toolbar words, the selected item moves 1/8th as fast
as an item is dragged. This does not affect as the mouse.)
how Dimensions are created. This can be used to move walls and openings
Inches - Select this option to restrict more accurately. If you wish change the
7
the snap unit to a specified number of moving speed temporarily, press a number
Defaults
Setup
inches. Change the value if desired. The key (along the top of the keyboard) while
default value is 1. Fractions are allowed. The moving a wall or door or window. The mov-
maximum value allowed is 48.
139
ing speed will be changed for that move only, Min. Dimen Area - Specify the mini-
16
and will return to normal as soon as the mum enclosed area needed for the
selected item is released. Automatic Dimension tool to generate
Automatic Reach - Specify how far dimensions.
12
automatic dimension lines will “reach” Current Layer - Defines the User
to locate items along exterior walls that are 17
layer which manually drawn dimension
set back. The default is 192 inches. If exte- lines will be placed on. Enter a Layer number
rior walls are set back farther than this, a sec- between 100-199 to place manual dimen-
ond set of dimension lines will be produced sions on a User layer.
to dimension the set back walls.
The default is NONE, which means that
manual dimensions will be placed on the
Automatic
Architectural layer - Manual Dimensions.
Reach set to 16'
18 Check the Auto box next to Locate
Opening to have the Automatic
Dimension tool locate doors and windows
automatically. If the check is removed, open-
Automatic ings may still be located using the Manual
Reach set to 20' Dimension tool.
19 Check the Auto box next to Overall

Dimension to have the Automatic
Dimension tool locate the overall exterior
Manual Reach - Specify how far dimensions.
13
manually drawn dimension lines will
“reach” to locate walls and/or items specified The default settings for dimension line
in the Locate Items tab. Color, Style and Line Weight are defined
in the Layers dialog on the Architectural
1st Line Offset - Specify the dis-
14 layers Manual Dimensions and Automatic
tance (in scale inches or mm) between Dimensions. If the dimension line was
the exterior wall and the first automatic placed on a numbered CAD layer, then
dimension line. these attributes are set by that layer.
Line Separation - Specify the dis-
15
tance (in scale inches or mm) between
automatic dimension lines.
140
Locate Items Tab
Managing
Files
1 9
2 10
Managing
3
Files
4
5
Managing
6 11
Files
7 12
8
The Locate Items tab defines whether or not well. The surface dimensioned will be either
dimension lines locate specific types of the outside surface or the main layer surface,
Managing
items. Changes made in this box affect only depending on the option selected above.
Files
new dimension lines, not those already
drawn. 5 Checking Internal Only will cause
the dimensions to ignore the interior
Walls - This section affects both the Auto- surface of exterior walls. It will still locate
matic and Manual Dimension tools. both surfaces of an interior wall, but will not
Managing
display the wall thickness. Internal only is
1 Choose Surfaces to locate exterior
Files
walls by outer surface and interior walls
by one of their surfaces.
2 Choose Main Layer Surfaces to Both Wall Surfaces

locate exterior walls by the outer sur-
face of the main layer and interior walls by a
main layer surface.
3 Check Interior Wall Centers to

have dimension lines locate the centers
of interior walls. (Exterior walls will be
dimensioned by the option selected above.) Both Wall Surfaces & Internal only
Defaults
4 Check Both Wall Surfaces to have available only when Both Wall Surfaces is
Setup
dimension lines locate both surfaces of checked.

walls. It will dimension the wall thickness as
141
Cabinets - Choose none, one, or both Sides - Select the check box to locate
10
locate options. This section affects only both sides of windows and doors. This
Manual Dimensions. does not dimension the rough opening. It
Sides - Select the check box to locate dimensions to the nominal width defined by
6 the user.
cabinet sides. The sides must be per-
pendicular to the dimension line.
If neither box is checked, Automatic
Corners - Select the check box to
7 dimensions will default to locating the
locate the corners of all cabinets within centers of openings. Manually drawn
the manual reach area. Angled cabinets will dimensions will not locate openings at all.
be dimensioned to their corners at a right
angle to the dimension line. The cabinets CAD Items: Affects only Manual Dimen-
fronts or sides do not need to be perpendicu- sions of 2D items.
lar or parallel to the dimension line.
Line/Sides - Select the check box to
Electrical (does not save) - Select
11
8 locate lines and sides which are perpen-
the check box to locate electrical items. dicular to the dimension line. If the lines or
You can use this option once you are ready to sides are not perpendicular to the dimension
precisely position electrical items. Dimen- line they will not be dimensioned. In CAD
sions to electrical items are for the current mode dimensions will automatically locate
session only. They do not save. perpendicular CAD lines or sides whether
Openings - Select the check box for the this is selected or not.
preferred method of dimensioning windows Ends/Corners - Select the check box
and doors. This section affects both the Auto-
12
to locate all ends of lines or corners of
matic and Manual Dimension tools. polylines, no matter what angle they are in
Centers - Select the check box to relation to the dimension line.
9
locate dimensions to the center of win-
dows and doors.
142
Default Materials Setup
Arrowheads Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
3
The Arrowheads tab controls the arrowhead Fill Color - If the arrowhead has an
2
style of all dimension lines which have not area which can be filled, select the
Managing
been set individually. You can assign differ- desired color from the list. There are 17
ent types of arrowheads, fill the arrowheads options set by the program.
Files
with different colors and define the size. Size - This number is the length of the
3
Type - Choose the style of arrowhead arrowhead in scale inches (mm). It is
1
from the list. the length of the arrowhead, not the line
attached to it. If you want the arrowhead to
Managing
be 1/8” long when printed, and you plan to
Files
print at 1/4”=1’ scale, you should set the size
to 6.
Managing
Almost every object is assigned a material
Files
and each material can has a very specific def-
inition that enables you to render them accu-
rately as well as do meaningful take-offs.
These settings help you detail your 3D and
Render Views.
Defaults
Setup
143
Default Materials Dialog
1
3
2
1 The list of items appear here. Select one 3 A preview of the defined material dis-
to assign a material to it. plays here.
2 To define a material click Select

Material. The Select Material dialog
opens and you can pick any material that has
been defined.
144
Camera Defaults Setup
Managing
Files
The Camera Setup dialog defines camera
position, how the camera move with the tools
on the Camera toolbar, and how the camera
clips and captures views.
Managing
Default Tab
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
3
Managing
5
Files
Inches Each Move - Controls how Remove Wall Within - Removes the
1 5
many inches the camera move each view of walls with this distance of the
time you direct it to move right, left, for- camera.
wards or backwards. For interior views a
Managing
Both of these distances are measured as a
small number is good, but for exterior you radius from the Camera position.
Files
may want a larger increment.
Degrees Each Rotate - Defines
2
how many degrees the camera rotates
each time you direct it to. A setting of 90
degrees would rotate to each wall in a room
with just four rotates.
Height Above Floor - This defines
3
the height that the camera is above the
floor level for the current floor.
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies
4
Defaults
that the camera does not display an item

Setup
within this distance.
145
Master Settings for Profile Plans

When the program opens, the plan file it Now that you are familiar with the Default
opens is called profile.pl1. Profile.pl1 Setups for Chief Architect you can set up
should contain all of the information and set- your profile drawings. If your work is simple
tings that you use regularly. It is the default and you think you only want one profile then
template plan file for the program. When the the setup is simplified. If you want more than
program opens it, the file name is changed to one setup you need to develop a naming con-
untitled.pl1 to make sure that you do not vention and a file management systemso that
overwrite it. If you only need one set of you do not overwrite your default setting
default settings, define the settings in the files.
plan file, profile.pl1. Any changes made to either the profile.pl1 or
profilem.pl1 cause all subsequent new plans
to be created with the new default settings.
Creating Your Own profile.pl1

1. Start Chief Architect and select File> You can only have one file called profile.pl1
Open. in your installation directory. It must be
2. Select the plan file "profile.pl1" from the saved in this location if the program is to rec-
installation directory. ognize it. Every time you open the program
you open a plan file with these settings.
3. Go to the Defaults Setup menu and go
through each tab covered in this chapter. If you have more than one configuration that
After selecting OK on a tab Select File> you like to use, you can create additional
Save to save your changes. This saves plan files and do a File> Save As every time
the settings to profile.pl1. you open them for a new project. The pro-
gram cannot automate this process.
4. Do not draw anything in this plan. If you
draw on the profile plan, it will appear in
Updating profile.pl1
all other plans.
When you make a change to the settings
5. Once you have defined all the settings,
within a plan file, the profile.pl1 file is not
Select File> Close to save all of your
automatically updated. To include recent
changes. updates to your default settings you must
open the profile.pl1 plan file and make the
If you would like to restore your settings to change or do a File> Save As of the current
the settings shipped with the program,
plan file. If you do a File> Save As and name
copy the profile.pl1 file from the Chief 7.0
installation CD. it profile.pl1, make sure you have deleted
everything drawn in the file.
146
Chapter 8:
Layers
Layers
New in 7.0
• New Interface for Layer Tables • Ability to group select layers
• 150 additional layers • Ability to create Layer Sets that can be
Managing
• Increased layer control with Layer Sets shared between files
Files
General Information
Layers are used to organize and control the Layer attributes such as line weight, line
display of certain objects. Layers can be used style, and line color can be set for individual
Managing
in both the Plan View and Layout files to Layers.
Layers
Files
display the information you want to see.
The Layers dialog interface has dramatically
changed allowing greater control over the
display of Architectural and CAD items.
Managing
Layer Sets can now be created that allow
Files
you to quickly toggle between the settings
that you most commonly work with. Layer
Sets can be shared between files with the
File> Import> Layer Sets command.
Managing
When you click the Show Items button in
Files
a Plan, Section/Elevation, or Wall Elevation
View the Layers dialog opens. In a Layout
file, select a layout window and click the
Show Items button to view the Layers
dialog. The dialog contains three tabs to
Libraries
organize the Layers: Architectural,

Symbol
System and User.
147
Layers Dialog
4
3
5 6
Click the Show Items button to display On the System tab and the User tab, a red
the Layers dialog. The Layers dialog cross appears to the left of every layer
controls the display of items in Plan Views. which contains at least one item.
Items that are not displayed in Plan View

will be calculated when a 3D View is
generated, but they will not appear the 3D
View.
Layer Tabs Each tab consists of a table that displays the

1 There are three tabs of layers in the layers and their properties. Layers are
Layers dialog: Architectural, System, selected by clicking on them in the table. In
and User. CAD items can be placed on any this case, layer 10 "Roof planes" is selected.
numbered layer on the System or the User
tab. The program places objects on the Layer Tables
Architectural tab.
2 When you click a layer tab, the layers
appear in a table. Use the scroll bar to
scroll through the list of layers.
Architectural layers do not have an order but
are sometimes grouped with like items.
148
Layers Dialog
System and User layers are listed in Layer properties are the defined attributes of
ascending numerical order and are most specific layers. In this example, the
Layers
often grouped with like items. properties for layer 10 are displayed.
In the layer table there are eight columns that
3 Select a layer by highlighting it in the
display information regarding each layer. On layer table. The options in the
the Architectural tab the Layer column is Properties box are available. You can now
empty since these layers cannot be specify the properties for the selected
numbered. You cannot rename any layer(s). Color, Line Style and Line
Architectural layers, but you can rename the Weight. You can also specify if the layer
System and User layers. You cannot change displays or if it is locked.
the number of System or User layers.
Name: Some layers are already named,
The contents of the last six columns can all others are left blank and available
Managing
be redefined in the Properties box of the to be named and used for anything
Layers dialog. When you select a layer, you desired. Although CAD layers
Files
can edit its display properties at the bottom have a name, they are assigned
of the Layers dialog box. You can edit one numbers that define them.
layer at a time or multiple layers at the same
When you are setting a current
time. You can also quickly toggle the
layer, or defining what layer an
Managing
Displayed, Reference and Locked
object is stored on, you must spec-
attributes of any layer simply by clicking
Files
ify the number, not the name.
directly in the list of layers, under the
corresponding attributes column. Layer: This is the layer number. CAD
layers are listed by numbers,
Use the shift key or control key to select although they have names
multiple layers. Press Select All to select assigned to help describe what is
Managing
all layers in the table. Manipulate the shared on that layer.
Files
attributes for those layers via the controls in
the Properties box. If multiple layers are Display: Check to have all items on this
selected, Layer Name is shown as layer display in all Views.
"multiple layers". Ref: Check to have all items on this
layer display with the Reference
Managing
Layer Properties Floor.
Files
Each layer has three Properties and three Lock: Check to prevent accidental
Controls, which affect the display of items changes. Items on locked layers
on that layer. display, but they cannot be
CAD items can have their properties set selected, deleted, moved, or modi-
fied.
Managing
individually through the Edit CAD Item

Files
dialog. For more information see “Line Style Color: Define the color for the layer.
Dialog” on page 558. Style: Define the line style for the layer.
Size: Define the line width in pixels.
149
Layer Sets Current CAD Layer

Layer Sets are used to define and
4 5 You can specify the Current CAD
save the layer settings that you use layer from the Layers dialog. Enter a
often. As you begin to customize how you value in the field between 0-199. When you
work in the program, you realize that there click OK this layer is the current CAD layer.
are certain groups of layers, or layer settings,
that you use often. The first 100 layers, 0-99, should be
reserved for use by the program only. In
While working in a view, if you have layer
order to place CAD items on a User layer,
settings that you want to define as a Layer the current CAD layer should be set from
Set, open the Layers dialog and click the 100-199.
Duplicate button. Layer Sets are always
created as copies of the current layer settings. The name and number of the Current CAD
You are prompted to name the Layer Set. The Layer displays in the status bar of the Chief
new Layer Set matches the current layer Architect window.
settings.
6 The Set button is active once you have
selected a System or User layer in the
layer table. Click Set to make the selected
layer the current CAD layer.
Display Items in Reference Floor

When the Reference Floor is visible the Floor. Layer settings affect all floors related
layers Normal walls, Railings/No to the current floor.
locate and Windows are set to display in When a layer is defined to display in
the Layers dialog by default. If you would Reference Floor, it displays with the Color
like to see more information in the Reference defined for the Reference Floor in the
Floor, you can access the Layers dialog and Preferences dialog.
define which layers display in the Reference
1 A check in the Disp column affects
whether or not this layer displays in the
1 2 Working Floor. This does not affect display
of the Reference Floor.
2 A red ’R’ in the Ref. column indicates

that the layer displays with the
Reference Floor. Click the ’R’ or remove the
check in the Properties box to not display the
layer in the Reference Floor.
150
Architectural Layers
Architectural Layers
Layers
There are 30 Architectural layers in Plan Although you cannot rename layers on the
View. These cannot be deleted, renamed or Architectural tab of the Layers dialog, you
reordered in any way. These layers control do have control over the attributes of each
the 2D representation and display of objects layer.
modeled in the program.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
151
System Layers
User Layers
Cad Layers
When you are in CAD mode, the items you by toggling the Up or Down CAD layer
draw are placed on the Current CAD arrows on the toolbar.
Layer, unless a System layer has been
assigned by the program to that type of
object. In Plan or Section/Elevation View
you can change the Current CAD Layer To move to a layer much higher or lower,
click directly on the layer number and enter a
152
Layer Sets
new number in the Go to CAD Layer dialog Each layer has several attributes which affect
box. You can also set the Current CAD Layer every item on that layer. These attributes
Layers
directly from the Layers dialog. only affect CAD items which have not had
their color, line weight or line style modified
When you open the Layers dialog, a red plus
individually.
sign is shown in the icon to the left of every
System or User layer which contains at least
one CAD item.
Layer Sets
Layer Sets may be selected, added or shows two Layer Sets, Bathroom Plan and
deleted. Layer Sets can be used to define Default Set.
Managing
specific settings for layers in Plan, Section/
All new Layer Sets are copies of an existing
Elevation and Wall Elevation Views under
Files
Layer Set. To add a new Layer Set:
different circumstances. Each plan file can
have an unlimited number of Layer Sets. 1. Open the Layers dialog.
Each plan always has one Layer Set called 2. Select the Layer Set you want the new
Default Set. The Default Set cannot be set to get it's initial values from.
Managing
deleted. Once Layer Sets are defined you can
easily switch between Layer Sets. Once 3. Click Duplicate.
Files
Layer Sets are created, they can be imported 4. The program prompts you to name the
into other plan files with the File> Import> new Layer Set. Type in a Layer Set
Layer Sets command name and press OK.
Now you have created a new Layer Set that
Layer Sets cannot be locked. If you make a
Managing
is identical to the previous Layer Set. You
change in the Layers dialog, while working
can customize this Layer Set by making
Files
in a defined Layer Set, you redefine the
changes in the layer table.
Layer Set.
To delete a Layer Set, make it current and
You can add, delete and choose the active
press the Delete button. The current Layer
Layer Set from the Layers dialog. To make a
Set is deleted. You cannot undo this
Managing
different Layer Set active, choose the Layer
operation.
Set from the list of defined Layer Sets. If you
Files
have not created a Layer Set the only
available set is the Default Set. The Default
Set cannot be deleted. The graphic below
Managing
Files
153
Importing Layer Sets

Once Layer Sets have been defined in a plan 2. You are prompted to Open a Plan file.
file, they can be easily imported to other plan Select the file that has the desired Layer
files. Set to import.
1. Select File> Import> Layer Sets. 3. The Import Layer Sets dialog opens.
The list displays the available Layer Sets
to Import. Select one by highlighting it
and click OK. That Layer Set is now
available in the current file.
4. Repeat the process to import additional
Layer Sets.
Layer Sets in Layout

When you are working in the model and you
send the Plan View to layout, only certain
layer information is sent with the view.
When the view is sent to layout all
information about the Architectural layers is
sent to the layout view. Only the Display
property of the System and User layers are
sent to the layout view window. Line style,
color and line weight of System and User
layers cannot be sent with the view. They
must be set individually within the layout
window.
154
Chapter 9:
Terrain Modeler
Modeler
Terrain
Managing
Modeler
Terrain
Files
Managing
Introduction
Files
The Chief Architect Terrain Modeler you can provide, the better the terrain will
replaces the Lot Perimeter feature. The Ter- model. Once the terrain is modeled, shadows
rain Modeler includes all the functionality of created by a Sun Angle in Chief Architect
the Lot Perimeter and adds several new fea- will follow it.
Managing
tures which enable you to model an approxi-
mation of the terrain in 3D.
Files
The most important new feature is the ability
to add elevation data within the Terrain
Perimeter. When elevation data are present,
the Terrain Modeler builds a three dimen-
Libraries
sional map of the terrain using it.

Symbol
The terrain that is modeled is a mathematical

approximation extrapolated from the infor-
mation you provide. The more information
155
Modeling the Terrain

The Terrain Perimeter is a closed 2. If it does not appear on the screen, Select
polyline that can be edited and shaped to Window> Fill Window to see the Ter-
match the size and orientation of the building rain Perimeter.
site. You do not need to draw anything before 3. The plan now has a Terrain Perimeter.
creating a Terrain Perimeter. If you have The Terrain Perimeter is represented in
drawn a building, some walls, or a large Plan View by a rectangle that is roughly
polyline representing the boundary of the three times as long as it is wide. It can be
building site, the Terrain Perimeter encom- resized and edited like other polylines.
passes everything in the Plan View. If the
Terrain Perimeter is not large enough you 4. You can begin to enter data to define the
can resize it and edit its shape like a CAD terrain by selecting one of the elevation
polyline. A 3D Terrain can only be generated options from the Build> Terrain menu.
when a Terrain Perimeter is included in the 5. If you do not add any elevation data to
first floor plan file (.pl1). the Terrain Perimeter, you will have a
To create a Terrain Perimeter: flat terrain at the elevation 0’-0” when
you select Build> Terrain> Build Ter-
1. Select Build> Terrain> Create Terrain rain.
Perimeter. A rectangular polyline
appears.
Adding Elevation Data

Elevation data provides information about Editing Terrain Data
the height of the terrain at a specific location.
Terrain Elevation Lines/Splines may be
Elevation data can be specified using a
edited any number of times without worry of
polyline, spline or point. All options are
loss of elevation information. You can move
available on the Build> Terrain submenu.
Elevation Points and Elevation Lines/Splines
Elevation Lines and Splines are better
just like CAD items, without losing the ele-
for accurate modeling than individual Eleva-
vation data. This means that if an Elevation
tion Points. An Elevation Line/Spline can
Line/Spline is extended or an Elevation Point
represent nearly 50 points of elevation data,
is moved, the height value remains the same.
while an Elevation Point represents just one
Anytime elevation data is changed the terrain
point of elevation data.
must be regenerated with Build> Terrain>
Build Terrain. Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
ings does not update the terrain.
156
Elevation Lines and Splines
Elevation Lines and Splines

Elevation Lines and Splines are both created To assign a different height value:
and manipulated in a similar manner. They 1. Select the Elevation Line/Spline and
are created and edited just like lines and
splines in CAD mode. You should be famil- click the Open Item to edit it.
iar with editing them before you spend too 2. The Edit CAD Item dialog opens. Click
Modeler
much time modeling terrain. For purposes of the Special button.
Terrain
this chapter they are referred to as Eleva-
tion Lines/Splines.
To create an Elevation Line/Spline:
1. Select Build >Terrain> Elevation Line
(to create an Elevation Line or polyline)
or > Elevation Spline (to create an ele-
vation spline.) 3. Enter the elevation value for the Eleva-
2. Click and drag in Plan View, to draw the tion Line/Spline. You can specify the
line/spline at the desired location. Once value in feet or inches.
it is in Plan View it must be opened and 4. Once the value is entered in this box
Managing
edited to add elevation data. click OK button to store the new height
Files
Elevation Line/Splines have all the features value or Cancel to ignore the new
of standard CAD polylines and splines. They height value.
can be broken, extended, shortened, etc. Once an elevation is defined it is a property
of that Line/Spline. Copy the object and the
Adding Elevation Data
Managing
information copies with it. The Elevation
Files
To add elevation data to an Elevation Line/ Line Properties dialog will always display
Spline you must assign a height value. When the elevation of the Line/Spline in inches
you first draw the Elevation Line/Spline it is (mm).
at the elevation 0’-0”.
Managing
Files
Elevation Points
Terrain elevation data may also be specified sites with a slope require more than 300
as Elevation Points. Typically Elevation points to get a good approximation of the ter-
Points should be used in addition to Eleva- rain.
Managing
tion Lines/Splines because the amount of To add an elevation point:

data they carry is greatly reduced. The Ter-
Files
rain Modeler requires many points to make 1. Select Build> Terrain> Elevation
an approximation of your site. Even small Point.
157
2. Click in Plan View where an elevation 5. Click again in Plan View and the Enter
point should be added. When you click, Marker Text dialog opens again with
the Enter Marker Text dialog box the last elevation value already entered
opens. in the field.
3. Enter the actual elevation in the Height 6. Hit the Esc key or another tool to stop
box. placing elevation points.
4. Enter any text to add to the Marker in
the Text above line field.
Enter Marker Text
2
4 3
The Enter Marker Text dialog is used to Height - Enter the height value for the
2
enter information about markers, in this case elevation point. The default unit for this
Point Elevation markers. The program value is inches (millimeters for metric.)
remembers the previous Elevation Point Marker Radius - Enter the value for
entered and the data can be used or updated 3
the radius of the marker. The default
for subsequent points. If you create an Eleva- unit for this value is inches (millimeters for
tion Point and then create another, the height, metric.)
text and radius values are the same for the
Marker Type - It is important that the
second point. This remains true until new 4
values are specified in the Enter Marker Point elevation option be selected
Text dialog when creating an elevation point. when you are setting Elevation Points. The
Terrain Modeler only recognizes Elevation
Text above line - Enter any notes or
1 Points that are marked as such. If another
information, such as elevation in this option is selected the point is not be recog-
box. It displays with the Marker in Plan nized as an Elevation Point.
View.
158
Generating Terrain
Marker Text Attributes
Modeler
Terrain
Managing
You can set other parameters for the Marker
Files
on the Attributes tab.
Generating Terrain
Once a Terrain Perimeter exists, the Terrain Once the Terrain is calculated, it is displayed
Managing
Modeler has all the information it needs to in the Plan View as a series of contour lines.
Files
generate a terrain. If you do not add any ele- Each contour line has a label indicating the
vation data, the terrain is a flat plane at the elevation it represents. The Terrain Prop-
elevation 0’-0” when you build the terrain. If erties dialog allows you to display the con-
you do add elevation data, the program gen- tour line eleveations in feet or inches (for
erates an approximation of the site in 3D. Imperial plans) or in meters or millimeters
Managing
(for metric plans). The terrain can be viewed
Files
To generate the 3D terrain, select Build>
Terrain> Build Terrain. The program in 3D by using any of the camera tools.
begins modeling the 3D site. This process
can take a variable amount of time depending
on the complexity of the terrain and the user
Managing
defined parameters. The program indicates

Files
the terrain generation progress by increment-

ing a counter located in the status bar.
159
Terrain Properties
Once a terrain perimeter exists, the Terrain The General tab includes properties for the
Modeler has a variety of options that may be Terrain and surface.
customized. Select Build> Terrain> Ter- The Contours tab is used to change proper-
rain Properties to modify the properties of ties concerning contour generation.
the Terrain Modeler. The Terrain Properties
dialog has three tabs. The Material tab allows for the selection of
a material that is applied to the terrain in 3D
Views.
General Tab
3 4
Terrain Surface Quality - Defines triangle size. The smaller the triangle size,
1
the number of triangles calculated by the better the quality. The Quality value is
the Terrain Modeler. computed as follows:
The Terrain Modeler builds the 3D terrain by Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter /
splitting it into triangles. Smaller triangles, number of triangles.
representing less area, yield more detailed The Low (1000), Medium (2000) and High
contour lines and a better 3D approximation (4000) values are calculated for an average
of the terrain. Lot area of 20,000 square feet. If your Ter-
The penalty for better quality is the addi- rain Perimeter varies greatly from this you
tional terrain generation time and increased
memory requirements. Quality is based on
160
Terrain Properties
may want to define a number of triangles Thickness - Define the thickness of

4
using the Custom setting that approximates the skirt added to the terrain. The skirt
one of these ratios. is only displayed in 3D Views. The skirt
The number of triangles must be greater than gives the viewer a sense of depth when view-
1,000, but there is no upper limit. If you ing the terrain.
select numbers too great on sites too large, Flat specifies that the skirt should be flat at
you may find yourself waiting a long time for its base. In this mode, the Terrain Modeler
Modeler
the calculation. determines the lowest point in the terrain and
Terrain
Terrain Surface Smoothing con- then offsets this value by the user specified
2 thickness value. The resulting value is used
trols the amount of rounding applied to
the terrain. Rounding involves replacing as a uniform elevation for the base of the
sharp changes in slope with more gradual skirt.
changes, effectively removing jagged edges Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt base
in the terrain. A low value for smoothing maintains a consistent distance below the ter-
produces a terrain that has sharp peaks and rain. The distance is obtained from the thick-
abrupt changes in slope. A high value results ness value provided by the user.
in a terrain that continuously flows from Clipping - You can elect to have the
height point to height point. 5
terrain cut out by the first floor or not.
Managing
Building Pad Elevation - Enter the Hide terrain intersected by building -
3
value, relative to sea-level, that is used
Files
Select this check box to hide the portion of
to specify the relative elevation of the 0’-0” the terrain that is intersected by the first floor
elevation of your building model, (the floor footprint.
height of the first floor). This value does not
change the elevation data and does not alter
Managing
the contours.
Files
The program always defines the first floor
elevation at 0’-0”. While this is desirable for
adjusting walls, roofs and floor platforms, it
leads to misrepresentations in relation to real
world elevations. Finished grade can be mea-
Managing
sured relative the finished floor, but to mea-
Files
sure elevation in the real world, building
pads are rarely at 0’-0” sea-level.
For example, if a structure is to be placed in
the middle of a terrain which slopes evenly
from the height 100.00’ to the height
Managing
112.00’. Entering a value of 106.00’ for the

Files
building pad elevation would cause the struc-

ture to appear at the correct height in all 3D
Views.
161
Contour Tab
1 2
3
4
5
6
Interval - Define the change in eleva- Primary Contours are specified. A value of 5
1
tion between contours. If the Interval is defines every fifth contour line as a Primary
set to twelve inches (one foot) then a contour Contour line.
line is computed and displayed for each ele- Label Secondary Contours -
vation change of twelve inches (one foot). 4
Select the check box to label secondary
Offset - Specify a reference value for contour lines with their elevation data. The
2
contours. program automatically labels Primary Con-
For example, if the offset is set to 5 feet and tour lines with their elevation data.
the interval is set to 10 feet then contours are Contour Line Units - Specify the
5
generated at the elevations 5’, 15’, 25’, 35’, units that contour labels display. The
etc. Most often this value is set to 0. labels units can be in inches or feet (millime-
Primary Contour Every - Specify ters or meters for metric.)
3
the interval for primary contours. A Contour Line Smoothing - If con-
6
value of one produces only Primary Con- tour smoothing is turned on, the Terrain
tours. Modeler attempts to remove sharp bends and
The program can identify two types of con- jagged sections from the 2D contour lines.
tours, Primary and Secondary. The two types
are drawn on different System layers, so you Material Tab
can control how they appear in Plan View. Use this tab to select the material that is
Enter an integer here to specify how often the applied to the terrain surface in 3D Views.
This material is not calculated in the Material
List.
162
Terrain Features
Terrain Features
Terrain Features are useful for describing could be created within the terrain by speci-
an area of the terrain that is different from the fying a terrain feature that uses a dirt mate-
terrain as a whole. Terrain features are rial. Terrain features are also useful for
bounded areas created with closed polylines, creating fences and walkways using the
within the Terrain Perimeter. Terrain Fea- height property.
Modeler
tures can have a specified height offset and
Terrain
material. Terrain features can also clip to It is important to note that terrain features
other terrain features. always follow the terrain. Terrain features
have the same surface shape as the
You can use Terrain features to highlight
terrain that lies beneath them.
landscape elements. For example if the entire
terrain is using a grass material, a flower bed
Creating Terrain Features

To create a terrain feature: 3. To set the properties of a terrain feature,
1. Select Build>Terrain>Feature Lines select the closed polyline to be modified
Managing
or > Feature Splines depending on the and click the Open Item , (or double-
Files
desired area that is being created. click on the polyline). The Edit CAD
2. Use the mouse to draw the desired area Item dialog box opens.
as you would any polyline in Plan View. 4. Click the Special button to display the
Terrain Feature Properties dialog box.
Terrain features can only be created from
Managing
This dialog box allows for the adjust-
closed polylines or splines. Make sure and
Files
ment of terrain feature properties.
close the area, the Terrain Modeler cannot
process a terrain feature that is not closed.
Terrain Features Dialog
Managing
Files
The Terrain Features dialog has two tabs,
General and Material. The options in this
dialog and on these tabs allow you to define
the Terrain Feature.
When all required changes have been made,
Managing
press the OK button to store the changes or

Files
the Cancel button to ignore them.
163
General Tab
2
Height - Specify the amount that the faces that seam together the terrain and the
1
terrain feature is above the terrain. This terrain feature, it is assigned the material of
must be a positive number. The default units the Terrain Feature.
are inches (or mm), so use the feet (’) mark if Clip Overlapping Terrain Fea-
entering feet (or "m" for meters in metric). 2 tures - Check this box to remove sec-
The Terrain Modeler elevates the section of tions of the terrain feature that are covered by
terrain bounded by the terrain area by the other terrain features at a lower height. When
value entered in this field. The Terrain Mod- two terrain features meet and one is lower or
eler covers the gap between the terrain and equal in height to the other, it can be clipped
the raised/lowered terrain feature with a from the taller Terrain Feature. It is also use-
skirt. The skirt is composed of vertical sur- ful for creating features that contain other
features such as planters or swimming pools.
Material Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to

the terrain feature surface. This material is
displayed in 3D Views.
164
Terrain in Plan View
Terrain in Plan View

In Plan View, terrain is displayed as contour elevation or not. The color, style and line
lines and a perimeter. The color, style and weight of the Terrain Perimeter can be set
weight of the contour lines can be changed to individually with the Layer properties.
suit any need. Contour lines can display their
Modeler
Display Terrain
Terrain
Managing
Files
To change properties of the 2D display: 4. Select the layer to edit and change its
1. Select Options> Show Items or click properties in the Properties box in the
lower-left section of the dialog.
Managing
the Show Items button on the toolbar.
The Layers dialog opens. 5. Primary Contours and Secondary Con-
Files
2. Select the System tab. The layers for ter- tours are not the only terrain items that
rain modeling are on the System tab. can be changed. The 2D display of the
Terrain Perimeter, Terrain Elevation
3. Scroll down the Layer table until the Data and Terrain Features can also be
layers named Primary Contours and
Managing
specified by their individual layers.
Secondary Contours are in view.
Terrain and Plan View Zooming Files

The display of terrain related layers can on the terrain boundary. When the Terrain
Managing
turned off in the Layers dialog when you are Perimeter display is off, Window> Fill Win-
Files
focusing on the building and not the site. dow fills the window based on the house
When the Terrain Perimeter is visible, Win- boundary.
dow> Fill Window fills the window based
165
Terrain and 3D Views

The Terrain Perimeter affects the time it trees and images to the height of the terrain.
requires to generate 3D Views. Terrain This is done each time a 3DView is dis-
Perimeters require many triangles to gener- played.
ate. More triangles take more time to render. If you want to see the terrain in 2D but not
The amount of the delay is based on the qual- 3D, select 3D> 3D Preferences from the
ity of the terrain and the number of terrain menu. The 3D Preferences dialog opens.
features incorporated into the terrain. Select the Include tab. Clear the Patterns/
The Terrain Perimeter adjusts Images so that Images/Terrain check box and click OK.
they can be viewed above the ground plane.
When terrain is present the program adjusts
Terrain and Sun Shadows

Sun shadows are computed based on the con- open the Sun Angle Specification dialog
tour of the terrain. If a Terrain Perimeter and update the sun shadow. For more infor-
exists, the Sun Shadow takes the terrain into mation see “Sun Angle & Shadows” on page
account. Sun shadows do not update when 704.
terrain is changed. If the Terrain changes,
Clearing the Terrain

Select Build> Terrain> Clear Terrain to Clearing the terrain does not remove the Ter-
remove the terrain from memory. This rain Perimeter, elevation data, or terrain fea-
decreases file size but you do not lose any tures that are in the model. These items can
information. When the Terrain has been only be removed by a direct delete operation
cleared, you do not see it in 2D or 3D but the (selecting the item then pressing the delete
program is able to regenerate it with the key.)
Build Terrain command. To view the contours after clearing the ter-
Build> Terrain> Clear Terrain deletes all rain, the terrain must be built by selecting
components required to model the terrain Build> Terrain> Build Terrain.
including the 2D contours.
166
Chapter 10:
Multiple Floors
Managing
Files
New In 7.0
• The Show Floors dialog has been replaced • Insert, Delete and Create new floors much
by the New Floor dialog. easier.
• Create up to 10 floors, an attic and a foun- • Delete and rebuild foundation plan auto-
Multiple
Floors
dation plan for each model. matically.
• New interface for Current Floor and Ref-
erence Floor.
General Information
When Chief Architect starts, it opens into a floor files out of that directory, the program
blank, first floor plan. The plan name is cannot find it. If the directory is renamed, but
Untitled.pl1:Plan. the files remain in it, there is not a problem.
Once the plan file is saved, the title bar The foundation file ends in .pl0, the first
Managing
displays filename.pl1:Plan, indicating floor in .pl1, the second floor in .pl2, the
that: third floor in .pl3 and the fourth floor in
Files
.pl4, etc. The tenth floor is named .pla and
• The active drawing file is filename.
the attic, if there are 10 floors is named .plb.
• The active floor is the first floor (.pl1). These different file extensions are applied
• The active view is the Plan View. automatically by the program and should not
Managing
The title bar always show the active be changed.
filename, floor and type of view for the
Files
window. Even though each floor is saved as a separate
file, the program opens all related floors
Any model can have up to 10 floors, plus a anytime one of them is opened. All floors are
foundation, and an attic. All the floors and seen simultaneously when any of the multi-
the foundation are visible in 3D Views. floor views are created (Perspective, Section/
Libraries
Symbol
The program saves each floor and the Elevation, or Over View ).
foundation as separate files, in the same When a multi-floor structure is open, the
directory, with the same file name but a Current Floor is the .pl* file that was
different extension. If you move one of the opened, and the program automatically
167
assigns the floor below as the Reference memory and are shown in 3D Views but not
Floor. Plan View.
The Current Floor is the active floor, the You can open a file by opening any one of
one in which you can actually edit. There can the .pl* files associated with that plan. (The
be only one active floor at any given time. * represents any number or letter). If you
open a .pl5 file, the fifth floor is the Current
The Reference Floor is a single floor,
Floor, and the fourth floor is the Reference
other than the Current Floor, which can be
Floor by default. The floor below is the
displayed for reference, similar to an overlay.
Reference Floor by default. If there is not a
The Reference Floor is visible but not
.pl0 file and a .pl2 file exists, the second
editable. All other floors are saved in
floor is the Reference Floor for the .pl1 file.
Adding Floors
1
2
To create a new floor, select Build> Floor>

1 Most often, Derive new 2nd floor
Build New Floor, or click the Build New plan from the 1st floor plan is
Floor button. used.
The New Floor dialog opens, which is used This option creates an upper floor with
to build an additional floor. exterior walls which duplicate the exterior
walls of the lower floor. The wall layer
If you want to build the foundation select
definition of the upper floor matches the
Build> Floor> Build Foundation and the
lower floor. These walls can then be easily
Foundation Setup dialog opens.
modified. Interior walls are not duplicated.
When you build a new floor, two options are Make new (blank) plan for the
available in the New Floor dialog. 2 2nd floor - Select this option if none
of the exterior walls are directly above the
Chief Architect allows only one floor, the existing walls on the lower floor. This creates
foundation/basement, below the first floor.
Keep this in mind when you begin an as-
an upper floor plan file, with nothing drawn
built or plan for a multi-story building. in it.
Once you have made a selection, click OK.
168
Inserting and Deleting Floors
A new floor will be added based on the the top says filename.pl2:Plan, indicating
Managing
settings in the Floor Defaults dialog. For the active plan is the second floor plan.
more information see “Floor Defaults Setup”
Files
Creating third, fourth and subsequent floors,
on page 127.
is identical to creating the second floor.
The new floor is the Current Floor in the
To build a foundation, select Build>
window. Note that the name in the title bar at
Floor> Build Foundation.
Inserting and Deleting Floors
Insert a Floor above increase by one. The program renames

any existing Fifth floor from a .pl5 to a .pl6.
Multiple
Floors
1 The first floor stores important information
for the entire model. Chief Architect does
2 not allow you to insert a floor between the
foundation and the first floor.
If you would like to create an intermediate Delete a Floor

floor, you have the ability to insert a floor in To delete a floor, select Build> Floor>
between two existing floors. To insert a floor, Delete Current Floor. The current floor is
select Build>Floor>Insert New Floor. The deleted. If there is a floor above it becomes
New Floor dialog opens. Select one of the the current floor.
two options available and click OK. The
Chief Architect does not allow you to delete
Managing
existing floor is moved up, (with all floors
the first floor.
Files
above it) and a new floor is created.
Derive new 5th floor plan from
1 the wth floor plan - Select this
option to insert a new floor, based on the
exterior walls of the existing floor. Click OK
Managing
to create a new floor. Any existing fifth floor
Files
is moved up and the new floor is inserted. All
floors above the existing floor are moved up
by one floor.
Make new (blank) plan - Select this
2
Managing
option to insert a blank floor. The

Files
current floor is moved up and all floors
169
Current Floor/Reference Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given the Change Floor/Reference button on
time. The active floor is called the Current the toolbar.
Floor, and is the only floor which can be
edited in Plan View. To display the Reference Floor select Tools>
Reference Display On (or click the
Once you have more than one floor in your
Reference Toggle button.) The Reference
model, you may want to see how the floors
Floor becomes visible.
relate to each other. When you have multiple
floors, it is possible to display any floor as a If the Current Floor is stacked above the
Reference Floor. The Reference Floor is Reference Floor, the exterior walls change
visible but you cannot edit it. color, due to the layering of lines on the
monitor, when the Reference Floor is active.
By default, Chief Architect defines the floor
directly below the Current Floor as the You can define the color of the Reference
Reference Floor, but you can define any floor Floor in the Preferences dialog on the
as the Reference Floor in the Change Floor/ Colors panel. Selecting a contrasting color
Reference dialog. To open the dialog click helps you quickly identify which walls are in
the Reference Floor.
When both a Current Floor and a Reference
Floor are defined, two buttons, Reference
Toggle and Swap Work-Ref become
available in the toolbar. These two buttons
display on the Utility toolbar.
Reference Toggle
Whenever a floor is defined as the Reference though it is depressed , until it is clicked
Floor, its display can be toggled on or off. again.
Click the Reference Toggle once to have
When the Reference Floor is visible, that
the Reference Floor become visible in Plan
entire floor displays in a single color. This
View. The Reference Floor remains visible,
color is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog
and the Reference Toggle appears as
(double-click Select Items or choose
Options> Defaults Setup> Plan Defaults).
170
Swap Work-Reference Floor
Swap Work-Reference Floor
Managing
Files
When laying out one floor, it is often If one floor is defined as the Current Floor,
necessary to make a change on a different and another floor is defined as the Reference
floor, but changes can only be made in the Floor, the Swap Work-Ref button can be
Current Floor. To make a change to your used to switch the status of the two plans.
Reference Floor you must make it the current This provides a quick method of switching
floor. back and forth between any two floors.
Floor Up/ Floor Down

If you are working with more dialog opens. Click on a floor name from the
Current Floor list to be the Current Floor.
Multiple
than two floors you may want
Floors
to use the toolbar display to toggle through Click on a floor name from the Reference
the floors. The current floor number displays Floor list to be the Reference Floor. Click
between the arrows when you are in OK to return to Plan View with the changes
Architectural mode. in place. If the Reference Toggle was on, it
remains on. If the Reference Toggle was off,
Click the arrow on either side of floor
it remains off until you toggle it on.
number to move up or down through the
available floors. Floors become available
once they have been actively built. The Attic
plan and the foundation are also accessible.
Managing
These three buttons represent different
controls in different views. In CAD mode it
Files
is a layer control, In Architectural mode it
is a floor control, in a Layout file, it is a
page control.
Change Floor/Reference
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
If you have many floors, click directly on the

number and the Change Floor/Reference
171
Reference Floor Color
On the Colors panel of the Preferences Where the Current Floor and the Reference
dialog, change the Reference Floor Floor have edges which line up, there is a
Color by selecting a new color from the list. discoloration caused by the fact that lines of
two different colors are superimposed upon
When a Reference Floor is visible, the
each other. This discoloration occurs when
Current Floor displays in the colors defined
any two lines of a different color are
by layer settings. The Reference Floor
superimposed on the monitor.
displays in the defined color.
Display Items in Reference Floor

When the Reference Floor is visible, walls,
railings and windows are automatically set to
display in the Layers dialog. To display
other layers in the Reference Floor, access
the Layers dialog and define which layers
display. Layer settings affect all floors in the
model. When a layer is defined to display in
Reference Floor, it displays with the color
defined for the Reference Floor on the
Colors panel of the Preferences dialog. A red ’R’ in the Ref. column indicates that
all items on that layer display with the
Reference Floor. Remove the ’R’ in this
column to not display items on that layer in
the Reference Floor.
172
Chapter 11:
Foundations
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
New in 7.0
• Delete and rebuild foundations based on • Reshape monolithic slab foundations with
new footprint. CAD tools.
• Monolithic slabs can be dimensioned.
General Information
Foundations
IMPORTANT: Always consult registered
geotechnical and civil engineers for
information regarding the proper
foundation for your lot.
Foundations tend to be one of three types -- When a foundation plan is created, any room
footing, piers or slab. All three can be gener- included in the Living Area calculation gen-
ated automatically or manually. The founda- erates a spread footing, grade beam or slab
tion type can be determined and selected at foundation below it. Garages will generate a
the time you build the foundation. This is foundation as well. Rooms that are exterior
determined in the Foundation Setup dialog. rooms do not automatically generate a foun-
The foundation plan always has a .pl0 exten- dation below them. For more information see
“Foundations and Room Specifications” on
Foundations
sion. This is appended automatically by the
Managing
program when you create the foundation. page 191.
Files
Foundation walls can also be defined on
upper floors by defining a wall to be a foun-
dation wall in the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog.
Build> Floor> Delete Foundation deletes
Libraries
Symbol
the .pl0 file and then allows you to build a

new foundation based on the footprint of the
first floor.
173
Building a Foundation
Foundation are built based on the layout of The Foundation Setup dialog is divided into
walls in the first floor plan file. You must two tabs. It is used to define the general
have at least one room on the first floor in parameters of the foundation system before
order for a foundation to be automatically you build the foundation. It can not be used
built. to change settings once the foundation is
General foundation settings are defined prior built.
to building a foundation. Choose Build>
Floor> Foundation or Options> Defaults
Setup>Foundation Defaults to open the
Foundation Setup dialog.
Foundation Tab
2 6
3
4
1 8
5
9
7
10
There are three types of foundations which Footings

may be created: Footings, Monolithic
Footings - Select the radio button to
Slab, or Piers. Choose the desired type by 1
generate a foundation system with a
selecting the radio button next to its name.
stem wall centered on a spread footing. Foot-
Each foundation type has different options,
ings will automatically center below the stem
settings and behaviors.
wall. Individual footings may be centered
differently. (see “Foundation Tab” on page
214.)
174
Building a Foundation
When Footings is selected you can define outer main layer of the foundation wall lines
Managing
these options: up with the outer main layer of the wall
above.
Files
Wall Thickness - If the Wall Type is
2
set to Default (concrete) this value Unless otherwise specified, a Default (con-
defines the thickness of the stem wall. Any crete) wall is defined. If you plan to turn the
other wall type has its thickness defined on foundation wall into a pony wall, you must
the Layer Spec tab in the Wall Specification define any other wall type than Default (con-
Managing
dialog. crete).
Files
Min. Wall Height - Defines the stem Footing Size - Specify the Width
3 7
wall height. If the min. wall height is at and Height of the footing.
least 6’ (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated To generate a foundation having a stem wall
above the footing and a Basement ceiling but no visible footing, set the footing width
height notation appears, displaying the dis- to the same dimension as the stem wall.
tance from the top of the slab floor to the
basement ceiling. It is the same as the Min.
Monolithic Slab
Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness.
Monolithic Slab - Select this option
To delete the slab, specify the “rooms” in the 8
to build a slab foundation with a perim-
basement as Open Below in the Room
Foundations
eter footing. This foundation is the floor plat-
Specification dialog.
form for the first floor. It is visible in the
Slab Thickness - Defines the thick- foundation plan and can be selected and
4
ness of the slab produced above the edited with the Edit CAD Item dialog.
footing or at the top of the stem wall.
When you select a Monolithic Slab founda-
Slab at top of Stem Wall - Select tion, the program designates every room on
5
this check box to generate a slab with the first floor as “Slab foundation for this
its top is flush with the top of the stem wall. room” in the Structure tab of the Room
The slab thickness can be defined. Specification dialog.(see “Structure Tab” on
If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, page 187.)
all rooms on the first floor are automatically Monolithic Slabs can have the following
set to Floor for this room is supplied by the items specified from the Foundation Setup
Managing
foundation room from the floor below, as dialog:
noted in the Structure tab in the Room
Files
Slab Thickness - Specify the thickness of
Specification dialog. (see “Structure Tab” on
the Slab.
page 187.)
Footing Size - Specify the Width and
Foundation Wall Type - Defines the
6 Height of the footing. The top of the footing
wall layer definition for the stem wall.
is at the bottom of the slab. The exterior edge
Managing
All wall layer definitions listed in the

of the footing is at the exterior edge of the
Files
Default Wall Type dialog are in the list. The

slab which lines up with the exterior main
layer surface of the wall above.
175
Piers The height of the grade beam is defined by

the Min. Wall Height. The thickness of the
Piers - Select this option to generate a
9 grade beam is defined by the Wall Thick-
pier and grade beam foundation. The
ness. The size and spacing of the piers are
floor framing rests directly on top of the
specified in the Piers section of this tab.
grade beam.
10 Specify the Diameter, Depth and
Maximum Separation of the piers.
Materials Tab
2
1 3
The Materials tab can be used with any type Course spacing - Defines the Wall
2
of foundation. Some options may be grayed Horizontal and Wall Vertical spac-
out depending on the type of foundation ing for the rebar in the stem wall. If using
specified. rebar in a slab instead of mesh, the spacing
#bars/course - Specify the number applies to both directions.
1
of supporting rebar in the Footing, and Bar size - Defines the size (in 1/8th
3
the number of courses of rebar in the Stem inches) for the rebar. In this illustration,
Walls. If piers are used specify how many 4 represents 4/8”, or 1/2”.
rebar are used per pier. The rebar does not Use Mesh - Select the check box to
display in Section/Elevation views, but is 4
reinforce the slab floor with mesh
added to the Material List. instead of rebar. Uncheck this to use rebar.
When Use Mesh is unchecked, the rebar
specification for slab becomes available.
176
Setting Stem Wall Height by Room
5 Select any additional Options desired.
Managing
These are added to the Material List,
but do not display in the model.
Files
Setting Stem Wall Height by Room
When the foundation plan is created, the In 3D View
Managing
foundation is built with a stem wall height Once the foundation is built, you can select
Files
specified in the Min. Wall Height field in individual stem walls in a Section/Elevation
the Foundation Setup dialog. Once built, View to move the footing up or down. This
the height of the foundation stem wall (mea- method should only be used for detailed
sured from the bottom of floor framing to top changes or for stepping the bottom of the
of the footing) can be set individually by foundation wall.
room. Stem wall height can also be set inde-
pendently of the basement floor height.
If adjacent rooms have different stem wall

heights set, the stem wall that separates
Foundations
them will use the larger of these two
values. This will only work if their floor
heights are different by at least 1/16 th
inch.
To set the stem wall height individually,

select a room and click the Open Item
button. The Room Specification dialog
will open. On the General tab, enter a value
in the Stem Wall Height field. This will
redefine the height of the foundation stem For more information see “Stepped Walls &
wall the next time you Rebuild Walls/ Footings” on page 230..
Floors/Ceilings .
Managing
Files
Spread Footings
Spread footings are used in conjunction the foundation wall and the footing are
with a stem wall. The footing is typically drawn on the Architectural layer Foundation
wider than the stem wall and runs continu- walls & footing.
Managing
ously under the base of the wall. In Plan To generate a foundation with spread foot-
Files
View, the footing is drawn with dashed lines ings, first select the Footings option in the
and the wall is drawn with solid lines. Both Foundation Setup dialog.
177
Once that is done, define the parameters of tom of the dialog displaying the distance
the footing and select the type of stem wall between the top of the slab floor to the ceil-
from the menu. ing.
If you select the Default (concrete) wall To remove the concrete slab in the basement
type, the thickness can be defined by the area, select a room and define it as Open
Wall Thickness field in the dialog. If you Below in the Room Specification dialog.
define any other wall type, the thickness is The Basement Ceiling Height cannot be
defined by the wall layer definition. specified here, it is the Min. Wall Height
Min. Wall Height is the height of the stem minus the Slab Thickness. You must adjust
wall. If you set it to 6’ or greater, the pro- theses values to get the desired Basement
gram adds a concrete slab in the basement Ceiling Height.
area. Click the Tab key and the Basement The Footing Width and Height are
Ceiling Height notation appears at the bot- shown in the diagram below.
Aligning Stem Wall and Footing

By default, the exterior surface of the main The footing is centered on the stem wall
layer of the stem wall aligns with the exterior unless specified otherwise on the Founda-
surface of the main layer of the wall above. If tion tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
there is only one layer for both the stem wall (see “Foundation Tab” on page 214.)
and the first floor wall above it, the outsides
of the walls will line up.
178
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations
Managing
Files
Pier and grade beam foundations can be set After setting the parameters for the founda-
to automatically generate from the Founda- tion system, click OK and the program auto-
tion Setup dialog. matically generates the required piers and
The size of the grade beam is defined by the grade beam. Once the piers are in place, they
Min. Wall Height and Wall Thickness can be selected an moved by selecting
Managing
values in the Foundation Setup dialog. The Build> Structure> Round Pier and left
Files
Size, Depth, and Spacing of the piers can clicking on the pier. In this mode you can
also be defined in the dialog. easily position the piers along the grade
beam or adjust their diameter.
Foundations
1
2
3
4
To generate a pier and grade beam founda- the thickness comes from the wall layer
tion: definition.
1. Select the radio button next to Piers. 6. Click OK to have the foundation gener-
2. Define Diameter of the piers. ated from the walls above.
Automatically generated Piers are drawn
3. Define the pier Depth.
using a dashed line style. They are centered
Managing
4. Define the Maximum Separation on the grade beam.
Files
between piers The grade beam is represented by two solid
5. Choose the Foundation Wall Type lines. It aligns with the wall above unless
from the list to define the wall layer defi- specified otherwise.
nition of the grade beam. If you select As with the stem wall for a footing founda-
Default (concrete) the grade beam is tion, the grade beam may have a layered wall
Managing
sized according to the Wall Thickness type. A foundation wall with a brick ledge
Files
and the Min. Wall Height. If you select layer is usually desirable if the wall above it
another wall type, only the Min. Wall has a brick veneer.
Height is used to size the grade beam, and
179
Manually Creating Piers & Pads

Piers and pads can be manually placed under release the mouse. The pier collapses upon
walls, beams or railings on any floor. To itself and is deleted.
manually place Round Piers or Square Pads, • Resize the selected pier or pad by drag-
select either Build> Structure> Round Pier ging in or out from either of the two side
or Build> Structure> Square Pad. Click on handles. If one side is all the way against
any wall, beam or railing to place the pier or an outside wall intersection, you will not
pad. If you are click too close to a corner or be able to resize it unless you first move it
intersection, you may get an error message. away from the intersection.
Instead of trying to place the pier or pad
directly under the corner or intersection, cre- • Move the selected pier or pad by grabbing
ate it nearby and then move it into position. the center handle and dragging it along the
wall. It stops automatically underneath an
The pier or pad that is placed uses the sizes
exterior corner.
from the Foundation Setup dialog.
• Move any pier or pad using a Dimension
Editing Piers & Pads which locates an edge. If no such dimen-
You must be in either Round Pier or sion exists, click the Dimension button,
Square Pad mode in order to select a pier and drag a manual dimension parallel to
or pad. Select either option from the Build> the wall containing the pier, within a cou-
Structure menu to initiate the mode. ple feet of the wall. Select the pier or pad
first and then click on the dimension. The
Once in the mode, click on an existing pier or
Set Dimension dialog opens. Change the
pad to select it. When the three red handles
value in the box to move the pier or pad
display, several options will be available.
accordingly.
• Delete the selected pier or pad by click- If you move a foundation wall or beam, any
ing the Delete button or the Del key. Or piers or pads it contains will move with it.
drag a side handle past the center, then
Monolithic Slab Foundations

Monolithic Slab foundations can be cre- Once you have selected this, you can specify
ated with the Build> Floor> Foundation the thickness of the slab and the dimensions
menu option. of the footing.
Select the radio button next to Monolithic When you click OK the foundation is built. It
Slab in the Foundation Setup dialog to can then be edited, reshaped and dimen-
automatically create a slab-on-grade founda- sioned with the CAD tools.
tion based on the footprint of the first floor.
180
Room Specification, Structure Tab
Updating Slab Foundations Slab at top of Stem Wall
Managing
If you have built a monolithic slab founda- To create a slab floor for a room specify the
Files
tion or defined a room to have a slab founda- Slab at Top of Stem Wall option in the
tion, you can use the Build> Floor> Rebuild Foundation Setup dialog when creating a
Slabs command to update the slabs. When spread footing foundation.
you select this from the menu, the existing This can also be done for an individual foun-
slabs will be deleted and rebuilt to match the dation “room” by specifying the ceiling
Managing
current footprint of the walls that originally height at zero. The room above it must have
Files
defined them. This allows you to quickly Floor for this room is supplied by the
update the slab foundation after walls have floor below checked in the Structure tab
been moved. It does not delete the .pl0 file. of the Room Specification dialog (see next
section). You need to Rebuild Walls/Floors/
Ceilings to finalize the change.
Room Specification, Structure Tab
Foundations
1
Two of the options on the Structure tab of Floor for this room is supplied
2 by the foundation “room” from
Managing
the Room Specification dialog affect the
the floor below - Selecting this check box
Files
foundation.
causes the foundation plan to be defined with
1 Slab foundation for this room - the floor for this room. The floor for the cur-
Select this check box to change this
room’s floor platform into a concrete slab. rent room will be deleted.
When this is selected the platform will get its If the foundations system is a spread footing,
Managing
thickness from the Foundation Setup dia- the slab is built at the top of the stem wall
Files
log. The room is provided with a slab that unless specified otherwise. This is used in
displays with the foundation plan. situations where framed walls are built above
small concrete curb walls, such as in garages.
181
Foundations in Garages
A room labeled Garage on the first floor supplied by the foundation “room”
creates a separate room in the foundation from the floor below is selected a Floor
plan. The Structure tab in the Room Speci- Overview on the foundation plan includes
fication dialog for the Garage foundation the slab. A Floor Overview on the 1st floor
"room" displays the following settings: shows no garage floor.
• Ceiling over this room is not checked. The floor height of the garage and the Top of
• This foundation room supplies the Stem Wall need to be properly defined rela-
floor for the room above is checked. tive to the zero level of the first floor. Typi-
cally, the garage area in the foundation will
• The Garage is open below to use the floor need to be selected and the floor height
from the room below. raised if it is to be less than 24" below the
These settings cause a 4" slab to sit on top of zero level of the main floor.
the footings, with a short stem wall around For more information see “Foundations and
the garage. The stud walls are built on top of Room Specifications” on page 191.
the stem wall. If Floor for this room is
Deleting a Foundation Plan

Once you have built your foundation plan, it Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation to
is separate from the first floor plan from delete the current foundation plan. This will
which it was created. If you change the posi- delete the .pl0 file from your disk. To update
tion of the exterior walls on the first floor the foundation plan to the new first floor
plan, the foundation is not updated. You must plan, select Build> Floor> Foundation. The
either edit the walls in your foundation plan Foundation Setup dialog will open allowing
to match with those above, or you can delete you to set the general parameters for the new
the foundation and rebuild it. You must foundation plan. When you click OK the new
delete and rebuild the foundation if you foundation plan, .pl0, will be created.
decide to change foundation type.
182
Chapter 12:
Room Specification
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
General Information
Floor and ceiling heights for all floors and Defining a room as Porch, for example,
the foundation, are defined by the Floor attaches certain attributes which are different
Managing
Defaults dialog. These values can be than if it were defined as Kitchen.
changed on a floor-by-floor basis or by room.
Files
When you define each room:
Floor heights can change by room within the
same floor to accommodate split levels, 1. Ceiling and floor heights can be defined
sunken living rooms, bi-levels, dropped room-by-room or globally.
garages, etc. 2. Baseboard, chair-rail or crown molding
Ceilings may be uniformly raised throughout can be applied room-by-room or glo-
the floor, or one room may have a higher bally.
ceiling than the rest of the floor. Adjacent 3. Materials for walls, ceilings, floors and
rooms can have a cathedral ceiling, a cof- moldings can be defined room-by-room
fered ceiling, or no ceiling at all. or globally.
Specification
In order to have such flexibility, every room All of this is defined in the Room Specifica-
Managing
needs to be defined with a name, and with tion dialog.
Room
Files
that name comes defined characteristics.
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by The room definition disappears if you delete
any combination of joined walls or railings, one of the surrounding walls. It is a good
visible or invisible. A room must have one idea to get your walls in place before you
unbroken perimeter. Unless otherwise speci- spend a lot of time defining rooms with
fied, a room automatically generates a floor names and attributes such as floor height,
platform and ceiling platform. The program ceiling height, finishes, etc.
Libraries
also specifies that rooms are covered by the

Symbol
roof. There are exceptions to this, such as a

room defined to be a deck.
183
Selecting a “Room”
Select left room. Select right room. Select exterior “room.”

1. Draw four walls to create a room. 5. Click outside one of the exterior walls.
2. Divide the room in half with another The red line should go completely
wall. around the exterior of the plan. The right
mouse button can also be used to select
3. In Select Items mode, click in the rooms.
middle of one of the rooms. A line
Double-click inside a room, but not on a cab-
appears inside the walls. This line
defines the perimeter of that room. inet, furniture item, etc., in Select Items
mode to access the Room Specification dia-
4. Select the other room in the same way. log for that room. This is the same as select-
The red line should now follow around
ing the room, and clicking the Open Item
the other room.
button.
The exterior room (defined by the outside of
the house) can be selected the same way.
Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog covers gen- If a value is followed by (D) it means that it
eral information about individual rooms. The can be edited for the entire floor in the Floor
most important values are the Room Defaults dialog.
Name, Floor Height and Ceiling If one of these setting is changed for a given
Height. room, that setting remains individually set
Rooms can be modified individually or glo- for that one room. If you want to return a
bally. Individual settings are defined in the value to the Floor Default value, type a "d" in
Room Specification dialog, global settings the text box.
are defined in the Floor Defaults dialog. Some defaults are related to entries within
Access the Room Specification dialog by the dialog. To return one of these values to
selecting a room and clicking the Open the default value, type a "d" in the box.
Item button.
184
General Tab
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
3
Files
4
5 11
6
7
Managing
8
Files
9
10
The General tab shows a cross section of the Show Room Label - Select the
2
room, displaying the various heights and check box to show the room label in
Specification
platform thicknesses, including foundations, Plan View.
for the floors below the room you selected. Floor Height - Specify the relative
Room
(This room has a foundation below.) 3
elevation above or below the default
What you see in the cross section depends on first floor height of zero.
the current floor, and on the location of the Ceiling Height - Specify the ceiling
cursor when you selected the room. Only two 4
height. This value is the Top plate
floors at a time display in the Room Specifi- height for the walls. The Ceiling height is
cation dialog. If one large room on the cur- relative to the room’s floor height.
rent floor is positioned over a couple of
Lowered ceiling - Specify a height
smaller rooms, the position of the cursor 5
(which of the two lower rooms you were for a lowered ceiling off the floor.
above) determines which of the lower rooms Stem wall height - If the room
6
display for the floor below. below is a foundation then you can
Managing
Room Name - Select the name of the specify the distance from the bottom of floor
Files
1 framing to the top of the footing.

room.
185
Ceiling below - The ceiling height Roof Group - Specify a roof group for
7 10
for the floor below is shown. It may be the room. For each set of rooms with
defined here, or in the specification for that the same Roof Group number, a complete
room. The values are linked. roof plan is built. This roof plan is not influ-
Floor Above Height - Specify the enced by any other parts of the structure
8 where the rooms are in different roof groups.
finish floor height for the floor above.
This number is nearly always left to zero.
Platform Thickness - An informa-
9 Change this number to break off a structure
tion line displays the Platform thickness so that the program does not automatically
for the floor framing assembly. This includes combine its roof system with the main build-
the thickness of the subfloor and joists. The ing.
platform thickness can be changed in the
Framing dialog, on the tab for the appropri- 11 A diagram of the room is displayed.
ate floor. The arrows indicate what part of the
structure moves if changes are made in any
If the material for the current room’s floor is of the boxes.
Concrete, and floors and ceilings have been
rebuilt since it was set to this, the platform
thickness is set by the Slab Thickness in
the Foundation Setup dialog.
Molding Tab
1 2 3
Moldings (crown, chair rail or baseboard) fit or item that is attached to the wall at the
can be defined for the room. Moldings are molding height. This allows a crown mold-
placed around the wall surfaces of a room. ing at the top of wall and full height cabinets
They continue around the surface of any sof-
186
Crown Molding - Define a Height Specifying Custom Moldings

1
Managing
for Crown Molding, and the Dist.
If you only define a Height for the molding
Above Floor for the molding.
Files
the program places a default molding profile
Chair Rail - Define a Height for Chair for you that displays in 3D. If you want to
2
Rail Molding and the Dist. Above define a custom molding click the Choose
Floor for the molding. button and the Library Browser opens in
Base Molding - Specify a Height for the Molding Library.
Managing
3
Dist. Above Floor for the Base Select a molding in the Browser. Once it is
Files
Molding. selected, minimize the window and the
You can set the Height of any of these to molding is assigned to the trim that you
zero to specify no molding at all. Any mold- selected.
ing Height can be specified in sixteenth inch Click Clear to remove a selected molding
Managing
(1 mm) increments. profile from the room.
Files
If the numbers are followed by (D), it signi-
fies that it is a default value set in the Floor
Defaults dialog. If the number is not fol-
lowed by a (D), enter "d" to reset one of these
values to the default.
Structure Tab
Specification
Room
1
1 If Ceiling over this room is 2 If Roof over this room is checked, a

checked, the room will have a flat ceil- roof automatically generates over the
Managing
ing. If unchecked, the ceiling follows the room. If unchecked, no roof generates.
Files
underside of roof or ceiling planes.
187
Slab foundation for this room. Floor for this room is supplied
3 4 by the foundation “room” from
Check to change this room’s floor plat-
form into a monolithic concrete slab that dis- the floor below. Checking this causes the
plays with the foundation plan for the floor floor for this room to be omitted (it is “Open
below. Below”). This room’s floor is then supplied
by the floor below. This is used in situations
where framed walls are built above small
concrete curb walls, such as in garages.
Material Tab
1 Choose the part of the room to define. If you are using a system default wall type,
or a wall layer definition with no materials
defined, the materials selected here go to the
2 Choose Select Material to open the Material List. In either case, defining a mate-
Materials dialog and select a material rial here affects all 3D and Render Views.
for that part.
3 A picture of the applied material dis-
plays here.
Materials on Walls
If the wall layer definition has materials
defined, the materials defined in the room do
not go to the Material List.
188
Specifying Rooms
Specifying Rooms
Managing
Files
Every room should be labeled with a name as manually placed in an exterior room auto-
soon as the floor plan has been developed. matically becomes a waterproof outlet
You don’t need to name a room defined with designed for exterior use.
invisible railings, that was created for the Moldings are not drawn in exterior rooms. A
purpose of changing the floor or ceiling window placed in wall between an exterior
Managing
heights within a larger room room and an interior room always faces out
Files
The label classifies the type of room and in toward the exterior. The exterior sill and cas-
turn, each type of room has associated char- ing face out.
acteristics. Once a room is labeled, the text Open Below is a unique type of interior
can be edited in Plan View, but the type of room. It can be used for defining stairwell
room is linked to the original name until it is
Managing
openings or other areas which have no floor.
deleted and renamed.
Files
The Open Below Room Label prevents the
Plan Check uses the room type, and its char- floor from being created. The Place
acteristics to do basic checking of the plan. Outlets tool does not place outlets in this
For example, a closet does not need a smoke type of room. The enclosed area is not
detector, but a bedroom does. included in the “Living Area” calculations.
Baseboards and chair rails do not show, but
Room Types crown moldings will. For window and door
Interior rooms are used in Living Area placement, an Open Below room is treated as
an interior room.
calculations. The Place Outlets tool adds
outlets automatically to all interior rooms
Specification
except bathrooms. Windows placed between
Room
interior rooms generate a warning. Interior
doors do not show a threshold. Interior
rooms have a ceiling and a roof above them
unless specified otherwise.
Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to
the outside and do not generate a roof above
them. Exterior rooms are not included in the
Living Area calculation. A wall between
exterior rooms and interior rooms can con-
tain windows, and a door you place there is
designated as exterior and contains a thresh-
Managing
old. The Place Outlets tool does not place

Files
outlets in an exterior type room. Any outlet
189
Garage, Slabs, and Porches are hybrid tool places outlets in these rooms. A garage
rooms. They are treated like exterior rooms is specified with a different type of founda-
in all cases except that they generate a ceiling tion than other rooms.
and a roof above them. The Place Outlets
Interior Exterior Hybrid

Living Study Court Open Below
Dining Office Deck Garage
Family Entry Balcony Slab
Kitchen Hall Porch
Nook Closet
Bath Dressing
Master Bath Storage
Master Bedrm Laundry
Bedroom Utility
Room Labels
Room Labels are drawn on the Room revalidated. You can move a Room Label
Names layer of the Architectural tab. Three around the Plan View without affecting the
other layers are related to the Room room specification.
Names;
1. Room Standard Area, If a large room is divided into two rooms,
the larger of the two parts inherits the
2. Room Interior Area, name and other characteristics of the old
room. The second room uses the values
3. Room Interior Dimensions.
from the Floor Defaults dialog. If a wall
One or none of these can be displayed dividing two rooms is removed, the new
depending on the information you want to room inherits the name and
see in Plan View. characteristics of the larger of the two old
rooms.
Room area or dimensions are not standard
text entries. They cannot be edited or
changed, but their display can be controlled
Editing Room Labels
from the Layers dialog. Their color and line The Room Label is a standard text entry and
weight is determined by the Layer proper- can be changed, moved and resized like any
ties. They move, resize, and rotate with the other text entry. Its display can be switched
Room Label. Room Labels may move about off and its color changed independently of
or even disappear when room entries are other text entries using the Layers dialog. If
190
Foundations and Room Specifications
you change the text in the label, you can still It is reasonable to change the “Bedroom”
Managing
see the room's original definition by display- label to “Guest Room,” since they are the
ing its Room Specification dialog. same type of room. But if you want to utilize
Files
The Room Label can be edited as a Text item the Plan Check feature, don't define a closet
and changed to say anything you like, but the as a “Living Room” and then edit its label to
program remembers the original name for say “Closet”. If you do, the system still con-
purposes of Plan Check until you delete and siders it to be a living room and treat it as
Managing
select another from the Room Specification such.
Files
dialog. The program determines the type of If you delete the entire text entry, the room
the room from this selection, not from the definition remains within the Room Specifi-
text that the label contains. cation dialog. To retrieve the label, select
and open the room, and select the Show
Room Label check box in the Room Spec-
Managing
ification dialog.
Files
Foundations and Room Specifications
Once a room is defined, the program 3. The garage floor displays in 3D with the
assumes some things about the foundation foundation floor, not the first floor.
below that room. 4. Defining a room as Slab causes the floor
1. Exterior walls of rooms default to create platform to be the same thickness as the
the foundation type specified in the Slab thickness value in the Founda-
Foundation Setup dialog. tion Setup dialog.
Specification
2. Walls that define the garage have a foun- 5. Courts, decks and balconies do not gen-
dation under them defined by the Foun- erate a foundation.
Room
dation Setup with a concrete slab at the
top of stem wall or grade beam.
Room Sizes
Any defined room can have its size display Room interior area, measured from the
with the Room Label. There are three ways inner surfaces of all the room's walls. This is
that the size can be displayed. rounded to the nearest square foot or mm.
Room standard area is measured from Room interior dimensions, measured
the outside surface of exterior walls and the again from the inner surfaces of all the
Managing
center of interior walls. It does not include room's walls. This is rounded to the nearest
Files
area within bay, box and bow windows. This inch or mm.
is rounded to the nearest square foot or mm.
191
You can define in the Floor 1 Defaults dia- to the exterior main layer surface, or the
log how you would like the program to cal- exterior surface of the entire wall layer defi-
culate floor areas. The program can measure nition.
Layers Dialog
Living Area
The Living Area label appears near the open below. The Living Area should not be
center at the bottom of the plan the first time mistaken to be the actual footprint of the
you Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings with at house.
least one room. This value is recalculated Living Area is measured from the outside
every time you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil- surface or main layer surface of exterior
ings. walls, and to the center of walls or railings
You can choose not to display this label by separating the living area from a garage, slab
clearing the Show “Living Area” check or “Open Below” area.
box in the Plan Defaults dialog. The living area is displayed for each separate
The Living Area label can be moved or building if half or more of that building's area
deleted. Once deleted, the only way to have it is living area. For example, a living area
reappear is to run Plan Check (choose label would not appear for a detached garage
Options> Plan check or press F9 ). You may that contains bathroom or small shop.
click the Done button immediately, without To find the actual footprint of any given
actually completing Plan Check. The Living floor:
Area label displays.
1. Draw a CAD polyline outside the perim-
eter of the plan. Each line segment
Living Area vs. Footprint should begin at the end point of the pre-
Only true livable areas are included in the vious line, and should be drawn at the
Living Area calculation. Exterior rooms exact angle of the wall to which it corre-
labeled as garage, court, deck, and porch are sponds. Make sure that the polyline
not included. Neither is any room labeled closes at all intersections.
192
Living Area
2. Select segment of polyline and click on 5. Select the Polyline and click the Open
Managing
the dimension that locates the exterior of Item button, a Polyline Area is shown
the wall.
Files
in the Edit CAD Item dialog. If no area
3. Enter a value of zero in the Set Dimen- is shown, the polyline is not closed.
sion Line dialog. In the following example, the house is com-
4. After you have gone around the whole posed of a Living room, a Garage and a
house the polyline represents the foot- Porch. A CAD polyline was drawn around
Managing
print. the house, following the shape only. When
Files
selected all the end points have a handle, so
the polyline is closed.
Managing
Files
Footprint includes.
Specification
Room
Managing
Files
193
Floor & Ceiling Heights

Following is a cross section of a simple, two-
story building. Several important observa-
tions can be made from this diagram.
Calculating Floor Heights F = Stem Wall Height
Floor heights are always based on absolute G = Foundation Floor Height, (Always a
zero being the default subfloor height of the negative number.)
first floor. Individual rooms may have their H = Ceiling Height, foundation
own floor height.
The following formulas apply:
The above diagram shows callouts A through
D = (A) + (B) + (C) (Upper floor ht. =
H.
lower floor ht + lower ceiling ht + plat-
A = Floor Height, first floor form thickness).
B = Ceiling Height, first floor G = (A) - (E) - (F) + slab thickness (Foun-
C = Platform Thickness upper floor dation floor ht = first floor ht - platform
thickness - stem wall height + slab thick-
D = Floor Height, second floor
ness).
E = Floor Thickness, first floor
194
Ceiling Heights
Ceiling Heights
Managing
Files
The ceiling height specifies the distance
from the finished floor to the top plate. The
first time you specify it, it is defined relative
to the subfloor height. Once it has been
defined, the top plates are set and adjusting
Managing
the floor height adjusts the ceiling height to
Files
compensate. The top plate height is not
adjusted.
Example: The default ceiling height for the
second floor is 96" which is 204" above the
first floor.
Managing
Files
1. If you lower the second floor by 8", in
the Room Specification dialog, the
ceiling height increases to 104"
which is still be 204" above the first
floor.
2. If you go back in to the dialog and spec- If you have a situation like this, you can
ify the floor to have a 96" ceiling make a “false” lowered ceiling to cover any
height, The floor height remains the “steps” made by different floor platforms
same, the ceiling height is 96", which is above. Do this by entering its height in the
makes it 196" above the first floor. Lowered ceiling box in the Room Speci-
Specification
fication dialog.
Ceiling heights are linked to the floor above.
Room
If the floor above is stepped, the ceiling
below is also stepped.
The illustration above shows a Perspective
View of a first floor room. The floor above
contains several rooms having different floor
heights. Those stepped floor platforms affect
the ceiling below.
1. If you lower the floor, the ceiling below
that room drops.
2. If you raise the floor, the ceiling below
that area is raised.
Managing
Files
3. If you adjust a ceiling, the floor above is

adjusted as well.
195
Lowered Ceiling Height
You can define a lowered ceiling height to Once the room was modeled a new material
model a dropped ceiling without affecting with a 24x24 tile pattern was created to rep-
the structural ceiling height. The above illus- resent the ceiling tiles. The material was
tration shows a room defined within a room, applied to the ceiling for that individual
with an Invisible wall. The default ceiling room. The camera shows the dropped ceiling
height for the entire floor is 120". The 24" below the structural ceiling.
smaller room has the lowered ceiling height
set at 96". The dashed line in the diagram
represents the lowered ceiling.
196
Cathedral Ceilings
Cathedral Ceilings
Managing
Files
A cathedral ceiling can be created by the 3. When all the rooms have been changed,
underside of the roof above or by ceiling Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to
planes drawn in Plan View. remove the flat ceilings.
To create a cathedral ceiling: 4. If there is a roof present, it is seen in a
Perspective View.
Managing
1. Draw the roof planes.
Files
2. When the roof is in place, individually 5. If you want a pitch that is different from
select every room which is affected, and the roof pitch, use Build> Roof> Ceil-
open the Room Specification dialog. ing Plane to create a sloped ceiling.
On the Structure tab, clear the check
box for Ceiling over this room.
Managing
Files
Coffered Ceilings
Specification
Room
Hip roof, w/ cathedral Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling Coffered ceiling from Plan
height raised and ceilings View. Note dashed lines
rebuilt. Full Camera view. for changed ceiling direc-
A coffered ceiling is usually based on a hip- You must get the roofs built correctly before
style roof. If a hip roof is used, and the ceil- adjusting the ceiling height for the coffered
ing is removed, then the new ceiling (after ceiling. Any attempt to rebuild the roofs after
Rebuilding Walls/Floors/Ceilings) follows adjusting the ceiling height results in the roof
the entire hip roof line. Sometimes only the itself being raised to match the new ceiling
lower part of the ceiling is supposed to fol- height.
Managing
low the roof line, and then the rest of the ceil-
Files
Assuming a hip roof based on 8’ ceilings. If,

ing should be flat. In this case, the ceiling after the roof is built, the ceiling is raised to
needs to be left checked for that room, but 10’, then the new ceiling follows the roof for
the ceiling height is adjusted instead. 2’, then become a flat ceiling. You must
197
rebuild floors and ceilings after raising the More complex and varied ceilings are made
ceiling height, but you cannot rebuild the using ceiling sections. These behave like
roof. roof sections except that where the top of a
The Plan View shows where the ceiling roof section is viewed from outside the
changes from sloped to flat with a dashed house, the bottom of a ceiling section is
line. This line is displayed on the Beams/ viewed from inside the house.
Soffits layer in the Layers dialog.
Other Special Ceilings

Soffits can be used in various ways to Framing members may also be used for this.
enhance the 3D model. The ability to have
soffits automatically angle to fit the slope of
the roof, combined with the ability to repli-
cate groups of soffits at specified intervals
offers unlimited possibilities. The illustration
shows only one of the many possibilities.
Split Levels
Split levels are created by adjusting the floors
and ceiling heights for the various areas of the
plan. Rooms can be either raised or lowered. In the
example at the right, the lowest floor was at level
zero, the next at 24, and the next at 48 inches. The
ceiling height in each room was set to 96 inches.
The overview and cross section are shown.
A close look at the front entry of the

split-entry home on the left shows that
part of the upper floor was lowered to
provide the entry platform, (the siding on
the second floor follows the dropped
floor height). The floor plan for the Entry
has room definition information showing
the floor and ceiling heights for each of
the different levels.
198
Split Levels
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
The stairwell is a room The surrounding rooms are
named Open Below. This standard rooms, with the
causes no floor to generate floor height and ceiling
in the area. The stairs height set to the floor
Managing
drawn on the floor below t defaults. Note that all the
Files
display from above, after values are followed by a
floors and ceilings are (D), indicating that they
rebuilt. match the floor default.
Specification
As you walk in the house, the floor level of the Entry is Room
halfway between the two floors. The floor height is set to
54" (which is 54 1/4” lower than the rest of the rooms on
Managing
this floor). The ceiling height has also been raised so that
it is higher than the rest of this floor. If the ceiling were at
Files
the same height, it would be at 96" (the floor default) plus

54 1/4” (the amount the floor was dropped) for a total of
150 1/4”.
199
200
Chapter 13:
Walls & Railings
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
New in 7.0
• Automatic dimensions and the Move • Solid Railings follow pitch of staircase.
handle are located by where you select
Managing
on walls and railings.
Files
General Information
Walls are the single most important building The Railing tool is used to create railings.
component in Chief Architect. By placing The type and height of railings drawn with
Managing
walls, and naming rooms, you are directing this tool are defined in Railing Setup
Files
the program as to how you want the 3D dialog.(see “Railing Defaults Setup” on page
model built. Everything except wall height is 100.)
defined in the Wall Specification dialog.
The Curved Wall tool is used to draw a
Click the Wall button to activate the Wall curved wall. For more information.
tool. The set of wall tools appear on the
toolbar. Click anywhere on the screen within The Curved Railing tool is used to
Plan View and drag to create a wall. draw a curved railing.
Double-click the Wall button to open the The Hatch Wall tool is used to apply a
Default Wall Type dialog to define or select hatch pattern in the walls in 2D Plan View.
a new wall type.
Railings
Walls &
The Break Wall tool is used to sever a
Wall Modes wall into segments.
All wall tools are available in the Build>
Wall menu.
The Wall tool is used to draw walls. The
type of wall drawn with this tool is defined in
the Default Wall Type dialog.(see “Default
Wall Type Dialog” on page 98.)
201
Drawing Walls
To draw a wall, click the Wall button to mouse button when the wall is close to
activate the Wall tool. Click in Plan View, the desired length. You can fine tune the
hold down the left mouse button and drag to floor plan later.
draw a wall. Release the mouse button to end 6. When drawing walls you will want to
the wall. You can continue placing walls this draw them at the correct angle. Once a
way until you select another tool. wall is created, its angle cannot be
changed. If the angle is incorrect, the
Creating a floor plan with walls is simple if
wall has to be deleted and redrawn at the
you keep a few things in mind.
proper angle.
1. It is best to draw exterior walls first 7. When wall ends are placed close to
and define the footprint of the build- each other, they will automatically
ing. Second you should draw the interior attach to each other and the intersec-
walls to finalize the layout. Once that is tion is cleaned up.
done you can add doors and windows
before creating the roof plan. 8. The lines you see in Plan View repre-
sent a three-dimensional wall. Gener-
2. Draw walls first and then place open- ate a 3D View to see the results.
ings in them. Draw straight through a
doorway, window or other opening. Put
Create Rooms
the opening in later. Walls should be
Shown below is a group of walls similar to
drawn to create rooms, and then doors
what you could find in many floor plans.
and windows are added to place breaks
Two bedrooms are separated by a group of
in the walls. Do not draw short walls to
represent wing walls on the sides of
doors and windows.
3. Draw exterior walls in a clockwise
direction around the screen. Walls
have an exterior side and an interior
side. If you draw in the clockwise direc-
tion, the exterior side will face out.
4. When you are drawing walls, think of
it as a sketch. You can later enter
dimensions and use other methods to
accurately place your walls and define
their lengths. walls that contain three closets -- one for
each bedroom and one for a linen closet
5. When you are drawing a wall, the
facing into the hallway. Place doorways
angle and the length of the wall will
where marked.
display in the status bar. Release the
202
Selecting Walls
Do NOT break walls and delete center side and try to line them up. Chief Architect
Managing
sections when an opening like this is needed. functions better using longer walls broken by
Do NOT draw short stub walls from each doorways.
Files
Selecting Walls
Click on the wall in either Wall or To de-select a wall, click on it while holding
Managing
Railing mode. You may also click on the down the Shift key.
Files
wall or railing in Select Items mode, or You cannot move multiple selected walls, but
right-click on the wall or railing in any other can open the Wall Specification dialog and
mode when the Architectural tools are active. edit them.
The selected wall or railing will have five red
Managing
handles, one at each end, one where selected, Walls In Section/Elevation
Files
and one slightly away from each end. Drag Click on a wall in Select Items mode
from these handles to dynamically edit the within a Section/Elevation View when the
wall. Architectural mode is active. The selected
wall will display several red selection
Multiple Select In Plan View handles allowing you to modify the wall.
Managing
Select the first wall using any method, then Click the Open Item button, or another
Files
hold down the Shift key and click on each tool on the Edit toolbar to create a raked
subsequent wall to add it to the selection set. wall, a pony wall, or a stepped wall. (see
“Raked Walls” on page 226.)
Moving and Resizing Walls

extend extend
wall offset move wall offset
Click on a wall in Wall mode to select it. direction of the wall. Release the mouse
Railings
Walls &
Five handles display. If you click too near the button when the wall is near its proper
end of the wall, you cannot select it. It is best location. As you move the wall, temporary
to select the walls between the two Wall dimensions appear and update with the
Offset handles. You will see red handles move.
appear when the wall is selected.
Extend Handles
Move Handle The two end handles, the Extend handles,
The Move handle appears near where you can be used to extend the wall in the same
clicked, between the two offset handles. direction or to draw another wall of the same
Drag the Move handle perpendicular to the type in a different direction. Select the wall
203
and click on an Extend handle. The cursor If you need to override this feature you can
will change to a two-headed arrow. Drag the use the Wall Offset handles to specify which
Extend handle in line with the wall. The sides or layers of the walls are aligned.
wall will be extended or shortened. If the
Drag from either of the two Wall Offset
wall is shortened to less than the
handles to offset the wall in 1/32”
Unconnected Wall Min. Length set in
increments. When you move the wall with
the Plan Defaults dialog, it will be deleted.
these handles the program does not snap the
Drag the Extend handle at an angle to the walls to a different location.
wall to draw a new wall with the same wall
In the picture below, one of the walls has
layer definition.
been offset so that the step is only on one
To merge two colinear walls with the same side, and a third wall meets the other two on
wall layer definition, extend one of the walls this side and hides this step.
to the other with these handles. If the walls
do not merge automatically when the ends
connect, move one wall very slightly and
release it. The program will snap it into
alignment and the walls will become one.
Wall Offset Handles

The Wall Offset handles are used for fine
In the illustration below, a siding wall and a
adjustment of walls. When you move a wall
brick wall are aligned by their interior sur-
with these handles, the program does not
faces. Normally, the centers of both walls
snap the wall to adjacent walls or objects.
would line up. To line up the studs, select one
Wall Offset handles can be used to adjust
of the walls and drag from the offset handle.
walls which are in-line, but are different wall
You may have to select and drag several
types of different thickness.
times in order to move the wall sufficiently.
When you draw two walls with different
thicknesses, the program aligns the walls to
their centers. There will be a “step” on both
sides where they meet.
If you move the wall using the center handle,

the offset is lost and will need to be reestab-
lished.
204
Moving Walls With Dimensions
Moving Walls With Dimensions
Managing
Files
Moving a wall by editing Dimensions is 2. Click on the center of the dimension line
the preferred way to precisely locate walls. which you will use to move the wall.
Dimension lines perpendicular to a wall can 2. Click here.
be used to redefine its position. To change
the length of a wall, you must relocate a wall
Managing
adjacent to it. When using dimensions this
Files
way the floor plan is easily resized to exact
dimensions.
Draw walls in a clockwise direction around

the center of a room or building to place
Managing
the layers in the proper alignment.
1. Select this wall.
Files
As you move a wall, dimension lines
locating the wall change to give its current 3. The Set Dimension Line dialog
position. If there are no existing dimension appears. Type in a new value for the
lines, temporary dimensions appear when the dimension. The dialog will assume you
wall is selected and remain there for the are entering inches unless you include
Managing
duration of the move. The dimensions which the feet mark. (The dialog will accept a
Files
change when the wall is moved can be used negative number in this field).
to move the wall accurately. 4. Click OK.
To move a wall using a dimension do the 5. The wall will move according to the
following: dimension, unless something interferes
with the move. In the dialog above the
1. Select the wall.
wall will move 10’-10”, the difference
between 17’-2” and 28’-0”.
Break Walls
Railings
Walls &
A wall can be broken into two segments by Once in Break Wall mode, you can
selecting the Break Wall tool and clicking continue to place breaks into the same or
on the wall. This will place a break in the other walls creating more sections. Pressing
wall, creating two wall sections. The Break the Esc key or clicking the right mouse button
Wall tool can be used to create aligned terminates the Break Wall tool and returns
walls across rooms or to create walls you to the previous mode.
composed of different wall layer definitions.
If a break is placed near the intersection of
two walls, the break will occur at the exact
205
intersection. Once you place a break get out To perform this exercise:
of Break Wall mode and then check for 1. Draw a room or Kitchen and select the
the break by selecting the original wall. If the
Break Wall from the toolbar.
handles stop near the break, the wall was
correctly broken. 2. Click on the wall that will separate the
Kitchen and Nook area. You will see a
Creating a Nook short line across the wall indicating a
The picture shows how a kitchen nook can be break.
extended out from the rest of the house using 3. Now do the same where the Nook and
the Break Wall tool. Family room meet. You do not need to
be exact. You can make adjustments to it
later when you dimension the walls.
4. Select the middle section of the wall
with the right mouse button. This both
terminates Break Wall mode and
selects the wall for moving.
5. Move the cursor to the middle handle
and drag the wall outward.
6. Draw side walls to connect the wall back
to the rest of the house.
7. Finally, you can move these short walls
to more accurately size the nook.
Allowed Wall Angles

Walls can only be drawn at the Allowed Drag the end of the temporary wall in a
Wall Angles defined in the Plan Defaults circular motion. In the status bar, note that
dialog. the wall jumps at defined angle increments.
Release the mouse button to draw the wall at
Select the Wall tool. Click and drag the the length and angle last displayed in the
cursor to draw a wall. Note the red temporary information window.
wall showing the position and length of the
wall. The length and the angle of the The program will allow you to draw walls at
temporary wall display in the status bar at the any multiple of 15 or 7 1/2 degrees. If 7 1/2
bottom of the window. degree allowed angles is selected, eight
additional angles can be defined.
206
Allowed Wall Angles
Plan Defaults Dialog
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
though the values show in the Plan Defaults
1 In the Plan Defaults dialog, select 7 1/2
dialog. To access the additional angles, you
degree allowed angles. must first select 7 1/2 degree allowed
Managing
angles.
2 Then type in up to eight Additional
Files
angles.
When you enter an angle, they must be

between 45 degrees and -45 degrees. After
an angle is entered, a wall can be drawn at
Managing
that angle. Walls can also be drawn at angles
90 degrees and 180 degrees to the defined
Files
angle.
Positive angles are measured in the counter-
clockwise direction with zero degrees being
at horizontal right.
The diagram below shows walls drawn when
the angle allowed entered is 18d 26’.
Railings
Walls &
18d 26’ (positive angle)
In order to be able to draw a wall at the

equivalent angle in a clockwise direction, the
negative value of the same angle should be
entered.
If 15 degree allowed angles is selected,
no additional angles are available even
207
Understanding Wall Assemblies

1
Once you are familiar with drawing and Layer Spec Tab
moving walls, you can begin to utilize the The Layer Spec tab holds all of the
other information that is contained within the information for wall layer definitions in a
wall. When you draw a wall, the 2D plan file. It can be accessed in two places; the
representation is defined on the Layer Spec Default Wall Type dialog and as a tab in the
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. Wall Specification dialog. These two
The Layer Spec tab also defines material dialogs have one function in common. They
information that can be calculated for take- can both be used to define new wall layer
offs in the Material List or viewed in 3D and definitions and redefine existing wall layer
Render Views. The 3D component or height definitions. This function will be discussed
of the walls is defined by the Floor Defaults after covering the differences between these
dialog and the Room Specification dialog. two dialogs.
Before discussing the 3D aspects of walls it
is important to understand the Layer Spec 1 The Default Wall Type dialog is used
to specify which type of wall the Wall
tab. tool will draw. You can use the provided wall
layer definitions or create a new wall layer
definition to use with the Wall tool.
208
Wall Layer Definitions
To open the Default Wall Type dialog Item button in the Edit toolbar. You can
Managing
double-click the Wall button. or select also open the dialog for one wall by double-
Files
Options> Default Setup> Wall Defaults. clicking on a wall when the Wall tool is
active.
With the dialog open, select a wall type from
the list. You can redefine it as you wish and Click the Layer Spec tab to view the
click OK. When walls are subsequently available wall layer definitions. Changing
drawn, that wall layer definition will be used. the currently selected wall type will only
Managing
affect the selected wall(s). It does not affect
Files
2 The Layer Spec tab of the Wall which wall is currently being used as the
Specification dialog is used to define
default.
or redefine wall layer definitions for existing
walls in the model. Changing any of the information for a given
wall layer definition will affect all walls that
To open the Wall Specification dialog, select
Managing
are currently defined as that type of wall and
a wall or group of walls and click the Open
Files
all new walls created using it.
Wall Layer Definitions

There are two categories of walls in the The 2D display of System Default walls is
Managing
program: System Default Walls and controlled by the settings in the Layers
Files
User Specified Walls. dialog. If you want these walls to appear
differently in Plan View, or print differently,
System Default Walls you must make changes to the Normal Walls
There are only two wall layer definitions in layer on the Architectural tab.
the System Default wall set: Default (Wood The program will assign materials and
frame 16" OC) and Default (Concrete). assume certain characteristics of these walls
These two wall types behave differently from when the Material List is generated.
all other wall types.
Default (Wood frame 16" OC) can be used User Specified Walls
for interior or exterior walls and railings. All other wall layer definitions in the
Railings
When you draw a Default (Wood frame 16" program are considered User Specified
Walls &
OC) it is placed on the Normal Walls layer Walls. Some User Specified wall layer
on the Architectural tab of the Layers definitions are shipped with the program and
dialog. can be customized.
Default (Concrete) can only be used on the The 2D display qualities of User Specified
foundation plan. When you draw a Default walls are defined by the properties in the
(Concrete) wall in the Plan View it is placed Default Wall Type dialog or on the Layer
on the Normal Walls layer. Spec tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
209
If the display of Normal Walls is turned off can now define the layers for the new wall
in the Layers dialog, all walls will be turned type.
off in the Plan View. If the display Normal
Walls is on, and Wall Layers is turned off, The Main Layer
User Specified walls appear just like System One layer in a wall layer definition is defined
Default Walls, and will be represented by as the Main layer. This is the structural
two lines at their exterior surfaces. layer, normally the framing layer. The Main
User Specified walls can have up to seven Layer is used for many things:
layers defined, each representing a different 1. Floor and ceiling platforms, as well as
material. All of these layers can be calculated automatically built foundation walls, are
by the Material List. Materials that are built to the outer edge of the main layer.
applied to the outer layers of the wall layer
2. The program aligns exterior walls on
definition will also define how the wall
different floors by lining up the outer
displays in 3D and Render Views.
edges of their main layers.
Creating New 3. The automatic roof generator places roof
Wall Layer Definitions baselines at the outer edge of the main
layer.
New wall layer definitions can be created in
the Default Wall Type dialog or on the 4. Manually drawn roof base lines and
Layer Spec tab of the Wall Specification gable/roof lines will snap to the edge of
dialog. The <NEW ENTRY SPACE> at the this layer.
bottom of the wall type list is used for 5. Dimension lines can locate the outer
creating additional wall styles. wall surfaces, main layer surfaces, or
To define a new wall layer definition, select wall centers (for interior walls).
<NEW ENTRY SPACE> at the bottom of With all of this information reliant on wall
the wall type list and type over it with any layers, you can see that creating your wall
name you wish. Click inside the wall layer definitions accurately and defining the
diagram in the lower part of the dialog. You Main layer is very important.
210
Wall Specification Dialog
Managing
Files
The Wall Specification dialog specifies wall or group of walls and click the Open
characteristics of selected walls only. To Item button.
open the Wall Specification dialog, select a
General Tab
Managing
Files
1
2 18
3
Managing
19
Files
4 9
5
6 10
7 11
Managing
8 12
Files
13
14
15 20
16
17
The items on this tab appear when they apply
3 Select the Railing check box to specify
to the selected wall(s). (The dialog never the selected wall(s) as railing(s).
displays all of the above information at Specify the railing on the Railing tab.
once).
Options
Railings
Thickness can be specified when the
Walls &
1 Select any of the following Options check
selected wall is one of the System
Default wall types. boxes to modify the selected wall(s)
accordingly.
2 Select the Foundation check box to In most cases, multiple options may be
specify the selected wall(s) as a
foundation wall. More settings for selected.
foundation walls are available on the
Foundation tab. 4 Select Invisible to specify the wall as
invisible. Invisible walls can be
displayed in a Plan View but not 3D Views.
Invisible walls are used to divide rooms that
211
are not separated by a wall or railing, such as Curved walls are aligned in a similar way. To
a nook from a kitchen. align two curved walls, the center of the
selected wall is moved to coincide with the
5 Select No Room Def to display the center of the other wall. The wall is then
wall in Plan View but not define or
moved radially until the main layer surfaces
divide a room.
and centers match as described above.
6 Select No Locate to prevent Walls align to the outer surfaces of the main
Automatic dimension lines from
layers of the exterior walls, and centers of
locating a wall. No Locate walls can be used
interior walls.
for any wall that you do not want
dimensioned.
10 Select Flip layers to reverse wall
layers.
Railings default to having the No Locate
attribute set.
11 Select Lock Center to lock the center
of a curved wall.
7 Select Beam to have the wall display
as two lines in Plan View. This does not
12 Select Retain attic wall to prevent
create a beam when framing is built and does an existing attic wall from being
not appear in 3D Views. deleted when you Rebuild
Walls/Floors/Ceilings. This should be
8 Select Attic Wall to extend the wall selected for walls that you have drawn.
up to the roof after it is moved or has its
length changed. Attic walls are normally
built using the Build Roof dialog. All Resize About
existing attic walls are deleted when you These radio buttons determine what part of a
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings. wall retains its position when the wall type
has been changed and the width of the wall
9 The Align with Lower floor or
11 layer definition has been altered.
Align with Upper floor check boxes
appear when the selected wall is very close, 13 Check Outer Surface to resize a wall
but not quite directly above or below a wall layer definition from the exterior sur-
on the other floor. Check the option to face in. The exterior surface does not move.
precisely align the walls. 14 Check Main Layer Surface to resize
a wall layer definition from the exterior
If both options are available, you may choose side of the main layer in. The outer main
one or the other, but not both. layer surface does not move
The wall you selected is moved until it lines
up properly with the wall above or below. 15 Check Wall Center to resize a wall
layer definition from the center.
Sometimes the wall cannot be moved
because of attachment to another wall. In this 16 Check Main Layer Inside to resize a
case the system then attempts to offset the wall layer definition from the interior
wall, as if it were selected and you dragged side of the main layer out.
from the offset handle near, but not at, its
end.
212
17 Check Inside Surface to resize a 19 Check Default wall bottom height
Managing
wall layer definition from the interior to reset the bottom of the wall to the
surface out. floor height for the room.
Files
Default Wall Heights Radius To
These check boxes only appear if you have
20 This section applies to curved walls
moved the top or bottom of the wall in a only. Refer to Chapter 14 for more
Managing
Section/Elevation View. information about curved walls.
Files
18 Check Default wall top height to
reset the top of a wall to match the
ceiling height in the room.
Roof Tab
Managing
Files
1 6
2 7
Managing
3 8
Files
4
5
Any automatically generated roof style other A Knee wall’s height is defined by the roof
than a hip requires roof information to be plane, not the ceiling height.
defined in the wall itself. Select the Roof tab
Extend Slope Downward - Select
to define the portion of the roof plan that 4
the check box to have roof continue
rests on the wall. For more information For
down over a bumpout in an exterior wall.
more information, see “Roof Styles” on page
346. Combine With Above Wall - Select
5
the check box to eliminate a short
Railings
Walls &
Full Gable Wall - Select the check
1 cripple wall above the top plate when the
box to create a gable end over the wall.
baseline of a roof plane has been raised
High Shed/Gable- Select the check above the top plate of the wall.
2
box to model the high end of a shed
Pitch - Enter a value to individually
roof. 6
define the pitch of the roof plane over
Knee Wall - Select the check box to this wall.
3
define a wall as a Knee wall. A wall
2nd pitch - Select the check box to
must be interior to be defined as a Knee wall. 7
create a roof plane with two pitches.
Define the 2nd pitch.
213
Starts at defines the height above the

8
floor at which the second pitch starts
when 2nd Pitch is selected.
Foundation Tab
Specify Foundation - Select the Center Footing on Main Layer -

1 4
check box to turn the selected wall(s) Select the check box to center the
into a foundation wall. This produces a footing on the main layer instead of the entire
footing below the wall in the Foundation stem wall layer definition.
plan.
5 Two warnings may appear if the
Thickness - Define the thickness for foundation wall layer definition does
2
the wall if it is a System Default Wall not appear to be a foundation wall type.
type. These are for information only.
Footing Width and Height - Define
3
the size of the footing below the
selected foundation wall(s).
214
Railing Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
3
Files
4
5
6
Managing
7
Files
8 13
9 14
10 15
11
12
Managing
Files
Specify Railing - Select the check Open with Middle
1 5
box to specify the selected wall(s) as a Rail - Select to
railing. Railings can be drawn directly using create a railing with a top
the Railing tool. and a middle rail.
No Rail - Select to
Railing Type 6
eliminate the rails,
Balusters - Select leaving only the pillars or
2
to have balusters posts (and overhead beam,
created. if selected).
Solid - Select to The following options may be used in
23
Railings
create a solid, wall combination with each other, and with any of
Walls &
style railing. The wall will the Railing Types.
be of the type defined by
Large
the current wall layer definition. 7
Posts/Pillars -
Open - Select to Select the check box to
4
create a railing with change the posts or pillars
only a top rail. from the standard 5” (125
mm) to 10” (250 mm).
215
Post to Overhead Raise Shoe - Select

8 11
Beam - Select the the check box to raise
check box to have the the shoe (bottom rail) about
newel posts continue up to 3-1/2” (87 mm) off the
an overhead beam placed platform.
just under the ceiling
No Shoe - Select the
height. This option is often 12
check box to eliminate
used in combination with
the shoe altogether.
other options to place a
Balusters go right to the
cross beam along the top of the railing.
floor.
Pillar to
9 Railing height - Enter the Railing
Ceiling/Beam - 13
height.
Select the check box to
change the square newel Baluster - Enter the Baluster spacing.
14
posts to round pillars, and to Balusters are laid out at this defined
make them extend to the spacing or less for the selected railing (s).
ceiling. If an overhead
Newel - Enter the Newel spacing.
beam is also desired, check 15
Newels are laid out at this defined
Post to overhead beam.
spacing or less for the selected railing(s)
Exterior Materials - Select the even if other railings are spaced differently.
10
check box to make the balusters the To eliminate newel posts except at railing
same material as the rails, instead of having ends and openings, enter a number larger
them be defined separately. You have more than the length of the railing.
flexibility if you define materials for each
part on the Material tab.
216
Layer Spec Tab
Managing
Files
9
1
2 11
Managing
10
Files
12
3
Managing
Files
4
5
6
Managing
7 8
Files
1 The drop-down meny contains all of the layers in the wall diagram if you have
wall layer definitions. You can select multiple layers.
one from the list or create a new wall layer
definition. The Framing dialog uses the thickness of
To create a new wall layer definition go to the Main Layer to size the studs if a
framing manterial such as Fir Stud 16"
the drop-down menu and select <NEW OC, Fir Stud 24" OC, Metal Stud 16"
ENTRY SPACE> from the bottom of the list, OC, or Metal Stud 24" OC is assigned.
and type in a name for the wall layer
definition.
3 The wall layers will be listed in order
Railings
Walls &
Main Layer - Enter the number of the from top to bottom. The exterior layer
2 (or reference layer for interior walls) is
Main Layer. The main layer should be
the layer that you will want to dimension to, always layer 1.
it is usually the structural component. The
Main Layer is drawn longer than the other 4 The arrow to the right of the wall
assembly diagram will point to the
active layer. To activate a layer, click inside
the layer in the diagram or click in the
thickness field assigned to it.
217
5 Define a Thickness for each layer. each line in the wall layer definition. Click
This describes the actual thickness of on the line to edit in the diagram. The arrow
the material. to the left of the diagram points to the active
line. Any changes you make in the dialog
Total - Displays the total thickness of
6 immediately display in the diagram showing
your wall layer definition. If you
you how the wall displays in Plan View.
change the total thickness, the program will
automatically change the thickness of the Material - This area displays
10
Main Layer to account for the difference. information regarding materials that
will be calculated in the Material List, as
7 Click the Insert button to add layers to well as any fill patterns that you may want to
the wall layer definition. You will
use in 2D.
create a layer directly above the active layer.
The arrow to the right of the wall assembly
11 Click either of the two boxes and the
diagram points to the active layer. Select Material dialog opens. Specify
a Material for the active layer in the wall
To insert a layer at the bottom you can click
layer definition. If a material is applied to a
near the outside edge of the last layer until
surface layer, that material will display in 3D
the arrow to the left of the diagram points to
and Render Views.
the last line.
Fill Style - Select a hatch pattern for
Delete - Removes the layer that is 12
8 the active layer. Select a Fill Color for
currently active. The arrow to the right
the pattern.
of the wall assembly diagram points to the
active layer. This Fill pattern is overridden if you use the
Line - In this area you can define the Hatch button to fill your walls in the Plan
9 View.
Weight, Color and Line Style for
218
Wall Heights
Railing Material Tab
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
The Railing Material tab can only be used Materials for System Default wall layer
Managing
to assign materials to parts of the Railing if definitions are assigned in the Room
Files
the wall is specified as being a Railing. Specification dialogs.
Materials for User defined wall layer
definitions are assigned to the layers of the
wall, defined on the Layer Spec tab.
Managing
Files
Wall Heights
To change the height of a wall, you must To change the ceiling height for a single
specify a ceiling height in the Room room, the Room Specification dialog is
Specification dialog. The program used. Select any room in the plan, then click
automatically adjusts the height of all walls the Open Item button. The Room
surrounding the room. Specification dialog will open. The General
If you want to change the ceiling height for tab is used to set the ceiling height for that
all rooms on the current floor, use the individual room.
Options> Defaults> Floor Setup to make The top or bottom edge of any wall may be
the change. All rooms on the floor will be
Railings
adjusted in a Section/Elevation View,
Walls &
updated unless their ceiling heights have independently of floor or ceiling heights. For
been set individually. more information see “Editing Walls in 3D”
on page 224.
Deleting Walls
Select the wall or railing, then click the the entire length of an existing wall or
Delete button or the Del key on the railing, from one end to another.
keyboard. Or draw a wall or railing across
219
Connecting Walls
Automatic
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing Connect Walls
wall and the program joins them together. You can use the Connect Walls button to
The new wall will move, extend, or contract clean one intersection of two walls. To do
slightly to meet the existing wall. Walls join this, select one of the walls and the Connect
at the intersection of their main layers. Walls
Walls button displays on the Edit toolbar.
will automatically join when their centers are
within five inches of each other. If one wall Click the Connect Walls button. If the
must move sideways to be coplanar with unconnected end of the wall is sufficiently
another, the wall just drawn will move. close to the unconnected end of another wall
Existing walls do not move. the program will connect them together. If
the separation too great, you can connect the
walls by selecting one of them and extending
Fix Connections
its end toward the other.
Sometimes one or more walls do not
properly connect in the plan. The Fix
Connections menu item (Build>
Repairing Broken Walls
Walls>Fix Connections) will go through the When the end of a wall is placed near the end
plan and clean up all connections that it can. of another wall of the same type and in the
Select Build> Walls>Fix Connections to same direction, the two walls appear to
see if your intersections clean up. If you have combine into a single wall. If you select the
only one connection to clean up it may be wall, you will notice that it is still in more
than one section.
faster to use the Connect Walls button,
from the Edit toolbar. You can combine two walls, or recombine a
broken wall, by moving one of the pieces
away and then back towards the other. The
broken pieces will snap back together.
Hatch Walls
Hatch Wall will fill any wall, except Invisi- The Hatch Wall button superimposes a
ble walls and beams, with a hatch pattern. single hatch across all layers of the selected
Normally, wall hatching should be applied to wall. It will cover up any hatch pattern
layers of the wall type, within the Wall Spec- defined within the Wall Specification
ification dialog. This allows several hatch dialog. (This is not the recommended method
patterns per wall style. (see “Layer Spec of hatching walls).
Tab” on page 208.)
220
Railings
In the Wall mode, select Hatch Wall , and Wall Hatch Dialog
Managing
click on the wall to be hatched. A diagonal
Files
hatch will cover the entire length of that wall.
1
Select the hatch by clicking on it while in
Hatch Wall mode. No other selection
method will work with wall hatching.
2
Managing
Delete the hatch by selecting it in Hatch
3
Files
Wall mode, and clicking the Delete button
or the Del key. This will delete the hatching
only and not the wall.
Resize the hatch by selecting it, then
Managing
dragging from an end handle. The hatch
Files
resizes from the center, making it difficult to
stretch perfectly. It is sometimes easier to
delete the original hatch and create another. The Wall Hatch dialog is used to edit the
The new hatch will always fit the wall hatch pattern and color. To open the dialog,
exactly. select the hatch while in Hatch Wall mode,
Managing
then click the Open Item button.
Files
Select a hatch pattern from the menu.
1
Plan default fill color - Select the
2
check box to use layer color defined for
wall hatching in the Layers dialog.
Fill Color - Select a color for the hatch
3
pattern.
Hatching and fills in walls are not written

to DXF files. They are one of the only
items displayed in a Plan View that cannot
be exported in a DXF file.
Railings
Walls &
Railings
Railings act just like walls in Plan View. Railing button. These settings will be used
Create and modify a railing just like you the next time you use the Railing or
would a wall. Define the default type for new
Curved Railing tool. For more
railings in the Railing Setup dialog. Access
information, see “Railing Defaults Setup” on
this dialog by double-clicking on the
page 100.
221
When first drawn, a railing has the No such as a deck or stariwell that is Open
Locate attribute set. You may wish to set the Below.
No Room Def attribute for some railings if
A doorway in a railing appears in a 3D View
you do not wish them to divide a room.
as an opening, with newels or posts placed
Use a door to produce a break in a railing for on each side. Posts are evenly spaced
a stairway or other access. This keeps the between railing ends and breaks and can be
railing continuous to define a room area, specified at defined intervals.
Using Railings
Exterior Deck support. (For more information, see “Railing
An exterior deck is produced by enclosing an Type” on page 215.)
exterior area with railings just as you would Decks can have stairways going down into
draw a room. Open the "room" by double- the yard. To create a stairway leading down
clicking in it in Select Items mode to from the Deck, select Build> Stairs from the
access its Room Specification dialog. In the menu or click the Stairs button on the Plan
dialog, name it Deck. For more information, View toolbar.
see “Specifying Rooms” on page 189.
Place the cursor at the edge of the deck, hold
A room classified as Deck will default to
the Shift key down, and drag in the direction
having no roof. If you wish to have a roof
over your deck, select the Roof over this of the stairs. Holding the Shift key produces a
room check box on the Structure tab of the stairway that goes down from the current
Room Specification dialog. Select the Post floor instead of up. Place a doorway in the
to Overhead Beam option on the Railing railing at the top of the steps, and your deck
tab to give the roof a visible means of and stairs are complete.
222
Invisible Walls
The only time you should ever draw stairs 2. Select the room and click the Open
Managing
from an upper level down is when you are Item button.
Files
going from a floor platform (such as a
3. In the Room Specification dialog, select
deck) to the ground or finished grade.
Whenever stairs are drawn between two Open Below as the room name.
floor platforms, they should always be 4. Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings. The
drawn from the lower platform up to the room will have no floor, so you will be
upper platform.
able to view the stairs from above.
Managing
Files
Interior Stairwell 5. In the lower floor plan, drag a stairway
upward until it stops. The staircase will
To produce an interior stairwell that contains
stop when it reaches the upper floor’s
a staircase, you must create a room on the
stairwell railing or wall.
upper floor.
6. Make a doorway in the wall or railing
Managing
1. Draw railings to enclose a room on the where the staircase meets the floor
Files
upper floor. Toggle on the Reference above.
Floor to make sure the railings do
7. Resize the doorway to match the stair
not interfere with the area for the stair-
width, then move it toward the wall until
case below. The walls can be any combi-
its edge is at the wall. This will prevent
nation of Invisible walls, railings and
any railing or post from displaying on
Managing
regular walls.
the wall side of the doorway.
Files
Railings
Walls &
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are walls used to define areas. roofs will generate above and below the
They can display in Plan View, but they will areas defined with these walls.
not display in 3D Views. Floors, ceiling and
To draw an Invisible wall, select Build>
Wall> Invisible Wall. Drag to draw the wall.
223
When being drawn or moved, Invisible walls floor or ceiling heights, allowing stepped
follow the same rules as normal walls. areas to be created.
An Invisible wall can be turned into a normal Invisible walls are also used to divide the
wall by selecting it, clicking the Open space in one large room into separate room
Item button, and clearing the Invisible areas.
check box on the General tab of the Wall Common uses would be dividing the living
Specification dialog. (see “General Tab” on and dining areas of a single room, or
page 211.) separating a kitchen from an adjoining nook.
Invisible Walls are also used to define These examples are shown in the pictures
smaller areas within larger rooms. These below.
smaller areas or “rooms” can have different
• Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calcu- • Invisible walls can be drawn through a
lated separately for rooms divided by cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
normal or Invisible walls. • Invisible walls do not produce a short
• Invisible walls do not have any affect on wall section to cover the gap where the
the Place Outlets tool. level of the floor or ceiling changes. Use
an invisible railing for this.
• Cabinets, fixtures and furniture will
freely move through an Invisible wall.
Editing Walls in 3D
Walls can be edited in the Section/Elevation walls, and other shaped walls can be created
View. Raked walls, stepped walls, pony and edited only in this View.
224
Editing Walls in 3D
Where to Use the 3D Wall Editor If the top or bottom edge was selected, a
Managing
The 3D wall editor is best at stepping the handle displays at the midpoint of the
selected edge in addition to handles at all
Files
bottoms of foundation walls, changing or
raking the tops of topmost walls (these may corners. If a side is selected, only the handles
be attic walls), or managing the boundary at the corners display.
between the top and bottom portions of a The handles are similar to that of a CAD
pony wall. polyline except that vertical edges have no
Managing
Editing the top of a wall which has another midpoint handle and there are no movement
Files
wall above it, or the bottom of a wall having or rotation handles.
another wall below it, can be difficult
because it is hard to edit the adjoining wall Adjusting the Top and Bottom
and line two walls up. This is often more To adjust the top of a wall, select near the top
trouble than it is worth. of the wall in the Section/Elevation View.
Managing
Grab the center handle along the top of the
Files
Setting up the Cross Section wall, and drag up or down.
View for Wall Editing To adjust the bottom of a wall, select the wall
When you edit walls in the Section/Elevation near the bottom. Grab the center handle
View it is important to Back Clip the view. along the bottom of the wall, and drag up or
Managing
This will isolate the wall that you want to down.
Files
edit. Before generating the view, toggle the
You can also use dimension lines to move the
Back Clip button, or select the Back
top or bottom of walls. Select either the top
Clip Cross Sections check box on the
or bottom of the wall, click on the dimension
Options tab of the 3D Preferences dialog.
number to open the Set Dimension Line
(see “Options Tab” on page 87.)
dialog. Type in the new dimension value, and
A cross section which is not back clipped click OK. The wall will adjust.
will generate everything from the camera
through the building. Such a view can make
it difficult to select the proper wall for
editing. To edit a specific wall, click the
Cross Section/Elevation button in Plan
Railings
Walls &
View, and drag a cross section line from in
front of that wall, right through it.
Selecting the Wall

In Section/Elevation View, click the Select
Items tool and the select the wall near one Before using a dimension, be sure that it
of the edges. The resulting handles and locates the proper items.
dimensions which appear vary depending on
which edge was selected.
225
Wall Height Specification Default Top Height - Select the

1
You can use the Wall Height Specification check box to restore wall top to default
dialog to restore the default height of the top height and shape.
edge or bottom edge of a wall that has been Default Bottom Height - Select the
edited in 3D. To open the dialog, select the 2
check box to restore wall bottom to
wall in Section/Elevation View and click the default height and shape.
Open Item button. The Wall Height
Specification dialog opens.
1
2
Raked Walls
Raked walls can be created from any wall 2. Grab one of the corner handles, and drag
selected in the Section/Elevation View. that handle either up or down.
To create a simple 3. To rake a wall at a specific angle, draw a
raked wall: line at that angle using the CAD tools.
Align the edges of the raked wall to the
1. Select the wall line by selecting the raked edge, clicking
in Section/Ele-
on the Make Parallel button and then
vation View.
clicking on the CAD line.
Compound Angled Walls

The illustration to angles across the top of the wall
the right shows
To create a compound raked wall, breaks
two walls meeting
must be added to either the top or the bottom
in a “V”. Both
edges. Then each section of the wall can be
walls have three
adjusted separately. You cannot add a break
226
Pony Walls
to the vertical edges of a wall in The new break point will now have a handle.
Managing
Section/Elevation View. Grab the new handle at the break, and drag it
to angle the wall.
Files
To add a single break, select the wall in
Section/Elevation View, click the Break To move a break freely without any
Wall tool, then click on either the top edge restrictions, select the wall away from the
or the bottom edge. break point to be adjusted. If you select too
close to the break, you may be restricted in
Managing
one direction or the other.
Files
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall is defined as a wall with two Select Items mode. The Wall Height
Managing
wall layer definitions that are aligned Specification dialog opens.
vertically. In the Section/Elevation View, you
Files
can take a single wall and split it horizontally
into two walls to create a Pony Wall. Each of
the wall sections can then be defined as a
separate wall type, and adjusted individually.
Managing
System Default Wall Types are the only types 1
Files
of wall that cannot be specified as Pony
Walls.
The upper and lower sections of the pony
wall are linked. If either wall is modified
along the division between the two sections,
such as raking or the stepping of a footing, 1 You have the option to turn the wall
into a pony wall. Check the box. Click
the other half of the pony wall will modify to OK. (If the box does not have an option for
match. pony wall, change the wall type from Plan
View. Then try again.)
Creating a Pony Wall
To create a pony wall, double-click on the When a pony wall is created, selecting the
Railings
Walls &
wall in Section/Elevation View while in wall in cross section will show two separate
sections of wall, one below the other. Both
parts will match the wall type from which
they were originally created.
Changing Wall Types for Pony

Walls
Once a pony wall is created, both the upper
and lower parts of the pony wall can be
227
redefined as a different wall type. This is 3. Click the Layer Spec tab.
done in the Wall Specification dialog. 4. The tab now has two additional options
1. In Plan View, select the pony wall. which allow you to specify a wall type
for either part of the Pony wall.
2. Click the Open Item button to access
the Wall Specification dialog.
Layer Spec Tab for Pony Walls
A wall can only be turned into a Pony Wall Lower portion of the Pony Wall. These are
in a Section/Elevation view but it must be used to define which portion of the wall is
selected in Plan View to open it for being edited. This allows you to define the
specification. When you select a Pony Wall wall layer definitions of both the upper and
in Plan View and open the Wall lower parts of the pony wall.
Specification dialog, the dialog has some
additional options. 2 A new Layer Alignment tab also
appears in the Wall Specification
The Layer Spec tab now displays radio dialog when the selected wall is a Pony Wall.
1
buttons for the Upper Wall and
228
Layer Alignment Tab for Pony Walls
Layer Alignment Tab for Pony Walls
Managing
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
Managing
Pony Walls have a Layer Alignment tab in Inner main - Align the wall layer
Files
their Wall Specification dialog to specify definitions by the interior side of the main
how the two wall layer definitions align. If layer.
the main layers of the two wall layer
Inner surface - Align the wall layer
definitions are the same thickness, the
definitions by the interior surfaces of the
program may align the exterior side when
Managing
walls.
you specify the interior side. This is okay
Files
since both sides are aligned. Upper wall, Lower - Select the
2
option to display the wall layer
Align pony wall - Select the option to
1 definitions for each of the halves.
define at which point the Upper and
Lower wall layer definitions will align. A diagram of the selected half of the pony
wall is displayed at the bottom of the dialog.
No change - Select to leave the alignment
as it was when you opened the dialog. This
should on be used when multiple walls are Displaying in Plan View
selected that have different wall layer Normally, the upper pony wall will display in
definitions. Plan View. To show the lower pony wall in
Plan View instead, open the Plan Defaults
Outer surface - Align the wall layer
Railings
dialog. (Double-click the Select Items
Walls &
definitions by their outer surfaces. button in Plan View, or choose Options>
Outer main - Align the wall layer Defaults Setup> Plan Defaults.)
definitions by the exterior edge of the main
layer.
Central main - Align the centers of the
main layers of both wall layer definitions.
229
Select the Show Lower Ponywall check

box to display the lower section of the pony
wall in Plan View.
NOTE: A window or door that is

completely contained by one part of a
pony wall will not appear in Plan View if
the other part is displayed.
Stepped Walls & Footings

A practical application for pony walls is a 1. To add a step to a wall, select the wall in
stepped foundation. The lower part of the Section/Elevation View.
pony wall is the concrete wall and footing,
2. Double-click the Break tool, then
and the upper part of the pony wall is the stud
click on the top or bottom edge of the
framed walls going between the footing and
wall to place the break.
the first floor platform.
3. In addition to the corner handles, two
In the illustration, handles appear along the broken edge.
the lower pony
wall is a single 4. Select one of these two handles, and
layer concrete drag up or down.
wall and the 5. A square step will be created.
upper part of the If you single-click the Break tool, it only
pony wall was adds one break which adds an edge to the
faced with brick wall. You cannot break the vertical outside
for contrast. edges.
The Break Wall tool makes it easy to
create stepped walls and stepped footings.
230
Chapter 14:
Curved Walls
Managing
Curved
Walls
Files
Managing
Files
Curved Walls
A curved wall is an arc or section of a circle. also limited to these angles. For example, if
It is defined by a chord, a center and a radius. you wish a horizontal wall (in Plan View) to
smoothly curve into a vertical wall, you
Managing
To draw a curved wall, choose Build>
would begin by drawing a curved wall whose
Files
Wall> Curved Wall from the menu or click
chord is at 45 (or maybe 135) degrees
the Curved Wall button when the Wall between them. Do not worry about the
mode is selected. Drag the curved wall from curvature of the wall.
one end to the other, dragging along the
desired curve. Do not worry about getting the
Managing
correct curvature, as this is easily changed
Files
later.
Chord
The chord is the imaginary straight line
between the two ends of an arc. When
Managing
drawing a curved wall, the most important CAD line drawn at
Files
thing is to start and stop at the correct 45 degrees to show
locations, since the angle of the curved wall's that the chord angle
chord is harder to change later. If the chord is the same.
angle is horizontal or vertical, it is pretty
easy to drag the curved wall by eye. Then alter the curvature so that the curved
Otherwise, you may wish to watch the angle wall is tangent to the two straight walls.
in the toolbar's status window or in the status
bar at the bottom of the screen. Center
When it is first drawn, the angle of the chord A curved wall always has a center. The
of a curved wall is limited to the allowed center displays as a small cross when you
angles as set in the Plan Defaults dialog. select the Show arc centers check box on
Curved
Walls
(Choose 7 1/2 degree allowed angles

for the most control and least “jumpiness” of
the curved walls.) Its amount of curvature is
231
the Line Properties panel of the Radius

Preferences dialog. The radius of a curved wall is measured from
the center to one surface or layer of the wall.
You may chose to display and define the
radius on the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. You may elect to
define the radius to the exterior wall layer or
the interior wall layer. If the layer definition
does not make it obvious, temporarily
change the color of the exterior edge so you
Center is displayed.
can tell the inside edge from the outside
edge.
This center point acts like a CAD point in
that a CAD item will snap to it.
Working with Curved Walls

If a curved wall is moved, while it is attached length and the position of the center point are
to other walls, the chord expands or contracts adjusted.
and the radius is redefined to maintain
contact with the adjacent walls.
The ends of the straight walls lengthen or
shorten, depending on how you move the
curved wall. After the move, the curved wall
still flows smoothly into the straight walls at
either end.
In order to draw a room in the shape of a

circle, you must draw two walls. Each wall
must curve 180 degrees to complete the
circle. If you only draw one 360 degree The curved wall moves and changes as if it
wall, the wall will disappear as the two were actually a straight wall stretched
ends get very near each other. between its ends. Among the handles dis-
playing is one centered on an imaginary
Consider moving the selected straight wall to straight line (the chord) between the two end-
the right in the first diagram. The curved wall points of the curved wall. This is equivalent
lengthens along its chord as the radius, to the move handle for a straight wall. Drag
this handle to move the curved wall.
For example, select the curved wall as
232
Unlocked Centers
shown. the straight walls lengthen or shorten,
Managing
depending on how you move the curved
wall. After the move, the curved wall still
Files
flows smoothly into the straight walls at
either end.
Drag this handle
Managing
Files
Managing
Drag the handle along its chord. As it moves,
Files
its chord expands or contracts to maintain
contact with the walls it to which it connects,
exactly as would a straight wall. The ends of
Managing
Unlocked Centers
Files
Curved walls can have their centers either Handles on Curved Walls
locked or unlocked. If you want the angle of Select a normal curved wall to edit it. Seven
the curved wall to remain tangent or red handles appear. Each of these has a
consistent to the walls they meet, then you specific purpose.
should leave the center unlocked. Most often
Managing
you will use curved walls with unlocked
Files
centers and wait until the floor plan is center
complete to lock the centers. They are easier
to work with.
extend move extend
wall offset wall offset
curvature Curved
Walls
233
Move Handle The included angle is the angle created

between the center point of the arc and its
two endpoints. The included angle of the arc,
as measured in degrees, will jump at
increments set in the Plan Defaults dialog. If
you select 7 1/2 degree allowed angles
in the Plan Defaults dialog the length of the
wall in degrees jumps at intervals of 15
degrees, since the angle between the center
point and each end adjusts by 7 1/2 degrees.
Extend Handles
Drag from the move handle between the

wall's ends to move the wall's chord
perpendicular to itself. This works just as if
you were moving an imaginary straight wall
that spans between the curved wall's ends.
The adjacent walls will move to keep the
walls connected. Except for location, the
properties of the curved wall do not change.
Curvature Handle
Drag from one of the end handles to extend
or contract the curved wall along its curve.
The Extend handles reposition the ends
of the chord, but restrict the movement along
the radius of the arc. Neither the location of
the wall's center nor its radius will change.
Drag the curvature handle to change

radius and the length of the arc. The chord
will retain its length and direction.
234
Unlocked Centers
Wall Offset Handles Center Handle
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Dragging the wall offset handles
increases the radius and length of the arc.
Managing
while keeping the center in place. The radius
Drag the center handle to reposition the
Files
is increase in 1/32 inch increments to allow
you to align the curved wall with walls of center of the arc. The radius and the length of
differing assemblies. It will not snap back to the arc will not change, but the location of
its former position when the move is the center and the angle of the chord will.
completed. The center handle is exactly at the curved
Managing
wall's center and allows this center to be
An offset curved wall (or straight wall offset
Files
moved.
because of a connection to a curved wall)
will snap back to being not offset if you edit If the arc is connected to only one wall, the
it by dragging from any handle other than its chord angle can only be adjusted to the point
offset handles. Make offsetting the last thing that the arc is tangent to the attached wall. If
you do when you edit a wall. the curved wall is attached to two walls, one
Managing
end will become disconnected and the other
Files
will only move until it is tangent.
If you tap the Ctrl key during the move, you

can move the center without restrictions,
even causing the moved wall to break away.
There is one final thing that makes center
moving of a curved wall so powerful. At the
end of a center move, the wall's center may
snap to a nearby point, CAD item, or other
center cross point. The other center cross
could be that for a curved stairway, a CAD
Curved
arc or circle, another curved wall, or even a

Walls
curved wall on another floor (if that floor is

the reference floor.)
235
Locked Center
A curved wall that does not have a
locked center moves expands and
contracts along its chord, keeping the center
chord direction and its included angle
constant. A locked center wall tries to
expand and contract along its arc if possible. extend extend
If this is not possible it at least tries to
wall offset wall offset
maintain its center in the same location,
allowing the radius to change. resize
To lock the center of a curved wall, select the Drag from the resize handle in the middle of
wall and click the Lock center button in the arc to move the curved wall in or out
the Edit toolbar. The curved wall remains about its center. The center location remains
selected, but its handles change according to fixed while the wall's radius changes. If an
its status. The locked status may also be end of the wall connects to another wall, that
changed in the General tab of the Wall end expands or contracts and slides along the
Specification dialog. other wall to stay connected. Unless you tap
the Ctrl key, you cannot move the wall
Resize Handles beyond where it becomes tangent to a
When a curved wall has a locked center, the connected wall. This makes it easy for a
only handle that is different is the Resize curved wall to become tangent to a straight
handle. The Move and Curvature handles do wall, while its center is not moved. Tap
not display. the Ctrl key and you can move it further,
causing the moved wall to break away.
236
Moving Straight Walls Attached to Curved Walls
Moving Straight Walls Attached to Curved Walls
Managing
Files
Normal Curved Wall In the following illustration, the straight wall
If you move a straight wall connected to a was moved far enough that it could no longer
normal curved wall, the normal curved wall remain attached to the arc. The arc has been
would extend or contract along its chord. For extended to show that, even when extended,
Managing
a normal curved wall, moving the straight it cannot reach the wall.
Files
wall to the right simply expands the curved
wall, which remains a half circle.
Managing
Files
Managing
Parallel to Chord
Files
If you move a straight wall connected to a
curved wall, with the straight wall parallel to
Locked Center
the chord of the curved wall, both normal
If you move a straight wall connected to a
curved walls and lock center curved walls
curved wall with a locked center, the curved
behave the same.
Managing
wall will extend or contract along its arc to
Files
remain connected. The radius and the center
will remain unchanged. The straight wall
will break away once it has been moved
beyond the tangent point of the arc.
Curved
Walls
237
Move either straight wall, and the curved This moving is not consistent with all the
wall will extend along its curve, whether it is rules so far explained if the wall is a normal
locked or not. curved wall. In this case the wall's chord is
parallel to the moved wall so there is no
choice but for the moved wall to break away.
In a situation like this, where a normal
curved wall is connected to the moved wall,
and the moved wall's only choice is to break
away, the normal curved wall will
temporarily act as if it is locked center. This
occurs if the angle between the straight wall
and the curved wall's chord is less than 22.5
degrees.
Aligning Curved Walls Between Floors

Curved walls are aligned between floors appear on the General tab of the Wall
using the same technique to align straight Specification dialog for the selected wall.
walls. If the centers and the radii of the walls Check this box and the selected curved wall
are within a few inches of each other, the will take on the radius of the referenced wall
Align with Floor Above/Below check boxes as it moves into alignment with it.
Which Type of Curved Wall to Use

In general curved walls without a locked Once the floor plan is complete and the
center are easier to work with. They are cuved walls are aligned and/or tangent to
easier to draw and edit while you are other walls, it is a good idea to select them
working on the floor plan. and lock their centers.
Curved Wall Edit Toolbar

Two buttons display on the Edit toolbar that The Make Arc Tangent button
are specific to the curved wall that is displays if both ends of the selected
selected. curved wall are connected other walls,
and if the angle each end makes with its
The Lock Center button displays
connected wall is less than about 45 degrees.
depressed for a lock center wall and
Click this to move and resize the wall so that
up for a normal wall. You may click it
both of its ends are tangent to its connected
to change the lock center status.
walls. The radius is usually changed by this,
and if the wall was locked center its status
238
Roof over a Curved Wall
automatically changes to normal. Once it is curved wall will extend to the meeting point
Managing
tangent, you may select it and drag its move along its chord while the locked center wall
handle until it is in the appropriate position. will extend along its arc.
Files
If the lock center status prevents a curved
The Connect Walls button works wall from extending to a meeting point, a
just like it does for straight walls. It warning message will suggest changing the
extends the ends of the selected and locked center status. Then try Connect
another wall that are already very close
Managing
walls again.
(within about a wall's width) so that they
Files
meet. The only difference is that a normal
Roof over a Curved Wall
Managing
The Automatic Roof Generator will place a roof sections will be created over the curved
Files
roof over a curved wall at increments you wall.
specify. The Build Roof dialog allows you to
Following are a couple of illustrations
specify the degree increments for the roof
showing a roof created at two different
over the curved wall. Any whole number
curved increments, 30 degrees and 15
from 7 degrees up to 90 degrees may be
degrees.
Managing
specified. The lower the number, the more
Files
Managing
Files
Curved
Walls
239
Concave Curved Walls & Resulting Roofs

Concave curved walls can produce roof 2. Spanning the concave curved wall with
planes that follow them. If the concave area a straight baseline and produce a roof
is too small, however, simpler roof planes are plane for it from that.
produced. To follow the curved wall, the sec-
tion baselines must be longer than the Min.
Alcove value in the Build Roof dialog. If
baselines are shorter, the roof generator sim-
plifies the roof by either:
1. Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls
on either side extended to their meeting
point and the roof was produced accord-
ingly.
240
Chapter 15:
Doors
Doors
New in 7.0
• New Library doors with custom glazing. • Custom muntins.
• Custom door casings and lintels. • Block doors and windows together for
Managing
• Automatic Door Schedules. easy copying and relocating.
Files
General Information
Managing
Click the Door button and click on a wall on page 102.). Also make sure you have all
Doors
rooms specified properly (see “Room
Files
to place a door. Clicking the button also
activates a selection of options to the right of Specification Dialog” on page 184.) If you
the toolbar. Choose the desired type of door have done both of these things, the program
and click on a wall. This places a door will automatically specify interior doors and
centered at that point. Each type of door may exterior doors depending on wall location
Managing
also be placed by selecting the appropriate and room specification.
Files
type from the Build>Door menu. Once doors have been placed in the model, a
Once a door is placed in Plan View, it can be complete door schedule can be automatically
selected and modified. Click on a door in any generated. For more information See “Door
Door mode or in Select Items mode to & Window Schedules” on page 491.
select it. When it is selected, three red
Managing
handles will appear which can be used to
Files
change the swing, move it, delete it, change
its size, or otherwise modify it. Any door
may be changed into any other type of door
using the Door Specification dialog.
Libraries
Before you begin placing doors in the model,

Symbol
define the appropriate settings for both

interior and exterior doors in the Door
Defaults dialog, (see “Door Defaults Setup”
241
Door
Doors are placed in Plan View. To place a To specify the hinged side of the door, select
door, click the Door button, and click on a the door in Plan View. Three red handles will
wall. If the wall is either an exterior wall or a display. Grab the handle, on the side where
wall that separates a room and a garage, the the door knob should be, and drag it in the
program will place an exterior door based on direction that the door will open. A door
the default settings for exterior doors. If the swing indicator will appear in Plan View.
wall is an interior wall, the program will The hinge side will be opposite the side of
place an interior door based on the default the handle you picked. If the swing direction
settings for interior doors. is not correct, select the door and repeat the
process with the other handle or in the other
direction.
When you select the Door button and
click on a wall, a door will be placed A hinged door will automatically turn into a
according to the default door settings. double door when the width is greater than
Before you place too many doors, you four feet.
should make sure that the settings in the
Door Defaults dialog are correct. (For
more information see "Door Defaults
Setup" page 102.
Sliding Doors
To place a sliding door, select the Sliding 5’-0”x 6’-8” solid sliding door with two
Door button, and click on a wall. If placed movable panels.
on an exterior wall, the door will be a 5’-0” x These settings, and others, can easily be
6’-8” sliding glass door with a 12" bottom modified in the Door Specification dialog.
frame and a 6" frame on the sides and top. If
placed on an interior wall, the door will be a A sliding door must be at least four feet
wide.
Pocket Doors
To place a pocket door, select Pocket Door direction perpendicular to the door. The
, and click on a wall. A pocket door will be pocket door will change so that the pocket is
placed that is 2’-6” x 6’-8” high. To change on the opposite side of the door.There must
the direction of a pocket door, select the be enough room for the entire door to fit in
door, grab the red outside handle where the the opposite wall or the door will not change.
door slides inside the wall, and pull in either
242
Bifold Doors
Bifold Doors
Doors
To place a bifold door, select Bifold Door , Bifold doors cannot be placed in exterior
and click on a wall. A interior single bifold walls. Bifold doors always display closed in
door will be placed that is 2’-6” x 6’-8”. any 3D View.
A bilfold door will become a double bifold
door it the width is greater than four feet.
Garage Doors
To place an overhead garage door, select Garage doors can only be placed in exterior
Managing
Garage Door ,and click on a wall. A walls. A dashed line in Plan View shows the
Files
garage door will be placed that is 8’-0” x 7’- space used by the garage door when it is
0” high. open.
A garage door must be at least six feet wide.
Managing
Doorway Library
Files
Click the Doorway the doorway. Once placed, Library doorways
Library button to access a may be edited. Select the doorway and click
library of special entryways the Open Item button. The Door
and doorways. Select the Specification dialog will open which will
Managing
desired doorway and click allow you to add an actual door to the
Files
OK. Click on a wall to place doorway.
Door Library
Managing
After doorways have been placed in the 3. Navigate through the Doors library until
Files
model, you may select a custom door from you find the custom door style desired.
the Library and drop it into a doorway in 4. Select the door in the Library Browser,
Plan View or any 3D View. then click on the doorway in your view.
To place a door from the Library: The selected door will replace the origi-
nal door if one already existed.
Managing
1. Go to a view to modify the doors. This

Files
can be the Plan View or a 3D View. 5. Continue clicking on other doorways

until all changes have been made. You
2. Open the Library Browser . do not need to close the Library
Browser while you are working.
243
If this is done in a 3D View, the changes are group of doors), clicking the Open Item ,
immediately apparent. button then specifying a new door in the
You may still use the original method of dialog.
changing doors by selecting the door (or
Selecting Doors
Before any door or group of doors can be on the Edit toolbar or press the Tab key
moved, copied, deleted or modified, the on the keyboard until the door is
door(s) must first be selected. selected.
There are four ways to select doors. 3. Right-click on the door while in any
drawing mode. This is a quick way to
1. Click on the door while a door tool is
select a door without changing modes.
active. If a door tool is active, only doors
and windows will be selected. Walls or Similar to using the Select Items
other items which might interfere with mode, an adjacent item may be selected
selection will be ignored. Double-click first. If this is the case, click the Next
on a door in Door mode to open its button or Tab key until the door is high-
Door Specification dialog. lighted with handles.
2. Click on a door in Select Items mode. 4. Shift + Click - Once one door is
If your plan is crowded, this method selected with any method, you can select
may not select the door. If a nearby item multiple doors by holding down the Shift
is selected first, click the Next button key and clicking on doors. This is a good
method for Group Select.
Blocking Doors and Windows

When doors have been group selected with Blocked units are mulled together and can be
other doors and/or windows you can use the copied together as a unit. For more
Make Block tool on the Edit toolbar to information see “Blocked Units” on page
create blocked door and window units. 286.
Door Specification Dialog

An individual door or group of doors may If a group of doors is selected, all the doors
edited using the Door Specification dialog. will be modified according to the changes
Door type, size, casing information, specified. If the interior doors have different
materials, divided lites, shape, etc. may all be specifications than exterior doors, select and
specified within this dialog. edit them as a separate group.
244
To edit the door specification: Door Specification dialog for the

selected door(s). If selecting only a sin-
1. Select a door or group of doors in any
Doors
gle door, you may instead double-click
view.
on the door while in any Door mode
2. When the selection set is complete, click
or in Select Items mode.
the Open Item button to open the
General Tab
1 7
Managing
2
Files
3 5
Managing
Files
8
6
Managing
Door Style - Define the door as slab, R.O. - Specify the amount added to the
1 5
Files
glass, panel or library. Default is the Width and Height for the rough
same as Slab. opening. The default value is set in the
Framing dialog. (see “Framing Defaults
Select Library from the list and the Door
Setup” on page 129.)
Library opens. This is the same as clicking
Managing
the Library button. Once a library door has Name/Code is a definable
6
been selected, that door is added to the Door identification that appears in the
Files
Style list. Material List with the door.
2 Define the Door Type as doorway, 7 A selection of special doors are

hinged, slider, pocket, bifold, garage or available through the Library button.
library. Click this button to activate the Library
Managing
Browser window.
3 Specify the Width and Height of the
Files
door.
8 Check Show Color to have the picture
of the door in the dialog show in color.
4 Define the door Thickness.
245
Options Tab
1 3
2 4
5
6
Recessed - A door placed in a brick,
1 Hinged, pocket and bifold doors default 5
to Single Door when less than four concrete block, or stone wall may be
feet (1200 mm) wide. If the width is greater recessed into the exterior of the wall. If the
than four feet, Double Door is the default. wall is a single layer, and it is thicker than a
These options are grayed out for the default typical stud wall, this box would normally be
settings, but can be set individually in the checked. It cannot be set in the defaults, but
model. it can be set for individual doors.
Draw Closed draws the door closed
2 6 Check No Label to suppress the
in all 3D Views. creation of door labels in Plan View.
Clicking this prevents the door from
23 You may choose to add an Interior appearing in any Door Schedule. You can
Plinth Block and/or an Exterior
also turn off the display of these labels in the
Plinth Block to the default door style.
Layers dialog for the Plan View.
Plinth blocks do not display in 3D Views, but
are counted in the Material List. See “Door & Window Schedules” on
page 491.
4 Check Use Exterior Materials to
have the exterior casing use the same
material as the door.
246
Frame & Trim Tab
Doors
1
Managing
Files
4
5
Frame - If you have specified a Door defined. These settings are dynamic defaults.
Managing
1
Style of glass or panel on the General They change casings globally.
Files
tab, you may specify the dimensions of the
Width defines the width of the side or
rail and stiles.
vertical casings.
Frame Width includes the stiles and top or
Top Width defines the width of the top
middle rails.
casing. (This is only available when using
Managing
Frame Bottom specifies the bottom rail. lintels).
Files
2 Specify Interior or Exterior. These Reveal defines the starting point of the
radio buttons switch all the values casings from the edge of the operable door.
below as well as the view of the door. They
Lintel defines a butt joint between the
do not appear for the interior door 4
sides and the top casing instead of a
Managing
specification, which uses the same values for
mitre joint.
Files
both sides of the door.
Extends defines the amount the top casing
Casing - You can specify the size and
3 extends past the side casings.
configuration of the casings with these
values. The active side (interior or exterior) Wrap returns the top casing to the wall.
is indicated by the active radio button. The
Managing
Suppress Casing hides all casings.

view of the door updates with the current 5
Files
This is usually set for individual doors,

side. The width defines any custom molding
not all doors. If you do not want casings to be
as well as flat casings if no custom profile is
modeled, enter zero values for width.
247
Lites Tab
1 4
2
3
5
6
Lites Across defines the number of Normal style is the most common, with the
1
horizontal divisions for that window. In muntin bars going horizontally and
a normal style of divided lites, the Lites vertically.
across specifies the horizontal number of
Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to
evenly sized panes of glass. This value must
divide up the lites.
be between one and eight.
Lites Vertical defines the number of
2 but with all the central muntin bars removed,
vertical divisions for that window. In a
leaving only the two outside muntin bars
normal style of divided lites, the Lites
both horizontally and vertically. To be
vertical specifies the number of evenly sized
effective, both the Lites across and the Lites
panes of glass down the window. This value
vertical should be set between 6 and 8.
must also be between one and eight.
3 style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin
the muntins that are used to divide lites.
bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical
Special Type - Choose the style of muntin bars above it. To be effective, both
4
divided lites from the list. There are the Lites across and the Lites vertical should
four styles available: Normal, Diamond, be set between 4 and 8.
Prairie or Craftsman.
Round Top - Ray Count If the door
5
is defined as round top or one of the
arch tops on the Arch tab, you may specify
up to 10 rays. The rays specify the number of
radial muntin bars, there is one more pane of
glass than the number of rays specified.
Normal Diamond Prairie Craftsman
248
If rays are added, any Lites across and Lites bar. You must have at least three lites across
vertical which are specified are confined to for this to be used.
Doors
the part of the window below the circle top or
arch top.
Custom Muntins
Managing
Like windows, doors with glass can have
Files
Concentric In round top doors only,
6 custom muntins. Custom muntins can be
rays may also be defined as being
concentric or not. If it is not checked, the created from CAD lines. For more
rays start at the center point of the radius top information see “Custom Muntins” on page
and fan out. If concentric is checked, the rays 283.
Managing
start from the innermost concentric muntin
Files
Arch Tab
Managing
1
Files
2
3
Managing
4
Files
5
1 Specify the Type of arch desired. 2 Height - For most arches you have to
Managing
define a height of the arch. This is the

The choices are Round Top (Full
Files
dimension of the top of the arch, (defined by

Radius), Broken Arch (Eyebrow), Gothic,
the height of the door), down to the spring
Elliptical, Flat top, Tudor, Double, Trifoil,
line of the arch.
Octagonal, Dog-ear.
249
Radius - Some arches may also need used for doors, but can be specified for
3
their radius to be defined. windows to create unique configurations.
Reflect - Checking this box reflects
4 5 A half-arch door is specified by
the arch top to bottom. This is rarely checking either Arch on Right or
Arch on Left.
Molding Tab
2
3
1
This tab allows you to apply custom Frame & Trim tab to size the molding
moldings to doors for casings and lintels. correctly.
Once a custom molding is applied, the
When you specify a custom molding profile,
program references the dimension on the
the upper left corner of the molding is placed
towards the door panel. Keep this in mind
250
when you are creating new profiles with Choose opens the Library Browser.
2
CAD tools. Select a molding and minimize the
Doors
browser to view your selection in this dialog.
1 You can specify if the defined casings
are Interior or Exterior by clicking Clear returns the casing specifications
3
the appropriate option. This also controls the to a flat casing.
view of the door in the dialog.
New moldings may be added to the library.
For more informaion see “Adding a Molding
to the Library” on page 443.
Material Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
2
material to the various parts of the door. The
Exterior Trim option is only available if your
Managing
door is an exterior door.
Files
1 Select the part of the door to define the
material.
2 Click Select Material or click in one

of the boxes to open the Select
Managing
Material dialog.
Files
Managing
Files
251
Doors in Curved Walls

If a door is placed in a curved wall, you will
have some addtional options on the Options
tab in the Door Specification dialog.
Curved Options
1
2
Casing - Door (and window) casing • Radial - A vertical sur-

1
and jamb can be constructed three ways face that would be per-
in curved walls: pendicular to a straight
wall has its plane pass Radial
• Straight - Both the
through the wall's center
door and casing are
of curvature.
straight. This can be used
where the wall’s curva- • Parallel - A vertical sur-
Straight
ture is not too sharp and face that would be per-
the opening is not too pendicular to a straight
wide. This type of door or wall remains parallel to
window is by far the least the line from the wall's Parallel
expensive. center through the open-
ing's center.
252
Deleting Doors
Door - Doors in
2
curved walls can be
Doors
specified as Curved or
Straight for any of the Radial with
Casing options. Curved
Door
Deleting Doors
Select the door or group of doors. When the on the keyboard or click the Delete button
Managing
red handles are displayed, press the Del key on the toolbar.
Files
Copying Doors
One or more doors may be copied from one above the door, both occupy the same
location to another, either within the same location in Plan View, making it impossible
Managing
plan or across plans. If multiple doors are to to group select them in that view unless they
Files
be copied simultaneously, they must be have already been blocked together to turn
copied from the same, unbroken wall to them into a single unit. (see “Blocked Units”
another unbroken wall. on page 286.)
To copy a door(s), first select one or more To select stacked windows and doors:
Managing
doors. When the selection set is complete,
1. Create a Section/Elevation View where
click the Copy button. If you are copying
Files
the doors and windows are visible.
the door(s) to the same floor of the same
plan, click on the wall to place a copy. 2. Select the first door, then hold down
the Shift key and click on each additional
If copying the door(s) to a different floor of door or window.
the same plan or to a different plan
Managing
altogether, go to the new floor or new plan 3. When all have been selected, click the
Files
and select Edit>Paste from the menu. The Copy button. (If you wish to block the
cursor will change to look like the picture on units see “Blocked Units” on page 286.)
the Copy button. Click on a wall to place 4. Change to the Plan View where the copy
a copy of the selected door(s). is to be placed, and select Edit> Paste
from the menu.
Managing
Stacked door combinations, such as those

5. When the cursor changes to look like the
Files
created with a door, a transom window, and a

couple of side lights, may blocked and copy cursor, click on a wall to place a
copied as a group. Since there is a window copy of the entire group.
253
Multiple Copies toggle to that plan simply by clicking on it on

To do multiple copies of the same item(s), screen. If using multiple copy across plans,
select the item(s) and double-click the open both plans first and select
Copy button before you paste.
Window>Tile to place them side-by-side on
screen.
The multiple copy requires that the receiving
plan be open and visible so that you can
Moving Doors
A single opening or a group of door(s) may In the lower illustration, the door was
be moved by either dragging from the center selected on the interior side, producing
handle or by editing the dimension value. temporary dimensions locating interior
walls.
Using Temporary Dimensions
Be careful about using temporary
dimensions, since there is very little
control of position. Always check to see
which side and layer (main or exterior)
that they locate in the wall.
Dragging
Select door on exterior side You can drag selected doors to move them in
for temporary dimensions Plan and 3D Views. To drag the selected
locating exterior walls. door(s) to a new position, place the cursor
above the middle handle. When the cursor
changes to the Move cursor, hold down
Select door on interior side the left mouse button and drag the door(s)
for temporary dimensions along the wall.
locating interior walls. Observe the dimensions and release the
When a door is selected, the door size and mouse when the dimensions read the desired
temporary dimensions will display. value.
Temporary dimensions locating doors (and
windows) will appear on the same side as the
Slowing Down the Move
side selected. When the object you are dragging gets close
to its destination, you can temporarily
In the upper diagram, the door was selected changing the moving speed of the cursor to
first on the exterior side of the wall, gain more control. Do this by hitting a
producing temporary dimensions locating number key along the top of the keyboard
exterior walls. while still holding the left mouse button.
254
Typing New Dimension Values
(You do not need to continue to hold the pressed. The cursor moves slowly, making it
number key down). easy to position the object that you are
Doors
dragging. Release the left mouse button
The cursor will be slowed by that factor.
when the move is completed.
Now the mouse will move n times faster than
the cursor, where “n” is the number you
Typing New Dimension Values

Until it becomes second nature to choose the
correct dimension, first select the door(s) to
be moved, drag it along the wall, and observe
which dimensions continually update. These
Managing
are the only dimensions which may be used
to position the door(s).
Files
To move the door with the dimensions:
Select door. 1. Select the door(s).
Click in middle
of dimension. 2. Click in the middle of the dimension
Managing
number which will be used to move the
Replace old value with
Files
door(s). The Set Dimension Line dialog
new value. will appear.
3. The current value will display, along
with a box for the new value. Replace
the number in the New Value box with
Managing
the desired dimension. Be sure to use
Files
The door is moved
feet symbol (') symbol if needed.
accurately by value.
4. When the new value is correct, click the
Any item(s) located by either a temporary OK button or press Enter on the key-
dimension or a regular dimension can be board. The door(s) will reposition
moved using the dimension number itself.
Managing
according to the typed in value.
This is the best method to precisely position
Files
If the door does not move, something else is
an object. causing interference with the move.
Important: Only certain dimensions may

be used to move the selected
Move Restrictions
door(s)…those dimensions which may be A door (or window) moved against an
Managing
seen to update when the door is dragged intersecting wall will automatically stop
Files
manually along the wall. when it is the casing distance from the
intersecting wall. This is appropriate and
desirable in most situations.
255
There are times when this restriction needs to are the same type of wall and exactly
be removed. The restriction may be removed aligned. To check for this situation, select the
by clearing the Ignore casing for wall. The selected wall will have two red
opening resize check box in the Plan handles near each end. If the handles stop
Defaults dialog. (see “Plan Defaults Setup” along the wall, indicating that the wall is
on page 92.) broken, grab the wall’s Move handle and
move it slightly. When you release the wall,
Another situation which may restrict an
the break should heal if the two wall sections
opening being moved along an apparently
are identical in width and type. Once the
empty wall is if that wall has actually been
broken wall is unified, the opening should
broken. It is not always obvious when a wall
move freely along the wall.
has been broken, especially when the walls
Centering Doors
If a door or window is selected, the Center 4. If you want to center it to the room, click
Item button displays in the Edit toolbar. inside the room. If you want to center it
To center an opening: to the exterior of the house, click outside
the house.
1. Select the opening. You may center a group of openings in the
2. Click the Center Item button. same way. You may center openings along
straight or along curved walls.
3. Click in the plan on the side of the wall
where the opening is to be centered.
Place Gable Over Door(s)

If an exterior door is selected, the Gable door. In Plan View, a gable line will appear
Over button displays on the Edit toolbar. 2" from the wall, extending 12" to either
Click this to produce a gable roof over the side. This can also be used with group
door. When automatic roofs are subsequently selected doors.
built, a small gable roof will appear over the
256
Changing Door Swings
Changing Door Swings
Doors
Door If the door is set to show closed in 3D, the
swing will have no affect on the 3D View. If
the door shows open in 3D, the 3D View will
reflect the open door at is defined swing.
Grab a side handle Sliding Doors

and drag in the direc-
Result: Door
tion of swing.
swings in direc-
tion defined. Select the door. Grab the handle
touching the wall. Drag up.
Managing
Files
Grab the triangular han- Result: Result: Swing changes and upper
dle. Drag to modify the Door swing door is the movable door.
amount of swing. changes.
Managing
You can change a doorway into a hinged
Files
door, or to change the swing of a hinged door
Select the door. Grab the handle
by dragging the handles that appear on a
touching the wall. Drag down.
selected door.
1. Select the door and grab the red handle
Managing
on the side where the doorknob should
Result: Swing changes and lower
Files
be.
door is the movable door.
2. Drag perpendicular to the door in the
direction of the desired door swing. To change the direction of a sliding door:
3. When you release the door swing indica- 1. Select the door, grab the red outside han-
Managing
tor will appear. dle where the door should latch to the
Hinged doors are created with a 90 degree wall.
Files
swing in Plan View. After the hinged door is 2. Drag the handle perpendicular to the
created the angle of swing can be adjusted in door.
Plan View. To adjust the angle of swing: If it is an exterior slider, it does not matter
1. Select the door and grab the triangular whether you pull toward the inside or outside
Managing
handle. of the wall. With an interior slider, the

Files
direction of drag will not only change the

2. Drag to change the amount of swing. If
direction, but also define which side shows
you drag too near the closed position,
movable in Plan View.
the door will become a doorway.
257
Pocket Door 2. Grab the red handle where the door

attaches to the wall.
Select the door. Grab the outside han- 3. Drag the handle perpendicular to the
dle where door enters wall. Drag per- door.
pendicular in either direction.
Select the door. Grab the outside han-

Result dle attached to wall. Pull down.
To change the direction of a pocket door:
1. Select the door.
2. Grab the red handle where the door Result: Door attaches to opposite
slides inside the wall. side of wall and opens to lower room.
3. Drag the handle perpendicular to the
door. The door will hinge to the opposite side of
the wall, and the bifold door will open into
4. The pocket door will change so that the the room in the same direction as the handle
pocket is on the opposite side of the was dragged.
door.
There must be enough room for the entire To change the direction a bifold door opens
door to fit in the opposite wall or else the but while leaving the hinge side the same:
door will not change. 1. Select the door.
2. Drag the center handle in the direction
Bifold Door the bifold should open.
To change the hinged side of a bifold door:
1. Select the door.
Select the door. Grab the center
handle. Pull down.
Select the door. Grab the outside han-
dle attached to wall. Pull up. Result: Door remains attached to side
of wall but opens to lower room.
Result: Door attaches to opposite side

of wall and opens to upper room.
258
Resizing Doors
Resizing Doors
Doors
There are two methods for resizing a door. Single or Double Doors
The first method is to stretch the door in Plan Some door types change between a single
View using selection handles. The second and double door depending on the width.
method is to type in the desired width in the You can override this automatic adjustment
Door Specification dialog. In either case the by checking the Single Door or Double
door will resize about its center. Door option in the Door Specification
dialog, Options tab.
Using the Dialog
This is the most efficient method of changing • A hinged Door turn into a double door
the door size, since all attributes may be when its width is four feet or greater.
modified at the same time, and the size can • A Slider is limited to a minimum of
Managing
be entered accurately. four feet.
Files
1. Select a door an use the Open Item • A Pocket door will turn into a double
button (or double-click on a door) to pocket door when its width is four feet or
open the Door Specification dialog. greater.
2. Select the General tab. • A Bifold door will turn into a double
Managing
3. Type a new size for the door. bifold door when its width is greater than
Files
4. It will update automatically. three feet.
• A Garage door cannot be less than six
Dragging from Handles feet.
Select a door. When selected, the size of the
Managing
door displays. The size shows the width (in
Files
feet and inches) followed by the height (in
feet and inches). For example, a 5068 door is
5’-0” wide by 6’-8” high.
To change the width:
Managing
1. Select the door.
Files
2. Grab either of the two outside handles
and drag along the wall to resize the
door.
The numbers displaying the size update as
you drag the handles. Release the door at the
Managing
desired width. If resized too small, the door

Files
will be deleted.
259
Wrapped Openings
Wrapped openings of wall and redefining its casing width to be
various shapes are available zero. Note that the base molding wraps
in the Doorways Library around the opening.
. You may also create a
wrapped opening by
placing a doorway in the
Door Thresholds
Doors on exterior walls or not be, or if it is not defined when it should
which open into exterior be, there is a problem. Make sure the rooms
type rooms (such as a are labeled properly and that all walls are
garage, porch, deck, etc.) correctly joined. Once the problem is solved,
will have a threshold line force the doors to recalculate for thresholds
across the opening in Plan by selecting the door and simply clicking
View. If a threshold is defined when it should once on the middle handle.
Displaying Door Labels

Window and door sizes are on the same layer in the Schedule dialog. See “Door &
in the Architectural tab of the Layers Window Schedules” on page 491.
dialog. If the layer is displayed the sizes will
The number displays in the format “3068”,
display centered on the door or window that
which is width by height in feet and inches.
they represent. The labels are sized
A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide
according to the Font settings in the
and six feet, eight inches high. (Metric door
Preferences dialog and the options selected
dimensions format is “900x2100” where the
first number is the width in mm.)
Adding Transoms above Doors

Transom windows above doors are created information see “Stacked Windows” on page
the same as other stacked windows. For more 285.
260
Show Items in 3D View
Show Items in 3D View
Doors
1
Managing
Files
Show Items from a specific 3D and casings are turned off, leaving only the
1
View allows doors to be turned off in holes in the walls.
that view. The jamb and casing remain if Note that this capability is separate from the
either Windows or Doors is checked. If both ability to suppress Windows/Doors in the 3D
Windows and Doors are unchecked, the jamb
Managing
Preferences dialog. For more information
Files
see “Include Tab” on page 89.
Openings in Railings
Use a doorway to open up a railing for a
Managing
stairway or other access. To open up a railing
Files
across an entire section, redefine the opening
size of the doorway (in the Door
Specification dialog) to a width which is
greater than the length of the railing. The
program will resize the opening to the
Managing
maximum width possible for that space. The
Files
illustration has two doorway openings placed
into the rail. These openings are noted by
arrows.
Managing
Files
261
262
Chapter 16:
Windows
Windows
New in 7.0
• Custom Window Trim • More Controls for Modeling Windows
• Default Windows • Custom Muntins
• Recessed Window Option • Blocked Openings
• Louver Window Options • Automatic Window Schedules
General Information
Managing
Chief Architect supports five basic classes of Bow windows are made from multiple
window - Standard, Bay, Box, Bow and segments formed into a curve. A segment
Files
Library. Standard windows are the most consists of a wall with a window placed in it.
common. There are many types of standard
windows: double hung, fixed glass, double If a Bay Window , Box Window , or
casement, sliding, etc. The shape of windows a Bow Window is used, it will affect the
Managing
Windows
can be angled or made into arch or round top. roof and so should be placed before
Files
Bay windows and Box windows are similar. building the roof.
Both are made from three standard windows.
Windows
Managing
Files
Click the Window button and click on a
wall where you want to place a window.
When you click the Window button you
activate a selection of other window tools to
Libraries
the right of the toolbar. Choose the desired

Symbol
Window mode, and click on a wall. When

you place a window, it will be centered at the
point where you clicked.
263
Each type of window may also be placed by window, or modify the trim or other features
selecting the appropriate type from the of the window. If you just want to resize the
Build> Window menu. window you can adjust it using the red
handles.
When you select the Window button
and click on a wall, a window will be Selecting Multiple Windows
placed according to the default window Multiple windows may be selected and
settings. Before you place too many
edited simultaneously. Once one window is
windows, you should make sure that the
settings in the Window Defaults dialog selected, hold down the Shift key while
are correct. (see “Window Defaults Setup” clicking on other windows to add to or
on page 109.) subtract them from the selection set.
If multiple windows are selected along the
Windows are created with a window sill same wall, they may be moved or copied as a
displaying toward the outside of the house. A unit to another wall. If multiple windows are
window may be created on an interior wall, selected along different walls, they may still
but there will be a warning issued before the be edited as a unit using the dialog, but not
window is placed and a window sill will not moved or copied.
be produced.
Creating Window Schedules
Selecting Individual Windows Once windows have been placed in the
The simplest way to select a window is to model, the program can automatically
click on it while in Window mode. Once a generate a window schedule. Select Build>
window is selected, click the Open Item Window> Window Schedule to create a
button to access the Window Specification window schedule. For more information See
dialog. In the specification dialog you can “Door & Window Schedules” on page 491.
resize the window, change the type of
Window Specification Dialog

When you place a window in Plan View, the double-clicking on the window in Window
program models a window based on the mode, or by selecting the window and
settings in the Window Defaults dialog. (see clicking the Open Item button.
“Window Defaults Setup” on page 109.)
There are nine tabs in the Window
Once a window is placed in the model it can Specification dialog. These are the same as
be edited with the Window Specification the tabs on the Window Defaults dialog.
dialog. You can use the specification dialog Anything that can be set as a default can also
to define unique features for a group of be specified individually in the specification
windows or an individual window. You can dialog.
access the Window Specification dialog by
264
General Tab
Windows
2
3
4
5
6 8
7
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Window Type -Select the type of default rough opening set in the Framing
Managing
1
window from the list. The first entry in dialog.
Files
the list is the Window Type set in the Win- Floor to Top - Specify the header
dow Defaults dialog. The various window 3
height of the window measured from
types are shown above. finished floor.
Width and Height - Enter values that Movable Size- If applicable, define
2 4
Managing
represent the overall dimension of the the dimension in inches of the movable
Files
window unit, including frame. You can also portion of the window. A value of 0 will
specify a rough opening dimension for the default the movable size to whatever is
window. The R.O. value will override the normal for that type of window.
265
Level - The Level value is used to Name/Code - Enter a name or

5 7
define which row the window appears identifier for this window. This code
on if there is more than one row of windows appears in the Material List and the Master
in a stacked set. Enter a number to change List, and will copy with the window. Only
which level the window is on. selected windows can be assigned a Name/
Def. Level - Specify the current Code. It cannot be set in the Window
6 defaults.
Window Level onto which new
windows should be placed. Unless you are Show Color - Select the check box to
8
placing windows upon already existing display the window in color.
windows, leave the Def. Level set to 0.
Options Tab
1 4
2 5
3 6
Interior Corner Block - Select the The Plan Check calculations for egress are
1
check box to have interior corner only an approximate guide. Consult your
blocks counted in the Material List. These local building and fire code authorities for
will not be displayed in 3D Views. your regional egress window requirements.
Exterior Corner Block - Select the Use Exterior Materials - Select the
2 4
check box to have exterior corner check box to match the exterior sash
blocks counted for the Material List. These material to the exterior trim material.
will not be displayed in 3D Views. Recessed -
5
Egress -Select the check box to label Select the check
3 box to recess the
the window as an egress window in the
Window Schedule. The letters eg will be window trim inside to
appended to the value in the Size column. outermost layer of the
wall. This check box
The Egress check box can designate that
will appear if the
the entire area of the window is used for
window is in a multi-
egress, not just the movable section. To use
layered wall. A
this specification on an undersized window,
window or mulled unit
most or all of the window's total area should
placed in a brick,
be able to be opened for escape in case of
concrete block, or
fire.
stone wall is often
266
recessed into the exterior of the wall. In the No Labels - Check No labels to
6
picture, the window to the right is recessed, suppress the label or callout that
so the brick wraps the opening. The other designates a window in Plan View. This also
window is not recessed, so the casing is prevents the window from appearing in any
outside the brick. window schedule. For more information See
“Door & Window Schedules” on page 491.
Sash & Frame Tab
Windows
1
2
3
Managing
Files
4
5 6
Managing
Files
Do not change the settings on this tab for the default by replacing the value with the
individually selected windows unless those letter "d".
windows have a different size sash or frame Values entered here only affect 3D Views.
than the rest of the windows in the plan. To
Sash Width - Enter the width for all
change the values for all windows 1
Managing
simultaneously, change them in the Window four sides of the window sash.
Files
Defaults dialog. (see “Window Defaults Increasing the size of the sash will
Setup” on page 109.) If you do, all the automatically decrease the size of the glass.
windows will update to reflect the change in The Mid entry is used only for those
the default sash or frame size. windows (such as a double hung) with a
horizontal component between the top and
Managing
The (D) notation that follows the values

indicates that they are default values taken bottom sash. The Mid entry is not used for
Files
from the Window Defaults dialog. Any other window types.

value changed individually may be reset to
267
The Side value is used for the upper part of with new windows, and you intend to simply
all windows having an arch type. The Top drop a new, framed window into the original
value is not used for arched windows. window’s jamb.
If the any sash width is set to zero, no sash is Frame Depth - Enter the dimension
5
produced, the window will have no glass and from the exterior of the wall to the
it will not support divided lites. Since there is interior of the wall. It is the same as the jamb
no glass, the window will be transparent depth.
even when the rest of the windows are set to If this value is set to zero, the wall’s main
be opaque from the exterior. layer thickness is used as the frame depth.
Sash Depth - Enter the thickness of Inset - Enter the distance that the
2 6
the sash stock measured from the frame is inset from the exterior of the
exterior to the interior.
wall main layer. Normally the outer surface
Inset - Enter the distance between the
3 of the frame is at the outer surface of the
frame and the outermost sash. If there is wall’s main layer. Setting a non-zero value in
no frame, then the inset is measured from the Frame inset moves the frame into the wall.
outer surface of the wall’s main layer.
Frame Width - Enter
4
the Side, Top and
Bottom widths of the
window frame. When these
are set to zero (the default),
the frame will not display.
These values are usually left
at zero unless you are
replacing older windows
268
Casing Tab
Windows
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
Managing
Changes made on the Casing tab will only is being used and the width of the apron if
Files
display in 3D Views. one is being used.
Mfr. Offset - This section refers to the Top Width - If Lintel is also checked,
1 4
construction of the window itself, not enter the width of the Lintel casing.
the casing. This will most often be left at Reveal - Enter the dimension from the
zero. A positive value in these fields 5
Managing
outside edge of the frame to the inside
decreases the size of the window, but does edge of the casings.
Files
not change either the nominal size or the
rough opening size specified on the General Unless the selected window(s) have a
tab. The Side value is used for both sides, different size casing or reveal than the
and also for the top if an arch type window. rest of the windows in the model, the three
values in the Casing section should be
Managing
Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
2 changed in the Window Defaults dialog.
buttons to choose whether you are
Files
defining the values for the inside or for the
outside of the window. The picture to the
right will also switch to show the window
from the selected side.
Managing
Casing - Width - Enter the width of

3
Files
the casing. Unless a separate Lintel is

defined, this setting will affect both sides and
the top. This also affects the bottom if no sill
269
Lintel - Select the check Sill - Select this check

6 7
box to place a separate box to specify a sill.
casing across the window top. Clear the check box to
Its width is set in Top Width. remove the sill, causing the
This creates a butt joint specified Side casing to be
between the Side casings and used for the bottom of the
the Lintel. window.
Extends - Enter the amount Extends controls the
the top casing extends on amount the sill extends to
either side. The default value either side. One inch (25 mm)
of 1 inch (25mm) usually will usually make the ends of
extends it to the edge of the a non-wrapped sill even with
vertical casing. the outer edge of the casing.
Wrap - Select this check Wrap - Select this check box to have the
box to model the head ends of the sill be mitered and return to the
casing with returns at the wall. Clear the check box to have the ends of
ends. The ends of the top the sill be cut square.
casing can be cut square, or Apron - Clear this
can be mitered to return to 8
check box to
the wall. The affects of remove the apron. Select
Wrap are best seen if a this box to add an apron
custom molding is below the sill. The sill
specified for the top casing, and apron will extend
as shown in this together.
illustration.
Suppress Casing- Select this check
9
box to create a window with no trim
details. The sill will remain if you have
specified one. If casing and sill are both
suppressed, only the frame and sash will
remain.
270
Lites Tab
5
1
2
Windows
3 6
4
8
9
10
The Lites tab is used to add muntin bars or boxes to specify either one or both of the
Managing
grids to various window styles. It is also used sashes to have divided lites.
Files
to add shutters to windows. There are four
possible styles of muntin bars for regular
windows, plus two additional options for
arch top or round top windows. A window
which has been modified using the Shape tab
Managing
cannot have divided lites or shutters added.
Files
A maximum of 8 lites may be specified in Lites in fixed Lites in moveable
either direction for any of the Special Types.
All the window types default to having 1
Lites across - Enter the number of
1 lite across and 1 lite vertical, in both
horizontal lites in each sash. movable and the fixed. Because the fixed
Managing
Lites vertical - Enter the number of window in a Triple Sliding window is twice
2
Files
vertical lites in each portion of the sash. the size of the movable windows, the fixed
section has a vertical muntin bar. To
3 eliminate this, clear the Lites in fixed
the bars that divide the panes of glass. check box for a triple sliding window.
Lites in fixed and Lites in move-
4
Managing
able - Select or clear these check Special type - Select a configuration

5
of lites from the list. You can see a
Files
preview of each style in the dialog to see how

it is modeled.
271
•Normal style is the most Select the check box to start the rays from the
common, with muntins going innermost concentric muntin bar.
horizontally and vertically. Following is an example of a 3040 fixed
Colonial windows are an glass window. In all cases, Lites across = 3,
example of the normal style. and Lites vertical = 3. The round top window
•Diamond style is shown first with no rays, then with regular
uses angled muntin bars to and concentric rays. There is also a 3040
divide up the lites. French win- fixed glass arch top window (arch height 12)
dows are an example of the dia- with regular rays. The arch top window
mond style. cannot have concentric rays. If the window
height is changed to half the width for round
•Prairie style is based on the
top windows, or changed to match the arch
normal style, but with all the
height for arch top windows, many styles of
central muntin bars removed,
transom windows may be created. It is
leaving only the two outside
possible to stack windows above other
muntin bars both horizontally
windows or doors. All these transoms have
and vertically. To be effective,
had the sill removed.
both the Lites across and the Lites vertical
should be set between 6 and 8. Federal or
Federation windows are an example of the
Prairie style.
•Craftsman style is based on
the normal style, but only the
topmost horizontal muntin bar is
kept with all the portions of the
vertical muntin bars above it. To
be effective, both the Lites across
and the Lites vertical should be
set between 4 and 8.
6 Round top - This section becomes
active only when the window is defined Shutters - Select the check box if
with a round top on the Arch tab. 7
you would like to have working
Ray Count - Enter the number of radial shutters on the exterior of the window. These
muntin bars. A round or arch top window will be each half the width of the window,
may have up to 10 rays. If rays are added, not including the casing. If one side of the
any Lites across and Lites vertical which are window does not have enough room for the
specified will be confined to the part of the shutter (such as when a window is close to
window below the arc of the window. another window or to a corner), that side will
not have a shutter. Default shutters resize
Concentric - In round top windows only,
with the window.
rays may also be defined as being concentric.
272
Width - Enter the width of the shutters. Circle Top Shutters - Select the
9
Default width shutters would actually cover check box to match the geometry of the
the window if closed. If decorative shutters shutters to an arched window.
are desired, enter a non-zero width in the Louver - Select the check box to place
Specify Width edit box. To reset the shutter 10
louvers in the central portion of the
width to default, enter "d" or 0. each shutter. Clear the check box to model
Outside Casing - Select the check shutters with solid panels The louvers are the
8
Windows
box to hinge the shutters at the outside traditional type, positioned to shield the sun
edge of the side casing. Normal operating when the shutters are closed, so they may
shutters overlap the casing except for the appear backwards since the shutters display
innermost one inch. Decorative shutters open.
usually attach to the house outside the
casing.
Shape Tab
Managing
Files
2
3
4
8
Managing
5 9
Files
10
6
7
Managing
Files
Any type of non-library window may be Right height - Enter the height of the
3
shaped. All “shaped” windows are defined as upper right corner.
fixed glass on the General tab. Top left corner -Select the check
4
Window width is displayed. It may box to add an inside left corner or
1
Managing
be changed in the General tab. single center peak to the window.

Files
Left height - Enter the height of the Height - Enter the height of the inside
2 5
left upper corner. Unless changed, this left corner, and its distance From Left.
will match the window height.
273
Top right corner - Select the check Examples of Shaped Windows

6
box to add an inside right corner to the On a shaped window, you
window. must have two vertical sides.
Height - Enter the height of the right They may be as short as 1/4”.
7 The diagram shows solid
inside corner, and its distance From
Left (not from the right). black circles where the left
and right heights are, and
Match Roof -
8 A open circles where additional
Click to have the
corners have been placed.
program match the
angle of the top of the A has different left and right
window to the pitch of heights with no corner added.
the roof on a gable B B has matching left and right
end. The window will maintain the angle heights with an added corner.
even when it is resized and repositioned.
C is the same as B, except
9 Revert - Select the check box to C that the left height and right
restore the window to its original heights have been shortened
settings for window type and whether it was to 1/4”.
a special arch typpe window. Both the left D D is the same as B except it
and right heights will be reset to the same
has two added corners.
value, which will be the higher of the two
sides before it was restored. E is the same as A except that
it has a Raise Bottom at right
Raise Bottom - Enter
10 defined.
a value to raise one
bottom corner of the window
by that amount.
Select at left or at right to
specify which corner to raise.
The illustration shows the
window with and without
Raise bottom specified.
274
Arch Tab
1
2
Windows
3
4
5
6
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Type -Select a type of arch. Samples octagonal windows from square windows. It
1
of each type are shown above. All were can also be used for decorative fixed glass.
created from the same 3050 fixed glass Arch on left - Select the check box to
5
Managing
window. restrict the shape of the arch to the left
Files
Height - Enter the arch height. All side of the window. The right leg will be
2
types except Round Top and Octagonal straight.
Arch require a height value. Arch on right - Select the check box
6
Radius - Enter the radius for the Tudor to restrict the shape of the arch to the
3
Arch or the Double Arch. right side of the window. The left leg will be
Managing
straight.
Files
Reflect - Select the check box to

4
reflect the arch from top to bottom. Following are a couple examples showing
Reflect can be used to create circular and the results of using the different options:
275
Molding Tab
2 3 4
1
Interior/Exterior - Select a radio choice made and restore the default rectangu-
1
button to specify the side of the window lar molding. The width of the molding is
to receive the molding. The view of the defined on the Casing tab.
window in the dialog box will change to Lintel - Click Choose to select a
reflect the selections that you have made. 3
custom molding for the head casing.
Casing - Click Choose to select a Click Clear to clear any previously
2
custom casing molding from the specified moldings and restore the default
Library. Click Clear to clear any previous rectangular molding. The width of the
276
Deleting Windows
molding is the Top Width defined on the Clear to delete any previously specified
Casing tab. moldings.
Sill - Click Choose to select a New moldings may be added to the library.
4
custom molding for the sill. Click For more informaion see “Adding a Molding
to the Library” on page 443.
Material Tab
Windows
Managing
The Material tab allows you to apply a Sash, Trim/Molding, Shutters, and the
Files
material to the various parts of the window. Exterior Trim.
First select the part of the window to change. Click Select Material or click one of the
You can specify a material for the Window boxes to define which material is assigned to
the selected part.
Managing
Files
Deleting Windows
Select any window including bay, box or simultaneously by group selecting them
bow window. Press the Del key or the click (select the first window, then hold the Shift
the Delete button to delete it from the key down and click on each window to add
Managing
plan. to the selection set) and then pressing the Del
Files
A group of standard windows and/or bay, key or the Delete button.
box and bow windows may be deleted
Copying Windows
Managing
Files
Any window or group of windows may be Select a window or several windows along
copied. It is not possible to copy a bay, box the same unbroken wall. For a single copy,
or bow window unit. click the Copy button, then click on a wall
277
to place a copy of the window(s). To place down while clicking on each window in
multiple copies, select the window(s), and Select Items mode. When the windows are
double-click the Copy tool. Click on walls selected, click the Copy tool. To copy
to place as many copies as needed. along the same wall in the 3D View, grab the
You may copy a window or group of center handle and drag the copy away from
windows to another plan. If the two plans are the original.
side-by-side on screen, select the window(s), You can select windows in a 3D View but
and click the Copy button. Click anywhere you cannot copy windows between plan files
in the second window to activate it, and click in 3D Views. Windows selected in 3D can
on a wall to paste the copy of the window(s). only be pasted into other plans in Plan View.
If the plans are not tiled, move to the new Once the windows have been selected and
copied, go to the other Plan View and choose
plan after clicking the Copy tool. Choose
Edit>Paste. Click on a wall to paste a copy
Edit> Paste from the menu and then click on
of the entire set of windows.
a wall to place the window.
Blocked window units simplify the process
Multiple windows may also be selected in a
of copying multiple windows, since they are
3D View for copying. This makes it easy to
turned into a single unit.
copy stacked windows. Hold the Shift key
Moving Windows
A single window or a group of windows may dimensions update as the move is occurring.
be moved by either dragging from the center Release the mouse when the dimensions read
handle or by redefining a dimension value the desired value.
and having the program move the windows
appropriately. Whichever method is used, the Typing in Dimension Values
item(s) to be moved must first be selected. Any item, located by either a temporary
Note that when a window is selected, the dimension or a regular dimension can be
window size displays. If the window is not moved by editing the dimension number
already located by regular dimension lines, itself. This is the recommended method to
temporary dimensions also appear. precisely locate windows or any other item.
Dimensions are critical when positioning a
window or any other item. Important: Only certain dimensions may
be used to move the selected window(s).
Dragging Use those dimensions which update when
the window is dragged along the wall.
To quickly move a selected window(s), place
the cursor above the middle handle. When
Select the window(s) to be moved, drag it
the cursor changes to the Move cursor,
along the wall, and observe which
hold down the left mouse button and drag the
dimensions update. These are the only
window(s) along the wall. Observe the
278
Moving Windows
dimensions which may be used to move the Example

window(s). To move a window(s) with dimensions,
If there are no regular dimensions locating select the window and proceed as follows.
the window, temporary dimensions will
1
display when the window is selected. These
dimensions may also be used to position the
window.
Windows
2
3
Select a window on the exterior side for
Managing
temporary dimensions locating exterior
Files
walls.
Select a window on the interior side for
temporary dimensions locating interior
walls.
1. When the window(s) is selected, click
Managing
on the dimension number which will be
Files
edited to move the window(s).
2. The Set Dimension Line dialog will
appear. The current value will display,
along with a box for the new value.
Replace the number in the New Value
Managing
box with the desired dimension. When
Files
the new value is correct, click the OK
button.
3. The window(s) will reposition according
to the typed in value, unless something
Managing
else is causing interference with the

Files
move.
279
Move Restrictions window has been moved as far right as it can

A window moved against an intersecting within the wall.
wall will automatically stop when it is the
casing distance from the intersecting wall.
This restriction may be temporarily disabled
by checking Ignore casing for opening
resize within the Plan Defaults dialog.
A window moved against a break in the wall To fix a break in the wall, select one of the
will automatically stop. To verify if a wall colinear walls, grab the move handle and
has been broken, select the wall. The selected move it slightly (an inch or so). When you
wall will have two red handles near each end. release the wall, it will snap backward and
In the following picture the window will not the break will heal if the two wall sections
move any more to the right. Selecting the have the same thickness and type.
wall reveals that the wall is broken, and the A window moved vertically in a 3D View
will be stopped by the ceiling height and/or
the floor height. To override this restriction,
hold down the Ctrl key, grab the Move
handle and drag the window(s) past the
restriction.
Centering Windows
When a window or door is selected, the You may center a selected group of openings
Center Item tool displays in the Edit on the same wall in the same way.
toolbar.
Centering To Fixtures
Along a Wall The program can also center windows to
To center the window along the wall, click sinks and appliances. Select a window and
the Center Item tool, then click in Plan click the Center Item tool, then click on a
View on the side of the wall where the cabinet which is positioned against the wall
window is to be centered. If you want to and which contains a sink or cooktop. The
center it to a room, click inside the room. If window will become centered above the sink
you want to center it to the exterior of the or cooktop.
building, click outside the building.
280
Resizing Windows
Resizing Windows
When you select a window, the window size You may change the height of a window by
displays. This label displays the width (in dragging the center handle toward the
feet and inches) followed by the height (in interior of the plan (to raise the bottom of the
feet and inches). For example, a 3040 window), and toward the outside of the plan
window is 3’-0” wide by 4’-0” high. (to lower it). The top of the window stays
Windows
There are two methods of resizing windows. fixed.
By Dragging In the Specification Dialog

The quickest method to change the size is to The second method is to type in the size on
drag the selection handles in Plan View or a the General tab of the Window
3D View. This is the only method which can Specification dialog. This method will only
be used to resize bay, box or bow windows. work for standard windows and individual
windows within a bay, box or bow window
When a window is selected, grab either of system.
the two outside handles and drag along the
wall to change the width. Drag the center Select a window(s) and click the Open
handle perpendicular to the wall to change Item button on the Edit toolbar to open the
Managing
the height. Drag away from the center to Window Specification dialog. Select the
General tab to change the height and width
Files
widen the window. Drag toward the center to
narrow the window. for the selected window(s).
The label displaying the size updates as you You cannot type in values to change the size
drag the handles. Release the handle when of a bay, box and bow windows system. To
the desired size is displayed. do that, drag from the appropriate handle in
Managing
Plan View.
The width always resizes around the center
Files
of the window. The height resizes from the
sill height.
Place Gable over Window(s)
Managing
Files
If a window or group of windows on the A Gable/Roof line will appear in Plan View,
same wall is selected, the Gable over about 12 inches (300 mm) out from the wall
window button displays on the Edit and extending a foot to either side of the
toolbar. Click the button if you wish to opening. It is this gable line that signals the
Managing
produce a gable roof over the window. roof generator to produce the gable.
Files
When automatic roofs are subsequently built, Add these gables lines only where there
a small gable roof, or dormer, will appear would otherwise be a hip, an eave, or roof
over the window. overhang. Do not add this gable line to a wall
281
already designated as a Gable Wall. It can

cause the automatic roof generator to
function incorrectly.
Corner Windows
Corner windows In Plan View, select the window, hold down
are produced the Ctrl key, and drag the window into the
when each corner until it stops. Repeat with the second
window has one window. A corner window will result.
edge at or past
the interior side Windows will correctly stop in the corner if
of the adjacent
dragged in Plan View using the Ctrl key.
wall. They will not stop in the corner if dragged
To create a in the 3D View while holding the Ctrl key.
corner window, first create the desired win-
dow on each side of the corner. The header Once the corner window is formed, its
height and the sill height of both windows components and corner post size can be
must be the same. adjusted using dimension lines. Blocked
units can also meet at a corner this way.
Windows in Curved Walls

If a window is in a Curved wall, additional •Straight: Both window
options can be specified for the Casings and and casing are straight.
the Sash. These options are included on the
Options tab of the Window Specification Straight
dialog:
• Radial: The sides of

the casing or jambs
are inserted in the
wall at an angle that Radial
Casing: Window casings display three ways
passes through the
in curved walls:
center of the curve.
282
Custom Muntins
• Parallel: The sides of The window sash can be

the casing are curved or straight for any
inserted in the wall at one of the casing options. Radial
a right angle to the Parallel Normally a parallel cas- & Curved
line tangent to the ing will have a straight
curved wall at the sash. A radial casing is
center of the window. more like traditional win-
dows, and may have a
Windows
curved sash.
Custom Muntins
You can design your own muntins for the Toggle out of CAD mode and select the door
glazing of a window or door. Muntins are or window in the Section/Elevation view.
formed from a CAD block composed of lines The Load Muntins button will appear on
and arcs drawn over window or door glass in the Edit toolbar. Click this button and the
a Section/Elevation View. The CAD block CAD block will disappear. Muntins will
should cover at least half the glass appear in place of the CAD block.
Managing
horizontally and one quarter of the area
Files
vertically, but should not overlap it in either If you wish to cover several glass areas in a
direction by more than five percent. window or double door, produce a separate
CAD block for each. They will all load
together.
Creating Muntins Custom muntins move with the opening and
Managing
To create custom muntins, display the glazed will copy with their opening. They will also
Files
door or window in a Section/Elevation view. stretch or compress when the glass area is
Toggle to CAD mode and draw lines and arcs resized. This stretching may not be perfect
to represent the desired muntins. Try to make for non-rectangular glass areas that are
them start and end as close to the edge of the resized by a large amount.
glass as possible. If the lines are slightly
Managing
over, the program will clip these ends so that
Removing Muntins
Files
they exactly fit.
When the muntin design is complete, group Remove custom muntins from a door or
select all the lines and arcs and then define window by selecting the opening in Section/
them as a CAD block. (To group select the Elevation view and clicking on the Unload
lines and arcs, drag a marquee around them muntins button on the Edit toolbar. The
Managing
while holding down the Shift key.) muntins will disappear and the original CAD
Files
If your window has more than one glazed block will take their place. You may explode
sash, (i.e. a double-hung has two), you must and edit these blocks and reload them, if you
create one block for each pane. wish.
283
Window Levels
Levels are used to create and organize When you specify the Def. Level to be a
stacked windows within the same floor. On a value other than zero, the window type will
wall within one floor level, you can place change to be fixed glass. The Width of the
and define windows at varying Levels. window will match your default Window
Window Levels can be used to organize these Type and the Height to the window will be
windows for simplified editing. Window 12". Once the Window is placed in the plan,
Levels do not define the height of a window, and opened for specifications, the parameters
just the relative placement. can be changed.
When a new plan file is opened, the window In addition to defining what Level windows
Level is set to zero. Window Level 0 will be placed on, the Def. Level number
contains all doors, all bay, box and bow affects how windows display in Plan View.
windows, and the first level of standard All items on the default level display normal
windows. Unless you change the Def. Level color in Plan View. Windows and doors on
setting in the Window Defaults dialog, the other levels will display in light gray.
first window you place in Plan View will be If window and door sizes are set to display,
on Level 0. The first row above on the same the sizes will only show for windows and
floor is represented by Window Level 1 and doors on the default level.
contains any windows stacked above a single
window or door. The second row is The Def. Level also defines which of the
represented by Window Level 2 and contains stacked windows are selected first when you
all windows stacked above two stacked click on the windows in Plan View. The
windows, etc. windows on the current Default Level will be
selected first.
When you place a window in Plan View on a
Level greater than zero, the program will Always reset the Def. level to zero before
attempt to locate it over windows on lower printing. Otherwise the doors and some
levels. Once it is placed, You can move it to windows may print in a light gray color.
the desired height in the Section/Elevation Instead of using levels to manage stacked
view or within the Window Specification windows, you may wish to instead combine
dialog. them into blocked units.
284
Stacked Windows
Stacked Windows
Stacked To create this entry way set the two windows
Windows are on either side of the door to level zero. A
easy to create door will always be on level zero. The three
with Window windows above the door and the level zero
Levels. windows are placed on level one, and the
Windows
Window round top window is placed on level two.
levels are used Notice how the windows and door in this
to specify the example are separate, with a little wall
relative height showing between them. The next section
of each new explains how the same door and six windows
window placed in Plan View. can be organized into a mulled unit. The
casing will connect the windows and door so
The door and windows in the illustration
that no wall will show between them.
above were organized by using the Window
Specification dialog to set the level for each
window.
Managing
Automatically Mulled Units
Files
To form a mulled group of windows move The picture shows two triple hopper
them close enough together so that their windows grouped with a door.
casings touch. Once the casings touch, the
windows will be mulled together with one
Managing
casing between the two of them. The sill of
Files
each window in the group must be at the
same level for them to share the middle
casing. The casings will be modeled as if
they are one unit but they will remain
separate items for dimensioning and the
Managing
Material List.
Files
The Min. Separation value in the
Window Defaults dialog will specify how
close the windows can be to each other.
Define a value that specifies the desired
width for the shared casing.
Managing
Files
Windows can be automatically mulled to

doors if the bottom of the window is at the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of
the door.
285
Blocked Units
Blocking windows and doors together gives View to select the many different
you added flexibility when mulling units components.
together. It creates a combination of units
which move and copy as a single unit. It
allows you the ability to list the doors and
windows in the Material List either as a
single unit or as the components, and it
enables you to define a single opening or
separate openings in the wall framing for the
blocked unit.
To create a Blocked Unit, group select
several openings, doors and windows that are
on the same wall and within 24 inches (side-
to-side or top to bottom) of each other. Click
the Make Block button in the Edit toolbar
to create a block. Once doors and windows
are combined in a block they can be moved
and copied as a single unit.
The group selection can be done in Plan 1. In a Section/Elevation View (like the
View or in any 3D View. Plan Views work one above), select the door and the win-
fine for blocking windows that are positioned dows on level 1 and 2 above it, then
side-by-side, but you will want to use an
click the Make Block button.
elevation view for blocking items which are
stacked vertically. The components may not 2. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the
be moved relative to each other once the unit right and the window above it.
is formed without first unblocking and 3. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the
repositioning them before blocking them left and the window above it.
once again.
4. Group select the three vertically joined
Windows, doors and other blocked units may units and click the Make Block
be components of a new blocked unit. button to join them side to side.
In one blocking operation you can block If you form a blocked unit by first blocking
windows and doors that are either side-by- items vertically, the vertical mullions will
side or over-and-under each other. You may extend continously from the bottom to the
not simultaneously block both horizontally top of the entire unit. The horizontal
and vertically. Complex units are formed by mullions will be interupted by the vertical
mulling several blocks together. mullions.
To create a Blocked Unit from windows and A second method would be to first block the
doors on various levels you must use a 3D door and its two sidelights as one unit, and
286
Selecting Blocked Units
then block the three rectangular windows In order to block doors and windows, the
above the door as another unit. These component edges that are to be in contact
blocked units, along with the top half-round must be at straight and parallel to each other.
window, can be mulled together, top to Unlike automatic mulling, they do not need
bottom, to complete the final unit. Since this to be the same length. Openings with
unit was blocked together vertically first, the adjacent sides that are curved cannot be
horizontal mullions extend continuons to the blocked.
sides of the entire unit, with the vertical
Windows
The blocked unit will move as a single
mullions are interupted by the horizontal standard window in both Plan and 3D Views,
mullions. but cannot be resized. The components on
the lowest level will appear in Plan View.
Selecting Blocked Units

You can select a blocked unit by clicking on If the component is not itself a blocked unit
it in Plan or 3D View. The Explode Block and has no components above it, its Height
button will display on the Edit toolbar. Click and Arch parameters can be changed.
this to separate the unit back into its Changing the Height will cause the
component’s top to move. The sill will
Managing
components. Once a blocked unit is selected,
it can be copied or moved just like an remain stationary.
Files
individual window.
Group Select Components
Selecting Components You can use the Shift + Click method to
Blocked units are made up of individual group select items within the blocked unit.
Managing
doors and windows and blocked units of the Select the first component and then hold the
shift key and click in the center of each of the
Files
same. Even so, the individual components
can still be selected. others.
To select an individual component of a
blocked unit, first select the blocked unit.
Press the Tab key and the component whose
Managing
center is closest to where you clicked will be
Files
selected. This selection technique can be
used in Plan or 3D Views.
The selected component may be on any
Level in the blocked unit. If you have
Managing
multiple Levels, it is easiest to select the

components in a 3D View. When you have
Files
selected an individual component of a

blocked unit, you can change its parameters
in the Window Specification dialog.
287
Window Specification Dialog for Blocked Units

You can select a blocked unit and open it to header for the entire blocked unit. Clear
display its Window Specification dialog. A the check box to model studs and head-
number of boxes appear dimmed and cannot ers between the components of the
be changed. blocked unit.
Boxes that move the entire opening can be The Frame & Trim tab only defines the
changed in the General tab. casing surrounding the blocked unit. It does
not specify the casing appearing between the
Two new check boxes appear in the Options components.
tab.
The Arch tab lets you define the overall
1. Select the check box for Single label shape of the blocked unit’s top. If you intend
to treat the blocked unit as a single item to arch the top of a blocked unit, the top
for labeling in Plan View. It will then components should be constructed with
produce a single entry in the Material rectangular top openings whose tops are at
List and window schedule. Clear the the same height.
check box to produce labels and entries
for each component of the mulled unit. The Molding tab specifies the surrounding
casing, sill and lintels. It does not currently
To change Single label for a component, allow you to specify a custom molding for
click in the middle of the component in the casing appearing between components.
an elevation view, press the Tab key Settings made on the Material tab for a
until the component is selected, and then blocked unit apply to all components of the
open the Window Specification dialog. blocked unit. The settings will override any
2. Select the check box for Single wall settings made for individual components of
hole to direct the wall framer to pro- the blocked unit.
duce a single opening with a single
Window Library
Click the Window Library tool to access If you own the Chief Architect Symbol
a library of special windows. Select the Developer Utility you can create windows
desired window, then click on a wall to place within Chief Architect and save them to your
the window. own library.
This is a sampling from the Windows
Library.
288
Bay Window
Bay Window
A Bay Window is composed of three on which you clicked, you can resize that
wall sections. The two side walls are component either by selecting it and
typically at an acute angle to the main wall. dragging from a side handle, or by selecting
Each of the three sections or components is a it and clicking the Open Item button in
wall with a single window. order to modify it using the Window
Windows
Click on a wall in Bay Window mode to Specification dialog.
produce a bay window. The window type for
its components is taken from the Window Note: Bay window areas are not included
in the living area calculations.
Defaults dialog.The size of the individual
windows are adjusted to fit the available
space. The initial Bay window goes from 2’- You are allowed to increase the size of the
2” across at the front to 4’-2” across at the component until there is room for the thinner
back, and is 1’-0” deep. trimmer or for no trimmer at all. Once a
component is resized in this way, it will
retain its size while the bay is moved or
resized. If the bay is decrease in size such
Managing
that the component becomes too large to fit,
Files
the component will return to its default size
Resizing Components based on the bay size and the existing
If you select the bay and then use the Tab key trimmer.
to select the individual component window
Managing
Files
Bay Window Specification
The Bay Window Specification dialog is options are available for Box and Bow
opened when you select a Bay Window in windows.
Plan View and click the Open Item button.
Managing
There are many options in this dialog that
1
Files
can be set for the individual item. They
cannot be set as defaults. Many of these same 2
3
4
5
Managing
6
Files
7
8
9
289
Bay Angle - Enter the angle of the Single Label for Entire Bay -
1 6
side components of the bay window. Select this check box to create one label
This value is in degrees. to list the Bay window in the Material List
Place Under Roof Slope - Select and schedules.
2
this check box to extend the roof plane No Trimmers for Components -
7
over the Bay window and follow its profile. Select this check box to eliminate
Rectangular Roof Over - Select this framing between the individual components
3 of the window.
check box to create a roof over the Bay
window which is square across the end No Framing Between Compo-
8 nents - Select this check box to
instead of following the profile of the roof.
For more information see “Defining Roof remove any studs between the section of the
Type Above Bay, Box & Bow Windows” on window.
page 293. Components Recessed - Select
9
Suppress Dimension - Select this this check box if the window is placed
4 in a brick wall and you want to recess the
check box to suppress the dimensions
that are automatically placed to the Bay exterior casing to produce a brick molding.
window. Bay window components default to a size
No Labels - Select this check box to that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
5 is first created. When the bay as a whole is
suppress the label in Plan View and to
prevent the Bay window from being included moved and resized, its components
in the Material List or Window Schedule. automatically resize such that a standard
trimmer fits.
Box Window
A Box window is simply a Bay window A Box window is sometimes used to create a
with side angles set to 90 degrees. dormer window by removing the windows
Click in a wall in Box Window mode to on either side, leaving only the central one.
produce a box window. The window type of
its components is taken from the Window Note: Box window areas are not included
Defaults dialog. Their sizes are adjusted to in the living area calculations.
fit the available space. The Box window is
created at 4’-2” wide with a depth of 1’-6”.
290
Bow Windows
Bow Windows
A Bow window is a group of wall segments Bow Window Specification
that create a segmented curve. Bow windows
may be composed of two to twenty sections.
Each window will be identical. 1
Windows
Click in a wall in Bow Window mode to
produce a 5-section bow window. The
window type is taken from the Window
Defaults dialog. The individual window size 2
is adjusted to fit the available space. 3
The 5-section Bow in the picture has a 4’-10”
radius centered 3’-9” inside the wall, giving
an opening 5’-10” across and a depth of
11½”.
1 Define the Number of sections to
Managing
increase or decrease the number of
Files
components in the window.
Suppress standard dimension -
Note that the radial dimension is from the 2
Select the check box to suppress the
center of the arc to an outside corner where dimensions showing width and depth of the
two window sections join. The depth (11 ½”)
Managing
bow.
is measured to the flat area of the center
Files
Suppress dimension to center -
section, not to a corner. That is why the 3
Select the check box to suppress the
radius is a bit greater in value than the sum of
radial dimension.
the depth and the distance from the center of
the bow’s curve to the exterior of the wall. The other options in this dialog are the same
as for Bay windows.
Managing
Note: Bow window areas are not included
Files
in the living area calculations.
The number of bow window components can

be changed from two to twenty in the
individual Bow Window Specification
Managing
dialog. To open the dialog, select the Bow

Files
window to be changed and click the Open

Item button.
291
Editing of Bay, Box & Bow Windows and Components

Click on a bay, box and bow window to containing bay or bow window smaller until
select it. Drag the side handles to change the the component is forced smaller to still fit.
width. In Plan View, drag the center handle Then when the bay or bow size is increased,
outward to increase the depth, or inward to the component's size will automatically
decrease the depth of the unit. resize with it.
A component window selected within a bay, Windows and bay, box and bow windows
box and bow window is resized like any may also be selected in 3D Views. The entire
other standard window. To select it,click on it unit is selected first. To select an individual
in Window mode or click on the appropri- component within the unit, click the Next
ate component, selecting the bay unit. then button until that window is selected.
click Next or press the Tab key and the
component is selected. Once a component is If the desired window is not offered as a
resized, it will no longer automatically selection, you may be at too much of an
angle to the window. Change your angle
change its width to match the available space
so you are facing it more squarely, then
as its containing bay or bow is resized. To try again.
make it automatically resize again, resize its
Ceilings and Bench Seats for Bay, Box & Bow Windows
When originally created, the ceiling within a window is selected, grab the top handle and
bay, box or bow windows is the same height drag toward the floor. The ceiling will be
as the default ceiling for that floor. Both the lowered, which will lower the height of the
top and bottom heights of these window units walls. Any roofs which are subsequently
may be adjusted from a 3D View. built will be affected.
Use the following techniques for modifying
any bay, box or bow window. Creating a Bench Seat
To create a bench seat or garden window,
Lowering the Ceiling follow the same step as lowering the ceiling
To lower the ceiling and the wall heights, except this time drag the lower handle
select the window in a 3D View. When the toward the ceiling.
292
Defining Roof Type Above Bay, Box & Bow Windows
When you raise the bottom of the window to When you build a foundation, the foundation
create a bench seat, the exterior walls that will not be produced under a window unit
create the window will not reach the ground. that has bench seats.
Defining Roof Type Above Bay, Box & Bow Windows

Several different roof styles are available for shape of the unit, select Place under roof
Windows
bay, box or bow window units. slope. Rebuild the roofs to see the changes.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof will be built above the unit by the
automatic roof generator.
For this roof style to work successfully, the
Managing
wall heights and ceiling heights must be the
Files
same. This will not work if you have lowered
the ceiling for the window unit.
If a header is desired over the bay, box or
bow window, first build the roof correctly,
If a different style of roof is desired, the Bay then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow
Managing
(or Bow) Window Specification dialog can window in 3D. Once the ceiling is lowered,
Files
be used to change the style of roof which will select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .
be generated over a bay, box or bow window. This will fill in the area between the header
Select the bay, box or bow window, then and the roof. Do not rebuild roof planes or a
click the Open Item button. The Bay (or lower hip roof will be created.
Managing
Bow) Window Specification dialog will
Place Under Roof - Rectangular
Files
display.
To extend the roof plane down over a bay,
Place Under Roof Slope box or bow windows with a rectangular roof,
To have the main roof plane extend down ignoring the shape of the unit, select both
over the window unit while following the Place under roof slope and Rectangu-
Managing
lar roof over in the specification dialog.

Files
See the previous section for directions on

extending the roof down over bay, box or
bow windows.
293
The illustration below shows this roof automatically created. Apply the manual roof
style. editing techniques described in to model a
gable roof over a window unit. (see “Manual
Roof Editing” on page 332.
1. Delete the front hip section.
2. Select the side hip sections on the front
angled edge. Grab the front ridge corner
handle and drag the roof section forward
until the fascia is almost straight.
3. Use the Make Parallel tool to
straighten out the gable end and set the
Rectangular Hip Roof overhang. Do this with each roof sec-
To create a rectangular hip roof, select only tion.
Rectangular roof over. Then rebuild the 4. Once the roof planes are shaped prop-
roof. erly, open the Build Roof dialog and
select the Build Fascia/Gutters
option to complete the roof. Do not
select Build Roof Planes.
The result should be similar to the following:
Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
window. They can be created by manually
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
Drawing Bay, Box and Bow Windows using Walls

It is not necessary to use only the window unit. Moving the bay is more difficult since it
tools provided to create bay, box or bow is formed from individual walls, although the
windows. Sometimes it is easier to draw the Edit Area option can sometimes help with
bay using walls. Bays created using walls this. The same holds true for box and bow
may have more than one window per section, windows.
which is not possible using a bay window
294
Chapter 17:
Stairs
Managing
Files
New In 7.0
• Stairs draw curved along curved walls • Ability to create starter treads
• Definable Landing heights • Ability to lock tread width
Managing
• Ability to create flared stairs • Ability to lock number of treads in a stair
Stairs
Files
section
General Information
Stairs may be either straight or curved. They Landings may be created automatically or
may be turned into winders. Any stair section manually. They may be custom shaped. You
may be flared. Up to two starter treads may may adjust an existing landing, or create one
be defined per staircase. from a closed CAD polyline. Landing
heights are definable, or you may let them
Staircases may be composed of one or more
automatically adjust as needed.
stair sections (straight or curved) and
Managing
landings, in any combination. The stair Local building and fire authorities should be
components may be edited individually or consulted for specific stair construction
Files
together. codes and access requirements
Stairs
Managing
Straight stairs will also be created if you drag
Files
To create a staircase, click Stairs . Click in
the center of the first riser and, while holding the stairs out in the open, away from any
down the mouse button, drag in the direction walls.
of the run.
Straight Stairs: If you drag the stairs
Libraries
Symbol
parallel to a nearby straight wall, straight

stairs will be created against the wall.
295
This is most easily illustrated by showing the

cross sections of the straight and curved
stairs just created. (Floor framing is also
displayed to make the floors stand out more.)
Curved Stairs: Drag near a curved wall

and curved stairs will be created against the
wall.
Stair Direction: When you drag to create a

set of stairs, the stairs are created going UP,
so stairs are normally created on the lower
floor. Stairs drawn in the UP direction
respond to floor heights and will adjust to
connect between two defined floor heights.
Notice that, in both cases, the staircase starts

at the lower floor and automatically stops at
the correct height on the upper floor. The rise
and run may not automatically be what you
want, but the stairs will reach the next level if
296
Stairs
enough risers are created. After the stairs are No matter which direction the stairs are
Managing
created, the stair specifications can be drawn, more than one stair section can be
adjusted. linked together. Landings can also be added.
Files
The only direction requirement is that all of
Stairs will read UP in Plan View when seen
the stairs go the same direction if they are to
on the lower floor. They will be visible from
be linked together or with landings. Landings
the upper floor after the stairwell (an Open
will not be created between a stair created in
Below room) has been created. Stairs will
the Down direction and one created in the Up
read DN in Plan View when seen from the
direction.
upper floor.
Before stairs are created, make sure that both Understanding Stairs
the lower floor and the upper floor are Each line across the width of
correctly defined for height, and that the the stairs in Plan View
floors and ceilings have been updated. To represents a riser. This riser
Stairs
update the floors and ceilings click on the height is commonly called
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceiling button. the "rise". The space between
Stairs may be created from an upper level the two lines is the tread. The
and drawn down, but these stairs are only distance between the two
aware of their current floor height. To create lines is the tread width,
a down staircase, you must hold down commonly called the "run".
the Shift key when you drag in the direction of Stairs are often described in terms of rise and
the run. Since these stairs do not sense the run. The rise is typically between 6" and 8"
lower level, they are used only when creating and the run is between 10" and 12". A good
stairs from a specific platform (such as a rule of thumb is that the rise plus the run
deck or porch) down toward an unknown should equal 18" for the stair to be
Managing
ground level or undefined grade. If the comfortable. Any rise over 7 1/2” is
Files
finished grade is known, create a "room" considered to be steep, regardless of the run.
using Invisible walls and establish the floor
For metric plans, the riser height would be
height for that area to match finished grade.
177 to 190 mm and the tread width about 250
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to have mm.
the floor platform calculated at the lower
Managing
elevation. Then draw a normal stair from the
Files
lower platform up to the upper platform. It
will correctly link the two heights.
If more than one stair section is needed in the
staircase, create the various stair sections. Do
Managing
not worry about the length or width of the

Files
sections. These can be adjusted later in the

Stair Specification dialog.
297
Selecting Stairs
In Plan View, click on a stair section in Handles for Curved Stairs
Stairs mode or Select Items to select the A single curved stair section, when selected,
stairs. When selected, the stair section is will display eight handles. They are all
marked with several red handles. If a nearby defined in the diagram. The end handles may
item is selected instead of the staircase, click also used to merge stairs or to straighten the
the Next button until the stair section is stairs. (This is done by holding down the Ctrl
selected. key and then dragging the end handle.)
When stairs are selected, the handles can be
used to modify the stairs in many ways. A
Move Side Radially
stair can be resized, moved, deleted, rotated,
or merged with another stair section. It can
Extend End Move Radially
even have its shape modified. The stair can
also be turned into a winder and have its first
two treads made into starter treads. A straight
Move Side Change Curve
stair section can be turned into a curved
section, or vice versA.
Center point
Handles for Straight Stairs Move Stairs
A single straight stair section, when selected,
will display six handles. Each is defined in Extend End
the diagram. End handles are used to stretch
the stairs, but may also be used to merge Rotate Stairs
stairs or to change the straight section into a
curved section. (This is done by dragging the
end handle while holding down the Ctrl key.)
Move Side
Extend End Extend End

Move Stairs
Move Side
Rotate Stairs
298
Resizing Stairs
Handles for Merged Stairs To the right is the
Managing
When stair components same stair system
Selected on
which was selected on
Files
are merged, the handles Curved Subsection
change. The handles the straight section.
available will depend Note that the handles
on which subsection is have changed from the
selected. To the right is previous illustration.
an illustration of a Again, the Move Side
staircase composed of a handles appear only on
straight stair section the selected section.
and a curved stair With combination Selected on
section. The staircase Straight Subsection
stairs, the stair section
was was selected on the you select will directly
curved subsection. affect your editing options.
Stairs
Notice that the Move
Side handles appear All handles will not be available for
only on the selected section. staircases composed of a single stair
section. Handles on single stair sections
may have different functions than the
handles on a staircase composed of
multiple sections.
Resizing Stairs
To resize by dragging, select a stair section. If the stairwell area has already been defined
Managing
Drag from the top or bottom Extend handles on the next floor, the top of the stairs can be
Files
to lengthen or shorten the section. If the dragged until it stops at the railing or wall
move is slight, the width of the treads will be defining the stairwell.
adjusted, treads will not be added. If the
If the stair section end is connected to a
move is drastic, treads will be added or
landing, and you resize the section from this
removed, depending on the direction
Managing
end, it will move the landing and all
dragged.
connected sections.
Files
Drag from either side handle to change the
width of the stair section. When changing the NOTE: The most accurate method of
length or the width, the command box in the resizing stairs is to use the Staircase
toolbar will display the current dimension. Specification dialog see “Stair
Specification Dialog” on page 320.
Managing
Resizing is stopped by any wall on the same

Files
floor. The top of a stair section will also be

stopped when it meets a wall on the next
floor if the stairway reaches above 54" high.
299
Moving Stairs
Two methods exist for moving stairs. The through stairs. If a wall is moved into a
first method is to drag the stairs using the staircase, reposition the staircase so it is
Move handle. This movement is typically properly aligned with the wall again.
restricted to directions perpendicular to any
Moving stairs may appear to be slightly
side or end, but can be overridden whenever
jerky. They usually move in 1" increments.
necessary. This method is fast and often
This movement increment is defined in the
accurate enough.
Dimensions Setup dialog stairs under Wall
The second method is to move the stairs by & Opening Snap Unit (double-click the
changing the actual dimension value in a Dimension button).
dimension line which locates the stairs. This
is the precision method. 1
Move By Dragging
Select the stair section. Several red handles
will appear. Grab the handle which changes
to the Move cursor when the mouse is 1 The Wall & Opening Snap Unit
affects creation and moving of stairs. If
placed above it, and drag the stairs to a new
this is changed, reset it back to 1" when you
location. The stairs will move perpendicular
are done, since it also affects the creation and
to the sides and ends of the selected stair
the moving of many other items in the plan.
section, and will stop when they bump into a
wall or rail. Continue until the stairs are
positioned properly. Other stair sections
Unrestricted Movement
merged to the selected section or attached by Like most other items, you can override the
landings will typically move with the restrictions on moving stairs if necessary.
selected section. This is helpful when trying to move one stair
next to another stair section in preparation
A stair section will stop when it or any stair for creating a landing.
section moving with it is moved into a wall.
If it is moving along its length it will also To move the stair section freely, select the
stop upon one of its ends hitting a landing or stairs, hold down the Ctrl key, and then grab
the end of another stair section. the middle handle (which changes to a
If you move a stair section within a couple Move cursor) and drag the stairs to the
inches of a parallel wall, the stairs will new location.
automatically snap against the wall.
Move Using Dimensions
Although stairs will stop when moved into Dimension may be used to position a stair
walls, walls will not stop when moved into exactly with the Set Dimension dialog.
stairs. Walls can be accidentally moved
300
Deleting Stairs or Stair Subsections
Drag a dimension line in Dimension mode the dimension line segment. The Set
Managing
between the staircase and the wall or other Dimension dialog will open. Type in the
desired distance. Unless the feet mark (i.e.
Files
reference item. Reposition the dimension
line if necessary so that it properly locates 3’6) is used, inches will be assumed. Click
the items being used for locating the stairs. OK or press Enter . The stair will move
Select the staircase and click in the middle of accordingly.
Deleting Stairs or Stair Subsections

Select a stair section or landing. Click the handle back until the subsection length is
Delete button or press the Del key. zero or less. Release the handle and that stair
section will be deleted.
To delete a subsection on one end of a
staircase composed of multiple stair sections, When dragging back a curved subsection, be
Stairs
select that stair subsection and drag the end careful not to drag too far back or the curve
may change into a subsection going a
different direction.
Rotating Stairs
Any stair can be rotated after it is created by Rotate/Resize About Current Point is
dragging the triangular handle located defined on the CAD page of the Preferences
outside the stair section. Dragging this dialog see “CAD” on page 70.
handle in a circular motion will rotate the
The stairs will rotate according to the
stairs around their center point, unless
Managing
Allowed Angles in the Plan Defaults
Files
dialog, see “Plan Defaults Setup” on page 92.
Copying Stairs
Stairs do not copy in the traditional sense. You will probably want to paste the copy of
Managing
Stairs may only be copied using the Edit the stairs in an area outside the building. This
Files
Area tool. For information regarding File> allows you to move the stairs into position
Edit Area see “Edit Area” on page 573. using the normal move tools, and leave
behind anything else that copied along with
To copy stairs, choose Edit> Edit Area.
the stairs. Edit Area copies everything inside
Draw a marquee around the stairs to be
the marquee.
Managing
copied. Click the Copy button. Go to the

plan or floor where the stairs are to be After moving the newly pasted stairs into
Files
placed, and choose Edit> Paste. Click on the position, Edit Area can be used to delete
plan to place the copy. items in the area into which the stairs were
brought.
301
Landings
To create a landing between stair sections: If you click the Stair button and then drag
1. Move the stair sec- to draw a stair section, the section is drawn in
tions so that they are the "UP" direction. If you click theStair
in the correct rela- button, hold down the Ctrl key and drag to
tionship to each draw a stair section, the section is drawn in
other. Notice that the "DOWN" direction.
both are going the Multiple stairs may be connected to the same
same direction...UP. landing. This means that it is possible to have
2. Select the Stair two or three stair sections coming up to the
button and click same landing, with a single stair section
between the two sec- continuing up from that landing.
tions. A landing will A curved landing will create curved railings.
be created. Notice
that there is now only To delete a landing, select it by one of its
one direction arrow. edges and click the Delete button or the
Del key on the keyboard.
Up to five stair sections may
be connected to one landing.
Landings can be edited like CAD polylines.
To be linked by a landing, all
You can add or remove edges, convert an
sections must be drawn in
edge from straight to curved, or vice versa.
the same direction “UP” or
“DOWN”, and the top of A landing formed between two stair sections
one section must be near the having less than a 90 degree angle between
bottom of the next. them will be created with a short edge not
less than 6 inches (150 mm). This short edge
may be manually edited to less than 6” (150
mm).
Custom Shaped Landings

You can turn a closed polyline into a custom 3. Click Special to access the Special
shaped landing with the Edit CAD Item CAD dialog.
dialog. 4. Select the Landing check box.
1. Draw a closed polyline. 5. Define a Height and Thickness for
2. Select the closed polyline and click the the landing. If the Height is defined, the
Open Item button. The Edit CAD stair will meet the landing. If a "d" is
Item dialog will open. typed in the Height value, the Height
will be determined by the stair.
302
Landing Height
6. Stair section ends will normally connect may also move the stair until the end
Managing
to a landing. To connect a stair section, bumps into the landing. Either method
drag the end handle of a stair section and will connect the section and also set the
Files
drop it on the edge of the landing. You landing height accordingly.
Landing Height
Landing heights may be controlled by the Since both stair sections are the same length,
program or they may be defined by you. A the landing height is a half of the total height
landing whose height is controlled by the between the two connected floors. Unlocked
program is said to be "unlocked". An Landing heights are set automatically when
unlocked landing adjusts in height as its the stairs and landings are connected.
attached stairs are modified. If, however, you
specify a height for a landing, that landing is
Stairs
said to be "locked". A locked landing will
maintain that height no matter how you
adjust the stairs on both sides of that landing.
Unlocked Landings
Normally, the stair
sections attached to a
landing will determine
the height of the landing.
In this example, two stair
sections are connected
Managing
by a landing. Both stair
Files
sections have 7 treads. Notice that the tread
width is the same in plan view, because the
landing height is set automatically according
to the number of treads. All treads have the
same tread width and riser height.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
303
So long as each landing connects two stair For example, start with
sections so that the entire staircase forms a the same staircase used
single path from the lower to the upper floor, to illustrate unlocked
the system can set landing heights without landings, with one
any difficulty. single change: The
landing height is now
Since the stairs and landings are basically a
defined at 75". Notice
single unit, a change in any stair section will
that, instead of 7 treads per section, the
affect the height of connected landings as
program was forced subtract a tread at the
well as the other stair sections. The stairs are
top and add treads at the bottom, just to keep
defined, and the landing adjusts in height so
the riser heights within a reasonable range.
that the entire stair system has the same riser
height, no matter how many stairs are placed To "lock" a landing by defining a fixed
on each side of the landing. height for that landing :
This works well for simple cases. If more 1. Select the landing in Plan View and
than two stair sections meet at a landing, the click the Open Item button to open
relationship between them becomes more the Edit CAD Item dialog.
complex. In this situation, you may wish to
2. Click Special to access the Special
define the exact height of the landing instead
CAD dialog. The Landing check box
of having the program define it for you.
will be selected and the Height value
will be display followed by “(D)”, indi-
Locked Landings cating that the landing height is defined
Locked Landings have the landing height by the stair sections.
specifically defined, so the landing does not
adjust automatically in respond to changes in 3. Enter the desired height.
the stairs attached to that landing. Instead, 4. The landing will move to that height.
the stairs automatically adjust to the landing. Once you have defined a height for the
landing, all stairs that meet the landing
will be redefined.
304
Merging Stairs without Landings
The stair sections no longer relate to each affect the other. In this example, each set of
Managing
other since they are attached to a locked stairs is adjusted so it bridges the height from
landing. Changes to one stair section will not the floor to the landing. Since the landing is
Files
specifically positioned above the halfway
mark, the upper stair section has very
shallow (5") riser height, and the lower
section has a steeper (7-1/2") riser height.
When you move a stair section, you move all
other connected non-locked landings as well
as the stair sections connected to those
landings. A locked landing, however, will
not move when you move attached stairs.
The Staircase Specification dialog will
Stairs
display only the selected stair section and
those connected to it by non-locked landings.
Basically, a locked landing serves to break
up what may be a complex network of stairs
and landings into smaller pieces whose
starting and ending heights are known.
To unlock a landing and return the landing
height to be dependent on the stair sections,
follow the previous steps and enter a "d" in
the value box. The current height will
Managing
reappear with "(D)". It will change to the
appropriate height when you exit from the
Files
dialogs.
Managing
Merging Stairs without Landings
Files
Any combination of straight or curved stair Stair subsections to be merged must all be
subsections may be merged to create a single created in the same direction. Multiple stairs
stair section. This section will then function drawn in the UP direction may be merged,
as a single unit if there is not a landing. Stair and multiple stairs drawn DOWN may be
Managing
sections that are joined by landings may be merged, but combinations of UP and DOWN
specified as a unit or by each stair section. stairs will not merge.
Files
305
To merge stairs together, Subsections can be joined into a single stair

position them so they are in the section without being aligned. If the
desired relationship to each misalignment is slight, the first tread of the
other. Stair subsections will higher section is reshaped to fit and the
merge at the center points of subsections connect nicely.
either the upper or lower riser.
To merge the two subsections,

select either stair, grab the handle
on the end to be merged, and
drop that end on the point where
the two stairs would meet. You
may need to repeat this step with
both subsections if they were not
originally positioned correctly.
Once they are merged, you have
a stair section with two subsections. When
the merge is successful, the UP (or DN)
arrows from each will join, becoming a
single direction arrow. Selecting either If the misalignment is greater, the sections
subsection will result in the entire merged still connect, but the stairs will not be correct
section being selected. Continue to merge unless edited.
sets of stairs as desired.
Be sure to position the stairs before

merging, since stair editing capability
changes when stairs are merged. For
example, once merged, straight sections
may not be individually rotated. Some
new editing options become available
while other options are lost.
306
Working with Curved Stairs
Sections with Locked Width landing. Instead, set the section length as you
Managing
When dragging the end handle to lengthen or wish and approximately align it with the
other section. Now move the section into the
Files
contract a section with Lock Tread Width
selected, the length will change in jumps, one other section or landing until it hits and
tread at a time. This makes it very difficult to stops. This will align and connect the two
merge the section to another section or sections.

Curved stairs can be created by dragging 4. Release the mouse when the stair section
along a curved wall in Stair mode or they is approximately the shape desired.
can be created from a straight stair section.
Once a stair section is defined as curved, it is
can be manipulated and edited to the correct
Stairs
size and position.
To create curved stairs from straight stairs:
1. Click the
Stair button Aligning Ends of Curved Stairs
and drag to cre- The top and bottom edges of curved stair
ate a straight sections may be aligned to walls, CAD items,
stair section of any length. Do not worry or other stair sections using the Make
about the length or width of the section, Parallel button. This is useful for making a
since it can be adjusted later. curved staircase begin or end perpendicular
Managing
2. Select the section to a wall or aligning the top of one section
Files
to be modified.
Managing
3. Hold down
Files
the Ctrl key and
grab either of the
two end handles,
and drag the sec-
tion into a curve.
Managing
Files
307
with the bottom of another. This process The following pictures show how to create a
works only if the end of the stairs is not curved stair section from three straight
attached to a landing or another stair section. subsections.
1. Draw three straight stair sections and
connect them end to end.
1. Select the stairs near the end that you

wish to realign.
2. Select the middle subsection and click
2. Click the Make Parallel button, then on the Change Line/Arc button to
click the wall, rail stair section or CAD change it into a curved subsection.
item to reference. (Make sure the end of
the stair section is within 20 degrees of
parallel or perpendicular to the item.)
3. The section will extend or contract from
this end and along its curve to achieve
the alignment.
The Make Parallel button can be used

to align straight sections which may have
shifted during a merge
Curving Enclosed Sections

Stair subsections bounded on both ends by
other subsections do not have a free end
which can be dragged into a curve using the
Ctrl key. Other editing tools are available in
this situation.
308
3. The center section is turned into a Curved Stairs Made Tangent
Managing
curved stair section. Curved subsections can be made tangent
Files
with the subsections to which they connect
using the Make Arc Tangent button on
the Edit toolbar.
1. Select the middle subsection.
2. Click on the Make Arc Tangent but-
ton to smooth the connections between it
and the two outer subsections.
The Change Line/Arc button becomes

available when any totally enclosed stair
Stairs
section is selected. The stair must be
bounded on both ends by stair sections, not
landings. If the selected stair section is
straight, this tool will make it curved. If the
selected stair section is curved, this tool will
make it straight.
Notice that, although the center stair section
is curved, it does not flow smoothly into the
straight sections. The technique for making 3. The enclosed curved stair section is
any curved stair tangent to its neighboring made tangent to the stair sections on
Managing
stair is described in the following section. both ends.
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Editing curved stairs is similar to editing

arcs with the CAD tools.
309
Aligning Curved Stairs Properties panel of the Preferences dia-

Between Floors log.
You can align curved stairs between two 2. Select the stairs to be moved.
floors if the one floor is displayed as the
3. Click the Point-to-Point Move tool to
Reference Floor and Show arc centers,
move the center point.
ends is selected on the CAD Line
Properties page of the Preferences dialog. 4. Click on the center mark of the stairs,
then click on the center mark of the
1. Display the arc centers by selecting stairs shown on the Reference Floor.
Show arc centers, ends on the Line
Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs

Single Section Stairs As the radius is adjusted, the length of the
For a curved staircase made up of a single stair and the number of treads or the tread
section, select the stairs and grab the red width will change depending on your
handle which lies along the center curve of selection in the Stair Specification dialog.
the stairs and drag the handle perpendicular You can drag any of the 4 handles along the
to the stair. edge of the stairs in order to stretch the stair
sides just as you would a straight stair. Do
not move the triangular handles or the center
point handle or else the center of the stair
will be moved.
Multiple Subsections
If a curved subsection is merged end-to-end,
to a straight subsection, moving the handle
If you drag towards the center, the radius will which lies along the center of the up arrow
decrease. If you drag the handle away from will adjust the radius opposite the way it
the center, the radius will increase. adjusts a single section curved stair.
Dragging the handle away from the center
will straighten the curve along the path of the
straight subsection. Dragging the handle
310
Creating Winders
towards the center will curve the straight Matching the Center & Radius
Managing
section to match the curved section. The The easiest way to match the radius of the
center will also move.
Files
stair to the radius of a curved wall is to create
the stair by dragging near one side of the
curved wall. The stair will snap to the wall,
and the radius of the staircase will be
defined.
If there is no curved wall, you can align the
radius of the stair to a CAD arc or circle. To
do this, you must first align the centers of the
CAD item and the staircase.
1. Display the arc centers by selecting
Show arc centers, ends on the Line
Stairs
Properties panel of the Preferences dia-
log, see “CAD Line Properties” on page
Drag the handles on the sides of the
77.
subsection to adjust the radius of the curved
subsection. The center point will not move. 2. Select the stairs to be moved, then click
Drag one side of the stairs to the correct the Move Point to Point button which
radius. Once that side is positioned, drag the appears on the Edit toolbar.
oppposite edge to define the desired width. If 3. Click on the center mark of the stairs,
one side of the stairs is attached to a wall, then click on the center mark of the
you may also specify the width of the stairs curved wall, curved railing, arc or circle.
in the Stair Specification dialog and only
the unattached stair edge will adjust. If 4. The staircase will move so that the cen-
Managing
neither stair edge is attached to a wall, both ter of the radius is aligned with the cen-
Files
will adjust if you use the dialog to specify the ter of the other curved item.
width. In this case, it is better to drag the
edge to define the stair width.
Managing
Creating Winders
Files
Both curved and straight stairs may be turned 1. In this illustration, the
into winders. When defined as a winder, the staircase is composed
stairs will extend to fill in any gap between of two straight sections
the side of the stairs and nearby walls. with a curved section in
Managing
the middle.
Files
2. Select the stairs on any

section, and click the Open Item but-
ton.
311
3. Select the Winder check box in the Turning the stairs into winders may cause the
Staircase Specification dialog and click interior edge to snap to the inside edge of the
OK. walls underneath the stairs, as shown below.
4. Note how the curved
section extends to the
corner after the stair has
been changed to a
winder.
Winders MUST be in a room with valid

room definition before they will work. You
cannot create winders in an area
composed of only 2 corner walls. If this
configuration is needed, close the area in
with Invisible walls so that a room is
established. When a stair is defined as a winder, the
curved stair section will always expand to fill
Troubleshooting Winders in the gaps between the stair and the wall.
Winders may exhibit unusual behavior in the A problem may occur when one side of the
specific situation where walls are used to staircase overlaps the walls used to create a
create a "room" below the stairs. room underneath the stairs. In this case, you
do not want that stair edge to contract until it
is against the inside edge of the wall below.
312
Creating Winders
In the following illustration, the dark stair more than this defined amount (between its
Managing
lines represent the stairs before they are current position and its new position against
turned into winders. They do not fill the the inside wall), the stairs will not contract
Files
corner gap. The inside edge of the stairs and snap to the inside edge of the underlying
extends well beyond the walls below. (The walls.
walls are also shown).
Following is a closeup view of a staircase
which has a "room" beneath it. (The linetype
for the stairs layer was changed to a dashed
line so the walls beneath the stairs would
display in Plan View.)
Stairs
The shaded area shows what happens when
these stairs are turned into winders. The
winder treads expand to fill the corner gap.
The edge of the stairs which originally
Managing
overlapped the wall contracts until it lies
Files
against the inside edge of the walls which
define the room below the stairs.
This problem is easily corrected by limiting If the distance (E) from the inside corner of
the distance the stair edge is allowed to move the stair (C) to the inside corner of the walls
inward when the stairs are turned into
Managing
under the staircase (D) is less than or equal
winders. This limitation is called the Max to the Max Tread Contraction, then the
Files
Tread Contraction. This value is defined stair will snap to the inside edge of the wall.
in the Style tab of the Staircase
Specification dialog. If the distance (E) is greater than the Max
Tread Contraction, the staircase will
The Max Tread Contraction defines the remain unaltered.
Managing
largest distance that any section of the stair

To correct the problem with the staircase,
Files
system is allowed to move inward when the

stairs are turned into winders. If any point on select the stairs in Plan View. Then click the
the edge of the stairs would have to move Open Item button to display the Stair
Specification dialog. On the Style tab,
313
change the Max Tread Contraction to a

non-zero value less than any known distance
that any stair edge would have to contract if To prevent this type of situation from
it were to move to the inside edge of the wall occuring, always set the Max Tread
beneath the stairs. Since the stair extends Contraction to a small, non-zero
slightly beyond the wall, you could safely value. A value of zero is the same as
setting a high value. It will not limit the
use a value up to the thickness of the wall. In
snap distance the stair edge will contract.
this case, the wall is 3-1/2" wide, so the Max
Tread Contraction was set to 2.
314
Flared Stairs
Flared Stairs
Managing
Files
Any stair section can be flared using the to adjust the stairs. One additional set of
Flare/Curve Stairs button that appears handles is provided. The central set of
on the Edit toolbar when a stair section is handles is described later.
selected. When this button is selected, many
new handles display for editing the stairs.
Stairs
Creating a Flared Stair
1. Create the stairs.
These are the main handles used for flaring 2. Select the stairs, then
Managing
or curving stair treads. Below each picture is click the Flare/Curve
Files
an example of how the handles may be used Stairs button. New
handles will display on
the stairs. Notice that all
four corners of the stairs
now have a flare
Managing
handle.
Files
3. Drag one of the corner handles to flare
that corner. Observe the toolbar window
or the status bar as you drag the flare.
These will show the amount the side
Managing
handle moves outward. This information

Files
315
is important if you plan to move the Curving the Treads

opposite handle the same amount.
Symmetrically Flared Stairs The handles at the center of the top and
bottom riser will curve the treads when
dragged up or down. The illustration above
shows curved treads added to a curved
staircase. Other stair editing has been done as
well, but the focus of this section is the
curving of the treads.
1. Select the stair which already has one

side flared. Click the Flare/Curve
Stairs button.
2. Drag the flare handle on the opposite
1. Select the stairs. Click the Flare/Curve
side until it has been moved outward the
Stairs button.
same amount as the first handle.
2. Drag the handle positioned in the center
of the bottom edge. Drag a small
amount. The treads will curve accord-
ingly.
316
Flared Stairs
Softening the Flare Radius this handle outward very slightly. This
Managing
The four handles at the sides, and the four forms a more gradual flare.
Files
handles at the corners flare the stair section Then adjust the starting point of the flare:
when dragged outward from it. The two
handles in the center of the section move the
starting point for flaring along the stair
section.
After the flare has been created, you may
want to soften the radius of the flare.
Stairs
1. Select the flared stair and click the
Flare/Curve Stairs button to display
the flare handles again.
2. This time, drag the lower of the two cen-
tral handles upward. The handle above it
will move with it. This moves the start
point for the bottom flare from the mid-
First, adjust the flared section’s curvature: dle of the section toward its top, making
the flare even more gradual.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
1. Select the flared stair and click the
Managing
Flare/Curve Stairs button to display

Files
the flare handles again.

2. Select the handle along the side of the
stair, on the edge having the flare. Drag
317
Treads Perpendicular to Flare You could also choose to curve the tread
A stair section often looks better if the treads more uniformly by dragging downward from
curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to the center bottom handle.
the radius.
To create this effect,

drag the lower left Drag just a few inches to create the curve
handle upward a tread shown in the picture. The section does not
width or less. need to be flared to have this type of
curvature and the curvature affects all treads
This type of tread
in the section, each one less as it gets further
curving works only for
from the curved end until no curvature is
a flared edge and
given to the tread at the other end of the
concentrates the
section. You can, if you wish, impose a curve
curvature at that edge.
on the other end as well.
318
Starter Treads
Starter Treads
Managing
Files
The first and second tread of a staircase can To radius the starter treads:
be modeled with rounded ends, also known
1. Select a stair section by clicking in the
as starter treads. This is common with
lowest tread. The Edit toolbar will
traditional staircases. Starter treads can be
specified on one or both sides of the stair appear.
with the Starter Tread button on the
You must select on either the first or the
Edit toolbar.
second tread, or the Starter Tread
This rounded tread can be added to one or button will not display. The tread
both sides of a stair section. If the stair selected will be the tread modified.
section is against a wall, only the tread away
from the wall is changed. 2. Click the Starter Tread button.
Stairs
3. One red handle will appear on the ends
of the first tread.
4. Drag either of the handles outward from

the stair section. (If the stair section is
against a wall, only one handle will
appear on the side opposite the wall.)
5. The ends or the tread will become
Managing
rounded and the width of the tread will
Files
increase as you drag.
Managing
6. Once the first tread is edited in this way,
Files
two handles will display on each side
when you select the stair by clicking on
the first tread, and then click the Starter
Tread button.
Managing
7. Drag either of the outer handles away

Files
from the stair to extend the tread further

out, or push it back in to change the
starter tread back to normal.
319
8. Drag either of the two inner handles 10. Both the first and second treads have
upward to increase the width of the been modified.
rounded tread.
9. Repeat the steps to modify the second
tread. Handles for the second tread are
displayed by selecting the stair on the
second tread before clicking on the
Starter Tread button.
Stair Specification Dialog

The highest accuracy in defining a staircase There are three main divisions in this dialog,
is available through the Staircase each represented by a tab at the top. The tabs
Specification dialog. If more than one stair are labeled General, Style, and Material.
section attaches to landings, information Any changes made in any of the tabs will be
about all the linked stair sections is displayed applied when you click OK.
in the specification dialog. If a stair section is
Select any stair section and click the Open
composed of multiple subsections, the
complete section may be adjusted as a unit, Item button, or double-click on a stair
or by defining each of its individual section in Stairs or Select Items mode.
subsections. Any section or subsection can The Staircase Specification dialog will
be used to open the Staircase Specification appear. You may also double-click the stairs
dialog for the entire stair system. in a 3D View while in Select Items mode.
It is important that all floor heights, ceiling

heights, floor thickness and ceiling
thickness be established correctly before
using the Staircase Specification dialog.
320
General Tab
Managing
Files
1 2
4
3 5
6
7
8 12
Stairs
9 13
10
11 14
Managing
1 The comment line tells whether or not 3 This section lists information about the
Files
the staircase reaches the next floor. If it staircase. This information cannot be
does not reach, click the Make Reach changed directly, but will update with
button which appears, and risers are added. changes made in the dialog.
The bottom edge of the stair section extends
until the staircase is able reach the next floor. If you modify a value, press the Tab key to
Managing
see the information update to the new
Files
2 Click the Revert button to restore all settings.
the values as they were when the dialog
Best riser height of ___ inches
was first opened. Revert only works within 4 requires ___ risers to reach ___
the same editing session.
inches to next floor. This area explains
If you select and then clear one of the the extent of the stair. Always check the
Managing
Retain # treads in check boxes, the number of inches (mm) to the next floor.
Files
settings will also revert. This number is usually comprised of the

ceiling height of the room plus the platform
thickness of the floor above.
321
If a locked landing is used, the height of that Retain # Treads in: Subsection -
landing will be used to calculate this Select the check box to specify the number of
information. (see “Locked Landings” on treads in each subsection.
page 304.)
5 Select Stair sections move

separately to move each section
separately. This will break apart a staircase at
the landings when they are moved. It will not
break apart sections into the individual
subsections. If this option is grayed out, no
landings exist.
Lock Tread Width - Select the check
6
box to lock the tread width set in the
Tread Width area. If not locked, the
program may adjust it, depending on the
situation.
Retain # Treads in: Sections -
7
Select the check box to lock the number
If you have selected the checkbox for either
of treads in the stairs section as a whole. This
Retain # Treads in Sections or Retain
does not include landing. It does not define
# Treads in Subsections, any change in
the distribution of those treads throughout
the length of a stair section will be evenly
the different stair subsections.
distributed among the treads in that section
or subsection. No new treads will be added.
The lower section of the dialog is used to
define the parameters of the stair. This
section will expand to show stair sections
and subsections.
All stair sections linked by landings to the
selected stair section will display in the lower
part of the dialog. If you select Retain #
Treads in: Subsection, then all
subsections will display.
You can modify a stair section as a complete
unit or you can modify each subsection.
There are five values which can be changed.
A change in one value usually affects other
values in the same row. You may need to
reposition the staircase after the changes.
322
Section # - Identifies the stair move as necessary to line up with the new
8
Managing
sections. landing. If the portion above the new landing
is not connected to an existing landing, it will
Files
Length defines the total run, the
9 move. Otherwise, the sections and landings
horizontal length of that stair section as
below the new landing will move.
seen in Plan View. This is calculated
automatically by multiplying the number of # Treads defines the specific number
11
14
treads by the tread width. It may by defined of treads for the stair section or
with a specific value. If the section or subsection. If you enter a value and want to
subsection length is changed in the dialog, keep the value from changing, you must
the position of the top of that section stays click OK and close out of the dialog. Then
fixed while its bottom, and all sections you must reopen the Staircase Specification
connected to its bottom, will move. dialog and check Lock # treads to lock
the value.
If you change the length, be sure to select the
Stairs
appropriate checkbox for Retain # Winders - Select the checkbox to turn
12
Treads. Otherwise the # Treads value the selected section into winders. This
may be changed by the program. affects the section as a whole, even if it is
defined by subsections. If there are multiple
Tread Width is the run of each
10 sections in a staircase, separated by landings,
individual tread. Enter a value to
each section can be individually defined as
specify the desired Tread width. To lock this
having winders.
value, select the Lock Tread Width check
box.
If you do not specify the tread width for each
subsection, you will be specifying the
Managing
average tread width for the whole section.
Files
You cannot lock both the Tread Width and
Retain the Tread Count in a stair section.
If a landing is created between two stair
Rise Angle defines the steepness of
sections, one of which has locked tread 13
width, the staircase formed will have the section. This can be changed
Managing
locked tread width. directly, but the maximum angle you can
Files
enter is 42 degrees.
If a landing is created by clicking between To model a steeper angle and exceed the 42
two stair sections, one of which has locked degree limit, you can decrease the Length,
tread width, the staircase formed from them Tread Width and/or # Treads.
will have locked tread width. When the
Managing
Sec. Width defines the width of the

landing forms, the sections to which it 14
Files
connects will not contract or expand as for section. Only one width can be defined
unlocked tread width. Instead they, and all for a section. All subsections in the same
landings and sections connected to them will section will have the same width.
323
Style Tab
1 9
2 10
3 11
4 12
5
6
7
8
The Style tab redefines the style of the usually want to increase the tread thickness
staircase. It will affect all sections and to about 2 inches (50 mm) or greater when
subsections equally. These options can be this is checked.
used in any combination.
Open Underneath - Clear the check
5
Left Railing, Right Railing - Select box to add a skirt below the staircase
1
either or both check boxes to include along the two sides. It looks like a wall in
railings on that side of the stair sections and 3D, but it has only a single face. Baseboard
landings where they are not against a wall. will not generate along the bottom of the
skirt, and doors cannot be placed in the skirt.
Closed Sides - Select the check box
2
to raise each exposed stringer to cover The preferred way to enclose the area
the sides of the treads. If this is checked, no beneath stairs is by using walls. For more
central stringer is applied. This setting only information, see “Creating Rooms Beneath
affects those stringers which are not against a Staircases” on page 327.
wall.
Open Risers - Select the check box to
6
Baseboard at Wall - Select the eliminate the riser beneath the front of
3
check box to produce a baseboard trim each tread. The stringers will be exposed
at the sides of the stair sections that are unless Closed Sides is also selected. In
against walls. This baseboard follows the that case, the stair section sides are
slope of the stair. considered to be the stringers and no central
stringer is supplied.
Single Stringer - Select the check
4
box to form a single 5-inch (125-mm) Large Stringer Base - Select the
7
thick stringer in the center of the staircase. check box to widen the stringer at the
foot of the staircase. Always have this
Selecting this checkbox automatically checks
checked if using walls to create a room
the checkbox for Open Risers and clears
below the stairs.
the checkbox for Closed Sides. You will
324
Use Exterior Materials - Select the Tread Thickness - Specify the

8 10
Managing
check box to have the entire staircase thickness of the material for each tread.
use the same material defined by the railing. This does not go to the Material List.
Files
Individual materials can be defined for the
Rail Width - Specify the width of the
various parts of an interior staircase if this is 11
Top rail for the baluster.
not checked.
Max Tread Contraction (for
Tread Overhang - Specify the 12
9 Winder) - Define the amount a tread
amount that the Tread overhangs the will contract to create a winder. see
riser. “Troubleshooting Winders” on page 312.
Materials Tab
Stairs
1
2
You may apply materials to each part of the
stair system unless Use Exterior
Managing
Materials is checked on the Style tab.
Files
1 Select the stair part that you wish to
define.
2 Click Select Material to select a
Managing
material to apply to the specified item.
If the desired material has not been created
Files
yet, you may define the material as well.
3 A picture of the selected material will

display. The leftmost box shows how it
will display in 3D Views. The box on the
Managing
right shows how it will appear in Render

Files
Views.
325
Creating a Stairwell
The staircase needs to be in a stairwell area. 6. When the railings
This opening is actually created on the next are positioned
floor by defining an area to be Open Below properly, turn off
(named in the Room Specification dialog), the visibility of
eliminating the floor in that location. the reference floor
Following are step-by-step instructions for by pressing the
creating a stairwell. Reference
1. Draw a two-story building. Create the Toggle .
staircase on the first floor. 7. Select the room by clicking inside it in
2. Make the second floor the Current Select Items mode, then clicking
Floor and the first floor the Reference Open Item button.
Floor. 8. In the Room Speci-
3. Click the Reference Toggle to show fication dialog,
the Reference Floor. The stairs will change the room
show in the Reference plan. name to Open
Below.
4. On the upper floor,
use the Railing 9. Click the Rebuild
tool to lay out a Walls/Floors/Ceilings button to gen-
room around the erate the hole in the upper floor. The
stairs. It is easiest stairs will now show through and will be
to draw the room labeled DN.
larger than the 10. Place a Doorway in the railing at the top
stairs and then move the railing into step for an opening.
position.
11. Select the doorway and define a large
5. Select the railings width in the Door Specification dialog.
one at a time and If the doorway is specified larger than
drag them into the railing, the door will maximize to fit
position. the available space.
The results in 3D.
326
Viewing Stairs in 3D
Viewing Stairs in 3D
Managing
Files
Since stairs are not on the same floor as the camera to generate a View displaying stairs.
stairwell opening, only the multi-floor If the Full Overview is used, turn off the
cameras will simultaneously show both the display of the roof and the ceiling in the 3D
upper floor with the opening and the lower View in the Show Items dialog or use
floor with the stairs. Use the Perspective Delete View Surface to open up the model.
, Section/Elevation or Full Overview
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases
Stairs
Walls are drawn Change linetype to see Perspective View of
below the stairs. items below stairs. room below the stairs.
Managing
Rooms can be defined beneath staircases stairs. Draw all walls needed to create a
Files
with walls. Before creating the room, make room definition in the area.
sure that Large Stringer Base is selected 5. Select each wall in turn and drag it just
on the Style tab of the Stair Specification underneath the stairway, making sure
dialog. that it does not stick out beyond the
1. Draw a staircase. stairs. When you release the wall, it will
Managing
disappear in Plan View because it is
2. Select the staircase and click the Open
Files
blocked by the staircase. Stairs are
Item button to open the Staircase opaque in Plan View. Stairs block the
Specification dialog. visibility of the walls or other items
3. Set Max Tread Contraction to 2 placed below the stairs.
allow for walls defining a room under a 6. The wall at the foot of the stairs should
Managing
winder. be placed no closer to the bottom than

Files
4. Draw the walls on the same floor as the halfway through the second step. If it is
stairs, following the shape of the stairs. placed too close to the bottom step,
It is easiest to draw the walls outside the
327
pieces of wall will shoot up through the 8. When the room under the staircase is
stairs rather than being chopped off. properly defined, base molding will fol-
7. When the walls are located properly, low the walls. Doors can be added.
click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil- To see the walls and other items under the
ings button and the walls will be cut stairs, open the Layers dialog and change the
off cut by the stairs. linetype of the stairs to anything other than
solid line. Both the stairs and the walls below
will display.
Special Stairs & Railings

Solid Railings If any balusters show beyond the railing,
To create a solid rail along a staircase, create eliminate them by clearing the checkbox for
the solid rail and drag it up against (but not Left railing or Right railing. These
below) the stairs. The solid rail will sense the settings are found in the Style tab of the
adjacent stairs and will climb alongside the Staircase Specification dialog.
stairs.
Concrete Stairs
To make a simple solid concrete staircase:

1. Set the Tread overhang to zero.
2. Set the Tread thickness to zero.
3. On the Material tab, set the Tread and
the Riser/Trim materials to Concrete.
328
Special Stairs & Railings
Steel Stringer
Managing
Files
To make a steel central support with pre-cast
concrete treads:
1. Setting Tread Thickness to 2-inches
or more.
Stairs
2. Select the Single Stringer check box.
3. On the Material tab, set the Tread
material to Concrete and the Riser/
Trim material to steel.
Masonry Stairs
Managing
Files
To make a set of masonry stairs:
Managing
1. Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
Files
2. Set the Tread Thickness to the thick-
ness of the masonry.
3. On the Material tab, set the Tread
material to the masonry material and the
Riser/Trim material to concrete.
Managing
Files
329
330
Chapter 18:
Roofs
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
New in 7.0
• Now ability to model roof plans by editing tic looking skylights.
automatically generated roof baselines. • Greater control over how the skylights
• New interface to more easily create realis- wells are modeled.
General Information
Many roof styles can be created automati- a wide variety of roof plans.
cally by the program with the Build Roof When the roof plan is correct, roof planes
dialog. The Build Roof dialog builds a hip can be locked to prevent accidental changes.
Roofs
roof over all walls unless other information is The Build Roof dialog has a Lock Roof
provided. Planes check box to prevent accidentally
The dialog creates a roof plan from basic rebuilding roofs. You can also protect roof
parameters you establish, such as pitch, over- planes from accidental changes in Plan View
hang and shape. The type of roof plane that by locking the Roof Planes layer (CAD layer
each wall supports is set through the Roof 10).
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. The
The Join Roof Planes tool can be used to
program then models the roof planes and
quickly manipulate roof planes. This tool
joins them precisely at ridges and valleys.
simplifies creating roof plans manually.
Roof information is stored in the wall itself, Any roof plane can also be edited with a vari-
and that information is used to generate dif-
Managing
ety of tools as well as the Roof Plane Edit
ferent roof styles. A wall may be defined as a
Files
dialog. The manual roof editing tools allow
Full Gable Wall, a High Shed/Gable
you to create new roof planes and to modify
Wall, a Knee Wall, or an Extend Slope
any existing roof planes by shape and orien-
Downward Wall on the Roof tab of the
tation in space.
Wall Specification dialog.
Any time you are modeling roofs you must
Pitch can be defined for the whole house or
Libraries
take responsibility for creating a roof plan

Symbol
Roofs
for individual roof planes. A double-pitched

that can be built. Although some of the roof
roof (such as used for a mansard roof) can
tools may seem automatic, you must check
also be specified. As several walls are indi-
the work of the program.
vidually defined, the combinations can create
331
Tutorials have been provided near the end of plans.

this manual. Roofs are extremely useful, and
a proficiency with roof tools is very valuable Verify that all roof planes join in the way
and may be attained through practice. Those that you intend them to. The program
who master these tools save themselves a lot does not check to make sure that the
of time and effort in the development of their geometry between roof planes is correct
when you manually design or edit a roof. It
is possible for you to design and edit roof
planes whose hips and valleys do not
meet in a buildable manner.
Roof Mode
You can click the Roof Plane button to

enter the Roof mode. The child toolbar Gable/Roof Line
above displays. Only the first two buttons on
The Gable/Roof Line tool is used to draw
the child toolbar are roof tools. The rest are
a roof base line that defines the location of a
framing tools.
gable when it is part of a longer bearing wall.
Use the Gable/Roof Line tool to place a
Roof Plane gable within a roof plane.
The Gable/Roof Line tool can also be
Click the Roof Plane button to draw a roof
used to continue a base line to create a con-
plane manually. Double-click the Roof
tinuous hip roof even though there is no wall
Plane button to display the Build Roof below.
dialog and specify the settings for the Auto-
matic Roof Generator.
Manual Roof Editing

Before utilizing the Automatic Roof Genera- 1. First, you can change the shape of the
tor it is important to understand how the roof plane. The shape of a roof plane is
Manual Roof editing tools create and edit edited in 2D just like a CAD polyline.
roof planes. Manual Roof editing tools take 2. Second, you can edit the orientation of
advantage of the parameters of neighboring the roof plane in 3D. As you stretch and
roof planes and walls to partially automate reshape a roof plane in 2D, the program
the process of drawing a roof plan. maintains the 3D orientation of the plane
Creating a roof plane is a simple task. Once you are editing. The location of this
one is created there are two things that you plane can be redefined using the Roof
can do to edit it. Plane Edit dialog. This dialog allows
332
Drawing Roof Planes
you to adjust the location and direction concepts, you understand how to design
Managing
of the roof plane in 3D. almost any kind of roof.
Files
Once you have an understanding of these two
Drawing Roof Planes

The first step in creating a roof plane is draw- cross section, the base line is the point where
Managing
ing the base line. To draw a base line: the outside main layer surface of the wall
Files
would intersect the top of the roof framing
1. Click the Roof Plane button to enter
member.
the Roof mode.
When drawing the base line of a roof plane,
2. In the example below, click and drag a
here are some things to consider:
base line from point 1 to point 2.
3. Click at point 3 to define the upslope 1. A base line does not have to be drawn
direction of the roof plane. over a wall, although it often is.
2. The roof plane overhangs in the downs-
lope direction from the base line.
3. A base line drawn along a wall should
be drawn over the outer edge of the
wall’s main layer. It will try to snap to
Roofs
that.
4. The height of a base line is determined
Once you have clicked at point 3 the roof
by the following formula:
plane is built.
Height of base line = elevation top plate +
The base line (line 1-2) appears with an ups-
the vertical depth of the rafter - the vertical
lope tick in the middle of the line. The ups-
depth of the rafter’s birdsmouth cut.
lope tick point indicates the direction that the
roof plane slopes up to. You cannot redefine The elevation of the top plate is defined by
the direction of the slope. If the upslope tick the ceiling height in the room.
is pointing the wrong direction, delete the 5. If a base line is drawn over the top edge
entire roof plane and begin the process over. of any other roof plane, the base line
Managing
The base line can be used by the program height equals the height of the top edge
Files
as the pivot point for the roof plane. In a of the existing roof plane.
Editing the Shape of Roof Planes

Managing
You can edit the shape of a roof plane the The selected roof plane contains six handles
same way you edit a CAD polyline. and usually one dimension. These can be
Files
Draw a roof plane like the one below and used to reshape it. When you select an edge,
select it by clicking on edge BC. certain capabilities and restrictions are
applied to each handle.
333
The selected edge has a red grip in the mid- return the section to its original location.
dle of the edge. Select this grip and drag to
move the edge parallel to itself.
The edges adjacent to the selected edge will
not move except to extend or contract.
At the center of the roof plane is a red square
grip. This can be used to move the entire roof
section to a new location. Do not use this
grip to move a roof section unless you know
what you are doing. It can be difficult to
Each of the corners have a red grip. Dragging
from a corner grip has different results
depending on which edge was selected.
It is a good idea to work on your roofs,

before you spend too much time
designing your interiors. If you have too
much information in your model when you
are designing roofs, the task can become
more complicated
Dragging the Corners

Below are four diagrams showing how each
corner grip adjusts if the roof is selected on
the BC edge.
3. Select side BC and move A.
1. Select side BC and move corner B.
4. Select side BC and move D.

2. Select side BC and move C.
334
Editing the Shape of Roof Planes
Moving an Edge
Managing
The selected
Files
edge moves
These corners only parallel to
These itself.
corners move in line.
move
freely.
Managing
Edge BC is
Files
the selected
edge.
Click on the edge of a roof plane to select it. 1. Select the roof plane.
If roof planes are adjacent and you select the
wrong one, hit the Tab key until the correct
one is selected.
The selected edge, in this case BC, is the
only edge with a handle at its midpoint. Drag
the midpoint and you can move the selected
edge parallel to itself. The two adjacent
Roofs
edges do not move except to extend or con-
tract. They may diverge or converge if they 2. Click the Break Line tool, then click
are not parallel. on one edge of the roof plane. A new
diamond handle appears in the location
Selecting at a Corner of the new break.
To select a corner, click inside and very near
the corner of the roof plane. If you have
selected the corner correctly, there is a handle
in the middle of each adjacent edge as well as
at the corner. This allows you to move any
corner of the roof plane with no restrictions.
3. Drag any handle to change the shape.
Managing
Add an Edge
Files
To add an edge to a roof plane use the Break
Line function, which appears in the edit
toolbar when you have selected a roof edge.
You can use this tool to divide the edge of a
Managing
rectangular roof plane into two edges.

Files
Following is an example of adding an edge to

a roof plane:
335
4. Release the mouse button. The roof

plane has five sides.
To remove a roof edge, on one of its ends.

Grab the handle that appears at this end
and drag it to the handle at the other end.
Release the mouse button and the edge
is deleted.
Join Roof Planes

Two roof planes can be joined at adjacent at a ridge, hip or valley.
edges using the Join Roof Planes button. If the roof planes are not close enough, or
To use this tool you must first be able to their shape is not correct, they may need to
identify which edges of the roof planes meet be edited so each has an edge which is
at a ridge, hip, or valley. If the planes will not expected to join to the other.
meet, are not coplanar, or do not have equal When the roof planes adjust, the program
pitches, the program does not automate the joins the planes at the proper location and the
process. the program does not join roof adjacent edges are extended or contracted in
planes that are parallel to each other, even if order to remain connected. If the joining of
they are in the same plane. the two will completely eliminate or reverse
Select the first roof plane, on the desired an adjacent edge, the connection cannot be
edge, click the Join Roof Planes button, made. A message displays, informing you of
then select the second roof plane on its the problem.
desired edge. The two planes stretch to meet
336
Align Roof Edges
Align Roof Edges
Managing
Files
Tip: If opposite sides of a roof section are
parallel, selecting one edge automatically
gives you a dimension line. If you do not
see that dimension line, the sides are not
parallel
Managing
After moving a corner handle, it can be diffi- often while manually editing roofs.
Files
cult to make an edge parallel to an eave or a NOTE: In order for the Make Parallel
wall. To square the roof plane up again, button to work, the roof plane edge or CAD
select the edge that is slightly out of align- line that is being adjusted must be within
ment. Click the Make Parallel button, twenty degrees of being parallel or perpen-
which appears when you select an edge of a dicular to the second line or wall edge you
roof plane. Click on a line or wall edge to click on. You can move it that close by eye
which the selected edge should be made par- and then use this tool to make it exact.
allel or perpendicular. This function is used
Change Roof Pitch or Height Dialog
Roofs
1
2 4
5
3
Managing
This warning dialog appears when you have to lower its pitch or height in order to
Files
attempt to snap the corner or an edge of a meet the second roof plane at the corner that
roof plane near another roof plane which you moved.
does not match vertically. The Change Roof
Pitch or Height dialog gives you the option 1 The amount of vertical displacement
between the two roof planes displays.
to move the roof plane vertically, pivot it
2 Pivot Roof Plane About - Select
Managing
about a point and change the pitch, or do which part of the roof plane to use as
Files
nothing at all. Most times you click NO, to pivot point when pitch is adjusted to meet the
do nothing at all. other roof plane.
In this case, the current roof plane would
337
Raise/lower (no pivot) - Select this

3 5 Click NO to leave the roof plane
option to maintain the current pitch and unchanged. The roof planes will not
raise or lower the entire plane to connect the meet vertically. This is the typical choice.
roofs. This may affect plate heights of the
walls below. Always choose NO unless you have a
specific reason to adjust the roof plane
4 Click Yes to make the selected change this way.
so the roofs meet. The roof plane either
changes the pitch or is raised or lowered.
Editing the 3D Orientation

Drawing a roof plane and editing its shape is roof plane. Ridge/Top, Base Line, and
done in 2D. The Roof Plane Edit dialog Fascia Top can all be defined vertically or
defines the 3D orientation of a roof plane. as a pivot point. Pitch determines the slope
There are three height values and one pitch of the roof plane.
value that define the 3D orientation of the
Roof Plane Edit Dialog
1 7
8
2 9
10
3
4
5 11
6
12
To access the Roof Plane Edit dialog, select Item button. You can only access the dia-
a roof plane and click the Open log for one roof plane at a time.
338
Editing the 3D Orientation
Height
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
1 There are four values that define the change it you must move the roof plane some
height, or 3D orientation of a roof other way. For example, if you lock the pitch
plane: Ridge/Top, Base Line, Fascia and then raise the roof plane by one inch, you
Top and Pitch. These values are related. will decrease the birdsmouth depth by one
Select the radio button next to one to lock it, inch.
change another, and the other two change. Birdsmouth is zero if the Trusses check
Locking any one of the first three values box has been selected in the Build Roof dia-
defines that value as the pivot point for the log.
plane. Each of these dimensions is measured
Roofs
from the first floor elevation of 0’-0”.
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
representation of the roof plane. Lock one of
these three values, and change any other and
the roof plane rotates about that point as
shown in the diagram.
Ridge/Top - Define a new value for the
highest point of the selected roof plane. Rafter Depth - Specify the Rafter
Base Line - Define a new base line height.
43
depth for the selected roof plane. The
Fascia top - Define a new height for the default rafter depth for the roof is set in the
fascia top. Framing dialog. If you want to set the rafter
Managing
Pitch - Change the pitch for the selected depth to the default, type a "d" in this field.
Files
roof plane. This overrides the default pitch 4 The Vertical Rafter Depth is
set in the Build Roof dialog. defined by measuring a plumb line
If you lock the pitch and change one of the across the rafter. The degree of pitch affects
other values, the roof plane moves vertically the Vertical rafter width. The greater the
pitch, the greater the vertical rafter depth.
Managing
keeping the same slope. It will not pivot.

5 Top of Plate is shown for reference.
Files
2 Birdsmouth - The plumb or vertical It is defined by the ceiling height for the
depth of the birdsmouth cut is shown
for reference, it cannot be edited directly. To room.
339
Overhang from Base Line is

6 11 Click Material to define a material to
shown for reference, it cannot be edited the selected roof plane.
here. Click Revert to discard any changes
12
in this session.
Options
Square Cut/Plumb Cut - You can
7
specify the rafter tails to be square cut
or plumb cut in this dialog. This overrides
the setting on the Display tab of the Build
Roof dialog.
8 Gutters - Check this to remove gutters
from the selected roof plane.
9 Retain as Edited - Select the check
box to lock the selected roof plane
when rebuilding roofs automatically. If not
checked, this roof plane is discarded and
replaced with a new roof plane.
10 Show Pitch as Degrees - Select
the check box to have the pitch value in
this dialog displayed as degrees.
Roof Planes in Plan View

Following is a portion of a hip roof shown in
1 The eave is represented by a dashed
Plan View: line.
2 The distance from the wall’s outer main
layer to the end of the roof framing is
the overhang. It is defined in the Build
1 Roof dialog.
3 The Base Line of the roof plane is
located over the outer main layer of the
2 wall. Typically the line is displayed as green.
3 When you use the Automatic Roof Genera-
tor, the program constructs the base lines.
4
The base line is defined as the line, across the
top of the rafters, directly above a wall’s out-
5 side main layer. It can be used as pivot for
the roof plane as you alter the pitch.
4 This is the upslope mark. It marks
the “up” direction for this roof plane.
340
Roof Planes in Plan View
The angle of the slope is controlled by the Roof planes are drawn on System
5
Managing
pitch that is defined in the Build Roof dia- Layer 10. Each roof plane is a closed
log. polyline.
Files
Locating Roof Plane Intersections
When roof planes, sloping in different direc- Once you know the location where roof
Managing
tions, meet they create a ridge, a hip, or a val- planes meet, you can create the entire roof
Files
ley. The Automatic Roof Generator makes plan on your own.
these connections automatically or you can To have the program help you locate the roof
locate them manually. plane intersection points:
When you are creating and editing roof 1. Select Roof Plane 1. (The first plane that
planes manually, the program can place snap you select should be higher or at least
points at intersections to help you connect equal in height to the other roof.)
roof planes accurately in 3D.
Roofs
2. Click on an edge of the either Roof 6. To align line AC with line BD select
Plane 2 or 3 that if extended would inter- Roof Plane 3 by the edge AC. Select
Managing
sect Roof Plane 1. The program places a corner C and drag it to point D. Select
Files
red “X” at the spot that the edge meets Roof Plane 3 once again. Select corner
the roof plane. If the two roof planes lie A and drag it to point B.
at right angles to each other, the intersec- 7. To align CE with DF repeat these steps
tion point indicates where the valley or for Roof Plane 2 and points D and F.
hip begins.
Managing
3. Select side AX and point B is created.

Files
4. Click on side CY and point D is created.

5. Click on edge EZ and point F is created.
341
Automatic Roof Generator

Build Roof Dialog
1 6
2
3 7
4 8
5 9
10
12
11
13
The Build Roof dialog is used to automati- wise, the existing roof planes are discarded
cally model roof planes. and new roof planes are modeled.
1 Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings - 3 Make New Roof Baselines - Select
Select the check box to construct the the check box to delete any existing
floor and ceiling platforms of your model. It roof and to create roof baselines (based on
is independent of Build Roof Planes. the exterior wall layout and roof information
defined in those walls). Roof baselines can
The first time you generate a 3D View, then be edited to customize the roof plan in
walls, floors and ceilings are automatically
the same way that CAD polylines are.
built. After that it is up to you to specify the
action. You can quickly initiate the process 4 Use Existing Roof Baselines -
by clicking the Rebuild Walls/Floors/ Select the check box to model a roof
Ceiling button on the toolbar or plan based on your edited roof baselines
checking Auto Rebuild Walls/ instead of the exterior wall layout.
Floors/Ceilings on the Include tab of
the 3D Preferences dialog.
5 Build Fascia, Gutters - Select the
check box to regenerate the fascia and
gutters. Often you need to select only this
Build Roof Planes - Select the check
2 option to clean up roof planes that have been
box to model a new roof structure over edited. This function is automatically
the entire model. Unless you specify other- invoked after you manually edit roof planes
342
or draw new roof planes if you check Auto select the unwanted roof plane and delete it.
Managing
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings on the
Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. Once a roof is correct, do not build roof
Files
planes again. From that point forward,
Gutters and fascia display in the 3D Views only Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings to keep
and also appear in the Material List. If you the plan updated.
do not want gutters built, open the Build
Roof dialog, select Build Fascia, Gutters 8 Check Trusses to have the roof raised
Managing
and then clear Supply Gutters on the Dis- so that the bottom edge of the truss’ top
Files
play tab. The fascia is rebuilt but not the gut- chord (rafter) will be flush with the top of the
ters. Any existing gutters are deleted. wall. You must Build Roof Planes after
To delete a gutter for a specific roof plane, checking Trusses for this change to take
effect.
select the roof plane. Click the Open Item Incorrect--Trusses
button to display the Roof Plane Edit dialog. is not checked.
Clear Gutters and click OK.
The next time Build Fascia, Gutters is
selected, the gutter does not appear. If you
delete a roof plane, the fascia and gutter Correct--Trusses
remain in 3D Views until you rebuild roof is checked.
planes.
Roofs
6 Lock Roof Planes to lock the exist-
ing roof plan. This prevents acciden-
tally selecting Build Roof Planes and
When Trusses is checked, the size of the
having the roof rebuilt, resulting in the loss
roof rafter framing is the Top Chord size
of manual editing.
from the Trusses tab in the Framing dialog.
When Lock Roof Planes is selected,
selecting Build Roof Planes results in an
error message warning that roofs are locked.
You must clear Lock Roof Planes before
you can select Build Roof Planes.
To prevent the accidental deletion or moving
Managing
of roof planes in a Plan or 3D View, lock the
Files
Roof Planes System layer 10 in the Layers
dialog.
7 Check Retain Manually Built If Trusses is checked, the Top
Roof Planes and/or Retain Edited Chord size is used for framing.
Roof Planes to retain those roof planes
Managing
when the roof plan is rebuilt. They will not

When Trusses is cleared, the size of the
Files
be deleted, but an automatic roof plane is

roof framing is the Rafter size from the
superimposed in the same area. You must
Roof tab the Framing dialog. If trusses are
laid out without selecting the Trusses box,
343
the roof will use the rafter size instead. The Roof Overhang - The overhang is
11
“Incorrect” diagram displays this problem. measured from the exterior main layer
surface to the end of the top of the rafter in a
horizontal line. It does not include fascia
thickness or gutters, sheathing or siding.
Normal is the overhang at the eaves.
Gable is the overhang dimension at gable
ends or rake walls.
12 Curved Roof Plane Angle - Enter
the radial dimension for each plane of
roof. Set at 15 d, it uses 24 roof planes to roof
over a complete circle.
If Trusses is NOT checked, the 13 Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum
Rafter size is used for framing width of an alcove which is noticed by
the Automatic Roof Generator. Any alcove
less than the specified width, along an exte-
rior wall, are treated as though the exterior
Raise Off Plate -Enter a positive wall continues straight across. Alcoves that
9 measure wider than this value are not roofed
value in this field to model the trusses
with an energy heel to allow for more insula- over. They cause a change in roof planes.
tion. The dimension is measured from the top Following is an example showing this differ-
plate, up the outside main layer of the wall, ence. On the left, a 36" deep alcove requires
to the bottom side of the top chord. a change in the roof line. Each wall of the
alcove has an eave. On the right, the alcove is
If trusses is not checked, and Raise Off less than the 36" minimum, so the roof
Plate is set to zero, the program
passes right over it.
generates a birdsmouth cut. To eliminate
the birdsmouth cut, you must set Raise
Off Plate to at least 1/16” (1 mm)
Pitch - Enter a value to describe the

10
9
pitch in a ratio over 12. This affects all
newly built roof planes. It does not update
existing roof planes.
344
Display Tab
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
Files
3 5
Show all ridges - Select the check ters. Select each check box in this section
1
box to display a line along all ridges that applies.
and valleys in elevations and 3D Views. This
includes the hip ridges between roof planes
forming the curved roof above a curved wall.
2 Boxed eaves - Select the check box
Roofs
if you want the program to produce hor-
izontal soffits at the eaves. This change
appears only after you have rebuilt roof
planes.
3 Square Cut or Plumb Cut - Select
either option to determine how the
rafter tails are cut. This change appears only
after you have rebuilt roofs. Individual roof
planes can have this defined in their own
Roof Plane Edit dialog.
114 Fascia Width (at gable or rake walls),
Managing
Eave Fascia Width - Enter values to
Files
define the width of the material that appears
in 3D Views. This value does not go to the
Material List.
Supply
Managing
5 This section defines whether or not

Files
these items are calculated for the Mate-

rial List. Selecting the check box does not
control the display in 3D except for Gut-
345
Material Tab
2
2 Click Select Material to open the
Material to the Roof, the Fascia, the Ceil- Select Material dialog.
ing, and the Skylight frame.
3 The assigned material displays here.
1 Select the item that you want to define These Material definitions go to the
the material. Material List, and affect how the surface
appears in both 3D and Render Views.
Roof Styles
1 5
2 6
3 7
4
The type of roof built is defined on the Roof tion dialog. Click the Roof tab to specify the
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. Hip roof information.
roofs are generated over all exterior walls by
default. Any roof style other than a hip Group select and change multiple walls
simultaneously. Select the first wall, then
requires roof information to be specified in
the wall. To specify the roof information, you hold down the Shift key and click on
additional walls. Then click the Open
must select the wall(s) and click the Open
Item button to open the Wall Specifica- Item button.
346
Roof Styles
Full Gable wall - Select the check

1
Managing
box to create a gable roof over the
entire wall. This places a ridge over the mid-
Files
dle of the wall.
2 High Shed/Gable - Select this check
box for the wall under the high side of a
shed roof. It can produce ridges, but it may
Managing
also be used for gable ends that have a raked
Files
wall.
3 Knee wall - Select the check box to
define an interior wall whose height is
defined by the roof plane, not the ceiling
height.
4 Extend slope downward - Select
this to have the roof plane extend over a
bumpout, instead of creating a hip.
5 Pitch - Enter a value here if the pitch
of the selected roof plane(s) does not
match the default roof pitch for the structure.
6 2nd pitch - Select the check box to
Roofs
define a roof plane with two pitches.
Use this tool to create Gambrel roofs.
7 Starts at - If you check 2nd pitch,
you must define the height at which the
second pitch starts. You may need to create a
Section/Elevation View to find this height.
Normally hip roof planes are built over

bay, bow, and box windows. You cannot
edit the wall segments making up these
windows as described above. You may
Managing
select one of the windows and open the
Files
Bay Window Specification dialog or
the Bow Window Specification dialog.
There you will have several roof
generation options.
Managing
Files
347
Hip Roofs
By default hip roofs are built over all exterior wall with a Hip roof, make sure all Options
walls. Hip roofs can be applied equally to all check boxes are cleared on the Roof tab of
walls without causing conflict. To define a the Wall Specification dialog.
Gable Roofs
A gable roof, with a ridge is modeled if the 3. Click the Open Item button to open
two opposite walls, or roof line segments, are the Wall Specification dialog.
defined as Full Gable Wall in the Roof tab 4. On the Roof tab select the Full Gable
of the Wall Specification dialog. Wall check box. Be sure both walls are
1. Draw four walls to create a one room specified the same.
house. Defining the pitch for a Full Gable wall has
2. Select the two end walls (shown solid no effect.
for visibility).
High Shed/Gable Wall

The High Shed/Gable wall is often inter- Shed/Gable wall, the building is modeled
changeable with Full Gable Wall, but with a shed roof. The middle High Shed/
should be used when rake walls are desired. Gable wall will be the tall side.
If three adjacent walls are defined as High
348
Roof Styles
Knee Walls
Managing
A knee wall is an interior wall on an upper ceiling height.
Files
floor whose height is defined by the roof The program only considers a wall to be a
plane. A Knee wall is shorter than the knee wall if it is on the interior of a structure.
defined ceiling height for a room. Its height Knee walls are usually found in top floor
is defined by the roof plane above it, not the attic areas.
Managing
Extend Slope Downward
Files
Select the Extend Slope Downward In the picture below, the outer alcove wall
check box to extend a roof plane over a bum- has the Extend Slope Downward check
pout. The two connecting walls, that create box selected. The two short connecting walls
the bumpout must be specified as Full Gable have the Full Gable wall check box
walls. selected.
Roofs
Before After
Specifying Pitch
Any exterior wall can define the pitch of the
Managing
roof plane built above it in the Roof tab of
the Wall Specification dialog.
Files
If the Pitch value is followed by a (D) the
value is the default pitch for the entire build-
ing. The default pitch is set in the Build Roof
dialog. The minimum pitch is ¼” in 12" or
Managing
20 mm in 1000 mm. If a roof plane is speci-

Files
fied with two pitches, this type-in box con-

trols the lower pitch.
349
Roof Planes with Two Pitches
1 2
3
2nd Pitch - Select the check box if 3. Generate a Section/Elevation of the

1
you want the roof plane above this wall house, including the roof plane which
to have two pitches. will have the second slope defined.
Both the Pitch and Starts at boxes are 4. Toggle into CAD mode. Draw a vertical
grayed out until the 2nd Pitch check box or horizontal line which intersects the
has been selected. roof at the point you want the second
The 2nd Pitch is the upper pitch of the roof pitch to start.
plane. 5. Select the End-to-End Dimension
Define the slope of the 2nd Pitch. button and drag a dimension line, from
2
Starts at - Specify the place to start the first floor 0’-0” to the intersection of
3 the line and the roof to determine the
the 2nd pitch. The height value is mea-
sured above zero (default floor height of first elevation at which to start the second
floor) at which it begins. pitch. Close the Cross Section View.
You can determine this height from a Sec- 6. Define a 2nd pitch and enter the correct
tion/Elevation view as follows: elevation in the proper walls. Rebuild
Walls/Floors/Ceilings and Build Roof
1. Create the house the desired size.
Planes.
2. Generate the roof using only the first
Examples of roof style using two pitches are
pitch. Be sure to define all the roof infor-
mansard, gambrel, gull wing and half-hip
mation properly for each wall, gable,
roofs.
hip, different first pitch, etc.
350
Editing Roof Baselines
Roof Baselines
Managing
Files
Typically, the program models the roof plan of the main layer of the exterior walls.
based on settings in the Build Roofs dialog Once they are created, Roof Baselines can
as well as the layout of the exterior walls and have their shape changed. When reshaped,
any roof information defined in those walls. new roofs built from these roof baselines will
If you want a roof plan that does not follow follow the new shape even if that shape no
Managing
the footprint of your building, you can use longer follows the exterior walls.
Files
automatically generated Roof Baselines Just as roof information may be defined in
to lay out the roof plan. individual walls, roof information may be
You must use the Automatic Roof Generator defined in each Roof Baseline edge. When
to create the roof baselines. Select the Build roofs are built from the Roof Baselines,
Roof Planes and Make New Roof the settings in the roof baselines will override
Baselines check boxes in the Build Roof the settings in the corresponding walls.
dialog. Click OK. The automatic roof build- To create the new roof based on the modified
ing process stops before actually building the Roof Baselines, check Use Existing
roof planes. A continuous set of Roof Roof Baselines in the Build Roof dialog.
Baselines is created along the outside edge
Roofs
Editing Roof Baselines
Roof baselines may be edited and used as edge by which you selected the roof baseline.
the basis for the generation of a new roof In addition to length and direction, each seg-
plan. They may be reshaped in 2D like CAD ment of a roof baseline has embedded roof
polylines. Like walls, each edge can have information that the program uses when
roof information defined in them. When modeling roof planes. Each edge can contain
edited, attached Roof Baselines will all stay its own roof settings.
at the same baseline height. If roof planes This roof information may be displayed
exist at more than one baseline height, each along the roof baseline edges. To display the
height will generate its own set of Roof embedded roof pitch and roof style, select
Managing
Baselines. the Roof Info check box in the Line Style
Files
Roof baselines will always form a closed dialog.
area. They cannot be severed, but may have Roof style abbreviations used are:
additional joints or corners added.
• V -vertical
1. Select the roof baseline by one edge. • G -gable/shed
2. Click the Open Item button to open • K - kneewall
Managing
the Edit CAD Item dialog. • L - lower (extend slope downward)

Files
3. Select the Roof Info button to edit the

selected segment of the roof baseline.
The settings in the dialog apply only to the
351
Using Roof Baselines

For a simple example of roof baseline edit- 1. Select the roof baseline by the bottom
ing, consider an L-shaped house, with a rect- segment.
angular roof. The inner part of the ’L’ is a 2. Click the Fillet Lines button on the
patio that is covered under the same roof. Edit toolbar.
3. Click on the leftmost segment to fillet
the two lines.
4. A message box appears informing you
that “The system must delete interven-
ing lines (those on the inside of the L) to
join the two selected lines”. Click OK.
5. You should see the roof line shown in
the right side.
6. Open the Build Roof dialog and select
the Build Roof Planes and Use
The left side shows the roof baseline as it Existing Roof Baseline check boxes
was originally produced and the roof plan it to model the roof plan shown in the pic-
creates. ture.
To model the roof plan shown on the right:
Gable/Roof Line Tool

The Gable/Roof Line tool is used to draw The Gable/Roof Line can also be used to
a roof base line that defines the location of a continue a base line to create a continuous
gable when it is part of a longer bearing wall. hip roof even though there is no wall below.
Use the Gable/Roof Line tool to place a For example, your house may have a large
gable within a roof plane, as in the case of a alcove and you want the roof plane to extend
dormer. across the alcove, rather than wrap into the
alcove. A gable line drawn across the alcove,
If an entire wall supports a gable end, the
inline with the wall main layer, causes the
wall is defined as a Full Gable wall. If only a
alcove to be ignored for roof calculations.
portion of the wall is gabled, then the Gable/
The program models a hip in that area.
Roof Line tool is used to draw the line
defining the width of the gable or dormer.
352
Gable/Roof Line Tool
Dormers
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Original gable line Replicated Copies
Gable lines are NOT used to define an Following is a close up view of a gable cre-
entire wall as a gable wall. If the entire wall ated using the Gable/Roof Line tool.
is a gable wall, define it as Full Gable Wall Notice that the ends of the gable line align
in the Roof tab of the Wall Specification with the point where the gable valley inter-
dialog. sects the roof base line.
You can break a wall and define only part of
it as being gable. If you use this method,
once the roof is correct and locked, you
should restore the wall as being continuous.
Chief Architect functions better if long walls
Roofs
are single units rather than being made up of Another application of the Gable/Roof
multiple short sections of wall.
Line tool is to generate a gable roof on an
The Gable/Roof Line tool allows you to “L”-shaped house.
place a line beyond a wall to specify where a
The Gable/Roof Line tool can be used to
gable roof should be built. This eliminates
create roof lines in areas not laid out with
the need to break walls and later join them.
walls or railings. A base line drawn across
Gable lines should be outside the wall,
space generates a hip roof. If several roof
within the first 18" (450 mm). If the gable
lines are combined, they must be attached to
line is placed on the wall it will not work.
each other in order to automaticall produce
Position a Gable/Roof Line of the correct one set of roof baselines. Both ends of the
length to represent the portion of wall above
Managing
base line(s) must meet a wall at the main
which supports a gable roof. Since the gable layer for them to produce roof planes. The
Files
line is a CAD line, it can be selected and following shows several applications for roof
modified using the Edit CAD Item dialog. lines. In this, the free ends of each line or
Length and position can be specified with polyline reach the wall main layer, except for
dimensions typed in this dialog. the line that makes the normal gable.
Managing
The Edit CAD Item dialog also allows you

to make multiple copies at defined incre-
Files
ments, as is shown in the above illustration.

The leftmost gable line was created, then 5
copies were made at 6’ increments.
353
To have hip roof ignore alcove.

To have hip roof ignore inside corner.
For cantilever.
For normal gable.
For cantilever.
For cantilever.
Gable Dormer over Windows & Doors

If a window or an exterior door is selected, cally delete the old gable line if it is still near
the Gable Over Window button displays. the window. If the window has been relo-
Click this to produce a gable line over the cated dramatically, you must select the old
selected window or door. The gable line, run- gable line and delete it yourself.
ning along the outside of the wall twelve A gable line will produce a gable only in an
inches out, will generate a gable dormer in area where an eave would otherwise appear.
this location, the next time roofs are built. If a gable is already present then the auto-
When automatic roofs are subsequently built matic roof generator may produce the Can-
a small gable dormer will appear over the not produce a roof section error
window or door. Once produced, the gable message and fail to produce some roof planes
line can be moved, have its length changed properly. If this is the case, select the gable
and can be edited like any other roof line. line and delete it.
If you move or resize the window, the gable Gable Over Window will also place a
line will not update automatically. You can gable over a group of selected windows and
produce a new gable line, by using the Gable doors, provided they are all in the same wall
Over Window button. This will automati- and contain no bay or bow windows.
354
Skylights
Skylights
Managing
Files
A skylight or other hole in a roof plane can tained by its roof plane. If you clear the Sky-
be created by selecting Build> Roof> Sky- light check box in the Roof Hole
light from the menu and drawing a rectangu- Specification dialog, the curb for the sky-
lar polyline entirely bounded by a single roof light will be removed and the opening will
plane. Select the skylight and use the Open remain.
Managing
Item button to open the Roof Hole Speci- The hole can be removed from the roof plane
Files
fication dialog. by simply selecting and deleting it. If the
roof plane is deleted, its holes will delete
with it.
1 The system maintains the opening as a closed
polyline. The Break Line tool will form a
2 joint in an edge of the roof opening just as it
would in a roof plane edge, but will not sever
the edges at the joint.
2 Angle for inside hole - Defines the
shape of the skylight well.
Square Sides - The framing for the sky-
Roofs
light is square to the pitch of the roof.
1 The Skylight check box will be Plumb Sides - The framing for the skylight
selected.
is plumb.
The polyline that defines the shape of the
skylight can be moved and reshaped as Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is
would any polyline, but it must remain con- plumb, the top edge is square.
Ceiling Planes
Choose Build> Roof> Ceiling Planes to edge of the main layer, or on the main
access the tool for creating custom sloped layer edge away from the room into
Managing
ceilings. Ceiling planes are underneath which the ceiling will extend.
Files
and separate from the roof planes. They act 2. This base line would be in the same
independent of the roof planes above. location as you would draw a roof plane
A custom sloped ceiling plane can be pro- if it were necessary. This allows the
duced as you would a manually drawn roof joists comprising the ceiling plane to
plane. All of the instructions for drawing and pass over the wall so as to be supported
Managing
editing roof planes apply to ceiling planes. by it.

Files
1. When drawing a new ceiling plane that 3. Do not draw the base line on the inside
will extend into the house or over a edge of the wall.
room, draw the base line at the exterior
355
4. Normally their pitch should be less than Room, cleared in the Room Specifica-
that of the corresponding roof plane. tion dialog.
5. Often they are used in conjunction with 9. Ceiling planes can be joined together
roof trusses. with each other exactly like roof planes.
6. Like roof planes, ceiling planes must
extend over the walls where they are Skylights and Ceiling Planes
supported. Skylights automatically cut holes in all roof
7. While the “eave”, or low edge of a ceil- planes. Skylights do not cut holes in flat ceil-
ing plane should extend over its support- ings that are produced with the Rebuild
ing wall, the sloping sides normally butt Walls/Floors/Ceilings option. If you spec-
up to the wall's interior main layer, and ify No ceiling over this room, and draw a
not extend across it. custom ceiling plane with a pitch of 0 in 12,
8. Ceiling planes should be created over skylights will produce a hole in the custom
rooms that have Ceiling Over this ceiling plane, the same size as the skylight.
You will have to draw your own walls in the
attic to create the skylight well.
Ceiling Plane Example
Shallow roof plane drawn manually (dark lines).

Main, exterior roof at steeper pitch.
Roof underside
Ceiling underside.
Cross Section through

roof with ceiling planes.
Here is an example of a steeper pitched were placed.
(12:12) exterior roof with a shallow pitched
(6:12) cathedral ceiling inside. The shallower Use the Layers dialog to lock the Roof
pitched ceiling planes are drawn manually, Planes layer or turn off its display when
with the base line drawn along the outside working with ceiling planes. When not
working with roof or ceiling planes, their
edge of the wall. The ceiling plane would
layers, CAD 10 mm and 11, should remain
normally cover the entire room, but the illus- locked to prevent modification.
tration was left incomplete to show how they
356
Restoring Roof Defaults
Restoring Roof Defaults
Managing
Files
Once roof information is specified in the wall To return a roof plane to the default settings,
or automatically produced roof baselines, it you must clear all of the check boxes on the
is saved until you edit the information. Every Roof tab of the Wall Specification dialog
time you Build Roof Planes from the and type a "d" to replace any numeric value
Build Roof dialog, the information is refer- with the default value.
Managing
enced. If the information needs to be edited, In the Roof tab of the Wall Specification
Files
there are a couple of options available. dialog the following will be true:
Any individual wall, or roof line segment, • If the pitch is not followed by a (D), the
can be defined with default settings, or re- pitch has been set individually for that
defined with new roof information, by wall.
changing the information defined in the Roof • To restore any numeric value defined in
tab of the Wall Specification dialog or in the the Build Roof dialog, replace the pitch
Roof Info section of the Edit CAD Item
value with the letter "d". Click the Tab key
dialog for the roof line.
and you will see the value reestablished.
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings
Roofs
Floor and ceiling platforms do not move or
resize when walls are moved or room floor
and ceiling heights are changed. They must
be rebuilt with the Rebuild Walls/Floors/
Ceilings button. If you make a change to
your plan that would require the floors and
ceilings to be rebuilt, the system will detect
it. The next time you display a 3D View or
Section/Elevation floors and ceilings will be
rebuilt.
If you do not want the program to automati-
Managing
cally rebuild floors and ceilings, clear the
Files
Auto Rebuild Floors & Ceilings check
box on the Include tab of the 3D Prefer-
ences dialog.
Managing
Files
357
358
Chapter 19:
Joists & Rafters
Managing
Joists &
Rafters
Files
Managing
Files
General Information
Joists and rafters are represented in Plan 1. Before building any framing, you should
View by 2D CAD items that are essentially review the settings defined on all of the
long thin rectangles. These can be moved tabs of the Framing dialog.
Managing
and resized like boxes. Platform framing,
Files
2. If you modify your plan, move walls,
roof framing and wall framing can be pro- raise or lower platforms or redesign the
duced manually or automatically. You will roof, you must Rebuild
probably use a mix of both types, creating
Wall/Floors/Ceilings and also
the framing for roof planes and floor plat-
regenerate automatically produced fram-
forms with automatically produced framing,
ing.
and then manually moving or adding items to
complete the framing. When you regenerate the framing, all auto-
matically produced framing items and any
There are two types of framing in Chief
copies made of them are deleted and new
Architect: Manual and Automatic.
framing is calculated. Any manually drawn
Manual framing members are produced by framing items and copies of those are
dragging a new framing member just like
Joists &
retained.
Rafters
drawing a wall. Click the Roof tool and If your floor plans are not final, do not spend
select the appropriate framing button from a lot of time altering or copying automati-
the child toolbar ( ). Once the cally produced framing items. It is best to
tool is active, drag to draw a framing mem- wait until your design is final before doing
ber. any detailed framing work.
Automatic framing is produced by select- Roof Trusses are covered in Chapter 20,
ing the various Build Framing check boxes (see “Roof Trusses” on page 379.)
on the appropriate tabs of the Framing dia-
log. Drawing Framing Members
Framing layout is dependent on the current Framing can be drawn in both CAD mode
model and the model is dependent on the and Architectural mode. To draw a framing
Libraries
Symbol
framing settings. Because of their relation- member using CAD mode, select CAD>
ship the following items must be remem- Special> Framing from the menu (or click
bered:
the Framing button which displays on the
359
Box child toolbar.) the same location unless you zoom very
close to the center of the framing member.
Once in Framing mode, produce a fram-
The cursor changes to a two-headed arrow
ing item by dragging as you would a line or a
when over a Resize handle. It changes to a
wall. A framing item will initially be 1 1/2
four-headed arrow when over the Move han-
inches (38mm) thick. The depth is deter-
dle.
mined by the settings in the Framing dialog
for the current platform. To change the length by dragging:
You can draw a framing member in Plan 1. Select the framing member by clicking
View or Section/Elevation View. If you are in on the end you wish to drag. A handle
Plan View, the framing member is drawn on will appear at that end.
the platform above. If you are drawing in a 2. Drag the handle to resize the length. The
Framing Detail, the framing member is length can be changed more easily in the
placed in the wall beyond. Edit CAD Item dialog.
Because of the difficulty selecting a handle,
Resizing Framing Members it is easier to change the width of a framing
You can change the length or thickness of member in the Edit Cad Item dialog as fol-
any framing member just as you would any lows:
CAD box, by selecting it and dragging from 1. Select the framing member and click the
the appropriate handle.
Open Item button to open the Edit
You may wish to zoom in on the framing CAD Item dialog.
member to be able to select the desired han-
dle. 2. Set Width - Select the check box and
enter the width of the framing member.
There are three handles very close together at
the center of the item; a Resize handle in the 3. Framing Depth - Select the check box
middle of each edge, and a Move handle at and enter a value to define the depth of
the center of the framing member. Some- the framing member.
times the program will locate the Move han- 4. Framing Top - Select the check box
dle off to one side for easier access. and enter a value to define the height at
Due to the narrowness of the framing mem- which the framing member will be
ber, all three handles are approximately in
360
Framing in the Material List
located. This value is in relation to the form that contains it. This will be the plat-
Managing
first floor elevation. form that displays for the current floor. For
the first floor, this is the ceiling over the first
Files
floor, or the second floor platform. To draw
framing for the first floor subfloor, the foun-
dation (.pl0) plan must be active.
Joists are edited just like manually drawn
Managing
framing members.
Files
Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters have
their own layers. Proper layer assignment
will maximize display and materials
flexibility.
Managing
Rafters
Files
Rafters are different than joists, in that, in
addition to having a size specified, the pro-
gram also references the Build Roof dialog
to make sure they are placed at the proper
pitch and elevation to fit under the roof
plane.
To draw a rafter, select Build> Structure>
Rafters from the menu, or click the
Joists Rafters button that appears on the Roof
child toolbar. The rafter will have its height,
Ceiling and floor joists can be manually
Joists &
depth and pitch set so that it fits under the
Rafters
drawn as well. To draw a ceiling joist, select
roof plane that contains it. Rafters are edited
Build> Structure> Joist from the menu, or
just like framing members, except that you
click the Joist button that appears in the cannot set the height. If a rafter is moved, its
Roof child toolbar. height and slope are automatically reset to fit
The height and depth of the joist will be under the roof plane at its new position.
defined so that it fits the floor or ceiling plat-
Framing in the Material List

Each framing item created in the model is 1. If no framing has been produced in the
counted in the Material List. This list is as model, then the amount of framing that
Managing
accurate as the framing in the plan that pro- would be produced is estimated as accu-
Files
duces it. rately as possible. Total lineal footage

It is important to note that the Material List for various depths of rafter and joist
can be produced two ways.
361
material is given, rather than a quantity 1. If no roof framing items are found, an
of specific lumber lengths and sizes. estimation is done.
2. If framing items exist, then the framing 2. If even one rafter is created, the program
members are counted instead of esti- assumes roof framing has been produced
mated for the Material List. and the Material List produces a count
Roof framing is treated the same way. of the rafters found in the model.
Framing in Section/Elevation Views

Framing items can appear in Section/Eleva- of the 3D Preferences dialog. (see “Include
tions and 3D views. In a Section/Elevation Tab” on page 89.)
view, framing items that are cut by the cross Framing items cannot be moved or edited in
section plane appear as boxes containing an the Section/Elevation Views or 3D Views.
’X’. All editing of platform and roof framing
You must have the desired framing types set items must be done in Plan View or a Fram-
to display in 3D views in order to see the ing detail view.
cross boxes. These are set in the Include tab
Automatically Produced Joists and Rafters

Joists and rafters may be automatically pro- 1. Selecting the Trusses check box in the
duced by the program to fill the ceiling plat- Build Roof dialog before modeling the
forms, floor platforms and roof planes. These roof planes.
are generated by selecting the Build Fram- 2. Draw and position all roof trusses before
ing check box on the appropriate tab in the using the automatic framing generator to
Framing dialog. Automatically produced produce rafters and ceiling joists. For
joists have the height and depth defined by more information see “Drawing
the settings on these same tabs. The top of Trusses” on page 380.
floor joists are set below the Floor height by
Some important things to remember are:
a distance equal to the subfloor sheathing
thickness. The sheathing thickness is set on 1. The program will not produce rafters
the Floor tab of the Framing dialog. and joists that are parallel to a roof truss
closer than 14 inches (350mm) to the
Rafters and Trusses truss.
If you plan to mix roof trusses with rafters 2. Rafters and joists will not cross a truss,
and/or ceiling joists, save time laying out but will generate from the eave inward
framing by: until they butt into a truss.
3. Rafters and hip ridges can pass over a
drop hip truss. See graphic on page 393.
362
Framing Reference Markers
4. Lookouts can pass over a reduced gable below the top plate of the supporting
Managing
truss. See graphic on page 387. wall, forcing a birdsmouth cut in the
rafter. If the truss has been raised to pro-
Files
5. When the program creates rafters paral-
lel to trusses, it places the top of the vide space for insulation, the rafter may
rafter in line with the top of the truss. not need to be cut at all. But if the truss
Since the depth of a rafter is normally is raised too much, the rafter may not
greater than that for a truss's top chord, rest on the top plate at all.
Managing
this causes the lower rafter edge to be
Files
Framing Reference Markers
Framing Reference Markers are refer- 2. Click the Point button, and double-
ence points set by the user that tell the pro-
Managing
click in Plan View to produce a new
gram how to lay out automatically produced
Files
point. The Move Point dialog will open.
framing. Layout for wall, ceiling and floor
3. Select the Absolute Location check
framing will be started from the closest
box and enter 0 in each of the X Dis-
Framing Reference Marker as measured
tance and Y Distance boxes.
from the center of the area to be framed.
If no Framing Reference Marker is found on 4. Click OK and the point will be moved to
the floor being framed, the closest Framing the (0, 0) location.
Reference Marker on the first floor is used. Typically, this point is not near the floor plan.
Normally a single Framing Reference It is a good idea to place at least one Framing
Marker on the first floor plan is used for the Reference Marker on the first floor.
entire house.
Wall framing and automatically produced Setting Framing Reference
Joists &
Rafters
floor joists are always positioned by the pro- Markers
gram using the Framing Reference Marker.
To place a Framing Reference Marker:
You can elect not to use the Framing Refer-
ence Marker for positioning rafters and ceil- 1. Click the Text tool.Then click the
ing joists in the Framing dialog. Marker tool. (Or select Tools> Text>
The reasons to do this are discussed under Marker.)
the Floor Framing Tab on page 345 and Roof
2. Click in Plan View to place the marker.
Tab on page 350.
The Enter Marker Text dialog will dis-
If no Framing Reference Markers exist in play.
your plan, the point at 0, 0 is used as the
3. Choose Framing Reference as the
Framing Reference Marker location.
Managing
marker type.
To find this point:
Files
4. If desired, enter text to display above the

1. Toggle to CAD mode in Plan View.
marker line in Plan View. If left blank,
no text will display.
363
5. Click OK. The Framing Reference To move a group of framing items to a Fram-
Marker will appear in the plan. A corner ing Reference marker, you must:
of the first framing member will snap to 1. Group select the framing items.
this point and all other framing members
will be laid out from there. 2. Click the Move to Framing Ref but-
Framing Reference Markers will snap to ton that appears in the Edit toolbar.
CAD items first, and then to a wall main 3. The framing members will be moved to
layer surface or corner if possible. One way the nearest Framing Reference Marker.
to accurately position a marker is to position
The Move to Framing Ref button refer-
a CAD point first, then create the marker on
ences the on center spacing distance when it
top of it.
positions a joist relative to the Framing Ref-
A Framing Reference Marker can be moved erence Marker. The first Joist will be this dis-
by selecting it and dragging from the handle tance from the Reference marker.
that appears. When moved, the marker will
The spacing that will be used for moving any
snap to a CAD point, a wall main layer, or a
framing item can be viewed by selecting the
corner.
item and double-clicking on the Multiple
Using Framing References Copy button. The Copy Layout Dis-
tances dialog that displays will show the
Manually drawn joists, rafters, trusses
spacing for each framing item type. The ini-
and studs can be moved to a Framing
tial spacing for floor and ceiling joists
Reference Marker.
depends on the platform containing them.
Any selected group of framing items that are The default spacing for a platform is set in
all parallel to each other can be moved using the Framing dialog. A spacing specific to a
the Move to Framing Ref button. These particular floor or ceiling platform is set in a
should have the proper spacing relative to Joist Direction Line contained within the
each other before the move. Only one of the platform. see “Joist Direction Line” on page
items is compared to the Framing Reference 365.
and moved. The remaining items are simply
moved the same amount as the first item.
Bearing Line
The Bearing Line tool can be accessed jog and be drawn in segments as a polyline.
from the Roof child toolbar or by selecting Bearing lines will snap to the center of
Build> Structure> Bearing Line. nearby walls or beams when framing is built.
Once the mode is active you can draw a The illustration of a single bearing line and
Bearing line just like you would draw a line of a polyline bearing line demonstrate the
or a wall. It can be one straight line, or it can
364
Joist Direction Line
effect on Automatic Framing.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
If a Bearing Line exists the program will lap platform. A platform can be split into two
Files
or butt the joist and/or rafters over the line, with a Bearing Line. Then the joist direction
depending on the option selected in the and/or depth can be specified on each side of
Framing dialog. For more information see the Bearing Line. Each new platform takes
“Floor Framing Tabs” on page 370. on properties given by the Joist Direction
A Bearing Line should start outside the floor Line it contains, as described below.
or ceiling platform and end outside of it,
Always Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
passing completely through the building.
and build framing after drawing the
A Bearing Line can also be used to change Bearing Line in order to update the model
the direction of joist and/or rafter layout in a using the new information.
Joists &
Rafters
Joist Direction Line
The Joist Direction tool can be accessed depth and spacing for the platform that con-
from the Roof child toolbar or by selecting tains it.
Build> Structure> Joist Direction. Once The text along the Joist Direction Line gives
the mode is active you can draw a Joist the joist size and spacing for the platform.
Direction Line just like you would draw a Unless redefined in the individual Joist
CAD line or a wall. Direction Line, these values reflect the set-
tings specified on the appropriate tab of the
A Joist Direction Line defines the direction
Framing dialog.
for the program to lay out joists. Every floor
platform may have its own joist direction
Managing
defined by a Joist Direction line. If a

Files
direction line is not specified, the joists are

run the way that makes them shortest.
A Joist Direction Line can also define joist
365
Joist Specification Dialog

The Joist Direction Line contains the joist The Joist Direction Line will change the joist
depth and spacing information for the floor specification for the entire platform, but it
or ceiling platform containing it. will not change the setting in the Framing
To change this information: dialog. These settings will affect any subse-
quently produced framing for this platform
1. Select the Joist Direction Line and click
only.
the Open Item button. The Edit CAD
Item dialog will open. For the Depth value to take affect you
must first Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
2. Click the Joist Info button to display to regenerate the platform with the proper
the Joist Specification dialog. thickness.
3. Define the Spacing or the Depth for
the joists in the platform.
366
Using Joist Direction Lines
Using Joist Direction Lines
Managing
Files
Two Joist Direction Lines, one on either To connect a floor and ceiling platform into a
side of a Bearing Line, can split a platform single platform, draw a Joist Direction
into two for the purpose of defining different Line that crosses the boundary between
framing specifications for each area. This is them.
the most common application for Joist Direc- Following is a diagram of the original fram-
Managing
tion Lines. ing with the new Joist Direction Line span-
Files
A less common application would be to use a ning the knee wall area.
single Joist Direction Line across two sepa-
New Joist
rate platforms in order to define a single
Direction Line
framing specification for both platforms.
This is illustrated by the following example:
Managing
A 1 1/2 story house with an upstairs room
Files
partially under the eave is shown in cross
section in the diagram.
Original
Framing
Ceiling platform Floor Platform
Joists &
Rafters
The program produces a floor platform under
the second floor living area and ceiling plat-
(Note: Several framing members have been
forms under the attic eave area.
deleted to make the new Joist Direction Line
This is fine if the first floor has supporting more visible.)
walls or a large beam under the second floor
Although the second floor framing is being
kneewalls. If it does not, the floor platform
edited, the joist direction is drawn on the first
should extend to the first floor outside sup-
floor. The affected floor and ceiling framing
porting walls, replacing the ceiling joists.
displays with the first floor because the first
With Joist direction lines, you can define floor walls are supporting the framing, so its
separate floor platforms under the second joist direction information must appear there
Managing
floor living area and ceiling platforms under as well.

Files
the attic eave area, or you can define one

You must click the Rebuild Walls/ Floors/
continuous framed platform across both
spaces. Ceilings button after placing a Joist Direc-
367
tion Line before the changes will take effect.

Then rebuild the floor framing for the second
floor and the ceiling framing for the first
floor. The floor framing now spans into the Floor and
area which was previously framed using ceil- Ceiling Joists
ing joists. are combined.
Pony Wall on 2nd

Floor shown in The following is the cross section showing
reference. the same result.
Floor platform extends

across area.
The 3D view of the framing also reflects the
change.
Wall Framing Details

Wall framing is produced when you select opened from the Cad Details dialog.
the Build Wall Framing check box on the To open a Wall Framing Detail from Plan
Wall tab of the Framing dialog. Wall fram- View, select a wall and click the Wall Fram-
ing will appear in Plan View, 3D Views and ing Detail button that appears on the Edit
Section/Elevation Views when framing is toolbar. If no framing has been produced for
displayed. When the program models the a particular wall, the Wall Framing
wall framing, it also creates a Wall Framing
Detail for each wall in the model. Detail button will not appear when the
wall is selected.
Wall Framing Details are special eleva-
tion views of the wall framing. Unlike CAD The Wall Framing Detail is comprised of a
details, a Wall Framing Detail cannot be polyline that forms the boundary of the wall
and the framing items that are in the wall.
368
Framing Dialog
The framing items are the studs, plates and component of a doubled header or a corner
Managing
headers of the wall. These are standard fram- sheetrock nailer, may be turned flat and ori-
ing items and are placed on System layer 4, ented to one side of the wall.
Files
named Wall Framing. Doubled headers appear one behind the other
in the Wall Framing Detail. Access doubled
When you open the detail, inspect it and items by clicking on one, then pressing
carefully compare the framing layout to
your model. The Wall Framing Detail the Tab key or Next button to select the
Managing
shows the wall as it would appear if other.
Files
viewed from the inside. This can be The boundary of a Wall Framing Detail is a
changed by selecting the Build Wall polyline that marks the boundary of the wall
Framing Details from the framing. The polyline is on System layer 5,
Exterior check box on the Wall tab
Wall Framing, in the Layers dialog.
of the Framing Dialog (see “Wall Framing
This polyline is typically not displayed but
Managing
Tab” on page 371.) Wall Framing Details
for interior walls are displayed from the you may wish to display it for reference if
Files
inside as well, but it can sometimes be you are extensively editing the wall. The
difficult to tell which is the inside edge. layer should remained locked.
Temporarily change the line color of the
bottom line for the interior wall type on the
If no wall framing has been produced, it is
Layer Spec tab of the Wall Specification only estimated for the Material List. If any
dialog, and the inside edge will become wall framing has been produced, the framing
obvious in Plan View. If you want to items in each wall are included in the Mate-
display the Wall Framing Detail from the rial List, thus displaying an accurate account-
opposite side for any interior wall, select ing of each type, amount and length of the
the wall, open it and select Flip Layers on
framing items required to build your walls.
the General tab of the Wall
Specification dialog. Then rebuild wall If you make any modifications to a wall or
Joists &
framing. The Wall Framing Detail will now
Rafters
an opening, your framing detail will not be
display from the desired side. updated automatically. You must rebuild
wall framing to show the changes.
Most framing items occupy the entire thick-
ness of the wall main layer. Some, such as a
Framing Dialog
The type of framing, its size and spacing, and Automatic framing is built by selecting the
other details are specified for the major com- Build check box on the appropriate tabs of
ponents of the 3D model in this dialog. The the Framing dialog, then clicking OK.
components are the floor platforms, the ceil- When automatic framing is built, any previ-
Managing
ing platforms, the walls, and the roof assem- ously existing automatically produced fram-
Files
blies. When automatic framing is generated, ing of the same type for the same floor is
the program uses the information in the dia- deleted and replaced with new. Floor or ceil-
log to model framing correctly. ing framing that you manually drew will
369
remain with the newly produced automatic floors or assemblies.

framing. Each floor can have a ceiling or a floor plat-
Select Build> Structure> Build Framing or form framed above it. Since framing is
double-click the Joists or Rafters tools drawn over the walls that support it in Plan
to open the Framing dialog. The number of View, there are two options for each floor.
tabs in the dialog will vary depending on The floor below must exist before you can
how many floors are in your model. There build framing over it. For example, if you
will be a tab called "F" for foundation, a tab have a first floor plan and have built floors
called "1" for first floor and so on. and ceilings, but have not yet created a foun-
dation plan, the Build Floor Framing
The Framing dialog opens at the current
check box on the "F" (for foundation) tab
floor’s framing tab. You can switch between
will not be available, since floor joists for the
tabs to define all of the settings. Each tab
first floor display with the foundation plan.
specifies framing that correspond to specific
Floor Framing Tabs
1 1
2
3
4
5 8
6
7
9
Framing for platforms is defined on Spacing - Enter a value for the spac-
1 3
tabs that correspond to floors in the ing of joists. If the platform is a floor
model. There are two sections for each floor, assembly, you can specify a Rim joist with
Ceiling above and Subfloor for floor the check box.
above.
4 Specify if the framing members lap or
2 Build Ceiling Framing - Select this butt over a bearing wall. The lap is
check box to build ceiling framing eight inches (200 mm) and centered over the
above the current floor. support. When the Framing Reference
Build Floor Framing - Select this check Marker is used and butt over support is
box to build the floor framing above the cur- checked, the joists are placed at reference
rent floor. spacing. If lap over support is checked,
370
Framing Dialog
the surface where the joists lap is placed at not used both for ceiling joists and nearby
Managing
the reference spacing locations, so that joists rafters that run the same way, because one is
will appear to either side of the framing ref- then placed on top of the other.
Files
erence locations.
6 The Joist width box determines the
5 Use Framing Reference. The start- joist's actual thickness.
ing point for layout is the Framing Ref-
erence Marker. If a reference has been 7 The Joist depth box determines the
joist's actual depth, which also deter-
Managing
placed, the center of the first joist is placed at mines the thickness of the floor or ceiling
Files
this point and spacing goes from there. platform.
For floor joists, the starting point for a joist
layout is always the Framing Reference 8 Subfloor thickness is the actual
thickness for the floor sheathing.
Marker (see “Framing Reference Markers” The program adds the joist depth to the sub-
on page 363.). floor thickness to determine the platform
Managing
For ceiling joists, the starting point for thickness in the Floor Defaults dialog.
Files
spaced joists may or may not be the Framing
Reference Marker. It is up to you. If you 9 Type - Select the type of joist from the
menu. The list includes lumber, I-joist,
select the Use Framing Reference the glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I and
check box, it will use the framing reference. steel box. Changing the type does not affect
If the check box is cleared, the system will how the framing is done or how it appears in
attempt to position ceiling joists so that they the plan or 3D Views. It does, however,
overlap rafters. (Be sure to build the roof change the Material List entries for this fram-
framing first if you are doing this). ing.
The Framing Reference Marker is usually
Wall Framing Tab
Joists &
Rafters
1 4
2 5
3
7 6
Managing
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are all and how wall framing is calculated for the
Files
referenced by the program to determine how Material List.

walls are framed. The settings on these three Once you have built a framing model you
tabs define how automatic framing generates can make changes to individual components
371
and Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to always provided.

update the model. If your changes would 5 Specify the Thickness of top and bot-
affect framing, you will also need to rebuild tom plates.
framing after updating the model.
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls
Wall Mitre Plate Ends - Select the check
6
Build Wall Framing - Select this box to mitre the ends of the top and bot-
1
check box to build wall framing for the tom plates and corners that are not right
entire model. angles. If cleared, the top and bottom plates
will be butted together.
2 Specify the actual Stud Thickness.
The depth of the stud is set by the wall's Rotate End Studs - Select the check box
main layer thickness if the material is set to to have the studs closest to the mitre end be
one of the Framing materials. rotated to the angle of the mitre cut. If it is
cleared, the studs will remain perpendicular
3 Specify the actual Stud Spacing. to the angle of the walls.
This spacing starts from the framing
reference mark. Build Wall Framing Details from
7
Exterior - Select the check box to
Plates have framing details for walls be displayed
from the exterior.
4 Specify The Number of Top
Plates. A single bottom plate is
Openings Tab
2 5
3 6
4
Add for Rough Opening - sets the rough opening displayed on the General tab
1
default amount to add to nominal open- of the Window or Door Specification dia-
ing sizes to produce the rough opening size. logs.
Entering a value here defines the value for These can be overridden for any specific
372
Framing Dialog
window or door in the General tab of the for header support. You may enter the dimen-
Managing
Window Specification or Door Specifica- sions for a thinner trimmer into Bay Com-
tion dialogs. ponent Trimmer, which will be used if it
Files
In these dialogs, the default amount to add to will fit but a standard trimmer will not. The
the opening height will be the sum of the default for this is 3/4 inch (20mm).
Top and Bottom values in Openings tab of Bay window components default to a size
the Framing dialog. The default amount to that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
Managing
add to the opening width will be twice the is first created. When the bay as a whole is
Files
Each Side value in the Framing dialog. moved and resized, its components automati-
cally resize such that a standard trimmer fits.
2 Trimmer - Define the number of trim-
mers (studs that support headers) on If you select the bay and then use the Tab key
each side of an opening. This number may be to select the individual component window
increased for various sized openings. Open- on which you clicked, you can resize that
Managing
ings as wide as the Double Trimmer At component either by selecting it and drag-
Files
value will have two trimmers on each side. ging from a side handle, or by selecting it
Those as wide as the Triple Trimmer At and clicking the Open Item button in
value will have three. order to modify it using the Window Speci-
3 Max Bay Trimmers - Trimmers for fication dialog. You are allowed to resize it
the overall bay or bow window may be larger, until there is only room for the thinner
suppressed by entering zero into Max Bay trimmer or for no trimmer at all. Once a com-
Trimmers. Enter “1” to have one trimmer on ponent is resized in this way, it will retain its
each side, and a greater number to have the size if at all possible while the overall bay is
number of trimmers determined by the Dou- moved or resized. If the bay is resized in
ble Trimmer At and Triple Trimmer At such a way that the component becomes too
values used above. large to fit, the component resumes its
Joists &
Rafters
A bay window whose top is lower than the default behavior, resizing as its containing
top of the wall it is in will usually have a bay window is resized.
header spanning the entire bay. Trimmers are The Sill Thickness can be set here.
5
usually not needed for this header since the
trimmers in the wall will support it. The 6 A Double Sill may also be specified
for all windows.
same holds true for most bow windows.
The sill settings are for the framing members
4 Bay Component Thickness - below the window, not the window sill itself.
Enter the dimensions for a thinner trim-
mer which is used if a standard trimmer does
not fit.
Space can be tight in a bay or bow window,
Managing
and the desired size of component window

may not fit into the bay or bow if standard
Files
size trimmers are used. If this is the case, the

program will omit the trimmers, assuming
that a metal bracket or other means is used
373
Headers Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
headers are usually doubled or laminated, so
Chief Architect does not do any structural the default the number of boards making up a
analysis, and framing is dependent upon header in Count is 2.
the individual user's design input. The
program has no engineering capabilities, 4 If the top of the rough opening is closer
to the top plate than the value in Max
and does not calculate loads or bearings.
Depth, a solid header is produced to fill the
The numbers entered here, and default
values supplied by this system, are entire area. This eliminates the building of
hypothetical examples, and are not cripple studs between the top of the header
intended for construction purposes. and bottom of the plate. The default of 12
Consult your local building authorities, or 1/16 inch works well for 6’8” headers in 8’0”
select a licensed engineer for structural walls.
calculations.
5 Type - Specify the type of material
Depth - Specify the header depth used for headers.
1
dependent on the opening width. These
6 Precut - Select the check box to show
values should be set so that the wider the precut headers in the Material List. Pre-
opening, the deeper the header. cut headers are shown only if the walls have
been framed.
2 Thickness - Specify the header thick-
ness. If this is unchecked, the Material List pro-
duces a total footage for all headers. When
3 Enter the Count of boards required to checked, each different length of precut
make the header. Using this number,
the program generates a count of header header is listed separately. (Note that the
stock for you in the Material List. total number of headers will be twice the
When using stock as thin as 1-1/2 inches, number of openings if Count is set to 2).
374
Framing Dialog
Roof Framing Tabs
Managing
Files
1
Managing
select the Trusses check box in the Build
1 Rafters and Trusses or a mixture of the
Files
two, are supported for roof framing. Roof dialog.
Rafters can be automatically produced from
If you are going to have both truss and
the Roof tab in the Framing dialog. Trusses automatically produced stick framing, you
are manually drawn. should draw the trusses first, and then
Managing
Once trusses are drawn, the Copy button, use this dialog to produce the stick
Files
framing. The reason for this is that stick
and the Multiple copy button make it framing will be placed only in areas not
easy to reproduce and lay out the trusses. If supported by trusses, and will be cut and
you are going to use trusses, remember to butted to the trusses where appropriate.
Roof Tab
1
2
Joists &
Rafters
3
6
4
Build Roof Framing - Select this Spacing - Specify the rafter spacing.
1 2
Managing
check box and stick framing will be This spacing is used when automati-
Files
produced when you click OK. This check cally producing rafters. It also sets the initial
box is available only if you have already pro- offset value for laying out rafters using the
duced a roof plane in the model. Multiple copy button.
375
Use Framing Reference - Select On the opposite side, a shorter angled dou-
3
the check box if you want to use a bled header frames the other valley.
defined starting point for rafter layout. If Angled dormer hole
is not checked, a rect-
The disadvantage of using the Framing angular hole is framed
Reference is that common rafters on to contain the dormer
either side of a hip rafter will not meet the
area, with its double
jack in the same place. If the Framing
Reference Marker is not used, the headers placed where
automatic framing utility starts common the peak of the dormer
rafter spacing from each end of the roof meets the main
horizontal ridges. This usually causes roof plane. Rafters are
common rafters on either side of hip jacks placed within this hole
to meet at the same locations. You often at the top, along the valleys formed by the
want this selected for a gable roof, but
dormer roof sections. If the top cross headers
may not for a hip roof.
do not fit within the roof plane, angled head-
ers are produced regardless of the state of the
4 If Angled Dor- check box.
mer Hole is
checked, a gable roof 5 The Type of the rafter material can be
set in the Type combo box. Changing
dormer creates a five
the type does not affect how the framing is
sided hole in a roof
done nor how it appears in the plan or 3D
plane, with the two top
Views. It does, however, change the Material
edges formed by the
List entries for this framing.
valleys of the dormer.
An angled double- 6 The Width and Depth for Rafter,
header runs between Ridge, Fascia, Eave Fascia and
the doubled rafters on Lookouts may all be set in the Roof tab.
one side to the ridge.
376
Framing Dialog
Trusses Tab
Managing
Files
1 3
Managing
Files
2
The parameters set in this tab apply to any These distances are measured horizontally
Managing
subsequently drawn trusses. They can be for both rafters and joists. In some circum-
Files
overridden for any selected group of trusses stances, especially with more complex
using the Truss Specification dialog. The trusses, making these spans equal may result
program uses these values to model Trusses in the webbing appearing more normal or
for graphic representation only. These are not standard.
engineered trusses. You should consult an
engineer to have your trusses designed. Truss Spacing
1 Member Depth - Specify depth of To set the spacing you must draw the first
Top Chord. Specify depth of Bottom truss. Once a truss has been drawn you can
Chord. Specify depth of the Webbing. specify the spacing by selecting it and dou-
2 For triangular trusses, check Require ble-clicking on the Multiple copy button.
Kingpost to require a vertical member
Joists &
Rafters
from the roof peak to the bottom chord.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may
still be supplied, depending on what is
needed to support the chords at or closer than
the specified maximum spans.
3 Under Maximum Span, set the maxi-
mum length between junctions of the
supporting webbing to the Top Chord and
Bottom Chord. Changing these values
may cause different truss configurations such
as kingpost, queenpost, fink, howe, fan, dou-
Managing
ble fink, double how etc. to be represented. The Copy Layout Distances dialog sets the
Files
Since these are not engineered trusses, you truss spacing as well as spacing for standard
can experiment to see what type of truss CAD items. The spacing for joists, rafters
might be possible. and wall studs displays but cannot be set in
377
this dialog. These spacings are set in this For more information see “Roof Trusses” on
Framing dialog. page 379.
Material Tab
2
The Material tab sets the materials used for see “Applying Materials with the Material
framing items appearing in 3D and Render Tab” on page 686.
Views. The program counts individual pieces
of lumber used in the model, these material 3 A preview of the material displays in
the two boxes. The first box shows how
specifications are not used for material take- the selected framing members will display in
offs. 3D views. The second box shows how the
1 Select the framing component to same framing members will appear in Ren-
define. der Views.
2 Select Material - Click this to select
a new material. For more information
378
Chapter 20:
Roof Trusses
Managing
Files
Managing
Trusses
Roof
Files
General Information
After you have modeled roof planes and ceil- If you intend to use roof trusses, you should
ing planes you are ready to build roof trusses. select the Trusses (no birdsmouth)
Select Build> Structure> Truss or click the check box in the Build Roof dialog. When
Managing
Truss button that appears on the Roof child this is selected the rafter depth that deter-
Files
toolbar. mines the roof plane thickness is taken from
Draw a truss as you would a line, dragging the Top Chord depth on the Trusses tab
from the start of the truss to the end. The proof the Framing dialog. If it is not checked,
gram will model the truss so that it fits prop- the roof plane thickness is determined by the
rafter Depth setting on the Roof tab.
Managing
erly between the roof plane and the ceiling
Files
plane. This may include truncating one or When Trusses (no birdsmouth) is
both of the ends if they come against existing selected and Raise Off Plate is zero, the
roof trusses. bottom edge of the top chord will bear on the
A roof truss can exist only between roof and top of the exterior supporting wall at the out-
ceiling planes. You cannot draw a roof truss side edge of the main layer. No birdsmouth is
above an area where you have cleared the provided.
Ceiling over this room on the Structure The truss top chord can be raised by entering
tab of the Room Specification dialog, If you the distance from the top plate to the bottom
have cleared the check box, you must manu- of the chord in Raise Off Plate in the
ally draw a ceiling plane before you draw a Build Roof dialog.
roof truss over that area. and did not create a
Trusses
ceiling plane.
Roof
Truss Disclaimer
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses. you want your trusses and how you would
The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are like them to work with your plan.
for illustrative purposes only. They can be
used to show how trusses will be used in The truss design you use in actual
your plan, and to show the licensed engineer building must be produced by a
who produces your final truss design where licensed engineer.
379
Drawing Trusses
Chief Architect will not automatically lay out For example, a truss that is out under the roof
trusses like it does rafters and joists. To draw overhang but not over a ceiling will produce
and lay out trusses: the message
1. Open the Build Roof dialog and select “Roof and ceiling surfaces too close
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings, and together or cannot be found, so cannot
Build Roof Planes. Click OK. make truss.”
2. Select the Truss tool and draw the first The incorrect truss may still appear in Plan
truss to indicate the direction of the View with a label of the form “TR-*”. If it
trusses. The first truss can be over a does you should delete it.
gable end wall or at an end of the ridge Some important things to remember when
of a hipped roof. drawing trusses are:
3. Once it is drawn you can reposition it, 1. Draw the first truss from an outside wall
by selecting and moving it as necessary. clear across the building to the opposite
4. Select the truss and double-click the outside wall. The truss will then adjust
Multiple Copy button on the Edit itself to extend into the overhang area at
toolbar. The Copy Layout Distances each of its ends.
dialog opens. 2. If the roof or ceiling planes vary you
5. Enter the correct spacing for Roof will get different length trusses. The
Trusses. Once it is set, click OK. ends of a truss may expand or contract
according to the roofs and ceilings it
6. Select the truss on its Move handle and crosses under and over.
drag perpendicular to the truss. (The cur-
sor assumes a four way arrow shape 3. A truss cannot cross another truss. If you
when it is over the move handle.) draw a truss across another truss, it will
terminate exactly on the surface of the
7. Trusses will appear on screen. Drag far existing truss. In this case, the existing
enough in the desired direction so all the truss is considered to be a girder truss.
trusses you need are visible.
4. Trusses can end on interior walls. You
8. When you let go of the mouse button can draw a truss that partially crosses the
trusses are produced with the correct building by starting and/or ending it at
spacing. Each truss is built according the an interior wall. The end must be within
particular Roof/Ceiling/Truss Base two feet (600mm) of the interior wall.
planes above and below it. The truss will cross the wall's main layer
If the program does not have enough infor- so as to be supported by it. Its end will
mation to model the trusses you will get an line up with the main layer surface on
error message. the far side of the wall.
380
Moving and Updating Trusses
Moving and Updating Trusses
Managing
Files
You can move a truss as you would a rafter, If conditions are different, the copied truss
joist or any other framing item. When a truss will be built differently, and will display a
or framing item is selected, one of the han- different label.
dles displayed is the Move handle. It is Trusses can be moved to Framing Reference
unique because the cursor changes to a four Marker spacing by selecting them and click-
Managing
sided arrow when passed over it. Often the
Files
Move handle displays off to the side of the ing on the Move to Framing ref button
truss rather than exactly in its center in order that appears in the Edit toolbar.
to separate it from other handles. The truss spacing increment that will be used
The truss can be dragged perpendicular to its can be viewed and set by selecting the truss
direction. Edges and corners of roof planes, and double-clicking on the Multiple Copy
Managing
as well as other trusses and framing items, button.
Files
can block this movement. Just tap the Ctrl key A selected group of trusses that are all paral-
when this occurs and you can move past the lel to each other can be moved by the Move
obstruction.
to Framing ref. button. These should
When a truss is moved or drawn, it will snap have the proper spacing relative to each other
Managing
to two things. before the move, because only one of the
Files
1. If drawn along an exterior wall, it will trusses is compared to the framing reference
snap so that its outer surface is flush and moved. The remaining trusses are simply
with the outer surface of the wall's main moved the same amount as the first one.
layer.
2. The center line can snap to the edge or
corner of a nearby roof plane. To prevent
a truss from snapping to a roof plane
edge or other item, zoom in closer while
moving it, or press the Autosnap off
button.
Trusses
When the move is finished, the truss is
Roof
updated and will conform to the roof or ceil-
ing dimensions in its new location. You may
see it lengthen or shorten in the Plan View.
The truss is created as if you had drawn it in
the new location. If the conditions of the new
location are the same as before, the copied
truss will have the same label as the original.
381
Specifying the Size of Trusses

You can specify the size of individual
1 Select the Set Width check box and
trusses. To edit the truss:
specify a new width for the selected
Select one or more trusses, and click the
truss(es). Notice that a new truss has the
Open Item button. The Edit CAD Item same thickness as that set for a common
dialog will open. rafter in the Roof tab of the Framing dialog.
2 Click Truss Info to access the Truss

Specification dialog for more editing capa-
bility.
Truss Specification Dialog

When trusses are created, the shape of a roof trusses). Some of these settings affect indi-
truss is controlled by the roof planes above it vidual trusses only, like a gable truss, and
and the ceiling planes below it. The place- others will affect the whole group.
ment of webbing inside a newly drawn truss To open the dialog:
is controlled by the Top Chord and Bot-
tom Chord settings under Maximum 1. Selected a truss or group of trusses and
Span in the Trusses tab of the Framing dia- click the Open Item button on the
log (see “Trusses Tab” on page 136.) Edit toolbar. The Edit CAD Item dialog
will open.
After trusses have been created, the Truss
Specification dialog allows you to redefine 2. Click the Truss Info button to open the
parts of an existing truss (or group of Truss Specification dialog.
The shape, or volume of a roof truss is con- ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed
trolled by the roof planes above it and the from this dialog.
382
Truss Specification Dialog
Truss Specification
Managing
Files
1
2 9
Managing
3
Files
4 10
5
6
7
Managing
8
Files
Top Chord - Specify the depth. wall studs. If an end truss is in the same posi-
1
Bottom Chord - Specify the depth. tion as a gable attic wall, it will replace the
2 framing that would otherwise be produced
Webbing - Specify the depth.
Managing
3 for that wall.
Require Kingpost - Select the check
Files
4
box to add a kingpost to a truss which
would normally not have one.
Following is a Truss Detail. The lower truss
was a copy of the upper truss, with Require
Kingpost checked. Drop Hip Truss - Select the check
6
box to lower the flat top of a truss in the
hip area of a roof.
The flat top is lowered so common rafters
and hip ridges may pass over and be sup-
Kingpost ported by it. The amount that the top chord is
Trusses
lowered is derived from the rafter Depth on
Roof
the Roof tab of the Framing dialog. Because
both common rafters and hip ridges must
pass over this truss, the ridge Depth should
be set equal to that of the rafter Depth.
End Truss - Select the check box to
5 Energy Heel - Select the check box to
replace the webbing with vertical mem- 7
bers positioned and spaced on center the model a truss with an energy heel. This
same as the wall studs below. The framing will remove the bottom chord from the over-
reference is used for this exactly as it is for
383
hang area. In order for this to be modeled, the Energy Heel. When a truss is built for such a
Raise Off Plate value in the Build Roof roof, a vertical member is added over the
dialog must be greater or equal to eight. supporting wall. Normally the truss's bottom
In order to provide more space for ceiling chord extends into the overhang area as far as
insulation at the exterior walls, the roof is the end of the rafter, or until it intersects the
sometimes raised off of the top plate with an rafter if that happens first.
Without Energy Heel
With Energy Heel
Reduce
8
Gable - Select
the check box to
lower the top chord
of the gable truss so
that lookouts may
pass over the truss.
Any overhang is
removed from a
reduced truss. You
can supply this over- Reduce Gable End Truss
hang with short
rafters drawn at the
ends of the truss.
Lookouts
384
Truss Detail
Maximum Span - Define the maximum Span in the Trusses tab of the Fram-
9
Managing
mum horizontal distance between sup- ing dialog. The webbing is for
ports along the Top Chord and along the representational purposes only, not for engi-
Files
Bottom Chord. If these are equal, the truss neering.
webbing often appears more regular. Force truss rebuild - Select the
10
The placement of webbing inside a newly check box to update trusses with the
drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord new settings in this dialog when you click
Managing
and Bottom Chord settings under Maxi- OK.
Files
Truss Detail
When you draw the first truss the program All the trusses used in your plan will be in
creates a CAD Detail named Truss Detail.
Managing
this detail. If several trusses are identical,
Open the Truss Detail by selecting only one diagram is given. The label to the
Files
CAD>CAD Detail and selecting it from the lower left of the diagram gives a number that
list. designates this truss type in the Plan View
and in the Material List. The quantity of each
type is also listed.
Managing
The Truss Detail displays trusses only. Edit-
Files
ing the members that make up the trusses in
the Truss Detail is not recommended.
If you edit a Truss Detail and then wish to
restore it you must:
1. Delete any new members you have
drawn in the detail view.
2. Go to the Plan View, select the truss,
click the Open Item button. The
Truss Specification dialog will open.
3. Click OK and the truss will regenerate,
Trusses
along with its Truss Detail diagram.
Roof
Truss Labels
All trusses are labeled in Plan View with text the truss that they represent. Click on the
of the form TR - xx where xx is the truss label to select it and you may move it any-
number that also appears in the Truss Detail. where. If the truss is moved, the label will
This label also represents the truss in the move with it. Deleting the truss will delete its
Material List. Truss labels are centered on label.
385
You may move a group of truss labels the selection. Once all the labels to be moved
together. Select the first label, hold the Shift are selected, move to the originally selected
key and click on other labels to select them. label and drag from its handle.
Click on an already selected label to cancel
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing

After you have laid out all the trusses for The framing produced will be extended or
your roof the Framing dialog can be used to truncated where it runs into a truss. The
create roof framing that will fill in areas not exception to this truncation is that hip ridges
framed by the trusses. and common rafters at the end of a hip roof
Open the Framing dialog and select the can pass over a drop hip truss.
Build Roof Framing check box on the Lookouts at a gable end are modeled to pass
Roof tab. Check that the on center spacing of over a truss at the gable and end at the next
the rafters is correct. truss in. Both standard and hip ridges are
chopped into blocking between the trusses.
Truss Base
A Truss Base defines the boundary sepa- Truss Bases are used to create valley fill
rating the tops of normal roof trusses and val- trusses. The best way to understand valley
ley fill roof trusses that lie across and above fill trusses is the example of an “L” shaped
them. house with a gable roof. The wider wing of
To define a Truss Base, select Build> Roof> this house is trussed through from end to end.
Truss Base. Create the Truss Base as you Call these normal trusses. Starting at its out-
would a roof plane or ceiling plane. No over- side end, the narrow wing is trussed with
hang is produced. normal trusses until the wider wing is
reached.
The Truss Base is very similar to a roof plane
in its creation and definition. If you select it
and click the Open Item button the Truss
Base Specification dialog will open.
386
Truss Base
Where the valley begins, valley fill trusses Only three valley fill trusses, TR-2, TR-3,
Managing
are placed over the top of the main roof until and TR-4, are used in the following example.
the peak of the narrow wing's roof is reached.
Files
Truss Base (triangular - shown hatched)
Valley Fill Trusses (shown darker)
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Normal Trusses
Valley Fill trusses climb up roof made using normal trusses
Trusses
The Truss Base defines the footprint of the The purpose of a Truss Base is to form a Roof
valley fill trusses on the main roof. In order boundary separating normal trusses below
for the program to model the trusses cor- from the valley fill trusses above. You
rectly, you must draw the Truss Base. already know that trusses are built between
If drawn correctly, a Truss Base should be in roof planes and ceiling planes. A truss pass-
the same plane with, and its baseline should ing through a Truss Base will be placed
be collinear with its surrounding roof plane. below the plane of the base if it is more per-
387
pendicular to the baseline of the Truss Base. The baseline is darkened in the diagram
It will be built above the plane of the base if below.
it is more parallel to the baseline.
2. Click here
To create a Truss Base:
1. Create an L-shaped house with the roof
plan shown below.
1. Draw Truss Base baseline
3. Move the cursor and click on the point

where the gable intersects the main roof.
4. The program will create a triangular
Truss Base.
The Truss Base is shown hatched in the dia-
gram below.
The triangular area of overlap between the
main roof and the gable must be defined as a
Truss Base.
2. Choose Build> Roof> Truss Base, then
draw a baseline along the outside edge
of the wall from valley to valley.
388
Truss Base
Once the Truss Base has been created you 9. Select the truss and click the Multiple
Managing
can lay out the trusses.
Files
5. Draw the first truss.
6. Select the truss and click the Multiple
copy tool.
7. Drag from the Move handle to create
Managing
copies at the defined intervals.
Files
The trusses placed for the main roof will
generate right through the Truss Base, stop-
ping on top of the wall, eliminating the over-
hang in that area. Select the truss
Managing
Files
copy button on the Edit toolbar.
10. Drag the normal truss up into the Truss
Managing
Base. Copies of the truss will appear as
Files
Note: No overhang in this area. you drag the cursor.
8. After the main trusses are in place, posi- Trusses which run perpendicular to the
baseline of a Truss Base will go under the
tion the first truss on the gable. Draw the
Truss Base. Trusses which run parallel to
first truss in a position where it will be the baseline of the Truss Base will climb
full length. the Truss Base.
Trusses
Roof
389
As you drag the truss copies will appear to all the three valley trusses which are darker
be full length. in the diagram below.
Drag the truss
11. Release the mouse button, the copies

will be clipped by the Truss Base. Note
390
Truss Base
Hip Trusses
Managing
Files
The program can model a hip roof with vari- to decide which method you will use and
ous truss applications. It can model, step manually place your trusses accordingly. The
down hip trusses, sub-girder hip trusses and program will model them once they are in
drop hip (California) trusses. You will have place.
Managing
Step Down Hip
Files
The first illustration shows a step down hip.
The flat topped trusses are called hip trusses.
Alternating hip trusses have been colored
differently in the diagram below.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Jack Trusses
Trusses
Hip Trusses (4)
Roof
Step Down Hip
This is the quickest hip truss framing to pro- 1. Select the truss, click the Multiple
duce. First, draw a truss crossing the apex of Copy button and drag copies down
the triangular hip roof plane. It should snap into the hip.
exactly into position.
2. Stop when the height of the hip truss
reaches a reasonable minimum.
391
3. Draw hip jacks along the hip ridge from 5. Select the jack truss, click the Multiple
the last truss out into the overhang. Copy button, and lay out jack trusses
4. Finally, draw a jack truss from the inter- up to the other hip jack.
section to make sure it is properly posi-
tioned.
Subgirder Hip
This illustration shows a subgirder hip sys- the double truss has had one face colored
tem. The subgirders are the partial trusses dark gray, and several sub girders have been
that butt into the doubled truss at the end of colored light gray.
the main run. In the following illustration,
Double Truss
Sub Girder Trusses (11)

Subgirder Hip
392
Truss Base
To produce a Subgirder truss system: 4. Select it and using the Multiple Copy
Managing
1. Draw a truss where the hip apex meets button, make copies in both directions.
Files
the ridge. Stop when the height of the sub girder
2. Double it by drawing a second truss on reaches a reasonable minimum.
the far side from the hip section. 5. Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses
3. Draw the first sub girder from the hip as before.
Managing
apex out to the eaves.
Files
Drop Hip
This illustration shows the Drop Hip (or Cal- trusses have been colored gray to help distin-
ifornia Hip) system which uses the drop hip guish them. Notice that the common rafters
trusses to support stick frame hip ridges and are all supported by the drop hip trusses.
Managing
common rafters. A couple of the drop hip
Files
Managing
Files
Trusses
Roof
Common Rafters
Drop Hip Trusses (4)
(deepen the joist Drop Hip (or California Hip)
for this truss)
1. Start this system as you would a step 2. When the hip trusses are drawn, group
down hip system. select them, display the Truss Specifi-
393
cation dialog and select the Drop hip 3. Do not produce any hip jack or jack
truss check box. trusses. Instead, use the Framing dialog
to produce the common rafters, and the
short joists at the hip end.
Advantages and Disadvantages of the Different Hip Systems

Each of these three methods has its advan- With the sub girder system, spacing measur-
tages. With both the step down hip and the ing down the roof sections on either side of
sub girder hip system you can get almost the hip, near the hip will be too large.
everything you need from the truss company.
You will need to get small corner jack and
end jack trusses in addition to the larger
trusses.
With the step down hip, if the hip trusses are
placed according to your standard on center
spacing, the space measured down the hip
between the trusses will be larger than the Spacing is larger down the roof
standard. sections on either side of the hip.
Sub Girder Hip

The drop hip system eliminates the spacing
problems because the roof sheathing is nailed
to common rafters that pass over the drop hip
trusses. The disadvantage to this system is
Spacing is larger down the hip that it requires the rafters in addition to the
trusses, and with a shallow pitch roof the
Step Down Hip
drop hip truss may not be deep enough to
give sufficient strength.
The first two methods normally require
blocking along the hip ridges. The third uses
a continuous hip ridge rafter as well as com-
mon rafters that run over the drop hip trusses.
Blocking and rafters can be drawn in manu-
ally, but are often supplied by the automatic
framing generator, (see “Mixing Trusses with
Stick Framing” on page 386.)
394
Girder Trusses
Girder Trusses
Managing
Files
Trusses may not cross each other. If a newly
drawn truss ends near a truss crossing its
path, the system automatically extends it
until it butts into the existing truss. You can
draw a new truss from an existing truss to the
Managing
roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or end
Files
jack truss. You can also draw a truss between
two trusses, forming a girder. This may be
necessary for a large opening, such as a sky-
light.
Trusses supporting girder ends would nor-
Managing
mally be doubled.
Files
Managing
Scissors Trusses
Files
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn over sloping ceiling planes are

called Scissor trusses. You can draw
ceiling planes just as you would manual roof
Trusses
Roof
plane by selecting Build> Roof> Ceiling
Plane.
The picture above is a simple example of a
room with a 6 in 12 pitch gable roof and 3 in
12 pitch ceiling planes.
395
396
Chapter 21:
Cabinets
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
New in 7.0
• Cabinet moldings have been added. • Control of counter top thickness and over-
• A Vertical Partition tool has been hang for each cabinet.
Managing
added • Control of toe kick depth and height for
each cabinet.
Files
• Full control over cabinet, shelf, or parti-
tion defaults. • More control of cabinet face frame widths
• Shelf thickness and material can be has been added.
adjusted. • Inset doors
• Control of backsplash height, thickness • More Items allowed on a cabinet face.
Managing
and material for each cabinet.
Files
General Information
There are six types of items which can be cabinets can be placed on a wall or hung
Managing
created in Cabinet mode. Cabinets are very from the ceiling. Base cabinets will generate
Files
versatile, allowing a wide range of a counter top by default. Base and full height
customization. cabinets will generate a toe kick by default.
Click the Base Cabinet button on the Plan A cabinet placed adjacent to another of the
toolbar to activate Cabinet mode. The Child same type will face the same direction and
toolbar changes to show all the various will merge with it. If a cabinet is created at
cabinet items which can be created. the back of another of the same type, the two
cabinets will merge back-to-back. When
Clicking Base Cabinet automatically cabinets are merged, the toe kick, back
activates Cabinet mode to place base splash, and counter top will be continuous.
cabinets. The Child tools available are Wall
You should place range tops and sinks into
Cabinets
Cabinet , Full Height , Soffit ,

cabinets early, so that any resizing can be
Shelf and Partition . done before too many cabinets are placed.
Base and wall cabinets can be moved and
positioned under or over each other. Wall
397
Cabinets
Cabinets are placed in Plan View. To place a is created, delete it and try again. Click even
base cabinet, select the Base Cabinet closer to the corner, basically on the corner
button and click in the Plan View where the itself. A corner cabinet will remain a corner
middle of the back of the cabinet should be. cabinet when it is moved, edited or copied.
A base cabinet will be placed at that spot. Wall cabinets are placed the same as base
If you click near a wall, the back of the cabinets, except the Wall Cabinet button
cabinet will attach to the wall. If you click at is selected. Wall cabinets can be positioned
an inside wall corner, the program will place above base cabinets. You may click directly
a corner base cabinet. above a base cabinet to place a wall cabinet.
The base cabinet should not interfere with
To create a corner cabinet, click as close to
the placement.
the inside corner as possible in either Base
Cabinet , Wall Cabinets ,or Full Full height cabinets are placed in the Plan
Height cabinet. A corner cabinet will View by selecting the Full Height button.
automatically be created. If a regular cabinet They are placed the same as base cabinets.
Cabinet Defaults
Each type of cabinet has a default definition The defaults for Soffits cannot be changed,
for height, width, depth, distance from floor, they are based on the defaults for wall
etc. These settings are defined in the cabinets.
Options> Defaults Setup> Cabinet
Defaults. Cabinet general settings as well as
the default settings for Base Cabinets, Wall
Cabinets, Full Height Cabinets, Shelves, and
Partitions may be defined. Click the
appropriate button in the Cabinet Defaults
dialog to set the proper defaults.
398
Soffits
Soffits
Managing
Files
Soffits are used to occupy the space between Soffits are sized to be the same width as the
the top of wall and full height cabinets and wall cabinets, and 1" (20mm) deeper than the
the ceiling. Soffits can also be used to create wall cabinet. To allow the maximum range of
posts, beams, floor coverings, and any other size, reset the cabinet defaults so that Min.
item than can be modeled as a 3D box. Width and Width Increment are both 1".
Managing
Soffits are created by clicking in Plan View Corner soffits are created by clicking very
Files
in Soffit mode. Soffits can be resized, close to an inside corner just like cabinets.
sloped, and have materials applied to them. Soffits are assigned a default material to
Their initial height is determined by the match the wall material. Once created, a
settings for the default wall cabinet. soffit can be customized in size and material
Managing
Soffits will fill the space between the top of specification.
Files
the wall cabinet and the ceiling height for Soffits are covered in more depth in the
that room when placed near upper cabinets. following chapter.
Managing
Files
Shelves & Partitions
Select the Shelf button and click in Plan Select the Partition button and click in
View to create a shelf based on your default the Plan View to create a vertical partition.
settings. Once created, shelves can be Once created partitions can be modified.
Managing
modified. Corner shelves are created by Partitions can be used with shelves to create
Files
placing one shelf on each wall, then moving complex storage systems.
or stretching them until they touch.
Custom Counter Tops

Choose Build>Cabinets>Custom Counter creating custom counter tops until a different
Top from the menu to create a custom mode is selected.
counter top. Click in Plan View and drag a
rectangle from one corner to the opposite Cabinets will generate their own counter
corner. The rectangle is a closed polyline top that is defined in the Cabinet
defined as a counter top. You can continue Specification dialog. When a custom
Cabinets
counter top covers any portion of a base

cabinet, it will eliminate the default
counter top.
399
The counter top takes its thickness height and The polyline must then be edited with the
material from a base cabinet below. If there CAD tools to define the shape of the counter
is no base cabinet below, the custom counter top.
top will take its thickness and material from
When a sink or built-in appliance is added,
the base cabinet defaults. You may define the
the hole for the Fixture will automatically be
height, position, and material in the Special
cut in the custom counter top.
CAD dialog when you open the custom
counter top for specification. To create a circular counter top, draw a
rectangular polyline and fillet the corners as
Use CAD tools to alter the shape, size, etc. of
much as possible. You can also edit the line
the counter top. Add edges using the Break
segments that define the polyline and turn
Line button. Convert straight edges to them into arcs with the Line to Arc
curved using the Line to Arc button. Use button.
Chamfer or Fillet tools on the corners. A closed polyline created entirely within a
The following illustrates the use of a custom custom countertop can be turned into a hole
counter top to fill in a corner behind an by defining it as a hole in the Special CAD
angled sink. dialog when it is opened for specification.
Select Build>Cabinets>Custom Counter
Top and draw a rectangular CAD polyline to
place the counter top.
Cabinet
modules (3)
Custom counter top
Selecting Cabinets
Cabinets may be selected for editing in either is active. If a base cabinet, wall cabinet and a
the Plan View or any 3D View. soffit are stacked in Plan View it may be
difficult to pick the correct object. Click in
In Cabinet Mode the area in Base Cabinet mode to select
To select a cabinet, click on it while the the base cabinet, or in Wall Cabinet mode
appropriate cabinet mode ( or ) to select the wall cabinet, or in Soffit
400
Selecting Multiple Cabinets
mode to select the soffit. This method limits Using a right-click, you may at first select an
Managing
the selection set to that type of cabinet. When adjacent item and need to click the Next
the proper mode is active, it is easy to
Files
button or Tab key until the cabinet is
double-click on a cabinet to access its highlighted with handles. The right-click
Cabinet Specification dialog. may be used in any 3D View as well. Once it
is selected with this method you can use the
In Select Items Mode Contextual menu to open it for specification.
Managing
In Plan View, you can select cabinets by
Cabinet Grips
Files
clicking on the cabinet in Select Items
mode. This method may not select the Select a cabinet. Notice the various handles
specific cabinet the first time. If another item which appear on a selected cabinet. Each
is selected, click the Next button on the handle has a specific purpose. Handles on
corner cabinets are different.
Managing
Edit toolbar, or click the Tab key on the
keyboard, until the desired cabinet is Triangular handle at back rotates
Files
selected. It may be difficult to double-click the cabinet.
on a cabinet in Select Items mode. Side handles change the cabinet
width.
Right-click Center handle moves the cabinet.
Managing
You can right-click on a cabinet while in any
Files
Front handle (with “v”) changes the
drawing mode to select it. You do not need to
cabinet depth and indicates the
change modes before selecting a cabinet or
front of the cabinet.
any item with a right-click, but this selection
method is not always exact.
Managing
Files
Selecting Multiple Cabinets
Once a cabinet has been selected, additional You can limit the selection set to cabinets if
cabinets may be added to or subtracted from you first activate Full Height mode before
the selection set by holding down the Shift doing the group select. The marquee select,
key and clicking on additional cabinets. Your will not select doors, walls or windows.
selections will be restricted to cabinets only.
To de-select an item from the selection
When multiple cabinets are selected, the Edit
toolbar will show different options. group, hold down the Shift key and click on it.
If one item is selected, you cannot drag a
Selecting Stacked Cabinets marquee to group select. You must use the
Cabinets
To select a group of stacked cabinets in Plan Shift +click method to add to the selection set.
View, hold down the Shift key and drag a

marquee around the cabinets. This will select • If the Select tool is active, everything
any “free-standing” items including cabinets. which can be selected are selected.
401
• If Base Cabinet is the active mode, only • If Partition is the active mode, parti-
base cabinets are selected. tions are selected.
• If Wall Cabinet is the active mode, only If more than one type of item is selected, the
wall cabinets are selected. Open Item button will access Edit CAD
• If Full Height cabinet is the active Item dialog instead, allowing you to
mode, all cabinets (base, wall and full replicate the selected items at specified
height) are selected. This allows you to intervals, etc.
select all cabinets as a group for editing
and/or moving. Since cabinets only are Selection Restrictions
selected, an entire kitchen worth of cab- If a Section/Elevation View or a Wall
inets may be selected this way. Elevation is active, you cannot select
• If Soffit is the active mode, soffits are cabinets while in CAD mode. Click the CAD
selected. Toggle button, F2 , or choose Options>
• If Shelf is the active mode, shelves are CAD Mode Off to return to the
selected. Architectural mode to select the cabinets.
Modifying Multiple Cabinets

When cabinets are selected as a group they cabinet if it was selected with a base cabinet
may be modified as a group with the Cabinet that does not have crown molding.
Specification dialog. Any specification that
Door Style, Materials, and cabinet
all of the selected items share, can be
dimensions can all be specified when
respecified when a group is selected.
cabinets are group selected.
When you group select cabinets of different
Soffits, shelves, and partitions, may be
types, some specification will not be
changed as a group using their relative
available in the Cabinet Specification
specification dialog when they are group
dialog. For example, you will not be able to
selected.
redefine the crown molding on a full height
402
Cabinet Specification Dialog
Managing
Files
1 2
Managing
3
Files
4
11
Managing
5
Files
7
6
8 12
9
Managing
13
Files
10
The Cabinet Specification dialog allows selected from the library it will appear in the
you to customize individual cabinets as well drop down list.
Managing
as groups of cabinets. Most of the options in
Library - Click the button to access a
the dialog are similar to the Cabinet 2
Files
library of Cabinet door styles. Choose a
Defaults dialog.
door style from the Library. The picture of
When a value in the dialog is followed by a the cabinet in the dialog will change as the
(D), it means that it is a dynamic default and Door Style is changed.
it can be changed globally by making the
Special - Select a special type to
change in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. 3
define the shape of the selected cabinet.
The options are normal, end cabinet, radius
General Tab end. pen. radius, or angled front. Library
Door Style - Select from the list of doors cannot be used with radius end or pen.
1
available styles. This is the door style radius cabinets.
only. All cabinet drawers are plain slab
Cabinets
drawers. 4 Define the size of the cabinet.

Fractional cabinet widths, depths and
More door styles are available in the Cabinet heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
Door Library. Once a Cabinet door style is
403
Height - This is the measurement from the If a base cabinet and a wall cabinet both have
bottom of the cabinet to the top of the a back splash, the back splash from the wall
cabinet. For base cabinets, this dimension cabinet will extend down to the top of the
includes the Counter Thickness. base cabinet backsplash.
Width - This is the dimension across the Electrical switches or outlets which are
cabinet as you view it in elevation. This does placed within the backsplash area will
not include the counter top overhang. display in front of the backsplash in a 3D
View, when electrical is set to display in the
Depth - This is the dimension from front to
3D Preferences dialog.
back on the cabinet. This does not include
the thickness of 3/4” for overlay doors or the Side - Select the check box to have the
7
counter top overhang. same height backsplash added to the
side of the base or wall cabinet which is
Floor to Bottom - Specify a distance.
5 against a wall or taller cabinet.
For base and full height cabinets, this is
usually 0. Increase this value by at least 1/ Counter Thickness and Counter
8
16” to eliminate the toe kick. If a toe kick Overhang - Specify these values for
height has been defined, raising a cabinet off base cabinets. The Counter Overhang is used
the floor will not remove the toe kick. for any side of a cabinet that is not against a
wall or another cabinet.
6 To add a back splash to a base cabinet,
enter a positive value in the Back Toe Kick Height and Toe Kick
9
Splash Height. If you set the Back splash Depth - Specify these values for base
Height to zero, the back splash will not or full height cabinets. If you define a Toe
generate. Kick Height or Toe Kick Depth it becomes
part of the cabinet, and will not be deleted if
Back Splash Thickness - Specify the
you raise the cabinet off of the floor.
thickness of the back splash material.
Any base cabinet or wall cabinet can have a Height defines the height of the entire
backsplash defined. The backsplash for a cabinet. The height of the cabinet face,
wall cabinet will extend from the bottom of the counter top and the toe kick are all
the cabinet, down to the base cabinet. The included in this value. If you change either
backsplash for a base cabinet is measured the Counter Top Thickness, or the
Toe Kick Height, the cabinet face
from the counter top up.
height will be altered which will change
Wall cabinets simply offer a check box for the heights of your face items.
Back Splash to Base Below. If a back
splash is added to a wall cabinet, it will Name/Code - Enter a name for the
10
completely cover the wall from the bottom of cabinet to be used in the Material List.
the cabinet to the counter top or back splash
below. 11 The picture of the cabinet will update
with any changes.
Cabinets must be against a wall or a taller
cabinet for the back splash to display in 3D.
404
12 The Cabinet Label is printed below Material List unless a Name/Code is
Managing
its picture in the dialog. The cabinet entered.
label defines the type and size of the cabinet,
Files
Show Color - Select the check box to
it is not editable. The labels will display in 13
display the cabinet in the defined
Plan View if Cabinet Labels are set to display
materials.
in the Layers dialog. They also appear in the
Cabinet Front Tab
Managing
Files
2 4
Managing
Files
3 1
Managing
5
Files
Managing
6
Files
The appearance of cabinets is specified on Type and Item Height will identify the
the Cabinet Front tab. Most of the settings selected part.
can be set globally in the Cabinet Defaults Click here to select
dialog, but individual cabinets can be the drawer.
customized.
Click here to select
Cabinet Diagram the rail between
drawer & door.
1 The cabinet diagram on the Cabinet Click here to select
Front tab is used to modify the
Cabinets
configuration of the cabinet. Click on the the door (as shown).

various face items on the diagram to select
them. When the diagram shows a red
selection box, an item is selected. The Item
405
Face Items • shelves

Doors, drawers, shelves and appliances that • appliance (cannot be chosen from the list,
mount in the face of a cabinet are called but is automatically defined when built-
Face Items. Each face item is separated by ins are added.)
a face frame piece. The exposed portion is • separation
defined as the separation. There will be a Item Height - Define a value for the
separation at the top and bottom of the face 2
selected item in the cabinet front.
frame and to the sides to represent the Fractional heights are supported to 1/16th of
cabinet rails and stiles. an inch.
When the height of a cabinet is changed, or
The program will make sure that the
height of your face items will always be the height of a face item is changed, the
the same as your cabinet face height. height of the lowest face item is altered to
When necessary, the program will insert a make up the difference. If you modify the
blank area at the bottom to fill in any gaps lowest item, the item directly above will be
or delete the lowest face item when there adjusted. It is recommended that you set the
is not enough room. counter top height and the toe kick height
first, and then work from the top to the
A cabinet may have any number of face bottom when adjusting face items.
items, but there are minimum height
requirements such that there will be a limit 3 To add a new face item, select the face
on the number of items that can actually fit item above the new item, then click the
on the cabinet front. Add New button. If you click the Add New
button and no face item is selected the
You can set the default configuration for wall program will add the new face item at the
cabinets, base cabinets, and full height bottom of the cabinet face. When a face item
cabinets in the Option> Defaults Setup> is added to the cabinet front, the program
Cabinet Defaults dialog. will shrink the lowest item on the cabinet
Cabinet fronts may be composed of any front to make room for the new item.
combination of the following face items: After clicking on the Add New button the
• blank area New Cabinet Face Section dialog will
appear.
• panel
• drawer
• double drawer (side-by-side with a separa-
tion shown)
• cutting board
• left door
• right door
• double door (side-by-side, no separation)
Define the Item Type and Item Height.
• opening
406
4 To delete a face item, select it and click fixture to reverse the fixture from left to
Managing
the Delete button. When you delete a right. This feature can be used to
face item, the height of the lowest item is change a left hand door on a built-in
Files
usually increased to make up the difference. refrigerator to a right hand door.
Bevel - Type in a value to apply a beveled
Options edge to edges of drawers and plain doors.
5 The check boxes in the Options section This affects all of the cabinet drawers and
Managing
of the Cabinet Specification dialog set slab doors. It does not affect framed or
Files
features for the cabinet. The options library doors. The bevel width, as viewed
available may change as the cabinet from the front has a maximum value of 3”.
specification is changed.
Separation - Defines the space between
• Inset Doors may be selected for all cabi- doors, drawers, and face items. A European
nets. This option will make all door and
Managing
style cabinet has a zero separation.
drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
Files
instead of overlaying it. The program will try to maintain a single
• Doors On Back may be selected if the separation between all face items. When
cabinet back is not attached to anything. you add or delete a face item, separations
This back will match the front. will usually be added or deleted with
them.
Managing
• Roll-out shelves may be defined for
Files
base and full height cabinets attached to
a wall. These do not display but are Left and Right Stile - Define the exposed
reflected in the cabinet label. width to the left or right of all face items.
These can be set independently.
• Lazy Susan may be added to corner cab-
inets. These do not display but are
6 These items only appear if the cabinet
Managing
reflected in the cabinet label and how that you selected contained a Fixture or
Files
the cabinet is drawn in Plan View. an Appliance from the Library.
• Glass Doors may be defined for any Plan Fill Color - Define a fill color for the
cabinet. Fixture inserted into the cabinet.
• Flat Sides may be added to base and full
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides Use Original Plan Colors - Select the
eliminates the counter overhang and toe check box to use the original colors for the
kick area on the exposed sides of the fixture inserted into the cabinet.
cabinet. Transparent (no fill) - Select the check
• Stile Between Doors - Select the box to have the Fixture be transparent. The
check box to have double doors and background color will show through.
double drawers separated by a stile.
Cabinets
This has no effect on other item types.

• A Reverse Fixture check box appears if
a sink, appliance or other fixture is
placed into the cabinet. Select Reverse
407
Moldings Tab
1
2 3
4
5
6
You can specify multiple moldings for each Delete - Click here to delete the
3
type of cabinet. For example you may want a current selection of molding from the
wood edge to go around your counter tops of cabinet.
base cabinets and a crown molding that ties
together the tops of the wall cabinets and full Molding Specification
height cabinets. This specification allows you to modify a
Molding - Use the menu to select a particular molding profile.
1
molding for the cabinet that you have Choose - Click here to open the
already specified. If you have assigned 4
Library Browser to the molding library.
moldings to your default cabinet the list will If you select a molding using the Choose
have some choices. These moldings are button, you will replace the current molding
stored with individual cabinets in all other in the list. This option substitutes one
cases. molding for another, it does not add a new
Add New - If no moldings have been molding to the list.
2
selected, or if you want to specify a Height - This is the vertical dimension
new molding click the button to open the 5
for the molding profile that will attach
Molding Library. This will add a new to the cabinet. This value is initially set from
molding to the list. the molding profile that was selected but may
be adjusted to resize the molding vertically.
Your molding profile will be altered.
408
Width - This value can be used to Once an offset is defined, select From Top
6
Managing
resize the molding profile horizontally. or From Bottom to specify a reference
point.
Files
Offset - This value defines the
7
distance that the molding is offset from From Top will be measured between the top
the top or bottom of the cabinet. Where it is of the cabinet and the top of the molding.
measured from depends on which option is
From Bottom will be measured between
selected below. You can enter both positive
Managing
the bottom of the molding and the bottom of
and negative values in this field. The
the cabinet.
Files
molding will not be displayed if it is
completely above or below the cabinet.
Material Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
2
The Material tab allows you to modify the appear when the Color toggle is on and when
Managing
material on the various parts of the cabinet. the material is rendered.
Files
Material definitions can go to the Material
List. A material must be defined before being
used on a cabinet.
If a material is needed which has not already
been created, choose Options> Materials>
Define Materials.
1 First, select the part of the cabinet to

change.
2 Click Select Material to select a new

Cabinets
material or redefine the existing

material.
3 Picture of the selected material displays

here, showing how the material will
409
Cabinet Door Style

There are several ways to specify the cabinet If you are specifying a door style from the
door style. Library, you may use the Library Browser
to change the cabinet doors in the Plan View
If the cabinet style is known before you
or in any 3D View.
begin placing cabinets, you can setup the
door style in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. Open the Library Browser (Tools>Library
Select Options> Defaults Setup> Cabinet Browser). Navigate the Library Browser
Defaults to specify the default door style to until you find the desired door style and click
use for each new cabinet. once to select it. Then, click on cabinets one-
by-one in that View to “drop” the selected
Once cabinets have been placed, you may
door into that cabinet. If you are in a 3D
group select the cabinets and click the Open
View, you will see the door style change
Item button and choose a new door style immediately. Select a different tool to exit
from the Cabinet Specification dialog. this mode.
Deleting Cabinets
Select the cabinet or group of cabinets. When Items to open the dialog. Select the Cabs/
the red handles are displayed, press the Del Fixtures option to delete cabinets and
key on the keyboard or click the Delete fixtures from the Library. For more
button on the toolbar. information see “Delete Items Dialog” on
page 701.
You can delete all cabinets by using the
Delete Items dialog. Select Edit> Delete
Copying Cabinets
In Plan View on the Copy button. If copying the
One or more cabinets may be copied from cabinet(s) within the same plan, click to
one location to another, either within the place the copy.
same plan or across plans. If you are copying If copying the cabinet(s) to a different floor
across plans, both plans must be open during of the same plan or to a different plan
the operation. altogether, click in the new floor or new plan.
To copy one or more cabinets, first select the Then select Edit> Paste from the menu. The
cabinet(s) to copy. When the selection set is cursor should change to look like the picture
complete, click the Copy button. The on the Copy button. Click to place a copy
cursor should change to look like the picture of the selected cabinet(s).
410
Moving Cabinets
Copying Groups Select a different tool to close out of the
Managing
Copy mode.
Stacked cabinet combinations, created with a
Files
row of base cabinets, wall cabinets and full The multiple copy requires that the receiving
height cabinets, may be copied as a group. In plan be open and visible so that you can
Full Height mode, drag a marquee to select toggle to that plan simply by clicking on it on
them in Plan View. When the selection set is screen. If using multiple copy across plans,
complete, click the Copy button. The open both plans first and select Window>
Managing
cursor should change to look like the picture Tile to place them side-by-side on screen.
Files
on the Copy button. Then move to another
location in the same plan, or even in a Using CAD Replicate
different plan, choose Edit> Paste, then Any item or items which have been group
click in Plan View to place a copy of the selected with a CAD item may be replicated
group of cabinets.
Managing
along an array using the Edit CAD Item
dialog. If single cabinets are group selected
Files
3D View with a soffit or CAD item, they can be
To make copies in any 3D View, select the replicated using the CAD Replicate
cabinet or group of cabinets in any 3D View function.
using the Shift + click method. Click the To use the CAD Replicate function, group
Managing
Copy button. Click and drag from the select the items. When the selections set is
Files
center handle of the cabinet or group to complete, click the Open Item button on
create the copy. When you release the mouse the Edit toolbar. The Edit CAD Item dialog
button, the copy will appear. will appear. Define the number of copies in
the Replicate field. Define the array as
Multiple Copies either Move Relative to Itself or Set
Managing
angle for a circular array. Define the X and
Files
To create multiple copies of the same item(s),
Y distance apart or the angular distance for
double-click the Copy button when the the copies to be made. Click OK. The copies
selection set is complete. Then click in the will be made. For more information about
plan to place a copy. Continue clicking to the Edit CAD Item dialog see “The Edit
place copies until all copies are placed. CAD Item Dialog” on page 552.
Moving Cabinets
Moving Individual Cabinets left mouse button and drag the cabinet(s) to
the new position.
Cabinets
Select the cabinet to be moved, the cabinet

handles will appear. Place the cursor above If a side of the cabinet is already against the
the middle handle. When the cursor changes side of another cabinet of the same type
to the Move cursor, click down with the (base, full or wall), moving the first cabinet
411
toward the second pushes the second cabinet, selected items will be moved relative to the
causing them to move together. Multiple two points.
cabinets can be moved in this way provided
that they all face the same way, all touch Move using Distance Values
side-to-side, and the last cabinet in the group
When cabinets have been group selected,
is not obstructed. The group will be stopped
with a CAD item, they may be moved by a
by an obstruction.
specific distance. When group selected, the
selection set will have a dashed box around it
In 3D Views with one central handle, and one triangular
In 3D View, cabinets may be moved in one handle. Make sure that there is at least one
inch increments. When moving a cabinet in CAD item in the selection set.
3D Views, movement stops when another
When the selection set is complete, click the
item (such as a cabinet, soffit, wall, ceiling or
floor) is hit. You can force movement Open Item button. The Edit CAD Item
through another item by holding down dialog will appear. To move without copying,
check the box Move Relative to Itself,
the Ctrl key and then making the move. It is
then specify the distance and/or angle to
possible to move one cabinet over another
move the selected items. The selection set
item when the Ctrl key is held. will move the specified distance.
Base cabinets, wall cabinets, and full height
cabinets cannot be moved down through the Move Restrictions
floor in a Section/Elevation View, even using Cabinets will move side-to-side and front-to-
the Ctrl key. Soffits and shelves may be back. Groups of cabinets will move
moved through the floor if the Ctrl key is horizontally or vertically across the screen.
used. To override either restriction, press the Ctrl
key after completing the selection set and
Moving Multiple Cabinets before grabbing the center handle. This will
If cabinets have been group selected in Plan override any restriction imposed. It works in
View, they can be moved by clicking and 2D and in 3D.
dragging. They can also be moved with more A single cabinet will stop moving when it
precision using the Point-to-Point tool. To meets a wall. To enable the cabinet to move
move cabinets point-to-point, group select freely through the wall, press the Ctrl key
the cabinets and click the Point-to-Point after the cabinet has stopped against the wall,
button on the Edit toolbar. Then click in the while you are still dragging the cabinet. This
View at the start point and then click in the will enable the cabinet to be moved through
View at the end point of the move. The the wall, but will still maintain the
directional restriction.
412
Rotating Cabinets
Rotating Cabinets
Managing
Files
When a cabinet is selected, five handles or Cabinets will rotate in either 15 degree or
grips appear. Grab the triangular handle at 7 ½ degree increments, whichever is
the back of the cabinet and drag it to rotate defined in the Plan Defaults dialog. If 7 ½
the cabinet. To rotate multiple cabinets degree allowed angles is selected, cabinets
selected as a group, drag from the triangular will also rotate to any additional angles
Managing
handle representing the group as a whole. defined here.
Files
The cabinet will rotate at any allowed angle
increments defined in Plan Defaults dialog.
Resizing Cabinets
Managing
Files
Individual cabinets may be resized either by When resizing a cabinet its movement stops
dragging from any of the outer selection when another cabinet, soffit or other item is
handles, or by typing new values into the hit, or when the floor or ceiling is reached.
Cabinet Specification dialog for that You can force movement or resizing through
cabinet. cabinet, walls and the ceiling by holding
Managing
down the Ctrl key, then stretching or moving
Files
By Dragging the cabinet. Base cabinets, wall cabinets and
In Plan View, select the cabinet to resize. full height cabinets may not be moved or
resized through the floor, but soffits and
Drag from either of the two side handles to shelves may be.
increase the width. Cabinets only resize in
Managing
the direction that you drag. Corner Cabinets
Files
Drag from the front handle (indicated by a To resize a corner cabinet, select it. Then
red “v” when selected) to increase the drag from the side handle to increase the
cabinet depth. overall size of the cabinet without increasing
Temporary dimension numbers will appear, the depth where it joins to other cabinets.
and will change according to the resize Drag from the front handle to change the
increment set in the Cabinet Defaults cabinet depth.
dialog, as the size is changed. Release the
cabinet when it reaches the desired size.
Cabinets
Editing in a 3D View
Cabinets can be resized by dragging their selected. As you drag one edge the
edges in a 3D View. Temporary dimensions dimensions will update as the size increases
will appear in a 3D View when a cabinet is and decreases.
413
For example, a wall cabinet created above a cabinet up until it is above the refrigerator.
refrigerator can actually hang down into the Then release the wall cabinet.
space also occupied by the refrigerator. To
If the numbers are difficult to see when the
fix the problem, select the wall cabinet in the
View is in color, select Options> Color Off
3D View. Grab the lower handle and drag
to display the View as a line drawing
upwards to raise the bottom of the wall
Displaying Cabinet Module Lines

When cabinets merge, the delineation line When it is necessary to identify individual
between the cabinets disappears in Plan cabinets in Plan View, check the box to dis-
View. Cabinet module lines, the lines play Cabinet Module Lines in the
between individual cabinets, may be Layers dialog. The lines will display in Plan
displayed in Plan View using the Layers View.
dialog.
If two cabinets are merged, the center of the
line between them is blanked.
Attaching Cabinets
Merged cabinets show a gap in the
Cabinet Module line.
Cabinet faces are

marked with a “v”.
Cabinets of the same type (base, wall, etc.) angled cabinets are merged, fillers are
which have the same height will modeled to display the cabinets as
automatically join when placed side-to-side continuous in 3D and Render Views.
or back-to-back. When cabinets are attached,
Cabinets will join at an angle, when the front
the line between them will disappear in Plan
corners or the back corners touch. The
View, and the counter top will be continuous
unattached corners will have a filler added
in the 3D View.
between them to connect them.
When two cabinets facing the same direction
You can move a group of attached cabinets
meet at an angle and touch at only two
by moving a cabinet at one end and pushing
corners, the program will merge them. When
all the others.
414
Moving Walls with Cabinets Attached
If the side or back of a cabinet moves against Two cabinets cannot merge with the same
Managing
another cabinet side or back or against a side of another cabinet. The picture shows
wall, it “attaches” to that object. two instances when cabinets are placed back-
Files
to-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces
Kitchen Island are displayed.
To form a kitchen island, you can attach
several cabinets back-to-back as well as side-
Managing
to-side. Try to match the widths so that each
Files
cabinet back or side meets the back or side of
only one other cabinet. If this is not done, the
lines separating the cabinets cannot be
suppressed.
Managing
Files
Moving Walls with Cabinets Attached
When a wall is moved, all attached cabinets When you resize wall layers or redefine the
will move with it. Moving a wall up to an wall layer definition, the cabinets may
unattached cabinet will not attach the cabinet become unattached from the wall. To
Managing
to it. You must move the cabinet to the wall reattach the cabinets to the wall, you must
Files
to attach it. If you don’t, it may be attached to select them and drag them away and then
the wall when Plan Check is done. back to the wall.
Special Shaped Cabinets
Managing
There are several special cabinet shapes 1. Normal style cabinets
Files
which may be specified. Certain are rectangular. This is
requirements must be met before you may the default shape.
turn a cabinet into these shapes. 2. End Cabinets have
an angled front and
side. This angle is
fixed.
3. Radius End cabinets
are a quarter-round, radi-
used on one side.
A cabinet cannot be
Cabinets
changed to either an End Cabinet or

Radius End cabinet unless the back
and one side are against a wall or other
cabinet, and the second side is free. Drag
415
a normal cabinet into a corner before to be defined. If different, the face will
changing it into an End Cabinet or be at an angle.
Radius End cabinet. The front and When angled front cabinet is selected
unattached side are reshaped. The under Special, the dialog itself
attached back and side remain flat. Once changes. A new option appears so that
the cabinet has been changed, it can be two depths may be defined--that of both
moved or even stretched without losing the left and right sides of the cabinet. A
its End Cabinet or Radius End cabi- value of zero in one or the other will
net definition. cause a triangular cabinet to be created.
4. Peninsula Radius
cabinets are radiused on
both sides.
A cabinet cannot be changed to a
Peninsula Radius cabinet unless the
back is against a wall or other cabinet,
and both sides are free. It is easiest to
isolate the cabinet along a wall. Once
changed to a Peninsula Radius, the
cabinet can be relocated and stretched
without losing its characteristic.
5. Angled
Front cabi-
nets allow the
length of both
the left side
and right side
416
Fillers
Fillers
Managing
Files
Chief Architect models a continuous counter
top and fillers if two cabinets meeting in a
corner are separated from each other by nine
inches or less. Where two walls meet at an
inside corner, a counter top often flows
Managing
continuously across base cabinets on one
Files
wall to those attached to the next. A filler is
used to separate the front of one of these
cabinets from the one it meets so that
drawers and doors have room to operate.
Managing
Filler cabinet with and
without module lines
Files
displayed.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
To allow a continuous counter top, wall and
full height cabinets will also attach to each
other in this way.
Cabinets
417
Blind Cabinets
Often when two cabinets meet in a corner, Blind cabinets are handled the same as other
one is run on through. The portion of this cabinets that meet in a corner.
cabinet covered by the other cabinet's side is
called a “blind” cabinet. It cannot be seen.
Blind Cabinet with and

without module lines
displayed.
Creating a Bar
The picture shows a 42" wrap-around bar standard base counter top remains visible in
attached to 36" kitchen cabinets. In order to Plan View.
create a bar that appears to attach to the
cabinets, small base cabinets needed to be
modeled to place the higher counter and
provide the apron.
The bar cabinets are specified with a height
of six inches, a depth of 12 inches and a
Floor to Bottom dimension of 36"
Since the counter tops are at different
heights, the line between the bar and the
This example utilizes the standard counter

top and corbels from the Library. You can
also create a custom shaped countertop using
the Build> Cabinets> Custom Counter
Top tool.
418
Cabinet Labels
In the case of the “bar” cabinets, their outside where the corner’s angle is greater than 90
Managing
corners were attached by the program. When degrees. No doors, drawers or other cabinet
two cabinets have rear or front corners that face items may be placed into the additional
Files
touch, the program will model a filler to cabinet front surface area formed by outside
attach the opposite side of the cabinets. corner attaching.
Corner attaching works for outside corners
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Cabinet Labels
Managing
Cabinet labels do not display fractional counts. Items are omitted if they are standard
Files
information. The label for a 30 3/8 inch wide values. These are:
base cabinet will appear as BD30. The
• Standard number of drawers is one for a
fractional width will show in a dimension
base cabinet, none for full height or
line that marks the cabinet’s sides.
wall.
Managing
The format for a cabinet label is the same as • Standard depth is twenty four inches for
Files
the Material List entry. Example labels are: base and full height, twelve for wall.
• BDR24: Base cabinet, twenty four inches • Standard height for base cabinets is thirty
wide, one right opening door, one six inches, including counter top.
drawer. • Wall cabinets are assumed to have doors,
• B30-4: Base cabinet, thirty inches wide, so these (D) are not mentioned. The R
four drawers. or L is still included for a right or left
• W3030: Wall cabinet, thirty inches wide, door.
thirty inches high. A cabinet label can have up to five parts, the
• BLPW3318x24: Blind peninsula wall second and third of which are always
cabinet, thirty three inches wide, eigh- present. The other parts are optional. These
Cabinets
teen high, twenty four inches deep. can be diagrammed with the aid of brackets
(“[ ]”), braces (“{ }”) and the bar (“|”).
Labels consist of letters designating a type or
Something enclosed in braces is required. It
style, and numbers for dimensions or drawer
is optional if enclosed in brackets. Choose
419
one of a list of items that is separated by bars. L and R can appear only if D (door)
Here is a simple diagram, with four examples appears, and it does not appear for dou-
drawn from it. ble doors.
[B|P]{B|U|W} 3. width [height] [x depth]
B U BB PW 4. [ OV | RF ] [G]
The five parts are: OV: oven RF: (built in) refrigerator G:
glass doors
1. [ [BL] [P] | [P] R | [R] E | C ]
5. [PO] [CB] [-drawers [D]]
BL: blind P: peninsula R: radius E: end
C: corner PO: pull out shelves CB: cutting board
D: double drawers
Some allowed combinations are thus
“blind peninsula” or “radius end.” drawers: number of drawers
2. { B [D | S] | U [D] | W} [L | R] Cabinet labels may sometimes appear on top
of each other. You may move a label in one
B: base U: utility (full height) W: wall
direction. Select a cabinet label by clicking
D: door(s) S: sink L: left R: right on it and drag from the handle to move the
label toward the front or back of the cabinet.
420
Chapter 22:
Soffits
Soffits
General Information
Soffits were originally meant to hang wall soffits can have custom molding profiles
cabinets or otherwise occupy the space specified for them.
between the wall or full height cabinets and
Managing
the ceiling. Soffits are rectilinear, 3D
Files
volumes that can be used to represent many
things in the model. Soffits not only appear
in 3D Views, but they can be defined with
materials that will be figured in the Material
List.
Managing
Files
Soffits are used to represent boxed in ducts,
beams and posts as well as many other
things. Soffits behave much like wall
cabinets. Their default depth is one inch (20
mm) more than the default wall cabinet. The
Managing
top of the soffit is set at ceiling height, while
Files
the bottom defaults to the height of the top of
a wall cabinet.
Soffits are placed in Plan View, they use the
Beams/Soffits layer on the Architectural tab
of the Layers dialog.
Managing
Soffits
Files
Maximum soffit width is 100 feet (30m).
To customize a soffit using the Soffit Size
and Height dialog, double-click on the soffit
while in Soffit mode. Or select the soffit,
then click the Open Item button.
Libraries
Symbol
Soffits are three dimensional CAD items.

Soffits take their settings from the room
definition and cabinet settings. Like cabinets,
421
General Tab for Soffits
2
6
3
4
5
7
Layer - Enter the number to define the Depth - Enter a value to define the
1 4
Layer on which to place this soffit. If depth, the distance between the front
set to NONE, the soffit will be placed on the and the back of the soffit. When selected, the
Architectural layer named Beams/Soffits. front of a soffit has a “V”, and the back of the
Depending on the use of the soffit you may soffit has a triangular rotation handle.
want to place it on a User layer between 100
Floor to Bottom - Enter a value to
and 199. 5
define the Floor to Bottom distance.
Height - Enter a value to define the This is often more easily defined by dragging
2
vertical height of the soffit. If you are the soffit in a 3D View until properly
using the soffit to represent a beam, this will positioned.
be the depth of the beam.
Width - Enter a value to define the
6 A picture of the defined soffit displays
3 here.
width of the soffit. When you are
Show Color - Select the check box to
placing a beam, Width will be the length, or a 7
have the picture of the soffit display in
value entered in feet.
the defined material.
422
General Information
Options Tab for Soffits
Soffits
1
2
3
Sloped Soffit - Select the check box

1
to slope the soffit vertically.
Managing
Files
Remember that the front of the soffit is
defined by the “v” in Plan View. Soffits slope
from the back of the soffit, up towards the
front of the soffit.
When you define a sloped soffit, the General
Managing
tab includes additional options for specifying
Files
the soffit. You must define a height for the
front of the soffit and a height for the back of
the soffit. The front value should be greater
than the back if the soffit is sloped.
Managing
To change an angled soffit back to a
Files
horizontal soffit, clear the Sloped Soffit
check box.
Place Under Roof - Select the check
2
box to have a soffit slope to follow the
roof. The soffit will move up and the top of
Managing
the soffit will be in the same plane as the
Files
roof, at the same pitch as the roof. Be sure to
place the front of the soffit toward the high
side of the roof.
Place Under Ceiling - Select the
3
Managing
check box to have the soffit move

Files
vertically until the top of the soffit comes in

contact with the ceiling plane.
423
Sloped Soffits
Elevation View
Plan View
3D View
Front
When a soffit is turned into a sloped soffit slope, this measurement is not the actual
the Options tab and the General tab of the length of the soffit. i.e. It cannot be used to
Soffit Specification dialog change. The determine the length of a slope beam.
picture of the soffit updates when new values
Height at back is measured from the
are entered in the fields. This is a side view
finished floor to the lowest point at the back
with the back of the soffit to the left.
of the soffit.
Three diagrams have been inset to show how
Height at front is measured from the
the dialog relates to the sloped soffits.
finished floor to the underside of the soffit at
Thickness is measured perpendicular to the the upper end.
slope of the soffit.
You must define different heights for the
Width is measure left to right across the front of the soffit and the back of the soffit
soffit. to show it was sloped.
Horizontal Length is measured from back
to front in Plan View. Since the soffit is at a
424
General Information
Moldings Tab
Soffits
Managing
Files
Managing
You can specify mulitple moldings for each more information see “Moldings Tab” on
Files
soffit. Applying moldings to soffits is very page 408.
similar to applying them to cabinets. For
Material Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
3
2 Files
Materials may be applied to soffits. If a
2 Choose Select Material to select a
Managing
material is applied, the Material List will also new material.

Files
reflect the change.

3 A picture of the material is shown in
Select the Soffit or the Molding to this area.
1
define the material.
425
Applications for Soffits

Anything which may be represented by a deep soffits placed around the base of the
three dimensional box of any size or angle house.
may be represented by a soffit. Many people
use soffits to represent simple mirrors, beams Soffits automatically stop at the floor
in exposed ceilings, posts, fences, chimneys, platform when moved downward. To place
etc. Soffits may have material applied, be a soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross
resized as small as 1"x1"x1" or be made very Section view looking straight at the
large. Following are illustrations showing brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold
some possibilities. the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its
middle handle, and drag it down past the
floor so that it covers the floor platform’s
Brick Veneer edge as well.
On exterior
walls, represent
brick that
extends only Tile Surrounds
halfway up the Often a material, such as ceramic tile, is
wall using four assigned to a one inch (or 20 mm) deep
inch (100 mm) soffit. These can then be applied to walls
above tubs or shower stalls.
426
Chapter 23:
Libraries
Libraries
New In 7.0
• Added option to hide the Selection win- Window, Hide Preview Window, View
dow and/or the Preview window. Panes at Bottom.
• Added “View Panes at Bottom”, which • Library Browser loads Libraries as
will orient the browser windows verti- needed, which makes it much faster.
cally. • Library tree view expanded/collapse
• Added preference panel for the Library configuration is remembered each time
Browser lets you set: Hide Selection you re-open the Library Browser.
Managing
Files
General Information
The Library is a collection of 2D and 3D Chief Architect. If you purchase any of these
objects that can be placed in the model. Libraries, be sure to copy them into the
There are many symbol Libraries available. Libraries directory so that the Library
Managing
Libraries continue to be created by ART. Browser can locate them.
Files
There are also third party developers who
have purchased the SDU program which
allows them to develop symbol Libraries for
Managing
Library Browser
Files
The Library Browser allows you to The Library Browser is a floating window,
browse the Library and select objects to which you can access at any time to place
place in your model. You can open the objects into your model. You can continue to
Library Browser window by choosing work on the model with the Library Browser
Tools>Library Browser or by clicking on window present. If it is in your way, mini-
Libraries
Symbol
one of the buttons which activate specific mize it, move it out of the way by dragging it
Libraries or by hitting Ctrl + L on your key- from the title bar area, or simply close it and
board. open it again later.
427
The Library Browser is accessed through The Images button will open the
various toolbar buttons. Some of these dis- Library Browser window and auto-
play in your default toolbar and others may matically select the Images Library.
be added or subtracted as desired with the
The Library Browser is also accessed
Tools> Customize Toolbars option.
by the Library button inside the
The general Library Browser but- Cabinet Specification dialog, the
ton will open the Library Browser Door Specification dialog and the Window
without selecting any Library. Specification dialog.
The Furniture button will open the The Door Window and Cabinet tools
Library Browser window and auto-
will all display a Library button on the
matically select the furniture Library.
child toolbar. Clicking this button will open
The Fixture button will open the the Library Browser window and automati-
Library Browser window and auto- cally select the corresponding Library type.
matically select the fixture Library.
428
Library Browser Window
Library Browser Window
1
2
Libraries
3
4
Managing
5
Files
The Library Browser window has three
3 The Preview window displays a 3D
main sections. The size of the window, and View of the selected item.
Managing
the size of each section are adjustable. To The toolbar beneath the tree view aids
Files
adjust the width proportions click and drag 4
in navigating and displaying windows.
the splitter area that is between the tree view, The status bar displays where you are in
the Selection window and the Preview win- 5
the Library hierarchy.
dow.
Managing
To adjust the height proportion between the Toolbar & Status Bar
2D and 3D Views click and drag the splitter
Files
The toolbar in the Library Browser has four
area that is between the two views.
buttons.
1 The left side is a tree view showing the The first button moves you back up
hierarchy of Library Types, Libraries,
the hierarchy. One level at a time.
Directories, Subdirectories and Items that are
The second toolbar button toggles the
Managing
available.
Selection window on and off.
Files
2 The Selection window shows thumb- The third toolbar button toggles the
nails or Directories available specific to
the current tree structure. Preview window on and off.
429
The Preferences button opens the The first part displays the Type of Library.
Preferences dialog to the Library The second part displays the Library Name.
Browser panel. The third part displays the name of the Cat-
egory that is selected.
Status Bar The fourth part displays the Number of
The status bar located at the bottom of the Items or Subcategories are in the selected
window is divided into 4 parts. The status bar category.
reflects what is currently selected.
Library Types
There are 11 Library Types. Within each selects in the tree view, and vice versa. A 3D
Library Type there can be any number of picture shows up in the Preview window
Libraries. when you have selected an item.
The overall structure is:
List of Libraries
• Library Type
Here is the list of Libraries which can be
• Library accessed using the general Library Browser
• Directory 1 . This chapter deals primarily with the
Libraries which are part of either the Fixture
• Sub-directory or Furniture categories. Other Libraries are
dealt with in their respective chapters
• Item i
• Fixture
• Directory 2 • Furniture
• Library 2 ... and so on. • Symbol
You can navigate the hierarchy by using the • Windows
tree view control, or by clicking in the view • Doorways
window. • Cabinet Doors
For example, select Furniture and then click • Cabinet Modules
Dining. You will see the pictures and names
• Doors
of more specific categories. Click the cate-
gory and see the items listed in the category. • Textures
The tree view and the Selection window con- • Images
tent and selection are always in sync. If you • Backdrop
select a category or item in the Selection • Moldings
window, the corresponding category or item • CAD Blocks
430
Placing an Item
Placing an Item
Each Library is defined by a file in the using the SDU. When you select items from
Libraries directory of the Chief Architect different Libraries, you will see the cursor
installation directory. change to display what Library they came
The first level which appears shows the main from.
Directories. Click a main Directory, and sub- Select an item from the Fixtures Library
Libraries
directories may appear. Click through the and the cursor will appear to be a small toilet.
hierarchical structure until the actual item is Select an item from the Furniture Library
selected. category, and the cursor will appear to be a
Most Libraries contain 3D objects that can be chair.
placed in the model. A window selected from the Library will
Other Libraries, such as Textures and Back- have to be placed in a wall, just like default
drops are bitmaps referenced by objects or windows. Some appliances must be placed in
materials that let you define a texture or an cabinets while other Library items will not
image. let you place them over a cabinet.
Although you can’t place Library items from To place an item into the model, select the
the Textures, Backdrop, or Molding Librar- item from the Library Browser and click in
Plan View at the appropriate location. You
Managing
ies into your model, you can use the Library
Browser to see what textures and backdrops can continue to click and place as many of
Files
are available. the item as you want, or you can select
Library Items behave according to the type another item from a different Library and
of object that they are. This behavior is place it in the model.
coded in their definition that was created
Managing
Files
Selecting Items
Click on a Library item while in Select Items click the Select button, hold down the Shift
mode to select it, or right-click on the item key and drag a marquee (selection box)
in any mode. You cannot select an item when around the group of items. Continue to hold
Managing
the Library mode is active. down the Shift key and click on individual
Files
items to include or exclude them from the
Multiple Items selection set.
Multiple items may be selected and moved, A single Library item can be group selected
copied or deleted as a group. Select the first as well. When group selected, the item can
Managing
item, then hold down the Shift key and click be replicated or moved with the Edit CAD
Files
on items to add to or subtract from the selec- Item dialog. Drag a marquee around the item
tion set. This can be done in Plan View or in to group select it, or else select it, hold down
any 3D View. In Plan View, you may also the Shift key, and click on it once more.
431
Deleting an Item
You can delete a Library Item in any view. Click Delete or press the Del key on your
Select the item(s) in Plan View or in any 3D keyboard.
View.
Copying a Library Item

You can copy a Library item in Plan View 2. You can click the Copy button, toggle
just like other objects, but in a 3D View to Plan View and choose Edit> Paste.
Library items are copied differently. Click in Plan View to place the copy.
In Plan View, select the Library item(s). This method also works to copy from
Click the Copy button. If Plan View is one plan to the next.
active, click to place the copy. If the item(s) In Plan View, the Edit CAD Item dialog can
need to be copied at a specified distance, you be used to precisely move a Library item or
can use Point-to-Point or one of the other to make multiple copies. To use the Edit
methods for accuracy. CAD Item dialog, the item must be group
In a 3D View, there are two options. selected. To create a group with only one
1. Select the item to be copied, click the item: first select the item, then hold the Shift
key and click on the item again.
Copy button and drag your cursor
from the center handle to create a new Click the Open Item button to display the
copy. Release the mouse button when Edit CAD Item dialog. You can now use this
the copy is located properly. This is dialog to move and/or copy the item using
especially useful in elevation or cross the CAD Replicate functions. For more
section views, since it provides good information see “Linear Example Using
control of relative positioning. CAD Replicate” on page 555.
Moving a Library Item

You can move Library items in Plan View Select the item(s). Grab the center Move
and 3D Views. Some 3D Views will restrict handle and drag the item(s) to the new loca-
the movement to one or two directions. tion. To move the item(s) freely, select the
item(s), hold down the Ctrl key, then grab the
center Move handle and drag the item(s).
432
Resizing an Item
Resizing an Item
Fixture and furniture items may be resized to With Typed in Values
any size up to 2000 inches, down to 1 inch. To resize using typed-in values:
To make all items in the Fixture or Furniture
Libraries resizable: 1. Select the item, click the Open Item
button.
1. Double-click the Select Items to
Libraries
2. The Fixture/Furniture Specification
access the Plan Defaults dialog.
dialog will open.
2. Select the Fixture/Furniture resize check
3. Select the General tab and enter new
box.
values for item height, width, etc.
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK to exit the dialog and resize
the item.
Managing
By Dragging
Files
When all five handles appear,
the Library item may be resized
by dragging.
To resize by dragging:
Managing
1. Select the Library Item.
Files
2. Grab any of the outside
handles and drag in or out.
3. The item will be resized.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
433
Editing Library Item Attributes

Library items can be modified in the Furni- Select that item and click the Open Item
ture/Fixture Specification dialog. Not all button. (Or double-click on the item in Select
Library items have the same parameters so Items mode.
the dialogs will vary greatly.
The Furniture/Fixture Specification dialog
To display the Furniture/Fixture Specifica- has three tabs, General, Options, and Mate-
tion dialog for a Library item: rial.
General Tab
1
2
3
4 7
5
6
8
Name - Displays the name of the Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance
1 6
selected Library item. from the floor to the bottom of the item.
Reset - Click to reset to the original, A value of zero will cause the item to be rest-
2 ing on the floor.
unmodified size.
3 Height - Enter the height for the item. 7 Picture of Library item which updates
with changes.
Width - Enter the width of the item.
4
Depth - Enter the depth of the item. 8 Show Color - Select the check box to
5 have the item display in this dialog in
full color.
434
Editing Library Item Attributes
Options Tab
Libraries
2
Reverse Item - Select the check box Use Original Plan Colors - Select the
1
to reverse the Library item. This would check box to make the background white.
turn a right-hand refrigerator into a left-hand No Fill (transparent) - Select the check
refrigerator, etc. box to have the 2D background transparent.
2 Plan Fill Color - Select a color for the
Managing
background of the 2D symbol.
Files
Material Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
2
3 A sample of the selected material will
material to the various parts of the item. display.
1 Select the part of the item to which the For more information see “Applying Materi-
Managing
material will be applied. als with the Material Tab” on page 686.
Files
Select the material to be applied.

2
435
Library Items and the Material List

Library Items are counted in a Material List. or furniture item. It will list the Library item
The Material List will not reflect if you have as well as any comments added to the Com-
changed the size or materials of any fixture ponents dialog for a Library item.
Creating New Symbol Libraries

To create your own 3D objects for use in 3D objects can be created in two different
Chief Architect, you must purchase the Sym- ways using the SDU program. Cabinets can
bol Development Utility and be able to be created in the program and then saved as a
model objects with another CAD program. Library item using the SDU. Library items
Even if you have not purchased the SDU, created in the program can be resized and
there are five categories in the Library that edited once they are placed in plan.
can be added to. CAD Blocks, Moldings, 3D objects that are created in other modeling
Images, Backdrops, and Textures can be programs and saved with the SDU are much
added to the Library without the SDU pack- more limited when it comes to editing and
age. resizing them in the 3D model.
Fixture Library
There are five ways fixtures are placed into If a fixture drops into the top or front of a
the model. Each fixture supports only one of cabinet, you must already have a cabinet
these methods: module large enough to hold it. If you
• A stand alone fixture is always attempt to place a fixture into a cabinet mod-
placed on the floor, and may have its ule that is too small, an error message dis-
back against a wall. plays. Select OK and resize the fixture to
accommodate the fixture.
• A counter top fixture is dropped
Drag a handle on either side outward to
into the top of a base cabinet, as with a
widen the module, and then click in the mod-
sink or cooktop.
ule again and the fixture should appear. The
• A cabinet front fixture is placed fixture becomes a permanent part of the cabi-
into the front of a cabinet, as with a net in which it is installed.
built-in oven or dishwasher. There must be enough floor space where a
• A wall fixture is attached to or set into stand alone fixture is placed. If there is not
a wall. enough room when you click to place a floor
• An under cabinet fixture, like a standing fixture or furniture item, an error
range hood, mounts underneath a wall message box displays. Press its OK button
cabinet. and then click in the plan where there is suf-
436
Fixture Library
ficient room to hold the item. Enter Select A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
Items mode and resize and move cabinets becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
and fixtures to leave room for the new item. drawer. It can be resized or deleted the same
as any other face item in the Cabinet Speci-
Deleting Built-in Fixtures and fication dialog, by clicking on the fixture in
the picture and clicking the button in the dia-
Appliances
log.
A fixture or appliance installed in the top of a
Libraries
base cabinet (such as a kitchen sink or a
cooktop) cannot be removed from the cabi-
net. Both the cabinet and the fixture must be
deleted together.
HVAC
The HVAC Library contains various pieces
of equipment for Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning. Here are some of the HVAC
Library items:
Managing
Files
Managing
Millwork
Files
The Millwork Library contains many
items such as door surrounds, corbels, man-
tels and cupolas. Here are some of the Mill-
work Library items:
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
437
Primitives
The Primitives Library offers a
selection of basic shapes which can
be used to represent items not other-
wise available. Cylinders, boxes,
wedges, spheres, cones, and other
primitive shapes are available in this
Library. These can be resized and
combined with other items to repre-
sent many objects.
Sunrooms
This Library contains various components If a short wall is needed under the sunroom,
which can be used to create many different use solid railings. You will also have to
styles of sunrooms. Following are some of change the Floor to bottom number from
the individual Library items shown next to zero to whatever the height of the solid rail-
others assembled as a sunroom unit. Other ing.
sunroom styles are provided as well.
Only one side of each section is provided. To
get the corresponding unit for the opposite
side, check Reverse Item in the specification
dialog for that sunroom section.
Furniture Library
This Library contains a broad range of furni- • A stand alone item which places and
ture. The furniture is organized into directo- moves like a base cabinet. Most furni-
ries mainly by room. ture items are stand alone.
There are three types of furniture items:
438
Symbol Library
• A table item, such as a table lamp or The difference between furniture items and
portable TV, which can be placed on top fixtures is that a furniture item placed against
of a table, countertop, or other item. a wall stands about an inch out to leave room
• A wall item which attaches to the wall. for baseboard.
Most pieces of furniture behave like stand The Furniture Library contains an assort-
alone fixtures or base cabinet. Drop them ment of desks, chairs, office equipment,
into the plan where there is sufficient floor shelving, and other items needed in most
Libraries
area for them to fit. They move and rotate buildings. Items such as bathroom partitions
like a base cabinet. If an item is created near are also available.
a wall, its back is placed against the wall just
as the back of a fixture or cabinet would be.
Managing
Files
Symbol Library
The Symbol Library contain mainly electri- associated with them that will appear in 3D
cal symbols. These symbols are placed in Views and may also produce a light source in
Plan View and are used to create electrical Render Views.
Managing
plans. Many of the symbols have a 3D object
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
439
Windows Library
The Windows Library contains windows These windows can be placed in a model just
with custom muntin patterns as well as win- like other windows and can be resized like
dows with custom shapes. other Library items.
Doorway Library
The Doorway Library contains doorway con- Here is a sample of the doorways available in
figuration that can be used as grand entries as this library.
well as other places in the model.
440
Cabinet Doors
The Doorway Library also contains custom

doors that can be placed within the doorway
objects. Here is a sample of the doors avail-
able in this library.
Libraries
Cabinet Doors
The Cabinet Door Library contains over 100 These door styles can be selected and
Managing
door styles that can be used with the Chief dropped onto cabinets to change the door
Files
Architect cabinets. The door styles are orga- style for that cabinet.
nized into six directories.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Cabinet Modules
The Cabinet Module Library contains cabi-
nets, created with the various face items
within the Cabinet Specification dialog.
Managing
They can be placed in Plan View from the

Library Browser. Cabinets from the library
Files
can be selected and moved around in the
441
model, but they cannot be resized until they

are opened for specification and Allow
Resize of Cabinet Module is selected on
the General tab of the Cabinet Specifica-
tion dialog.
Door Library
The Door Library contains custom door These doors can be selected and dropped into
styles that can be assigned to doors in the 3D any doorway to change the door style for that
model. doorway.
442
Molding Library
Molding Library
The molding Library contains a collections others. Molding Libraries are located in the
of molding profiles that can be used on such Libraries folder, and have the file exten-
things as cabinets, rooms, windows and sion.L20.
doors. Custom molding profiles can be cre-
ated and edited directly in the program.
Libraries
Molding Libraries are accessed just like any
other Library, through the Library Browser.
There can be any number of molding Librar-
ies present, and you can build molding
Libraries of your own and pass them on to
To build a new molding Library, you need to

rename a copy of an existing molding
Library. Use Windows Explorer to do this.
You can then add and delete moldings as you
Managing
wish for the Library.
Files
Adding a Molding to the Library
You can add a new molding to the molding Adding the Molding.
Library by drawing a closed polyline to rep-
Managing
To add a molding to an existing molding
resent its cross section. The polyline must be
Files
library:
oriented properly for the molding to be use-
able. 1. Draw a closed polyline.
Drawing the Molding
Managing
Draw moldings in Plan View or a CAD
Files
Detail using the CAD tools. Draw moldings
at their actual size. When you create the pro-
file you must create it with the proper orien-
tation. For a window casing or sill, crown,
chair rail or baseboard, the back of the mold-
Managing
ing, or the part that is against the wall, must

Files
be vertical and at the left of the polyline.
443
2. Select it and choose Tools> Add to Multiple Moldings

Library from the menu. The Add to You can also place multiple moldings into a
Library dialog will open. library all at the same time by selecting mul-
tiple closed polylines at the same time. The
program will name the various profiles if you
have added a text item near each closed
polyline.
To add a group of moldings at once:
1. Draw more than one closed polyline in
Plan View.
2. Add a Text item near each one identify-
ing it with a name.
3. Group select the polylines and the Text
Items.
4. Select Tools> Add to Library.
5. The Add to Library dialog will open,
3. Select a molding library, and then type a
choose a molding library to place the
name in for your new molding library
selected items into and press OK.
item.
4. Press OK. 6. The program will put every selected
closed polyline into the chosen molding
library.
444
Delete a Molding
Delete a Molding
To delete a molding library item out of a 1. In any View, select Tools> Delete from
molding library: Library. The Choose Library Item
dialog will open.
2. Browse the libraries and select the mold-
ing item you want to delete.
Libraries
3. Click OK.
4. This will remove the item from the
molding library.
Changes you make to molding libraries are
automatically saved. They will remain each
time you open the program.
Managing
Files
CAD Block Library
The CAD Block Library contains 2D CAD pages. The program ships with some stan-
blocks that can be placed into any view that dard CAD details but you can add any of
CAD items can be drawn in, including layout your own details as well.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
445
Images Library
Images are used in Chief Architect to repre- Resizing an Image
sent objects in all 3D Views and Render
Bitmapped images can be resized in either
Views. Many Images have been included
2D or 3D Views. When either the height or
with the program
the width is changed, the rest of the image
Images are extremely important for the resizes proportionally.
appearance of Rendered Views and VRML
The Image Specification dialog associated
file export. Images are bitmap files which
with any image allows you to type in a height
represent individual objects, such as trees,
value for that image. To access the dialog,
flowers, cars, people, etc. They are marked in
Plan View with a 2D CAD block and are vis- select the Image and click the Open Item
ible in 3D Views. When placed on a terrain button which appears on the Edit toolbar.
or terrain feature, the images are placed at You can select the
the correct elevation. image in any 3D
View and resize the
Moving Images image by dragging
Images can be selected and moved in both from any of the 4
Plan View and 3D Views. When selected in outside handles.
Plan View, the move handle allows you to The bitmap image
relocate the image by moving the cursor. You and the 2D symbol
can not change the elevation of the image as resize proportion-
you move it in Plan View. ally.
In a 3D view, the image can be selected by The image can be
clicking on the rectangular border that resized in Plan View
defines the image. Once it is selected, you by dragging from the
can drag the move handle and move the 2 outside handles of
image up and down or side-to-side. The the selected 2D sym-
movement will be restricted to lines that are bol. This method
perpendicular to the angle of the camera that changes the width of
produced the current 3D View. Dimensions the image, and the height will change propor-
will appear to help you locate the item prop- tionally.
erly.
446
Image Specification Dialog
Image Specification Dialog
1
2
3
Libraries
4
5
8
6
Managing
Files
Any image may be modified. It may be tion of the image. Select one from the list.
adjusted in size or even changed to a differ- Height - Enter a height for the selected
ent image altogether. In Plan View click in 4
image. The width adjusts proportion-
the center of the 2D symbol to select it. Click ally.
the Open Item button to open the selected
Managing
Width - The proportional Width of the
image for specification. The Image Specifi- 5
selected image displays, but cannot be
Files
cation dialog appears.
defined.
Image File - The path and name of
1
the selected image file displays here. 6 Choose which pixel color to be trans-
parent.
Block for plan You can use this list to
32 7 Click Select Image to replace the
Managing
select any CAD block definition in the
current image with a different one.
Files
current plan to represent the image in Plan
View. Any CAD block may be used to iden- 8 The current image displays here.
tify a bitmap image in plan.
Once a CAD block is defined in the plan it is The Transparent Color
available to represent an Image in Plan View. Depending on the image itself, the transpar-
Managing
A selection other than NONE overrides the ent color can be either black or white. the
Files
Picture Symbol defined below. program automatically selects one or the

other based on characteristics of the image.
Picture Symbol Several Plan View
3 There are times when it is necessary to over-
symbols are provided to mark the loca-
447
ride the default and choose the transparent tially disintegrated. Try each of the options in
color manually. This mainly occurs in situa- the Image Specification dialog to find the
tions where an image contains a lot of black best color If black is defined as the transpar-
or a lot of white (such as with black or white ent color, every solid black pixel in the image
cars). If the transparent color is inappropriate is transparent. If white is selected, every
for the image, the image appears to be par- solid white pixel is transparent.
Adding Images to Views

Select Build> Image Library. The Library closer the image is to the Camera, the larger
Browser opens. Select the desired image the image appears.
from the Library, and click in the Plan View. In Plan View, images are represented by a 2D
A 2D symbol appears at the point where you CAD block. The 2D CAD block which is
clicked. This symbol marks the spot where placed in the plan is defined by the image
you place an image. selected from the library. The 2D CAD block
Images always face the camera in Perspec- can be changed to a different symbol created
tive Views and Render Views. In each View from a CAD block.
the images are shown with perspective. The
Copying Images
In Plan View them and clicking the Copy button that
Copying the 2D symbol in Plan View, copies appears on the Edit toolbar. Paste the copy as
the attached bitmap within a plan or to you would any other object in Chief Archi-
another plan. Multiple images can be copied tect.
simultaneously, either within the same plan
or between plans. The relationship between Copying In 3D Views
the images is maintained in the copy. Images can be copied and pasted in 3D
Copy the bitmapped images by selecting Views.
Viewing Images
Plan View Items or choose Options> Show Items,
In Plan View, the blocks associated with to access the Layers dialog. Clear the Dis-
Images are placed on the Images/Trees layer play column for the Images/Trees layer in
on the Architectural tab. Click the Show the dialog if you do not want the symbols to
appear in Plan View.
448
Bitmap Images and the Layout Facility
3D Preferences - Include the Show Items dialog to toggle the display

of Images in a 3D View.
In order to see Images in 3D Views, you
must have the appropriate box checked on
the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dia- Show Items - 3D Views
log. Select the Patterns/Images/Terrain In any 3D View, click Show Items . The
check box to have Images appear in 3D Show Items dialog opens.
Views.
1 Clear the Images check box, then
Libraries
If the Images/Trees layer is not displayed in click OK.
the Plan View, the images do not show in a
This changes the display for this specific 3D
3D View when it is first calculated. If the
View. Once the View is regenerated, Images
Patterns/Images/Terrain check box is
do not display.
selected in the 3D Preferences, you can use
Bitmap Images and the Layout Facility

The symbols representing images in Plan cannot be applied to the model and viewed
View, whether 2D symbols or CAD blocks, on a layout sheet. If you want to use a bitmap
can be displayed on a layout sheet and can be image on a layout sheet, select File>
Managing
printed or plotted. Import> Bitmap when in the active layout
Files
Bitmap images do not show in 3D Views and file. The bitmap will then appear on the cur-
Section/Elevations that are sent to a layout. rent layout page. If placed on layout page
zero, the bitmap will print on all pages.
Bitmaps can be used in layout pages as in the
case of logos or scanned cut sheets, but they
Managing
Files
Bitmap Directories
Bitmaps are stored in three directories in the the Library Browser tool. Choose Tools>
Chief70 Folder. The program looks for the Library Browser to view the Library.
directories - Images, Textures, and
Managing
Backdrops, when it generates the Library.
Files
Do not rename theses directories. If you do,
they will not appear in the Chief Architect
Library Browser.
You can rename or add a folder to any of
Managing
these and add your own images. .bmp, .jpg,

Files
or .png files can be viewed in Chief Archi-

tect.
The images you copied can be viewed using
449
Textures Library
The Texture Library contains bitmap images
that are applied to materials. Textures are
used in the rendering of materials. For more
information see “Defining Materials” on
page 676.
Backdrop Library
The Backdrop Library contains the images
used for backdrops in 3D and Render Views.
For more information see “Creating Back-
drops” on page 88.
Adding Images, Textures and Backdrops to the Library

Any bitmap image with a .bmp, .jpg, or, use an image that has a .bmp file extension,
.png extension can be viewed in Chief it must have a corresponding .gif file stored
Architect. in the same directory, if you want the texture
You can create new folders within the Images or image to work with VRML files.
directory to store your bitmaps. The images As a general rule, .jpg files work best as tex-
display in alphabetical order. Once a folder is tures and images because they have the best
created, it becomes available the next time and most common compression technology.
Chief Architect is started. .png files are a good image format, because
Textures and Images used with VRML files they contain transparency information.
must be in .jpg, .png, or .gif format. If you
450
Chapter 24:
Electrical Items
Managing
Files
General Information
The electrical plan shows the location of all most electrical items is determined by the
electrical items such as lights, switches, location of walls, cabinets and other items.
outlets, smoke detectors, vents, etc. Basic
Electrical
wiring diagrams show which items are on the Observe the requirements of the building
Items
same circuit and where the controlling code for your area. Building requirements
switches are. vary throughout the country and around
the world. It is your responsibility to
Usually the electrical plan is one of the last comply with your local codes.
additions to a plan since the positioning of
Electrical Mode
Click the Outlet button to place electrical selecting the appropriate item from the
items in the model. This activates a selection Build> Electrical menu. Electrical items can
Managing
of electrical options to the right of the be visible in 3D, and some symbols such as
Files
toolbar. When you select the Outlet lights affect rendering.
button, the 110V Outlets mode will be Once any electrical item is created, it can be
activated. If you want to insert other selected in Plan View and modified. The red
electrical items into the model click the handles which appear may be used to move,
Managing
appropriate button. rotate, or delete it. Electrical items cannot be
Files
selected in 3D or Section/Elevation Views.
The same choices can be accessed by
selecting Build> Electrical from the menu.
Choose the symbol, then click in Plan View.
Some electrical items can only be placed
Libraries
against walls, some only on the ceiling or

Symbol
floor, and some will automatically change as

needed. If you click within 12" of the wall,
the selected item will be placed on the wall.
Each electrical option is also available by
451
Outlets
The Outlets mode places a 110V duplex outlets will be placed and will have to be
outlet on the wall, 12" (300 mm) above the deleted and reestablished to have them be
floor unless placed above a base cabinet, GFI outlets.
where it will be 6" above the counter. The Any outlet placed outside the building or in
dimension to the outlet is measured from the an exterior-type area such as one defined as
center. Certain room types and/or situations deck or porch will be labeled as WP (Water
will cause a different type of outlet to be Proof).
placed instead. If you want to take full
advantage of the program’s abilities, make An outlet placed on the wall behind a base
sure that the rooms are defined appropriately cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink will
before beginning to place electrical items. come in at the normal 12" (300 mm) above
the floor.
In a room defined as Bath or Master Bath,
the program will place a GFI (Ground Fault Other types of outlets (such as floor outlets)
Interrupt) type of outlet. If outlets are placed are available in the Electrical Symbols
prior to labeling the room as a Bath, 110V Library .
Lights
Light mode will create a 12" (300 mm) will sit perpendicular to the floor as though it
diameter globe light. Depending on where were attached to a flat ceiling.
you click in Plan View, the light may be Many other types of lights are available in
mounted on the ceiling or on a wall. All
the Electrical Symbols Library . All
lights placed in plan with this tool will also
lights from the Library will create a light
place a light source that will be seen in
source in a Render View.
rendered views.
Click near a wall to place the light 6’-6” Light Render Data
(1950 mm) above the floor. Click away from Lights added with the electrical symbol can
the wall to place the light on the ceiling. You be specified with certain rendering
can adjust the height and location of the light characteristics. Select the symbol in Plan
with the Electrical Service Specification View and click the Open Item button.
dialog. The Electrical Service Specification dialog
If the flat ceiling has been removed so that will open. Adjust the settings on the Render
the ceiling follows the roof line, a ceiling tab to specify how the light will render.
light will be created at the ceiling height but
452
Switches
Switches
Managing
Files
Switch mode will place a wall switch 48" If two or more
(1200 mm) above the floor unless placed switches are
above a base cabinet, when it will be 6" moved close
(150 mm) above the countertop. Like outlets, enough together in Plan View 3D View
the height of switches is measured from the Plan View, they
floor to the center of the item. appear to merge in 3D. Zoom close enough
in Plan View to be able to manipulate the two
A one-way switch will change into the switches close enough together to have some
appropriate switch type when connected to a overlap.
circuit.
Electrical
Items
Connect Electrical
Connect Electrical mode is used to lay switches control the same item(s), each is a
out circuits, such as showing which lights three way switch. If three switches control
and outlets are attached to any given switch. the same item(s), each is called a four way
To create a new circuit or to add to an switch. The number of “ways” is one more
existing circuit, press the left mouse button than the number of switches in the same
on one electrical item while in Connect circuit. This number will appear with the
Electrical mode, then drag to the next switch symbol in Plan View.
item, and release. Remove any electrical item
from the circuit by clicking on it while in
Managing
Connect Electrical mode. The arc
Files
direction is not adjustable.
New connections can only be created on
either end of any given circuit. Two items
already part of the same circuit cannot be
Managing
connected together. New connections cannot
Files
be added to the middle of a circuit. Any
additional “connections” which are needed
but which cannot be done using the Connect
Electrical tool may be created in CAD
mode ( or F2) by using the Arc tool (and
Managing
changing the line style and color to match the

Files
regular electrical connections.)

It is possible to have more than one switch
controlling an item or group of items. If two
453
Wiring Schematics
Any given electrical item may have at most connections are desired. To add extra
two connections attached to it using connections, use the Arc tool in CAD.
Connect mode. Sometimes additional
User Layers
2
4
3
Set up an electrical layer on the User tab in Current CAD Layer field. They will have
the Layers dialog. Choose a layer above 100, the qualities that you define.
and do the following:
Before drawing the arcs, double-click the
Click in the name area, and give the CAD Select button, or select Edit>
1
layer a name. Preferences> CAD, to access the CAD
panel of the Preferences dialog. Choose
2 Specify the line color to match the Unrestricted Angles . Arcs will draw
Architectural layer Electrical.
smoothly only when the angles are
3 Change the Current CAD Layer to unrestricted. When everything has been set
the layer you have defined.
up properly, activate the Arc tool and draw
4 Specify the line style to match the the additional electrical runs. The arc will
Architectural layer - Electrical. replicate the movement of the cursor. Arcs
drawn in CAD may have the swing adjusted
All future CAD items will be drawn on the
by selecting the arc, then adjusting the
CAD layer that you have defined in the
triangular handle.
454
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Managing
Files
The Electrical Service Specification dialog Dist From Wall - Specify the distance
2
consists of two tabs. Depending on the from the wall for the switch, outlet or
electrical symbol that was selected either one wall light.
or both of the tabs may be available. For
switches and outlets only the Service Data Render Data Tab
tab is available. For ceiling lights only the
Render Data tab is available. For wall lights
both tabs are available.
Service Data Tab
Electrical
Items
1
2
Height to Center - Specify the The Render Data tab of the Electrical
1 Service Specification dialog is identical to
height to the center or the switch, outlet
or wall light. the Light Specification dialog. For more
Managing
information see “Light Specification Dialog”
on page 616.
Files
Place Outlets
Managing
Automatically Place Outlets by clicking appliances such as ranges, washers, dryers,
etc. will each have its required outlet placed
Files
this button, then clicking in a room. Outlets
(usually 110V) will be located around the automatically (110V or 220V). Lights are
room at intervals not greater than twelve feet always placed above sinks.
so that no wall position is greater than 6’
Place Outlets requires that the room have
(1800mm) from the nearest outlet.
a door before outlets will be automatically
Managing
The outlets will be placed 12" (300 mm) placed in that room. Place Outlets will not
Files
above the floor unless located above a base work in any room defined as any exterior
cabinet, when they will be placed 6" above type room. Exterior rooms require that the
the countertop. Stand-alone or built-in outlets be placed individually using the
455
Outlets tool or by selecting an outlet from will have the outlets placed when Place
the Electrical Symbols Library . Outlets is used in any one of the rooms.
Railings or Invisible walls will not separate Any outlet, once placed, can be moved or
the rooms for Place Outlets . Instead, all deleted.
rooms divided by Railings or Invisible walls
Electrical Library
The Electrical Library button accesses a thermostat, bath vent fans, a ceiling fan,
library full of various electrical symbols. electrical panel, fluorescent lights, can lights,
Select a symbol, then click in your plan to porch lights, chandeliers, and more. Finding
place it on a wall, floor or ceiling. Some out which items are available in the library,
lights and all fans can be placed only on the and where they are located, is simplified by
ceiling. Some special symbols (TV, phone, clicking the Help button from the Electrical
etc.) can only be placed on a wall. Library dialog. All the electrical items
currently available in the library are specified
The Electrical Library contains many according to their position in the library
electrical items, all divided into various hierarchy.
categories. It has a smoke detector,
Creating Other Symbols

Symbols which are currently not available in contains 2D symbols or in the CAD Block
the Electrical Symbols Library may be library.
created for 2D purposes only. Additional These will not go to the Material List and the
electrical symbols may be created using
Connect tool will not connect them with
CAD blocks. Symbols may be linked
other electrical items. Any electrical
together as a block so they copy as an
connections will need to be made using the
individual item. Since it is possible to copy
across plans, it is only necessary to create the Arc tool.
block once, possibly in a plan file that only
Selecting Electrical Items

Electrical items may be selected in Plan modes ( ). Only electrical items will be
View. They cannot be edited in any 3D View. selected. This is convenient, especially when
It is easiest to select an electrical item by trying to select an outlet on a wall between a
clicking on it while in any of these electrical base cabinet and wall cabinet. The other two
456
Deleting Electrical Items
selection methods will usually select the Next button or Tab key until the electrical
Managing
electrical item only after tabbing through item is selected.
each cabinet in turn.
Files
You may also right-click on the item to
Electrical items may also be selected by select, and use the Next button to toggle
clicking on them in Select Items mode. If through the selection until the electrical item
nearby items are selected first, click the is highlighted by two red handles.
Electrical items may not be group selected.
Deleting Electrical Items

Select the electrical item first. When it is
highlighted, click the Delete button or
Electrical
Items
press the Del key on the keyboard.
Copying Electrical Items

Select the electrical item. To make a single You can also copy between plans. If both
copy, click the Copy button and then click plans are open and tiled, after the Copy
in Plan View to place the copied item. To button is pressed, click the other plan to
make multiple copies (such as for placing activate it, then click again to place the copy.
smoke detectors) double-click the Copy If the other plan is not tiled you will have to
button when the item is selected. Then click select Edit> Paste from the menu to load the
item for pasting into the new plan.
Managing
as many times as desired.
Files
Moving Electrical Items
By Dragging electrical items, on the Locate Items tab of
Managing
Select an electrical item. Then grab the the Dimension Setup dialog.
Files
square handle when the cursor changes to a Check the box to have electrical items be
Move cursor, and drag the electrical item located by manual dimensions.
to the new position. If the item is limited to
Once dimensions are set to find electrical
being placed on walls, the new position must
items, drag a dimension line through the
be against a wall or the move will be ignored.
Managing
electrical items using the Dimension tool.

Files
The dimension which locates the electrical

By Using Dimensions
item can be used to move that electrical item.
To dimension to electrical items, you must
First, select the electrical item to be moved,
first choose to have the program locate
457
then click on the dimension number going to Make sure that the dimension is actually
that item. When the Set Dimension dialog locating the correct items before using the
displays, replace the current dimension with dimension to manipulate the electrical item.
the desired value. If needed, adjust the dimension first, such as
moving the extension from the outside of the
wall to the inside of the wall.
Rotating Electrical Items

Any electrical item not attached to a wall click down when the cursor changes to the
may also be rotated. Select the item. Move Rotate cursor. Drag to the new position
the cursor above the triangular handle, and and release.
Changing the Height

Following are the default heights of various
electrical items:
Item Ht. (in.) Ht.(mm)
Wall Outlet 12" 300 mm
Wall Outlet above cabinet Countertop + 6" Cab + 150 mm
Wall Outlet at kitchen sink 12" (underneath) 300 mm
Wall Switch 48" 1200 mm
Switch above cabinet Countertop + 6" Cab + 150 mm
Wall Light 72" 1800 mm
Ceiling fixtures Ceiling ht. Ceiling ht.
The heights at which these electrical items behind the cabinet, where it can supply
appear in 3D and elevation views are set power to the fixture or appliance.
when you create or move them in the plan.
If base cabinets are present, automatically
An outlet placed where a cabinet meets the placed outlets are six inches (150 mm) above
wall is six inches (150 mm) above the the counter top so that no place on it is more
cabinet top unless the cabinet contains a than three feet (900 mm) from an outlet. An
fixture or appliance other than a bathroom outlet is not placed above the back of a
sink. The fixture causes the outlet to remain module containing a fixture or appliance, but
458
Displaying Electrical in 2D and 3D
will instead be placed at normal wall height (300 mm) above the floor. A dishwasher is
Managing
behind the module if the fixture requires not considered to require electricity since it is
electricity. usually plugged in under a nearby sink. If an
Files
outlet is needed above the counter containing
All kitchen sinks are assumed to require
a kitchen sink, place the outlet before adding
electricity since they may contain a garbage
the sink.
disposal, so the outlet will be created at 12"
Displaying Electrical in 2D and 3D

In 2D Plan View
Electrical
Items
1
The Layers dialog governs all 2D display.

Items checked under Disp. will show, those
Managing
unchecked will not.
Files
1 Check to have Electrical display in 2D
Plan View.
If you have created an additional CAD layer
for electrical wiring, it will also have an
Managing
option to display.
Files
Managing
Files
459
In 3D Views
Electrical items may be viewed in any 3D

1 Check Electrical to display electrical
View so long as they are displayed in 2D. If items in 3D. Any newly created 3D
the 2D does not show electrical items, 3D View will now display electrical items. This
will not either. If electrical items display in is a global setting affecting all future 3D
2D but not in 3D, select 3D>3D Preferences Views and remains set in this plan until
to display the 3D Preferences dialog, then changed.
go to the Include tab.
In Individual 3D Views
Individual 3D Views can have electrical in this box to display electrical items in this
suppressed without affecting other views. So view once more.
long as the Include tab of the 3D
If Electrical is grayed out, it means
Preferences dialog does not have electrical
electrical was not checked in the 3D
suppressed, it can be suppressed in
Preferences dialog, Include tab. Since that
individual 3D Views. From the 3D View
is a global setting, you cannot override it
access the Show Items dialog within an individual view. In that case, close
the view, change the setting in the 3D
1 Clear the Electrical check box to Preferences dialog so that electrical is
have electrical items not show in this
3D View. You can always restore the check included, then create a new view.
460
Chapter 25:
Fireplaces
Fireplaces
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
General Information
A masonry fireplace may be created in or • If created away from a wall it moves and
away from a wall using the Build> Fireplace resizes like a cabinet.
command. Standard, corner and see-through prefabri-
• If created in a wall it behaves as an cated metal fireplaces are also available from
opening, moving and resizing like a door the fixture library. These can be framed in
or window. with standard walls.
Fireplaces
Masonry Fireplaces
Built into a Wall Grab the center
To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, handle and pull
choose Build> Fireplace and click on the toward the outside
of the wall. The
wall. (Or you may add the Fireplace tool fireplace will stop
to your toolbar, and use that instead.) when its front is
The fireplace is cre- flush with the inside edge of the wall.
ated with the out-
On an exterior wall, the fireplace always
side of the fireplace
faces the interior. If a fireplace is created on
flush with the out-
an interior wall, click on the edge of the wall
Managing
side of the wall. to specify which way the fireplace should
Files
Once the fireplace face. The fireplace will be created with the
has been placed, select fire box on the same side as the wall edge on
it, three handles will which you clicked to create it.
display on the fire-
place, along the wall.
Libraries
Symbol
461
Freestanding Moving a Fireplace

Click in an open area to Drag from the center handle to move the fire-
create a freestanding place. If the fireplace is in a wall, you are
masonry fireplace. Unlike limited to moving the fireplace along that
fireplaces placed in walls, wall, or in and out, stopping when either its
freestanding fireplace will back or front is flush with the wall. If the
have five handles when fireplace is freestanding, it will move per-
selected, and may be pendicular to its sides unless you hold down
rotated, resized, or moved in any direction the Ctrl key before dragging it. In this case,
like a cabinet. the freestanding fireplace will move freely in
any direction.
Fireplace Foundations
If a fireplace is added on the first floor before Resizing a Fireplace
building the foundation plan, a foundation To change the width of the fireplace and its
will be generated under the fireplace when fire box, start at a side handle and drag along
the foundation is built. The fireplace founda- the wall away from or toward the center of
tion will be of the same material type as the the fireplace. Note that the fire box also
original fireplace, but it will not have a fire resizes if this method is used. It is more accu-
box or a hearth. This fireplace foundation rate to enter the desired values for the fire-
may be edited or deleted, as desired. A fire place in the Fireplace Specification dialog.
box and hearth may be added from the speci-
fication dialog. Changing the Depth
Only a freestanding fireplace may have its
Editing Masonry Fireplaces depth changed by dragging from a handle.
Select a fireplace to move or to edit it. To Drag the front handle to change the overall
select, click on the fireplace in Select depth of the fireplace. This will not affect the
Items mode. Depending on the type of depth of the fire box or of the hearth.
fireplace selected, either three handles (for a For the most accuracy, change all specifica-
wall fireplace) or five handles (for a free- tions for the selected fireplace in the Fire-
standing fireplace) will display. These han- place Specification dialog.
dles may be used to move, resize or
reposition the fireplace.
462
The Fireplace Specification Dialog
The Fireplace Specification Dialog
Managing
Files
Select the masonry fireplace and click the
Open Item button to display the Fireplace
Specification dialog. Unlike cabinet sizes,
dimensions entered here must be in whole
inches.
Managing
Files
General Tab
1
2
3 6
4
5
Fireplaces
Height - Specify the Height of the
1 6 The picture of the fireplace updates as
fireplace. changes are made. Press the Tab key to
2 Width - Specify the Width of the fire- force the fireplace to update to the most
place. recent change.
Depth - Specify the Depth of the fire-
3
place.
Managing
4 Hearth Depth - Specify the Hearth
Files
Depth. This is measured from the front
of the fireplace out into the room. To elimi-
nate the hearth altogether, enter a zero for
this value.
5 Hearth Height - Specify the Hearth
Managing
Height. This is the height of the hearth

Files
above the floor in that room.
463
Fire Box Tab
1
2
3
4 5
Height/Width - Enter the height and No Fire Box - Select the check box to
1 5
width of the fire box. eliminate the fire box from the fire-
Depth - Enter the depth of the fire box. place. This is often used in the foundation
2 plan to provide a solid matching base for the
Offset - Enter the number of inches
3 fireplace on the first floor, but without hav-
(or mm) to offset the fire box. This will
ing a fire box.
be measured from the center. A value of 0
will cause the fire box to be centered in the 6 Show Color - Select the check box to
fireplace. have the picture of the fireplace in this
dialog display in color.
4 Offset to Left/Right - Choose to off-
set the fire box to the left or to the right.
The amount of the offset will be the value Material Tab
specified by Offset. The Material tabs allow the fireplace mate-
rial to be specified.
Library Fireplaces
Locating the Library Items use and size the symbols accordingly once
Several different fireplace symbols are avail- they are in your plan. The fireplaces in the
able in the Fixtures library. You should Library act just like other Library items.
check the manufacturer’s product informa- There are many ways to access the libraries.
tion for dimensions of framing, and code Choose Tools> Library Browser or click
clearances for the fireplace unit you intend to the Library Browser button to access all
available libraries.
464
Library Fireplaces
In the Fixture library, select the Fireplace
Managing
library. Navigate to the Open Front category.
The three standard fireplaces which are pro-
Files
vided have an opening width of thirty-six,
forty-two, and forty-eight inches.
Placing a Library Fireplace
Managing
Files
Result
Fireplaces
Library fireplaces can be placed anywhere in tion in the front of the fireplace with a four
your plan. Depending on the type of Fire- inch wall as shown in the picture on the far
place, some of the Library Items have behav- right.
iors that help you place the item in the wall. To change the thickness of the wall segment,
Open Front fireplaces for instance will snap
select Break Wall and click at one end
the front of the fireplace to the inside surface
where the wall segment in front of the fire-
of a wall.
place meets an intersecting wall. Select the
To place a fireplace from the Library, select
Wall tool and delete the wall segment by
your fireplace from the fixture library and
drawing over it starting from the break. Now
click in the plan where the fireplace will be.
draw a new four inch wall in its place.
In Plan View, select the new fireplace. Move
Once the fireplace is located, you can draw
it side-to-side in the wall and front to back,
the walls that will enclose the back of the
Managing
until it is where you want it. Since it is a wall
fireplace. Draw three walls to complete the
Files
fixture, it moves like a base cabinet. Leave
box. Refer to the manufacturer’s information
its back attached to the wall. If you move it
to make sure you leave enough room around
through a wall, the fireplace front should
the fireplace. Use dimensions to accurately
move right through the wall until its face is
place the walls.
flush with the other side.
Managing
The face of a Library fireplace will project

Projecting Library Fireplaces
Files
through a four inch wall. If your house has

thicker exterior walls, replace the wall sec- Use the same method described above,
except draw the walls to allow the fireplace
to project into the room.
465
Following are three pictures showing alter-

nate methods of having the fireplace project
out into the room. It is best to use one wall
thickness for the side walls.
Chimneys
Chimneys for 1. Place a soffit in position over the chim-
Masonry Fireplaces ney chase, resize it to match, then extend
the soffit using the same method as
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace:
extending the masonry fireplace in the
1. Select the fireplace in a 3D View. 3D View.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key, grab the topmost 2. If the chimney chase is drawn with walls
handle, and drag the chimney up through on the exterior of the house, you may
all the floors and the roof until it is to the also continue the chase with walls. Align
desired height. The use of the Ctrl key walls with the chase on each subsequent
will prevent the chimney from stopping floor. The chimney chase “room” on the
when it reaches the ceiling height. uppermost floor should have a much
higher ceiling defined in the Room
3. Once you have dragged the chimney up
Specification dialog. It should also be
until it is approximately the correct
set to have no roof by unchecking Roof
height, you may select the fireplace,
over this room in the Structure tab of
click the Open Item button, and type the Room Specification dialog. Then
in the known height. rebuild floors & ceilings, (and the roof,
if appropriate).
Chimney Chases Chimney caps may be made using soffits.
There are a couple of options to extend the You must hold down the Ctrl key before drag-
chimney chase. ging them above the ceiling height.
466
Chapter 26:
Dimensions
Managing
Files
Managing Managing
Files
Diagram of a Dimension Line
Following is a pictorial definition of the
components of dimension lines:
Dimensions
Files
Dimensions
Activating the Dimension Tools
Click the Manual Dimension button to dicular to walls. The dimension line will
access the dimension tools. The dimension- locate items specified in the Locate Items
ing tools can also be activated through the tab and which lie within the Manual Reach
Tools> Dimension menu. specified in the Dimension Setup dialog.
Each manual dimension line can be edited
Manual Dimensions
Libraries
individually.
Symbol
Click the Manual Dimension but-

ton and drag a dimension line near or through
the items requiring dimensions. Drag perpen-
467
End-to-End Dimensions
The End-to-End Dimension button
The wall is 40" from where is used to dimension between any two
the dimension was created.
This is too far, the dimen-
defined points or objects.
Drag manual
sion cannot reach the wall.
dimension Click the End-to-End Dimension tool,
then drag the dimensions from the first item
The sink is within to the second item.
reach so is located.
Automatic Dimensions
The Automatic Exterior Dimen-
sion button is used to generate dimensions
around the exterior of a closed plan. The
If using the Manual Dimension tool in dimension lines locate walls and openings as
Architectural mode, dimension lines may be specified in Dimension Setup dialog.
drawn at any of the allowed wall angles
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Automatic Exterior Dimensions will not
If using the Manual Dimension tool in generate properly where there is a gap in
the exterior walls. Sometimes angled
CAD mode, dimension lines can be drawn
walls may not connect properly. If
restricted to the corresponding wall angle automatic dimensions do not generate, try
constraints, or at unrestricted angles depend- Build> Wall> Fix Connections.
ing on which option is selected.
These dimensions may be edited individu-
Interior Dimensions
ally, but all such editing will be lost when
The Interior Dimension button is Automatic Dimensions are created again. If
used to create interior dimensions. Draw a you want to save a dimension string, you can
dimension line through walls, at a right angle move it to a User layer using the Edit
to them, to create interior dimensions only. Dimension Line dialog.
The dimension string will not dimension
between the surfaces of the walls. It will
locate the interior dimensions of rooms. The
allowed dimension angles match the allowed
wall angles for each plan.
468
Dimension Setup Dialog
Automatic Dimension Example • Auto checked for Locate Openings
Managing
• Auto checked for Overall Dimension
Files
• 1/16 inches and 0" are checked
• Locate Wall & Opening Center
Note that there are a maximum of three rows
of automatically generated dimensions per
Managing
exterior wall direction. The innermost
Files
dimension line locates exterior walls, interior
walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The
second dimension line locates exterior and
interior walls. The outermost dimension line
only locates the overall exterior dimension.
Managing
Files
The graphic shows a plan with Automatic
Dimensions with the following settings:

You can control how you use dimensions and
how they display in the Dimension Setup
dialog. This dialog defines the Automatic
reach distance for items, what size the
Dimensions
dimensions should be, arrowheads, etc. A
solid understanding of the various options
available in this dialog is important.
Select Options>Defaults Setup>Dimen-
sion Defaults, or double-clicking the
Dimension button to access the Dimen-
sion Setup dialog.
The settings in this dialog are saved with the
plan. Once you have the settings correct it is
recommended that you save the setting in
your profile.pl1 file for use in future plans.
For more information see “Master Settings
Managing
for Profile Plans” on page 146.

Files
469
Setup Tab
9
1 10
2
11
3
4 12
13
5
14
15
6 16
7 17
18
8 19
Eighth Inches - Select the check box For example, when 1/16 inches is checked
1
to display dimensions in abbreviated but 0" is not checked, the following dimen-
eighths. For instance, 5' 3-1/2” would display sion would display: 7' 1/2. Yet if 0" is also
as 5'3" 4, with the 4 representing 4/8” which checked, the same value would display: 7'- 0
is the same as 1/2”. A dimension which does 1/2”.
not have an exact equivalent in eighths will
be rounded up to the nearest eighth (i.e. 7' 6- 3 Check Short extensions to have
short, uniform-length extension lines
3/16” would round to 7'6"2). created instead of the extension lines reach-
1/16 inches - Select the check box to ing to the item it locates.
2
display dimensions in fraction format. Number above Line - Select the
This is the more precise of the two options. 4
check box to have all the dimensions
0" - Select the check box to display whole display above the dimension line, rather than
number of inches even if it is zero, and to in the center of the line.
place a dash between feet and inches. If
1/16th inches is also checked, the double 5 Check Imperial and/or Metric to
define the units which are used for dis-
quote (“) will always appear after the dimen- playing dimensions. Although Imperial plans
sion. always use the Imperial dimensions, dimen-
sions may be changed to display in Metric
only or in both Metric and Imperial units
simultaneously. These options are not avail-
able in Metric plans.
470
Wall & Opening Snap Unit - “1” means 1:1, or that both move at exactly
6
Managing
Defines the incremental units that are the same speed. “8” means 1:8, or that the
allowed when placing walls, doors and win- mouse must move 8 units to make the
Files
dows, or when moving an item with the selected item move by 1 unit. (In other
mouse. The dimensions appear in the toolbar words, the selected item moves 1/8th as fast
as an item is dragged. This does not affect as the mouse.)
how Dimensions are created. This can be used to move walls and openings
Managing
Inches - Select this option to restrict more accurately. If you wish change the
7
Files
the snap unit to a specified number of moving speed temporarily, press a number
inches. Change the value if desired. The key (along the top of the keyboard) while
default value is 1". Fractions are allowed. moving a wall or door or window. The mov-
The maximum value allowed is 48". ing speed will be changed for that move only,
When using the metric system the default and will return to normal as soon as the
Managing
value is 10 mm. The maximum value selected item is released.
Files
allowed is 480mm. Automatic Reach - Specifies how
12
Unrestricted - Select this option to allow far automatic dimension lines will
movement increments of 1/16th inch. “reach” to locate items along exterior walls
that are set back. The default is 192 inches. If
New Lines Inches Only - Select
8 exterior walls are set back farther than this, a
the check box to have all subsequently second set of dimension lines will be pro-
created Manual Dimensions show inches duced to dimension the set back walls.
only (37" instead of 3’-1”). This does not
affect existing dimensions. Clear the check Automatic
box to return to drawing Manual Dimensions Reach set to 16'
using feet and inches.
Dimensions
Number Height - Specifies the
9
scaled height, in inches or mm, of
dimension numbers. 6" will print a 1/8” tall
number at 1/4" = 1’ scale. Automatic
Min. Number Size - Specifies mini- Reach set to 20'
10
mum screen size (in pixels) for dimen-
sion numbers. The screen dimensions will be
no smaller than this value. This does not
affect printed output. To see the dimension
Manual Reach specifies how far
numbers on the screen at the printing scale, 13
manually drawn dimension lines will
set this value to 0. Changing this value will
“reach” to locate walls and/or items specified
Managing
affect all dimensions immediately.

in the Locate Items tab.
Files
Moving Speed - (allowed values 1-9)

1st Line Offset specifies the distance
defines how closely the mouse and the 14
(in scale inches or mm) between the
selected item move together while dragging.
exterior wall and the first dimension line.
471
Line Separation specifies the dis-

15 18 Check the Auto box next to Locate
tance (in scale inches or mm) between Opening to have the Automatic
automatic dimension lines. Dimension tool locate doors and windows
Min. Dimen Area specifies the mini- automatically. If the check is removed, open-
16 ings may still be located using the Manual
mum enclosed area needed for the
Automatic Dimension tool to generate Dimension tool.
dimensions.
19 Check the Auto box next to Overall
Dimension to have the Automatic
17 The Current Layer box defines the
User layer which manually drawn Dimension tool locate the overall exterior
dimension lines will be placed on. Enter a dimensions.
Layer number between 100-199 to place
manual dimensions on a User layer. The default settings for dimension line
Color, Style and Line Weight are defined
The default is NONE, which means that
in the Layers dialog on the layers Manual
Manual dimensions will be placed on the
Dimensions and Automatic Dimensions. If
Architectural layer - Manual Dimensions. the dimension line was placed on a
numbered CAD layer, then these
attributes are set by that layer.
Locate Items Tab
1 9
2 10
3
4
5
6 11
7 12
8
The Locate Items tab defines whether or not Walls - This section affects both the Auto-
dimension lines locate specific types of matic and Manual Dimension tools.
items. Changes made in this box affect only
new dimension lines, not those already
drawn.
472
1 Choose Surfaces to locate exterior 6 Sides - Select the check box to locate
Managing
walls by outer surface and interior walls cabinet sides. The sides must be per-
by one of their surfaces. pendicular to the dimension line.
Files
2 Choose Main Layer Surfaces to
locate exterior walls by the outer sur-
face of the main layer and interior walls by a
main layer surface.
Managing
3 Check Interior Wall Centers to
Files
have dimension lines locate the centers
of interior walls. (Exterior walls will be
dimensioned by the option selected above.)
4 Check Both Wall Surfaces to have
Managing
dimension lines locate both surfaces of
walls. It will dimension the wall thickness as
Files
well. The surface dimensioned will be either
the outside surface or the main layer surface,
depending on the option selected above.
Corners - Select the check box to
5 Checking Internal Only will cause 7
locate the corners of all cabinets within
the dimensions to ignore the interior
surface of exterior walls. It will still locate the manual reach area. Angled cabinets will
both surfaces of an interior wall, but will not be dimensioned to their corners at a right
display the wall thickness. Internal only is angle to the dimension line.
Dimensions
Both Wall Surfaces
Both Wall Surfaces & Internal only

available only when Both Wall Surfaces is
checked.
Managing
Cabinets - Choose none, one, or both

Files
locate options. This section affects only

Electrical (does not save) - Select
Manual Dimensions. 8
the check box to locate electrical items.
You can use this option once you are ready to
473
precisely position electrical items. Dimen- CAD Items - Affects only Manual Dimen-
sions to electrical items are for the current sions of 2D items.
session only. Line/Sides - Select the check box to
11
Openings - Select the check box for the locate lines and sides which are perpen-
preferred method of dimensioning windows dicular to the dimension line. If the lines or
and doors. This section affects both the Auto- sides are not perpendicular to the dimension
matic and Manual Dimension tools. line they will not be dimensioned. In CAD
Centers - Select the check box to mode dimensions will automatically locate
9 perpendicular CAD lines or sides whether
locate dimensions to the center of win-
dows and doors. this is selected or not.
Sides - Select the check box to locate Ends/Corners - Select the check box
10 12
both sides of windows and doors. This to locate all ends of lines or corners of
does not dimension the rough opening. It polylines, no matter what angle they are in
dimensions to the nominal width defined by relation to the dimension line.
the user.
If neither box is checked, Automatic

dimensions will default to locating the
centers of openings if Locate Openings
Auto is also selected on the Setup tab.
Manually drawn dimensions will not locate
openings at all.
Arrowheads Tab
2
3
The Arrowheads tab controls the arrowhead Fill Color - If the arrowhead has an
2
style of all dimension lines which have not area which can be filled, select the
been set individually. You can assign differ- desired color from the Fill Color drop down
ent types of arrowheads, fill the arrowheads list. There are 16 colors available in the pro-
with different colors and define the size. gram.
Type - Choose the style of arrowhead
1
from the list.
474
Edit Dimension Line Dialog
Size - This number is the length of the be 1/8” long when printed, and you plan to
3
Managing
arrowhead in scale inches (mm). It is print at 1/4”=1’ scale, you should set the size
the length of the arrowhead, not the line to 6.
Files
attached to it. If you want the arrowhead to
Edit Dimension Line Dialog
Managing
Files
1
5
2
6
3
Managing
4 7
Files
8
9
Dimensions may be modified individually in External Only - Select the check box
4
the Edit Dimension Line dialog. Select the to have a dimension which is set to
individual dimension line and click the Open locate both sides of the wall, locate only the
Item button twice. This is not a double- outermost layer of the exterior walls. It will
click. The first click will display multiple still locate both sides of the interior walls but
editing handles. The second click will open will not display the wall thickness.
Dimensions
the dialog. Default Arrowhead - Select the
5
Number Height - Define a new num- check box to set this line’s arrowhead to
1 the default type that is set in the Dimension
ber height for the selected dimension.
Type "d" in the box to reset the number size Setup dialog.
to the default. Type - Select a different arrowhead for
6
Layer - Define a User layer to contain this dimension string.
2
the selected dimension. Type NONE to Default Color - Select the check box
reset the dimension to the Manual Dimen- 7
to use the default arrowhead fill color
sion layer or the Automatic Dimensions as set in the Dimension Setup dialog.
layer. The dimension line will reflect the line
Fill Color - Choose a different Fill
color and style of the layer it is on. 8
Color for this specific arrowhead.
Inches Only - Select the check box to
3
Managing
Size - Specify the size of this arrow-

change the display from feet and inches 9
head. This will be in scale inches (or
Files
to inches only. Uncheck it to display that

mm). If this value has been changed, and you
dimension in feet and inches.
wish to restore it to the default value, replace
the current value with "d".
475
Changing the Font Style

Select Edit> Preferences> Appearance> Things to know:
Font to change the default dimension font. • Fonts can be added. Architectural style
Click Dimensions, then press the Choose fonts are available for purchase. Installing
Font button. Select the desired dimension fonts is a standard Windows® procedure.
font from the list of available fonts. Click Once installed properly, the new font will
OK to accept the change. be in the list of available fonts.
This font will become the new default for • Modern is the font used for many pen
dimensions for every Chief Architect plan, plotters. It is also a good one to try if
existing as well as new. It can be changed at dimensions begin to act unusual. This is
any time. If Chief Architect cannot find the the only non-True Type font Chief Archi-
font you specify, or if the font you specify is tect can use.
invalid for whatever reason, Chief will sub-
stitute Arial. • Arial is the Chief Architect default font
style, because it comes standard with all
versions of Windows®.
• Notice that other default fonts may be
redefined here as well.
Moving Dimension Lines

If a wall is moved, the dimensions remain in If a manually drawn dimension is in the
the original location. If the dimensions were wrong location, select the dimension line. A
generated automatically, regenerate them single red handle will display at the midpoint
again to have them update to the new wall of the dimension line. Drag from this handle
location. to move the dimension line perpendicular to
itself.
Erasing/Deleting Dimension Lines

Dimensions may be erased by drawing Delete dimension lines by selecting the line
another dimension line over the first line. and clicking the Delete button or pressing
The entire dimension line or only a section the Del key on the keyboard.
may be erased in this way.
476
Modifying Components of a Dimension Line
Modifying Components of a Dimension Line
Managing
Files
Managing
Dimension lines may be completely custom- line. Each of these handles allows you to edit
Files
ized. Once created, any dimension may be the dimension line in some way. Once a
selected and its individual components modi- change is made, the handles will disappear.
fied. Numbers may be moved, and existing To make another change, repeat the selection
extension lines may be moved or deleted process.
individually and new extension lines may be
Managing
The handles are located in one of three loca-
added. tions:
Files
To open a dimension line for editing, double- • at a Number
click on the dimension line while in Select
• at the Intersection of the dimension line
Items mode or Dimension mode. (Or
with an extension line, or
select the dimension, then click the Open
Item button on the Edit toolbar). Several • beyond the dimension line.
red handles will appear along the dimension
Handle at a Number
Dimensions
Grab the handle at a number to move the
number.
Handle at Extension Lines to Walls or Openings
Grab Handle. Drag to right Drag to left

(snaps to side). (snaps to side).
Managing
Files
An extension line to a wall or opening may Extension lines may be “snapped” to the fol-
be “snapped” to centers, sides, or surfaces of lowing areas of multipart walls:
the same item by grabbing the handle and 1. exterior surfaces
dragging it in line with the arrow cursor.
477
2. The center of the entire multipart wall 3. Both edges of the MAIN wall layer
You cannot snap to the center of the MAIN

wall layer. If this dimension is needed, first
draw a CAD line in the correct location,
then dimension to that CAD line.
Moving Extension Lines to Other Items
Grab handle to move. Drag to new item. Result.

An extension line to any item may be moved
to any other item by selecting the handle and
dragging it to the appropriate area of the sec-
ond item.
Deleting Extension Lines

An extension line may be totally eliminated 2. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of
and the remaining dimensions will update the arrows
appropriately. To remove an extension line: 3. Release it over empty space.
1. Grab its handle.
Grab handle to Drag perpendicular Dimension line updates.

eliminate. and release.
478
Precisely Locating Items Using Dimensions
Adding New Extensions Using Handle Suspended in Space
Managing
Files
Grab handle. Drag to destination. Extension line added.
Release.
Managing
Files
Use to add new extension lines to the
selected dimension line. Grab either handle
that is beyond the extension line end, drag to
the end, center, corner, etc. of the desired
item and release.
Managing
Files
Precisely Locating Items Using Dimensions
Any item may be located quickly by altering As you drag, watch to see which dimensions
the dimension value which locates it. This update. These dimensions are the dimensions
technique can be applied to nearly any situa- which may be used to move that item.
tion where a dimension is available. If the To move an item accurately:
appropriate dimension line is not already
available, create it using the techniques cov- 1. Select the item and click on the dimen-
ered in the previous section. Mastering this sion that will be used to locate it.
technique will save you time and frustration. 2. The Set Dimension Line dialog will
Dimensions
open.
Select the item to move, then click on the
number in the related dimension line to
redefine its value. Type the new value into
the Set Dimension Line dialog that
appears. Click OK. The selected item
move appropriately. The Previous Value will be displayed.
3. Enter a value in the New Value in the
If you do not know which dimension is
field to relocate the item.
related to the item you want to move, select
the item and drag it in the desired direction. 4. The selected item will be moved unless
Managing
Moving a CAD Item Using Dimension Lines

Files
The same principles apply when moving locate CAD items on the Locate Items tab of
CAD items. Make sure dimensions are set to the Dimension Setup dialog.
479
When two items are parallel, selecting one are in the desired location. Sometimes it may
will create a temporary dimension line to the be easier to position a manually created
other. This temporary dimension line may be dimension for moving an item rather than
used to move the CAD item. Always make using temporary dimensions which locate the
sure that the endpoints of the dimension line wrong sides.
Resize a House With Exterior Dimensions

When you are resizing a house using dimen- 2. Select a wall, click a related dimension,
sions it is important that you work your way type new values, click OK.
around the house in one direction.
Relocate one wall at a time in succession so
that you do not redefine specified dimen-
sions.
This task is much easier to accomplish before
interior walls, doors and windows are placed
in the model.
1. Sketch the general shape of the house
using the Wall tool. Generate exterior
dimensions with the Automatic Exte-
rior Dimen tool.
3. Generate Automatic Dimensions again.

4. Fill the screen.
5. Repeat steps 2 & 3, adjusting each wall
sequentially as you work your way
around the house until done.
This method is useful for drawing a house

whose walls are longer than you can drag on
screen.
480
Chapter 27:
Text & Schedules
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Using Fonts
In Chief Architect you may use multiple been individually defined in the Text Entry
fonts within the same file. Only one font may dialog will be used for that particular text
be defined for each text item, but each text item.
Managing
item may use a different font.
Files
Text
If you are sharing files across different
Default fonts are set globally. They are stored computers you should make sure all
in the Windows Registry and affect all plans. computers have the same default font
When a plan file is opened, the program settings. If default font preferences are
references the Text Items panel of the different, text items using the default font
Managing
Preferences dialog. Text items that have not will draw differently. This affects wrapping
Files
been individually defined use the default font and the amount of space that a text item uses.
specified in this dialog. Any font which has
Creating Text Items

Text may be added in Plan View, Section/ The Text Entry dialog is used for the
Elevation Views, interior elevations or on the creation of a new text item and for the editing
layout sheet. The techniques are the same. of an existing one. It can also be displayed
for a selected group that contains only text
In Architectural mode, click the Text items.
button or select Tools> Text> Text. Once the
Schedules
Text mode is active, click in the active view When text is group selected, the actual text
Text &
where the center of the first line of text will content of the items cannot be changed, but
appear. everything else (character height, color,
transparent background, etc.) can be.
The Text Entry dialog displays. Almost
everything relating to text items is
established or modified in this dialog. In
Section/Elevation Views or Wall
Elevation Views, the CAD tools must be
activated before text may be added.
481
Text Entry Dialog
2 3
4 6
5 7
Text Entry Box - Enter the new text. Make Default - Select the check box
1 3
Do not press the Enter key until totally to change the setting in the Preferences
done entering text and making any other dialog to match the setting in this Text Entry
modifications. Text will automatically flow dialog. This new character height becomes
to the new line. the height for subsequently created items.
To force a new line in the text box, hold Use transparent background -
4
down the Ctrl key and press Enter . Select the check box to change the text
background so that it is transparent, allowing
To jump from the text entry area to items behind the text to show through.
Character Height using the keyboard, Unless this is checked, text will have a
press Shift + Tab . background which will block out anything
behind it.
Character Height - Specify the text
2
height in scale inches. (When Metric Don’t rotate with plan - Select the
5
units are used, the height is in mm.) For check box to prevent the selected text
example, if you will be printing at ¼” = 1’-0” from rotating if the Rotate View command is
scale, then every 1’-0” or 12" on the plan invoked. If selected, the position of its center
would print in layout at ¼” high. If the point will rotate with the plan, but the angle
printed text size is to be 1/8”, the text of the text itself will not change.
Character Height should be 6.
Include Arrow - Select the check box
6
to have the text box add an arrow. Click
The actual height of the text is based on
the Arrow tab to define the arrowhead
the approximate height of an uppercase
character. There will be a small variation
appearance and size.
of height with different fonts. Second Arrow - Select the check box
7
to add a second arrow to the text item.
482
Creating Text Items
Attributes Tab
Managing
Files
1 2
Managing
Files
3 4
5
6 7
Managing
8 9
Files
Color - Change the color for the Font - Click to select a different font
1 6
selected text item(s) by choosing a for the selected text item(s).
different color from the list.
Use Default - Select the check box to
7
Use default - Select the check box to make the text items use the default font
2
Managing
define the color by the Layer color as set in the Preferences dialog.
Files
defined in the Layers dialog.
Tabs - The edit box defines the
8
Layer - Define the Layer for the number of spaces from the left edge of
3
selected text item(s). If the Layer is set the text box at which each new column will
to NONE it refers to the Architectural layer begin. The first column will always start at
Text in Layers dialog. the 0 location. In this case, the second
To change the layer to a CAD layer, enter the column (following the first Tab )starts 10
appropriate number between 0 and 199. spaces in, the next at 20 spaces, etc. Default
Tab settings can be defined in the
Make Default - Select the check box Preferences dialog.
4
to have the newly defined CAD layer
become the default layer for subsequently
Schedules
This is the most accurate and
created text items. If a CAD layer is used and
Text &
reproducible way to set tabs. It is also the
the Use Default check box is selected next most difficult. The method described
to the Color menu, the color of the new layer under "Tab Spacing" on page 443 is
will replace the previous color. faster.
Display of text items is controlled by the

layer properties for the assigned layer. 9 Check Display Grid to have a text
item with tabs display with gridlines
The name of the current font style for separating the rows and columns of tabbed
5 text. When no tabs are present, a box is
this text item is displayed.
drawn around the text.
483
Arrow Tab Type - Choose the type of arrowhead

2
for the selected text item(s).
Fill Color - Choose a color to fill the
3
arrowhead. This will only affect the
1 styles of arrows which have a filled area.
2 Size - Specify the size (in inches or
4
millimeters) for the arrowhead.
3
Special Use - Select the check box to
4 5
turn this arrow into a Special Use
arrow.
5
Currently the Special Use Arrow will
Include Arrow - Select the check box replace the first number in the text item with
1 the height of a footing, a slab, a foundation
to have an arrow attached to the
selected text item(s). This is the same as slab, a custom counter top, a stair landing
checking it on the Text tab. when the arrow is placed on one of these
items. The text prior to the first number is
limited to 50 characters.
Selecting Text Items

To select a single text item, click on the text text to be selected. Only text items will
item while in Text or Select Items be selected.
mode, or right-click on it in any mode. When 3. Add to or subtract from the selection set
the handles display, click the Open Item by holding down the Shift key and click-
button to access the Text Entry dialog for ing on items.
that individual text item. You may also open If the marquee is used in Select or other
the text item for specification by double- modes, additional items such as cabinets,
clicking on the text item in either Text or furniture and CAD items will also be
Select Items mode. selected.
Multiple text items may be selected by If a group contains only text items, clicking
dragging a selection marquee while in Text on the Open Item button displays the Text
mode. This selection method will limit the Entry dialog. You cannot change the
selections to text only. contents of the selected items, but you can
change anything else. If a group contains
1. Activate the Text tool. even one other item, such as a CAD item,
2. Then hold down the Shift key and drag a then the Open Item button will instead
marquee across the area containing the display the Edit CAD Item dialog.
484
Reshaping Text Items
Deleting Text Delete the entire text item (or group of items)
Managing
Delete some of the contents of a text box by by selecting it, then clicking the Delete
Files
opening the text item and using the Backspace button or the Del key.
or Del key in the Text Entry dialog. Click
OK and the text will update in your view.
Managing
Reshaping Text Items
Files
The rectangle surrounding a text item can be reshape the text box accordingly. As the
made either wider or narrower, forcing the display area narrows, the number of text
contents to fit on fewer lines or more lines. lines will increase.
To reshape a text item, select it. When the
Managing
handles appear, move the cursor above the
handle on either of the two sides. When the
Files
cursor changes to a double-headed arrow,
click down and drag the edge in or out to
Managing
Moving Text Items
Files
A single text item will move freely in any 2. Hold down the Ctrl key, grab the center
direction. handle, and move the items freely in any
1. Select the text item. direction.
2. Move the cursor above the center red 3. When the items are selected, click the
handle. Point-to-Point Move button at the
right side of the toolbar. Then either drag
3. When the cursor turns into the four-
the cursor from any location to any other
headed Move cursor, click and drag location, or click on the start location
the text item to the new location. then click on the end location. If you
drag between the two points, the
Schedules
selected items will be restricted to a ver-
Text &
tical or horizontal move. If you click
between the two points, there are no
When text items are group selected, move restrictions in direction.
them as a unit using one of the following
methods:
1. Grab the center handle and move the
items vertically or horizontally.
485
Rotating Text Items

Select the text items. Grab the triangular
handle at the top and drag the cursor right or
left to rotate the text. The text will rotate.
Text on Different Layers

Unless specified otherwise text items are accomplish this, by assigning text items to
normally placed on the Architectural layer different CAD layers for each plotting
“Text”. A text item can be placed on any scenario you may have.
CAD layer so that it displays and can be
To move text to a different layer, select the
edited only when the specified layer
text item or group of items, then click the
displays. (It is highly recommended that you
use CAD layers on the User tab of the Open Item button. The Text Entry dialog
Layers dialog, see “Cad Layers” on page will open. Change the value in the Layer
152.) field to be a CAD layer number, usually
between 100 and 199.
Many text items should only display at
certain times. For instance, electrical notes For more information see “Layers Dialog”
can be attached to the Electrical plan, so they on page 148.
are not be visible in the Framing plan. To
Copy, Cut and Paste

Copy, Cut and Paste of text in the Text Entry This means that your General Notes can be
dialog uses the Windows clipboard. This created and saved in any word processing
makes it possible to tranfer text from your program, and then the different sections may
plan into other applications or to import text be copied from there and pasted into a text
from any program in Windows and input that box. It also means that sections of the
text into Chief Architect. Material List can be copied and then pasted
into a text box or into a word processing
program or spreadsheet program.
486
Printing Text
Printing Text
Managing
Files
Sometimes a text previous column, a problem which only
item does not shows when zoomed in or when printing. To
actually print the check for possible print problems with text
way it appears items, Zoom quite close to the text. The
on screen. In this text will print as it displays at close range.
Managing
example, the
This problem is more likely to occur when
Files
columns appear
to be separate the font used by the printer is different that
when seen at a the font used on screen. Consult your printer
distance yet the documentation for more information on font
quantity for each door overlaps the end of the substitution.
Managing
Files
Tab Spacing
Tab spacing for tabbed text items can be 5. The text item will appear on screen.
visually edited. 6. Select the text item and note the addi-
Managing
For example: tional lines with handles separating each
Files
column.
1. Highlight a block of items from the
7. Drag the handles to easily adjust column
Material List, and press Ctrl +C to copy
spacing.
the selected items to the Windows clip-
board.
2. Return to the Plan View and activate the
Text tool.
3. Click on screen to place a text item. 1
4. Press Ctrl +V to paste the copied materi-
als into the text box, then click OK.
Schedules
Text Restrictions Text &
Up to two thousand characters can be
inserted in one text item. The system will
truncate your text to this amount if you enter
any more. It is usually more convenient to
use several smaller text items if you have a
lot of text to insert.
487
Text in Wall Elevation and Cross Section Views

The Text tool in Wall Elevations and architectural layers cannot be accessed from
Section/Elevation Views is available either of these views.
through the CAD facility. It functions the The default Text layer may be accessed from
same as in Plan View. the 3D View if CAD mode is active, even
All CAD layers are also available in cross though most of the other architectural layers
section or elevation, but most of the are inaccessible.
Text on Layout Pages

Any Text placed on a layout page is layout page having the new number. Be
automatically assigned that page as its layer aware of this distinction.
number. Layer numbers in layout refer to The character height and arrowhead size for
sheets, not layers. The number does not layout text is its actual size when the layout
affect the color or any other characteristics of sheet is printed. Thus you can expect these
the text. Changing the layer number moves sizes to be much smaller than sizes used in
the text item (or any other CAD item) to the plan and other views. Layout text will be 1/
8” tall instead of 6".
Text Arrows
Text arrows can be modified individually, as 5. Grab the handle on the arrowhead and
well as globally. To add an arrow to a text position it on the plan.
entry:
1. Select the Text entry.
2. Click the Open Item button to open
6. If a bend or joint is needed in the Text
the Text Entry dialog.
Arrow, select the text again and this time
3. Check Include Arrow in the Text grab the middle handle of the arrow
Entry dialog to have a single arrow leader. This joint can be placed any-
attached from the midpoint of the text where.
box pointing straight left.
7. Move it into place.
4. Select the text. If a text item is moved, its arrow will remain
in place. If a joint has been added, remove it
by adjusting the arrow so it is nearly straight.
The joint will lock back in place as it was
when originally created, and the arrow will
488
Text Arrows
respond to movement as though there is no
Managing
joint.
Files
To remove the arrow, move its arrowhead
into the center of the text, or remove the
check for Include Arrow in the Text Entry
dialog.
Managing
Check Second Arrow to produce a second
arrow. It is positioned independently, but
Files
otherwise will behave just like the first one.
Arrow Tool
Managing
You can create just an arrow by clicking the
Files
Arrow button, which is on the Line child
toolbar. You may also enter Arrow mode by
selecting CAD> Special> Arrow from the
menu.
Managing
Draw an arrow like a line. When you release
Files
the mouse button, it will have an arrowhead
where you stop drawing. The arrowhead that
appears is the same in size and type as the
default arrowhead used with text items.
Change it by selecting one or more arrow
lines, displaying the Edit CAD Item dialog,
and clicking on the Arrow button.
This displays the CAD Arrow dialog that
lets you change the arrowhead parameters.
You can also add a second arrowhead to
Schedules
make a double-headed arrow.
Text &
You can connect arrows to form an arrow
polyline. The arrowheads appear only at the
free ends, not where the lines connect to
form the polyline.
489
Special Use Arrow
1
2
Original Number is replaced when

arrow is moved onto footing.
1. To use the Special Use Arrow feature the 4. Drag the arrow and place it on a stem
text needs to include a number. wall, footing, slab, foundation slab, cus-
2. Select Include Arrow on the Arrow tom counter top or stair landing.
tab. 5. The Special Use Arrow replaces the first
3. Select Special Use to change this number in the text with the height of the
arrow into a special use arrow. item it is on, relative to the first floor
elevation of 0’-0”.
6. You must Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
ings before the text will update.
490
Door & Window Schedules
Managing
Files
A schedule is essentially a large, tabbed, text Create a schedule by selecting Build>
item with grid lines separating rows and Window > Window schedule or Build>
columns. A door or window schedule Door > Door schedule. The Schedule
contains information from all the doors or Specification dialog displays with a check
windows on one or on all floors of your plan. box for each possible column that can appear
Managing
Once created, the schedule is updated in the schedule.
Files
automatically. Each time a window or door is Following is the Window Schedule
created, deleted, moved or otherwise altered, Specification which will be used by the
the schedule is updated. You may need to window schedule example on page 494.
select Window>Refresh Display F5 to
refresh the schedule on screen.
Managing
Files
Schedule Specification
These are the additional Window
Managing
subcategories created on page 83.
Files
Any subcategory may be used as a
1 column heading in the schedule by
selecting the check box next to it.
2
4
3 5
6
Number - This is the sequence of this
1 Select the check box for each of the
Schedules
columns you wish to appear in the schedule entry. (For example, one window
Text &
schedule. They will display in the same order will defined as W00, and the rest of the
they appear in the list. (Columns may be windows will be labeled sequentially.) This
added or removed at any time by selecting number may also be used as all or part of the
the schedule, clicking the Open Item button, door or window label.
and selecting or clearing check boxes.) Qty - Quantity of the items represented by
the row. These items match as far as the
The Number and Qty columns are unique in displayed columns show, but may differ if
that you may choose to display them on other columns are added to the schedule. For
either end or on both ends of the schedule.
example, if the schedule only listed the
491
Number, Quantity and Floor, all the Include Type is selected in the Label tab,
windows on that floor would appear with the the dimension will be followed by letters
same schedule number, even though the giving the window (or door) type.
windows might be different sizes and types.
R/O - Lists the rough opening size.
But the schedule does not show enough
information to distinguish them (although the Description - Displays the general
labels do). description of the window or door. This is the
same as that which appears in the Material
List Item column. It includes the type
(double hung or ext., hinged), and indicators
such as "ct" (circle top) or "at" (arched top),
and materials, if specified on the Material tab
By simply displaying one more column, of the object’s specification dialog.
suddenly the two windows are separated by
the schedule. Size would have also worked. Header - Displays the dimensions and
quantity of header stock for each item.
Thickness - Displays the door thickness.
This is available for door schedules only.
Code - Lists the value entered in the Name/
Code field in the Window or Door
Be careful to have sufficient columns to Specification dialog, or added to the Code
distinguish the windows (or doors). A 3040 cell in any of the material list areas
fixed glass window is not the same as a 3040 (Components dialog, Material List or
arch top window, but it may appear to be the Master Material list).
same in the schedule if Description is not
displayed. Manufacturer - Lists manufacturer
information, if added in any of the material
Floor - Displays the floor for each item in the list areas.
schedule. This column is usually needed only
if the check box for All Floors is selected. Remarks - Displays the information
entered in the Comments column of any of
Size - Displays the window or door size in the material list areas.
feet-inches (mm) according to the format
defined on the Label tab. A 3640 window In addition to the default columns, the dialog
means it is 3’6"x4’0", with the dimension will show a column for each subcategory
order being defined on the Label tab. Size defined under the Window and Door
does not show the units. They are implied. categories in the Preferences dialog (see
“Categories” on page 83.) Check any of
Dimension - Displays the dimension of the these to produce a column for that
opening, including the units, in the format subcategory’s information.
Width x Height. This is an alternate method
Floor - You can set the Floor whose
to display the size of an opening, and 2
typically only one method (Size or items appear in the schedule. This
Dimension) is used in a schedule. If defaults to the current floor. Check All
492
Floors to have all the windows (or doors) in Unless this is checked, the schedule will
Managing
the entire house appear in the schedule. have an opaque background which will block
out everything behind it.
Files
Size - Define a height for the Text in
3
the schedule. Check Make Default to Don’t Rotate With Plan - Select the
6
define this value for all subsequently created check box to prevent the schedule from
schedules. rotating when the Options> Rotate View
command is invoked.
Schedule Title - Select the check
Managing
4
box to include a title at the top of the
Files
window or door schedule. Attributes Tab
The Attributes tab of the Schedule
Use Transparent Background -
5 Specification dialog is similar to the
Select the check box to change the text Attributes tab of the Text Entry dialog (see
background so that it is transparent, allowing “Attributes Tab” on page 483.)
Managing
items behind the schedule to show through.
Files
Label Tab
Managing
2 5
Files
1 6
3
7
8
The Label tab of the Schedule Specification If no shape is selected and
dialog sets the type, size and appearance of Show Labels is also selected,
the door or window labels that display in the window or door is labeled
Plan View. with its size according to the format defined
by the other options selected on this tab.
Shape - There are six shapes that can
1
Schedules
be selected. The size of the shape is Size - Select which of the three
2
Text &
relative to the text contained in the shape. formats to use when displaying the
If a shape is selected and opening size. This will also affect the display
Show Labels is also
in the Size column of the schedule.
selected, the windows (or Include type - Select the check box
3
doors) will display the shaped label with the to append the Size and Dimension
schedule number and nothing else. All other columns (from the first tab) with letters that
label options (except for Character designate the opening type (ie. 3050DH
Height and Initial Offset) will have no describes a 3050 double hung window).
effect.
493
Include Schedule # You can suppress the display of the label for
4
- Displays the schedule an individual door or window by checking
number in front of the size. the No labels check box in the Options tab
Product Code of the Window or Door Specification
5 Label - Replaces the dialog. Turning off the label will remove that
size with the Name/Code item from the window or door schedule.
information added to the window (or door) Initial Offset - Specify the initial
on the General tab of its Window (or Door)
7
distance from the wall to the label.
Specification dialog. This information may Inside - Select the check box to initially
also be added to the Code column in any of position labels inside the room instead of on
the material list areas. the exterior side.
Show Labels - Select the check box
6 Labels are centered on the object that they
to display the window (or door) labels
are associated with. Labels can be
in Plan View. This is the same as selecting to
repositioned as a group or individually.
display the Window and Door Sizes layer
on the Architectural tab of the Layers Character Height - Specify the
8
dialog. height of characters (in inches or mm)
associated with the labels.
A Window Schedule Example
Here is a brief example explaining how to choose a subcategory from the drop-down list.
add additional information to windows. This Then rename the Item from "accessory" to the
simplistic example uses three windows. actual material information. If you need a new
First, create the two subcategories (page 83).
Then create the Window Schedule, with the
new subcategories set to display (page 491).
The shedule shown above already has the
first and second window modified to include
exterior trim and glazing. To add those subcategory, click Edit Sub Categories,
definitions to the third window, select the create it, then use the subcategory when you
window in Plan View and click the Compo- return to the Components dialog.
nents button. Click the Add button two The Window Schedule will update to reflect
times, and two rows of "accessories" will be the new materials as soon as you click OK.
added to the component material list. For each These materials will also be generated by the
accessory, click in the SubCat column and Material List.
494
Chapter 28:
Callouts & Markers
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Callouts
Select the Text tool, then the Callout the callout should be placed. The Enter Text
button to the right. Click in Plan View where for Callout dialog will display.
Managing
Files
Callout Tab
Managing &
Markers
Callouts
Files
2
Managing
Files
4
Callout Label - Enter the text for top Cross Section Line - Select the
1 3
row. The number of characters is check box to add a Cross Section Line.
limited to 10 in this field. There can be no Cross section lines may be added only to
more than 14 characters between the two text circles or hexagons.
fields.
Callouts &
4 Define the callout shape.

Markers
Text below line - Enter text for a

2
bottom row if desired.
495
Attributes Tab
1 2
3
4 5
Character Height - Define the Color - Define the Color of the callout.
1 4
Character Height of the callout text.
Use Default - Select the check box to
The callout will adjust in size based on text 5
use the color of the layer on which the
height.
callout is located, rather than defining the
Make Default - Select the check box color apart from the layer.
2
to have new callouts default to the new
Layer - Define the Layer on which the
Character Height. 6
callout is to be placed.
No Rotate with Plan - Select the
3 If the layer is called NONE, the callout will
check box to prevent the callout from
be located on the layer named Text on the
rotating when the plan is rotated. The
Architectural tab in the Layers dialog.
callout’s center will still move with other
Otherwise enter a number between 0 and 199
items as the plan rotates, but the orientation
here.
of the callout will not change.
496
Selecting Callouts
Arrow Tab
Managing
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
3
Type - Choose the type of arrowhead arrowhead. This will only affect the styles of
1
desired for the selected text item(s). arrows which have a filled area.
3 Size - Specify the size (in inches or
Managing
Fill Color - Choose a color to fill the
2 millimeters) for the arrowhead.
Files
Selecting Callouts
In Select Items mode or in Callout mode, If more than one callout is selected, Open
Managing
click on the Callout to be selected. You may Item will display the Edit CAD Item
Files
also group select the callouts by holding dialog instead of the Enter Text for Callout
down the Shift key and dragging a marquee dialog.
around them while in Callout mode.
Managing
Pointers, Arrows and Callouts
Files
Callouts can have arrows and pointers added. 5. Change the direc-
Circles without cross section lines can have tion of a pointer by
several pointers added. Circles with a cross selecting the call-
section lines can have only one pointer out and dragging
added. the red handle
appearing just beyond the pointer.
To add a pointer to a callout:
6. Remove a pointer by selecting the call-
1. Select the callout. out and dragging the pointer’s handle
2. Click immediately outside the circle. A into the center of the callout.
pointer will be created. 7. Change a pointer into an arrow by drag-
Callouts &
Markers
3. Repeat as necessary. ging the handle away from the callout.

4. If there is a cross section line, only one You can form up to two arrows in this
pointer may be created. way. Each arrow will be jointed and
behave the same as a text item arrow.
497
Editing Callout Attributes

Text, size, layer, and color can be changed Deleting Callouts
for an existing callout. Select the callout. Select the callout (s). Click the Delete
Click the Open Item button. The Enter button or press the Del key.
Text for a Callout dialog will open. Make
the changes in the dialog. You may also
double-click on the callout while in
Copying Callouts
Copy callouts like you would text items.
Callout mode.
Moving & Rotating Callouts
Cross Section Lines
Move and rotate callouts as you would text.
Select the Cross Section Line check box
to have a cross section line added Drag from its center handle to move the
perpendicular to the nearest wall. Move or callout.
stretch the cross section line by selecting the
A triangular handle will appear just outside
callout and dragging from the handle near the
any callout except a circle. Drag this to rotate
end of the cross section line.
the callout.
Delete a cross section line by selecting the
callout and grabbing the handle located near Resizing Callouts
the end of the cross section line and dragging Resize a callout by changing its character
it to the center of the callout. Or you can height in the Enter Text for Callout dialog.
open the specification and clear the Cross Adding more text to either the top or bottom
Section Line check box. area will enlarge the callout’s size.
498
Markers
Markers
Managing
Files
Markers for Level lines, Test borings and To create a marker select the Marker
Point elevations can be placed in a plan, button from the Text child toolbar. Click in
cross section, or CAD Detail. Framing Plan View to create a marker. The Enter
Reference Markers are placed only in Plan Marker Text dialog will appear.
View.
Managing
Files
Marker Tab
Managing
1
Files
2
3
Managing
4
Files
5
Managing
Files
Text Above Line - Enter optional vertical position of Special CAD item, and
1
text to be placed above the line. Marker Lot Perimeter.
text is limited to a total of 78 characters
Marker Radius - Enter the radius, in
between the two text fields. 5
inches (or millimeters) for the marker.
Text Below Line - Enter optional
2
text to be placed below the line (Level Attributes Tab
line marker only). The Attributes tab for markers is identical to
Marker Type - Choose the type of that for callouts.
3
marker to create.
Selecting Markers
Callouts &
Markers
Height - Enter the Height of the

4 In Select Items mode or in Marker mode,
marker in 3D space. Changes will not
affect Plan View. Marker height affects click on the marker to be selected.
499
You may also group select the markers by the location first if necessary. (CAD points
holding down the Shift key and dragging a can be positioned at a specific location in
marquee around them while in Select Items space using the Move Point dialog.) A new
mode. marker or moved marker positioned near a
CAD point, CAD item, or wall surface will
Deleting Markers snap to it.
Select the marker(s). Click the Delete
Rotating Markers
button or press the Del key.
Only the Level Line Marker can be rotated.
Select it, then grab the handle at the end of
Moving Markers the line between the two rows of text. Drag
Move markers as you do text items. Or use the handle to rotate (or stretch) it. The text
the CAD Point-to-Point move to position will always be centered along the line.
the marker precisely. Place a CAD point in
500
Chapter 29:
The CAD Facility
CAD
New in 7.0
• CAD Block Management • Definable dashed line spacing
• Ability to create CAD details library • Splines for free-flowing curves
Managing
• CAD Arrow tool • Polyline Intersection
Files
CAD
• Many more CAD layers • Polyline Unions
• Fix Footprint capability • Polyline Subtraction
General Information
Managing
Files
With the 2D CAD facility included with Remember that CAD lines are only 2D and
Chief Architect you can add the necessary are superimposed on the 3D view (whether it
details to create complete working drawings. be the plan, cross section, elevation, or lay-
Cross section details may be created once out windows). They do not effect the 3D
and then used multiple times. Property lines objects, nor do they appear in other 3D
Managing
are quick to lay out. Custom 2D symbols views, with a few exceptions. Several items
Files
may be created and then copied into appro- (such as custom countertops) may be created
priate plans. Individual elevations and cross from a CAD polyline and then turned into a
sections may also be customized. 3D item.
Managing
Overview of the CAD Drawing Tools
Files
CAD Mode Toggle—Click to toggle Line—Draw CAD lines. Double-click to
between Architectural and CAD mode. draw a line from current point to a key-
board-specified location.
Select—Select items for editing. Dou-
Libraries
ble-click to display the CAD panel of the Arrow—Draw a CAD line with an
Symbol
Preferences dialog. arrow head at the end.
Line Tools North Pointer—Draw a North arrow to

define the direction of true North.
501
Sun Angle—Draw a Sun Angle arrow. Oval—Draw circle and resize to oval.
See “Sun Angle & Shadows” on
page 704. Point—Single click to place a point.
Double-click to place a point at a speci-
Arc Tools fied distance from the current point.
Arc—Draw an arc by dragging. Double-

Dimension Tools
click to draw an arc from current point to
a keyboard specified location. Dimension—Single click to draw a
dimension line. Double-click to open the
Arc About Center—Click on screen to Dimension Setup dialog.
draw an arc around the current point.
End-to-End Dimension—Produce a
Spline—Drag from end to end to draw a dimension line between two items only.
smooth curve passing through the points.
Text & Marker Tools
Box Tools Text—Click on screen to add text.
Box—Draw resizable box. Also displays
more buttons to the right. Callout – Click on screen to add callout
Framing—Draw 1-1/2” (38 mm) wide Marker—Click on screen to add marker

box. Use for general framing. Draw
Insert Bitmap—Click to insert a bitmap
Joists and rafters after clicking on Joist
into the view. The bitmap will be con-
or Rafter in Plan View. tained in a CAD box.
Cross Box—Draw resizable box con- Other Tools used while Drawing
taining a cross.
Restrict Angles/Unrestrict Angles—
Insulation—Draw resizable insulation. Toggle the angle restriction.
Use for cross section detail.
Edit Polyline Parts—Toggle ability to
Rectangular Polyline—Drag a rectan- edit individual components of polylines
gular, closed polyline.
Delete Points—Delete all CAD points
Circle Tools simultaneously.
Circle—Draw circle by dragging across Refresh Display—Refresh the screen.

diameter.
Color On/Color Off—Toggle the color
Circle about center—Draw circle by in the view.
dragging from its center out along its
radius. Library Browser - Open the general
Library Browser window.
502
Using the CAD Toolbar
Several CAD options do not have a but- CAD Detail: Create a special, namable win-
ton, but are only accessible through the dows which can be used for plot
CAD menu. Each item not represented plans and other details.
CAD
with a button is described. The Tools Snap To: Move the current point or cur-
pull-down menu has another feature, a rently selected item to the speci-
CAD Detail window, available as well. fied snap point.
CAD Block Mgmt: Organize CAD Blocks. Plan Footprint: Create a bare floor plan in a
Insert, delete or purge blocks. CAD Detail, used primarily for
plot plans.
Using the CAD Toolbar
Managing
This section will explain in more detail how this section as well, but the more extensive
to use each of the buttons in the CAD tool- coverage of advanced editing features will be
Files
bar. Some basic editing features (such as how covered in a later section.
to move an item, etc.) will be touched on in
Managing
Lines
Files
Managing
Files
Comparison of two shapes which appear identical when
Comparison of a single line and a polyline. unselected. When each lower edge is selected, the item on
Unselected, they appear identical. Selected, the left shows that the lower edge is not attached to the rest
of the lines. To the right, the lower edge is part of a larger
Managing
the handles are very different.
polyline unit.
Files
Click the Line button once to activate arc, the current line will snap to and join to
Line mode. Drag to draw lines from begin- the other line.
ning to end, just like walls are drawn. Like This new entity is a polyline, which is sim-
walls, a line may be drawn back on itself to ply two or more lines and/or arcs joining end
erase a section. If Auto Snap is checked (in
Managing
to end into a single unit. If one end of the

the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog) polyline is connected to the other, it becomes
Files
and the beginning and/or end of a line is a closed polyline. Closed polylines may
drawn near the endpoint of a different line or be filled with a hatch pattern, or the closed
polyline may be turned into special 3D items
503
such as counter top or slabs which will then There are three different ways to specify the
display in 3D. location of the second endpoint of the line.
Lines and polylines are quickly identifiable • Absolute Location requires input of
by selecting the item and observing the han- the X Position and Y Position which
dles. Two seemingly identical items may are related to a Cartesian coordinate sys-
actually be very different. tem. There actually is a (0,0) point in
Chief Architect, although it is rarely used.
Drawing Lines by If this method makes no sense to you, rest
Keyboard Entry assured that you have no need to use it.
Use one of the other, more common meth-
There is a method which is slower than drag- ods.
ging, but more precise, in which each line is
• Relative to Current Point (Line
drawn using values entered from the key-
Start) requires input of the X Distance
board. This method is ideal when the desired
(horizontal) and Y Distance (vertical) to
length and angle of each line is known
locate the next endpoint. This method is
beforehand, such as with property lines.
easier to use when one of the two values is
Before any line can be drawn using this sec-
0, which means you are going straight hor-
ond method, a starting point needs to be
izontally or vertically.
defined.
1. Click the Line button, then click on the
screen to place a red “X” on screen. Every
“X” defines a “point”, and the red “X”
defines the current point.
2. Once this starting point has been estab-
lished, double-click the Line button.
The New Line End dialog will open allow-
ing you to type in the values defining the
second endpoint of the line.
• Relative to Current Point, Polar

requires input of the Distance and the
Angle between the start point and the
new line endpoint. This is the most typical
504
Lines
method for property lines. Angles may be from this handle will move the line perpen-
either bearings or decimal degrees. dicular to itself, jumping at increments
defined in the CAD panel of the Preferences
CAD
dialog. To move the line freely in any direc-
tion, press and hold the Ctrl key, then drag
from the handle to move the line.
Stretching a Line
Select a line. End handles display. Drag from
these handles lengthen or shorten the line.
If Allowed Angles are restricted, drag
the end handle along the line to
lengthen or shorten the line. (Note
Managing
that when the button is up, Allowed
Files
3. To draw the line, enter the information and Angles are restricted.)
click the Next button at the bottom of the
dialog. This draws the specified line with- If Allowed Angles is unrestricted, the
out exiting the dialog so that the program end of the line can be dragged any-
is ready for you to input the next values. where, and snapped to a point or CAD
Managing
The current point will be at the end of the object. (Note that when the button is down,
Files
most recently drawn line. The next line Allowed Angles are unrestricted.)
will be drawn from this point. Continue This new handle may also be used to change
entering the new values and clicking Next a line into an arc. (See “Change Line to Arc”
until the polyline is finished. Then click on page 510.)
OK to exit the dialog. If the dialog is in the
Managing
This also works on the end of an open
way as you are using it, simply click in the polyline.
Files
title bar and drag it to a better location on
the screen. If you accidentally click OK
instead of Next and you need to continue
drawing the polyline using the New Line
End dialog, double-click the Line but-
Managing
ton again.
Files
Moving a Line
Select a line. Do not click on the line while in
Line mode, or a red “X”, or point, will
Managing
appear. When selected, a single line will have

Files
a handle at its midpoint. Place the cursor

above the handle to display the two-headed
arrow Move entire item option. Dragging
505
Arcs
Selected arc Drag from left Drag from han- Drag from tri- Drag from Move using
handle dle at arc mid- angular han- right han- center han-
point. dle. dle. dle.
In Arc mode, draw arcs from beginning to Unlike other items, the triangular handle on
end. Moving the cursor along the curve while an arc is not used to rotate the item. Instead,
dragging the arc will cause the arc to curve it is used to reshape the curvature of the arc
accordingly. The position of the endpoints is between the endpoints.
most important. The curvature of the arc can For information on how to change the angle
be changed later of an arc, or to change any of its specifica-
Arcs draw much more smoothly if walls are tions using the keyboard, see “Edit Arc Dia-
set to allow 7 ½ degree angles. (Choose log” on page 557.
Options>Defaults Setup>Plan Setup to define
the wall allowed angles.)
Drawing Arcs Using Keyboard
Arcs draw more smoothly if Allowed Like a line, an arc may
Angles are unrestricted. be drawn using the
keyboard method.
Editing Arcs Using Handles 1. First, define a start
point by clicking on
1. Select an arc to modify it. Five red handles
appear. the screen in Arc
2. Place the cursor over each of the handles mode. The red “X”
to display an arrow showing the type of defines the current
editing which will result if that handle is point, which is the
dragged. The result of dragging from each start point for the
handle is illustrated above. new arc.
3. If a single arc is selected, you may also 2. When this start point is established, dou-
grab an end handle and drag along the ble-click the Arc button. The New Arc
curve of the arc itself to lengthen or dialog will open allowing you to type in
shorten the arc. the values defining the endpoint of the arc,
plus its curvature and direction.
506
Arcs
3. Choose either the Start Direction or Also referred to as Arc Length.

the Chord Direction by selecting the Length of Chord: The length of the
appropriate radio button. Ignore the value
CAD
straight line from one endpoint to the
of the unselected item, as it has nothing to other. Also referred to as Chord Length.
do with the arc actually being drawn.
6. Select which direction the arc bends, either
cw (clockwise) or ccw (counter
clockwise).
5. Click OK to draw the specified arc.
Note: If the current point is a line (or arc)

Start Direction=0 Chord Direction=45 end point, the Start Direction defaults to its
The Start Direction defines the current direction (or direction of that end
of the existing arc). This makes it easy to
angle of the line tangent to the arc
Managing
draw smooth curves that blend into
at the start point. The Chord
Files
straight sections.
Direction defines the angle of the
imaginary line connecting the two
arc endpoints. Draw Arc About Center
The two arcs shown above are identical Select the Arc about ctr button to draw an
Managing
in every way except for the defined arc by defining the center and then the end
Files
Direction. The “X” identifies the first points.
point of each arc. The arrow shows the
1.Press Arc about ctr button.
angle defined by the terms Start
Direction and Chord Direction.
2. Click once to define the center. If you do
not first click on the arc's center point, the
4. Define the Radius of the arc.
Managing
current point (red X) will be used as a cen-
5. Define one of the values in the Extension
Files
ter point.
group:
3. Click and drag from the start point of the
Degrees in Arc: The positive number arc around to its end point.
of degrees from the center point of the
Both the center point and the start point will
arc to each of its two endpoints. Also
snap to any appropriate nearby CAD item,
Managing
referred to as Arc Angle.
intersection or point. The end point will also
Files
snap, but only to determine the angle of the
arc's end point. The radius has already been
fixed when the start point was positioned.
Lock Center Arc

Managing
Files
An arc drawn using the Arc about ctr

Length of Arc: The length along the button will have a locked center.
arc itself from one endpoint to the other.
507
A locked center arc will extend along its arc A locked center arc will extend along its arc
when snapping to another CAD item. when snapping to another CAD item. A non
A non locked center arc will extend along its locked center arc will extend along its chord.
chord. Thus the chord angle will usually Thus the chord angle will usually remain
remain constant for a non lock center arc, constant for a non lock center arc, while the
while the center and radius will usually not center and radius will usually not change for
change for the lock center arc. the lock center arc.
Polylines
Closed Polylines Open Polylines

A polyline consists of two or more line and/ Dimensions will snap correctly to the
or arc segments which are attached together polyline if dragged fairly close to parallel.
at their endpoints. If the polyline connects Following is an arbitrary polyline. No angle
with itself, it is said to be closed. If there is a coincides with the Allowed Angles. Yet
gap in the polyline, it is said to be open. dimension lines drawn at approximately the
A major use of lines (and arcs) is the con- same angle snap to become horizontal to the
struction of polylines. Make a polyline by edge (if Allowed Angles is unrestricted
drawing lines end-to-end, allowing the end when drawing the dimension lines as well.)
of each successive line to snap to the end of
the previous line. Auto Snap must be
enabled (Auto Snap toggle button is up )
or the lines will not connect.
Adjusting Polylines
Dimension lines may now be used to move
angled polyline sides the same way as con-
nected angled walls move. If the polyline
side is not at one of the allowed angles, be
You may also click on a polyline side, and
sure to unrestrict angles before dragging a
reset that side's length in the Edit CAD Item
dimension along the side of the polyline.
dialog.
508
Polylines
Open vs. Closed Polylines Closed polylines can be changed it into a

custom counter tops or several other items by
The three polylines below were identical accessing the Special CAD dialog from within
CAD
before being edited. The middle polyline was the Edit CAD Item dialog.
left closed, and the right polyline had one
edge removed to make it an open polyline. All polylines have some editing similarity.
They also have editing differences.
The left edge was selected on both of the
When adjusting sides and corners of a
copies, and the Open Item button was
polyline, the most important thing is select-
selected to display the Edit CAD Item dia-
ing the polyline by the correct edge. Certain
log. The 2’ value was replaced with 3’.
restrictions applied to the polyline depending
on the edge which was selected. Follow these
steps to understand the restrictions:
1.Create a closed polyline with four or more
Managing
sides.
Files
2. Select an edge. The edge you selected will
be the only edge with a handle at its mid-
point.
Original Bounded ends Open end 3. Grab the midpoint and you can move the
Managing
edge parallel to itself. Notice how the adja-
Note the different results which occurred,
Files
cent edges are affected. If the adjacent
depending on whether that edge was edges are converging, continue to drag
bounded on one or both ends. If it is bounded until they meet at a point.
on both ends, the edge will move perpendic-
4. Try to move one of the handles at either
ular to itself (affecting the length of both
end of the side. The adjacent sides can only
adjacent edges as well). If there is an open
Managing
be stretched in their original direction. The
end, the edge will extend or contract, leaving
Files
angle of the selected side can change, but
its adjacent edge unmodified.
not adjacent sides.
Editing Polylines 5. If you need to add an edge, use the Break
tool to divide one edge in two.
Add a new corner (and thus, a new edge) to
6. Select an edge, and grab an end handle of a
Managing
an existing polyline using the Break Line
side opposite the selected edge. These han-
Files
button.
dles can move completely unrestricted.
Change straight edges to curved using the 7. Place the handle wherever you want to
new Change line/arc button. adjust the polyline. Practice with different
Fillet or chamfer the corners, or trim away a shapes until you understand how to adjust
a polyline on the screen. This practice will
Managing
section.
be invaluable when you begin to edit other
Files
If the polyline is closed, you may also fill it items.

with a hatch pattern.
509
Any polyline may be rotated in relation to the in 3D. For more information, see “Edit CAD
angle of the selected edge (or in relation to Item - Closed Polyline” on page 553.
the chord angle if an arc edge was selected).
Select a polyline by an edge and click the
Change Line to Arc
Open Item button to access the Edit CAD
Item dialog. There are two methods of changing lines into
arcs. One method is used for lines in
Select the Move Relative to Itself and
polylines, and the other method is used for
Angle check boxes. The angle listed is the
single lines which are not part of any
current angle of the edge selected. Type in a
polyline or which are at one of the ends of an
new value and the polyline will rotate.
open polyline.
If a polyline edge is selected, and the two
lines joining that edge are not parallel to each The new Change Line/Arc button
other, an option called Set Length changes the selected line in a polyline to an
becomes available. This allows the length of arc, or a selected arc to a line. This tool will
the selected line to be input using the key- is available whenever a line or arc which is
board. The selected line will move perpen- part of a polyline is selected. It will not
dicular to its direction until its length appear if an individual line or arc is selected.
between the adjoining lines equals the In that case, use the alternate method
entered value. The adjoining lines will described below.
extend or contract as necessary to accommo- To change a single line into an arc, select the
date the new line length. If the two adjoining line, hold down the Ctrl key, then grab the
lines are parallel (such as would be the case end handle and drag it to either side. The line
for most of the other edges), the Set becomes an arc, with the non-moved end
Length option would not appear in this dia- remaining tangent to the line’s original direc-
log. For a tutorial about this topic, see tion. This will also work on the free end of a
“Adjusting Angled Walls and Polylines” on line in an open polyline.
page 715.
This tool may also be used to convert
Area of Closed Polylines straight/curved stair subsections into the
other form.
The Edit CAD Item dialog displays the
enclosed area of a closed polyline. The units
are square feet for imperial units and square Make Tangent Button
meters for metric.
The Make Tangent button appears when
Polylines may be copied, moved, reshaped, select an arc in a polyline. Pressing it
or resized as a single unit. Refer to the CAD changes the arc so it is tangent with the lines/
panel of the Preferences dialog for specifics. arcs it meets at either or both of its ends.
Closed polylines may be turned into counter This tool may also be used with curved
tops or lot perimeters, both of which display stairs.
510
Polyline Tools
Polyline Tools
CAD
Polylines may be created based on existing 4. The new polyline is selected. Move it
closed polylines. Special tools are provided away from the original polylines. Other-
for this purpose. wise it will be superimposed.
Method 2 - Group Select:
Polyline Union 1.Group select two or more polylines.
Use the Polyline Union tool to combine 2. Click on the Polyline Union button to
two or more polylines into a single polyline. create a new polyline defined by the
boundaries of all the polylines.
3. A dialog will open. Choose to retain or
delete the original polylines.
Managing
Files
Managing
The second method allows you to combine
Files
more than two polylines simultaneously.
The example shows three closed polylines The new polylines will be of the same type
and the single closed polyline which resulted (counter top, lot perimeter, etc. as the origi-
when all three were merged using the Poly- nals).
line Union tool.
Managing
If the original polylines did not overlap, all
Create two or more closed polylines of the the polylines are duplicated on top of them-
Files
same type. (If one polyline is a counter top, selves.
the others should be counter tops as well.)
Once the polylines are created, there are two
methods of combining them using the Poly-
Managing
line Union tool.
Files
Method 1 - Single Select:
1. Select one polyline.
2. Click on the Polyline Union button.
3. Select another polyline to create a new
Managing
polyline defined by the boundaries of both

Files
of the polylines.
511
Polyline Intersection 2. Click on the Polyline Intersection tool

to create a new polyline defined by the
Use the Polyline Intersection tool to cre- intersection of all the polylines.
ate a single polyline from the overlap area of 3. A dialog will open. Choose to retain or
two or more closed polylines. delete the original polylines.
The second method allows you to work with

more than two polylines simultaneously.
The new polylines will be of the same type
(counter top, lot perimeter, etc. as the origi-
nals.
The example shows two closed polylines and
the single closed polyline which resulted If the original polylines did not overlap, no
when the Polyline Intersection tool was new polyline will be created.
applied to them.
Create two or more closed polylines of the
Polyline Subtract
same type. (If one polyline is a counter top, The Polyline Subtract tool allows you to
the others should be counter tops as well.) create subtract one closed polyline from
Once the polylines are created, there are two another to create a third. The Polyline Sub-
methods of finding the overlap area using the tract tool appears on the Edit toolbar
Polyline Intersection tool. when you select a closed polyline.
This
Method 1 - Single Select: polyline
1. Select one polyline.
2. Click on the Polyline Intersection
tool.
3. Select another polyline to create a new
polyline defined by the intersection of both
of the polylines.
4. The new polyline is selected. Move it This
away from the original polylines. Other- polyline
wise it will be superimposed. Originals
Method 2 - Group Select: 1. Draw two closed polylines that overlap.
1. Group select two or more polylines. 2. Select one of the polylines. This is the
polyline you want to keep a portion of.
512
CAD Arrows
3. Click the Polyline Subtract button and The original polylines are not changed. The
then click on the overlapping closed new polyline remains selected so that it can
polyline. This is the polyline which will be be moved or copied easily.
CAD
totally deleted from the first polyline. If the two polylines do not intersect a copy of
4. A new polyline will be created by subtract- the polyline is formed right on top of itself,
ing the second polyline from the first. The since the program was unable to subtract
new polyline will be of the same type anything from it.
(counter top, lot perimeter, etc.) as the
polyline selected first.
CAD Arrows
Managing
An arrow is a CAD line that has an arrow- Fill Color - Select the solid color to fill
2
Files
head at one or both ends. Draw it like you the arrowheads.
would a line or polyline. The initial arrow- If multiple arrows are selected, and they have
head will be at the far end of the arrow line or more than one Fill Color, check No
polyline. Change to leave each arrow with its defined
Select one or more arrows to modify them. Fill Color.
Managing
Click the Open Item button. Click Arrow. Size - Define a size for the arrow(s).
Files
The CAD Arrow dialog displays. 3
Arrow on both ends - Select the
4
check box for an arrow on both ends.
1 CAD Arrows may be edited just like a line or
2 polyline. Segments of a polyline arrow may
Managing
3 be turned into an arc. Line thickness can be
Files
4 increased. Extra segments can be added
using the Arrow tool.
Managing
Files
If special arrows are used frequently, they
can be blocked and added to the CAD Block
Type - Select the type of arrowhead library. They could then be placed in any
1
from the list. plan file as a block, exploded, then manipu-
If multiple arrows are selected, and they have lated into position. see “Creating a Library of
Managing
more than one arrowhead type, check No CAD Blocks” on page 538.
Files
Change to leave each arrow with its defined The default arrow Size, Type and Fill Color
arrow type. are defined in the Text Items panel of the
Preferences dialog.
513
Splines
A Spline is a curve which passes smoothly Notice that, as each additional segment is
through a set of points. A contour line is a drawn, the spline changes the curvature of
typical example of this type of curve. the previous segment in order to create a
smooth, continuous curve between the last
Click the Spline button once to activate
three points.
Spline mode. Draw the first spline segment
just as you would a line. It will appear identi- As drawn
cal to a line. (You may need to select Unre-
stricted Angle to draw freely.)
Result
Form a Closed Spline by drawing a seg-

ment between its two free ends.
Draw segment to close

Draw the second segment from the end of the
first segment but at a different angle.
As drawn
The result will be an irregular curve which

flows smoothly through each vertex.
Result
Result
As soon as two straight spline segments con-
nect end-to-end, the straight segments turn
into a smooth curve which passes through
each endpoint defined by the original seg-
ments. Each point is called a vertex.
Draw a few more segments, connecting each
to the free end of a previously drawn seg-
ment.
Result
As drawn
514
Splines
Spline Handles The dashed line Control

between the vertex and
Select a spline as you would a polyline. Sev- a control point defines a Tangent line
CAD
eral different types of handles display. The line tangent to the
handles which display will depend on spline through the ver-
whether or not Advanced Splines is tex. Move the control Vertex
selected (see “Displaying Control Handles” handles at the end of the
on page 517.) line to change the direc-
Advanced Splines is not checked tion of the spline at that point. The spline
Vertex curves away from its tangent direction at the
vertex point on its way to reach the next ver-
tex. Change the shape of the spline by drag-
Advanced Splines ging the control handles.
Managing
Move is checked Drag Control Handle
Files
Vertex
Rotate
Original Curve
Control
The Move handle displays near the center of
Managing
the spline. Drag it to move the entire spline.
Files
Drag the triangular Rotate handle to rotate
the entire spline.
The other handles are for adjusting the shape. Make this curve sharper or more gradual by
moving the control point toward or away
Reshaping Splines from its vertex.
Managing
Files
Reshape the spline by dragging from one of Move control closer
the Vertex handles.
Drag Vertex
Managing
Files
Result =
sharper curve
When you move a control handle around the

Managing
This is the simplest method of adjusting vertex, the opposite control handle also
splines and will satisfy most needs. The fol- moves to keep the lines between the vertex
Files
lowing additional control is available if and control handles at the same relative angle
Advanced Splines is enabled (see “Dis- to each other. Typically, this is a straight line.
playing Control Handles” on page 517.) In the following illustration, notice how the
515
control handles stay in a straight line to each spline between two vertex points. To use,
other, and how the curve of the spline adjusts first select the spline. Click the Straighten
while still keeping tangent to the line through Spline Segment button on the Edit tool-
the vertex. bar, then click on the spline between two ver-
tices. That portion will become straight.
tangent tangent tangent
Straighten segment Result
If you reselect the spline, you will see that

the two control handles point toward the
straight section from each vertex point on the
The Lock Control Handle Angle but- spline’s straight section.
ton is usually selected. When selected,
this button is dark, as shown. This
causes the relative angle between the vertex
and its control handles to remain the same.
Press the Lock Control Handle Angle
button to free the control of the rela-
tive angles between the vertex and its
control handles. The control handles can now Add a Vertex
be adjusted individually. The opposite handle Add a vertex point to a spline by selecting
will remain unaffected by the change. Notice the spline, pressing the Break Line but-
that the spline adjusts so that it is tangent to ton, and clicking on the spline. A vertex will
the lines between the vertex and both of its be added at the point where you clicked. The
control handles. spline will remain selected and you will see
Control the additional vertex and control handles.
moved
Original Control separately
moved
separately Break
Result
The Straighten Spline Segment button

is used to straighten a segment of a
516
Splines
will display independently of control han-

Splines into Polylines dles.
CAD
A curved portion in a spline is represented as
a number of smaller straight lines. You can
change a spline into a normal polyline that is
made up from all these straight lines by
selecting it and pressing the Convert Spline
to Polyline button on the Edit toolbar.
Managing
Files
Before
Applications for Splines
The spline is replaced by the new polyline.
Splines are typically used in situations where
there is an irregular curve. This often occurs
After where land or water are involved. Splines are
Managing
useful wherever a free-flowing curve is
Files
needed.
Be sure to use Elevation Splines from

the Build>Terrain menu if the splines are
to be used for terrain modeling. You
Splines with Trim & Extend
Managing
cannot convert this type of CAD spline
into an Elevation Spline.
Files
Other CAD items such as lines and arcs can
be trimmed against and extend to a spline.
Select the spline, press the Trim or
Extend button, and then click on the por-
tion of each CAD item to be removed (for
Managing
trim) or extended (for extend).
Files
Displaying Control Handles
Display of spline control handles is set on the
CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. Select
the Advanced Splines check box to show
Managing
the control handles. Clear the check box to

Files
suppress the control handles. The Vertices
517
Box Tools
CAD Boxes
Drag to Select on right Rotate using Reshape using Resize using

create edge. triangular midpoint corner
handle. handle handle.
Click the Box button once to activate it. work differently if the box is not square.
Draw a box by dragging from the midpoint Resize maintains a constant ratio between
of one side to the midpoint of the opposite the box’s length and width. Concentric
side. If a small box is desired, draw the box requires that the change in length equal the
larger, then resize it. A box originally drawn change in width for any modification.
too small will leave only a point
The original direction a box is dragged when General Framing Members
created is defined as the length of the box.
The other direction is defined as the width.
Develop the habit of dragging all boxes the
same direction (i.e. left to right or perhaps Displays as line during creation,
top to bottom). This will simplify keyboard framing box after creation.
editing using the Edit CAD Item dialog.
The Framing tool appears to the right of
Boxes are originally drawn square. Select the
box to resize or reshape. Drag the handle at the information box when the Box tool is
the midpoint of the selected edge to move selected. Use the Framing tool to draw a
that edge, or drag a corner handle to resize 1-1/2” (38 mm) wide box of any length.
the box. When dragging the length, the framing box
appears to be a line until the mouse button is
Boxes drawn using the Box tool have a
released. Specially designed to represent
couple of limitations which are important to
general framing materials, the box can be
understand. The Edit type Move Corners
resized to any specification using the handles
(set in the Preferences dialog) will not affect
or the Edit CAD Item dialog, discussed later
boxes. Boxes are a special type of restricted
in this chapter. Multiple copies may also be
polyline which always maintain a rectangular
laid out automatically at defined spacing
shape with exactly four corners.
using the Multiple Copy button or the
Edit types Concentric and Resize (set in Edit CAD Item dialog.
the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog)
518
Box Tools
Framing members drawn with this tool will automatically drawn whenever this tool is
show in the Materials list under the Framing used. Use the cross box add framing detail to
category. To specifically draw rafters or cross sections.
CAD
joists, click the Rafter button or Joist Cross boxes are automatically maintained at
button and drag a framing member. ends of framing members cut by the cross
Trim/Extend works well to adjust the section cutting plane. These are found on
framing members to the correct length, and locked layer 9. They automatically update
to cut their ends off at an angle if need to fit when the cross section first displays and
better against the trimming members. whenever a Fill Window is done.
You may wish to create and resize one cross
Cross Boxes box for each size (i.e. 2x4, 2x6, 2x12 etc.)
then copy the original as needed. It is easiest
to resize using Edit CAD Item dialog
Managing
The Cross Box
behaves the same as
Files
a regular Box. The
only difference is
the cross which is
Managing
Insulation
Files
Managing
Files
Drag to create. Select right edge and change
Result width by dragging edge
midpoint handle.
Select lower edge and change
length by dragging edge mid-
point handle
Managing
The Insulation tool also appears to the
Rectangular Polylines
Files
right when the Box Tool is selected. Use
this tool to draw insulation for cross section The Rectangular Polyline button appears
details. Drag the length of the insulation, at the right of the toolbar when the Box
then select the invisible box border to resize button is selected. Click the Rect. Polyline
or move it, the same as with other boxes.
Managing
Once again, it is easier to use the Edit CAD button, then drag a rectangle from one
corner to the opposite corner. Once pro-
Files
Item dialog to define the insulation width and

length exactly using keyboard input duced, this polyline is no different than one
you would make by drawing four lines along
the rectangle sides.
519
Editing CAD Boxes ton. The Edit CAD Item dialog for boxes
will open. Type in the desired values.
Keyboard input of dimensions makes it easy
to create accurately sized boxes, framing TIP: To find out which direction is the
members, cross boxes, and insulation. In length and which direction is the width of a
each case, the following applies: square box, select it. The triangular rotate
handle will be nearest the side you
Select a box created with one of these box
originally dragged from when creating the
tools—Box , Framing , Cross Box or box.
Insulation . Click the Open Item but-
Select the Style button from the Edit CAD
Item dialog to change the line color of any
type of box or to change the fill of any box
type other than insulation.
Circles
Drag left to right Select. Drag square handle Drag diamond-shaped Move by dragging cen-
to create. to resize from oppo- handle to concentrically ter handle in allowed
site point. resize. directions.
Draw a Circle by dragging across the As with boxes, you can use the Edit CAD
diameter. If a small circle is needed, draw a Item dialog to accurately set the size, posi-
larger circle and then resize it. A circle drawn tion and other attributes. You may also fill a
too small will leave only a point on the circle with a hatch pattern or solid fill.
screen.
Select the circle. Drag a square handle Draw Circle About Center
located on the circle to resize the circle. Drag
The Circle about Center tool appears
a diamond-shaped handle not attached to the
circle to concentrically resize the circle (its when the Circle button is pressed. This
center will not move). Move the circle by tool creates a circle by dragging the radius
dragging the center handle (the cursor turns out from the center point. To use, activate the
into a four-headed arrow). A circle may be Circle about Center tool. Then click on
dragged only in the direction of a line drawn screen to define the center of the circle, and
between the center handle and any handle drag the radial distance before releasing the
touching the circle, unless this constraint is mouse button. Both the center point and the
released by holding the Ctrl key. radius point will snap to any appropriate
nearby CAD item, intersection or point.
520
Ovals
Ovals
CAD
An Oval appears originally as a circle, only in a straight line between the center han-
which can then be reshaped into an oval. Use dle and any handle touching the line. Over-
the same drawing technique as with a box ride this constraint by holding the Ctrl key
(i.e. left to right), since the direction of drag while selecting and moving the oval.
is defined as the length and the perpendicu- There are two visual clues to distinguish
lar is defined as the width. Drag the length between ovals and circles even when both
Managing
of the oval, then release the mouse button. appear circular. An oval has a large “+” in
Files
Select the oval. Notice the various handles. the center when originally being created, and
Use any square handle actually touching the it has a triangular rotation handle when
oval to reshape it into an actual oval. Use any selected. Neither of these is true for a circle.
diamond shaped handle to resize the oval. It
will either concentrically or proportionately The main difference between boxes and
Managing
resize depending on the settings in the CAD ovals (other than the shape) is that ovals can-
not be filled with either a hatch pattern or a
Files
panel of the Preferences dialog. Use the tri-
angular handle to rotate the oval. solid fill.
Just as with boxes, you can use the Edit CAD
Use the center handle which turns into a
Item dialog to accurately set the length,
four-headed arrow to move the oval. The
width and other oval attributes.
allowed moving direction is directly related
Managing
to the angle of the oval. The oval will move
Files
Points
Setting a Point
Managing
Use the Point tool to position a CAD item
Files
accurately. When Auto Snap is on, a Make a new point by clicking in the drawing
CAD item being drawn or positioned will area while in Point mode or by clicking
snap to a nearby point before it snaps to any
(not dragging) in Line , Arc , Box or
other item. The Snap tools can also be used
to move items to specific points. The accu- Circle mode.
Managing
rate placement of CAD points can help you A point appears as an “X” on the screen, with
Files
position other CAD items very precisely. the current point showing as a red “X”. The
current point is either the most recently cre-
ated or the most recently accessed point. To
521
cause a different point to become the current all metric distances.) Angles may be entered
point, simply click on it while in Point or as bearings, decimal degrees, or degrees,
minutes and seconds.
Line mode. The old point should change
color from black to red, indicating that it is The Next button at the bottom of the New
now the current point. Point dialog is simply a shortcut when plac-
To locate a second point once a first point ing several points at a time. Instead of click-
(current point) has been established, double- ing on OK to place the point and then
click the Point tool. The New Point dialog double-clicking on the Point button to
redisplay the dialog, just click on Next to
will open.
define the next point.
Moving CAD Points

It is possible to reposition a point in relation
to itself or another point or CAD item such as
a line. This may be used to locate the point
exactly one-quarter the distance along a
given line, or exactly 6 inches from one end.
This new location can then be used for many
A new point may be located using keyboard things, such as the start point of a new line.
input exactly the same way a line is drawn To reposition a point, double-click on the
using keyboard input. The only difference is point you wish to move. The Move Point dia-
that there is no line connecting each of the log will open.
points.
1. Absolute Location requires input of
the X and Y coordinates which are related
to the system origin (0,0). This method is
almost never used.
2. Relative to Current Point (not
Polar) requires input on the distance along
the X-axis (horizontal) and along the Y-
axis (vertical) to locate the next point.
3. Relative to Current Point, Polar
There are four ways to move a point with this
requires input of the distance and the angle
dialog. The two relative ways allow you to
between the start point and the new point.
specify normal or Polar values.
This is the most typical method.
1. Absolute Location is set the same as
When using Imperial Units, lengths and dis- when positioning a new point. The current
tances may be entered as inches or feet and location (in absolute coordinates) is always
inches, in either decimal or fractional form. listed at the bottom of the dialog.
Fractional inches with denominators 2, 4, 8
and 16 are allowed. (Millimeters are used for
522
Points
2. Relative to Itself sets the point's new unconnected line or arc. If the point is near
location from its current one. The new an oval or circle, then the point is placed
location can be placed using rectangular or along an (invisible) axis line along which
CAD
polar coordinates, just as when positioning the item was originally drawn.
a new point. The temporary point which appears on the
3. Relative to Prev. Point positions the end of a line when originally drawn is a line
new point location relative to the point that endpoint, and is attached to the line itself.
was current just before the point being Moving that point using the Snap tools will
moved was created or made current. If you adjust the line as well. This special type of
are not sure that the desired reference point endpoint can only be created when the line is
was actually the previous point, click on it originally drawn, or by using Snap To>Item
before double-clicking on the point to be End. (See “Snap To: (Snap Points)” on
moved. This will make the reference point page 565.) Any other method of snapping a
Managing
the previous point. (The point you are point to the end will not unite the point and
Files
moving is always the current point). line, so repositioning the point will not affect
4. From Line End is enabled when the the line.
point is nearby a CAD item. The Along
Line box allows a value to be entered to
position the point on the CAD item at the
Managing
defined distance from the end to which it
Files
was originally closest. (For an arc, the dis- The current point was the The current point was
original endpoint which was moved Along Line
tance is measured along the curve.) This still attached to the line. 50% and so the point
distance may be defined as a percentage of Moving the point Along moved to the center.
Line 50% actually short- Snap to Item Mid-
the total line or arc length by checking the ened the line to one-half its point will do the same
percentage "1" box. Thus 0, or 0% original length. thing.
Managing
moves the point to the closest end of the
Files
nearest edge, 50% to the midpoint, and
100% to the other end. Negative numbers
and percentages greater than 100 are
allowed.
Managing
Notes on “From Line End”
Files
• If the point is a line endpoint (it was auto-
matically placed at the line end when the
line was drawn), it will take the end of the
line with it when it moves. Thus, a posi-
tive number will shorten a line, and a neg-
Managing
ative one will lengthen it.

Files
• If the point is near a box or polyline, then

Along Line applies to the line or arc
forming the closest side just as it does to a
523
CAD Select
Single Select The Select button does not have to be

clicked to activate Multiple Select. Any
To select CAD items, click the Select but- CAD button may be active except the Zoom
ton once to enter Select mode, then click
or Dimension buttons. If the CAD
on any CAD item. In CAD mode you cannot
facility is not active and the Multiple Select
select items on Architectural layers using this
feature (for CAD items only) is desired while
method.
in the Architectural mode, choose
Once selected, the CAD item will display CAD>Select from the pull-down menu.
one or more red handles (depending on the
Once several items are selected, they may be
item). The selected CAD item is ready to be
blocked, deleted, copied or moved as an
moved, deleted, or edited in some manner.
entire unit. Moving is restricted to horizontal
The right mouse button also functions as a or vertical unless the Ctrl key is held. They
single select click no matter which mode is may also be copied from one plan and pasted
currently active (true also for the Architec- into another.
tural mode).
Customized 2D symbols are possible, as is
Double-click the Select button to display the ability to create CAD details and save
the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. them into a library for use across plans. (For
see “CAD” on page 70. more information, see “CAD Details” on
page 570.)
Group Select
Depending on what type of CAD item is
To group select CAD items, hold down the selected, buttons from the following group
Shift key while dragging a marquee around
will appear in the Edit toolbar. If contextual
the items to be selected. Every item whose menus (accessed by right-clicking once or
center is inside the marquee will become part twice on an item) are used, a menu item cor-
of the selection set. This may include some responding to each displayed edit button will
architectural items as well. be available also.
To remove items from the selection set, click
on the items one at a time while continuing to Next—Click to change between several
possible choices of selectable items.
hold the Shift key. Items may also be added to
Used when there are multiple items in
the selection set by holding down the Shift close proximity. Equivalent to pressing
key and clicking on one item at a time. Tab key.
Once any item has been selected, you

Open Item—Click to display the speci-
can no longer drag a marquee to select.
fication dialog directly related to the
Instead you must hold the Shift key and
item(s) selected.
click the individual items.
524
CAD Select
Point-to-Point Move—Select one or between them. (Double-click to set the

more items to move, click this button, chamfer size.)
then click the start point then the end
CAD
point of the move. You may also drag Extend—Select boundary edge(s), click
from the start point to the end point of this button, then select CAD items on
the move. end to extend. This may be used with the
Fence tool as well.
Move to Framing Reference—Select
framing members, then click this button Trim—Select cutting edge(s), click this
to position them in relation to the fram- button, then select CAD items on end to
ing reference. eliminate. This may be used with the
Fence tool as well.
Copy—Click to make a single copy of
the selected item(s). Double-click to
Managing
Fence—Select a line or polyline, then
make multiple copies. Click different click this button to select everything
Files
button to stop. touched by the original line. Or click this
button and draw a fence line when the
Multiple Copy—Select CAD item(s),
button becomes available.
click this button, and drag to create cop-
ies at specified intervals. (Double-click Block—Appears only when more than
Managing
to set the intervals.) one CAD item is selected. Click to link
Files
selected items into a single unit, or
Delete—Click to delete the selected
block.
item(s).
Explode Block—Appears only when a
Make Parallel—Click to align selected
single block is selected. Click to explode
Managing
line or polyline edge with another item
selected block into its individual parts.
Files
(such as a wall or line).
Break—Single-click and then click on

selected item to add a joint-type break.
Double-click and then click on selected
Managing
item to completely sever the line.
Files
Fillet—Select an edge, click this button,
and select a different edge to create a
rounded fillet of specified size between
them. (Double-click to set the fillet
radius.)
Managing
Files
Chamfer—Select an edge, click this

button, and select a different edge to cre-
ate a straight bevel of specified size
525
Next Item
If there is more than one CAD item in the Tabkey on the keyboard also functions the
selected area, the first item displaying the red same as clicking the Next button.
handles may not be the desired CAD item. In
this case, press the Next button until the The Next button is not available when a
desired CAD item is selected. Pressing the group of items is selected.
Open Item
When one or more items are selected, click You may also adjust the height, width, scale
the Open Item button to display the Edit factor, name (if it is a block), line color, line
CAD Item dialog specific to that item or width, hatch pattern, layer number, and posi-
group of items. For more information, see tion in relation to other CAD items.
“The Edit CAD Item Dialog” on page 552. Some CAD items can also be changed so
Within this dialog is the ability to make mul- they will stop when moved against either a
tiple copies of the selected item(s) at speci- wall or against another CAD item.
fied intervals either along a straight line or in Depending on what is selected, you may also
a circle. Or the original item(s) can be use this dialog to turn a polyline into a cus-
moved, rotated, reflected (mirrored), or repli- tom countertop, slab, foundation slab, stair
cated (copied one or more times at defined landing or lot perimeter, all of which display
intervals). in 3D, or into other special items.
Moving CAD Items

Selected item(s) can be moved by dragging To move selected CAD item(s) freely with
the center handle. Some CAD items such as no constraints whatsoever, select the item(s),
cross boxes, framing members and insulation hold the Ctrl key, and then grab and drag the
automatically stop when moved against other item(s).
CAD items. Tap the Ctrl key once while con- Boxes, circles and polylines can also be set
tinuing to drag, and the item will move to stop at other CAD items and/or at walls.
through the stop. This is defined in the Line Style dialog for
If the Ctrl key is not used until after the each item, accessed by clicking the Style
item(s) have begun to be dragged, the items button in the Edit CAD Item dialog.
will only move in the normal allowed direc- The Edit CAD Item dialog can also be used to
tions. This is normally the desired option. move the selected item(s) by a specified dis-
tance and/or angle. To move only, check
526
Moving CAD Items
Move relative to itself, then fill in only the Point-to-Point Move after selecting
that section. your item(s), then clicking the start point and
CAD
end point. You may instead choose to drag
Point-to-Point Move the copy in order to place the copy along the
restricted move path.
The Point-to-Point Move allows a
selected CAD item to be accurately moved. Moving Roof Planes
There are two different ways to use the same
Point-to-Point Move works with roof
tool, with each method producing a different
planes. If a roof plane is accidentally moved
result.
so the baseline is off the wall, use Point-to-
Click Method Point Move to move the baseline back
onto the outside edge of the main wall layer.
Select the item or group of items to be
Managing
moved, click the Point-to-Point Move Any group of free-standing items
Files
button at the right of the toolbar, then click at (whether CAD, architectural, or a
a start point, not necessarily on the item to be combination) can be moved or copied
moved, and then click on the end point. The accurately relative to snappable items
(points, intersections, etc.) using the
item(s) will be moved by the distance and
direction between the two points. These start Point-to-Point Move tool.
Managing
and end points will each snap to any nearby
Files
CAD object, wall line, or intersections of Move to Framing Reference
these.
Framing members can be positioned relative
Drag Method to a framing reference using this tool. See
“Framing Reference Markers” on page 363.
You may also click on the start point, then
Managing
drag to the end point while holding the left Curved Ttems Affect CAD
Files
button. In this case, the item will move only Stops
in its normal restricted direction. The dis-
tance moved will be the distance between Arcs as polyline edges, circles and curved
your start and end point projected onto that walls now stop CAD moves of the same, as
move direction. well as straight polyline edges, box sides and
Managing
straight wall surfaces stopping CAD moves.
Files
To override the restrictions using the Drag
CAD Stops Move and/or Wall Stops
Method, hold down the Ctrl key before drag- Move must be checked in the Line Style dia-
ging the selected item(s). If you do this, the log for the item being moved.
item will move as if you had used the click
method already described. When CAD Stops Move and/or Wall
Stops Move are checked in the Line Style
Managing
Copying dialog for the item being moved, arcs and

Files
circles now will stop when they touch

Point-to-Point Move may be used with another line, straight wall, arc, curved wall or
copy if you hit both the Copy button then circle.
527
Move and Reshape Using tions along and perpendicular each edge of a
Specified Values polyline or box are the allowed directions for
moving. A circle normally moves horizon-
You may move a polyline corner, polyline tally or vertically.
edge, entire polyline, etc. be entering new
values in the Set Dimension dialog. When an item to be moved is already against
another straight item, such as a straight wall
New Move for CAD items or polyline or box edge, there will be an
additional move direction along the direction
A CAD item moves in certain directions if of the straight item.
the Ctrl key is not held. Normally the direc-
Copying CAD Items

ified location. Select the item(s), click Point-
Copy Tool to-Point Move , click Copy , then click
The Copy button allows single or multiple the start point and then the end point. An
copies to be made of the selected item(s). exact copy of the selected item(s) will be cre-
Just as in the Architectural mode, single ated. The two copies will have the exact rela-
tionship as the start and end point had in
click the Copy button for a single copy
relationship to each other.
(then click on screen to place the copy).
Double-click the Copy button to place
multiple copies. A copy will be placed each
Multiple Copy Tool
time you click on the screen. Click the right The Multiple Copy tool makes it easy to
mouse button to stop copying (or click on lay out multiple copies at specified intervals
any other toolbar button). along a straight line. Typically used for lay-
You can also single click the Copy button, ing out framing members or trusses, this tool
and then drag from a handle on the selected may also be used for laying out multiple cop-
items. This allows the new copy to be posi- ies of any CAD item or group of CAD items,
tioned, or perhaps resized, precisely with including CAD blocks.
respect to its original. 1. Select the CAD item(s) to copy.
Copies can be made easily and accurately by 2. Press the Multiple Copy button, and
using the Open Item button instead, and drag from a handle. The item will replicate
using the Replicate option in the Edit CAD as you drag, along the direction you drag.
Item dialog. For more information, see “The 3. You may change direction before releasing
Edit CAD Item Dialog” on page 552. the mouse button, and the copies will fol-
Copy can also be used in combination low. The distance you drag will determine
the number of copies placed. Release the
with the Point-to-Point Move button to
mouse button to place the copies.
make a copy of the selected item(s) at a spec-
528
Delete
Separate intervals are used for: Copy button when it appears. The copy
• CAD Items interval for rafters, joists, or studs is set in
CAD
• Framing (general, floor and ceiling) their own tab in the Framing dialog. (Click
• Rafters the Roof tool, then double-click the
• Roof Trusses Rafter tool. Choose the appropriate tab,
• Studs (in wall framing details) and define the spacing.) Once the copy inter-
To set the copy interval for CAD items or val is defined for each type of item, it will
Roof Trusses, double-click on the Multiple remain set at that interval until changed.
Delete
Managing
The Delete button will delete whatever is which should not be deleted are part of the
Files
selected. The Del key on the keyboard also selection set, hold the Shift key while clicking
works the same way. the individual items to remove them from the
Make sure that only those items which selection set before clicking the Delete
should be deleted are selected. If extra items button.
Managing
Files
Make Parallel/Perpendicular
The Make Parallel button is an alignment are often used to align CAD edges or roof
tool. Any CAD line, framing member, edges.
Managing
polyline edge or roof plane edge may be
Files
made to be either parallel or perpendicular to Click button
a different item.
Select the line (or framing member, or edge
of a polyline or roof plane), click the Make then click wall
Managing
Parallel button, then click on a second
wall (or line or edge) to be used for align- Select edge
Files
ment. The first item should already be within Result
20 degrees of being parallel (or perpendicu-
lar) to the second, and will then rotate until it
is exactly parallel (or perpendicular). Walls If you initially clicked near the first item's
Managing
center, it will rotate about its exact center. If

Files
you clicked near its end, it will rotate about

that end.
529
If a specific angle is needed, create a wall or If you select the arc in the middle third, the
CAD line at that angle before using it to align Make Parallel button will move the arc
the edge of a roof or other CAD item. so that its center coincides with the center of
a nearby curved wall, arc or circle. Just click
Applied to Arcs in the middle third of an arc, then on the
The Make parallel button affects arcs in Make Parallel button, and finally click
two different ways, depending on which part on a nearby arc, circle or curved wall, and
of the arc is selected. The arc is divided into first arc will be moved so that its center coin-
three equal selection areas...the two outer cides with that of the second item. The radius
thirds, and the center third. Selecting near of the arc will not change.
either of the ends (in the outer third) affects In order to prevent drastic or unforseen
that end. Selecting the arc in the center third changes, an arc can be moved only a limited
affects the center point. distance, so you may wish to move the arc
If you select the arc on either end (in the into is approximate position before using the
outer third), the Make Parallel button Make Parallel button to reposition the
will extend or contract the free end of the arc arc center exactly. An arc is moved only if
along the arc until the tangent at that end is the distance between its center and the sec-
parallel/perpendicular to a second item ond item's center is less than half the mini-
which could be a straight wall or CAD item. mum radius of either item. Also, an arc that
Just click on the arc near the desired end, is part of a polyline is moved only if it and
then click on the Make Parallel button, lines it is connected to are not extended or
then click on the second item. The selected contracted more than half of their original
arc end will extend or contract if it is already length.
within about 20 degrees of being tangent (or This tool may also be used with curved
perpendicular) to the second item. stairs.
This method is used to adjust the end direc-
tion for curved stairs.
Break
The Break tool adds a complete or partial change the shape of the polyline (if Move
break in a line or polyline edge. It will not Corners is selected on the CAD panel of
break items created with the Circle , Oval the Preferences dialog), but the sections are
still part of the same polyline unit.
, Box , or Cross Box tools.
Framing members are always completely
A complete break means that the line is
broken when a break is added. You cannot
totally severed at that point. A partial break
add a partial break to a framing member.
means that a joint has been added to the line
or polyline, and that joint can be used to
530
Break
To partially break a line (add corner and simply separate the adjacent
a joint for reshaping), select polyline components. If a segment needs to
be removed from a closed polyline, two com-
CAD
the line, click the Break
tool, then click the location plete breaks will be necessary before the seg-
for the break. If there is a ment may be deleted. (Don't worry if the
Single- cursor shows a double arrow if breaking at a
nearby point or intersecting
click polyline joint.)
line or arc on the item to be
broken, the break location A complete break turns a single line into two
will snap to that point or intersection. (Refer separate lines. It can also be used to cut a
to section about Auto Snap in the CAD polyline.
panel of the Preferences dialog on page 542
for Auto Snap priorities.) Deleting a Polyline Edge
A partial break adds a There are three ways to delete an edge of a
Managing
joint to single line to polyline:
Files
make a polyline. It can 1.Create a complete break at both ends.
also be used on a Select the edge and delete.
polyline to add cor-
ners so the shape may 2. Select Edit Polyline Parts . Select the
be changed. edge and delete.
Managing
Result
3. Draw over a straight line edge from one
Files
Tip:: Select the line exactly on the break. end to the other.
(If you don’t know where it is, select the
line, position the cursor above the
diamond-shaped handle, click once to
unselect, then click again to re-select.)
Grab the handle and drag to the new
Managing
shape.
Files
To completely sever a line
or polyline so that a sec-
tion is removable, select
the line, double-click the
Managing
Break button, then Double-
Files
click on the location for click
the clean break. As
before, the break location
will snap to nearby points or intersections. If
a complete break is needed at an exact dis-
Managing
tance, first place a point or a crossing line at

Files
that location so that there will be an exact

location for the break point to snap to. Break-
ing near a polyline corner will snap to the
531
Selecting CAD Items Using a Fence
A Fence selection tool is available. This

tool offers another method of selecting multi- This method is useful when the same
ple CAD items. Instead of dragging a mar- group of CAD items will be selected more
quee around the items to be selected, the than once. Draw the line or polyline
through the CAD items, then use that
Fence tool uses a line or polyline to select specific fence to select the exact same
all the CAD items which it crosses or items every time. Leave the fence in place
touches. This selection method is useful until all editing is done, then delete the
when a marquee would select too many fence. Or you may prefer to have all your
enclosed items, or when the shape of the fences on their own CAD layer so you
selection set will not easily be contained by a keep them intact for future use, while
turning off the display when not being
marquee.
needed.
The selection fence may be any already
existing line or polyline, or it may be a line The Trim and Extend tools also utilize
which is drawn after choosing the Fence the Fence tool, but in a slightly different
tool. manner. In this case, you will first select the
To use a pre-defined line or polyline, draw a line(s) defining the boundary (for
line or polyline so it crosses or touches every Extend ) or the cut line (for Trim ).
item you wish to be selected. Then select that
Then click the Fence tool and either click
line or polyline and click on the Fence on the line or polyline to act as the fence or
tool. All CAD items in contact with the fence else drag a temporary line across the CAD
line will immediately become selected and items to be trimmed or extended. Whatever
ready to be edited. The fence line will was crossed by that temporary fence line will
become deselected. You may hold the Shift immediately be acted upon if appropriate. If
key and continue to select or deselect items. you do not select the Fence tool, you will
After this you may continue with the CAD need to individually click on the CAD items.
edits as desired.
Trim and E xtend

of CAD items. The cutting item may even be
Trim a CAD block.
Lines, arcs, polylines, framing items, and cir- First select the item(s) to trim against. Then
cles may be trimmed. The trimming, or cut- click on the Trim button. Finally, click on
ting item may be any CAD item, or a group the part of the item to be trimmed off. You
may repeat this final step as many times as
532
Fillet and Chamfer
desired. Right click or hit the Esc key to ter- desired. Right click or hit the Esc key to ter-
minate this process. minate this process.
CAD
A circle may be trimmed against any other
CAD item(s), turning it into an arc. A circle If you use Fillet to extend one framing
cannot be broken at only one point. A portion item to another framing item, both framing
items will be angle cut.
of it must be removed. The cutting items
must therefore cross the circle on both sides
of the portion clicked on to be removed. Fence
If you use Fillet to trim one framing To trim or extend using a fence for multiple
item to another framing item, both framing selection, first select the cutting item(s) or
items will be angle cut. boundary(s) as before. Then click on
Trim or Extend button. Next click the
Managing
Fence button. Finally, click on the line,
Files
Extend
arc or polyline that will serve as the fence.
Lines, arcs, polylines or framing items may Items crossing the fence will be trimmed or
also be extended. The boundary to which the extended as if you clicked on each of them
items will be extended may be any CAD item where they are crossed by the fence.
or group of CAD items. It may even be a
Managing
As an alternative final step, instead of click-
CAD block.
Files
ing on an existing fence item, drag a tempo-
First select the boundary item(s), the ones to rary line fence while holding the left button
which the CAD items will be extended. Then down.
click on the Extend button. Finally, select Be sure the fence crosses the items on half to
the part of the item to be extended. You may be edited, especially when trimming. Other-
Managing
repeat this final step as many times as wise, the item may not be edited, or else the
Files
wrong half will be edited.
Fillet and Chamfer
Managing
Files
Fillet Chamfer
The Fillet tool allows you to use an arc of The Chamfer tool allows you to create a
a specified radius connecting any two non- straight corner bevel of a specified size con-
parallel lines. The Fillet tool may also be necting any two non-parallel lines. The
Managing
used to create a mitered intersection between chamfer is a third short line which cuts off
Files
framing items such as joists or rafters. The the corner between the two selected lines.
miter will display in both Plan View and in To create a Fillet or Chamfer , select
3D.
the first line, click the Fillet or
533
Chamfer tool, then click on the second Chamfer mode. Either way, the Fillet
line. The two lines will join together with the radius and Chamfer distance values
specified fillet or chamfer at the intersection. specified will be the default values used until
If the lines did not originally meet, they will you choose to change them. There is no need
extend until they do. If the lines overlapped to keep defining the same value over and
originally, the fillet or chamfer will keep the over. Define it once, use it multiple times.
part of each line toward the selected end, and A value of 0 for either tool will cause the two
discard the overlap when the fillet or chamfer lines acted upon with that tool to meet at a
is created. The edited lines will also be sharp corner.
joined as a polyline.
The lines may be single lines, adjacent edges An arc will always respond as though
of a the same polyline, or outside edges of the fillet or chamfer has been set to 0. It
two different open polylines. So long as the will extend or shorten along the curve to
two lines are not parallel to each other, a fil- meet the other item, creating a sharp
let or chamfer may be created between them. intersection between them. You MUST
select the arc on the half to be affected by
Arcs may also be edited. (See note).
the edit. Otherwise you may have nothing
The size of both the fillet or chamfer is spec- occur, or the wrong end may be affected.
ified within either the Fillet or the Cham-
fer tool. The method is the same. First, Special Case: Fillet and
select any line in order to bring up the tools. chamfer may even be used to
When the Fillet and Chamfer buttons eliminate parts of a polyline. To use, fillet
or chamfer two non-adjacent lines that are
become visible, click twice on either button.
in the same polyline.
The Trim/Extend dialog will open. Type in
the desired values.
Result
Fillet or chamfer
these 2 edges
When used this way, the following dialog

will open. Click OK to approve the
polyline edit and see the changes occur.
Click OK when done. At this point, you may

select on a second line to create the fillet or
chamfer between the original line selected
and the second line selected. Or you may
click a different tool to get out of Fillet or
534
CAD Blocks
CAD Blocks
CAD
Only horizontal text should be placed in a
Make Block block whose instances will be rotated. The
Create a CAD block by selecting multiple center of a text item will rotate with the rest
CAD and text items, then click on the of the block. Angled text will not maintain
position as well when a block is rotated.
Block button that appears on the Edit tool-
bar. The new block acts like a single CAD Selecting and opening a block instance dis-
item. plays the Edit CAD Item dialog with a few
changes. The height and width scaling can be
When creating a new block from a group of
independently set for the instance. Normally
CAD items, two things are actually created.
they will be set to the same value. The
First, a block definition which holds all of
Managing
instance cannot be exploded, and ovals and
the items in group, and second, a block
Files
arcs will be distorted if they are set to differ-
instance that displays the block at a position,
ent values.
orientation and size that matches that of the
items in the original group. More instances The name of the instance’s block definition
of the new block are made by copying the displays near the bottom of the Edit CAD
first instance. Any copy can be repositioned, Item dialog. While all other changes in this
Managing
resized and rotated independently of any dialog affect only the instance, changing this
Files
other block instance. modifies the name of the block definition.
This name is used when the block is exported
For a single plan file, these instances share
via DXF, and is also imported with DXF
the same definition regardless of which floor
block definitions. Change this name to be the
or CAD detail in which they appear. Copying
same as the name of a second block defini-
Managing
a block instance to a completely different
tion in the same plan and the second defini-
plan file also copies the block definition to
Files
tion is overwritten. All its block instances,
that plan.
wherever they appear, will match any
Select a block instance by clicking on any instances of the first definition.
one of its components. It moves, rotates and
The Edit CAD Item dialog for a block
resizes much like a CAD box. Drag from a
instance also allows line colors and weights
Managing
corner to resize the entire block proportion-
to be determined in one of two ways. By
Files
ately. Drag from a side handle to resize in
Layer means the original colors and weights
only one dimension. Resizing each dimen-
of the lines will be unchanged in the block -
sion differently can distort ovals and arcs,
they appear as they should for their original
and prevents exploding the block instance.
layer. If By Block is checked then all block
You should be able to snap to any item or components appear with the color and weight
Managing
crossing of items in an instance of CAD of the block’s layer, which can be set in this
Files
block. The exception is snapping to arcs, cir- dialog.

cles or ovals if the instance has been differ-
New block instances default to By block
entially stretched.
unless New blocks by layer is checked in
535
the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. CAD Block Management

(See “CAD Preferences” on page 542.)
Select the Block Fill by Item check box to
1
have blocks filled in the same way as their
components were before being blocked.
Clear the check box it and any filled compo-
nents of the block instance will all have the 2
same fill pattern. This pattern is set in the
Line Style dialog opened for that block
instance.
A CAD block may not contain the following
CAD items: roof planes, layout boxes, north
pointer, plan footprint, roof/gable line, sun
angle arrow, bearing line, or joist direction 4
line. If any these are selected in the group
from which a block is made, they will be 3 5
omitted and the block will be constructed
from the remaining items. Select CAD> CAD Block Mgmt to display
the CAD Block Management dialog.
Text , Callouts and Markers may
be included in a CAD block. A block must 1 Displays a list of all CAD blocks for the
contain at least one CAD item. Rotating a current plan file. This includes all CAD
block instance containing text will not rotate blocks that appear as instances on any floor,
the text, however. CAD items that display in in a CAD detail or saved elevation/cross sec-
3D (such as counter tops and slabs) can be tion view. It can also include CAD blocks
part of a block, but will not display in 3D. that currently have no instance anywhere in
your plan. These blocks can remain after all
of their instances have been deleted.
Explode Block
In Use shows which blocks have at
Click on any item in a single block instance 2
least one instance being used.
to select that instance. When a single block is
selected, click the Explode Block button 3 Select any block in the list, click
Insert, then click in Plan View, a CAD
to break it back into its individual compo- Detail window or in a Section/Elevation
nents. You cannot explode a block instance View to place a new instance for the block
selected by dragging a marquee. You must into that view.
click it to select it.
If the block was composed of other blocks, 4 Press the Purge button to delete all
unused block definitions from your
exploding the outermost block will break it plan.This will delete all the blocks which are
down into the component blocks. Note that not tagged **In Use**.
the block definition is not exploded or
changed, just the instance.
536
CAD Blocks
5 If the selected block is not in use, the

Delete button is available, and you
can delete the block definition from your
CAD
plan.
Notes on CAD Blocks

What you see in the model is the block
instance. A block displays a position, orien-
tation and size that matches the items in the
original grouping. A block can be copied,
repositioned, resized and rotated indepen-
dently of any other block instance. For a plan
file, these blocks share the same definition
Managing
regardless of the floor or CAD detail in
Files
which they appear.
Copying a block to a different plan also cop-
ies the block definition to that plan.
Select a block by clicking on any one of its
Managing
CAD components. It will move, rotate and
resize much like a CAD box.
Files
Drag from a corner handle to resize the
entire block proportionately.
Drag from a side handle to resize in only one
dimension. Resizing each dimension inde-
Managing
pendently prevents exploding the block.
Files
You can snap to any item or crossing of items
in a CAD block. You cannot snap to arcs, cir-
cles or ovals if the block has been stretched
disproportional.
Managing
Only horizontal text should be placed in a
Files
block which will be rotated. The center of a
text item will rotate with the rest of the
block. Angled text will not maintain position
when a block is rotated.
Managing
Files
537
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks
CAD Blocks can be saved in the Library to 2. Restart Chief

be used in all plan files. Architect after cre-
1. To create your own CAD Block library, ating the copy of
first make a copy of an existing CAD the CAD Block
Block library, and rename that copy. Use library. This will
Windows Explorer to accomplish this. The force the program
existing library is named CAD to recognize the
Blocks.alb. Copy the file, then rename new library. Notice
the copy to something appropriate for you. the new My CAD
For this example, the new library is named Blocks library in
My CAD Blocks.alb. the browser.
3. Choose Tools>
Delete from Library, then delete each
item from the new library.
538
Creating a Library of CAD Blocks
These items are there because they are a 8. Browse the library.
copy of an original library, so they are not
needed in this one. This is the only way to
CAD
create a main, blank library.
4. Create the CAD Block if it is not already
done.
5. Select the CAD Block, click the Open
Item button, and give it a name. This
is the name which will be used to select it
in the Library Browser.
6. Select the CAD Block and choose Tools>
Add to Library. Click on the correct
library to hold the new CAD Block.
Managing
Rename the block if desired.
Files
Managing
Files
Use the CAD Blocks library like you would
any other library. Select the item, then place
Managing
it in the drawing.
7. Do the same with each additional CAD
Files
Block. Or you can name multiple blocks, CAD Blocks which are placed from the
select them as a group and add them to the Library can be exploded back into their com-
library simultaneously using Tools> Add ponent parts. This allows for modifications
to Library. In this case, the block names to the block if necessary. Once you have
made the modifications, you can create a
Managing
will be used as their library names.
new block with the changes and add that
Files
modified block to the Library as well.
Many manufacturers provide CAD details in
DXF format. You can import these into a
plan, block them, and turn them into Library
Managing
items. Some manufacturers’ details have

already been provided in library format for
Files
you. Observe the different CAD Block librar-

ies which are included with Chief Architect.
539
Dimensions
The Dimension tool is covered in 3. There are no automatic dimensions in
“Dimensions” on page 467. There are several CAD. All dimensions must be manually
things to remember when dimensioning drawn.
CAD items. 4. Dimensions in CAD mode follow the
1. Make sure that CAD Items are displayed in allowed angles set in the Preferences dia-
the current view. Dimensions will not look log. If the Allowed Angles is
for CAD items that are not displayed. Unrestricted , dimensions may be
(Double-click the Dimension button to drawn at any angle. To find the length of a
display the Dimension Setup dialog, then line or polyline edge drawn at a nonre-
click the Locate Items tab in the lower left stricted angle, drag a dimension line along
corner). it. Once drawn, the dimension line will
snap to the exact direction of the line and
2. If CAD items are turned off so they do not
give its exact length.
display, related dimensions will not display
either. When CAD items are turned on For more information see “Adjusting Angled
again, the related dimensions reappear. Walls and Polylines” on page 715.
CAD Layers
Current CAD Layer - Displays the cur- Each CAD layer has several options which
rent CAD Layer. Click to jump to new affect every item on that layer. Defaults set in
layer. Any CAD items drawn will auto- the CAD layers only affect CAD items on
matically be placed on this layer. Be that layer which have not had their color, line
careful about drawing on layers 1-100. size or line style modified individually.
Those are used by the system. *: Appears to the left of every layer
which contains at least one item.
CAD Layer Down - Change the current
CAD layer by one less. Display: Check to have all items on this
layer display.
CAD Layer Up - Change the current Name: Some layers are already named by
layer by one more. the program, others are left blank
and available to be named and
Show Items—Click to display the Lay-
used for anything desired (i.e.
ers dialog.
Electrical, Plumbing, etc.).
Layer 0 is the CAD Default Layer where all
Lock: Check to prevent accidental
CAD item will be placed unless otherwise
changes. Locked layer may be
specified.
viewed, but not deleted, moved, or
540
CAD Layers
modified in any way.

Size: Define the line width in pixels.
CAD
Default is 1. The size will not dis-
play on screen. Only the printout
is affected.
Color: Define the default color for the
layer.
Style: Define the default line style for
the layer. Continuous line type is
used for most layers.
CAD Layers in Cross Sections
Managing
When CAD is enabled in a cross section,
Files
CAD items can be drawn on any CAD layer
desired, just as when CAD is enabled in Plan
View.
In a cross section, for each wall, floor, ceil-
ing, roof or other surface that is cut by the
Managing
section plane, a CAD line is produced that
Files
follows the cut. Also, any framing item or
truss that is cut produces cross boxes to rep-
resent the cut end. These CAD items are all
on layer 9, and are updated whenever the Fill
Managing
Window button or menu item is selected
for the cross section view. Layer 9 is
Files
defaulted to locked in the Layers dialog,
since these lines should remain with the cross
section view. They are most useful for snap-
ping other CAD items and to be located by
Managing
dimension lines.
Files
The Layer dialog can be displayed in an ele-
vation or cross section view by selecting
Show Items button when the CAD mode is
active.
Managing
Files
541
CAD Preferences
1
4
5
6
2 7
3 8
9
10
11
12
13
The key to mastering the CAD facility is settings are an important aspect of the CAD
understanding the CAD panel of the Prefer- facility.
ences dialog. This dialog contains the infor-
Double-click the Select button to
mation which lays the foundation for
bring up the CAD panel of the Prefer-
everything done with the CAD tools. These
ences dialog.
Rotate/Resize About
Rotate around Rotate around Resize around Resize around Rotate around cur-
Item Center Current Point Item Center Current Point rent Point. Rotate
Jump=68d
1 The Rotate/Resize About selection or a group of items will rotate (or be resized
defines the point around which an item if Resize is selected under Edit Type.
542
CAD Preferences
The item center is the default. The Current “snap” as it is being rotated. If set non-zero,
Point is always the red “X” on the screen. this value overrides the allowed angle or
unrestricted rotation status set under
CAD
Rotate Jump defines the angle increment
at which an item or group of items will Allowed Angles.
Allowed Angles
Comparison between 15 Degree Increments

and Unrestricted Angles Example requiring Unrestricted angles...since the 15
degree restriction will not allow the polyline to close.
2 The Allowed Angles option defines 2 degree angles, the Allowed Angles in
Managing
the angular constraint for any new CAD CAD will also be 7-1/2 Degree Incre-
Files
item being drawn. Select the 15 Degree ments, not 15 Degree Increments. Also, any
Increments option unless Unrestricted Additional Angles set the Plan Defaults
is necessary for a specific item. It is far easier dialog are available as allowed angles when
to drag a straight horizontal or vertical line creating or rotating CAD items.)
Managing
when restricted to 15 degree angles. (Note: This setting can also be toggled from the
Plan Defaults can put the same angle restric-
Files
tion as on walls, so when walls are set to 7-1/ CAD toolbar using Restricted Angles .
Positioning Unit
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Positioning Unit set to 4. Points snapped to Positioning Unit set to 5. Lines are all in incre-
grid. Note that the items drawn diagonally fol- ments of 5" and have jumped to 5" apart.
low pattern not defined by these points
Managing
3 The Positioning Unit creates an Every new item drawn will jump to a grid
Files
imaginary background grid similar to crossing, and the length of each item will
an underlying sheet of graph paper, with the jump in the specified increments when draw-
graph lines the specified distance apart. ing it. Moving items is also affected by this
imaginary grid. The first jump will place the
543
Rotate/Resize specified point on the grid Move Corners

(no matter where it was originally located)
and then it will jump from grid point to grid
point.
Normally, the Positioning Unit is used to
quickly draw lines, circles or boxes of a cer-
tain size or a specified distance apart. It is
ideal for this.
Select one edge next to a corner and you can
move the corner along the other edge.
WARNING: If there is any other item
nearby to snap to, the item(s) will snap to
the other item and not jump to the
Positioning Unit grid. You can turn off
Auto Snap to prevent this.
Notes:
• The Positioning Unit has no effect
when the Allowed Angles is Unre- Select opposite edge and you can
stricted. move the corner anywhere desired.
• The Positioning Unit has no effect on
Move Corners is the default Edit
arcs. 4
Type for polylines. When this is
• Always reset the Positioning Unit back selected, a polyline can be edited like a roof
to 1 inch (or 10 mm) immediately after plane. Move Corners allows you to relo-
use. Otherwise that number will affect cate a single corner without resizing the rest
other drawing and editing commands as of the polyline. The edge you select will
well. restrict how you can move the corner.
• Do not use the Positioning Unit to
If you pick an edge next to the corner, you
RESIZE items. Use Concentric Jump
can only move the corner along its other
instead.
edge. If you pick an edge away from the cor-
Always be on the lookout for items ner, you can move the corner anywhere you
seeming to "jump" when drawing or wish.
moving. If this gets in your way, you may Move Corners also allows you to change
need to change the positioning unit for
the shape of a polyline by adding break
that action or reset it if it is responding to a
changed value. points (also known as “joints” or “corners”
or “hinge points”) to a polyline, just exactly
the same way you do when adjusting the
shape of a roof plane.
Notice how much information is available
simply by moving the cursor above any red
handle which appears when the polyline has
544
CAD Preferences
been selected. The polyline on the left is The diamond indicates a corner, or hinge
made of four lines. It was selected by click- point. Notice the extra corner on the right
ing on the lower edge. The second polyline is edge of the second polyline. If the polyline
CAD
the same polyline with a single break (for a was originally selected anywhere other than
joint) added on the right edge. the line to either side of that handle, it can
then be grabbed and used to create a five-
sided polyline (see far right example). All
corner handles not directly next to the mid-
point handle may be moved in any direction.
The two corner handles on either side of the
midpoint handle will only move in one
direction, directly in line with that corner's
other edge.
Managing
Select the polyline
Files
on the left edge.
Each red handle identifies its
Managing
function by its shape:
Files
Rotate handle - Drag the triangular handle to
rotate the polyline around the rotation point
defined in CAD panel of the Preferences
dialog. Place the cursor over this handle and
it will turn into a curved arrow. (Arcs are the Examples of the allowed movement
Managing
exception. Place the cursor over the triangu- using each handle on the polyline
Files
lar handle of a selected arc, and it will turn
into a two-headed arrow used for changing If you are not able to select the polyline on an
the curvature of the arc.) opposite edge (such as in the case where
there are only two lines joined by one cor-
Move handle - Drag the square handle in the ner), you may still move the corner anywhere
Managing
center to move the polyline as a unit. Place if you select the polyline exactly on that cor-
the cursor over this handle and it will turn
Files
ner. Notice that when the corner is properly
into a four-headed arrow.
A square also appears at the midpoint of the
selected edge which allows you to move that
edge parallel to itself, with the adjoining
Managing
sides adjusting to fit. Place the cursor over

Files
this handle and it turns into a two-headed

arrow.
545
selected, both edges next to that corner will

have a midpoint handle.
Corner selected. Free movement

allowed in any direction
Edge selected. Movement allowed

only in one direction.
Concentric
Concentric is the Edit Type which other than 0, the selected item will jump at
5
affects copying or resizing of a CAD each increment of the specified amount. This
item (except arcs) at a specified distance amount will then override the value or unre-
from the item's center (even if Rotate/ stricted status set under Positioning Unit.
Resize is set to current point). Concen- Following are several examples of items in
tric editing will effect the entire polyline if the process of being edited. Concentric
any corner is grabbed and dragged. Jump is set to 12 inches. Notice that each
When Concentric Jump is set to 0, then new edge is the same distance away from the
the distance units scroll past in the informa- original edge. This is not a proportional
tion bar when dragging an item. When Con- adjustment—the only items proportionally
centric Jump is set to a specific value
546
CAD Preferences
adjusted are the perfect square and circle. ated. If the Copy button is not selected,
(RESIZE is used for proportional scaling). the original item will take on the new size
CAD
when dragged. Following is a simple illustra-
Always reset Concentric Jump to "0". tion of the results with and without selecting
This value will continue to affect editing
the Copy button:
even if another Edit Type is selected.
Roof planes are also affected by the
concentric jump value. This value saves
with the specific plan, so make sure to
reset it before closing the plan. Watch for
Original box.
CAD items (including roof planes) jumping
at specific increments, and know where to Concentric editing.
go to reset this value.
Managing
If you select the item, click the Copy but-
Files
ton, then drag off a corner of the selected
item, the original item will remain Results with copy Results without copy.
unchanged and a concentric copy will be cre-
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Resize is the Edit Type used for pro- selected by observing how the system is
6
portional copying or scaling. Always reacting.
drag a corner, not an edge. (Dragging an edge
will act the same as when Concentric is the Fillet Edit Type
Managing
Edit Type, and the Concentric Jump Fillet is the Edit Type which causes
Files
value will be used even though Resize is the 7
the rounding of corners of a box or
current Edit Type.) Below are some exam- polyline.
ples. Notice that the resizing is proportional
to the original, but the distance between
related edges varies depending on the shape
Managing
of the item.
Files
Remember: Always reset the Edit Type to

Move Corners or to your preferred default
type. Learn to recognize which Edit Type is
547
All the corners of a box will adjust together the item is on a locked layer or is part of a
so that all share the same radius. CAD block.
If Auto Snap is checked , the start or end
points of an item will attempt to snap to these
locations in order of priority:
1. A nearby point.
Original Drag inward Result 2. A nearby line end or corner (two line ends
Each polyline corner coming together).
is filleted individu- 3. An intersection.
ally. To fillet in this 4. A nearby edge of any item.
way, select the 5. The imaginary grid defined by the Posi-
polyline or box and tioning Unit in CAD Preferences.
drag inward from a
corner. The amount If Auto Snap is cleared , only the Posi-
of the fillet is defined by the amount you tioning Unit will affect the start or end
drag. point.
The “nearby” distance is defined by the per-
Fillet Notes
cent. One percent means one percent of the
• Remember to reset Fillet to Move Cor- screen width. That is how close you have to
ners as soon as you are finished. be to have the item “snap” to one of the
• Fillets (box) are great for creating the defined locations. Because it is based on
master border on layout page number 0. screen and not actual or scale distance,
• To produce fillets of an exact radius (or zooming in or out is the best way to change
chamfer), it is better to set the Fillet/ how snapping works.
Chamfer radius and use the Fillet or When Auto Snap is checked , lines and
Chamfer edit buttons. These can be arcs drawn end to end automatically merge to
used on lines already connected in a form a polyline which is considered to be a
polyline. single item. When Auto Snap is off , the
lines will not unite automatically. Always
Auto Snap
leave Auto Snap checked unless it is
8 If checked, the start and end points of negatively affecting a specific action by
any item being drawn will attempt to snapping to an undesired location. Then turn
“snap” to other locations within the specified it off temporarily, and turn it back on when
screen distance (which, in this case, is 1% of you are done. Auto Snap can be turned off
the screen width). An item can be snapped and on from the CAD toolbar with the Auto
to if it is currently visible. This is true even if
Snap Toggle button.
548
CAD Preferences
Edit Polyline Parts
CAD
Edit Polyline Parts is not checked . The Edit Polyline Parts is checked . Each edge is an
polyline remains a unit. individually editable item.
9 Normally, lines and arcs touching end has been reestablished. If the entire polyline
to end (with Auto Snap checked) will does not highlight, you may need to move
form a polyline, a new combined unit which individual edges slightly to trigger the
Managing
allows editing as a whole. Sometimes a sin- polyline reunification.
gle edge of a polyline needs to be removed,
Files
This setting can also be toggled from the
but when you click on that edge, the entire CAD toolbar with the Edit Polyline Parts
polyline is selected. Clicking the Delete
button would remove the entire polyline. To toggle button.
edit the individual components of a polyline,
TIP: Delete a line or a section of a line by
Managing
check the box for Edit Polyline Parts . drawing over it, just like with walls.
Files
Then click on an edge and you can move or
delete just that one edge, leaving the rest of Extended POV-ray DXF
the lines intact. Above is an illustration of the
Extended POV-ray DXF- Select the
same polyline being edited without and with 10
Edit Polyline Parts checked. Notice that, check box to add information on lights
Managing
on the right, the edge being moved has no when creating a 3D DXF (3D face) file
Files
link to the rest of the lines. which will be read by POV-ray.
Notice the difference between the number of Block Fill

handles for the two items, and the different
Block Fill by
cursor shapes. When the item is a polyline 11
Item - Select the
unit, the entire unit picks up red handles
Managing
check box to have com-
when selected. When the polyline is broken
Files
ponent items filled in
up into its individual components, the only
the same way as they
handles relate to the individual component
were before being Unchecked
(in this case a line).
blocked. Clear the check
After the individual components have been box and any filled com-
Managing
edited, be sure to clear the check box next to ponents will all have the
Files
Edit Polyline Parts . Also make sure to same fill pattern. This
select the check box for Auto Snap . You pattern is set in the Line Checked
can select the polyline once again to see if it
549
Style dialog that is opened for that containing These two options are default settings, affect-
block instance. ing all CAD blocks not specified individu-
New Blocks by Layer - Select the ally. By Block or By Layer may be
12 specified for CAD blocks in the Line Style
check box to cause newly-created CAD
block instances to default to maintaining the dialog (accessed through Edit CAD Item dia-
individual characteristics of the component log.)
parts, including line color, line style, and
Advanced Splines
hatch or solid fill. This is the preferred set-
ting. The By Layer or By Block setting of Advanced Splines - Select the
13
an existing CAD block can be changed in the check box to display the control han-
Line Style dialog, which is accessed from the dles for splines. Clear the check box to dis-
Edit CAD Item dialog. play only the spline vertices.
Line Properties Preferences
1 4
5
6
7
8
9
The Line Properties panel of the Preferences values to display, each item must have the
dialog is where you can set the preferred for- appropriate boxes checked under Style in
mat for displaying lengths and angles of the Edit CAD Item dialog.)
CAD lines and polyline edges. (This only Line Lengths may be displayed
affects how it displays. To actually cause the 1
either in fractional format or as decimal
550
Line Properties Preferences
feet. (This setting is not available in metric easy to tell which framing member is on the
mode, which always uses millimeters.) top, since the items below are blocked by the
solid white fill.
CAD
2 Line angles may be displayed either
as degrees or as bearings relative to the The Line Style Pattern Scaling gives
North Pointer. (If no North Pointer has been you control over how non-continuous lines
established, north is assumed to be straight display on screen and how they print. This
up.) allows you to adjust for changes caused by
different size drawings or different printers.
Overall Scale Factor (Screen Only)
6
- Adjusts the screen scale factor for
non-continuous lines. The default is 100%.
To change the screen scale to twice the nor-
mal size, change this value to 200%.
Managing
• Fractional • Degrees
Pattern Space Increase Per Line
Files
7 Thickness (Screen Only) - Adjusts
the screen spacing between the dashes. When
thick lines are set to display, the thicker
dashes will sometimes bleed into the spaces
• Decimal Feet • Bearing
Managing
between the dashes. This can make a dashed
line appear to be continuous. Increase this
3 The height of these displayed line
Files
lengths and angles may be specified in value if you cannot see the spaces between
the Number height edit box. This value is the dashes.
not related to the size of other text items or Overall Scale Factor (Printing
dimension numbers. This allows you to read 8
Only) - Adjusts the printing scale factor
Managing
the distance and bearing of a plot layout even for non-continuous lines. This does for the
though it is printed at a much smaller scale.
Files
printer what #6 does for the screen.
4 The centers and 9 Pattern Space Increase Per Line
ends or arcs, Thickness (Printing) - Adjusts the
and the centers of spacing between dashes when printing
circles may be dis- thicker lines. This does for the printer what
Managing
played or not. A dis- #7 does for the screen.
Files
played center will be
a snap point. Unless
changed, Show Arc
centers, ends is
checked to display. Show Arc centers, ends
Managing
Fill New
5
Files
Framing Members - Select the

check box to have all new framing members
drawn with a solid white fill. This makes it
551
The Edit CAD Item Dialog

One of the most powerful CAD features is point for rotation is the Rotate Around
the ability to edit CAD items and replicate point defined in CAD Preferences.
using keyboard input. CAD items may be If Replicate is non-zero, the item will remain
modified, reversed, or even replicated a spec- in the original in position and the number of
ified number of times at a specified distance copies specified will be created.
apart. The Edit CAD Item dialog will vary
Reverse - Select the check box to
depending on the type of CAD item selected 2
for editing. reverse the selected item(s), mirroring
around an imaginary vertical line drawn
To display the Edit CAD Item dialog, select through the Rotate Around point defined
the CAD item (or group-select the 3D items) in CAD Preferences.
and then click the Open Item button.
Move Relative to itself - Select the
Multiple items may be selected as a group 3
check box to move the selected item(s)
and be moved, replicated, reversed or rotated
a specified distance from its current location.
as a group.
When checked, X Distance and Y Dis-
Edit CAD Item - Line tance change from gray to black and are
available for input. X Distance specifies
amount to move or copy the item to the right
1 (positive value) or to the left (negative
2 value). Y Distance specifies amount to
move or copy the item upward (positive
3
value) or downward (negative value). Polar
4 also becomes available for selection.
5
If Replicate is non-zero, the Move Rela-
6 tive to Itself will leave the original in posi-
tion but will create the number of copies
7 specified in Replicate at the intervals
8 defined by Move Relative to Itself.
Polar (CCW from horiz.) - Select
4
Replicate - Enter the number of cop- the check box to move the selected item
1 by a defined angle and distance. Enter the
ies desired. Leave blank if no copies are
needed. values for the Distance and the Angle.
Enter values used to move or replicate the
If Replicate is selected, define the linear
selected item(s).
distance between each copy in the Move
Relative to Itself box, or create a circular X Distance specifies amount to
5
array by checking Set angle and defining move or copy the item to the right (pos-
the degrees between each copy. The center itive value) or to the left (negative value).
552
The Edit CAD Item Dialog
Y Distance specifies amount to Edit CAD Item - Closed Polyline

6
move or copy the item upward (positive
value) or downward (negative value).
CAD
7 If Replicate is cleared, select Set
Angle to define the new angle for the
selected item. If Replicate is not blank,
check this box to define the angular rotation
for each new copy. If left unchecked it will
have no effect (even though a grayed value
displays).
Set Length - Select the check box to 10
8
redefine the length of the line or side. It
will always lengthen or shorten around the
Managing
center, even if Current Point is chosen in
Files
CAD panel of the Preferences dialog.
11
Polyline Angle - Select the check
Edit CAD Item - Box 10
box to rotate the entire polyline by
redefining the selected edge’s angle.
Managing
11 The Polyline Area will display for
Files
closed polylines.
Edit CAD Item - Circle
Managing
Files
9
Managing
Set Width - Select the check box to
Files
9
redefine the width of the box (including
cross boxes, insulation and framing) or oval. 12
13
Managing
Set Diameter - Select the check box

12
Files
to redefine the diameter of the circle.

Set Radius - Select the check box to
13
redefine the radius of the circle.
553
Edit CAD Item - Multiple Items on the edge you selected. Rotating a block
containing text will not rotate the text.
Height Factor - Enter a vertical scal-
16
ing factor for the CAD Block. A factor
of 1 is 100% scale. If the Height Factor is
different from the Width Factor, you will not
be able to explode the block.
Width Factor - Enter a horizontal
17
15
scaling factor for the CAD Block. A
factor of 1 is 100% scale. If the Height Fac-
tor is different from the Width Factor, you
14 will not be able to explode the block.
18 Block Name - Define the name for

Resize Factor - Select the check box
14 the selected block. While all other
to define a scaling factor for items
which are group selected. A value of 1 means changes in this dialog affect only this
100% scale, .5 means 50%, etc. instance of the block, changing the name
modifies the block definition. The name is
Edit CAD Item - CAD Blocks used when the block is exported or imported
via DXF. If you use a name that is in use, the
definition of the other block is overwritten
and the instances of that block will be
updated to match the current definition.
Style - Select the check box to specify
16
how the line colors, line weights and
line styles for the block will be determined.
15
16 If By Block is selected, then all block com-
17 ponents display with the color and weight of
the block’s layer. Set the layer for the block
18 in this dialog. All components will be the
same color, line weight and line style.
By Layer means the Color and Line weight
19 of the lines will be unchanged in the block.
Set Angle - Rotate the CAD Block by They display as they should for the layer on
15 which they were originally created. Different
this angle. The block will rotate based
components may have different line colors,
line weights and line styles.
554
Linear Example Using CAD Replicate
Linear Example Using CAD Replicate
CAD
+ + +
Managing
Files
Any item or items which have been group
selected with a CAD item can be copied in an
array using the CAD Replicate function.
The items must first be group selected in
Managing
Plan View using either the marquee or
Files
the Shift + click method. If you are group
selecting cabinets or soffits, be sure to add a
CAD item such as a line to the selection set.
After group selecting the item(s), click the
Managing
Open Item button. The Edit CAD Item
Files
dialog will open.
Define the number of copies and the intervals
desired. Click OK.
The previous illustration shows a simple
Managing
application using a section of fence created
with a small CAD line and five soffits--a 4x4
Files
post, 2 - 2x4x96 straight soffits, and 2 - 2x4
sloped soffits. The result is a fence layout at
the specified distance. The CAD line was
included to prevent accessing the Soffit
Managing
Specification dialog instead of the Edit

CAD Item dialog.
Files
555
Radial Example Using CAD Replicate

Rotate Around Result
Current Point
One section was laid Seven more copies

out using rafters, which were needed, at 45
automatically aligh to degree increments.
the roof.
Two-dimensional or three-dimensional items ences dialog, set Rotate/Resize About to
may be replicated using the Edit CAD Item Current Point.
dialog. In this example, rafters are laid out in Turn off the display of the Roof Planes layer
one section of the gazebo. Rafters automati- in the Layers dialog. This makes it easier to
cally cling to the underside of the roof select only the rafters.
planes, so the rafters are at the correct angle
and position. Select the rafters to be copied. Click the
Open Item button. Choose to Replicate
The rafters need to be copied radially, around
a point at the peak of the gazebo. Place a the selected items 7 times, at a 45 degree
point at the peak, and be sure it is the current Angle Increment. Click OK.
(red) point. On the CAD panel of the Prefer- The rafters will lay out correctly.
556
Edit Arc Dialog
Edit Arc Dialog
CAD
2
3
4
5
6
1 7
Managing
8
Files
Chord Angle - Select the check box Chord Length -
1 4
to rotate the arc by changing the angle The straight line dis-
of the chord (the imaginary straight line tance between the two
going from the start of the arc to the end of ends of the arc.
Managing
the arc). The box contains the current value.
Files
Replace it with the new value. Here the value
Arc Angle - The
is shown in degrees. Its format can be 5
included angle
changed by clicking on the Num Style but-
between the center of the
ton.
arc and each end.
Modify Arc Parameters - Select the
2
Managing
check box to modify the arc. Once this
Radius - The dis-
Files
box is checked, all the grayed options below 6
become available for editing. tance between the
center of the arc and the
3 First, click the radio button to the right arc surface.
of the one value to keep. Next, change
one of the other values as desired. Press the
Managing
Arc Length - The
Tab key on the keyboard to see the other val- 7
Files
length of the arc
ues update. Then click OK. The arc will be along the curve.
modified such that the value selected to keep
is maintained and the other values change
according to the new specification.
Managing
Files
557
Lock Center - snap to another CAD item that is being

8
Select the check moved. A non-lock center arc will extend
box to lock the center of along its chord—keeping its subtended angle
the selected arc. Lock Original arc & line constant.
center status has no before moving line so
arc snaps to line. An arc drawn with the Arc button
effect if the arc itself is
edited. It only affects defaults to non-lock center. An arc drawn
how the arc will extend with the Arc About Ctr button defaults
or contract to snap to Lock center arc to being lock center.
adjacent items when
they are being edited.
The end of a lock center
arc will extend or con- Non-lock center arc
tract along its arc to
Line Style Dialog
1
13
2 14
15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6
19
7
8
9 20
10 21
11 22
12 23
Click the Style button from the Edit CAD selected CAD item(s). Changes in this dialog
Item dialog to display the Line Style dialog. will override the definition in the item’s cor-
Use this dialog to change the Line Color, responding CAD layer. You can also move
Line Style and Line Weight for the the selected item(s) from one layer to another
558
Line Style Dialog
by changing the layer number in the Layer This option is available with line and arc seg-
edit box. ments. This feature is often used for property
lines.
CAD
Line Color - Select a color from the
1
list of colors. Use the keyboard arrow Show Angle - Select the check box to
6
keys to scroll up and down through the have the angle of each line display
options. along the line itself, below the line and cen-
By Layer - Select the check box to restore tered. The angle format (either degrees or
the current color default for the specified bearings) is defined under Default Style in
layer. Choose white if an item is to exist, but the CAD panel of the Preferences dialog.
not display on the screen or in printouts. All Angles - Clear the check box to
7
Line Style - Select a line from the list display only those angles which are nei-
2 ther horizontal nor vertical. This is automati-
of five line styles available. Use the
cally checked when Show Angle is
Managing
keyboard arrow keys to scroll up and down
through the options. Click in the box to mini- checked.
Files
mize the drop-down Line Style list. Reverse Angle - Select check box to
8
Check By Layer to restore the current Line reverse the angle by 180 degrees. This
Style default for the specified layer. is most commonly used when showing the
bearing of a line, since the start point of the
Line Weight - Define the line weight
Managing
3 lines defines the bearing.
(in pixels) for the specific item.
Files
Move to Front - Select check box to
Check By Layer to restore the current Line 9
have the selected item show in front of
Weight default for the specified layer. This other CAD items in the same location.
weight normally displays only in printed or
plotted output, not on screen. To make line This moves the selected item(s) in front of
other CAD items. This is useful for shifting
Managing
weight display on the screen, check Show
Line Weight in the Appearance page of the layering of CAD items to mask or display
Files
the Preferences dialog. items as desired. (i.e. Move a solid circle rep-
resenting rebar to the front of a hatched foun-
Layer - Define the new layer for the
4 dation wall in a cross section so that the rebar
selected item(s). Unless otherwise will display and not be masked by the
specified, the selected item(s) will take on hatched foundation wall.)
Managing
the default values of the new layer.
Move to front will not work with System lay-
Files
Show Length - Select the check box
5 ers 1 through 4. These layers are used for
to have the length of each line display ceiling, floor, roof an truss framing. These
along the line itself, above the line and cen- layers are maintained in front of other Sys-
tered. The length format for imperial units tem, Architectural and User layers.
(either fractional feet or decimal feet) is
Managing
Maintain in Back - Select the check

defined on the Line Properties panel of the 10
Files
Preferences dialog. box to send the selected CAD item to

the back, behind everything else. If in Plan
View, this will send the items behind even
559
the architectural items. If in a Section/Eleva- Hatch Pattern - Choose a hatch pat-

13
tion view, this will send the selected items tern from the drop-down list. If addi-
behind the structure. tional pattern files have been added, there
CAD Stops Move - Select the check will be more options than the basic Chief
11 Architect hatch patterns.
box to have the item stop when moved
against most CAD items. Stops can be Spacing - Define the spacing for the
14
defined for closed polylines and any of the selected hatch pattern.
box types except Oval . Angle - Define the angle of the
15
Wall Stops Move - Select the check selected hatch pattern.
12
box to have the CAD item stop when it Use Layer Color - Select the check
bumps into a wall.
16
box to have the hatch pattern use its
Boxes created using the Framing , Cross own layer’s color for the pattern lines. If it is
a solid fill, checking this will cause the fill
Box or Insulation tools will automati-
color to be the same as the layer’s color.
cally be checked for CAD Stops Move. All
can also be set for Wall Stops Move. Tap Transparent Fill - Select the check
17
the Ctrl key when a CAD item stops because box to have the hatch patterns become
it has bumped against either another CAD transparent. When checked, any items behind
item or against a wall, and that specific stop the hatch pattern would then show through.
will be overridden. Line Color - Define a different line
18
color (or fill color if a solid is speci-
Fill Closed Area fied). This would override the layer color.
Boxes, circles and closed polylines have
19 A picture of the selected hatch or solid
additional options available. You may apply fill displays here.
a fill pattern (including solid fill) to any of Pattern File and Name - If other
these. The various pattern options do not 20
pattern files exist (.pat files), click
appear until a pattern other than None is Browse to find the file so you can use those
selected from the drop-down list. There are new patterns in Chief Architect.
many different patterns available. As with all
Path - displays the path to the pattern
the drop-down lists, click on the list to see 21
the options, and scroll up or down through files.
the list using the up arrow and down arrow Pattern - Choose a pattern from the
22
keys on the keyboard. Make the selection, new pattern file.
then click anywhere in the box to close the Pattern - Choose a scale for the pat-
drop-down list. 23
tern if desired.
560
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog
CAD
Many of the CAD dialogs have a Number the format for distances and angles. This
Style button. Clicking this opens the Num- affects which units display in the dialogs.
Managing
ber Style/Angle Style dialog which controls
Files
Two Methods of Creating Special CAD Items
Closed polylines may be turned into items line or polyline, it may be changed into a
Managing
which will display in any 3D View. These Special CAD item. If so, the Edit CAD Item
Files
polylines are referred to as Special CAD dialog will have a Special button at the bot-
items. tom. This button will also appear in the Edit
If a closed polyline can be defined as a Spe- Arc dialog if appropriate. Click Special to
cial CAD item, the Edit CAD Item dialog display the Special CAD dialog.
will have a Special button. Click the button See the following section for a comprehen-
Managing
to display the Special CAD dialog sive list of the Special CAD items.
Files
These special types of closed polylines may
also be created directly from the menus,
thereby eliminating the need to turn a regular
CAD polyline into the desired item. For
example, custom counter tops may be cre-
Managing
ated by selecting Build> Cabinet> Custom
Files
Counter Top. Slabs may be created by
selecting Build> Structure> Slab or Build>
Structure> Slab with Footing. Several
other Special CAD items may also be created
from other areas of the menu.
Managing
Files
All of the Special CAD items available

through the menus may also be created from
a closed polyline. Other CAD items may also
be redefined. If the selected CAD item is a
561
Special CAD Dialog
1
2
3
4 9
5
6
10
7
11
8
Gable/Roof Line Bearing Lines

Gable/Roof lines work in combina-
1 2 Open polylines can be changed into
tion with exterior walls to determine the Bearing Lines using the Special CAD
perimeter from which the automatic roof dialog. This is more typically drawn with the
generator produces a roof. Created from sin- Bearing Line tool (found to the right of
gle lines or open polylines, each end should the toolbar when the Roof tool is clicked).
meet an exterior wall at its outer main layer
line. The automatic roof generator produces Bearing lines may be created from single
baselines that follow the exterior wall’s main lines or polylines. Normally drawn along
layers except where a Gable/Roof line is bearing walls or beams, the bearing lines run
encountered, in which case the Gable/Roof along bearing walls or beams to show where
line is followed instead. joists are supported. This information is used
by the Automatic Framing Generator to lay
You will usually use the Gable/Roof Line out the affected joists. For more information,
tool to do the same thing. Turning CAD lines see “Bearing Line” on page 364.
into Gable/Roof lines is the same as draw-
ing those same Gable/Roof Lines using Custom Counter Top
the Gable Line tool in the first place. For
more information, see “Gable/Roof Line 3 You may create a custom counter top
from any closed polyline by checking
Tool” on page 352. the Counter Top option. Counter top
polylines are described on page 399.
562
Special CAD Dialog
Closed polylines are the only CAD items defined as a slab with footing. Use any of the
which can be changed into custom counter CAD tools to change its shape, size, etc.
tops. (Circles, boxes, ovals, etc. cannot be Select the polyline, open it, and click the
CAD
changed into counter tops.) Special button in the Edit CAD Item dialog
Custom counter tops may be changed back to edit its thickness, position, color or mate-
into CAD polylines by unchecking Counter rial, and footing height or width.
top in the Special CAD dialog. Slabs With Footings, like custom counter
If Special is not a button in the Edit CAD tops, can be created from a polyline using the
Item dialog, it means that either the polyline Special CAD dialog as well.
is not yet closed, or else the CAD item is not Change the view angle in a 3D view to see
a true polyline made of only lines or arcs. Fix the thickened footing below the foundation
the problem, then try again. slab.
Managing
Holes may be cut into a custom counter top
Holes in Countertops and Slabs
by defining another closed polyline which is
Files
totally contained in the custom counter top, 6 Custom counter tops, slabs and slabs
and defining it as a Hole. with footings may all have holes cut in
them by using one additional option avail-
Slab able from the Special CAD dialog.
Managing
4 Choose Build>Slabs>Slab from the Create a closed polyline of any shape using
Files
menu to activate Slab mode. Drag a any of the tools available. Select the polyline,
rectangle from one corner to the opposite click the Open Item button, then click
corner. This rectangle is pre-defined as a Special to access the Special CAD dialog.
slab. Use any of the CAD tools to change its Check the box next to the type of item to
shape, size, etc. Select the polyline, open it, have the hole (counter top, slab or slab with
Managing
and click the Special button in the Edit footing). A new option called Hole will
Files
CAD Item dialog to edit its thickness, posi- appear. Check Hole as well. Click OK until
tion, color or material. back to the plan.
A slab, like a custom counter top, can be cre- Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings, and take an
ated from a polyline using the Special CAD overview or 3D View of the room. The origi-
dialog. Height, thickness, color and material nal slab will have a hole in it. To make the
Managing
can be specified there as well. slab complete again delete the polyline that
Files
defines the hole.
Slab with Footing
You may change the Layer of a contained
5 A Slab with Footing is similar to polyline to be different from that of the larger
regular slabs, with the addition of polyline by selecting the Style button in the
options for footing height and width.
Managing
Edit CAD Item dialog. The Layer will be

Files
Choose Build> Structure> Slab with Foot- listed in the Line Style dialog. If you select
ing from the menu to activate Slab With Foot- the larger polyline, the container, and change
ing mode. Drag a rectangle from one corner its Layer, the contained polyline will be
to the opposite corner. This rectangle is pre- changed as well.
563
Stair Landing Once defined as a Hole in Roof the

polyline will always maintain its identity as a
7 Any closed polyline may be turned into polyline hole. You may edit its edges as you
a custom stair landing using the options would a roof plane.
provided in the Special CAD dialog. This
allows you to create custom shaped landings. To change the fascia angle from square cut to
The landing will not display in 3D until at plumb cut, or vice versa, select the hole,
least one set of stairs has been added to the click the Open Item button, and choose
plan such that either the base or the top of the the desired cut.
stairs attaches to the landing.
Multiple sets of stairs may be attached to the
same landing.
To attach stairs to a landing, first select the
stairs. Grab the attachment end of the stairs
and release it when it is above the edge of a
landing. Notice the “UP” or “DN” label on
the staircase may disappear when the stair is
correctly merged to the landing.
Ballisters will generate on all sides of the
landing except where joined to a set of stairs Framing for roof holes is currently plumb
or against a wall. cut regardless of this setting.
Hole in Roof Height and Thickness

8 A closed polyline which is contained 9 Counter tops, Slabs, Slab with Footings
within an existing roof plane in Plan and Lot perimeters may all have their
View may be turned into a Hole in Roof. height and thickness specified in the Spe-
This will actually cut a hole in the roof, and cial CAD dialog. The results will be visible in
that hole will display in both Plan View and 3D after rebuilding floors and ceilings.
3D. This option simplifies the process of cre-
ating skylight cutouts or exterior roof open- Footing Height and Width
ings.
Check the box to turn the polyline into a 10 Slab with Footings may also have the
footing height and width specified.
Hole in Roof. Choose whether to have the This is the thickened edge around the foun-
sides of the hole square cut or plumb dation slab. This thickened area will meet at
cut. Click OK. 90 degrees to the slab.
The polyline will change appearance as it has
changed into a special type of roof item. It Material
moves to CAD layer 10 along with the rest of Material - Click the button to open the
the roof planes, taking on the color and line-
11
Select Material dialog to define the
type of that layer. material for the Special CAD Item.
564
CAD Menu
CAD Menu
CAD
The CAD tools are always available in the next architectural tool (such as the Wall
Plan View, even when the Architectural tool) and continue.
mode is active. If only one or two lines are
needed, select CAD>Line from the menu. Even the Multiple Select for CAD items is
available in Architectural mode by choos-
This will activate the Line tool without ing CAD> Select from the menu.
requiring you to toggle into the CAD facility.
Draw the lines you need, then click on the
Snap To: (Snap Points)
Managing
The snap functions in Chief Architect are You can also snap to the following items:
Files
rarely used. Sometimes there is an easier way • roof baseline
to accomplish the same goal, but the snap • center crossmark for curved wall in work-
functions do accomplish some things which ing (active) plan
are impossible to do any other way.
• center crossmark for a curved wall in the
When deciding to use the Snap To function
Managing
reference plan if wall centers are displayed
remember that the current CAD point is the in the reference plan (check the Ref. col-
Files
first thing Chief will use as a snap. umn for Automatic Dimensions in the
Snap To - allows you to locate the current Layers dialog).
CAD point in a place where it will be useful • edges of stair sections & landings
as a Snap. If a CAD item is selected before choosing
Managing
Snap To - can either move or stretch a CAD one of the Snap To: options, the selected item
Files
item to a point, or it can move a point to a moves to the current point. This is very use-
CAD item., depending on whether or not a ful for precisely locating items in relation to
CAD item is selected prior to activating the each other. Each type of CAD item has a spe-
function. cific definition point used to locate the item.
If a CAD item is NOT selected, Snap To: will Lines and arcs are located by their midpoint,
Managing
move the current point (the red “X”) to the circles and ovals by their center, and boxes
Files
closest qualifying item, no matter how far by the midpoint on their lower edge (when
away it is. If that current point is the attached drawn from left to right).
endpoint of a line or arc, the current point
will take the line or arc endpoint with it as it
moves to the new snap location, thus chang-
Managing
ing line or arc.

Files
Qualifying items are - CAD points, Line or

ARC midpoints, Circle or Oval centers, Box
mid-points.
565
Snap to POINT Snap to ITEM END
Original line with New location after

temporary endpoint as Snap To: Point was
current point. selected.
Newly created Closed polyline after

polyline. Ends do not Snap To: Item End
meet. was chosen.
Original arc with tem- New location after

porary endpoint as cur- Snap To: Point was
rent point. selected.
The following section describes the results of Newly created line. Line after Snap To:
using Snap To when a CAD item is and is not Item End was cho-
selected first. sen.
Current Point - When no CAD item is Current Point - If no CAD item is

selected, choosing Snap To>Point will cause selected, Snap To>Item End snaps the current
the current point to snap to and merge with point to the nearest endpoint or corner. This
the nearest point. can be used to automatically close a newly
In the two sets of illustrations, the finger is created polyline or to snap the end of one line
pointing to the current point before and after to a corner or end of another edge.
Snap To>Point was selected. The point on the Also use this to snap a point to the end of a
end of both the line and arc is the temporary, line or arc in order to create an attached end-
attached endpoint created when the line and point. Once snapped to the end using this
arc were drawn. Notice that both the line and method, the point will stretch the line or arc
the arc change when their endpoint snaps to if it is then snapped to another snap point.
the new location (the nearest point). Circles and ovals also have qualifying Item
CAD Item Selected - If a CAD item is End snap points. These snap points are visi-
selected first, Snap To>Point has no effect. ble when a circle or oval is selected—they
are the handles which lie on the edge of the
item. If a circle is drawn horizontally, the
Item End snap points will be the four quad-
rant points (i.e. north, south, east and west—
see illustration above).
566
Snap To: (Snap Points)
CAD Item Selected - If a CAD item is Snap to ITEM

selected first, choosing Snap To>Item End
will move the selected item to the current
CAD
point. This is used to reposition CAD items,
such as moving a circle so that its center lies
exactly on the end of a line.
Snap to line
Current point placed near Current point after Snap

end of line. To: Item End was cho-
sen. This creates an
attached endpoint.
Snap to circle (with & without center displayed).
Managing
Current Point - If a CAD item is not
Files
selected, choosing Snap To>Item snaps the
current point to the nearest item. If the near-
est item is a line or line segment, the point
“Corners” of a circle (also oval) to
which Snap To: Item End will snap. will snap to the perpendicular point. If the
Managing
nearest item is an arc or circle, the point will
Snap to INTERSECTION snap to the item directly in line with the cen-
Files
ter point (unless arc centers are dis-
played...then the point will snap directly to
selected, choosing Snap To>Intersection will
the center).
snap the current point to the intersection
between the two closest CAD items. If the If the point is an attached line endpoint, it
Managing
two closest CAD items do not intersect, or if behaves as expected unless the nearest item
Files
neither one is a line, the current point will not is the straight edge of a line, polyline or box.
move. Then the line endpoint will move in the
direction of its line to the location where the
CAD Item Selected - If a CAD item is
two lines would meet in space, lengthening
selected first, Snap To>Intersection will have
or shortening the line as necessary.
no effect.
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
567
CAD Item Selected - If a CAD item is Snap to LINE MIDPOINT

selected first, choosing Snap To>Item will
move the selected CAD item in a perpendic-
ular direction to the current point.
Line endpoint before and after Snap To:

Line Midpoint was chosen.
Normal snapping to item.
Arc endpoint before and after Snap To:

Line Midpoint was chosen. Notice the
“midpoint” of the circle.

Snapping to the meeting point selected, choosing Snap To> Line Midpoint
of the two lines snaps the current point to the midpoint of the
nearest line, linear edge or arc, or to the cen-
ter point of an oval or circle.
CAD Item Selected - If a CAD item is
selected first, choosing Snap To>Line Mid-
point will move the selected CAD item so
that its defined midpoint relocates to the cur-
rent point.
Delete Points
Choose CAD> Delete Points to delete all the Delete Points saves time when there are a
CAD points simultaneously. CAD points are lot of points on the screen. Otherwise, press
the X’s which are drawn in CAD mode. They
the Del key on the keyboard, with nothing
are used by the program as a snap point.
selected, to have CAD points delete one at a
There is also a Delete Points button time in the reverse order in which they were
which may be added to the toolbar using created.
Tools> Customize Toolbar.
568
North Pointer
North Pointer
CAD
The North Pointer defines
the direction of true north in
Plan View. If north is not
defined, it is assumed to be
straight up. Every bearing is in
relation to north, so establish
this direction before keying in
survey information for plot
layouts or for using bearings to
establish polar direction for Line angle set to display as The same line angle is set to display as
the creation or editing of Degrees. This does not refer- Bearings. This shows the angle in refer-
Managing
ence the North Pointer. ence to the North Pointer.
points, lines, arcs, etc.
Files
There can be only one North Pointer per lowed by d) then the minutes (followed by ')
plan. After choosing CAD>Special>North then the seconds (followed by “) and finally
Pointer, drag the line defining the pointer, type either E or W (for East or West). If
starting at the tail and dragging toward the minutes are zero, you do not need to enter a
Managing
point. Do not worry about the size or direc- value. Following are some examples of bear-
tion when creating the pointer, since it is ings: It is not necessary to capitalize the let-
Files
more accurate to input the exact values using ters. Spaces are also optional.
the Edit CAD Item dialog. • N 20d 30' E
When the North Pointer is drawn, select it • S 45' W
and open it for specification. Check Set • N 89d 48' 30" W
Managing
Angle and type in the actual angle for north • N 90' E
Files
(0 degrees is horizontal to the right, 90
degrees is straight up, etc.) Check Set If you choose to display the angle of a line
Length and type in the desired length of the when a North Pointer exists, be sure to
North Pointer. select the appropriate format on the CAD
page of the Preferences dialog. If angles
Once a north pointer has been created and set
Managing
are set to display as Degrees then the
for one floor of your plan, a north pointer
Files
angle displayed is in relation to 0 degrees
drawn on any other floor will automatically (horizontal to the right) even though a
point in the same direction. North Pointer is already established. Set
If you use the Edit CAD Item dialog to reset the angles to display as Bearings to
display the relationship to the North
this direction of the pointer on any floor,
Pointer.
Managing
those on all other floors will also reset auto-

matically.
Files
To enter the angle in bearings, first type N or

S (for North or South) then the degrees (fol-
569
CAD Details
Each plan file can store any number of CAD A new window with the given name is cre-
Details. These are a special window which ated. This window automatically saves with
may be used to draw and store any type of the model.
separate detail, such as plot layouts, cross If a CAD Detail window has already been
section details, etc. The CAD Detail win- created for this plan, selecting CAD> CAD
dows save and restore with the plan from Detail will open the CAD Details dialog.
which they were created. They may be sent Select from the list of all accessible details,
to the printer or to the layout sheet like any then click Open.
other plan or view window. CAD informa-
tion may also be copied in or out of a CAD
Detail window using the new Group Select
and CAD Copy functions described else-
where.
Creating CAD Details

Choose CAD> CAD Detail The first time
the menu is selected, the CAD Details dialog
will open. Click New to create a new detail.
The existing CAD Detail windows will be

available in the order they were created.
Special Details
Some CAD details are created automatically
by the system. If you have any roof trusses in
your plan, a diagram of each truss type used
(with a count for each) will be in the Truss
Detail CAD detail.
The Create New CAD Detail dialog will open. When walls are framed via the Framing dia-
Type the New Detail Name for this CAD log, a special detail is created for each wall.
Detail, then select OK. These details, however, are not accessible via
the CAD Details dialog, but only by selecting
a wall and clicking on the Open Wall Detail
button that appears in the Edit toolbar.
570
Plan Footprint
Plan Footprint
CAD
Site information can be
drawn with the model or
in a CAD detail. If you
DN DN
create a CAD detail to

DECK
15'8 x 9'7
draw your site plan, Plan 30" GE
Footprint is a function
electric
cooktop
KITCHEN
12'4 x 10'5
DINING Allow 39"
that quickly imports the

for ref.
12'4 x 13'5
Double
electric
oven
building footprint into the LIVING

15'6 x 25'2
CAD detail. Once the Plan

HALL
NOOK
2'6 x 6'5
10'3 x 9'5
UP UP
Footprint is imported into DN

DN
the detail, you have some
Managing
HALL
4'8 x 31'10
control over what infor-

CLOSET
2'2 x 7'2
two vents, min 50 sq in ea., FAMILY
Files
max 5 in off floor
13'1 x 19'1
mation is imported. The

solid core door, 1
hr rating
UP
UP
footprint acts just like a

5/8 inch, wallboard on walls
& ceiling between house and
garage
GARAGE
22'7 x 27'5
polyline, it can be rotated BATH

6'6 x 5'6
and moved around the PORCH

15'7 x 5'6
detail. The footprint is not
Managing
DN
DN
directly linked to the 3D Floor plan Plan Footprint
Files
model, but it can be
updated with Fix Foot-
print from the Edit CAD Item dialog.
Plan Footprint can only be accessed from an A skeleton floor plan will be created in the
active CAD Detail window. To create a site CAD Detail window. This “footprint”
Managing
plan in this way, you must first create a new behaves like a polyline and can be moved,
Files
CAD Detail window with an appropriate rotated or placed anywhere in the CAD
name. Detail window. Use this to create plot plans.
While in this new CAD Detail window, If the model consists of several buildings, a
select CAD>Special>Plan Footprint. The Plan footprint will be created for each building.
Managing
Footprint dialog will open. Any floor already Each footprint will act like a polyline, but
Files
created in this plan displays. Choose which adjusting one footprint will automatically
floor to use as the footprint. adjust all the footprints in order to maintain
their relationship.
If the footprint is adjusted, sometimes the
screen will not refresh properly. Select Win-
Managing
dow>Refresh Display from the pull-down

Files
menus to redraw the screen.

Like a polyline, when a footprint is opened
for specification (Edit CAD Item dialog), the
571
edge by which the polyline was selected is other floor, you must select that footprint and
important. This edge defines the angle by update it individually.
which the entire footprint may be rotated. If you reverse a plan, or edit it using the Edit
The original direction used to draw that edge Area command, the plan footprint will be
is the basis for the Set Angle option. updated automatically.
Fix Footprint Layers Dialog
If you have edited your 3D model since cre- The items appearing in Plan Footprints
ating the Plan Footprint, you can update the can be determined using the Layers dialog.
footprint with Fix Footprint from the Edit In a CAD detail determine which layers will
CAD Item dialog. Click the Fix Footprint display with the footprint. Select any Archi-
button. The footprint will update to agree tectural, System or User layer to turn on or
with any changes made to the 3D model. If off. Make sure you do not turn off layers that
you have imported one footprint for any will be used to draw in the CAD detail.
Line Thickness Visibility

The screen image will display any type of see a more accurate screen representation of
line (in Plan View or 3D) whose line weight what will actually print.
has been increased. This is usually used as a Choose Edit>Preferences>Appearance,
quick check prior to printing, to make sure then check Show Line Weight. Until
that the desired items have had their lines unchecked, all thickened lines will display
thickened appropriately. The thickness on screen. This will affect not only CAD
defines the actual printing thickness. Since items, but also Layout lines and lines defin-
the screen pixel size is usually much larger ing architectural items in Plan View (such as
than the print pixel size, the lines on screen walls, doors, etc.)
will appear much larger than they will actu-
ally print. You may need to zoom closer to
572
Chapter 30:
Edit Area
Edit Area
Edit Area
Edit Area is a powerful tool that allows you Snap Unit defined in the Dimension Setup
to quickly edit large groups of objects. To use dialog. To move the area an exact distance,
the tool, select Edit> Edit Area and then type that value into the Wall & Opening
drag a rectangular marquee around the area Snap Unit before attempting to move the
of your plan to be selected. Some items, such area.
as cabinets and roof sections, will be edited
The snap unit may be as high as 48” (1200
with the group if more than half of the object
mm). To move an area greater than that
is contained within the marquee.
amount, move it in two steps. First move it
Managing
You will be able to delete, move, copy all of with the snap unit set to 48”. Then set the
Files
the items surrounded by the marquee, within snap unit to the remaining distance, and
the same floor, from floor to floor, or from move the area one more time.
plan to plan. You may also reflect, or mirror
the area around any given CAD line. If you
select Edit> Area (all floors) the same
Managing
actions will be taken for all the floors of your
Files
plan file.
Move - Edit Area Rotating an Area

When the Edit Area has been defined, move
To move the area defined by the marquee,
the cursor above the triangular handle. The
drag from its central area. The cursor will
Managing
cursor will change to a rotation handle. Drag
turn into a four-headed arrow. Everything in
this handle to rotate the selected area.
Files
the rectangle is moved. Walls that cross its
boundaries are cut and the portions in the Unless otherwise specified in the
rectangle are moved. Walls that are cut, but Preferences dialog, the rotation will be
are parallel to the move, are lengthened or about the center of the selected area. If
shortened and reconnected. This is done only Current Point is checked under Rotate/
Libraries
Symbol
for move, not when rotating, reflecting or Resize About in the CAD panel of the
copying. Preferences dialog, the rotation will be
about the current point.
When you drag the area, it will jump at
increments defined by the Wall & Opening
573
Rotation is at the Allowed Angles in order to Deleting an Area

keep all walls that are rotated at allowed When an area is defined using Edit Area ,
angles. several context sensitive buttons appear in
The location of text changes appropriately the edit toolbar. One of these is the Delete
with the rotation. If you do not want the text button. Click the Delete to delete
to rotate, select the Don't rotate with everything in the selection set.
plan check box on the Text tab of the Text
Selecting File> Edit Area (All Floors) will
Entry dialog.
delete all items in the selection area on all
floors or your model.
Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area

The Point-to-Point Move allows a Point-to-Point Move button. Then click at
selected Edit Area to be accurately moved. a start point and drag the cursor while
There are two different ways to use this tool. holding down the mouse button. The area
will move in the restricted direction. The
Click Method distance moved will be the distance between
Define the Edit Area by dragging the your start and end point projected onto that
rectangular selection marquee. Click the move direction.
Point-to-Point Move button, then click at If you hold down the Ctrl key before dragging
a start point, and then click at the end point. the selected item(s), the item will move as if
The selection set will be moved by the you had used the click method already
distance and direction between the two described.
points. Use CAD points and other snap
points to place the selection set accurately. Copying
Point-to-Point Move may be used with
Drag Method
If you click and drag while using the Point- copy if you first click the Copy button then
to-Point Move button, the move will be the Point-to-Point Move after selecting
restricted by the Allowed Angles as defined your area. The items will be copied and
in the Plan Defaults dialog. moved relative to the start and end point that
you select.
Define the Edit Area by dragging the
rectangular selection marquee, click the
Reflecting an Area with Edit Area

A selected area or an entire floor may be one of the allowed wall angles.
reflected about any line which is drawn at
574
Copying an Area with Edit Area
When the Edit Area has been defined, The selected area will then be reflected
the Reflect About Line button around the CAD line, and the original
appears in the Edit toolbar. Click the Reflect selection area will no longer be there. You
can use the copy tool with the Reflect About
About Line button, and then click on a
CAD line (not a polyline) to reflect the Line button if you want to preserve the
selected area about that line. It does not original selection.
matter whether or not the line is inside the
Edit Area
selection rectangle.
Copying an Area with Edit Area

The Copy/Paste button that appears copy at its new location. Dragging your copy
when an Edit Area is defined allows a allows you to position it accurately with
portion or all of a plan to be duplicated on the respect to its original position by watching
same plan, or to be copied to another floor or the readout of the moved distance in the
another plan. toolbar's display box or on the status bar.
Copy Restrictions Copy - Click
Managing
When copying into the same plan, the Once you have pressed Copy/Paste
Files
distance between the center of the original button, you can also place the copy by
area and the center of the copied area must be clicking in the same or in a different plan.
more than half the width or height of the
To copy to another window, you will have to
area. This avoids a copy appearing on top of
click once to activate that window, and click
the original.
Managing
a second time to place the copy.
Files
Copy - Drag If you have to go to the window menu or
To use this, select the Edit Area , press the toolbar to display the other plan file’s
window, you must select Edit> Paste and
Copy/Paste button, then drag from the
then click to place the copy.
center of the selected area to position the
Managing
Files
Making a Reflective Copy with Edit Area
To reflect a copy within the same If you do not click on a line, but click
plan, select the Edit Area, then elsewhere in the same or in a different plan,
click the Reflect About Line the copy will be reflected about a vertical
Managing
axis, centered on the point clicked.

button, then the Copy button. Click on a
Files
CAD line, not a polyline and a copy will be a

reflected about the specified line.
575
Stacking Copies between Floors with Edit Area

When copying between different click anywhere to place the copy. The copy
floors of the same plan, create the will appear directly above or below the
copy exactly over or under its original selection.
original by clicking the Hold position If you selected File> Edit Area (All Floors)
button, before you click the Copy/Paste the Hold Position button will not be
button. Switch to the desired floor and click available.
in Plan View or select Edit> Paste and then
Edit Area (All Floors)

Edit Area (All Floors) allows you to select marquee large enough to select all the items
everything within a given area across all on every floor, if that is what you want.)
floors in a plan. Once selected, you may
When the desired area is defined by the
copy, delete, move, or somehow affect them
marquee, most of the Edit Area functions
all simultaneously.
described in this chapter may be used. The
Select Edit> Edit Area (All Floors). Then difference is that, in this case, every floor in
drag a rectangular marquee around the entire the plan will be affected..
area you want to copy, delete or move.
(Remember that you are defining the same TIP: This provides a very simple method
area for all the floors, so be sure to draw the of copying an entire building from one
plan and placing it into another.
576
Chapter 31:
Zoom & Window Tools
Managing
Files
General Information
The zoom tools are used to position the view. All of the zoom modes may be activated
To work on a specific area, it may be through the Window menu or by clicking on
necessary to zoom in so that the entire screen an icon. It is faster to use the toolbar or the
is filled by only a single room. At other times keyboard shortcut when one is available.
Zoom
Tools
the entire plan needs to be visible. On large Aerial View can only be accessed through
plans, it is helpful to have a small bird’s eye the menu. Zoom tools are not available in the
view of the entire plan up in one corner. This Render View.
can be used to navigate a zoom window over
In addition to zooming, there are several
the main view. This bird’s eye view is called
ways to pan across the screen, shifting the
the Aerial View in the Window menu.
visible part of the plan slightly while still
maintaining the same zoom factor.
Zoom
Managing
Files
The Zoom tool is used to move closer to does not matter whether you drag the box
any given area on the plan or 3D View. It from left to right or from right to left. When
the zoom is done, whatever mode was active
magnifies the view. Click the Zoom tool,
then click with the left mouse button and prior to selecting the Zoom tool
hold it down while dragging a box around an automatically becomes active again. If
Managing
area on screen. When you release the mouse, another zoom is needed, click the Zoom
Files
the selected area expands to fill the screen. It tool again.
Undo Zoom
Libraries
Symbol
Click the Undo Zoom to reverse last Undo or Redo will not undo/redo
Zoom operation. The Undo Zoom only zooms.
works to undo the single, most recent
Zoom .
577
Move Out
Click the Move Out button to reduce the and the entire plan fills the screen, clicking
scale of the display to one half its previous the Move Out button makes the plan
value. If the Fill Window has been used display at half the size it was before.
Fill Window
Click the Fill Window button (or press Window button will zoom closer so that
the F6 key) to view everything on screen that the entire view fills the screen.
is visible. If you are zoomed in close so that
only a portion of the view displays on screen, Press the F6 key on the keyboard to
clicking the Fill Window will zoom back accomplish the same thing as Fill Win-
so that the entire view fits on the screen. If dow .
you are zoomed out so that the entire view is
smaller than the screen, clicking the Fill
578
Aerial View
Aerial View
Managing
Files
Zoom
Tools
Managing
Files
The Aerial View feature is available from the 2. Select Window> Aerial View from the
Window menu in Plan View. Selecting this menu. A small overview picture is created
Managing
tool opens a small Aerial View of the entire in the upper left corner of the Plan View.
Files
plan which facilitates zooming and panning 3. You can move and resize the Aerial View
of the Plan View window. The Aerial View as you would any window.
has no scroll bars or maximize button, and
To use the Aerial View, click the Zoom
always stays on top of any other window.
button and drag a rectangle around the area
Managing
1. Before creating a Aerial View, maximize inside the Aerial View where you wish to
Files
your Plan View window. zoom. When you release the mouse, the
working plan window is zoomed into the
specified area.
579
Since the Aerial View remains on top and has If the plan is not maximized, the Aerial View
the entire plan always visible, it is easy to may become active. You will know that the
maintain overall perspective of the plan and Aerial View is active by any of the following
zoom into different areas without having to clues:
continually be using Fill Window before 1. The Aerial View title bar changes color
zooming into another area. It is easy to jump
from one close-up view to another with the 2. The contents of the Aerial View may be
help of the Aerial View. edited in the Aerial View itself.
If this occurs, activate the plan, then
When you are finished with it, close the maximize the plan. After the plan is
Aerial View as you would any other window. maximized, the Aerial View functions
normally.
Panning the Display

There are three methods of panning or bar. They also shift the display according to
moving the display around the screen the number of inches defined in the Plan
without changing the zoom factor. Defaults dialog.
One method is to use the scroll
The keyboard arrow keys do not pan a
bars across the right and bottom Perspective or Render View. They rotate
edges of the window. This is the camera about the focal point.
universal to Windows programs.
1. Drag the square button in the bar Finally, the mouse can be used in
itself in order to pan a larger dis- combination with the Ctrl key. This is
tance. probably the easiest, most intuitive method.
2. Click the end arrow keys on the 1. Hold down the Ctrl key, click on a point in
scroll bars to shift the display in the view and drag the cursor to the new
12" increments. location for this point.
3. Click the arrow key which 2. The whole display shifts in the same
points in the direction you want to pan. direction and exact amount of the drag-
The 12" increment is defined in the Plan ging of the cursor.
Defaults dialog under Inches scrolled by The disadvantage of this panning method is
arrow key. This value can be changed that it always causes a screen repaint. If used
anytime. in a 3D View, it takes significantly more
time.
The arrow keys on the keyboard work
exactly like clicking the arrows on the scroll
580
Tiling Views Side-by-Side
Tiling Views Side-by-Side
Managing
Files
Zoom
Tools
Chief Architect produces a 3D model as you the upper right corner to have the Plan View
draw in Plan View. This can be verified by fill the screen.
tiling the Plan View next to a 3D View within
Tile mode is very useful when copying
the Chief desktop. Draw a basic wall
objects, architectural symbols or details from
perimeter and create a Full Overview . one plan to another. Activate the Plan View
This produces an axonometric view of the with the item(s) to be copied, select the
3D model. Select Window>Tile. The screen
splits into two views: Plan View and 3D item(s), and click the Copy button.
overview. Activate the other Plan View and click to
place the symbol. If the plans are not tiled, or
Managing
To work in Plan View, click the title bar of if you need to copy an item from one floor to
Files
the Plan View in order to activate that view, another, choose Edit> Paste when you have
then proceed to draw. Note that the changes activated the Plan View you want to bring the
in the plan appear instantaneously in the item into. The cursor changes into the “copy”
overview window. cursor. Click to place the item.
Managing
Tiling is a Windows® function which
Files
allows you to simultaneously display all
open windows. Depending on screen
resolution, it is best to have no more than
four open windows since they become
very small. Two windows is optimal.
Managing
Files
To exit Tile mode and resume working in the

Plan View, click the Maximize button in
581
Cascade
This is another Windows® function
which allows you to organize open
windows in a cascading pattern.
Click on any visible edge to activate
that window.
Arrange Icons
This is a rarely used Windows® function. working desktop. You can then click their
Used only when several active windows have minimized title bars to reactivate them or for
been minimized, Arrange Icons aligns the Swapping Views and Closing Views.
minimized icons in a row at the bottom of the
Swap Views
There are several ways to swap views It is often necessary to move between other
without closing them. The Swap Views views as well. At the very bottom of the
button toggles between the Plan View and Window menu is a list of all the views
the last 3D View created. It appears next to currently open. Each view is identified by its
the zoom tools to the right of the toolbar. name, followed by the type of view it is.
Click on any view listed here to make that
The F7 key is equivalent to the Swap the active View
Views button, as is selecting 3D>Swap
Views from the menu.
Closing Views
Choose File>Close to close any 3D View still needed, swap to a different view without
when it is no longer needed. If the view is closing the camera views.
582
Chapter 32:
Perspectives
Managing
Files
& Overviews
Managing
Files
New in 7.0
Several changes have been made in 7.0 cameras work and can be used to view the
which are improvement in how the various 3D model.
General Information
3D Views
As a building is drawn in Plan View, a 3D Render Views can be generated from a
model of the building is created. This model Perspective View or directly using the Ren-
can be viewed at any time, and can be used der Camera tool.
for editing.
Up to four 3D View windows can be open
There are seven types of 3D Views which with one Plan View. A red camera symbol
can be generated. Some views are created for displays in the Plan View for each 3D View
the current floor only, while others represent window that is active. The views are named
the entire building. Perspectives, Section/ and numbered sequentially in the order in
Elevations, and Isometric projections or which you requested the views. The camera
other views of the model can be quickly symbol is an on screen reference, it does not
generated. Any 3D View may be shown in print.
Managing
full color or as a line drawing. The color of
Files
objects in 3D Views can be defined, as can A series of overviews or perspectives can be
“recorded” as a 3D Walkthrough and then
the height and angle of the cameras.
replayed at a later time.
An item will not show in 3D Views if it has
Section/Elevation Views can be detailed
been suppressed in 3D Preferences or if
its display has been turned off in the Plan
using CAD tools and printed to scale in
Libraries
Symbol
View in the Layers dialog.

layout. These views can be saved and
restored with all CAD information intact. If
you change the model, the section or
elevation will retain the CAD lines.
583
Any 3D View can be sent to layout. Once in Perspective Views and Overviews in a
layout, unwanted lines can be removed or Layout file do not update with changes to the
moved without affecting the 3D model. model.
Perspective Cameras
Perspective Views Imagine that you are actually holding the
The Perspective View creates a multi- camera in your hands. The field of view is set
floor perspective. It is used for both interior to 45 degrees which is similar to what the
and exterior Perspective Views. Perspective human eye sees or a 50mm camera lens.
Views will display cathedral ceilings, roofs, 2. Click in Plan View on the spot where
lofts, stairwell openings, or any other you are standing, and drag a line in the
variation in floor and ceiling levels. direction you are looking. When you
Perspective views can be used to create a release the mouse, a Perspective View
Render View. will generate in a new window.
The cameras can be moved, rotated, raised, 3. Use the 2D/3D toggle to return to the
lowered or have the line of sight adjusted. Plan View. A red camera symbol will
The default camera height, angle and move now be in your Plan View.
increment are defined in the Options>
4. Tile the two views and use the camera
Defaults Setup> Camera Setup.
editing tools to see how they act upon
There are two kinds of perspective cameras. the camera.
Full Camera creates a Perspective View Before setting up your camera you must be
of all floors in the model, while Floor Cam- familiar with the options you have to adjust
era creates a Perspective View of the current the parameters assigned to 3D cameras. You
floor. Each type of perspective camera view must place the cameras correctly to take full
is created in the same way. The results vary advantage of these tools.
depending on which perspective camera is The direction of the line defines where you
used. are viewing. The point at which you end this
To create a Perspective View: line is also important if you are going to use
any of the Rotate Camera tools. When you
1. Click the Full Camera button and the use a Rotate Camera tool in a Perspective
cursor will change to a camera . View, the camera will rotate about the point
The crosshair marks the actual position of the at the end of the line that defined the angle of
camera. The line that you drag will define view. If you end that line in the middle of the
which direction you are pointing the camera. object you are viewing, the camera will
The end point of the line is the focal point appear to rotate about the object and the
and the point at which the camera will object will remain in your view.
revolve around when it is rotated.
584
Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras
If the line ends far short of the object, or anything above the ceiling or below the floor
Managing
beyond the object you may rotate the camera for the current floor. It is faster to generate
to such an extent that you will no longer be than a Full Camera, because less of the
Files
able to see the object that the view was model is calculated.
focused on.
Check Restrict Camera to Room in the
3D Preferences dialog to block off the view
Floor Camera into another room. This also affects the Full
Managing
The Floor Camera, 3D> Create View>
Camera views.
Files
Floor Camera, creates a Perspective View
of a single floor. This camera does not show
3D Views
Unrestricted camera view. “Restrict Camera to Room” is checked.
Adjusting Perspective & Render Cameras
The camera functions that create both the Each time you move the camera, the view is
Perspective and Render Views operate in a redrawn to reflect the camera movement. If
similar fashion. Once either of these views is you are using either the toolbar or keyboard
created, there are many ways to manipulate to move the camera, and you have a large
Managing
the camera location, focal point, and line of distance to move you can hold down the Shift
Files
site to adjust the view on screen. key as you click the button or hit the keys on
Camera movement is controlled in the toolbar. This will suppress the redraw of
incremental steps from either the toolbar or the view until the required number of
with keyboard strokes. The distance or movements has been entered and the Shift
key is released.
Managing
increment the camera will move are defined

Files
in the Camera Setup dialog. For more Whether the movements are entered from the
information see “Camera Defaults Setup” on toolbar or the keyboard, the tools provide the
page 145. ability to pivot the camera in any direction,
585
move it orthogonally to the line of sight and the focal point up.
rotate the camera around its focal point.
Lower Height -Moves the camera and
In a Perspective or Render View, click the the focal point down.
camera movement arrows to change the
orientation of the camera. Each adjustment Tilt Left - Turns the camera toward the
made to the camera is relative to the previous left while staying in the same location.
orientation.
Tilt Right - Turns the camera toward
Tilting - Keeps the camera in one place and
the right while staying in the same
pivots the camera about its vertical or
location.
horizontal axis. This movement is similar to
tilting your head up and down or turning it Tilt Upward - Tilts the camera upward
side-to-side. while keeping it in the same location.
Move - Relocates the camera, but keeps the
direction of the field of view in the same Tilt Downward - Tilts the camera
place. downward while keeping it in the same
location.
Rotate - Rotates the camera about the focal
point. Move Camera In - Moves the position
of the camera closer to the focal point
Camera Tools along the line of sight.
Move Forward - Moves the camera Move Camera Out - Moves the posi-
and the focal point forward. tion of the camera away from the focal
point along the line of sight.
Move Back - Moves the camera and
the focal point back. Rotate Right - Rotates the camera to
the right about the focal point.
Move Left - Moves the camera and the
focal point to the left in a line perpen- Rotate Left - Rotates the camera to the
dicular to the line of sight. left about the focal point.
Move Right - Moves the camera and Rotate Down - Rotates the camera
the focal point to the right in a line per- down about the focal point.
pendicular to the line of sight.
Rotate Up - Rotates the camera up
Raise Height - Moves the camera and about the focal point.
586
Rotate Camera Views
Rotate Camera Views
Managing
Files
In order to realize the benefits of rotating the The focal point is the end point of the line
camera, you must set the camera correctly you draw when you place the camera in Plan
when you place it in Plan View. View. If the focal point lies within the object
that you are viewing, then the camera
Setting the Camera appears to rotate around the object being
Managing
When you click in Plan View to place a Per- viewed. If the focal point is outside of the
Files
spective, or Render camera, you are defining object being viewed, once you have rotated
two things, the position of the camera and the the camera a sufficient amount, the object
focal point of the camera. Moving the cam- will no longer be in view.
era changes the location of the focal point, Place your camera correctly and these four
but rotating the camera, locks the focal point Rotate Camera tools operate similar to the
and moves the camera around it. View Angle tool in Overviews.
Keyboard Camera Movements

Camera movement in Perspective and O - Move camera outward along the line of
3D Views
Render Views can be controlled by the sight.
keyboard as well as the toolbars. S - Camera spins about focal point until
F - Move camera forward. another key is hit. Hitting the ’S’ again will
reverse the direction of the spin. This is
B - Move camera backward.
available only in a Render View. Hitting the
U - Move camera up. Esc key stops the spin.
D - Move camera down. Left or Right arrow - Rotates the camera to
L - Move camera left. the left or right about its focal point.
R - Move camera right. Up or Down arrow - Rotates the camera up
or down about its focal point.
I - Moves camera inward along the line of
sight.
Managing
Files
Moving or Rotating a Camera by Dragging in Plan
Return to Plan View without closing the 2. Drag the triangular handle to rotate the
Perspective or Render View. Click on the red direction of view around a vertical axis.
Managing
picture of the perspective camera in the Plan When you activate the window related to the
Files
View. While it is selected, you may: camera, it will reflect the changes.
1. Drag the center handle to reposition it The position of the camera is related to the
model. When the camera is outside of a
587
building it is relative to the terrain and will If the camera is on an upper floor and you
follow the terrain as you move the camera. move the camera outside of the building, the
When you are inside a building, the camera camera will remain at the same height
will go up and down stairs automatically and relative to the floor it was created on.
bounce off walls most of the time.
Changing the Camera Settings
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Any camera can be adjusted in Plan View or wards or backwards. For interior views a
by using the Edit Camera tool in a small number is good, but for exterior views
Render View. In Plan View click on the red you may want a larger increment.
camera symbol. While it is selected, click the Degrees each rotate - Defines how
Open Item button. Use the Camera Setup
4
many degrees the camera rotates each
dialog to change settings for this camera and/ time you direct it to move. A setting of 90
or change default settings for all new degrees would rotate to each wall in a room
cameras. with just four rotates.
This Camera - This tab makes Height above floor - This defines
1 5
changes to the selected camera. the height that the camera is above the
floor level for the current floor.
Default - This tab defines settings for
2 6 Tilt angle - Enter a value for this
all new cameras. specific camera.
The settings on the two tabs are identical. A tilt of zero is horizontal. Minus 10 degrees
Inches each move - Controls how (-10) would tilt the camera 10 degrees
3 downward, and 90 degrees would tilt it to
many inches the camera will move each
time you direct it to move right, left, for- look straight up.
588
Zooming in Perspective Views
Clip Surfaces within - Specifies unless opening - Select the check

7 9
Managing
that the camera does not display an item box to display a wall which is inside the
within this distance. Remove Wall within range if the camera
Files
Remove Wall within - Removes the is pointing through an opening such as a door
8 or window.
view of walls with this distance of the
camera. To see the new settings, return to the edited
Both of these distances are measured as a view (Use the F7 key, the Swap Views
Managing
radius from the Camera position. button, or click on the camera name from the
Files
list at the bottom of the Window menu.)
Zooming in Perspective Views

Although the zoom tools function normally does not change the field of view, but instead
in Perspective Views, the results obtained moves the view closer or farther from your
will be affected by normal perspective eye. To view more of the room you will often
distortion. Perspective cameras are created need to place a new perspective camera in
with a field of view set at 45 degree. Clicking the plan, or select the existing camera and
the Move Out or Fill Window buttons move it backward.
3D Views
Recording a 3D Walkthrough
Perspective and Render Views can be used to 5. When the walkthrough sequence is com-
record a 3D Walkthrough which can be plete choose 3D> Stop Recording or
replayed later. simply close the view and the walk-
through file will be closed.
To record a 3D walkthrough:
Zooming in and out and using the scroll bars,
1. Create a Perspective or Render View does not change the viewpoint and will not
that will be the first frame of the walk- produce a frame for the walkthrough.
through.
The walkthrough is recorded in a .wlk file.
Managing
2. From the View choose 3D> Record Even though it is compressed, a walkthrough
Files
Walkthrough. Name the walkthrough file can become quite large (many
noting the directory. Click OK. megabytes) especially if it contains many
3. The first frame of the walkthrough is the frames and if recorded using a large window
immediate view. at high screen resolution.
4. Use the camera movement buttons to
Managing
create additional views. Each time the

Files
screen repaints, that view is recorded as

the next frame in sequence.
589
Playing Back a 3D Walkthrough

A recorded 3D Walkthrough is a series of 5. Speed up or slow down the playback
screen captures saved as bitmaps. Chief speed using the up or down arrow keys
Architect can replay them in sequence at any on the keyboard.
time. Since the program is not generating the 6. When done playing the walkthrough
view, it can display them far more rapidly close the window to close the walk-
than when they were originally produced. through file.
To view a 3D walkthrough: You cannot edit a walkthrough once it has
been created. If you make changes to the
1. Choose 3D> Show Walkthrough. model, or want to show different views of the
2. Browse to the directory where the walk- model you must generate another
through file (.wlk) is stored. walkthrough.
3. Select it and click OK. The recorded Walkthroughs are made up of a collection of
walkthrough will begin playing back. bitmap images, they can become extremely
4. Pause the playback or play it forward by large files. Be aware of this and try to keep
clicking the left mouse button. Play the them a reasonable size. You may need to
walkthrough backward by clicking the delete them using Windows Explorer.
right mouse button.
Overviews
The Floor Overview creates a single floor Overviews can be rotated and viewed from
isometric drawing of the current floor any angle. A special 3D Fly-by can be
without a roof or a ceiling. All lines are in created using any of these views.
true length but the drawing cannot be scaled. Overviews can be printed directly or sent to
The Full Overview creates an isometric the layout. If sent to the layout, the lines
drawing of the entire model, including all the defining any part of the view can be modified
floors, ceilings and the roof. All surfaces or deleted in the layout using Edit Layout .
such as roofs or ceilings can be removed
Click the Floor Overview or Full
from the view in order to see into the model.
Overview , or Framing Overview
The Framing Overview creates an button and an overview will immediately
isometric drawing of the framing in the generate in a new view window.
model. Framing must be built before
generating a Framing Overview. The Overviews are always created at the exact
Framing Overview includes all floors, walls, same angle. Once generated the View Angle
roof framing and foundations. can be adjusted to view the model from any
angle. Objects can be selected and edited
from any overview just like other 3D Views.
590
Overviews
Floor Overview
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Floor Overview is an effective current floor. The ceiling is removed, giving
troubleshooting tool, since it can isolate each a 3D View of that floor plan.
floor for review. Click the Floor Overview To see a different floor, return to Plan View
button to create an isometric drawing of the and make the other floor current before
generating the Floor Overview.
3D Views
Full Overview
Second floor.
First floor.
Managing
Files
Foundation. (The lot perimeter was
pulled back so the footing would show.)
Managing
Click the Full Overview button to

Files
generate an isometric drawing of the entire

building. The overview will begin to
generate immediately.
591
Framing Overview
Click the Framing Overview button to generating this view, otherwise the view will
generate an isometric drawing of the entire be empty. The overview will begin to
building displaying only framing and generate immediately.
foundation. Framing must be built before
Adjusting the View Angle

Click the View Angle button to bring up View Angle Dialog
the View Angle dialog. The box displays a
picture of the exterior walls of the current 1
floor as seen from the current view angle.
Select the check boxes or move the slide bars
to adjust the view. The picture will update to
2 3
show all the adjustments being made. When
satisfied, click OK to have the isometric
drawing of the model adjusted to match.
4
Using the View Angle tool the isometric 5
drawing can be generated from any
conceivable angle; From the Top (bird’s eye
view) to an Elevation (straight on view) to
the Bottom (worm’s eye view), and 6
anywhere in between.
1 Select the check boxes to view model

from Elevation, Top or Bottom.
592
Show Items
2 Use the slide bar to adjust the height to 5 Select the check boxes to view the
Managing
view the model from. model from each side.
Files
3 Use the slide bar to adjust how close the An Elevation created by turning the view
view is to the model. is different from that created using the
4 Use the slide bar to view the model Cross Section camera. The CAD tools
are not accessible in this type of view.
from a different direction.
Managing
6 The picture of single floor changes to
Files
show results.
Show Items
From a Perspective View or Overview click If an item is grayed out in the Show Items
the Show Items button or choose dialog, it has been suppressed in the 3D Pref-
Options> Show Items to display the Show erences dialog and cannot be viewed in the
Items dialog. Displayed 3D items can be 3D View. To see the item in an Overview,
suppressed by unchecking the appropriate close the view, select the appropriate check
box. box on the Include tab of the 3D Prefer-
3D Views
ences dialog. Then create another Overview.
3D Fly-by
3D> Record Walkthrough is used in an File>Close to close and save the completed
Overview to generate a 3D Fly-by. To record .wlk file.
a 3D Fly-by, first generate an Overview and
To play back the Fly-by, choose 3D>Show
use the View Angle dialog to position the
Walkthrough. Find the file, select it, and
model for the first frame.
click OK. The Fly-by should play back.
When the model is positioned properly, Click the left mouse button to pause the fly-
choose 3D>Record Walkthrough. Give the by and to play it forward. Click the right
Managing
file a name, and click OK. The first frame is mouse button to play it backward. Choose
Files
automatically created. File>Close to shut down the .wlk file.
Click View Angle and adjust the model

slightly. Click OK. The next frame is then
created. Continue to adjust the model in the
Managing
View Angle dialog. Each time the view

Files
updates to match the View Angle dialog, an

additional frame is created. When done,
choose 3D> Stop Recordeing or choose
593
Color Off - Color On

Options>Color Off/On and the Color Views, the program can sample that bitmap
toggle button control if color is displayed and define an approximate color to use in all
in any view. You can toggle between the two other 3D Views.
options. You can also set defaults which Selecting Options>Color Off turns off color
define which 3D Views will be generated for the current window. The window will
with colors turned on (Section/Elevations, become black and white. Solid fills are black,
Overview, and Perspectives) in the Options and all lines are black. The background
tab of the 3D Preferences dialog. remains as defined in the Preferences dialog.
The display of colors may or may not make When you go to print a view, the color toggle
the views easier to understand. You will want sets the initial value of the Color or Shaded
to experiment to see what works for you. You check box in the Print dialog.
can then set the default Color mode for each
view. If Color is on and the current printer has
color capabilities Color will be checked in
Colors are used in 3D Views to represent the the Print dialog. If the printer is black and
use of different materials. The colors can be white, Shaded will be checked in the Print
printed if you have a color printer, or can dialog.
appear as shades of gray on a black and white
printer. If you have assigned a bitmap to If Color is off, the check box will not be
represent the texture of a material in Render selected.
Materials in 3D Views
From a Perspective View or Overview there dialog you can change the assigned
are four ways you can change the way material for the individual object. For
objects appear. more information see “Applying Materi-
als with the Material Tab” on page 686.
1. Select Options> Defaults Setup and
select the default specification dialog for 3. Click the Adjust Material Defini-
that type of object. In the specification tion button and click on a surface to
dialog, you can change the default mate- open the Material Definition dialog for
rial definition assigned to that type of that material. For more information see
object. For more information see “Adjust Material Definition” on page
“Defaults Setup” on page 91. 686.
2. Select the object and click the Open 4. If there is more than one material that
Item button or double-click on the needs to be redefined, click the Define
item to open the specification for the Materials button to open the Materi-
individual item. From the specification als dialog which allows you to edit all
594
Speeding up 3D View Generation
materials. For more information see or group of objects. You are not changing a
Managing
“Define Materials” on page 687. material.
Files
If you use methods 1 or 2, you change the Methods 3 or 4 redefine the material. This is
material definition for that particular object a global change that will affect all objects
with that material assignment.
Managing
Speeding up 3D View Generation
Files
Depending on the speed and memory of your only those items you wish to see in every
computer, a 3D View should generate in a new 3D View created. The surfaces for items
few seconds or less. When you have a large, not included are not calculated, which speeds
complex model with lots of interior detail, or up the 3D generation process. Suppressed
objects, it may take a few minutes to items cannot be displayed using the Show
generate a 3D View with all of the objects in Items dialog, but these settings can be
the model. changed.
While this process is happening, look at the
information window in the toolbar. It will Halt Generation with Esc Key
indicate that surface sorting is occurring. Using the Esc key, you can interrupt the
3D Views
Two numbers will be in the window. The one modeling process at any point and display
on the left represents a growing portion of the incomplete model “as is”. This is
the number on the right. When the left particularly helpful when you just need to
number equals the right, the sort will be reorient a model on the screen for a specific
complete, and the model will display on your angle or view.
screen. There are several ways to speed up
The Esc option allows you to place the view
the generation time of your views.
quickly, then use Window> Refresh Display
to redraw the model with all 3D Faces intact.
Increase the Number of Panels You may use this option with Elevation
The Options tab of the 3D Preferences Views, Perspective Views, Render Views and
dialog has an option to define the number of Overviews.
panels to use when generating 3D Views. For
Managing
very large plans, increase this number. The
Files
screen will then be divided into panels, and
each panel will fully calculate before the next
is begun. This can save time, but may
sacrifice accuracy. For small models, you do
not need to increase this number.
Managing
Files
Suppress Items in 3D Views

The Include tab of the 3D Preferences
dialog has an option where you can include
595
Editing in a 3D View
Selecting Items in 3D Views Exact changes in heights or other resizing
In a 3D View, you can select and edit items. can be done in the item's specification dialog.
Click the Select Items button, (or Edit> If the program does not allow you to move or
Select Items) to get in the Select Items resize the object due to an obstruction, select
mode. In this mode you can click on the the item, hold down the Ctrl key, and move or
surface of an item and handles will appear resize it as desired.
which can be used to move and resize the
item. Double-click on the item or use the If Furniture/Fixture Resize Enable is
Open Item button to display the cleared in the Plan Defaults dialog, only a
appropriate specification dialog for the item. single handle displays for furniture and
stand-alone fixtures and appliances. In this
When you select an item, you will see case the item can only be moved.
handles and a handle surface. The handle
surface is a red rectangle at the perimeter of Dimension lines are displayed to help you
the object which indicates the overall height resize an item and determine its height.
along with either the width or depth of the These are more visible when the color is
item. turned off .
Normally five handles display. The top and Due to movement restrictions Section/
bottom handles raise and lower the heights of Elevation Views are the best for editing.
the item's top and bottom. Side handles move Editing in a 3D View is a convenience. All of
the item's sides in and out, changing its width the same functions are available, with more
or depth. The middle handle moves the item accuracy, in a Plan View or from the item's
horizontally or vertically, changing its specification dialog.
position but not its size. When several Plan Views and 3D Views
All moving or resizing is in the plane of the display, changes made in one automatically
handle surface and is restricted to one inch display in the others. If you have major
(10 mm) increments. You cannot move an changes to make to your plan, it is faster to
item towards or away from the camera, it make them with as few windows as possible
will be restricted to the handle surface plane. displaying that plan.
Moves and resizing with finer increments
should be done in the Plan View.
Delete 3D Surface
Individual surfaces can be temporarily removed in one view, it will be removed in
removed from any 3D View. Once it is all 3D Views including new ones that are
596
Remove 3D
calculated, but it is not permanently removed clicking on surfaces to remove them from the
Managing
from the model. If you select choose 3D> View. Select another tool to end the process.
Remove 3D, or Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
Files
Once the Delete Surface tool is active, you
ings, the model is rebuilt with all surfaces
intact. can click the Delete Surface button to
replace up to the last 32 removals one at a
Click the Delete Surface button then click time. You can only replace surfaces in the
on any surface to remove it. Continue View that they were removed from.
Managing
Files
Remove 3D
Choose 3D>Remove 3D from Plan View to
close all 3D Views associated with the
current plan file and remove 3D data from
memory.
Whenever you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
ings or Rebuild Roof Planes, all Views are
automatically closed.
3D Views
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
597
598
Chapter 33:
Section/Elevation Views
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
General Information
From the 3D model, you can define and displays when you draw the Section/
create Section/Elevation Views showing the Elevation camera in Plan View.
structure of the model. Section/Elevation
CAD tools are accessible in the Section and
Managing
views can be saved and the program updates
Elevation views. Cross sections or elevations
them as the model is edited. You can also add
Files
can be detailed using the CAD tools. These
information to the Section/Elevation views
are the only 3D Views which can be saved,
using Dimensions, Text, and/or the CAD
and restored later. Any CAD information
tools. The program saves this information
added to a cross section or elevation is stored
with the view, although it may need to be
in that view. These views must be saved
repositioned after changes to the model. The
individually to become part of the normal file
active connection between the model and
saving process.
Section/Elevation views can save you a lot of
time once your drawings are in the layout The toolbar that is active in Section/
facility. Elevation views has the typical Select Items
and Adjust Material Definition tools, plus the
The Wall Elevation creates a single floor,
Elevations
option of activating CAD mode. You may
Sections
single room elevation. It is used primarily for also select Options> CAD Mode On to
applications such as kitchen elevations or activate the CAD facility.
bath elevations. It does not cut through walls
or show the ceiling, flooring or roof. It can be Sections and elevations are the only 3D
viewed from any angle to the wall. Views which can have information added
using the 2D CAD tools. They can be fully
The Cross Section/Elevation creates an annotated and dimensioned and then printed
elevation or cross section of the entire to scale. A Section/Elevation which is
building. If created outside the house, it printed directly from the view can be printed
generates exterior elevations. If created to multiple pages if the scale requires it.
inside the house, it creates a cross section
which bisects the entire building at that
Libraries
location, showing flooring, ceiling, roof,

Symbol
walls, etc. Using the Back Clip option,

you can define how deep the view section
599
Creating Section/Elevation and Wall Elevation Views
Section/Elevation Camera Wall Elevation Camera

cuts through entire house. shows single room only.
To create the cross section or elevation, click here and drag to right.
Section/Elevations and Wall Elevation Section/Elevations and Wall

Views are created in the same way: Elevations are accurate 2D views of the 3D
model. Although they display items at
1. Click either Wall Elevation or Sec- different depths from the camera, all lines in
tion/Elevation buttons and the cursor the view are in the same plane when it is sent
changes to an elevation view . The to Layout.
crosshairs on the icon mark the actual
Section/Elevations and Wall Elevations have
position of the camera.
the editing capabilities found in other 3D
2. Click in the Plan View at the spot where Views, and can be further enhanced with the
the section is to be cut, or elevation is to CAD tools. They are the traditional,
be viewed from. orthogonal views that are used in drafting.
3. Drag a line in the direction of the line of Lines and dimensions are true lengths, which
sight, perpendicular to the cut line, makes it easy to see accurate spatial
and release the mouse button. relationships of the 3D objects created in the
model.
The cut line is the line that you would Section/Elevations and Wall Elevations can
traditionally think of as the Section line in be calculated at any allowed wall angle. This
a Floor plan drawing.
makes it possible to create a true length
elevation of any wall.
When you release the mouse button the view
generates in a new window.
Wall Elevation
The Wall Elevation camera creates a elevations. It does not cut through walls or
single floor, single room elevation. It is used show the ceiling, flooring or roof. The view
primarily for applications such as interior can be taken at any angle to the wall(s).
600
Section/Elevation
The Wall Elevation calculates an interior cabinets, and other items along the wall are
Managing
elevation. The view is a 2D projection of a displayed.
Files
vertical face, such as a wall, and the objects
Always drag the Wall Elevation camera
between the wall and the camera. Windows,
directly toward the wall to be viewed. The
length of the line is not important.
Managing
Section/Elevation
Files
Direction of drag.
Stop Start
Managing
No back clipping.
Files
Back clipped
When back clipped, only items between start

and stop of camera drag are calculated.
The Section/Elevation camera is used to Views created with the Section/Elevation
Elevations
Sections
create both cross section and elevation views camera can be edited with the CAD tools.
from the interior of buildings and exterior Once CAD items are added to a Section/
elevations. If the Section/Elevation camera is Elevation View, the program prompts you to
created totally outside the structure looking save the View before closing. These are the
toward it, the result is an external elevation. only two views which can be saved, and
Nothing has been cut. If the Section/ restored later. They are linked to the model
Elevation camera is created inside the and update accordingly with any changes.
structure, or passes through any of the Any CAD information added to a cross
structure, a cross section is created. section or elevation is stored with the view.
These views are saved individually as part of
The Section/Elevation camera generates the plan file.
the complete model. Everything beyond the
Managing
cut line in the direction of the line of sight

Back Clipping Sections
Files
displays in a Section/Elevation View.

To restrict the view to the length of the sight
The Section/Elevation creates a multi- line only you must Back Clip the view. To do
floor, full house elevation or cross section. this select the Back Clip Cross Sections
601
check box on the Options panel of the 3D affects Section/Elevation views that are
Preferences dialog or toggle the Back Clip created when it is active. Toggle it off to see
Section button. all information.
This limits the view to only the items Make sure Back clip cross section is
between the starting point and stopping point unchecked if an exterior elevation is needed.
of the cross section line. This option only
Lines in Section/Elevation Views

There are several different types of lines 3D objects can be selected, moved, stretched,
which represent different things in a Section/ or otherwise modified, in a Section /
Elevation View. Elevation view. The 3D model is updated in
all Views.
Each surface cut by the Section/Elevation
camera generates a CAD line. If a View is If Automatic dimensions are set to locate that
created which cuts through the roof, walls, object, such as cabinets or windows,
ceiling and floor, each surface of each item is dimensions locate them in a cross section or
represented by a CAD line. elevation.
You can dimension to these lines, which Any wall which appears in elevation adds
simplifies the process of detailing a cross edge lines in the Section/Elevation view.
section. The CAD lines generated by the Walls can be selected, moved angled, and
program are on System layer 9, Cross adjusted in many ways within this view.
section lines, in the Layers dialog.
CAD lines and polylines can be added to the
To show the framing in a Section/Elevation cross section or elevation using the CAD
View framing must first be built in the tools. Remember, a Section /Elevation view
Framing dialog. Once framing exists, you is a 2D representation of the 3D model.
can go to the Include tab of the 3D There is no depth to the view. CAD lines are
Preferences dialog and make sure the superimposed on the view and have no affect
framing items are checked. on the 3D model itself. If you have drawn
CAD lines in a Section./Elevation view, the
If a cross section line does not cut through a
program prompts you to save the window
3D object and the object is within the back
before closing out of the model or Plan View.
clipped distance, such as a window shown in
elevation, the object retains its 3D definition.
602
Detailing a Section/Elevation
Detailing a Section/Elevation
Managing
Files
If the CAD tools are active then 2D items, save any camera view which has had CAD
dimensions lines, etc. can be added to a information added.
Section/Elevation view. Always be sure to
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Saving Section/Elevation Cameras
Section/Elevation cameras are the only 3D 1. Select it and click the Open Item but-
Views which can be saved. They can be ton. The Camera Setup dialog for that
saved with the Plan View before the camera camera opens.
is closed.
2. Click the Activate button to reactivate
Elevations
1. In Plan View, click on the red camera the camera.
Sections
icon and click the Open Item button. 3. Close the view window to deactivate the
The Camera Setup dialog for that indi- camera.
vidual camera opens. If the symbols for your saved cameras do not
2. Click the Save button at the bottom of appear in Plan View, make sure that Display
the dialog and click OK. inactive Views is checked in the 3D
Preferences dialog. Then refresh the display.
3. Once saved, the View can be closed and
If the green cameras still do not show, they
reactivated.
do not exist.
An open, active Section/Elevation camera
shows red in Plan View. A closed, saved Any time you have added CAD Items, text or
Section/Elevation camera shows in green in dimensions to a Section/Elevation View, the
Plan View. To reactivate a saved Section/ program prompts you to save the View
Managing
Elevation camera: before closing.

Files
603
Choose Continue to close without saving.

Choose Save this elevation to have the
camera saved with the plan file.
Show Items Button

There are two possible dialogs accessed by Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog.
the Show Items button in a Section/ Select the check boxes to include the missing
Elevation view. items, then generate a new Section/Elevation
view based on the new settings.
If the Architectural mode is active clicking
If the CAD mode is active clicking the Show
the Show Items button displays the Show
Items dialog used for suppressing the display Items button displays the Layers dialog
of 3D items. that is used to display or suppressing 2D
CAD items.
If a type of item has been suppressed in the
3D Preferences dialog before the View was Even if the color is turned off in a section
generated, it will be grayed out in the Show elevation view, text and dimensions display
Items dialog and cannot be displayed. To see in the color defined for their own layers in
that item, close the View and open the the Layers dialog.
604
Chapter 34:
Render Views
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
New in 7.0
• Rendering engine based on OpenGL • Preview and Final View feature to allow
technology. turning on high end rendering features
Managing
• High end rendering features like specu- only when needed.
Files
lar highlights, line smoothing, curved • Full camera movement allowed within
surface smoothing, transparency, shad- the Rendered View.
ows, etc. • Better control of lighting properties.
• Better control of material properties.
Managing
Files
General Information
Rendering in Chief Architect has been accel- • Move the camera to view the model
erated to a new level of sophistication. An all from different angles
new rendering engine using OpenGL has • Redefine an existing material
been written to replace the Shader of Version
6.0. OpenGL, the new standard for high-end • Use the Texture Painter to apply a new
3D graphics, has the advantage of a more bitmap to a material
realistic Render View. With OpenGL, Render • Generate a Final View based on differ-
Views should look the same on all computers ent rendering preferences
regardless of the graphics card being used. • Use the Day/Night toggle to switch the
Render
The only difference is in the speed that it
Views
view from day to night
takes to perform the rendering. It is highly
recommended that users have a graphics card • Delete surfaces from the model to get a
with OpenGL hardware acceleration, to take better view of a particular room
full advantage of the new rendering capabili- • Save the Render View to disk as a bit-
ties in Chief Architect 7.0. For complex map file
models, an accelerated card generates quality • Print the Render View directly to the
renderings in minutes that might otherwise printer
take hours with a non-accelerated card.
Once a Render View is created you can:
605
Creating a Render View

Very little preparation work needs to be done From A Perspective
to create your first Render View. Chief
If a Perspective View is the active View, you
Architect has default values for most sur-
can render the image by selecting 3D> Ren-
faces and even creates default light sources
so that the Render View looks highly realistic der, or select the Render View button
the first time you generate it. To get better from the Perspective toolbar to create a Ren-
Render Views, you can add or adjust light der View. Chief Architect renders the view
sources and specify the materials being ren- based on your Preview settings on the Ren-
dered. der panel of the Preferences dialog.
Create a Render View from a Plan View by Once an image is rendered, you can adjust
selecting 3D> Create View> Render View, settings, modify materials, and move around
in the View. Any changes you make to the
or clicking on the Render View button on
model from another View can be updated by
the Camera toolbar. Once selected, click and
drag a camera angle just like a Perspective selecting 3D> Render, Refresh Screen ,
View. Chief Architect renders the image or F5. When you have an image that you are
based on your Preview settings on the Ren- satisfied with, select 3D> Final View or the
der panel of the Preferences dialog. Final View button to render a Final quality
image which can then be printed or saved.
Preview vs. Final Render View

A Render View is first drawn using the Pre- the Final View than the Preview. The Render
view settings on the Render panel of the View will revert back to the Preview set-
Preferences dialog By default, many of the tings as soon as anything is changed within
options available have been turned off for the the View.
Preview. This allows you to work in the Ren- For fastest rendering speed, but lowest ren-
der View more efficiently because the screen dering quality, all of the options should be
will display much faster. turned off in the Preview settings. For the
When you are in a Render View and have best rendering quality, but the slowest ren-
finished making all of your adjustments, you dering speed, all of the rendering options
can select 3D> Final View or the Final should be turned on in you Final View set-
View toolbar button to use the Final tings.
View settings from the Render panel of the The rendering option that has the greatest
Preferences dialog. This will create a much impact on rendering speed is the Show
higher quality image which is more suitable Shadows option. It is recommended that
for printing or saving as a .bmp file. It will you don’t use this feature unless you have
usually take significantly longer to generate OpenGL hardware acceleration on you
606
Saving a Render View
graphics card. Even then you may only want menu. You may adjust your Preview and
Managing
to use it in limited cases instead of having it Final View settings to best fit the speed of
set in either your Preview or Final View your graphics card and still give you satisfac-
Files
settings. You can turn on the Show Shad- tory rendering quality. For more information
ows option at any time using the Contextual see “Render” on page 84.
Managing
Saving a Render View
Files
Render Views may only be saved as bitmap 4. Give the file a name and click Save.
(.bmp) files. You do not need to add the .bmp exten-
To save a Render View: sion. The program does that automati-
cally.
1. Select File> Export> Bitmap or click
Managing
the Save Bitmap button on the Render Once saved, a bitmap can be opened and
converted into many other formats using one
Files
toolbar.
of the numerous graphic programs that are
2. The Save 3D Image dialog appears with available. Bitmap files can be utilized in
the current directory specified. word processing, desktop publishing, or web
3. Navigate to the desired directory before development programs to create adver-
Managing
saving the file. tisements, brochures, etc.
Files
Printing a Render View
Since Render Views are created from pixels tect function which prints the screen in a bit-
and not from lines, you must use File> Print map format. The entire view will print,
Image to send them to the printer. including bitmap images such as trees and
File>Print Image is a special Chief Archi- textures.
Using the Contextual Menu

Refresh, Nighttime and Final View are
Render
When you are in a Ren-
Views
der View, you can right- all options available from the toolbar.
click to access a Contex- Selecting Smooth Edges, Smooth
tual menu. The Contex- Faces, or Show Shadows will enable or
tual menu is usually the disable the specific Render capability and
same as the Edit toolbar, generate a new Render View.
but in this case the options on the Contextual Changing a setting from the menu only
menu are a mix of tool buttons and quick tog- affects the current View, it does not affect the
gles that override the settings on the Render settings in the Preferences dialog.
panel of the Preferences dialog.
607
Camera Movement
The camera used to create a Render View can once you have generated the Render View.
be moved or relocated just like the Perspec- For more information see “Adjusting Per-
tive camera. You can use both the toolbar and spective & Render Cameras” on page 585.
the keyboard to move the camera around
Rendering Tools
These tools are unique to the Render View. information see “Adjusting Lights” on page
They can either be added to a Render toolbar 615.
or accessed from the menu.
Sunlight Toggle
Texture Painter The Sunlight Toggle can be used to
The Texture Painter allows you to turn on and off the light source that repre-
redefine the texture of a material while in a sents the sun. This feature can be used to
Render View. For more information see simulate day vs. night exterior views. User
“Texture Painter” on page 687. defined exterior lights are turned off in day
views and turned on in night views. The pro-
Adjust Lights gram allows up to eight user defined lights in
The Adjust Lights option allows a user any one view.
to edit the current lights that are being used
in the Render View. The lights are displayed Final View
in a list for easy selecting. Interior default Click this button to regenerate the Ren-
lights in the list cannot be changed or altered, der View based on the Final View settings on
but the default sun can be changed. the Render panel of the Preferences dialog.
You can quickly adjust lights to get the For more information see “Render” on page
desired appearance in the Render View. 84.
Selecting a light in the Adjust Lights dialog
opens a dialog box. If it is an added light, the Save Bitmap
dialog is the Light Specification dialog. If Save the current screen image to disk
you open a Light Fixture, the dialog consists as a BMP file.
of the Render Data tab of the Electrical
Service Specification dialog. For more Print Image
Print the current screen image.
608
Images, Textures & Backdrops
Images, Textures & Backdrops
Managing
Files
Hundreds of graphics files have been Materials and Materials are assigned to
included with Chief Architect. They are cate- objects.
gorized into three groups: Images, Textures, For more realistic Render Views, it is impor-
and Backdrops. By using them you can cre- tant to use realistic textures and adjust Ren-
ate more realistic Render Views. dered properties correctly. The textures and
Managing
Render properties for materials are defined in
Files
Images the Define Material dialog.
Images are very important for the appearance
of Rendered Views and VRML file export. Backdrops
Images are bitmap files which represent indi- Backdrops are bitmap files which display in
vidual objects, such as trees, flowers, cars,
Managing
the background of all 3D Views. Only one
people, etc. They are marked in Plan View
Files
Backdrop can be applied per model. If one is
with a 2D Block and are visible in 3D Views. not defined, Chief Architect defaults to a
user defined background color. Backdrops
Textures are selected and removed on the Options tab
Textures are bitmap files which are used to of the 3D Preferences dialog and the back-
Managing
represent irregular surfaces of objects, such ground color for Render Views is defined on
Files
as bricks, tiles, woods, lawn and carpets in the Render tab. For more information see
Render Views. Textures are assigned to “Creating Backdrops” on page 88.
Materials in a Render View

A Render View is similar to a Perspective For more information regarding materials,
View except that the surfaces you see are dis- bitmap textures and how they will render see
played with textures (bitmap files) mapped “Defining Materials” on page 676.
onto them instead of patterns. If you have not
selected a texture for a material or you have
turned off the display of textures, the sur-
Render
Views
faces will be displayed using a solid color
instead.
The display of surfaces, whether or not you
are using textures, is also influenced by your
render settings on the Render tab of the
Define Material dialog. There you can
adjust the brightness, shininess, transparency,
and other material properties which will
affect how they will be displayed in the Ren-
der View.
609
Editing Materials in Render Views

From a Render View there are five ways you 4. If there is more than one material that
can change the way an object appears. needs to be redefined, click the Define
1. Select Options> Defaults Setup and Material button to open the Materi-
select the default specification dialog for als dialog which allows you to edit all
that type of item. In the specification materials. For more information see
dialog you can change the default mate- “Define Materials” on page 687.
rial definition assigned to that type of 5. Click the Texture Painter button.
object. Changing the default material for
This opens the Library Browser to the
an object will have no effect if the object
Textures library. Select and texture and
has a material assigned to it that is not
click on the surface whose material you
Use Default. For more information
want to redefine. This is the same as
see “Defaults Setup” on page 91.
selecting a new texture file on the Tex-
2. Double-click on the surface to open the ture tab of the Define Material dialog.
Define Material dialog for the material For more information see “Texture
assigned to that object or surface. For Painter” on page 687.
more information see “Defining Materi-
If you use method 1, you are changing the
als” on page 676.
material assigned for that particular object or
3. Click the Adjust Material Defini- group of objects. You are not changing a
tion button and click on a surface to material definition. If you use methods 2, 3,
open the Material Definition dialog for 4, or 5, you will redefine the material. This is
that material. For more information see a global change that will affect all objects
“Adjust Material Definition” on page with the same material assignment.
686.
Light Sources
Lighting is extremely important for Render ered a room by the program, only lights on
Views and VRML file export. Even small the exterior are used for exterior views. It is
changes can have a large impact on image possible to turn the sunlight off and to have
quality. You should note that lighting calcu- all the other exterior lights turned on to simu-
lations are done on a room-by-room basis. late night time views. The sun can be con-
The Render View uses only the lights in the trolled like other light types.
room which contains the camera. Only 8 light sources can be turned on in a
When the camera is outside of a building the room at one time. If you model a room with
program normally uses sunlight for lighting more than 8 lights, the program tries to pick
calculations and turns all other lights off. the best 8 lights in the room to use for the
Since the exterior of the building is consid- lighting calculations. You may need to turn
610
Ambient Lights
off certain lights in order to get the lighting
Managing
effects that you want
Files
Ambient Lights
Ambient light is additive to other lights in a Interior Ambient controls the light when a
room or scene. Ambient light settings are View is inside the model.
Managing
controlled on the Render tab of the 3D Pref- Daytime Ambient controls the light when
Files
erence dialog. Select 3D> 3D Preferences you are outside the model and the Sunlight
to access the dialog. Here you can adjust the Toggle is on.
ambient light settings, which affect the over-
all brightness of a Render View. Nighttime Ambient controls the light
when you are outside the model and the Sun-
Managing
light Toggle is off.
Files
Light Types
In addition to the ambient light levels that are You can adjust a light’s color, intensity,
Managing
specified in the 3D Preferences dialog, there attenuation (which affects how quickly the
are four additional ways that light sources light drops in intensity over distance),
Files
can be created for Render Views: whether it can cast shadows and if the light is
• Light Fixtures on or off.
• Added Lights There are three possible light behaviors that
• Sunlight can be used to specify how a light is calcu-
• Default Lights lated by the Renderer:
• Parallel Light sources
Each individual light has a set of Rendering
properties that can be defined. • Point Light sources
• Spot Light sources.
Render
Default Interior Lights
Views
If you create an interior Render View and no room that you are rendering by placing a
user defined lights exist, the program will lighting fixture or by adding a light using
create a Default Light source within the 3D> Add Lights.
room. The Default Interior light acts like a
central point source.
It cannot be adjusted in any way. If you want
control over the light sources in your interior
Render Views, you must add a light to the
611
Default Sun Light

If you create an exterior Render View, and no The Default Sun Light acts like a parallel
Sun Angle exists, the program creates a light source. For the Default Sun Light you
Default Sun Light. The Default Sun Light can specify:
can be selected for specification from a Ren- 1. Intensity
der View by selecting 3D> Adjust Lights 2. Color
and selecting Default Sun Light 1 from
3. Tilt Angle
the list of available lights.
4. Dir Angle
5. On
6. Casts Shadows
The Default Sun Light acts like a sun but its
location is not based on any real world loca-
tions. For more information on these settings
see “Light Specification Dialog” on page
616.
Select Adjust and the Light Specification
dialog will open. If you place a Sun Angle in Plan View, the
Default Sun Light can no longer be used as a
The Light Specification dialog will have
light source in exterior Render Views unless
many options grayed out.
it is first turned off. Sun Angles can be speci-
fied with Earth data to make them much
more realistic interpretations of the Sun.
Light Fixtures
Electric symbols placed in Plan View that in Render Views. The light type and proper-
represent a Light Fixture, a 3D object that ties for each fixture can be modified by open-
looks like a light, create a point light source
612
Added Lights
ing up the electrical symbol specification and surface that it is attached to, (i.e. wall or ceil-
Managing
selecting the Render tab. ing).
Files
On the Render tab, you can specify the light If the light source is a Point or Spot Light,
type - (parallel, point, or spot) and the you can define it’s height relative to the fix-
Height Offset. ture. For instance, if the fixture is on the ceil-
Height Offset controls how high the light ing you may want to put a negative number
source is relative to the position of the fix- in the Height Offset field to the move the
Managing
ture. The fixture height is determined by the light source down to the location where the
Files
bulb might be in real life.
Added Lights
Managing
3D> Add Lights allows you to quickly add a To create a Point Light source:
light in the Plan View. Added Lights are
Files
1. Select 3D> Add Lights.
similar to Light Fixtures, but they only gen-
erate a light source in the Render View. They 2. Click in Plan View. Do not drag the cur-
do not create a 3D object that appears in 3D sor when you click on the screen, or you
Views. Added lights can be placed into an will create a parallel light source.
Managing
object which would normally not generate a To create a Spot Light source:
light source such as a floor lamp or TV.
Files
1. Create a Parallel or Point Light source
To add a Parallel Light: using one of the above methods.
1. Select 3D> Add Lights. 2. Select the light and open it for specifica-
2. Click and drag in Plan View. tion.
Parallel Lights can be added to the exterior or 3. Change its Type to Spot Light in the
interior of a model. Light Specification dialog.
Sun Angles
In Plan View you can create multiple Sun The Sun Toggle controls the display of either
Render
Views
Angles with the Sun Angle tool. Select the default Sun or the current Sun Angle.
CAD> Special> Sun Angle and click in Plan Sun Angles can only act as Parallel light
View to place a Sun Angle. In each Sun sources. Their location and direction are
Angle you can specify time of year, time of defined per plan. The Render Data tab has
day, and a location based on longitude and been added to the Sun Angle Specification
latitude. dialog to allow more control of its Render
If you have defined a North arrow, using the properties such as color, shadows, etc.
CAD> Special> North Arrow, the Sun’s Through the Sun Angle Specification dia-
location in reference to the model is accurate. log, you can specify the location and time
613
that the program uses to model the actual sun make sure it is turned on in the Sun Angle
angle as a light source. Specification dialog. Verify all others are
When rendering an exterior View, the pro- turned off and the program will render the
gram looks for the first Sun Angle which is correct sun. If one does not exist, the pro-
turned on. If you have multiple Sun Angles, gram uses the Default Sun Light.
you must select the one you want to use and
Defining Lights
Each Light Type, may be defined as behav- directions from its origin. It slows rendering
ing as either a Point Light source, a Paral- down, but it is a more realistic representation
lel Light source, or a Spot Light source. of electric lighting and should be used where
These definitions can be assigned and modi- visual fidelity is the deciding concern.
fied to create many different lighting effects. If no user defined light exists, Chief Archi-
tect creates a Point Light source to represent
Parallel Lights a light within a room. Any light source,
A Parallel Light has a direction except a sun angle, can be changed into a
but no position. The light appears to Point Light source by changing its light type
illuminate all objects with equal in the specification dialog.
intensity, as if it were at an infinite distance To modify the light, double-click on it (or
from the object. A Parallel Light source is
select it, then click the Open Item button).
commonly used to simulate distant light
The Light Specification dialog opens.
sources, such as the sun. It is the best choice
of light to use for maximum speed generating
Spot Lights
Render Views.
A Spot Light focuses the light in
Parallel Light sources are represented in Plan
View by three arrows. To modify the light, a specified direction. The location,
double-click on it or select it, then click the cone angle, direction and intensity
of a Spot Light can be defined. Spot Lights
Open Item button. The Light Specifica-
cannot be placed directly in the plan. They
tion dialog opens, allowing you to modify
are created by changing an existing light’s
the light’s characteristics. Any light source
specification. Once defined as a Spot Light,
can be changed into a Parallel Light source
the direction of a spot light can be changed in
by changing its light type in the Light Speci-
the Light Specification dialog or for an
fication dialog.
added light source, by rotating the light in
Plan View.
Point Lights
Like a bare light bulb, a Point
Light radiates light equally in all
614
Adjusting Lights
Adjusting Lights
Managing
Files
Once lights have been added to the model, Adjust. The Light Specification dialog
they can be edited or adjusted using the light opens.
specification dialog. Sometimes you will
want to adjust the lights from the Render
View to get immediate results, other times
Managing
you may want to adjust lights in Plan View
Files
where you can easily see their position
within a room.
In Plan View
To edit a light in Plan View:
Managing
Files
1. Select a light. Click the Open Item
that appears on the Edit toolbar. 4. Make changes to the light and click OK.
The Light Specification dialog opens for 5. You return to the Adjust Lights dialog.
that light or it appears as the Render tab for a 6. Select another light to adjust or click
light fixture. Done to return to the Render View.
Managing
Files
Adjust Lights Dialog 7. The View is regenerated based on the
new light settings.
In a Render View you can use the Adjust
Lights dialog to select a light and open the
Light Specification.
1. Create a Render View with lights.
2. Select 3D> Adjust Lights or click the
Adjust Lights button on the Render
toolbar. The Adjust Lights dialog
opens.
3. The lights that are in the same room that
Render
Views
the camera is in appear in the list. Select
the light to be adjusted and click
615
Light Specification Dialog

Once a light has been placed in the plan, and modify certain properties of each light
either with a symbol or with the 3D> Add using the Light Specification dialog.
Lights tool, you can redefine its behavior
Light Specification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
10 12
Depending on the type of light selected, the able lighting effects. If you clear the check
options available will vary. box, the slider bar controls how bright the
Type - Select a source type for the light appears in the Render View.
1
light. Available source types are Point Lights that have an intensity of 0% are the
Light, Spot Light, and Parallel Light. The same as lights that are turned off. Lights that
selections in the dialog are affected by the have an intensity of 100% have the maxi-
Type that you select. Each type of light mum brightness allowed. If you have multi-
source behaves differently but they all have ple lights in a room all set to maximum
some rendering properties in common. intensity, it is possible to have too much light
Auto Intensity - Select the check box for a realistic View. Colors and textures
2 become washed out if there is too much light.
to have the program set intensities for
each light in the Render View. When you Color - Click on the rectangle to define
3
select Auto Intensity the program provides the color of the light being modeled.
an average intensity to render with reason- Colored lights may be used to achieve spe-
616
Light Specification Dialog
cial lighting effects. They alter the appear- ative to the first floor. If you want an Added
Managing
ance of your material colors and textures. light to appear in a room on the second floor
you must enter a height value that includes
Files
The default color of light is pure white,
which has the least affect on the material col- the first floor. A value of 0 equals the floor
ors and textures. elevation of the first floor.
Attenuated - Select this check box to Tilt Angle - The Tilt Angle is used to
4 7
control how the quickly the light inten- control the angle of the light with
Managing
sity drops off as a result of the distance from respect to the horizon. A value of -90 degrees
Files
the light source. Only Spot and Point Lights means that the light is pointing straight down
can have attenuation values set. and a value of 90 degrees means that the light
is pointing straight up. 0 degrees is parallel to
The three edit values represent the three the horizon.
coefficients (a, b, and c) in the equation: 1 /
Dir Angle - Defines the angle that a
Managing
(a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance 8
from the light source. Increasing any of these Parallel or Spot Light is pointed along.
Files
values results in the light intensity dropping Zero degrees is measured horizontally on
off faster (the light does not travel as far). your screen pointing to the right. Positive
Decreasing any value results in the light values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction
intensity dropping off slower, (the light trav- from there. Enter a value up to 360 degrees.
If you enter a negative value, the program
Managing
els farther). Small changes in these coeffi-
cients can have significant impact on lighting uses Zero.
Files
effects. Some experimentation should be Direct a Spot Light in Plan View by selecting
done to fully understand how to use them. and dragging the rotate handle.
Floor Number - Define where the Cut Off Angle - The Cut Off Angle
5 9
symbol for an added light appears in controls the angle of the cone of light
Plan Views. for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180
The Floor Number controls on which floor degrees would create a Spot Light that shines
plan the added light symbol is drawn. If you on one side of the light’s position, represent-
assign the number of a non-existent floor, ing a half sphere. A small cone angle, say 10
you will not see the light display and you degrees, would create a very narrow cone of
cannot delete that light. light. The cut off angle should always be
between 0 and 180 degrees. The cut off angle
Render
Views
A floor number of -1 draws the light symbol for an added light can be defined in the Plan
on all floors, a value of 1 draws the light View by dragging the handles at the ends of
symbol on the first floor. The floor number the cone lines in or out.
has no effect on the light height. Set the num-
Drop Off Rate - This affects how fast
ber equal to the floor plan that contains the 10
room that the light is in, if you want it to the light intensity drops off from the
appear in Plan View. center of the cone of light to the outside
edge. This is only available for Spot Lights.
Height - Define a height for the light.
6 The default value for this is set to 7.5 which
Heights of Added lights are always rel-
means the light drops off fairly quickly. It is
617
not useful to set this value too low because On - This controls whether or not the
11
there are limitations in the OpenGL lighting light should be used for lighting effects
model which result in jagged looking circles in the Render View. The default is “On”.
of light when they are shining on large flat Casts Shadows - Controls whether
surfaces. Appearances can be improved by 12
or not the light casts shadows when
decreasing the Maximum Triangle Size and Shadows are turned on in a Render View.
increasing the Drop off Rate but it is impos-
sible to get a nice sharp circle of light using It is recommended that you only use one, or
current methods under OpenGL. at most two, lights to casts shadows at a time.
Shadow calculations are very complicated
and can slow rendering significantly.
Sun Angle Render Data
1
2
3
4
Sun Angles are used to specify the date and Sun Angle that is defined as On. To make
time for the Sun for a building located at a sure you are using the correct Sun Angle,
specific place on the Earth. The default loca- make sure all others do not have this box
tion of the building is defined on the Special checked.
CAD panel of the Preferences dialog. This Casts Shadow - Select the check
data can be modified on the Earth Data tab. 2
box to have this light source cast shad-
For more information on placing Sun Angles ows. These shadows are similar to the
see “Sun Angle & Shadows” on page 704. shadow shown in Plan View, but may render
If a Sun Angle is used as a light source in an differently based on other light sources.
exterior Render View, you can specify its Intensity - Use this slider bar to
rendering properties on the Render Data tab 3
define the relative intensity of the light
of the Sun Angle Specification dialog. source. Time of day as set on the Earth Data
On - Select the check box to select the tab, does not affect how the Sun Angle ren-
1
current Sun Angle as a rendering light ders as a light source, but this does.
source. If there is more than one defined Sun Color - Click on the rectangle to select
Angle, the rendering utility selects the first 4
a color for the light source.
618
Chapter 35:
Importing & Exporting
Managing&
Exporting
Managing Importing
Files Files
General Information
All importing and exporting of files is • 3D Views can be exported as 2D DXFs
accessed through the File menu. • Text files may be exported directly from
Managing
Chief Architect can import the following: the Material List. Material List and nor-
mal text files may also be copied from
Files
• Wall Layer Definitions Chief and pasted into other word process-
• Layer Sets ing or spreadsheet programs.
• Material Definitions • Any 3D View, including a rendered
• 2D DXF files compatible with image, can be exported as a bitmap
Managing
AutoCAD®. (.bmp) file.
Files
• Bitmap files (.bmp, .jpg, .png) • Plan Views and 3D Views can be
exported as Windows MetaFiles (.wmf),
Chief Architect can Export the following:
vector images which rescale with no loss
• Wall Layer Definitions of quality.
• Plan files. Floors can be exported indi- • VRML files may be exported from any
Managing
vidually, or all the floors can be exported Perspective or Render View. This is a
simultaneously into a single 2D DXF file.
Files
special type of file which allows you to
• Complete 3D DXF models create real time walkthroughs with the
• Material Definitions supplied Cosmo Player or any other
VRML plug-ins (readily available).
Importing 2D DXF Files

Chief Architect imports and exports 2D DXF 1. Plan View
files. Whenever a .dxf file is imported, the 2. Wall Elevation or Section/Elevation
CAD mode is active. View
Exporting
Importing
Any window in which CAD mode may be 3. A CAD Detail Window

activated may have a 2D DXF file imported. 4. The layout facility.
There are four different window types into
which a 2D DXF file can be read:
619
Notes on Importing DXF’s entire DXF file. There is also a Rotation

• The DXF is read in and converted into handle available as well.
2D CAD items such as lines, circles, etc. • Once a DXF file is imported, it may be
• Dimensions imported lose their identity selected as a group by holding down
as dimensions, and become text items the Shift key while dragging a window
and CAD lines. marquee around the group of items to
• If a block is part of the 2D DXF file it select.
continues to be a block. • The CAD items imported from a DXF
• DXF layers can be mapped to layers file may also be group selected, then
within Chief Architect. blocked by clicking Make Block .
• When a DXF is imported it appears • 2D DXF files may be imported by drag-
selected as a unit, with a central Move ging and dropping them into the active
handle available for relocating the Plan View window.
Read DXF File Dialog
1
2
3
4 8
5
6
7
To Import a 2D DXF, choose
2 Use the navigational tools to move
File>Import> DXF. The Read DXF File through the directories until you find
dialog opens. Navigate through the the desired file.
directories until you find the DXF file to
import. 3 Click on the file to import.
4 The File name diaplays.
1 The current directory displays here.
620
Mapping DXF Layers
5 Files of type should be DXF Files. 7 Check Make boxes to import sets of
Managing
four lines sharing common end points
6 Check Make polylines to link as boxes.
Files
imported lines which share a common
endpoint, turning them into a polyline.
8 Click Open to import the selected
DXF.
Managing
Mapping DXF Layers
Files
1
5
Managing
Files
6
Managing
2
Files
3
Managing
When you have chosen the DXF file to
1 Select one or more layers from the DXF
Files
import and clicked OK, the DXF Layer file on the left, one layer in User Layers
Mapping dialog opens. section on the right. Hold down the Ctrl key
On the left are the layer names from the DXF and click to select multiple layers.
file. On the right are the Chief Architect User
layers number 100-199. Or you may Map the 2 The name of each DXF layer here.
selected DXF layers into sequential Chief 3 The Chief Architect layer displays here.
layers, including the original DXF layer This shows the Chief Architect layer to
name, linetype and color. This is the method which each DXF layer is assigned. Notice
to use if you want the DXF layer names, line that there is no requirement that the layers be
color and linetype to redefine Chief sequential. Also notice that multiple DXF
Exporting
Importing
Architect’s layer information. It is also the layers may be assigned to a single Chief
method to use if you want only one DXF Architect layer.
layer associated with each Chief Architect
layer. 4 Click Select All to select every DXF
layer. This is the fastest way to select
621
all the DXF layers. You may assign all DXF Once the layers have been selected click the
layers to a single Chief Architect layer, or numbered button below Map Selected
you may hold down the Ctrl key and click on DXF layer to User layer. All the layers
individual DXF layers to remove them from are mapped to that one layer.
the selection set before making the Continue back with step one again, selecting
assignment. the next set of DXF layers and assigning
The DXF input layers can be mapped to the them to another Chief Architect layer, until
User layers with one of two methods. all the assignments have been made. (If you
Multiple layers can be mapped to one User do not reassign a layer, it is automatically be
layer, or Multiple layers can be a mapped placed on CAD layer 0.) Click OK.
sequentially to User layers with a defined
starting point. To select a group of layers in a sequence,
select the layer at the top of the
Mapping to One Layer sequence, hold down the Shift key, then
select the layer at the bottom of the list.
You may choose to assign multiple selected To select multiple layers which are not in
DXF layers to a specific User layers, leaving Ctrl
sequence, hold down the key and
the Chief Architect layer name, color and click on each layer.
linetype intact. To do this select the DXF
layers to import on the left and select a Chief
Architect layer on the right.
Exporting 2D DXF files

2D views of the plan or of any 3D View can compatible with AutoCAD®R12,
be exported from Chief Architect. The DXF
AutoCAD®R13 and AutoCAD®R14.
files created by Chief Architect are fully
Compatibility with other software may vary.
622
Exporting 2D DXF files
Write DXF File
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
Files
3
4
Managing
Files
DXF Current File dialog opens. Repeat the steps above to
To export only the current display, select create the DXF file.
File>Export>DXF Current. The Write This DXF file contains all floors
DXF File dialog opens.
Managing
superimposed on top of each other. The items
are on distinct layers, each for its own floor,
Files
Save in: Shows the current directory.
1 so items or entire floors can be turned on or
Change if needed. Always make sure
that you are saving the file in the desired off as desired.
directory.
Only the items currently displayed on
Existing DXF files in current directory
Managing
2 each floor export to the DXF file, so make
are listed. sure that every floor is set up as desired.
Files
3 Type in the File name of the DXF Layers for 2D DXF Floor Plan
file. You do not need to add the .dxf
extension, as the program does that For each floor, different plan items are
automatically. placed on separate layers. The ’n’ in the layer
names corresponds to the floor in the Chief
Save as type always lists the
4 Architect model
extension which is added. This should
say DXF Files. Layer names are:
Click Save to create the DXF file. A-WALL-n: walls,
A-GLAZ-n: windows, doors and door
Exporting
Importing
DXF All (floors) swing indications,

To export all the floors simultaneously into A-CASE-n: cabinets,
the same file, select File>Export>DXF All
from any floor of the plan. The Write DXF A-DIMS-n: dimension lines,
623
A-POWR-n: electrical items and their DXF 2D View

connections, Sometimes a flat 2D DXF is needed from a
A-NOTE-n: room labels, 3D View, such as an elevation, camera view
or overview. When the 3D View is on screen,
A-FURN-n: furniture, and
and the desired items are displayed, choose
A-TEXT-n: text other than room labels. File>Export>2D View. Give the file a name
A-STAR-n: stairs and save it in the desired location.
A-ROOF-n: roof Elevation and cross section views produce a
A-Cnnn-n: CAD items. The nnn shows DXF file with accurate dimensions.
the CAD layer number (001, 021, etc.). Perspective and overviews are not produced
Each fixture or furniture item is a block in to any scale.
the DXF file. Fixture blocks are referenced
on the cabinet layer while furniture blocks Tip: Before creating the DXF file, turn off
are referenced on the furniture layer. the color (Window>Color Off) in the
3D View so that only lines show. This
reveals which lines will show in the DXF
file.
Exporting the 3D DXF Model

The entire 3D model can be exported from sure to save it in the desired location. The 3D
Chief as a 3D DXF file, with all surfaces DXF model is created.
exported as DXF 3DFACE entities. This file
can then be imported into any program which Layers for 3D DXF Model
is fully compatible with AutoCAD’s 3D .dxf When you export a 3D DXF all the surfaces
format. are exported as 3DFACE entities. Each entity
To export the 3D model, a 3D View must be represents a surface in the 3D model. The
active. Make sure that everything to be entities are placed on layers that are named
exported is displayed. When the model is by Chief Architect. The names currently
ready, choose File> Export> DXF 3D used by Chief Architect are listed below.
Model. Give the DXF file a name, making
624
Exporting the 3D DXF Model
DXF Export Layers A-ROOF-FASC Fascia
Managing
A-APPL-MAIN Appliance (main material) A-ROOF-MAIN Roof
Files
A-APPL-SECN Appliance (second mate- A-STRS-RUNR Stair Runner
rial) A-STRS-TRED Stair Tread
A-APPL-THIR Appliance (third material) A-WALL-BAY Wall for Bays
A-CASE-CABF Cabinet Doors & Drawers A-WALL-EXTR Exterior Trim
A-CASE-CABN Cabinet (incl. Face frame) A-WALL-EXTW Exterior Wall
Managing
A-CASE-CNTR Counter A-WALL-MAIN Wall
Files
A-CASE-GLAS Cabinet Glass A-WDWK-BAY Base Molding
A-CASE-SOFF Soffit A-WDWK-EXTR Frieze
A-CASE-TOEA Toe Area A-WDWK-SHLF Shelf
A-CEIL-BAY Bay Ceiling A-WDWK-TRIM Trim
Managing
A-CEIL-MAIN Ceiling E-ELEC-GLAS Electrical Glass
A-CEIL-SLOP Sloped Ceiling
Files
E-ELEC-TRIM Electrical Trim
A-DOOR-STND Door
A-EQPM-HDWR Hardware DXF Code
A-FIXT-MAIN Fixture (main material) Each layer name exported can include a DXF
A-FIXT-SECN Fixture (second material) Code from the materials used for items on
Managing
A-FLOR-BAY Bay Floor that layer. If a material has been specified for
Files
A-FLOR-EDGE Floor Edge an item and appears on the surface of the
A-FLOR-MAIN Floor item, the DXF code for the material is
A-FOOT-FOOT Footings included in the layer name. This DXF Code
A-FURN-GLAS Furniture Glass is specified on the General tab of the Define
A-FURN-MAIN Furniture (main material) Material dialog.
Managing
A-FURN-SECN Furniture (second mate- These codes are specified in the Define
Files
rial) Material dialog for each Chief Architect
A-GLAZ-TRAN Glass material. As you add new materials in this
A-GLAZ-WIND Window dialog, you can specify an appropriate DXF
A-HRAL-BAL Stair Baluster code for each.
A-HRAL-BLST Baluster
A-HRAL-MAIN Railing
A-HRAL-NWEL Newel Post
A-HRAL-NWEL Stair Newel Posts
A-HRAL-RAIL Stair Railing
A-MASN-FIRE Fireplace
Exporting
Importing
A-PLAT-RIM Platform Rim

A-RISR-MAIN Stair Riser
A-ROOF-EAVE Eave (Exterior Soffit)
625
Exporting Wall Layer Definitions
2
3
The Export Wall Layer List File dialog
opens.
The wall layer definitions that export from
your plan are listed in the Default Wall
1 Specify the directory in which to save
Type dialog. the wall layers data file, .dat.
Wall layers may be exported from one plan 2 Give the file a name.
file and imported into another plan file. The 3 Save as type should specify *.dat.
File> Export> Wall Layers option exports .dat files are used for other things in
all wall layer definitions in one .dat file. The the program, make sure the file name
.dat file can then be read into another Chief describes it as a wall layer definition list.
Architect plan file.
4 All data files, with a .dat extension, in
To export the wall layers from a specific the directory displays. .dat files are
plan, choose File>Export>Wall Layers. also used by other parts of the program, such
as for the toolbar and for the Material List.
626
Importing Wall Layer Definitions
Importing Wall Layer Definitions
Managing
Files
1
Managing
Files
3
Managing
Files
To import wall layer definitions into a plan When wall layer definitions are imported, the
file, choose File>Import>Wall Layers. The names of the wall layer definitions in the
Import Wall layer List File dialog opens. Import file are compared with those already
in your plan. Only those definitions not
Managing
1 Navigate to the folder containing the already in your plan file are loaded. This
wall layers data files.
Files
process does not compare the layer
2 Choose the desired .dat file from the definitions, it only compares names. It does
list. not overwrite or update wall layer definitions
that use the same name.
3 The name appears in the File name
Managing
area. Click Open.
Files
iwalllay.dat and mwallay.dat
There are two .dat files in the Chief from your computer. They can always be
Architect directory named iwalllay.dat restored from your installation CD.
(Imperial units) and mwalllay.dat (Metric
units). These files are .dat files that contain
Chief Architect wall layer definitions. If you
open a .pl1 file, which contains fewer than
six wall layer definitions, the information
from iwallay.dat or mwalllay.dat is
Exporting
Importing
automatically imported. It adds new wall

layer definitions to your plan file.
If you do not want this information added to
your plan files, rename or delete these files
627
Exporting Bitmap Images
3
4
Any 3D or Render View may be exported as
2 The bitmaps which exist in the current
a bitmap (.bmp) file. From any 3D View directory display.
select File> Export> Image. The Save 3D
Image dialog opens. 3 Give the bitmap a name.
4 Save as type should show that it is a
1 Navigate to the desired directory. Bitmap File.
Click Save to finish.
Importing Bitmap Images
1
2
3
4
Bitmap files may be imported into any Section/Elevations, Wall Elevations, CAD
window which allows CAD: Plan View Detail and Layout files. Chief Architect
628
Scaling Bitmaps
allows you to import several common

2 Select the bitmap from the list.
Managing
formats for bitmap files including .bmp,
.jpg, and .png. 3 File name shows the selected bitmap.
Files
To import a bitmap, choose File> Import> 4 Files of type can be Bitmap Files
(*.BMP), Bitmap Files (*.JPG), or
Bitmap. The Choose Bitmap dialog opens.
Bitmap Files (*.PNG).
1 Navigate to the folder containing the Click Open to finish importing the bitmap.
Managing
bitmap to be imported.
The bitmap will be placed in the center of the
Files
current view.
Scaling Bitmaps
Managing
By Dragging superimposed on those items is only 2 feet,
Files
Bitmaps have a border which acts just like a you need to set the Resize Factor for the
CAD box. It can be used to relocate or resize bitmap to 5. (10’ divided by 2’ equals 5).
the bitmap. Select the border and drag from a When the bitmap is 5 times the original size,
corner to resize the bitmap proportionally. the items on the bitmap are at the actual scale
shown on the bitmap.
Managing
Drag an edge to stretch the contained bitmap.
Files
6. Group select the bitmap and click the
Resize Factor Open Item button. The Edit CAD
If you import a bitmap of a house plan or Item dialog open.
property layout, you want that bitmap to be
at full scale. This can be done with a little bit 7. Select the Resize Factor check box and
Managing
of calculation. enter the calculated Resize Factor in the
field.
Files
1. Import the bitmap.
8. Click OK and the bitmap will be rescaled.
2. Find two items on the bitmap which are a
known horizontal or vertical distance
apart. Resize Bitmap
A selected bitmap can be resized in either the
3. Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these
X or Y direction with the Resize Bitmap
two items.
tool.
4. Find the dimension between the CAD
lines. 1. Select the bitmap.
5. The Resize Factor for the bitmap will be 2. Click the Resize Bitmap button on the
Exporting
Importing
the true distance on the bitmap divided by Edit toolbar.

the distance between the CAD lines. 3. Click on two points in the bitmap that
In other words, it the items are supposed to have a known distance between them.
be 10 feet apart on the bitmap, but the
distance between the two CAD lines
629
4. After you click at the second point, the 5. Enter a new dimension that matches the
Resize Bitmap dialog opens showing the known distance between the points.
distance between the points. 6. Click OK and the bitmap will be resized.
Exporting Windows Metafiles (WMF)
High resolution pictures of a plan or 3D visual instruction provided by the cursor,

View can be exported as a Windows dragging a marquee from the upper left
Metafile. A Metafile is made up of vectors, corner to the lower right corner, totally
such as actual lines, which allow the Metafile encompassing the area to be made into a
to be rescaled with no loss of picture quality. Windows Metafile.
A Windows Metafile can be created from any When you release the mouse after defining
view except a Render View. Only items the bounding area for the Metafile, the Write
which are displayed are written to the Windows Metafile dialog opens. Enter the
Metafile. If the view is in color on the screen name for the Metafile, making sure to save it
when the Metafile is written, the Metafile in the desired directory location. You do not
picture will be in color. When the view is need to add the .wmf extension, the program
accurately positioned on screen, select File> does that automatically.
Export> Metafile. The cursor changes to
Click Save, and the Metafile Size dialog
representing a marquee being dragged from
opens.
the upper left to the lower right. Follow the
630
Exporting the Material List
Accept the default Width and Height, provided to increase the printing line weight
Managing
Windows Metafiles can always be resized. of a Metafile created from any 3D View.
Files
Managing
Files
The Metafile Size dialog from a 3D View To increase the printing line weight of a
has one additional option. Since line weights Metafile created in a 3D View, increase the
are not definable for 3D items, an option is value in the Use line weight box. A line
Managing
weight of 3 or 4 is usually sufficient for
plotting. This option is not needed from Plan
Files
View since Metafiles created in Plan View
use the line weights defined in the Layers
dialog.
Managing
Files
Any Material List can be exported as a text Material List, select File> Export Material
(.txt or .csv) file or a file which can be List (.TXT,.CSV).
opened directly by most spreadsheet
The Material Export Options dialog opens.
programs. From the Material List or Master
Managing
Files
1 3
2 4
Tab Delimited (TXT) - Select this Material List and a carriage return between
1
option to create a text file with a tab each row. This type of file is typically
between each field entry in the Material List, opened by a spreadsheet program.
and a carriage return between each row.
Exporting
Importing
No Column Headers - Select this

3
Comma Delimited (CSV) - Select check box to ignore the column
2
this option to create a text file with a headings from the Material List.
comma between each field entry in the
631
Run Default Spreadsheet/Editor program specified for this file type on your
4
- Select this check box to immediately computer.
open the exported file with the default
Virtual Reality Modeling Language-VRML

VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling capability. Walkthroughs can be created in
Language) is a 3D file format that can be real viewing time, allowing you to use the
imported by various “walkthrough” viewers mouse as a joy stick.
as well as rendering packages. An exported
Cosmo Player is distributed on the Chief 7.0
VRML file contains the entire 3D model
CD-ROM. You must have installed either
with texture, image, and lighting information
Netscape 4 (or greater) or Internet
that cannot be exported via DXF.
Explorer 4 (or greater) to be able to use this
You can post a VRML file on your web site, VRML viewer.
or email it to a customer who can then view it
The Cosmo Player plug-in is also available
and “walkthrough” it using a VRML viewer.
over the internet at www.cai.com/cosmo/.
The Cosmo Player, supplied with Chief Other viewers are also readily available as a
Architect, provides a 3D walkthrough free download on the Internet.
Exporting VRML Files
2
1 3
4
5
6
7
8
VRML files are created from Perspective VRML files will match Render Views more
and Render Views. The entire model is closely than Perspective Views since they
exported, but the starting point for the will use similar methods of display including
walkthrough is defined by the camera lighting and textures.
location at the time of export. VRML files
When a Perspective or Render View is
use the same textures that appear in Render
active, select File> Export> Export
Views.
VRML. The VRML Options dialog opens.
632
Using the VRML Player
1 Define the Camera Field of View. 7 Run Default VRML Viewer starts
Managing
Standard most closely corresponds to the VRML viewer and opens the new
the Chief Architect camera view. The other VRML file as soon as it is generated.
Files
options generate a wider field of view.
Copy images to export directory
8
Then select as many options along the right must be checked if you are saving the
side as desired. VRML to a file on a disk to be shared with
others. This copies texture bitmaps with the
Managing
No Textures Exported keeps
2 VRML file so that they render correctly
associated texture files from being
Files
when exported.
exported with the VRML file. If textures are
exported, the texture files must be in the Once the general parameters have been
folder with the VRML file. selected click OK. Name the VRML file and
save it to the desired VRML folder, give the
Walk Through Surfaces allows you
3
Managing
VRML file a name, and click Save.
to walk through walls and closed doors
Files
from room to room, instead of stopping when
It is best to keep all VRML files in a folder
you reach a wall. separate from your normal Chief Architect
Turn off Ambient Lights turns off files, since all textures used in the model
4 will also export corresponding texture files
the default lights that are used to light a
to the same folder. This could add a
Managing
scene. significant amount of files, creating
Files
Turn off Fixture Lights turns off potential organizational problems. A folder
5 named VRMLexport has created in the
the default lights which are generated
Chief Architect root directory for this
for fixtures and are used to light a scene. purpose.
Night Sky/Ground colors darkens
6
Managing
the ground plane and sky to give a night
appearance.
Files
Using the VRML Player
The Cosmo VRML player is a separate wish to go.Selecting the Go To button, and
program from Chief Architect. We have placing the cursor on an object in the screen,
simplified the interface between Chief 7.0 and holding down the left mouse button
and the VRML viewer, but no detailed zooms your view towards that object.
instructions for the VRML viewer are
The Study button allows total viewing of the
provided.
model as it rotates beneath the sky and over
Exporting
Importing
Various tool buttons appear on the screen, the ground. The Zoom Out and Restore
commanding tasks to the mouse. Walk, Pan, buttons are self-explanatory. More detailed
Turn and Roll allow real-time viewing of the information about the Cosmo Player and its
model by pressing down the left button of the use is available at the www.cosmosoftware.
mouse, and pulling it in the direction you com Web site.
633
VRML use of Texture & Image Files

The VRML specification does not support You may add new texture and image files for
the use of .bmp files. Instead, VRML only Chief Architect to use if you use the same
supports compressed file formats such as file formats as those provided with the
.gif, .png, or .jpg files. These are more program. If you wish to use a .bmp file in
compatible, compressed, efficient formats. In Chief Architect and still be able to export it
order for VRML to render textures correctly, with the VRML file, you must also create a
the texture and image files must be in the .gif file with the same name in the same
same directory as the exported .wrl file. So directory. When you export the VRML file,
keep the .wrl and graphic files in the same Chief Architect will automatically substitute
directory when moving or copying the the .gif for the .bmp file used in the Render
VRML file. View. It is recommended that you use either
the .jpg or .png file format instead of using
.bmp and .gif pairs.
Exporting & Importing Material Definitions

Material Definitions are stored with the plan For more information see “Exporting &
file and can be saved with the plan. As you Importing Material Definitions” on page
create new materials within plan files, you 688.
can use the export and import functions of
Chief Architect to share Material Definitions
between plan files.
634
Chapter 36:
Printing & Plotting
Printing &
Plotting
Introduction to Printing
Chief Architect can print directly from any simple as installing newer print drivers
Plan View, 3D View or layout sheet to almost downloaded from the Internet. Sometimes a
any printer or plotter which supports printing faulty cable can be a problem. Other times,
Managing
graphics from Windows programs. Chief the plotter demands the paper be loaded in a
Files
Architect 7.0 does not support DOS printer different orientation.
drivers.
Keep the Owner’s Manual for your printer or
This chapter provides information which can plotter close at hand. Write inside the
be used to solve many printer or plotter Owner’s Manual the various phone numbers
Managing
problems, as well as to prevent them from for technical support for that printer or
Files
occurring in the first place. plotter – from the original manufacturer as
well as from your local dealer.
Printers and plotters vary widely in how well
they function. Often, the problem is as
Managing
Different Types of Printers and Plotters
Files
There are many different types of printers Ink Jet Printers use a liquid ink which is
and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller, sprayed on the paper through tiny jets. These
normally outputting 8 ½ x 11 (Letter or A printers are most commonly used for letter or
size), 8 ½ x 14 (Legal Size) or sometimes as legal size, but some hold 11 x 17 or 17x22
Managing
large as 11 x 17 (Tabloid or B size). size paper.
Files
Plotters output larger sheets of paper. (17 x Ink Jet Plotters utilize the same
22 (C size), 22 x 34 (D size) or 34 x 44 (E technology as Ink Jet printers, but print larger
size)) size sheets. Single color (black) or full color
plotters are readily available.
Laser Printers use a dry toner, similar to a
Symbol&
Libraries
copier. These Produce crisp, clean lines at Pen Plotters utilize actual pens to produce
Plotting
Printing
high resolutions and are commonly available the drawing. Since each line must be drawn
for black and white prints up to 11 x 17 in individually, pen plotters take the longest
size. Laser Plotters are starting to become time to plot. Pen plotters draw lines only, so a
available, but the cost is still quite high. shaded wall will not be filled in. If a line
635
thickness of three is specified (as walls often If you print to a pen plotter, you can set up
are), the pen actually makes three passes for your plot sequence to use different pens. You
that line. Line color is often used to define will need to set all Line Weights at 1, and
which pen is to be used. It is up to the user to assign line colors to correspond with
properly specify this information when different pen weights on the plotter.
setting up the printer and configuring it for
Chief Architect.
Print Drivers
Print driver programs are basically Somewhere in the Printer Properties dialog
interpreters between a software program and should be a button called About. Click this
the printer. The drivers are usually created by button to find the version and creation date of
the manufacturer of the printer and may be the driver currently being used. If this is not
updated regularly. Different drivers are used the latest driver, replace it.
for different versions of Windows. It is vital
Refer to your printer documents to obtain
to keep track of the drivers for each printer or
printer manufacturer or printer technical
plotter, making sure to update them
support.
whenever the Windows operating system is
changed, or whenever a newer driver Windows provides information on installing
becomes available. print drivers. To access Windows help,
choose Start>Help. If you have problems
Choose Start> Settings> Printers to display
installing a print driver call the manufacturer.
the Printers information for Windows. Select
Their technicians should be able to help.
the printer in question, then choose
File>Properties.
Testing the Printer

When setting up a printer for the first time, there is a problem printing the test page or
make sure that the test page prints properly. printing from a different graphics program,
There is usually a Print Test Page button the printing problem is unrelated to Chief
available in the Printer Properties dialog Architect. Make sure that the latest printer
for that printer. drivers are installed, then solve the printing
problem for the other programs. Once the
If the test page prints properly, try printing
printer prints properly from the other
from Chief Architect. If there is a printing
graphics programs, it should print in Chief
problem, make sure that you can print from a
Architect.
graphics program such Windows Paint. If
636
General Information
General Information
Printing &
Plotting
Only items which are displayed print, but not Print - Prints the current View or
4
all displayed items do print. The Reference layout sheet to the default printer or
Plan, the camera symbols, and the blue plotter.
border showing the layout sheet do not print.
Print Image - Prints a screen view
5
showing images, textures or backdrops.
File Menu
All printing options are accessed from the Printer Setup - Opens a Windows’
6
File menu. dialog box which allows you to select
and set up the default printer for direct
printing. This printer’s settings are used for
1 the creation of layout sheets.
Managing
2
Files
Printing Direct
The current View can be printed directly by
selecting File> Print. Render Views can be
printed using the File> Print Image option.
Managing
If the printer supports it, scaled Views (Plans,
3 Section/Elevations) can be printed at a
Files
4
5 specified scale across multiple pages.
6 Crosshairs are printed, showing where to
reassemble the pages. Line color in 3D
Views is always black.
Layouts
Managing
New Layout - Creates a new layout
1 Printing from Layout
Files
File based on the current printer
Layout sheets can be created to print
configuration.
traditional working drawings. Layout sheets
Open Layout - Opens an existing can define a border and title block which is
2
layout File. If the current printer does consistent across all sheets of the layout.
Managing
not match the printer that created the file, Multiple views, at different scales, can be
Files
you receive a warning message. sent to each page and organized as desired.
The layout sheets can be printed on the
Send to Layout - If a layout file is
3 media that they were originally created for,
open, this allows you to send the
or printed on smaller media for check plots.
current View to Layout.
No shading is available on Layout sheets, but
Managing
the line color of 3D Views is definable.

Printing
Files
Unlike printing direct, a layout sheet, which

The current View may be printed directly to a is larger than the current paper size, cannot
printer, or first sent to layout and printed be printed at full scale across multiple pages.
from there.
637
Setting up the Printer

Before printing or creating a layout sheet, the When the printer is configured, click OK.
printer or plotter needs to be selected and the
paper size and orientation defined. The
printer driver must be installed correctly and
the printer must be functioning properly.
IMPORTANT: Each driver is unique.

Samples provided are for illustrative
purposes only, and are not an
endorsement of any specific plotter or
printer. Many options available with one
driver may not be available with another.
Printers or plotters which function
perfectly in one version of Windows may
not be supported by the manufacturer in a
different version of Windows.
Choose File>Print Setup from any View to

access the Print Setup dialog. A complete Chief Architect uses the paper size, margin
list of printers and plotters that are currently settings, print quality, and paper orientation
installed on your system displays. Click the from your Windows’ settings.
desired printer or plotter to highlight it, then
Once you create a layout file and the printer
click the Setup button to configure it.
is set, it typically is not be reconfigured for
that file. If you are printing from a View, you
can select a different printer from the Print
dialog before sending the View to print, but it
is usually better if you set up the printer from
the Print Setup dialog.
When you select File> Printer Setup, you When setting up the printer, be sure to
are redefining the default system printer for make careful note of each option. The
all Windows programs. When you return to settings specified define exactly how
other programs the printer is changed. If you Chief prints directly to the printer as well
select a new printer in the Control Panel, as the Layout sheet, in addition to defining
Chief Architect uses the new printer. how the Layout sheet is originally created
(for size and orientation).
Configuring a printer is a Windows operation
and not a Chief Architect function. See your
printer manual for options.
638
Paper Orientation
Paper Orientation
Printing &
Plotting
Most printers Plotters can often have the paper inserted
allow both a into the machine in either of the two
portrait and a orientations. Test your own machine, and
landscape refer to the manual to find out which way to
orientation. position the paper when inserting it in order
Portrait mode is taller than it is wide, and to have the printing results needed.
landscape mode is wider than it is tall.
Create simple printing tests. Always
Landscape orientation is the most common familiarize yourself with your printer or
paper orientation for printing working plotter before the job is due. It may take a
drawings. little time to configure the machine properly
when you first start.
Managing
Files
Layout Facility
File> New Layout is used to create a Layout
file, which is composed of 199 layout sheets
Managing
which match the current printer
Files
configuration. These sheets can be developed
into working drawings, complete with
border, title block, multiple views, etc.
While a layout sheet is open, File> Print is
disabled in the plan file. You must send the
Managing
views to the a layout sheet and then send the
Files
particular layout sheets to the printer.
To print directly from the current view, Save
and Close the Layout file. Printing functions
as normal.
Managing
For more information see “Layout Facility”
Files
on page 649.
Managing
Files
639
Printing Directly from a View
1 2
3
7
8
9
5
4
6
Direct printing can be used with any printer Browse to the correct directory and name the
and any sized paper. To print directly from file. Be sure to give the file a .prn extension.
any Plan, Perspective Section/Elevation or
The Print Range is not available, since this
Overview, choose File>Print. The Print
option is only available from a Layout file.
dialog opens.
Current Screen or Entire Plan/
4
Render Views can only be printed with the View - Select one of the options to
File> Print Image command. define what is printed.
Current Screen prints only the portion of
Name - Choose a printer.
1 the entire View showing on screen.
Properties - Click Properties to
2 Entire Plan/View prints the complete
verify that the printer is configured
view as if you used the Fill Screen command
correctly. The paper size, orientation, and
even if you are currently zoomed in on a
other settings are accessed here.
portion of the view.
Print to file - Select the check box to
3 Scaling - Choose the scaling.
send the print to a file for remote 5
printing. When you click OK, you will be Full Page (no scale) prints the
prompted to give the print file a name. selected portion on the page with no scale
640
Printing Directly from a View
applied. If you define a percentage less than If Use Outline Printing is selected when
Printing &
100, only a portion of the printable area is printing to a regular printer, only the outlines
Plotting
used. If you select Full Page (no scale) and of text items and dimension numbers print.
Current Screen you cannot adjust the
If you are using a pen plotter you may be
percentage.
unable to print solid filled True Type fonts
To Scale -Use these fields to define the (such as Arial, etc.).
exact scale at which the image prints.
If you are having difficulty printing fonts on
Chief Architect can works to a precision of your pen plotter, use a single pixel plotter
1/16th of an inch. If you want to define a font such as Modern.
scale of 3/32” = 1’-0” you need to
specify
3/16” = 2’0”.
Managing
Height/Width Scaling - You can check
6
Files
theaccuracyofyourprinteddocumentswith
a scale. If your scaled documents are not
correct you can fine tune or calibrate the
printer with these adjustments.
Managing
Check printer calibration by printing a four
foot square at 1/4” = 1’-0” and measuring the
Files
print to see if it measures out exactly 1"
square. Adjust the ratio of height and width if
needed. This is a common fix with a dot
matrix printer, where the print may not
Managing
be proportional.
Files
Copies - Define the number of copies
7
(if available).
Color - Select this check box to print in
8
color or grayscale. (If your printer is black
Managing
and white the option is Shaded.) Clear the
check box if you want all lines and text to be
Files
black. If you are using solid fills, any
fill color will print as black also. This
option is available from layout files as
well.
Managing
Use Outline Printing - Select the check

9
Files
box to have True Type text and dimension

numbers drawn as outlines.
641
Printing from Layout
2
6
3
7
8
4 9
Name - The printer must be defined Print Range - Define range of pages
1 3
before a layout sheet is created. Once it to print.
is created, the layout is linked to the printer.
Scaling - Define the scaling method.
If you attempt to open the layout file when a 4
different printer is set as the default, you get Full Page (no scale), 100% Fits
a warning. The warning allows you to the layout sheet to the currently defined
Continue or to Scale Layout to Fit Printer. paper size. The architectural scales will not
(See “Changing Printer from Layout” be accurate.
below.)
Print to scale - Prints the image at the
Print to file - Select the check box to architectural scales you specified for each
2
send the print to a file. This is used for layout window.
remote printing. Give the file a .prn
Height Scaling/ Width Scaling -
extension. 5
Enter values to calibrate the printer if
642
Changing Printer from Layout
printed scale does not match measured scale Use Outline Printing - Select the
8
Printing &
on the paper. check box to have True Type text and
Plotting
dimension numbers drawn as outlines.
This is a common fix with a dot matrix
If Use Outline Printing is selected when
printer, where the print may not be
proportional. This is easily checked by
printing to a regular printer, the outlines of
printing a four foot square at 1/4” = 1’-0” text items and dimension numbers print.
and measuring the print to see if it
If you are using a pen plotter you may be
measures out exactly 1" square. If it does
not, you can use the Height Scaling and
unable to print solid filled True Type fonts
the Width Scaling to adjust it until the print (such as Arial, etc.).
scales accurately.
If you are having difficulty printing fonts on
your pen plotter, use a single pixel plotter
Copies - Enter the number of copies. font such as Modern.
6
Managing
Color - Select the check box to print in
7 9 Select Entire Plan or Current
Files
Color or shades of gray. Clear the Color Screen.
check box if you want all lines and text to be
black. White fills print black. Current Screen prints the view displayed on
screen, including white space around the
If printing to a black & white printer, this plan.
Managing
option is Shaded. Check Shaded to print
Entire Plan/View - Prints the complete view
Files
colors in gray scale.
as if you used the Fill Screen command even
if you are zoomed in on a portion.
Managing
Changing Printer from Layout
Files
When you create a Layout file, it is created you to print check plots on a different size of
based on the default printer. If you are trying paper. The drawing rescales proportionally
to print the final documents at the correct to fit the sheet.
scale, make sure that the printer is configured
If you intend to print final plots, make sure
properly before opening the layout file.
Managing
the proper printer/plotter is configured before
If you attempt to open a Layout file when a opening the Layout file.
Files
different printer is set as default, you get a
warning. The warning allows you to
Continue or to Scale Layout to Fit Printer.
Select Scale Layout to Fit Printer only
Managing
if you wish to reset the paper size for the

Files
final prints.
Select Continue to open the Layout file
without changing the paper size, allowing
643
Print Image
Any view can be printed using the File> The Print Image dialog is identical to the
Print Image command. This is the only way Print dialog, but the printing process is
to print a Render View. different. Print Image prints individual pixels
as opposed to vectors.
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are Plan Views, Wall Elevations, Section/
available. Elevations Views, and CAD Detail windows
can print to scale. Imperial scales are
Select Full Page to print, either the Entire
typically noted as inches per foot. You can
Plan/View or the Current Screen, as large as
use a fraction with a denominator less than or
possible on the page. This does not print at
equal to 16. 1/16, 1/8/ 1/4, 1/2, and 3/4 are
an accurate scale. It is the only option
some typical scales. The second edit box
allowed when printing a Perspective or Over
usually contains a “1”, for one foot. The
View. Full Page is normally set to 100%.
following example:
If Full Page and Entire Plan/View are
selected, a percent value is definable. This
percent defines how much of the printed
indicates ¼ inch to one foot scaling.
page to fill. It is a percentage the sheet
dimensions. A value of 50% would cause the Since Chief Architect cannot work in units
print to be 50% of the height and 50% of the less than 1/16th, 32 cannot be used as a
width of the paper. If printing to an 8 ½ x 11 denominator. To get 3/32” = 1’-0”, you must
page, and assuming a total of 1" non- enter 3/16” = 2’-0”. Using this method, any
printable border in each direction, 100% scale is possible.
would print 7 ½” x 10", and Full Page 50%
Large scales may also be used for property
would print 3 ¾” x 5". (Each printer may
layouts, such as 1 inch = 50 feet.
vary slightly depending on its own printing
parameters.)
Metric Scales
There are certain items which are not Only one edit box is provided for metric
recognized when sizing the view to fill the scaling. To get 1 cm = 1 meter scaling, enter
page (such as markers, electrical 100 in the mm box.
connections, etc.) which can be cut off when
printing at 100%. This situation can be When printing the Plan View of an entire
house at 1/4” scale on to 8 1/2” x 11" paper,
avoided by clicking Fill Window or F6 and
more than one sheet may be required. Chief
noting if any items are cut off by the edges of
can tile these sheets if your printer driver
the window. If so, reduce the percentage
supports printing across multiple pages.
slightly so that everything prints.
644
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Printing &
Plotting
Recommendation to switch paper orientation. Fewest number of pages.
When printing directly from a Plan or scale. If fewer pages can be used by
Elevation/Section View, it is possible to print changing the paper orientation, the system
to a scale which does not fit the image on one prompts you to change orientation.
page. If your printer driver supports it, Chief
If you are zoomed out, and Current Screen is
Architect can print the image on multiple
selected, any white space around the plan is
sheets to make up the entire image. When
Managing
calculated for printing. This may force
this happens, some overlap occurs on each
multiple sheets when the actual plan would
Files
page to allow for a smooth tiling of the
print to a single sheet if Entire Plan/View
pages. Small crosshairs also print on each
were selected.
sheet to help reassemble the printed view.
You cannot print a layout sheet to multiple
If multiple sheets are necessary, the dialog
pages.
Managing
states how many sheets are necessary at that
Files
Printing Color or Black and White
The Print dialog contains a check box for exception to this is a pen plotter, which never
Color. If Color is checked, the view prints in prints the 3D shading. If Color is unchecked
Managing
color on a color printer, or in grayscale for a when printing a 3D View all lines print as
Files
black and white printer. black, and no 3D shading prints.
If a 3D View is being printed, the shading
prints in addition to the delineation lines. The
Managing
Line Weights
Files
Line weight is specified by the program in Defining Line Weight
number of pixels. Pixels are expressed as Line weight is specified in pixels. Pixel size
dots by printers, as in dots per inch (dpi). 300 varies from printer to printer. You can
dpi, 600 dpi, and 1200 dpi printers all print specify a pixel width from 1 to 15. The
Managing
different sized pixels. method for changing the line weight of items
Files
To see how your printer prints line weights, is dependent on the type of View.
draw 10 lines, each with a different line 1. When printing a Plan View, all line
weight and see how they print. weights are defined by Layer, unless an
645
object has a specified line weight in the For more information see “Editing
specification. Walls have their line Layout” on page 665.
weight defined in the Wall 3. CAD item line weights are defined by
Specification dialog. Layer in the Layers dialog for each
2. When 3D Views are sent to Layout, Section/Elevation View, unless the CAD
there is a separate line weight for pattern item is defined individually.
lines, and a line weight for object lines.
3D View Line Weights
1
Line weight - Specify the line weight defined with different line weights. To
1
for all lines defining the edges of 3D modify individual lines, the 3D View must
items. This is a global setting for all edges. first be sent to layout. To edit a line in the
Individual lines, other than CAD lines Layout select Edit> Edit Layout, and then
superimposed on the image, cannot be select the line to be modified.
Printing to a File
If you do not own a plotter you may print to a 3. Install the drivers for that plotter on your
file, send the file to a service bureau via computer and configure it as a printer in
email or disk, and have prints made. The the Control Panel. Change the port to be
process is quite simple. File instead of sending the information
to a parallel or serial port.
1. Find out the exact make and model of
the plotter which is to be used to print 4. Test to make sure that everything is con-
your drawings. figured properly and functioning. Create
print files of a simple plan and send
2. Get the current drivers for the specific
them to the service bureau for printing.
plotter and your version of Windows.
Once everything is configured properly,
remote printing is a straightforward process.
646
Printing to a File
Remote printing is usually done from layout. 5. The print file is created with the name
Printing &
The following instructions are based on that you specified in the directory you
Plotting
assumption. Remote printing from a view defined.
works exactly the same way.
1. Before opening the layout, choose
File>Print Setup. Select the remote
plotter. Make sure all properties such as
paper size, paper orientation, etc. are
properly defined.
2. Open the layout file. If the layout was
properly created for that plotter, and if
the plotter was configured before open-
ing the layout, there will be no Layout
Managing
error message.
Files
If the Error message appears, choose 6. Repeat the process starting at step 3, for
Continue to open the layout. Then find each layout sheet, until you have created
out whether the message occurred a print file for each sheet. Each sheet
because the printer was not set correctly must have a unique name. If you use the
Managing
or the layout was created for different same name twice, one file is overwrit-
Files
printer settings. Fix the problem, and try
ten.
again.
7. After all the print files have been created
3. Go to the first layout page to be printed. copy the files to a disk.
Choose File>Print. In the Print dialog 8. Give the service bureau your disk and
Managing
Make sure that Print to File is checked have them plot your files.
Files
and Copies set to 1. If there is any prob-
lem printing more than one page at a
time, select Current Page under Page
Range. Scaling should be Print to Scale.
Entire Plan/View should also be
Managing
selected. Click OK.
Files
4. The Print to File dialog opens. Give the
print file a name making sure to add the
.prn extension. The program does not
automatically add this. Take careful note
of the name and the directory location
Managing
where the file is to be saved. Click OK.

Files
647
Important Notes about Printing to a Remote Plotter

• You must be familiar with MS/DOS • If the plotter is attached through a net-
commands to send a plot file to your work system, there may be problems
plotter. sending the file to the plotter. Try to plot
• In DOS, enter copy filename.prn lpt1 /b, from the computer which is hooked
to send a plot file to the printer. File- directly to the plotter.
name.prn is the name or your plot file. • If you cannot get the drivers for a plot-
lpt1 is the printer port for your current ter, try using the driver for the HP
printer. Copy and /B are DOS com- 7585B. This is a single sheet, 8-pen, E-
mands that you need to include when size plotter that accepts HPGL plot data.
sending a file to a remote printer. Many plotters can plot the drawings
• Learn the method by practicing the tech- generated for this plotter. It will, how-
nique with a printer you own. Instead of ever, have all the normal limitations of a
printing directly to that printer, practice pen plotter even if the actual machine is
printing to a file and copying that file to an Ink Jet plotter.
the port for the printer. When you under- • If the printer uses a serial port, other
stand the process itself, it is easy to switches need to be set. These are spe-
apply it for large plots. cific to the printer, so check your printer
• Always run tests on the plotter before documentation or call the manufacturer.
you need the final prints. This allows
you to perfect the technique.
648
Chapter 37:
Layout Facility
Facility
Layout
General Information
The Chief Architect Layout facility can be Text and CAD items can be added to layout
used to easily create large format plot sheets sheets. They are independent of the views on
for working drawings. Each Layout file the sheet. Any view or CAD item can be
contains up to 200 layout pages, and each moved from one layout page to another.
page may contain several different views, Views cannot be copied.
details, etc.
The display of each view on a layout sheet is
When you are drawing in a Layout file, you determined individually. Each view has a
are drawing in real world dimensions. corresponding Layers or Show Items dialog
Managing
Everything drawn on layout page zero prints that can be specified. Layer Sets can be used
Files
on pages 1-199. Page zero can be used to to create Layout views that are used often.
create title blocks and borders.
Any line generated in a 3D View can be
The printable area of the selected paper is the edited or deleted after the view is sent to
limit of your drawing area. It is represented layout. Changes to line in Layout do not
by a blue border in the layout file. The affect the model but changes in the model are
Managing
available paper size is specified by the updated to the Layout file. In addition to
Files
printer and the paper selection. editing lines, the line Weight, Color and
Style can all be defined individually or
If a large size printer or plotter has been
globally in the Layout file.
chosen for the layout, it is still possible to
print test plots to a smaller printer. This Note: The term printer or plotter is used
Managing
allows you to test the layout and interchangeably.
Facility
Layout
Files
organization, and do any final checks before
IMPORTANT: Screen captures are provided
printing to the larger sizes.
for illustrative purposes only, and are not an
Any view can be sent to layout. All views endorsement of any specific plotter or
can be scaled on the layout sheet except for printer. Many options available with one
Perspectives and Overviews. Perspective driver may not be available with another.
Libraries
Symbol
views and Overviews can be resized for Printers or plotters which function in one
layout but they cannot be defined by a version of Windows may not be supported by
specific scale. the manufacturer in a different version of
Windows.
649
Preparing for Layout

When a Layout file is created, the printable This way you can specify that plotter as
area and orientation is based on the current default and format your Layout file correctly.
printer configuration. The Layout file can be You can then print to a file and send the
rescaled later if you chose to use a different service the file(s) to print your working
printer, but it saves a lot of time if you set drawings.
your default Windows printer, including
When using an outside service it is a good
paper size and orientation before you select
idea to run printing tests to make sure that
File> New Layout from the menu.
you understand the principles of printing to a
If you are going to use a printing service to file, and that all of the hardware is
do large format plots, make sure that you functioning properly.
install the drivers for the plotter they use.
Printer Setup
When you install print drivers on your dialog opens. This printer is now specified as
computer, you can then use that printer as the default printer for all Windows programs.
your Windows default printer whether or not
the printer is physically present. If the printer
is not present you have to print to a file but
you can assign the correct paper size.
To select the printer for the new Layout file
choose File>Printer Setup. The Windows
Printer Setup dialog opens. Select the
desired printer from the list of installed
printers. Highlight the printer you wish to
use and click Setup. The Print driver
Define the Paper Size and Paper Orien-

tation. Do not worry about margins, the
program only allows you to use the entire
printable area based on the printer settings
and the paper size.
650
Creating a Layout File
When the printer has been configured the Layout file, a blue box displays that
correctly, click OK until you are back at the represents these settings.
Chief Architect window. When you create
Creating a Layout File

Choose File> New Layout to create a blank screen that shows the printing area of the
Layout file. A Layout file is created with the specified plotter.
Facility
Layout
name untitled.la1. The Layout file is
Select File> Save to save the Layout file. It
opened at page one.
is best to save the file in a directory that
Each Layout file has 200 blank layout sheets contains the plan files and Views that are
created. Each sheet has a blue border on the printed on the sheets.
The Current Page

When a Layout file is first created, the cur- at a time, click the Page Up button. (You
rent page is page one. The current page is can also choose Tools> Page Down and
noted at the center of the Layout Page Tools> Page Up to accomplish the same
Managing
buttons. These buttons look like the Floor thing.)
Files
level control or the CAD layer control, but
If you are scrolling one or two pages this
in a Layout file they control and display the
may be the fastest way to navigate but if you
current page.
have many pages to scroll through, Click the
The current layout page is the recipient of number between the arrows. The Go to
Managing
any View sent to layout. If sent to the wrong Layout Page dialog opens. Enter the page
number and click OK. The current page
Files
page, a View may be moved from one page
to another. updates.
To toggle between layout pages click the You cannot print the current page if it is
arrows on either side of the Layout Page blank. Information on page zero which
button. To move down one page, click the displays does not count, you must draw
Managing
Page Down button. To move up one page something on it, or have a view window on
Files
the page in order for it to print.
Layout Page Zero

Managing
Layout page zero is unique. Anything on pages 1-199 without having to recreate them
Files
page zero displays and prints on layout pages for each page. Do not add anything to page
1-199. This is allows you to create title zero unless it is to be shared by all layout
blocks and borders that are used by layout pages.
651
All changes to items on page zero must be After making changes to layout page zero, be
made while page zero is the current page. sure you move to a different page before
When page zero is current, the Layout Page sending views to the layout.
button looks like .
CAD and Text in Layout

1. CAD items and text may be added to group and click the Open
any layout page. These are attached to Item button. The Edit CAD Item dia-
the layout page itself, not to any specific log opens. Click the Style button to edit
view contained on the page. the selected items.
2. CAD items are not drawn on layers in a 7. Change the number in the Page: field to
Layout file. The layout facility links move the selected CAD item to another
every CAD or Text item to the layout layout page.
page number.
8. To move text items to a different layout
3. When adding text, size the text by the page, open the Text Entry dialog
height you want it to appear, not at some change the number in the Page field on
scaled dimension. the Attributes tab.
4. Characteristics such as color and line 9. Text does not always print exactly as it
weight are defined by item. appears on screen. One way to check the
5. Text and CAD items drawn on a layout layout of text is to zoom in on the text.
page, are black, with a line weight of 1. This gives a more accurate picture of
how it prints.
6. To change the characteristics of CAD
items, select them individually or as a
Testing the Print Area

To familiarize yourself with a printer, it is a each printer handles margins in a different
good idea to print a test page. Click the Page way, it is best to find out how the blue border
Down or Page Up button of the Layout coincides with what prints on the paper.
Page control until it reads , To test this, draw a CAD box so that each
indicating that the current layout page is now edge of the box overlays one of the blue
page 1. edges.
The blue border represents the edge of the
printable area for the specified printer. Since
652
Creating Master Layout Files
After laying out the CAD box, make some

other mark on the page to define one specific
edge.
Facility
Layout
Managing
Files
To print the test page select File> Print from not print, move that edge inside the blue
the pull down menu. Make sure that you border. If one of the lines printed at different
select the Full Page (no scale) option. distances from the paper edge, adjust it to
Compare the printed results to what was create a uniform border when printed.
shown on the screen. If one of the lines did
Managing
Files
Creating Master Layout Files
Layout files are independent of plan files but Notes, Specification, and General Conditions
are linked to specific printers and paper they can all be saved in your Master Layout
sizes. To save production time it is a good files on other pages.
Managing
idea to test the printable areas for all printers
Files
and paper sizes that you use and create Mas-
ter Layout files for each one. These
Layout files can then be opened and saved
for each project that you are working on.
Managing
The border and title block information from

Files
your master are on layout page zero and

repeat on all pages. If you normally use other
pages in certain ways for items like General
653
Creating Borders
Once you have established the print area of Drawing borders may be simplified by
the layout sheet, you can lay out the borders making certain changes in the Preferences
of a Layout file on sheet zero using the CAD dialog. To access the dialog, double-click the
tools. You can use a combination of filleted Select Items button or choose Edit>Pref-
CAD lines, rectangles and CAD boxes to erences. Select the CAD panel and do the
create a border. Thicker borders can be following:
created by defining the color, style, and/or
line weight for the CAD items.
2
3
1 Check Concentric to simplify Double-Line Borders

making double line borders. The copy To create a double line border, make sure that
is made at the same distance from all edges. Concentric is checked in Preferences and
Auto Snap is unchecked. Select a closed
2 Uncheck Auto Snap so that one CAD polyline and click the Copy button. Grab a
item can be moved near another
without snapping onto it. corner handle and drag toward the center.
Release the mouse button when the copy is at
Positioning Unit - Define a unit for
3 the desired distance from the original.
all CAD items to snap to when created
or moved. If an exact distance is desired, make sure that
value is entered in the Jump field on the
CAD panel of the Preferences dialog before
making the copy.
654
Using Master Layout Files
Filleted Borders Title Block

To fillet the corners of the border: Lay out the title block using CAD boxes,
lines and text on layout page zero. Create
1. Draw a rectangle.
only those items which should display on
2. Set the Fillet radius by double-click- every layout page. Create areas for page
ing the Fillet tool on the Edit toolbar specific information such as the sheet
and setting the value desired value in the number which can be filled in on each
Chamfer/Fillet dialog. individual layout page.
Facility
Layout
3. Select one edge of the rectangle, click If you want to add a company logo, import it
the Fillet tool on the Edit toolbar and as a bitmap into a CAD detail, and then send
then select an adjacent edge. the CAD detail to the Layout file.
4. The fillet will be created. Repeat step 3 When the border and title block are set up as
with the other sides until you have a desired, move to page one by clicking the
rectangle with four filleted corners.
Page Up side of the Layout Page
5. Select one side of the rectangle and drag control, until the button reads . Then
the edge to the extents of the printable save and close the file.
area.
6. Repeat step 5 with each of the other
Managing
sides until you have a rectangular border
Files
the size you want.
Using Master Layout Files
Managing
In order to use a master Layout file and The Save As command makes a copy of the
preserve its contents and configuration, you original then closes the original file, leaving
Files
must make a copy of it for a particular job. the copy open and ready for use. Any
Open the master Layout file, by selecting changes made in the copy have no effect on
File>Open Layout from the menu. Go to the the original.
directory where the master was saved, find
Managing
the master Layout file, select it, and click
OK.
Files
Immediately do a File>Save As, saving the
master to the project directory. If the layout
is to be used for the Johnson residence, the
master might be saved as Johnson.la1.
Managing
Files
Important: Be sure to save the layout

sheet in the same directory as its related
plan files.
655
Opening Layout Files

Select File> Open Layout to open an When a Layout file is open it appears at the
existing Layout file. Browse to the proper bottom of the Window menu as an open
directory and select the Layout file to open. view.
Only one Layout file can be open at a time.
Sending Views to Layout

Layout files can contain and print When the View is displayed as desired,
information from many source files. When choose File>Send to Layout. The Send to
you send a view to layout, the view is linked Layout dialog opens. It is similar to the
to the Layout file. Once a drawing is linked Print dialog. You are, in effect printing the
to a Layout file, do not change its path name. View to the current layout page rather than to
If the path name is changed, you need to re-- the printer. The options vary in the dialog
establish the link within the Layout file for depending on the type of View being sent to
the drawing to appear in layout. Layout.
Before sending a view to layout, make sure When you have selected the desired options
the correct Layout file is open and you are on in the Send to Layout dialog click OK to
the correct layout page. If you send a view to send the view to the current page. You must
the wrong Layout file the view must be toggle to or activate the layout to see the
deleted. If you send the view to the wrong change. Click Show Layout or choose the
layout page the view can be moved to layout from the list at the bottom of the Win-
another page within the same file. dow menu, or choose 3D>Show Layout.
With the Layout file open, activate the view The current layout page contains the view
to send to layout. Set up the view so that the you just sent, normally in the middle of the
items which should be seen are displayed, page. It is at the scale you defined in the
and the items which should not be seen for Send to Layout dialog.
this view are suppressed. Once in a layout
sheet you can change all of the layer To send other views to layout, repeat this
properties, but you cannot control which process. If you need to, change the current
items display in a 3D View. If you have page for the new view. This process is the
Layer settings that you repeat often, define same regardless of the view being sent to
Layer Sets for your Layout files. (For more layout.
information, see see “Layer Sets” on page
150.)
656
Plan Views and CAD Details
Facility
Layout
3
2
1 The default printer displays, but is program only allows scales with a
grayed out. If you print from the layout, denominator equal to or less than 16. To get
this is the printer which is used. more unusual scales, you may need to type in
a fractional equivalent. For example:
2 Select Current Screen or Entire
Plan/View. 1/32”=1’-0” should be entered as 1/16”=2’-
Managing
0”
Current Screen Sends only what is shown
Files
on the screen to the layout page. 3/32”=1’-0” should be entered as 3/16”=2’-
0”.
Entire Plan/View Sends whatever would
be visible if the Window> Fill Window is
selected or if the F6 button is pushed.
Managing
3 Scaling - There are two ways to scale a
Files
view being sent to layout. The scale can
easily be redefined in the Layout file.
Full Page (no scale) sends the view to
the layout page without a specific scale. The
Managing
current screen appears in the layout view.
Define the percentage of the sheet that the
Files
view occupies. It can be resized on the layout
sheet.
Architectural scales - Define at what
scale the objects are printed.
Managing
Files
In most cases you specify an actual scale for

Plan Views, CAD Details, and
Section/Elevations. A typical scale is ¼”=1’-
0”. ¼”=1’-0” is the same as 1" = 4’. The
657
Section/Elevation Views
2
3
1
4
Suppress Line Merge - Select the
1 Section/Elevation views can be sent to 4
layout at an architectural scale or check box to prevent the calculation of
at Full Page (no scale). single lines from many. Horizontal and verti-
cal lines are still merged because that is very
Line weight refers to the printing line
2 fast.
weight of the lines from the 3D
If Suppress Line Merge is not selected
elevation. Any CAD lines or dimensions
and a 3D view is being sent to layout, the
added to the original view are not affected by
program looks for any lines which are
this. This value may be changed within the
superimposed or in line with each other and
view on the layout sheet itself, or you can
it merges them so that the layout has only
define the line weights of individual lines in
one line defining a specified plane rather
a layout view.
than several lines. This makes the final view
3 Select Current Screen or Entire on the layout easier to edit if necessary, but it
Plan/View. does slow down the process of sending 3D
Views containing non-vertical or horizontal
Current Screen - Sends only what is
lines to layout.
shown on the screen to the layout page.
Entire Plan/View - Sends whatever would When line merging is being calculated,
be visible if the Window> Fill Window is the command box of Chief displays the
selected or if the F6 button is pushed. word Splice followed by two numbers.
The first number indicates how far along
the calculation is, and the second number
indicates the goal. When the two numbers
are equal the function is finished.
658
Perspective and Overviews
Facility
Layout
2
1 3
4
Suppress line merge - Select the
1 Perspective views and Overviews may 4
only be sent to layout at Full Page check box to prevent the merge
(no scale). These views may be resized in calculations for overlapping lines.
Layout. When a 3D View is sent to layout, the
program looks for line segments which are in
If you need an exterior elevation view, use
Managing
line (colinear) with each other and it merges
the Cross Section/Elevation tool to them. When merged, the layout line is made
Files
create the view since you will be able to up of only one line segment rather than
send it to layout at a specific scale. Do not
several colinear or overlapping line
use the Full Overview tool and turn segments. For more information see
the view to an elevation using the View “Section/Elevation Views” on page 658.
Angle
Managing
tool, since this view (even
thought it appears to be an elevation) is
Files
not scalable. Another benefit to
generating a Cross Section/Elevation
View is that you can use the CAD tools
to edit it. You cannot do this in any view
created using Full Overview.
Managing
Files
Line weight defines the printing line
2
weight for edge definition lines.
3 In camera views and overviews, only

the Current Screen may be sent to
Managing
layout. Any lines or information beyond the

Files
current screen are not sent to layout.
659
Displaying View Borders

Options>Show Items or click the Show
Items button. The Show Items dialog for
borders opens.
1
1 Clear the Borders check box to have
the borders no longer display
When you click OK, every border in the
Layout file disappears. These borders still
Every view on a layout page has a border. exist, but are invisible. Select Options>
The border of any view sent to layout prints Show Items and check Borders to have
if it displays on screen. If borders are turned borders display again.
off they do not print.
It is easier to leave borders displayed until
To turn off the borders, first make sure just before you are ready to print.
nothing is selected. Then choose
Selecting Layout Views

To select a Layout view, click on its border in to rotate the view. The box, and the image
Select Items mode, (or right-click on it in rotate.
any mode). This is true even if the borders
are not displayed. When a view is selected Deleting Views
red handles appear. There is a handle at the To delete a view select it, then click Delete
centers of all four sides, at all four corners, in button or the Del key on the keyboard.
the center of the view, and if the view is at a
defined scale there is a triangular handle
outside of the border that can be used to
Copying Views
rotate the view. You cannot copy a view by selecting the
view border in layout and copying it.
Moving Layout Views If multiple copies of a view are needed, send
To reposition the view on the layout page, the view to layout as many times as
select it, grab the center Move handle and necessary. Each view behaves independently.
drag it into position. The box and the image
relocate. Reactivating Views
After a plan, CAD Detail, elevation or cross
Rotate Scaled Views section has been sent to layout, you must
A Plan or CAD detail view has a triangular activate the Layout file to see it. When you
rotate handle when selected. Drag from this are viewing a layout sheet, double-click
660
Moving Items and Views to a Different Layout Page
inside the view on the layout sheet while in

Select Items mode to display the view
from which it originated.
Activate the CAD Select Items mode,

then double-click in the middle of any Plan
View, cross section, elevation, or CAD
Detail which has been sent to the layout.
Facility
Layout
This immediately returns you to that
specific view.
Moving Items and Views to a Different Layout Page
Managing
Files
2
Managing
Files
1
Managing
2 Change the Page number in the Files
To move a view from one layout page to
another select the view border and click the specified box. Click OK until you are
Open Item button. The Edit CAD Item back at the layout sheet. The view is updated
Managing
dialog opens. to the new page.

Files
1 Click the Style button in the lower

left.
661
Resizing Views
Any layout view can be resized. Resizing the If you drag a corner handle in or out, the
border has different effects depending on the border and the image resize proportionally.
type of view and how you resize it. This is how you make the image larger or
smaller.
Scaled views - Scaled views retain their
scale regardless of how you resize the border. If you drag a handle on one of the sides in or
You can resize the border proportionally out, the image does not change size, but the
from a corner handle or select one of the border does. If you make the border smaller,
handles on an edge to change the size in one it may crop the image. If you make it larger,
direction only. Make the border smaller and you may show more of the image.
the image may be cropped.
Use these two methods to customize your
If the view was sent to layout at Full Page layout page.
(not scale) the way you resize the border
determines what happens.
Rescaling Views
2 Select this option to specify a scale for
the image. When the scale is changed,
the layout picture resizes accordingly.
1 Specify a Scale
2 In most cases you want to specify an actual
scale for Plan Views, CAD Details, and
Plan Views, Section/Elevations, Wall Section/Elevations. A typical scale is ¼”=1’-
Elevations and CAD details can be rescaled 0”. ¼”=1’-0” is the same as 1" = 4’. The
on the layout page. To change the scale of the program allows scales with a denominator
image, select the border, and click the equal to or less than 16. To get more unusual
Rescale button in the Edit toolbar. The scales, you may need to type in a fractional
Change Scale dialog opens. equivalent.
1 Choose No Scale to remove any

For example:
specific scale factor from being
1/32”=1’-0” should be entered as
associated with the selected view.
1/16”=2’-0”;
3/32”=1’-0” should be entered as
3/16”=2’-0”.
662
Changing the Display of Layout Views
Changing the Display of Layout Views

Every view sent to the layout displays the sections and CAD Details may be changed in
same items which were visible when the layout.
view was sent to the layout. After the view
Select a CAD Detail or elevation view on the
has been sent to layout, the method of
changing the display of different items layout. Click the Open Item button to
depends on the type of view. display the Show Items dialog. This allows
Facility
Layout
CAD layers, as well as text and dimension
lines to be turned on or off locally for the
Plan Views
layout picture. It also allows you to set the
Plan Views are manipulated with the Layers
line weight and color. Layers which cannot
dialog.
be changed are grayed out.
To change the items displayed in a Plan View
which has been sent to layout, select the 3D Items in any 3D View
border and choose Options> Show Items Changing the display of 3D items from any
from the pull down menu or click the Show 3D View (camera, elevation, cross section or
Items button. The Layers dialog opens. overview) needs to be done in the original
Modify which Architectural, System and view itself, not in the layout.
Managing
User layers are set to display by checking or
unchecking the Disp column. You can also After you have changed the display in the
Files
change the color, line weight and line style original view, update the 3D View to layout
for any of the architectural layers. Click OK in one of two ways:
to have that view updated. 1. If it is an elevation or cross section,
close the original view and choose to
Managing
System and User Layers update that view to the layout.
Files
The display of any CAD items on System or 2. If it is a perspective or overview, delete
User layers can be turned on or off as the incorrect copy from the layout and
described above. It is different when you send a new copy to the layout, with all
change the Color, Line Style or Line Weight the 3D items displayed as desired.
of any System or User layer. You are
Managing
changing Layer settings in the original plan
Files
file. All other views of all floors are changed.
If you change the color of Roof Planes for a
layout view of the second floor, the color is
changed for all floors and all views.
Managing
CAD Items in Elevations &

Files
CAD Details
Display of CAD items, text items and
dimensions which were created in cross
663
Keeping Layout Views Current

Plan Views and CAD Details individual lines within these views. Neither
Everything in Plan View and in a CAD CAD nor text can be added.
Detail window is under your control – When these views are sent to layout, a line-
including the item colors and line widths. for-line copy of the view gets sent to layout,
Because of this, there is a 100% correlation but those lines no longer represent 3D
between these views and each copy sent to objects. There is no longer any link to the
layout. All editing changes must be make in view. Every line in that view in layout is
the original plan itself. Any editing changes
editable using Edit Layout . Changes
made in the original plan or CAD Detail
made in layout have no effect on the 3D
views are automatically reflected on every
model. In addition, any subsequent changes
copy already sent to layout.
made to the 3D model have no effect on any
In each Plan View sent to layout, each camera view or overview in layout. Unlike
Architectural layer may be set to display in copies of the Plan View which are
that view or not. In addition, each dynamically linked and are always up-to-
architectural layer may also be defined with a date, copies of overviews or camera views
unique color, line weight and line style. This are like a snapshot taken at a specific time
does not affect the original view. from a specific location. Any changes made
later do not show on that snapshot. To update
CAD layers from Plan View and CAD
these views on the layout sheets, delete the
Details should have only the display settings
old view and send a new view.
changed, since changes to CAD layer color,
line weight or line style within any view on
layout also changes the original Plan View.
Cross Sections & Elevations
Cross section and elevation views have
To change the plan while in layout, double- certain updating characteristics similar to
click inside the borders of that view while in both Plan Views and to camera and
Select Items mode. This opens the plan overviews. Since cross section and
file where any editing can be done. Any elevations can have CAD added, the CAD on
changes are automatically reflected on each the original cross section or elevation is
layout copy. directly linked to the layout copy, and the
layout copy of the cross section and elevation
Perspectives and Overviews views are automatically kept current with
You cannot draw lines, text, or anything else any CAD changes.
in a Perspective View or Overview. All the These changes to CAD items must be made
lines defining these views are generated in the original Section/Elevation View. You
automatically. Although the view angle and cannot make them in the layout copy.
the size, shape and position of most items
can be manipulated, there is no editing of Like Plan Views sent to layout, double-
clicking inside a Section/Elevation View on
664
Editing Layout
the layout while in Select Items mode 1 If no changes have been made to the 3D
activates the original view, allowing model since the last time that view was
modifications to both the model or to CAD either sent or updated to layout, choose NO.
items. Any changes using CAD show on the layout
page.
Like camera views and overviews, when
Section/Elevation Views are first generated, 2 If, however, the view of the 3D model
every line in the view represents an edge itself has changed (a window or door
Facility
changed, the display of some type of 3D item
Layout
within the model, and you have no further
control over these specific lines. These lines changed using Show Items, etc.) and you
cannot be changed in the original view either want the changes to be reflected on the
by line color or by line weight. Instead, the layout picture, choose OK to have the picture
copies of these lines in the layout are editable updated. You do not have to update a layout
via Edit Layout . picture every time its view changes. If you
wish, wait until later and update it all at once.
Updating Sections/Elevations When the picture is updated, the original
If an elevation or cross section has been sent picture on the layout is replaced by a new
to layout, and if that camera is activated copy, so any changes made to the original
(whether by double-clicking the view in picture using Edit Layout are lost. For this
Managing
layout or by activating the camera from the reason, changes to any 3D Views on the
Files
plan itself) while the layout sheet is open, the layout using Edit Layout should be made
act of closing that elevation or cross section after the model is finalized.
view (even if no changes have been made)
opens the following dialog:
Managing
Files
1
2
Managing
Files
Editing Layout
Any 3D View sent to layout can have View. This feature is often used to delete
individual lines modified and added in the extraneous lines that can appear in a layout
Layout file. These changes have no effect on picture. More extensive use allows you to
Managing
the actual 3D model itself. change the entire appearance of an

Files
Section/Elevation or Overview.
In Edit Layout mode you can draw, move,
delete and change the properties of lines in a
Section/Elevation, Overview, or Perspective
665
Adding New Layout Lines individual lines. Hold the Shift key and click
Add line in a layout view by clicking the on selected lines to subtract them from the
Edit Layout button and dragging a new selection set.
line. Once drawn, this line can be edited like Before any lines are selected you can press
any other layout line and will stay in relation
and hold the Shift key and drag a rectangular
to the view or image that it was drawn in.
marquee to group select many lines.
Selecting Layout Lines Deleting Layout Lines

CAD lines sent to layout cannot be edited
Once the lines are selected you can click the
with the Edit Layout tool. Lines generated
by the program to draw 3D Views can be Delete button or press the Del key on the
edited. keyboard to delete the lines.
To select a line in a 3D View, click the Edit Changing Layout Line Length
Layout button and the click on a line to If an individual line is selected, the red
select it. You can continue selecting lines handle at either end of the line can be used to
within the same layout view by holding stretch, shorten or change the angle of that
down the Shift key and clicking on the line. The selected line pivots on its opposite
end.
Edit Layout Lines Dialog

When lines have been selected with the Edit change the properties of the selected lines
Layout tool you can click the Open without affecting the other lines in the view
Item button to open the Edit Layout or change the properties for all lines in the
Lines dialog. The dialog allows you to view.
666
Edit Layout Lines Dialog
Line Weight Tab
1 4
5
Facility
Layout
2
8
3
6
7
Weight for Selected Lines - If this specify which weights of lines are
1
value is set to 0, the selected lines use highlighted.
the Default Weight for their line type
All Lines Editable - Select the check
defined in the lower part of this same dialog. 7
Managing
box be able to select all layout lines,
Files
Default Weights - Set the line width for all even those which are not highlighted. If All
Normal lines and all Pattern lines. lines editable is not checked, only the
highlighted lines are selectable until you
Normal Lines are those lines
2 return to this dialog and uncheck Highlight
defining the edges of the surfaces of the
certain weight.
3D objets.
Managing
Highlight Weight - Specify the line
8
Files
Pattern Lines are those lines
3 weight for each line type to highlight.
defining patterns such as brick, siding,
In this case, since all normal lines have been
and shingles.
defaulted to line weight 3, choosing to
4 Selected lines can be changed to take highlight Normal lines of line weight 2
on the properties of either the Pattern displays those lines which were changed to
Managing
Lines or the Normal Lines. line weight 2 and are no longer linked to the
Files
defaults. If All lines editable is unchecked,
Both Types - Select the option to
5 the highlighted normal lines of line weight 2
have all selected lines continue to be
would be simple to select by holding down
their own type of line.
the Shift key and dragging a marquee around
Highlight Certain Weight - Select the view (inside the border). Only the
Managing
6
the check box if you want to isolate highlighted lines would be selected.
Files
lines of a specific weight. This activates the

Highlight Weight section, where you must
667
Line Color Tab
1
4
2
3
Layout line color can be changed in either of Otherwise all the selected lines are changed
two ways – by changing it for the selected to the defined color.
lines only, or by changing it for the entire
type of layout line type. 3 Check Use default color to restore
the selected layout lines to the default
1 Choose the Color for selected color for that line type.
lines from the menu. All the selected
lines are changed to the newly defined color. 4 Use the menu to define new Default
colors for Normal lines and for
Pattern lines. Unless changed
2 If lines of more than one color were
selected, check No change to leave individually, every layout line in that view
the color of the selected lines unchanged. will take on the newly defined color for its
line type.
Changing the Printing Line Weight in Layout

CAD Items Drawn in Layout CAD Items in a 3D View
CAD items drawn directly onto a layout page Sent to Layout
must be defined individually (in Edit CAD Line weight, color or style of any CAD item
Item dialog, under the Style button). inside a 3D View which has been sent to
layout must be changed in the elevation or
Plan Views Sent to Layout cross section camera itself, not from the
Line weight, color and style for the layout sheet. Double-click inside the layout
architectural layers can be changed for an box displaying the elevation or cross section
individual layout view by selecting that view view in Select Items mode to jump to that
and then opening the Layers dialog. view. Make the changes and return to the
Line weight, color and style for CAD items layout. You do not need to update the view
on the numbered CAD layers should not be on the layout.
changed this way. Instead, change these in
the originating plan or CAD Detail itself.
668
Line Color and Plotting
Architectural Items in 3D Views in Edit Layout mode and with the Edit
Sent to Layout Layout dialog.
Line weights of any 3D View sent to layout
can be changed by individual line or globally
by the type of line. These changes are done
Line Color and Plotting
Facility
Layout
Certain black inkjet plotters use line color to medium weight line, and the pattern lines
define line weight. For example, a blue line could be changed to red for a thin line.
may specify a .075 width line, while a green
• Pen plotters use the line color to define
line specifies a .050 width, and a red line
which pen is used.
specifies a .035 width. In this example, the
layout borders could be changed to blue for a • Color printers are able to print the colored
thick line, the normal lines in each layout line itself.
view could be changed to green for a
Finding Missing Files
Managing
Files
Plan Views, CAD Details, and
Section/Elevations are all dynamically linked
to the Layout file. When a Layout file is
opened, it looks for all linked files in the
following order:
Managing
1. Files of the same name which are in the
Files
same directory as the layout being
opened. If it cannot find them there, it
then looks for;
2. Files of the same name in the original
Managing
directory from which the files were sent
Files
to the layout.
If it still cannot find files of the same name as
those originally sent to the layout, the
following dialog opens:
Managing
Files
669
Layout Files Dialog
3
2
1 List of the Files present in layout. If not, the following error message appears:
These files have been successfully
found and the link to the layout is intact.
2 List of Files NOT FOUND in lay-

out. Files of this name could not be
found in the same directory as the layout, nor
could they be found in the original directory If this error message does appear, it means
(if different). At this point, user intervention that one or more of the missing files could
is required to find these files and so the link not be replaced by the redefined file. Click
may be reestablished. OK to continue. The layout opens, but with
the following characteristics:
3 Select a File NOT FOUND in layout 1. Any Plan Views or CAD Detail views
and click the Browse button find the
file in the directory structure. You may relating to the missing file(s) are totally
instead type the entire path and file name to blank. Only the border displays;
the correct plan. 2. Any elevations or cross sections from
the missing file(s) display the automati-
Do not click OK or press the Enter key until
cally generated lines, but any details
all the missing files have been redefined. (If
added using the CAD facility are miss-
you do, you have to choose Options> Lay-
ing.
out files to continue redefining the missing
files.)
Finding Files from an Opened
Results of Missing Files Layout
If all replacement files are correctly Choose Options> Layout files, the Layout
redefined when you click OK, the layout Files dialog opens. If all files are accounted
opens successfully. for, there is not a bottom section listing
missing files.
670
Printing Layout Files
If any files are missing the lower section Choose Options>Layout files again to
displays, listing each missing file by full double-check that all files have been found.
pathname. Click on each missing file in turn, If some are still missing, repeat the process.
typing in the full pathname or locate it using If there are some files that are lost and no
the Browse button. Be sure to choose longer needed, you can delete the view
File>Save when the missing files have been borders representing the missing files.
restored to save the new path names. When
.
you are done, click OK.
Facility
Layout
Printing Layout Files
Managing
Files
6
2
7
8
Managing
Files
3 9
Managing
Files
When the layout file is active you can select Print Range - Define range of pages
2
File> Print and the Layout Printing dialog to print. This option is available with
opens. printers that have paper trays and/or roll
feed.
1 The default printer displays, but is
grayed out. When you print this is the
3 Choose the scaling.
Managing
printer which is used.

Files
Full Page (no scale)- Fits the

layout sheet onto the sheet of paper. The
architectural scales may be incorrect, but you
671
are able to read most of the information and Color - Lines may be drawn on the
7
check layout problems. screen in many colors. If you would
like your printed output to look like your
Specify the percentage of the printable
screen, check this box. If you want all lines,
area to use.
text, and fills to be black, uncheck the Color
Print to scale - Prints the image on the option.
paper, at the scales you specified in each
In layout, the 3D Views are line drawings
layout window.
only. You may define the color of the lines
Height Scaling/Width Scaling which make up the 3D View. CAD items
4
may also be filled, or hatched with color if
Adjust the ratio of height and width if
desired.
needed. This is how you recalibrate your
printer if it is not accurate. If printing to a black & white printer, this
option says Shaded. Check Shaded to print
This is typically used with a dot matrix
in gray scale. The colors are represented as
printer, where the print may not be
shades of gray.
proportional. This is easily checked by
printing a 1" square and measuring the print Use Outline Printing - Select the
8
to see if it measures out exactly 1" square. If check box to have True Type text and
it does not, you can use the Height Scaling dimension numbers drawn as outlines. If you
and the Width Scaling to adjust it until the are using a pen plotters you may be unable to
print measures what it should. print solid filled True Type fonts (such as
Arial, etc.).
Print to File - Select the check box to
5
send the print to a file. This is used for If Use Outline Printing is selected when
remote printing and or batch printing. It printing to a regular printer, the text items
creates a print file so you can take it to a and dimension numbers appear as outlines,
service bureau and they can print your Chief they are not filled in with a solid color
Architect files even though they do not have (normally black).
Chief Architect. Give the file a .PLT or .PRN
extension. 9 Choose the view to print. This is
usually Entire Plan/View. If you
Define number of Copies (if choose Current Screen, the view on
6
available). screen is printed.
Layout & Printer Relationship

When a Layout file is created, the printable The warning allows you to Continue or
area, (page size and orientation), is defined Scale the layout to fit the current printer.
by the current printer. If you attempt to open Unless you wish to change the printable area
the Layout file, and a different printer is set to match the current printer settings do not
as default, you get a warning. select Scale Layout. Scale Layout redefines
672
Layout & Printer Relationship
the printable area, but does not change the layout. Whenever a saved layout is opened,
scales of your individual windows. these three pieces of information are
compared to the current printer setup.
If you select Continue, you can still print
the layout sheets to their original scales or
you can make the layout fit the current page Check Plots
size which shows you the layout but does not Before making any plots configure the File>
print at an accurate scale. Printer Setup for the printer, paper size and
paper orientation that you intend to use.
Facility
Layout
To print to the original print settings, you Once the printer has been configured, choose
must close the layout, define the correct File>Open Layout, then browse to the
printer (using File>Printer Setup) and then directory where the Layout file was saved,
reopen the layout again. select the desired Layout file, and click OK.
Each layout is created to fit a specific printer, If the printer, paper size or paper orientation
specific paper size, and a specific paper is different from the setting when the layout
orientation, all of which are defined prior to was originally created, the following
creating that layout. The borders, title blocks warning appears:
and views are all designed for that specific
setup. This information is saved with the
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Choose Continue to leave the layout as it for an HP LaserJet 4, “A” size (8 ½” x 11"),
was originally created. The Layout file landscape orientation.
opens, maintaining the original printer
Opening the Layout file triggers the warning
settings allowing you to print to the current
Managing
message. Choosing Continue opens the
printer. If the current settings have a smaller
Files
layout and scales the page to the HP LaserJet
printable area, the pages are scaled down to
4 on 8 ½” x 11" paper. When you are ready
fit on the paper. The prints can be used to
for full size sheets, close the Layout file and
check everything except the actual scale.
reset your current printer to be the HP
For example, assume the Layout file was DesignJet 220. When you reopen the Layout
Managing
created for an HP DesignJet 220 plotter, for file, it opens without a warning and the scale
Files
“D” size paper (24" x 36") and landscape of the views are accurate.
orientation. The current printer is configured
Scale Layout - Click this button to if you
want to change the printable area of the
673
layout file to match the current printer. Your If you accidentally choose Scale Layout to
layout view scales will be retained, but the fit printer but did not want to change the
blue border that you see may be a different layout, immediately close the layout without
size. You may need to adjust the views to fit saving. This discards the modification of the
on the paper. For more information see border definition, leaving it as it was
"Changing Plotter for Final Plots". originally.
Final Plots Printing

Before you print final plots, configure the The correct printer or plotter must be
correct printer with the page configuration established before a layout sheet is created or
which was used to create the Layout file. an existing layout is opened. Once a layout is
Once the printer has been configured, open open, neither the printer type nor any of the
the Layout file. The layout opens without the printer properties can be changed. If a layout
warning message. Proceed for the final plots. is opened and the wrong printer is selected,
close the layout, change the printer (using
If the warning message does appear, choose
File>Printer Setup) and then reopen the
Continue to open the Layout file, then
layout again.
immediately close it. Choose File>Print
Setup to reconfigure the printer to match the Printing from the layout with Full Page (no
layout’s original settings. Then open the scale) selected , results in the layout being
layout again. If no warning message appears printed to the current printer with each layout
this time, continue with the plotting. page fitting to the printable area. It is not to
scale, but the proportions and layout are
Changing Plotter for Final Plots correct.
If the layout was configured for one printer Choosing Print to Scale results in a scaled
but you are printing the final plots to a print, no matter what the sheet size. If the
different printer, it is important to have the layout is set for a “D” size (22" x 34") page
layout changed to match the new printer. and it is printed to an “A” size (8 ½” x 11")
Before opening the layout, choose page with Print to Scale selected, as much of
File>Printer Setup and configure the the sheet as possible is printed at full scale to
correct plotter for the final plots. Then open the smaller sheet, starting at the upper left
the layout. corner of the page. Since it takes four “A”
When the warning message appears, choose size pages to make one “D” size page, the
Scale Layout. This modifies the blue upper left fourth of the sheet would be
layout sheet edges to match the current printed to scale onto the “A” size page. This
printer settings. You then need to go to each printing option is rarely used, since only the
layout page and make any changes necessary upper left section prints.
because of the modified layout page border
definition.
674
Chapter 38:
Materials
Managing
Materials
Files
New in 7.0
• Create an unlimited number of materials • Change any of the colors now using the
and use as many different colors as you Windows standard Color dialog.
like. • Organize materials into groups.
Materials
• Define materials with textures and col- • Transfer materials from one plan to
ors associated with them which replaces another by using the export and import
the need for the color table. tools.
• New default materials.
General Information
When you design a building in Chief Chief Architect comes with many material
Architect, you place objects in Plan View definitions, or materials, that you can
that have 3D properties. These objects - immediately use.
walls, windows, doors, cabinets, lot
Managing
Material definitions specify how objects
perimeters etc. can all be viewed in Plan
appear in both 3D Views and Render Views
Files
View, 3D Views and Render Views. The
and can affect the calculation of the Material
model can be used for more than
List. It is very important for you to define
visualization. Chief Architect calculates
materials properly, and then apply them to
material take-offs of all the objects in the 3D
objects in realistic ways for your 3D Views
model and records these in a Material List.
Managing
to render correctly and to generate a useful
In order to design with objects that look Material List. Materials may be defined in
Files
correct in 3D and calculate properly in the Plan View or in a 3D View.
Material List you must create material
Redefining a material within a 3D View may
definitions that represent the material in the
create unexpected results. If you just change
real world, and then apply them to the 3D
the bitmap to represent another material, the
objects. Options> Materials> Define Mate-
Libraries
Symbol
material may not be calculated correctly.

rials allows you to create and redefine
materials.
675
Defining Materials
Before any material can be assigned to an old plan when the material is imported. To
object it must be defined. Many materials save duplication of effort, it is usually best to
have been supplied with the program. You define commonly used materials in the
can create your own unique materials or profile.pl1 plan and update them as they are
customize those provided. redefined.
Materials are saved with the model that they The Materials dialog is used to create and
are created in. Newly created materials can redefine all materials used in the model. To
be exported for use in other models. If you access the dialog select Options> Materi-
redefine an existing material you have the als> Define Materials.
option to update the same material within an
Materials Dialog
1 3
4
2 5
13
6
7
8
9
14
10
11
12
Group - Select the materials Group

1 2 This is the list of materials. Highlight a
that you want to view. Materials are material to select it. The selected
listed in alphabetical order. Select All material displays in the boxes to the right of
Materials to view all defined materials. the list.
3 Click OK to save changes made to the

material.
676
Defining Materials
4 Click Cancel to delete any changes
Managing
you made during this session in the
dialog and return to the current view.
Files
Help opens the help menu regarding
5
defining materials.
Edit opens the Define Material dialog
6
for the selected material.
New - Click to open the Define Mate-
7
rial dialog to create a new, blank
material with no specifications.
Copy - Click to create a copy of the
8
existing material. Name it and use the
Materials
Define Material dialog to change the
specification.
Delete - Click to delete a material
9
from the list. If the material is being
used in the model, the program will not allow
you to delete it.
Groups can be defined to organize the
10
materials within the plan. Click to open
the Define Material Groups dialog.
Import - Click to import material
11
Managing
definitions from a text file. see “Import
Files
Material Definitions” on page 688.
Export - Click to export material
12
definitions to a text file. see “Export
Material Definitions” on page 688.
Managing
13 Shows how the material will dispaly in
Files
the 3D Views.
14 Shows how the texture will display in

Render Views.
Managing
Files
677
Material Definitions
Select a material from the Materials dialog specify the material and organize the
box and click Edit. The Define Material information used to define materials.
dialog opens. There are four tabs used to
General Tab
1 6
7
2
3 8
5
9
The information on the General tab varies color to open the Windows Color dialog
greatly from one material to the next. which allows you to select a new color.
1 The name of the material appears. In

this field you can redefine the name of
the material being edited. If you rename the
material it does not create a new material, it
redefines the existing material.
Material Color - The current color of
2
the material appears. This color
displays in 3D Views and in Render Views if
no texture has been selected. Click on the
678
Material Definitions
Line Color - The color of the pattern Group - The name of the group can be
3 6
Managing
lines appears here. Click in the box to defined in this field. Select the group
open the Color dialog which allows you to from the pull down list. You can add Groups
Files
select a new color. as you need them in the Define Material
Groups dialog.
Shading Contrast - Use the slider
4
bar to specify the amount of contrast Type - This is the list of material types
7
between surfaces at different angles to each defined by the program. Some types are
other in 3D Views. The farther to the right associated with patterns. The Type
the slide bar is set, the more contrast you will classification can define how the material is
see. This setting has no effect on Render calculated in the Material List.
Views.
8 Depending on the Type selected,
Following is a picture showing the same several additional edit boxes may
curved wall view with three different appear in the dialog.
Materials
contrasts (combined using a separate
graphics program). Notice how the lowest Other Possible Settings
contrast at the top appears almost flat, while Height - Define a height dimension for the
the highest contrast on the bottom has a sharp Material. This value may be restricted to a
contrast. ratio of another dimension. When applied to
a strip or siding pattern, this number
Low Contrast represents the width of the material.
Height - Overlap amount = Exposure of
the material.
Normal
Contrast Length - Define a length dimension for the
Managing
pattern. This value typically refers to the
Files
Pattern across the screen view.
Thickness - Specify a thickness for a
High material such as Tile. This information is
Contrast used if the material is applied to a soffit.
Managing
Depth - Specify a depth for the material
Files
such as brick. This information is used when
the material is applied to a soffit.
Size - Some patterns are defined by relative
size. Enter a number here. The number does
5 This window displays a preview of how not have any units, it is more like a scaling
Managing
the material will look in 3D Views. It

factor.
Files
updates as you change the material

definition. Joint Width - Enter a value for joint width
between pieces of the material. This does not
679
draw the joint any wider, but the information Angle - Certain patterns may be rotated to
is used by the program when counting pieces display with a different orientation.
of tile or brick.
Grouping - With a Strip type, grouping is
Mortar Width - Enter a value for the used to describe the repeat of the pattern
mortar joints in a brick or block pattern. This across the width of the material. i.e. A 13"
does not draw the mortar any wider, but the wide siding with an overlap amount of 1"
information is used by the program when and a grouping of 3 calculates materials
counting pieces of bricks or block. based on a 12" coverage and a repeat line
pattern of 4".
Overlap Amt - Enter the amount that a
material overlaps itself, such as lap siding. DXF Code - This field holds up to five
9
characters that display at the end of the
Height - Overlap amount = Exposure of
layer names used when exporting a 3D DXF
the material.
file.
Types
Every Material is classified by Type. The the right count. You can define the mortar
Type defines how the material is calculated width which enables the program to do an
in the Material List. Some Types are accurate count of bricks.
associated with patterns but not every Type is
Strip - Shows a parallel line pattern in 3D
associated with a 3D pattern. Not every Type
Views. The height, or separation of the lines,
is calculated in the Material List.
and the angle can be specified. The Material
Following are the available Types and their List calculates lineal footage based on the
characteristics: height of the strip and the surface area being
covered. Overlap is subtracted from the
Framing – These types are used by the
height to get the exposure of the material.
program to estimate stick framing quantities
Grouping can be used to model a material
if they are applied to the main layer of a wall
that has a repeating pattern across its width.
layer definition.
Sheet – This does not show a pattern. If a
Brick – Displays a typical brick course
sheet material is applied to a wall or floor
pattern. The height and length of the brick
surface, the Material List calculate the
can be specified. This can be specified for
number of sheets needed. If a sheet material
anything using this type of layout, including
is applied to a Library Item such as chair, the
plywood with staggered joints. The Material
Material List does not calculate it.
List calculates the number of bricks (by
height and length) which fit on the total Gap – This does not show a pattern. Specify
surface area of the defined item. For a wall, gap to a material to create an Air Gap
the surface area is used. For a full masonry between materials as in the case of a wall
wall with two layers of brick, be sure to layer definition. This would be the same as
define the wall as having two layers to get
680
Types
defining no material at all. This does not go between the octagons. The octagon resizes
Managing
to the Material List. proportionally. The Material List calculates
the number of square and octagonal tiles
Files
Area – This does not generate a pattern. The
required to complete the pattern.
Material List calculates surface area. In the
case of walls it is the area of the vertical Hexagon – This produces a hexagon
surfaces. pattern. The Material List calculates the
number of units required to cover the area of
Volume – This does not generate a pattern.
the object.
The Material List calculates cubic feet.
Parquet – This produces a parquet wood
Concrete - This does not generate a
floor pattern of small squares. The Material
pattern. The Material List calculates cubic
List calculates the required number of
yards or cubic meters. When you apply this
parquet units.
to a floor platform, the thickness is defined
Materials
as four inches, by default. Sand – This produces a pattern similar to
stucco. The density or frequency of the dots
Tile – This produces a grid-like tile pattern.
is definable. The Material List does not
The Material List calculates the number of
calculate this material Type.
units based on the total surface area, exactly
as for bricks. Earth – This produces a 2D hatch, that
represents earth in a Section View. The
Shingles – This produces a pattern similar
Material List does not calculate this material
to the brick pattern, but you are able to define
Type.
an overlap amount. The Material List
calculates the number of shingles required to Stars – This produces a star pattern. The
cover the surface area. Material List does not calculate this material
Type.
Managing
Flooring – This does not produce a pattern.
The Material List calculates the total surface Custom - If you select a pattern type from a
Files
area. PAT file, the materials is automatically
defined as Custom regardless of the pattern
Shakes – This produces a pattern to
style. Custom materials are calculated in the
represent wood shingles. The Material List
Material List as area.
calculates the number of shingles required to
Managing
cover the surface area.
Files
Herringbone – This produces a
Herringbone pattern. Height and width are
restricted to a 2:1 ratio. The Material List
calculates the number of units required to
Managing
cover the surface area.

Files
Octagon – This produces a “tile” pattern of

octagons and small squares. The size
specified is the size of the small squares
681
Pattern Tab
3 4
5
6 7
2D surface patterns can be used as a visual Select Pattern - Click to select a
4
tool in 3D Views. When a Perspective View, Pattern File that has not been defined
Section/Elevation View or Overview is by Chief Architect. Pattern files, which are
generated, the pattern helps define what files with a .pat extension, can come from a
material is being used. Patterns that are variety of sources and can be saved on your
associated with Types, are used by the hard drive. Once you have selected a pattern
program to generate accurate take-off file, use the Entries menu to pick a hatch
quantities for the Material List. pattern from the file.
Pattern File - The name of the
1 The name of the Material Definition 5
appears in this field. current pattern file is listed here.
2 This is the preview of the material in 6 Entries - Pattern files are text files that
the 3D View. The pattern does not define more than one hatch pattern.
appear in a Render View. The preview Individual patterns are defined with names
updates to show any changes. that appear in the Entries list. Use the menu
Pattern Type - Select a Chief to select a entry from the pattern file. The
3 selected pattern appears in the preview
Architect pattern from the pull down
list. The Pattern Type: defines how the window.
material is calculated in the Material List. Scale - Rescale the pattern if
Only Chief Architect Pattern Types are 7
necessary. If the pattern displays as
figured in the Material List. If a PAT file has black the pattern repeats too often and the
been defined, the pattern type is listed as number in this field should be increased.
Custom.
682
Types
Texture Tab
Managing
Files
1
Materials
4
5 6
Textures can be applied to materials. If the surface being rendered is larger than
Textures affect how a material appears in a this Ratio, the surface will have "tiles" that
Render View. They do not show up in any are 42" x 42" of the assigned bitmap. If it is
other 3D View and they do not affect the smaller, only a portion of the tile is shown.
Material List.
Select the Stretch to Fit check box to have
1 The name of the selected material the texture image stretch to cover each
displays here. This is where you may surface it is applied to.
Managing
rename it if desired. Renaming a material
Select Color Using Texture -
does not create a new material it just changes 5
Files
Selects a color to represent the material
the name of an existing material.
in 3D Views that are not rendered. The
2 The defined texture displays here. program averages the color of all pixels to
come up with a good average color for the
3 Texture File - Displays the path and material.
Managing
file name of the selected texture. It is
recommended that your texture files reside in
6 Click the Select Texture button to
Files
the Textures subdirectory of the Chief select a texture for the material. This
Architect directory, but textures can be stored accesses the Textures directory in the Chief
anywhere on your system. Architect Library.
Ratio - Adjust the ratio or scaling of
4
Managing
the selected texture. The values are in

Files
inches (or mm).

In this example, the bitmap shown is mapped
to a 42"x42” area.
683
Render Tab
1
2
3 4
The Render tab controls how the material the desired appearance relative to other
appears in Render Views and exported materials being used.
VRML files. The preview window displays
Shininess - Controls the sheen of the
the material as it is rendered on a panel that is 4
material when it is rendered with a
approximately 3’ x 6’.
point or spot light source on it. Shiny
1 The name of the material appears here. materials appear to have a bright white spot
on them which simulates reflection of light.
2 Use the radio buttons to select the
Simple editing options or the Transparency - Controls the opacity
5
Advanced editing options. The Simple of the material. Most materials are set
options are displayed on this tab. to Opaque, but Partial can be used to
simulate a glass surface that you can see
Brightness - Controls how bright the
3 through. Specifying materials as Transparent
material appears. It can be used to get
can slow down rendering.
684
Types
Advanced Options
Managing
Files
1
2
3
4
Materials
5
6
Advanced options provide more control positional light source. It must be used
over the appearance of the rendered material. together with the specular value to simulate
If any Advanced value is changed, the light being reflected from a surface.
Render tab displays the Advanced options Adjusting the shininess value controls the
when you edit that material. You can always size of the reflected highlight on a surface.
change back to the Simple settings.
Emmissive - Controls how bright a
5
The Ambient and Diffuse settings are used material appears without regard to the
together to modify a material’s brightness. current scene’s lighting. It can be used to
Managing
simulate surfaces that are glowing with their
Ambient - Controls how bright the
1 own light, such as the glass on a light fixture.
Files
material appears when only ambient
light is present. Transp - Controls the transparency
6
range from completely opaque to
Diffuse - Controls how bright the
2 completely transparent.
material appears when illuminated by a
Managing
light source. You should note that the material Render
Properties are dependent on the Render
Files
The Specular and Shininess settings are used
settings in Preferences dialog and the lights
together to modify a material’s shininess.
that have been place in the model.
Specular - Controls how bright the
3 To get proper highlights on an object, use at
material appears when illuminated by a
least one point or spot light. For these
Managing
positional light source. It simulates the

highlights to appear on large flat surfaces,
reflection of light off a surface.
Files
select the Use Triangles and the Use

Shininess - Controls how shiny the Multipass options on the Render panel of
4
surface appears when illuminated by a the Preferences dialog.
685
Applying Materials with the Material Tab

When you open the specification dialog for are assigned to the selected object(s) or parts
almost any object you see a Material tab. of the object(s). Once a Material has been
The Material tab is where specific materials defined it can be applied to the object.
Material Tab
1
2
3
The Material tab shown above is used to set material that has been assigned to the item
the materials for cabinets. The list on the left selected.
contains the different parts of the cabinet that
can be defined with a material. 3 Click Select Material to open the
Select Material dialog.
Click on an item in the list. The
1 Select a material in the dialog and click OK.
highlighted item is the one selected.
That material is assigned to the selected
2 The two boxes on the right display the Item.
color, pattern and the texture of the
Select another item or select OK to return to
the active View.
Adjust Material Definition

Any surface in a Render View may be and edit its properties. Changing the material
selected by using your left mouse button. A definition for a surface affects all surfaces
selected surface may be deleted from the that are currently using that Material.
View, or you can access the assigned material
686
Texture Painter
Managing
Texture Painter
Files
The texture painter allows you to rede- Using the Texture painter affects every sur-
fine the texture of a material while in a Ren- face that uses the defined Material, not just
der View. You must use this wisely since the surface you ‘selected’. It is equivalent to
applying the new texture not only changes opening up the Define Material dialog,
the View, but it redefines the material in the selecting the material, and changing its tex-
entire model. ture to a new value.
Adding a brick texture to a Material called If materials are assigned correctly, this tool
Siding 6 may give you the desired visual can be very useful for experimenting with
effect but it does not change how the material different textures to get a more realistic
is calculated in the Material List, or change View.
Materials
the thickness of the wall layer definition.
Define Materials
Opens the Define Material dialog to change
the definition of that material throughout the
model.
Defining the Default Materials
Managing
When you set your defaults in Options> materials to many objects in the Default
Files
Defaults Setup, you are setting various Materials dialog.
default values for objects. One of the default
settings is the material assignment for the
objects.
Managing
Not every object can have its default
Files
materials defined ahead of time. For
example, stairs do not have a default setup.
You must specify the materials for the stair
parts in the Default Materials dialog. Once
you create a stair you can open the Stair
Managing
Specification dialog and change materials

Files
for the various parts.

To open the dialog select Options> Default
Setup> Material Defaults and assign
687
Default Materials Dialog Select a Item from the list on the left.Click
Select Material, or click in one of the
preview boxes to open the Select Material
dialog.
Select a material from the dialog and click
OK. Repeat the steps for the other objects in
the list.When you are finished, click OK to
return to the current View.
This dialog functions very similar to the

Material tabs found throughout the
specification dialogs.
Exporting & Importing Material Definitions

Material Definitions are stored with the plan contains exported material definitions. Select
file and can be saved with the plan. As you OK.
create new materials within plan files, you
The Material Definition Import Options
can use the export and import functions of
dialog will open.
Chief Architect to share Material Definitions
between plan files.
Export Material Definitions

Select the Export button from the Define
Material dialog or select File> Export>
Material Definition. The Export Material Both of these options will add any defined
Definition File dialog will open. Select a materials that have a unique name.
directory and name the .dat file. The
program will create a .dat file in the Ignore Duplicate Materials - Will not
specified directory that can be imported into update any defined material with the same
other plan files. name.
Replace Duplicate Materials - Will
Import Material Definitions update defined materials that have the same
Select the Import button from the Define name as the one being imported.
Material dialog or select File> Import>
Material Definition. The Import Material After the import process is complete, a
Definition File dialog will open. Browse dialog will open which tells you how many
your directories and find a .dat file that materials were added or replaced.
688
Chapter 39:
Material List
Managing
Material
Files
List
Material
List
Disclaimer
The Material List is based on certain ART, Inc. makes no representation as to the
assumptions which may not match your accuracy or reliability of the Material List
building style. Not all materials needed for a generated by Chief Architect. Always
job are included in the Material List. The compare the Material List with a manual
Material List is an excellent tool for creating take-off before providing a quote or ordering
a “rough estimate” of cost. material for a job.
General Information
Material
There are three ways to calculate a Material When you install Chief Architect, the Master
List
List in Chief Architect: From All Floors, List is empty. Each time you enter new Sup-
From Area, or From Room. Any Material plier, Price, Code or Comment information
List generated will access the Master List for for any item in a Material List, a new Master
price and supplier information. List entry will be created.
A Material List is a spreadsheet, listing When you calculate a Material List the
each material calculated from the 3D model. program refers to the Master List and checks
Information is organized in columns for Size, for a record available for each item. If one is
Item, Count, and Unit of Measurement. available, it will be used to provide the Sup-
Values for all these columns are calculated plier, Price, Code and/or Comment for that
from the 3D model. item.
Managing
The Master List is a database which keeps If the Master List contains more than one
Files
the records of materials that have been record for an item, the program will
defined in previous plan files. In order for a reference the last one entered. You can
material to be listed in the Master List, you override this by defining one specific entry
must enter information in the Supplier, as the default.
Price, Code or Comment columns in a
To open the Master List, select Options>
Libraries
Material List. The Material List is updated

Symbol
Materials> Master List or ctrl+M. In the

anytime a change is made to these four
Master List you can update the Supplier,
columns in the Material List or the Compo-
Price, Code and/or Comment information.
nents dialog.
689
The Material List can be exported as a text or other 3D models. Material Lists can be
file and then accessed by a spreadsheet printed directly from the program.
program, estimating software packages, and/
Estimating Software
You can export the Material List to a word program supports the direct import of the
processor, or to a spreadsheet program to Chief Architect Material List.
arrange it in your estimating format. You can
Any questions regarding estimating software
also export the Material List to a number of
packages and how they interact with Chief
commercial estimating programs in whose
Architect should be directed toward the
database you would keep your current
company providing the estimating software.
pricing, labor costs, markups, etc. and be
ART, Inc. is unable to provide any technical
able to generate many different reports based
support for programs outside of Chief
on this data.
Architect.
If you are purchasing an estimating software
program, make sure in advance that the
Generating a Material List

A Material List can be generated at any time. All three methods of calculating a Material
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is List are accessed from the Options> Materi-
complete. Comparisons can be made by als menu.
generating the Material List with and without
a proposed modification.
TIP: If the remodel is a building addition,

and the floor, ceiling and roof information
is needed, do the following: Use
File>Save As to create a copy of the
plan under a different name. Then delete
the existing structure, leaving only the
building addition. (Be sure to Build Floors/
Ceilings afterward.) Then generate the Calculate From All Floors
Material List for the entire plan by using Choose Options> Materials> Calcu-
the Build All Floors option.
late From All Floors to have a Material List
generated for the entire 3D model. Calculate
From All Floors also has a toolbar button
available. This may be added to your toolbar
by customizing the toolbar.
690
Setting up the Material List and the Master List
Material Lists calculated From All Floors Calculate From Area
Managing
will be calculated including the framing Choose Options> Materials> Calculate
information. Any changes made to the
Files
From Area. Drag a marquee box around the
model, after a Material List is generated, will area to be calculated. A Material List is
not be included in the list. To update the created for all items fully enclosed in the
Material List, you must reselect Options> box. This method can be used for additions
Materials> Calculate From All Floors. and/or remodels, but it only calculates for the
Managing
Material Lists can be long. Only a portion of current floor.
Files
the list may display on your screen. Use the
scroll bar on the right to scroll through the Calculate From Room
complete list. You may move the cursor to To calculate the Material List for a room, you
certain cells, in order to make changes. You must first select the room. When a red line
can only make changes to cells in the Type, goes completely around the room, choose
Price, Supplier, Code, Comment, Extra Options> Materials> Calculate From
and Manufacturer columns. Room. A Material List is created for only
that room.
Setting up the Material List and the Master List
Material
Once you have generated a Material List and calculated by changing the settings for
List
reviewed the Master List, you may realize Material List and/or the Master List in the
that there is some information that you do not Material List section. For more information
need on any of these lists. To set up the see “Material List” on page 79.
default Categories and Columns for new
Once you are viewing the Material List or
Material Lists, go to the Report Style panel
Master List you can use the Show Items
and the Material List panel of the Prefer-
dialog to turn on and off columns in the
ences dialog and make the proper selections.
spreadsheet.
You can specify what information is
Master List
Managing
Files
The Master List is a Material List that is Chief Architect allows you to have more than
referenced by all plan files. It allows you to one Master List. Only one can be active, and
enter and track Supplier, Manufacturer, Price only the active one will be updated with the
and other information for all materials you new information. You can specify which
Managing
use. If one of your suppliers has changed a Master List is current and active on the
price for an item, just change that price in Master List panel of the Preferences dialog.
Files
any Material List, or the Master List itself Select Choose to select a new file for the
and the new price will be saved in the Master Master List File.
List for use by future Material Lists.
691
Choose Options> Materials>Master list to It starts from the currently selected cell and
view the current Master List. When working moves to the right, then moves down to the
in the Master List, records cannot be inserted next row starting at the left column, and so
directly but they can be deleted or modified. on, until it finds an instance of the text you
entered. If the text is not found, you will hear
The Material List window is practically
a beep. The status bar at the bottom displays
identical to a Material List window, except is
how many entries are being displayed.
has a few additional controls to help you
view your Master List. The category popup
menu at the top of the window lets you limit Master List Columns
the Master List to only show a particular When you are viewing the Master List, you
category, or all categories. can control the width of columns and which
columns are included in the spreadsheet.
Updating the Master List These settings will be remembered the next
time you open a Master List.
When you change the information in the
Code, Price, Manufacturer, Supplier, or To control column display, select Materials>
Comment column for an item, a new row for Show Items. The Show Items dialog will
that item is placed into the Master List. If open for the Master List. This is the same as
more than one piece of information has
changed for an item, in the process of
updating it you will create more than one
record in the Master List. Make sure you
delete any unwanted records.
To delete a row from the Master List, click
the row number at the far left. The entire row
will highlight. Choose Edit>Delete or hit the
Delete key on your keyboard. the Master List panel of the Preferences
dialog.
Searching the Master List
The Find item toward the bottom of the Select the check boxes for columns you want
window lets you search for text in the Master to display. Clear the check boxes for the
List. columns you do not want to display. This
does not affect the display of current or new
Material Lists.
692
Material List
Material List
Managing
Files
Managing
The ID column displays the categories of the Click in the field to specify that record as the
Files
items listed. Under the category name default entry.
(Roofing), each item in the Material List is
The Tot.Cost column is automatically
assigned a unique ID number (R1, R2, etc.).
generated. The number of units is multiplied
The SubCat column contains any by the price per unit to calculate the total cost.
subcategory that has been assigned to the
The Supplier column can be used to identify
item. Subcategories that are defined in the
unique items. you add a Supplier if you fill in
Preferences dialog can be accessed here
any other column for specific item. When
from a drop down list.
you enter a Supplier, it is saved in list for all
The Flr column displays the floor from Material Lists. Once more than one supplier
which the material is taken. has been added, simply double-click the
supplier to activate a menu of all the
Material
The Size column displays specified sizes for
List
suppliers which have been added. Choosing
the item, if applicable.
a different supplier may reference a different
The Item column shows the item’s name. record in the Master List.
The Count column specifies the number of Click in the Code column to add an optional
items or the amount required. code for the item. If added to a window or
door, this will appear in the schedule if
The Extra column can be used to enter an
Code is a displayed schedule column (see
overage amount for any column. This value
page 482).
is added to the Count column.
There is also a Comment column for each
The Unit column specifies the units. Lineal
line item. This is helpful for providing more
feet is specified as ft.
Managing
information about the item itself. If added to
Files
The Price column contains the price for the a window or door, this will appear in the
item. It will be referenced from the Master schedule if Remarks is a displayed
List but you can enter a new price here. You schedule column (see page 482).
may add up to five different prices for the
Specify the Manufacturer in the last column
same item.
of the Material List. More than one
Managing
The Def. columns is used in the Master List manufacturer may be added, one at a time. If
Files
to specify which record is referenced by the added to a window or door, this will appear
Material List if there are matching records. in the schedule if Manufacturer is a
displayed schedule column (see page 482).
693
Adding Information to the Material List

You can enter information in the Price, You can switch between several existing
Supplier, Code and Comment columns for suppliers for a given item by double-clicking
each item. Once Master List information on the supplier field in a Material List. A
exists for a particular item, it can load the “drop down” button appears to the left of it.
Price, Supplier, Code and Comment fields Click the button to display a menu of
for subsequent Material Lists. The suppliers and select one.
combination of Item, Size, and Supplier are
When a Material List is calculated, the
used to identify unique materials in the
program searches the Master List for the last
Master List.
used Price, Supplier, Code information for
Adding the first supplier and price for any each item. This information is used in the
item is very straightforward. Click in the cell, Material List. Any supplier and price can
then type the information. then be changed.
To add subsequent prices or suppliers Changing the Supplier field for an Item
double-click inside the cell to change. The creates a new Master List entry. Changing
flashing cursor should appear. Double-click the Price, Code, Manufacturer or Comment
again to have the contents highlighted then fields simply update this information for the
type in the new information. appropriate entry in the Master List.
Material List Categories
These are the Categories that appear in the order that they are listed here. Each plan file
ID columns of the Material and Master List. can be set to display materials according to
The lists display materials by category in the their category.
694
Material List Categories
1 All categories selected currently Subcategories are used when creating door
Managing
display in a Material List. and window schedules. When creating a
schedule, you could, for example choose to
Files
Remove the check next to any category to
see the lockset for all doors and windows in
eliminate that category from displaying in
the schedule. If a door or window has a
the Material List.
material with the LKS "Lockset"
The Material List changes automatically to subcategory, any text in the item field will be
Managing
reflect these changes as soon as the OK shown in the schedule under the lockset
column. You would typically add an
Files
button is selected.
Accessory with a LKS subcategory to a door
The display of the category is suppressed, or window to add a lockset to a door or
but the information is still part of the window.
Material List. If the Material List is
exported, the information related to the Columns Tab
suppressed categories will be exported as
well.
Subcategories
For Material and Master Lists the program
has a predefined categories. For each of these
Material
categories you can define any number of
List
subcategories. Subcategories are defined in
the Categories panel in the Preferences
dialog. They are global, and do not belong to
a particular plan. Subcategories you define
will be available in all plan files. Check to define which columns to display in
Subcategories can be specified for any item the Material List. You can suppress the
in the Material List or Components dialog. column’s display by removing the check next
Once a subcategory is defined, it can be to the column name.
selected from the drop down list in the Type Note that one column, called Extra Amount,
column. does not normally display. Positioned
Managing
A subcategory consists of a code and a between the columns named Amounts and
Files
description. The code can be any sequence of Units, simply check the box next to Extra
characters, up to 12 characters in length. The Amount in order to have the column display
description is how you want to label, or automatically.
describe the sub-category. For example: Extra Amount is for adding a waste factor. It
Managing
LKS Lockset. is added to the Amount column when

Files
calculating Total Price.

For more information see “Door & Window
Schedules” on page 491.
695
Options Tab restore it to showing all floors, remove the

check. This only affects the Material List
Calculated From All Floors.
2 If all the supplies for a job will be

purchased from the same supplier,
restricting the supplier saves a lot of time
Check Restrict supplier to restrict it, then
choose the supplier from the list.
1 Check Restrict floor and select the
floor to restrict Material List to. To
Framing and the Material List

All framing produced from the Framing SF (Sub Floor) contains all floor and ceiling
dialog will go to the Material List. framing joists including sheathing.
Depending on the type of framing member, it
F (Framing – general) contains all the
may show as R (Roofing), SF (Sub Floor), or
framing members created by a CAD framing
F (Framing – general).
box.
R (Roofing) contains trusses, rafters and
sheathing .
Copying the Material List

Sections of the Material List can be copied using the standard Windows Copy, Cut and
and then pasted into a text box or into a word Paste commands.
processing program or spreadsheet program

Any Material List can be exported into as a Material List or Master Material List, select
text (.txt) file which can be opened directly File> Export Material List (.TXT,.CSV).
by most spreadsheet programs. From the
The Material Export Options dialog opens.
1 3
2 4
696
Changing the Font used in the Material List
Tab Delimited (TXT) - Select this No Column Headers - Select this

1 3
Managing
option to create a text file with a tab check box to prevent column headings
between each field entry in the Material List, from appearing in the first row of the text
Files
and a carriage return between each row. file.
Comma Delimited (CSV) - Select Run Default Spreadsheet/Editor
2 4
this option to create a text file with a - Select this check box to immediately
comma between each field entry in the open the exported file with the program
Managing
Material List and a carriage return between specified on your computer.
Files
each row. This type of file is typically
opened by a spreadsheet program.
Changing the Font used in the Material List

Open the Font panel of the Preferences Choose a new font from the list of those
dialog to change the font used for the available. This will change the default
Material List. Material List font for all plan files, not just
for the current plan.
Click Materials, then click the Select
Font button. If you have problems with the Material List
Material
printing too small, try changing the font.
List
The Components Dialog
Besides editing and adding information for Once the dialog is open you can edit it just as
items in the Material List and Master List, you would a Material List or Master List.
you can edit and add information directly for Entering specific Price, Supplier,
an item through the Components dialog. Manufacturer, Comments or Type will
The Components dialog for an item is embed that information into the item itself.
basically the Material List entry for the When that item is copied, even into a
individual item or group of items. different plan, all the information stays with
Managing
the copy as well. This information will go
You can edit the Components dialog by
into the Material List.
Files
selecting the Components button on the
Edit toolbar, from the contextual menu,
hitting Ctrl + I on the keyboard or selecting
Accessories
Options> Materials> Components when an In the Components dialog you can add
item is selected. When you open the dialog additional Material List entries for the item
Managing
you may not see all columns. More columns being edited. The additional Material List
Files
exist beyond the edge of the dialog, accessed entries are called Accessories and are
by the bottom scroll bar. You can also resize saved with the item. Accessories added to an
this dialog by grabbing any of its edges. item are embedded in the item and will
697
display in the Material List, and will get 4. You can also edit all of the other col-
added to the Master List entry. umns for accessory items, except for the
ID field.
To create a new accessory:
5. To remove an accessory, click on any
1. Select an Item and open the Compo- part of the accessories information and
nents dialog. click the Delete button.
2. Click the Add button and a new line
will be added to the spreadsheet.
For a specific example on how this is
3. The new entry will be given an item applied, see “A Window Schedule Example”
name of Accessory#. You can edit on page 494.
this and give it any item name you like.
Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits

The program calculates the number of bricks, subtracting twice the material thickness
tiles, shingles, shakes or other such items, are used. So, for brick2 (which has a
when that type is applied to a soffit by the depth of 4"), the sides, top and bottom
following rules: surface areas cannot contribute to the
brick count unless the soffit depth is
• If the soffit depth is less than the larger
greater than 8 inches.
of 4 inches (10 mm) or 1 ½ times the
material thickness, then only the front • If surface materials such as brick are
area of the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is applied to a large soffit, the soffit center
48"x48”x4” thick, and the brick2 mate- is assumed to be hollow, with only a sin-
rial is used (3"x 8" with 3/8” mortar joint) gle layer of the material applied to each
the front of the soffit is 48"x48”=2304 applicable face.
square inches. Including the mortar joint, • For shingles and shakes, the overlap
each brick requires 3 3/8” x 8 3/8” = amount should be subtracted from the
28.26 square inches. 2304 sq. in. divided height (as opposed to brick or tile, where
by 28.26 sq. in. per brick gives 81.5 the joint width is added to the size).
bricks. • For materials in the area category, the
• If the soffit depth is greater than both 4 above soffit area calculation is used, with
inches (10 mm) and 1 ½ times the mate- the material thickness treated as zero.
rial thickness, then the surface areas of For materials in the volume, concrete or
the soffit back, sides and top are used in earth categories, the true volume of the soffit
addition to the front, if these surfaces are is used.
not attached to a wall or other soffit.
However, only those portions of the
sides, top and bottom remaining after
698
Chapter 40:
Other Features
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Corner Boards
Corner boards are produced for 3D Views, they can still be
added to a building turned off in the Show Items dialog by
exterior by selecting clearing both the Doors and Windows
Pulldown
Menus
Build> Corner trim> check box.
Corner Boards from the
Select corner boards while in Plan View with
menu while in Plan
the Corner Boards mode active. You cannot
View. Click outside the
drag or otherwise move them, but you can
wall corner where you
delete selected corner boards by pressing
wish to add trim. You
should click where the the Del key. When a corner boards is selected,
outside wall surfaces you can click the Open Item button to
meet. If you click where open the Wall Corner Specification dialog
the inside surfaces meet, and change the width, thickness, and
you will create corner material.
trim inside the room.
Features
Hold the shift key to select multiple corner
Other
You must add corner boards. Again, with multiple corners selected
boards to all floors of the building that will you can delete them all, or you can open their
have trim. Placing them only creates corner dialog and change the size or materials. The
boards for the current floor. The corner material for corner boards is taken from the
boards will extend from the top plate down Exterior Trim entry in the Default
over the floor platform below the walls. Materials dialog.
The trim shows in the Plan View as two lines

at the corner, slightly out from the wall's
surface. This display is controlled by the
Beams/Soffits layer.
Libraries
Corner boards are not produced in 3D Views

Symbol
if the Windows/Doors check box is

cleared on the Include tab of the 3D
Preferences dialog. If corner boards are
699
Wall Corner Specification Dialog
1 3
2 4
The General tab of the Wall Corner boards. This will not change the width of any
Specification dialog allows you to change existing corner boards.
the dimensions for the corner boards.
Initial Thickness - Specify the
4
Width - Specify the width of the initial thickness of all subsequently
1
selected corner boards. created corner boards. This will not change
the thickness of any existing corner boards.
Thickness - Specify the thickness of
2
the selected corner boards. The Initial Width and Initial Thickness
are not saved with the plan file and will be
Initial Width - Specify the initial
3 reset the next time you run the program.
width of all subsequently created corner
Quoins
Quoins are added the same way as corner Open Item button to open the Quoin
boards. In Plan View select Build> Corner Layout Information dialog and change the
Trim> Quoins and click outside the corner size, layout, and material.
where you want to place quoins. While they
are created the same way as corner boards Hold the shift key to select multiple quoins.
they can usually be distinguished in that they With multiple quoins selected you can delete
will appear larger in Plan View. Refer to the them all, or you can open their dialog and
section on corner boards for more change the size or materials.
information on editing, group selecting or The material for quoins is taken from the
other activities with quoins. wall that it is initially attached to. This
Select quoins while in Plan View with the material will not change if the wall material
Quoins mode active. You cannot drag or is changed, but you may redefine it on the
otherwise move them, but you can delete Material tab of the Quoin Layout
Information dialog.
selected quoins by pressing the Del key.
When a quoins are selected, you can click the
700
Quoins Dialog
Quoins Dialog
Managing
Files
1
Managing
2
Files
5
3
4
6
Managing
7
Files
Width - Specify the long dimension of Staggered - Produce quoins that have
1 6
one quoin. The dimension along the one long side and one short side
other wall will be one-half this value when staggered on opposite sides of the corner.
they are staggered or mirrored.
Mirrored - Produce quoins that
7
Thickness - Specify the amount that alternate having either two long sides or
2
the quoin protrudes from the exterior two short sides.
surface of the wall.
Only one of these check boxes can be
Height - Specify the height for all selected. If you clear both Staggered and
Features
3
quoins. Mirrored you will produce quoins that are of
Other
equal length on both sides of the corner.
Gap - Specify the distance between
4
successive quoins.
Initial Values - Each of the above
5
values can be set for all subsequently
produced quoins. Changing these values will
not change the settings for any existing
quoins. Managing
Delete Items Dialog

Files
Use this dialog to delete all items of a entire plan file. If deleting from a room,
specified type (Such as cabinets or electrical select your choices in the check boxes, and
items) in one room, the current floor or in the
701
then click in that room before exiting the 1. Use the radio button to select the
dialog. The items will be deleted. Delete Scope as Single Room, All
Rooms (current floor only), or All
Floors.
2. In the Delete section, select the check
boxes for the items you wish to delete.
3. Click Select All to select all check
boxes. Click Clear All to clear all
check boxes.
4. Click in the Plan View to delete the
selected items. The dialog will remain
open.
5. Click Done when all selections have
been deleted.
If you select All Rooms or All Floors, you
do not need to click in Plan View. The Done
button will change to OK. Clicking this but-
ton will cause the changes to be made.
Rotate Plan View Dialog

In Plan View select Options> Rotate View windows for Plan Views and CAD Details
to rotate the view of the model. The Rotate may also be rotated in a Layout file.
Plan View dialog will open. Enter the
When the view is rotated, the Cartesian
amount of degrees to rotate the Plan View in
coordinates that are applied to CAD items
the entry box. Degrees can be entered in
are also rotated. If you rotate the Plan View
fractional or decimal units, and in positive or
by 90 degrees the positive X direction will
negative numbers. now be from bottom to top and the positive Y
direction will be from right to left.
If the plan was sent to the layout before

the plan was rotated, the layout view will
still reflect the unrotated Plan View. This
layout view may itself be rotated to reflect
the newly rotated Plan View, or it may be
The text will rotate with the plan, unless you deleted and the rotated plan sent to the
open the Text Entry dialog and check the layout again.
Don't rotate with plan box. Layout
702
Reverse Plan
Reverse Plan
Managing
Files
Reverses your entire plan. The plan is cause the entire model to be rebuilt. This will
reflected right to left about a vertical line. also close any 3D View windows currently
Reverse Plan reverses all floors associated open.
with the current floor. Reversing a plan will
Managing
Files
Plan Check
Plan Check does just what its name suggests. Plan Check Dialog
It checks the currently displayed floor of
your plan for anything that appears to violate
common building codes or practices. It will
Managing
not find all the problems in your plan. It at
Files
least points out areas of your plan that you
should take a look at to see if they could be
improved.
When it is done, respond to any of its
messages that make sense and then run it
again. Most plan errors that are found cause 1. Click Next to ignore this error and pro-
the offending object to be circled. To prevent ceed to the next.
the circled item from being off screen, make 2. Hold suspends Plan Check so you can
sure the entire plan is displayed within the fix the problem. Select Plan Check again
window before you run Plan Check. from the menu, or hit F9, and it takes up
Features
Plan Check only checks for possible code where it left off, with the next error.
Other
violations. With each error that it finds, Plan 3. Done terminates Plan Check.
Check displays a dialog that gives you If this dialog obscures the Plan View, simply
several choices. drag its title bar to move it out of the way. It
will remember its new position and continue
to display there.
Some rooms that have not yet been named
using the Room Specification dialog can be
automatically named by Plan Check.
Hallways, entry halls, clothes closets,
garages, bedrooms, bathrooms and kitchens
Managing
can often be located and named automatic-

Files
ally. Some of these rooms are determined by

their size and shape, and others by their
contents. For example, shelf and rod in a
703
small room indicates a closet, a stove or ref- Several things that can become incorrect as
rigerator indicates a kitchen, a bed a your plan evolves are fixed during Plan
bedroom, etc. If the program cannot name a Check. Some walls in your plan can change
room the Plan Check will circle it and from exterior to interior as they become
suggest that you name it. enclosed by other walls. Doors in these walls
are redrawn without the threshold that marks
The first time Plan Check runs it will
an exterior door. Any wall that changes from
automatically name as many rooms in your
interior to exterior, or becomes a wall
plan as it can and request that you name the
between the house and its attached garage
rest. Do this by double-clicking in the room
has its doors redrawn with a threshold. A
in Select Items mode to display the Room
cabinet, fixture or furniture item that is
Specification dialog. Then select a name for
against a wall due to the wall being moved
the room. The system can do a much better
into it, as opposed to the item being moved,
job of checking if it knows what a room is to
will be attached to the wall.
be used for.
Sun Angle & Shadows

Use the Sun Angle function to create and .
display the shadow cast by a building at any
time during the year. Sun Angles can also be
used as a light source in Render Views.
More than one Sun Angle may be placed in
the same plan to allow the simultaneous dis-
play of shadows at different times. A Sun
Angle can only be specified in a first floor or
foundation plan. Each Sun Angle is repre-
sented in Plan View by a Sun Angle arrow
Sun angle for:

March 1, 1999
12 p.m. (noon)
Coeur d’Alene, ID
The shadow cast by a building at a particular

time and at a particular location can be dis-
played. If no Terrain Perimeter has been cre-
ated, the shadow falls on an imaginary plane
at height zero which is the default height for
704
Sun Angle & Shadows
the first floor. If a Terrain Perimeter exists, pointed by the Latitude and Longitude
Managing
the shadow will be modified to indicate settings. The following table lists latitude
where the real shadow would fall on the and longitude values for some cities:
Files
actual terrain.
Creating Sun Angles

To define a Sun Angle:
Managing
1. Make the first floor the current floor.
Files
2. In Plan View, select CAD> Special>
Sun Angle and click.
3. The Sun Angle Specification dialog
opens. Fill in the options to define the
Managing
Sun Angle, and click OK.
Files
4. A Sun Angle arrow will appear in Plan
View.
The Sun Angle arrow is a marker that shows
you the angle of the sun. Its location does not
affect the calculation of the shadows, it may
be moved if desired. Each Sun Angle can
define the position of the building on the
Earth and the date and time at which the cal-
culations are performed. This position is pin-
Features
Other
Managing
Files
705
Sun Angle Specification
1
2
3
4
5
7 9
8
10
Latitude is measured North or South The previous values default to the settings
1
of the equator. on the Special CAD panel of the Prefer-
Longitude is measured West or East ences dialog.
2
of the Greenwich meridian.
6 In the lower part of the Sun Angle
Common values for latitude, longitude can Specification dialog is a section dis-
be found in any atlas. playing the calculated angles.
Date - Enter a date for each arrow you The Solar altitude angle displays the
3 angle of the sun in degrees above the hori-
create.
zontal plane.
Time - Enter a time for each arrow you
4 The Solar direction angle shows the
create. Define whether or not it should
be adjusted to allow for Daylight Savings angle between true north and the sun's direc-
Time. tion. This is the angle at which the Sun Angle
arrow displays in Plan View.
Time Zone - Specify the time zone.
5 This angle is always measured relative to
north. North is defined by a user specified
north pointer. If you have not created a north
706
Sun Angle & Shadows
pointer, north is assumed to be straight up in Render Data
Managing
the Plan View. If a north pointer is drawn, or
the direction of an existing north pointer is
Files
changed, Sun Angles and their shadows
automatically update.
7 Always Update - Select the check 1

box to have the program update the 2 3
Managing
shadow for this arrow whenever any of the
Files
defining information is changed. When
checked, it slows the system down while the
Sun Angle dialog is displayed. If this is not 4
checked, you can click the Make Shadow
button to generate a new shadow based on You can define if the Sun Angle will be used
Managing
the new information. as a light source in Render Views. Set the
Files
Show Date on Sun Angle - Select
parameters here if you want to use the Sun
8 Angle as a light source in Render Views.
the check box to have the date and time
display on the Sun Angle arrow in the Plan The settings defined on the Render Data tab
View. are not related to how the shadow is dis-
played in Plan View. They only affect Render
Length of Plan Symbol - Enter the
9 Views.
length of the Sun Angle arrow for Plan
View. On - Check this box to select the cur-
1
rent Sun Angle as a rendering light
10 Make Shadow - Select the check box source. If there is more than one defined Sun
to calculate the shadow on screen. The Angle, the renderer selects the first Sun
shadow is a polyline filled with a hatch pat- Angle that is defined as On. To make sure
Features
Other
tern derived from the Sun Angle direction. you are rendering the correct Sun Angle,
No shadow generates if the sun is not above make sure all others do not have this box
the horizon or if the sun is so low on the hori- checked.
zon that the shadow would be extremely Casts Shadow - Check here to have
2
long. If no shadow appears, reset the time to this light source cast shadows. These
noon to test the function. If the shadow shadows are similar to the shadow shown in
appears, your original time setting was too Plan View, but they may render differently
early or too late to generate shadows. based on other light sources.
Intensity - Use this slider bar to
3
define the relative intensity of the light
source. Time of day as set on the Earth Data
Managing
tab, does not affect how the Sun Angle ren-

Files
ders as a light source, but this does.

Color - Select a color for the light
4
source.
707
Deleting Shadows
There are several ways to delete the shadow • In the Sun Angle Specification dialog,
created by a Sun Angle. click Make shadow to delete the
• In Plan View, select and delete the defin- existing and create a new shadow.
ing polyline. • In the Sun Angle Specification dialog,
• In Plan View, select and delete the Sun click the Delete Shadow button.
Angle arrow.
Changing CAD Layer for Sun Angle Arrows and Shadow

Sun Angle arrows are placed on CAD layer 2. Once the selection set is complete, click
20 by default. Shadow polylines, and the the Open Item to open the Edit CAD
hatch are on the same layer as the Sun Angle Item dialog.
arrow from which they are created. If two
3. Click the Line Style button and define
Sun Angle arrows have the Make Shadow
the new layer assignment. Click OK to
option clicked, they will both create a
see the changes in Plan View.
shadow that displays in Plan View.
If you change the arrow’s layer, the related
To change the CAD layer for a Sun Angle shadow polyline does not update to the new
arrow: layer until you reopen the Sun Angle Speci-
1. Group select it with a CAD item, or fication dialog. Check Always Update or
Select it once, then hold down the Shift click Make Shadow and click OK.
key and click the arrow again.
House Wizard
The House Wizard offers an alternative Wizard page, Room Boxes will appear on
way of creating a model of a house. Select the screen representing the rooms you
Tools> House Wizard> Start House created.
Wizard to start the wizard. Starting the
Once the Room Boxes have been created,
House Wizard will take you through several
you must arrange them into your floor plan.
dialog box pages giving you choices of
Try to line up the rooms so they are just
different rooms you might like to include in
touching. Any excessive overlaps may cause
your house. Read the pages closely, as they
your rooms to form incorrectly. You will be
explain each step of the process in more
able to resize the Room Boxes and arrange
detail.
them however you want. Also notice that by
After your final selections are made and you clicking on any of these rooms you will be
click Finish in the Complete House
708
House Wizard
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Features
Other
able to Delete them or Copy them as you
would a fixture or piece of furniture.
Once you have all the rooms in place select
Tools> House Wizard> Build House and
your house will be automatically built. Walls
and doors will be created between the rooms
that you arranged. If you specified a two-
story house you will need to go to the second
floor and select Tools> House Wizard>
Build House to create the second floor.
Managing
The House Wizard will create doorways

Files
as it builds the house. Replace any doors

which are not where you wanted them.
709
Windows Standard Color Dialog
3
1
4
2 5
This dialog is used to select Color in many

3 Click and drag in the color palette area
areas of the program. It is a Windows dialog to dynamically choose a color.
that Chief Architect uses.
4 Adjust the lightness or darkness of the
Click in any one of the Base colors selected color.
1
boxes to select it as the new color.
5 The current color selection displays
2 Click in one of the Custom colors here.Click Add to Custom Colors
boxes to define which box will contain to add the color to the Custom Colors palette.
the new custom color to be defined.
710
Chapter 41:
General Tutorials
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Plot Plan (in a CAD Detail Window):
Create a house. Save the plan. Be in that plan at the bottom to stay in the dialog for the
when you do the following: next value.)
Managing
1. Open a CAD Detail window (CAD> Distance = 122.21', Angle = N82d49'E
Files
CAD Detail) from the Plan View. Distance = 98.75', Angle = N2d17'W
2. Name it Plot Plan. Distance = 143.56', Angle = N87d47'W
3. Create a plan footprint (CAD> Special> Distance = 122.33', Angle = S12d20'E
Plan Footprint).
8. Align the property and the house. If you
Managing
4. Draw a North Arrow straight up want the house at an angle, select the
Files
(CAD>Special>North Pointer). edge of the footprint that you want to
5. Place a point to the lower left as a start define the angle of, open the polyline for
point for the property line. The entire specification, check the Polyline
property line may be relocated later, so Angle box, and enter a new value. The
don't worry about exactness. entire footprint will adjust to the new
6. Once the point is on the screen (it should angle, although the actual plan does not.
be a red x), double-click the Line but- 9. Select the property line, open it for spec-
ton to bring up the New Line End dia- ification, click the Style button in the
log. lower left of the Edit CAD Item dialog,
and check the boxes to show angles and
lengths. Click OK until you are back to
Tutorials
General
the plot plan.
10. Note that it defaults to having lengths of
inches and angles in regular degrees.
Most property lines are shown in bear-
ings and decimal feet.
11. Double-click the Select Items button
to open the Preferences dialog. Click
7. Using the numbers that follow, enter the
the Line Properties panel, and select
following information to define the
property line (pressing the Next button
711
the correct radio buttons to show bear-

ings and decimal feet.
12. Now the property should display prop- the property offset, now is the time to do
erly. If you want to add details such as it. (Concentric copy)
Pentagon
1. In Architectural mode, double-click the lower scroll bar displays the length and
Select Items button to display the angle as the wall is drawn).
Plan Defaults dialog. Enter the follow- (The increment is calculated by dividing
ing Additional angles. Click OK. 360 degrees by the number of sides. In this
case, 360 divided by 5 = 72 degrees.)
If your pentagon is horizontal on the bottom
edge, and if you drag the walls in a counter-
clockwise direction, the first wall will be at
72 degrees, the next at 72+72 =144 degrees,
etc.) Close the pentagon with the last wall.
Note: The walls must be in increments of

72 degrees to successfully complete the
2. Using the Wall tool, draw 5 walls pentagon.
approximately the same length at 72
degree increments to each other (the 3. Click the Dimension button, then
information window in the middle of the
click the Automatic Dimensions tool.
toolbar or in the info area above the
712
Pentagon
This will place external automatic
Managing
dimensions around your pentagon.
Files
If the pentagon will not auto-dimension,
first make sure that it is closed, with no
gaps between the walls. If this is not the
problem, double-click the Dimension
Managing
button to display the Dimension Setup
dialog. Set the Min Dimen. Area to a
Files
smaller value. Click OK. Click the Auto-
matic Exterior Dimension tool
again.
Managing
Files
When drawing walls at angles other than
2b 3b horizontal or vertical, do the following:
Draw the first wall. Select it, grab an end
handle and pull the next wall at the new
angle. A clean connection will be created
1a 2a between the two walls. The second wall
Managing
will be created with all the same attributes
Files
as the first. Continue pulling new walls
from the end of the previous wall until
done. This is better than simply drawing
1b 5a 3a 4b angled walls using the Wall tool.
4a
5b
4. Select Wall 1 (marked 1a), then click on
the previous dimension (marked 1b).
The Set Dimension Line dialog will
display. Enter the exact length, then
Tutorials
General
click OK. Next, select Wall 2 (marked
2a), then click on the previous dimen-
sion (marked 2b) entering the same
value as for the first wall. Do the same
with Wall 3.
5. When that dimension is entered, the last
two will automatically jump to the
matching value. The pentagon is done.
713
Hexagon
2b
1b 1a
3b
6a 2a
5a 3a
6b 4a 4b
5b
1. In Architectural mode, double-click the will place external automatic dimensions
Select Items button to display the around your hexagon.
Plan Defaults dialog. Check 15
degree allow angles, then click OK.
2. Using the Wall tool, draw 6 walls

approximately the same length at 60
degree increments to each other (360
divided by 6 = 60 degree increments).
Close the hexagon with the last wall.
3. Click the Dimension tool, then click
the Automatic Dimensions tool. This

the previous dimension (marked 1b).
The Set Dimension Line dialog will
display. Enter the exact length, (8 feet in
this case) then click OK.
the previous dimension (marked 2b)
entering the same value as for the first
wall.
714
Adjusting Angled Walls and Polylines
6. Continue around in sequence. When will automatically jump to the correct
Managing
only two walls remain to be edited, they value.
Files
Adjusting Angled Walls and Polylines
2c
Managing
Files
3 2
1a 1 3a
2a 2b
Managing
1b 1c
Files
Angled walls and angled polylines are
2 The sides may also be adjusted. Select
adjusted in a similar fashion. Edge 2, then click on the dimension
marked 2a, 2b or 2c. Replacing that
1 If the wall or polyline is selected along dimension value will move Edge 2
this edge, the edge will be adjusted in
horizontally.
and out no matter which of the dimensions is
Managing
used to move it. Select Edge 1 then click
3 Given the drawn dimensions, Edge 3
Files
either on dimension 1a, 1b, or 1c, depending may be adjusted using only dimensions
on which value needs to be specified. The 2a and 2c. Notice that, as Edge 3 moves
edge will move in the direction of the horizontally, dimension 3a will never change
double-headed arrow. since both adjacent edges are parallel.
Positioning Walls
As shown in the pictures below, Invisible snap into place, positioned by the Invisible
walls can line up straight walls that are wall.
otherwise not connected. If you do not want
to use Invisible walls to line up straight
Tutorials
General
walls, you can make their distances to a third
wall the same.
The picture below shows that two walls that
form the living room are not in line with each
other. An invisible (room def) wall is drawn
from one of them toward the other. It An invisible (room def) wall is appropriate
attaches to the end of the wall it is drawn for this example, since the living room and
from, and cannot yet attach to the other wall. hallway are separate rooms. The picture
If the other wall is now moved a little, it will above right shows the corners where the
715
living room and hallway meet replaced with The special bay structure is an example in
diagonal walls. A doorway in a single wall which an Invisible wall works well. The
would not work here. custom bay structure has doors in its sides.
Two Invisible walls keep the visible walls
The second dotted wall allows us to avoid
lined up.
dividing the hall into two rooms. A normal
wall could be used in place of the Invisible
wall, but it would need to be erased once the
diagonal walls were positioned.
716
Chapter 42:
Manual Roof Tutorials
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Gable Roof
Gable roofs are easy to model with manually
drawn roof planes by using the Roof tool and
the Join Roof Planes tool. Using the tech-
Managing
niques described, follow the step-by-step
Files
exercise which follows.
1. Draw 4 walls in a clockwise direction. Adjust the size to match the picture above.
Managing
Tutorials
Files
Roof
Managing
Files
2. Draw roof planes on the opposing walls. Make sure the baseline is on the outside edge of
the wall, and that the roof planes slope toward each other.
Tutorials
Roof
717
3. Select the first roof plane along its highest edge, (the ridge), and click the Join Roof
Planes button on the Edit toolbar. Then select the second roof plane by its highest edge,
(the ridge).
4. The program will stretch the roof planes so that they meet along the ridge. Note the clean
ridge line.
5. Drag the edges of the roof planes beyond the exterior walls.
6. Select each roof plane by clicking on the overhang. Click on the overhang dimension and
change it to 18".
718
Adding a Gable
7. Take a look at the house in 3D. If the gable wall or the fascia is missing, as shown below,
Managing
proceed to step 8.
Files
Managing
Files
8. Double-click the Roof tool to open the Build Roof dialog. To update the model select the
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceiling and Build Fascia, Gutter check boxes. Do not select
Managing
the Build Roof Planes check box or else the manually created roof plane may be lost.
Files
Generate an Overview to see the results.
Adding a Gable
Once the gable roof plan is complete you can
Managing
add a room to the plan and model a gable
Files
roof over it that connects to the main roof.
1. Select the Wall tool and draw the three walls that define the additional room. Then select
the Roof tool and draw the two roof planes that will create the gable roof.
Managing
Files
Tutorials
Roof
2. Select the ridge of on of the smaller roof planes and then select the Join Roof Planes tool
on the Edit toolbar and then select the other small roof plane. The two roof planes will
meet at the ridge.
719
3. Now you must locate the points where the two smaller roof planes meet the main roof
plane. Select the main roof plane that will attach to the two smaller roof planes then click
on the ridge between the two smaller roof planes. A red ’X’ will appear. This is the point at
which the ridge between the two smaller roof planes meets the main roof plane. Repeat the
steps but instead click on the eaves of the roof planes. This will locate the points at which
the gutters will meet.
4. Now you must adjust the shape of roof plane 2 and roof plane 3 to complete the gable and
locate the valleys. Select the roof plane by the edge that will become the valley. This will
restrict the movement along the ridge line and the gutter line. Repeat the process for both
roof plane 2 and roof plane 3. Since the roof planes all have the same pitch, the valleys cre-
ated are at a 45 degree angle to the ridges.
5. Once the small gable roof planes are complete you must place three breaks along the gutter
edge of roof plane 1 in order to model it around the gable.
720
Adding a Gable
6. Once you have added the breaks and adjusted roof plane 1, it should look something like
Managing
this.
Files
Managing
Files
7. Select Edge 1 in the picture above, click the Make Parallel button and click on Edge 3.
Managing
The roof plane edges will become parallel. Repeat the steps with edges 2 and 4, when you
Files
are finished the Plan View should look like this.
Managing
Files
8. Now you can use the Set Dimension Line dialog or the Join Roof Planes tool to com-
Managing
plete the roof plan. Select Edge 1, click on the dimension between Edge 1 and 3, and enter
Files
Tutorials
Roof
721
zero in the Set Dimension Line dialog as shown below. The two lines will be placed on
top of one another.
9. Now try the other method with edges 2 and 4. Select Edge 2, click the Join Roof Planes
button and select Edge 4, the roof planes will meet and the lines will be placed on top of
each other.
the Build Roof Planes check box or else the manually created roof plane may be lost.
Generate an Overview to see the results.
You can enable automatic functions for Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings when generating a 3D
View. Select 3D> 3D Preferences to open the 3D Preferences dialog. Access the Include tab
and select the Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings check box.
“L” Shaped Roof Planes

When you learn to turn a rectangular roof
section into an “L” shaped roof section, you
have the skills to take the full advantage of
the manual roof editing capabilities of Chief
Architect.
722
1. Select the Roof tool, draw a roof baseline and click in the upslope direction to create a
Managing
rectangular roof plane. You do not need a wall to locate it. Click on the lower edge (DC) to
select it.
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
2. Click the Break tool, and then click the roof section along edge AB to add a break point X.
Files
Managing
Files
3. Select the roof section again along DC. Note the new handle at X. Grab the grip at B1 and
drag it to B2.
Managing
Files
Tutorials
Roof
723
4. Select the roof plane along edge DC. Click the Break tool and add another break along
edge XB2 at Y.
5. Select the roof along DC. Grab point Y and drag it so you have an approximation of a “L”
shaped roof plane.
6. Draw a wall or CAD line anywhere on the screen either vertically or horizontally. Any
edge of a roof plane within 20 degrees parallel or perpendicular of the wall can be auto-
matically aligned using that wall. If you need a 45 degree edge, draw a 45 degree wall to
use for alignment.
7. Select the edge of the roof plane to make parallel or perpendicular. Pick the Make Parallel
tool and click on the wall or CAD line.
724
8. Repeat the steps with the other edges until all sides of the roof plane are either Parallel or
Managing
Perpendicular to each other.
Files
Managing
Files
9. To check your work, select each edge of the roof plane. When a roof edge is parallel to
Managing
another edge, a temporary dimension will appear when it is selected.
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
10. Manually drawn roof sections do not automatically have fascias along all exposed sides.
To add a fascia Double-click the Roof tool to open the Build Roof dialog. Select the Build
Files
Fascia, Gutter check box and click OK. Generate an Overview to see the results.
Tutorials
Roof
725
Dutch Gable
A Dutch gable roof can be easily modeled modeling the roof pictured above over a
with four roof planes by using the Join Roof rectangular building that is 24’ wide by 34’
Planes tool and the Make Parallel tool. For long.
the purpose of this exercise we will be
1. Click the Roof button and draw four roof planes over the rectangular building.
2. Join the edges of the roof planes that will meet at the corners using the Join Roof
Planes button. Select Edge A, click the Join Roof Planes button and click on the
726
Dutch Gable
Edge B. Select Edge C, click the Join Roof Planes button and click on the Edge D. The
Managing
hips will be created as shown below.
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
3. When Roof Plane 2 is selected by clicking Edge G, a dimension appears between Edge G
and the wall parallel to it. Use this dimension to locate the edge six feet from the wall.
Managing
Click on Edge G and click on the 5’-6” dimension. The Set Dimension Line dialog will
Files
open. Enter 6’-0” in the dialog box.
4. Select Edge E, click the Join Roof Planes tool and then select Edge F to create the
Ridge EF between Roof Plane 1 and Roof Plane 3. Once you have joined the two hips and
Managing
Files
Tutorials
Roof
727
the ridge, you will be left with a hole in the roof between Roof Planes 1, 2 and 3. (See pic-
ture below).
5. Select Roof Plane 1 and click the Break Button on the Edit toolbar. Click on point A. You
have now added an edge to Roof Plane 1.
6. When you select Roof Plane 1 by clicking on the edge between points A and C a handle
will appear, (Point B), in the middle indicating that this is an edge.
728
Dutch Gable
7. Select Roof Plane 1 along Edge AC. and drag point C to the right. Its movement should be
Managing
restricted along Ridge EF. Drag the corner so that line AC is within 20 degrees of parallel
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
to the edge of Roof Plane 2.
Managing
Files
8. Select Roof Plane 1 by clicking on edge AC, click the Make Parallel button and click
on one of the walls. Edge AC should now be parallel to the upper, or left, edge of Roof
Plane.
9. Once it is parallel a dimension will appear between the two edges whenever one of them is
selected. Select edge AC and click on the dimension (1’-6”) and enter 0" (zero) in the dia-
Managing
Files
log box.
Tutorials
Roof
729
10. Edge AC of Roof Plane 1 will now be above Edge G of Roof Plane 2. Repeat the steps
with Roof Plane 3 to complete the Roof Plan.

11. Generate a 3D Full Overview to see the Dutch gable.
Adding Attic Walls to Fill Gable

Once the roof plan above is complete, the attic plan and adjust the hip roof planes to
Dutch gable ends will remain open. The complete the shell of the building. In order to
program will not automatically create attic locate the walls precisely, you will need to
walls to fill in the space in the gable. In order add CAD lines in the attic plan to utilize
to fill in the voids you must add walls in the dimensions locating the walls.
730
Adding Attic Walls to Fill Gable
1. Start with the completed Dutch gable roof plan with the gable ends 6 feet in from the exte-
Managing
rior walls.
Files
Managing
Files
Managing
2. Click the Floor Up button in Plan View to open the Attic plan. Since the four hip roofs
Files
bear on the exterior walls, there are no walls in the Attic Plan. Click the Reference Floor
toggle to see the walls of the first floor.
3. Select the Wall tool and draw two walls across the width of the attic. Draw the wall on the
right from top to bottom and the wall on the left from bottom to top of the screen. This will
place the exterior side of the wall to the outside. Make sure they are inside of the gable
Managing
ends, but do not worry about they exact location. After drawing the walls you must toggle
Files
Managing
Files
to CAD mode and draw CAD lines that align with the walls below. The CAD Lines will be
used to locate the attic walls with the correct overhang at the gable ends.
4. Once the walls and CAD lines are drawn, click the Manual Dimension tool and draw a
dimension line perpendicular to the attic wall and CAD line.
Tutorials
Roof
731
5. In Architectural mode, select the wall and click on the dimension line to locate the attic
wall. In this case the fascia of the gable end is six feet from the exterior wall. To create a
two foot overhang the attic walls must be located eight feet from the exterior walls.
6. Since the attic walls are two feet away from the hip ends of the roof, the roof planes must
be stretched to meet the attic walls. In order to select the roof planes and stretch them you
must click the Floor Down button to return to the first floor. When the first floor is active
you will see the roof planes in Plan View with the attic walls displayed with the Reference
Floor.
7. One at a time, select the edge of the hip roof plane and drag is from the center handle to
align with the exterior side of the attic wall. Attic wall lengths adjust as desired. This will
complete the Dutch Gable roof plan.
the Build Roof Planes check box or else the manually created roof planes may be lost.
732
Chapter 43:
Auto Roof Tutorials
Auto Roof
Tutorials
Story and a Half
There are several methods available to create become dormers and three of them will
a 1 1/2 story Cape Cod style house. The become closets.
following tutorial leads you through the steps
Roof
Managing
Tutorials
required to create a Cape Cod style house
Files
with a story-and-a-half, or living space in the
Auto
attic.
Managing
Files
3. Use the Wall Break tool to divide
the long interior wall into 5 segments. In
Wall mode, click the Wall Break
Managing
tool, click once at each intersection of the
Files
1. Draw the floor plan. For this tutorial a walls that divide the dormers and the
rectangular 30' x 40' first floor was cre- closets. Press ESC to exit the Wall
ated. The second floor plan was built Break tool. Double-click on the inte-
with all exterior walls aligning above the rior wall of each dormer and select the
first floor and a roof pitch of 8 in 12. Invisible check box on the General tab
Managing
2. On the second floor create 5 rooms of the Wall Specification dialog box.
Files
across the front of the house. As shown in This enables you to separately name the
the illustration. Two of these rooms will rooms but not see a wall in 3D Views.
4. To define and create the gable dormers
on the exterior, the walls must be broken
and the segments of wall supporting the
Tutorials
gable dormers must be specified as Full

Roof
733
Gable Walls on the Roof tab of the Wall Select the dormer rooms and set the ceiling
Specification dialog. heights to 96".
5. In Wall mode, click the Wall Break 7. Double-click the Roof tool to open the
tool, click once at each side of the dor- Build Roof dialog. Define a pitch for the
mers at the intersection with the exterior main roof so that the ridge will be higher
wall. Press ESC to exit the Wall than ridge on the dormers (try 12 in 12).
Break tool. Double-click on each 8. Click OK to model the roof planes.
wall segment that needs to be defined as Once the roof planes are correct select the
Full Gable Wall. Select the Roof tab of Lock Roof Plane check box on the
the Wall Specification dialog box, select Roof tab of the Build Roof dialog.
the Full Gable Wall check box and
9. To create the flat ceiling in the main area
press OK.
define the ceiling height in that area to
6. You must define the ceiling heights on 96", and select the Ceiling Over This
the second story to define the elevation of Room check box on the Structure tab.
the roof planes. Select each room, except Click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
the dormers, and set the ceiling height to button.
24". On the Structure tab clear the Ceil-
ing over this room check box.
734
L-Shaped House
L-Shaped House
Auto Roof
Tutorials
1 2
Draw gable line Drag the gable line
across body of house beyond the wall
from outside to out- about 12” (300mm).
side of walls.
Managing
3 4
Files
Full Gable wall.
Managing
Gable line
Files
The Gable/Roof Line can be used to side of one wall to the outside of the
Managing
model a “L”-shaped house with gable roofs. opposite wall. This Gable/Roof Line will
Files
define a gable with a span equal to the
1. Draw an L-shaped house like the one in length of the Gable/Roof Line.
the illustrations.
4. Drag the Gable/Roof line to the right,
2. Select the two walls which are complete and place it less than 12" beyond the
gables, shown in illustration #3, and click wall, as shown in illustration #2.
Managing
the Open Item button. Select the
Files
Roof tab of the Wall Specification dia- 5. Double-click the Build Roof button
log and select the Full Gable Wall to open the Build Roof dialog. Select the
check box. Build Roof Planes, Rebuild Walls/
Floor/Ceilings and Build Fascia,
3. To create a gable over the long end wall
Gutter check boxes and click OK. The
that is only partially gabled you must use
Managing
result should look like illustration #4.

a Gable/Roof Line. In Roof mode
Files
This same technique can be used for “U”-

select the Gable/Roof Line tool and shaped or “H”-shaped houses.
draw a gable line as shown in illustration
#1. The line must be drawn from the out-
735
Variations using Full Gable Walls

The following samples can be used as 2. Select the walls filled with solid black
exercises to understand the Full Gable and click the Open Item button.
Wall definition. In each illustration the walls
3. Select the Roof tab of the Wall
defined as Full Gable Wall are filled with
Specification dialog and select the Full
solid black.
Gable Wall check box.
In each case: 4. Select the Build tab and select the Build
1. Draw the illustrated floor plan. Roof Planes, Rebuild Walls/Floor/
Ceilings and Build Fascia, Gutter
check boxes and click OK.
Gable Variation #1
Full Gable Walls
Gable Variation #2
Full Gable Walls
736
Shed Roofs
Gable Variation #3
Auto Roof
Tutorials
Full Gable Walls
Gable Variation #4
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
Full Gable Walls
Managing
Shed Roofs
Files
High Shed/Gable Walls
Managing
Files
Managing
Shed roofs are modeled over walls with the the highest wall of the shed. The two side
Files
High Shed/Gable walls definition. To create walls will be modeled as rake walls.
a Shed roof, define three of the four walls to
be High Shed/Gable. The middle wall will be
737
Alternate Method for Shed Roofs

If a Full Gable Wall is bounded by two High
Shed/Gable Walls the result is the same as
the illustration above.
Double Shed Roofs

High Shed/Gable Walls
Full Gable Walls
Note: The alternate

method works as well
Opposing Shed Roofs
Full Gable Walls
Ceiling Ht.
of room
To create a building with shed roofs sloping above illustration, the lower roof meets
perpendicular to each other follow the the middle wall at height of 11’-4’. The
illustrations above. ceiling of the higher section was defined
as 11’6”).
1. Define the four side walls as Full Gable
Walls and the shared high wall as High 3. Select the Build tab and select the Build
Shed/Gable. Roof Planes, Rebuild Walls/Floor/
Ceilings and Build Fascia, Gutter
2. Define the ceiling height of the higher
check boxes and click OK.
side to start above the height where the
lower roof meets the middle wall. (In the
738
Saltbox Roof
Saltbox Roof
Auto Roof
Tutorials
A saltbox is a gable roof with the ridge off
center because there is a different pitch on
each of the two roof planes.
1 Full Gable Walls

3 Build floors/
ceilings with
pitch set to 6:12
Managing
Files
2 Define lower wall as
a 14:12 pitch
Managing
4Take a full overview
Files
Varying Pitches
Managing
The pitch of a roof plane is defined in the
Files
wall that it is sloping up from. Once the roof
plane has been modeled, the Roof Plane
Edit dialog can be used to redefine the pitch
as well as other parameters of the roof plane.
Below are examples of different roof plans
Managing
created by defining different pitches in the
Files
Wall Specification dialog.
Managing
Files
739
Varying Pitches #1
Full Gable walls

Shallower pitch defined in this wall.
Varying Pitches #2
Full Gable walls.
Steeper pitch (8:12) defined in this wall. Default is 6:12.
Different Pitches Variation #3
Full Gable walls.
Shallower pitch (4:12) defined in this wall. Default is 6:12.
740
Mansard Roof
Mansard Roof
Auto Roof
Tutorials
A mansard roof is a hip roof with two slopes wall. Usually the lower slope is steeper than
defined for each roof plane. The second the upper slope.
slope begins at the same height above each
Managing
Files
2
Managing
Files
Managing
Files
3
Managing
Files
Check 2nd pitch.
Define pitch for 2nd roof.
Define height to start.
Managing
Files
1. Create the exterior walls. in 12 is used) The first pitch starts at the
2. Build a hip roof using the default roof wall and will continue up until it reaches
pitch. (For this example a first pitch of 10
741
the height defined to start the second 7. Close the view and return to the Plan
pitch. View.
3. The second pitch starts at that point and 8. Group select the walls and click the
finishes the roof. Open Item button.
4. Generate a Section/Elevation View 9. On the Roof tab of the Wall
through the ridge. Specification dialog select the 2nd Pitch
5. Activate the CAD facility and click the check box, define a second pitch of 6:12,
and define the height at which the second
Dimension button.
pitch starts at.
6. Drag a dimension from the first floor up
10. Select the Build Roof Planes,
to the height where the pitch needs to
Rebuild Walls/Floor/Ceilings and
change. Record the dimension height dis-
Build Fascia, Gutter check boxes and
played in the toolbar’s information box.
click OK.
742
Gambrel
Gambrel
Auto Roof
Tutorials
A gambrel roof is a gable roof with two
pitches defined for each roof plane.
Full Gable walls. Height to start

second pitch.
Managing
Files
2
Managing
Files
Check the box for 2nd
pitch.
Managing
2nd pitch (6:12).
Files
1. Create the exterior walls. 5. Drag a dimension up to the height where
2. Define the two end walls as Full Gable the pitch needs to change. Record the
Wall on the Roof tab of the Wall dimension height displayed in the tool-
Managing
Specification dialog. Select the Roof tab bar’s information box.
Files
define a pitch of 10 in 12 and select the 6. Close the view and return to the Plan
Build Roof Planes, Rebuild Walls/ View.
Floor/Ceilings and Build Fascia, 7. Group select the two side walls and click
Gutter check boxes and click OK.
the Open Item button.
Managing
3. Generate a Section/Elevation View 8. On the Roof tab of the Wall

through the ridge.
Files
Specification dialog select the 2nd Pitch

4. Activate the CAD facility and click the check box, define a second pitch of 6:12,
Dimension button. and define the height at which the second
743
pitch starts at (the height recorded in step Build Fascia, Gutter check boxes and
5). Select the Build Roof Planes, click OK.
Rebuild Walls/Floor/Ceilings and
Gull Wing
A gull wing roof has two pitches defined for
each roof plane with the first pitch shallower
than the second pitch.
1
.
Full Gable walls.
Height to change
second pitch
Check Box for 2nd pitch.

Define 2nd pitch (12:12).
Height to start 2nd pitch (13’)
Follow the same steps as above for the

Gambrel roof, but this time define the second
pitch to be greater than the first pitch.
744
Half Hip
Half Hip
Auto Roof
Tutorials
Full Gable walls.
Half Hip roofs are created by defining a 2nd 4. On the Roof tab of the Wall
pitch in the Wall Specification for a Full Specification dialog select the 2nd Pitch
Gable Wall. check box, define a pitch for the half hip
Managing
and define the height at which the half
1. Draw a rectangular building as shown
hip will begin (The height will be the top
Files
above.
plate height of the walls supporting the
2. Group select the two end walls and click half hip roof.
the Open Item button. 5. Select the Build tab and select the Build
3. On the Roof tab of the Wall Roof Planes, Rebuild Walls/Floor/
Managing
Specification dialog select the Full Ceilings and Build Fascia, Gutter
Files
Gable Wall check box. check boxes and click OK.
Gable Dormer
1st floor refer-
Managing
Knee Wall
enced (light lines).
Files
Full Gable Wall
Managing
Knee Wall
Files
1. To create a gable dormer create a two- 4. Use the Break Wall tool to break the
story house with the second floor plan knee wall attached to the gable dormer to
shown above. open up the dormer.
2. Define the labeled walls as Knee Walls. 5. Delete the broken piece of knee wall.
Managing
3. To create a dormer, define the front dor- Rebuild Walls/Floor/Ceilings and Build
Files
mer wall as Full Gable but do not define Roof Planes.

the side walls, except to define the indi- 6. Generate a Full Overview .
vidual pitch over those walls.
745
7. Be sure that the knee walls and Full 1. Select the roof and click the Open
gable walls are still specified as they Item button to display the Roof Plane
were before. Edit dialog.
The main roof will be modeled on the first
2. Since more than one floor exists, there
floor, but the dormer roof will be modeled on
will be a check box in the lower right to
the second floor. You may want the roof to
allow you to move the roof lines so they
display in Plan View in it entirety. You can
display in Plan View on a different floor.
do this by moving any roof plane to a
If you selected a roof plane on the 1st
different floor.
floor, check the box to move the display
of the roof plane up the 2nd floor.
Attached roof planes will move with it.
Shed Dormer
1st floor referenced
in light gray
Shallower 4:12 pitch only
Both Side walls Full Gable (or High Shed/Gable).

To create a Shed Dormer, start with the 5. Delete the broken piece of knee wall.
second floor plan used in the previous Rebuild Walls/floor/ceilings and Build
tutorial. Roof Planes.
1. On the second floor, draw walls to create 6. Generate a Full Overview .
a small dormer. The main roof will be modeled on the first
2. Define the front dormer wall to have a floor, but the dormer roof will be modeled on
shallower pitch (4:12 as opposed to the the second floor. You may want the roof to
12:12 for the default pitch), and make display in Plan View in it entirety. You can
sure no check boxes are selected in the do this by moving any roof plane to a
Roof tab of the Wall Specification dia- different floor.
log for that front shed dormer wall. 1. Select the roof and click the Open
3. Define both side walls for the shed dor- Item to display the Roof Plane Edit
mer as Full Gable or High Shed/ dialog.
Gable.
2. If you selected a roof plane on the 1st
4. Use the Break Wall tool to break the floor, check the box to move the display
knee wall attached to the shed dormer to of the roof plane up the 2nd floor.
open up the dormer. Attached roof planes will move with it.
746
Glossary
Glossary
3D Acceleration: Some computers have anti-aliasing: The automatic removal of
graphics cards that have been designed the jagged appearance (aliasing) produced
specifically to improve the performance of by diagonal lines, curves or circles when
3D graphics applications. Such cards are display resolution is too coarse to hide the
said to be accelerated, and will give users stair-stepped appearance of an image or
improved performance when using the display.
render feature of Chief Architect. apex: The top or peak or highest point of a
3D Home Architect: The consumer ver- pyramidal or conical shape.
sion of Chief Architect which allows a apron (window): A piece of trim typically
user to do a preliminary design of a house. placed on a wall below a window sill.
Managing
absolute location: The location of a point arc: A curved line segment representing a
Files
in plan coordinates, or the horizontal dis- portion of a circle.
tance (x) and vertical distance (y) from the
arc angle: The included angle of an arc. It
plan origin which is at (0,0).
can be measured between the two lines
Adobe Acrobat Reader: A software going from the center of an arc to the arc
application which can be used to read the start point and end point.
Managing
electronic version of the Chief Architect
arc length: The length measured along an
Files
manual.
arc. This should not be confused with the
alcove (minimum): The minimum alcove chord length which is the measurement of
width specifies the minimum width of a the straight line between the arc end points
recessed area in an exterior wall which and is always shorter then the arc length.
will be noticed by the automatic roof gen-
Managing
attenuation: The rate at which the light
erator. Any alcove that is less than the
Files
intensity drops off as a result of the dis-
specified width will be treated as thought
tance from the light source. The farther
the wall continues straight across it.
away a surface is from a light source the
ambient light: The amount of light that less intense the lighting effects will be
appears to illuminate a rendered view from that light source if its attenuated. The
Managing
without any other light sources. It has no rate at which this intensity drops off can
position or direction and illuminates all
Files
be specified with the light's 3 attenuation

surfaces equally. coefficients.
753
automatic reach: Specifies how far an section creation line are drawn in the cross
item can be from a dimension line, mea- section view. When back clipping is
sured perpendicularly, and still be located turned off the ending point only defines
by it. In this case, it is how far an auto- the direction in which you are looking.
matic dimension line will “reach” to backdrop: A picture (bitmap file) placed in
locate items along exterior walls that are the background of any 3D or render view.
set back.
backsplash: A vertical portion of counter
automatic roof generator: Builds a roof top or tile typically used where base cabi-
automatically using the information nets are against a wall.
within walls and in the Build Roof dialog.
baluster: A vertical railing member which
auto save: When using the auto save fea- runs between the handrail and the floor or
ture, Chief Architect will automatically bottom rail (shoe).
save the current plan at specified time
baseboard: A molding which goes around
intervals. If you exit normally from Chief
a room at the base of the walls.
Architect, any auto save files are deleted.
If you exit abnormally, such as from a sys- base cabinet: A cabinet that typically rests
tem crash or power failure, the auto save on the floor, has a toe kick, and has a
file will be made available the next time countertop.
you restart Chief. baseline: A roof section's baseline is the
auto snap: When using the auto snap fea- line in 3D space around which the roof
ture, the start and end points of any item section pivots as you alter the roof sec-
being drawn will attempt to “snap” to tion's pitch. Drawn over a wall's exterior
other locations within the specified screen surface, the baseline may also be drawn
distance. Also, lines and arcs will connect over a CAD line or at the corner or edge of
end to end to form polylines. an existing roof section.
awning window: A window in which the batten: A small rectangular piece of wood,
sash is hinged horizontally at the top and usually oriented vertically, that covers the
swings outward at the bottom to open. seam between adjacent siding boards.
Also known as a top-hung window. bay window: A composite window con-
axonometric view: A view of an architec- structed from three wall segments each
tural model that represents a true, head-on containing a single window called a com-
view of the front faces of the model. In ponent window. The first and last wall
Chief, it is produced from a plan or full segments are usually at some angle to the
Overview set to a front elevation through center wall segment and the wall which
the view angle dialog box. A front eleva- contains the bay window.
tion produced by a Cross section is also an beam (wall): A 2D representation of an
axonometric view. exposed ceiling beam that appears in a
back clip: When using the back clip cross Plan View. A beam does not appear in
section feature, only the items between the other views and its use is being replaced
starting point and ending point of the cross by framing members or soffits which do.
754
bearing: A horizontal angular direction ditions that are based strictly on true (1) or
which is usually specified with reference false (0). Common operations are OR and
to true north which is determined by the AND.
north pointer. bow window: A composite window con-
bearing line: A CAD line or open polyline structed from multiple, equal length wall
is used to define areas over which framing segments forming an overall curve. Each
members will break, such as over load- wall segment contains a single window
Glossary
bearing walls or beams. called a component window. A bow win-
bifold door: A door consisting of two dow may have between two and twenty
hinged panels folding to one side of a door components.
opening. Usually used for interior closet box window: A bay window whose two
doors. side components are perpendicular to it's
bird’s-eye view: A view from above simi- containing wall.
lar to what a bird would see if it were fly- break wall: The process of breaking a
ing over and looking down. Also, a top straight wall section into multiple wall
view when using an overview. sections that can be modified individually.
birdsmouth: A notch that is cut from the bridging: A short horizontal member fixed
bottom of a rafter where it falls over the between two studs in a wall. Sometimes
Managing
wall's top plate. called fire blocking of just blocking.
Files
bit: Contraction of Binary Digit. (either a byte: Contraction of BinarY digiT Eight. (A
1 or 0). group of eight binary digits). One com-
16, 32, 64, 128 bit: (computing, applica- puter byte can store a single character (let-
tions and color) Refers to computers and ter or digit). A kilobyte (KB) is 1024 bytes
applications that are capable of handling and a megabyte (MB) is 1,048,576 bytes.
Managing
packages of data in grouped sizes of bits. cabinet module: A single cabinet object
Files
bitmap (.bmp): A standard Windows file which can be adjusted individually. When
format that can be used to represent data multiple cabinet modules are attached
as a picture. These files can be very large together they will appear to be one cabinet
when representing a large screen area at a but are still treated as separate objects.
high color resolution since they are often CAD: Computer Aided Design or Computer
Managing
uncompressed. Aided Drafting. In Chief Architect, CAD
Files
Boolean Algebra: [after George Bool is usually a reference to any of the 2D
(1815-64)] a mathematical system origi- entities that can be drawn such as lines,
nally devised for the analysis of symbolic arcs, circles, boxes, etc.
logic, in which all variables have the value CAD block: A way of grouping multiple
Managing
of either zero or one. Widely used in digi- 2D CAD entities together so that they
tal computers. behave as a single object for the purposes
Files
Boolean operations: Binary logic opera- of moving, copying, and editing.

tors used by a computer to calculate con-
755
CAD detail: A CAD detail is a namable casement window: A window which piv-
window for saving plan specific CAD ots vertically on one side to open. Also
drawings such as plot plans, cross sec- known as a side-hung window.
tions, etc. cathedral ceiling: A ceiling which follows
CAD facility: The features in Chief Archi- the underside of the roof or a sloping cus-
tect which allow users to draw lines, arcs, tom ceiling section. It is not flat like a nor-
and other 2D entities. mal ceiling.
CAD layer: A storage area for CAD items, chair rail: A molding which typically goes
soffits, dimension lines, and text items, around a room at the height of the top of a
identified by a number. All items are chair back. It was traditionally used to
grouped by their layer and can be manipu- protect walls from getting damaged from
lated (displayed, recolored, etc.) as a chairs.
group. chamfer: A corner which has been beveled
callout: A plan symbol drawn as a circle, or “broken” at 45 degrees. Two boards
square, etc. containing a code referring to butt-joined with chamfered corners will
another section and/or page in a plan set. form a “v” joint. The chamfer tool creates
camera: A camera represents a perspective, a chamfer at the corner where two
elevation, or cross section view. It is posi- polyline component lines meet.
tioned where the user would be looking check box: A small box within a dialog
from to see such a view. Camera symbols box that can contain a checkmark indicat-
are drawn in Plan Views that correspond ing whether or not a program feature has
to the camera location for one of these 3D been selected.
Views. A camera symbol can be active or chord (Arc): An imaginary straight line
inactive depending on whether its associ- that connects the start point to the end
ated view is currently displayed. point of an arc.
Cartesian coordinates: A rectangular chord Angle (direction): The angle of the
coordinate system. In order to locate arc's chord. This angle is measured as 0
points in three-dimensional space we must degrees when the chord is horizontal and
have a fixed reference frame. We obtain directed to the right, and 90 degrees when
such a frame by selecting a fixed point for directed straight up.
the origin and three directed lines that are
chord length: The length of the imaginary
mutually perpendicular at the origin.
line connecting the two endpoints of an
These lines are called the x-axis, y-axis,
arc.
and z-axis. In a Chief Architect Plan View,
the x-axis it to the right, the y-axis is up, clipboard: An area of memory reserved by
and the z-axis is out of the screen towards Windows™ for temporary storage of text
the user. or graphics being transferred during a user
session brought about by using the “cut,
casing (windows & doors): The pieces
copy and paste” commands.
of trim surrounding a window or door.
756
coffered ceiling: A coffered ceiling typi- cross section view: A cross section cam-
cally follows the underside of a hip roof era cuts a section through the complete
section over a room up to some specified multi-story model of a house showing all
height above the normal ceiling height, of the details from the vertical cutting
and then follows a higher ceiling platform plane onward. See also Back Clipping.
or custom ceiling section for the rest of its crown molding: A molding which typi-
surface. cally goes around a room at the top of the
Glossary
components: The various materials that walls.
would make up the real objects repre- cursor: The main, user controlled, symbol
sented in a plan, such as the three individ- on screen that indicates where the user can
ual windows that make up a bay window. affect changes (controlled by the mouse
concentric move/Copy: The ability to and keyboard).
move or copy a polyline or box so that current point: A point in Chief Architect is
each edge moves an equal amount from its indicated as the “current point” if it is
original position. drawn with a red X. This is the most
contextual menu: A popup menu that dis- recently created or selected point.
plays by clicking the right mouse button dialog box: A popup window in Chief
(once or twice depending on preferences). Architect, typically used to modify the
It contains specific commands related to
Managing
specification of an object or setup the
your current mode of operation or to a cur- default values for an object.
Files
rently selected item.
diamond style (windows): A style of
contour line: A line drawn in Plan View window lites where the muntin bars are
that connects all the points with the same drawn diagonally to form diamond shaped
elevation. lites.
Managing
control key move: The ability to move an diffuse: Diffuse lighting accounts for the
Files
object without the normal restrictions changes in intensity due to the direction of
while the control key is being held down. a light source. The perceived intensity of
Cosmo Viewer: A software application the light on a surface varies with the angle
that works with an Internet browser and that the light makes with the surface. The
allows viewing VRML (WRL) files. more diffuse a material on a surface is, the
Managing
CPU: Central Processing Unit, or the brighter it appears under a light source
Files
“brain” of a computer, which determines because it scatters the light reflected from
how fast it can perform. it more evenly.
craftsman style (windows): A style of dithering: In computer graphics, the use of
window lites where only the top most hor- dots of different colors or shades to pro-
duce what appears to be a new color. Dith-
Managing
izontal muntin bar is kept with all of the

vertical muntin bars appearing above it. ering is used to soften the edges of an
Files
image as an anti-aliasing technique, and to

cross box: A box with an X inside, typi-
add realism to computer graphics.
cally used to create cross section details.
757
dockable toolbar: A toolbar, or set of but- dwang: A short horizontal member fixed
tons with associated commands that will between two studs in a framed wall. Also
be performed when it is clicked on, which called bridging, blocking, or nogging.
can be placed anywhere along the edges of DXF: see drawing exchange format.
the Chief Architect window, where it is
eaves: The lower part of a pitched roof or
said to be “docked” or placed anywhere
the edge of a flat roof which project
else on the computer screen where it is
beyond the wall face and are usually fin-
said to be “floating”.
ished with a fascia board. Sometimes
dongle: see hardware key. referred to as roof overhang. Refers to the
dormer: A roof construction comprising of lowest horizontal overhang area. The
a vertical window and its own walls and sloping overhang at a gable is referred to
pitched roof sections typically used to pro- as the gable overhang.
vide natural light to upper floor or attic edge flashing: The metal trim that is
spaces. Often designed with one sloped attached to roof surfaces along their outer
roof section and called a shed dormer or edges.
with a gable end and two sloped roof sec-
egress (windows): A window designated
tions which is called a gable dormer.
as an egress window must meet certain
double hung window: A window with code requirements to allow enough open
two sashes which can slide vertically to area for a person to use the window as a
open. fire escape.
drawing exchange format (DXF): A file elevation view: A view of an architectural
format which is used to transfer 2D or 3D model taken horizontally, looking at a ver-
data from one CAD program to another. It tical face in the design. For an architect, in
only stores data as CAD entities and so the strictest terms, an elevation includes
has limited information about the higher symbols that show the relationship
level 3D objects such as windows, walls, between the viewed face and the sur-
cabinets, etc. Different entities can be dis- rounding terrain.
tinguished from one another by assigning
emissive: The property which effects the
them to different layers.
color or brightness of a material which is
dropped (false) ceiling: A dropped ceil- not coming from any light source. Materi-
ing can be defined without affecting the als that are emissive will appear to glow
true structural ceiling and wall heights and because they will be brighter even when
can be used to lower the apparent ceiling there is no other light source.
height of any room. It can also be used to
eng. lumber: engineered lumber.
individually color the ceilings of different
rooms. explode block: Separate a CAD block
back into it's individual CAD components
Dutch gable roof: A roof with gables near
so that they can be modified separately.
the ridge and a lower hipped portion. Also
called a half-hipped roof. export: The ability to create an output file
from Chief Architect which can then be
758
imported into another computer program. makes rounded corners between two non-
These are DXf, VRML (WRL), Windows parallel lines.
metafile (WMF), bitmap (BMP), and vari- fire box (fireplace): The open or inside
ous text format (DAT and TXT) files. In area of a fireplace where the fire is meant
general, the files in which Chief Architect to be.
saves its plans cannot be read by other
fixtures: A class of symbols appearing in a
computer programs.
plan and 3D Views that includes plumbing
Glossary
face (as in 3D face): A flat surface fixtures as well as appliances, manufac-
defined by a rectangle or triangle. tured fireplaces and stoves, custom mill-
false ceiling: See dropped ceiling. work items such as pillars, etc.
fascia: A wide horizontal board positioned Distinguished from furniture symbols in
on edge and attached to the lower ends of that anything represented by a fixture
the rafters, which typically supports the would normally be supplied by the builder
rain gutters. This is called an eave fascia. as part of the finished house.
Also used at the edge of a roof section flat sides (cabinet): A cabinet is desig-
above a gable wall. This sloping fascia is nated as having “flat sides” when its
called a gable fascia. exposed sides have no counter overhang
fence (as in fence CAD tool): A CAD or toekick inset such as when it is attached
to a wall or another cabinet. It's front, and
Managing
line or polyline used as a tool to select
other CAD items it contacts or crosses. if exposed, its back may still have counter
Files
overhang and toekicks.
file: A grouped unit of electronic data cre-
ated by a program or end-user (via appli- floating slab: A reinforced concrete floor
cation of Chief Architect) for storing CAD that is designed to be resistant to differen-
or other computer produced information. tial movement of unstable earth.
Managing
file extension: A three-letter abbreviation foam seal: Material that is placed between
Files
to represent various file types used or pro- the foundation wall and the framed struc-
duced by a software application or pro- ture above to seal against air leaks.
gram. Chief Architect uses a variety of file focal point: The camera's focus point
extensions to distinguish the purpose of (where you are looking) for a Perspective
the various computer files that it uses. or Render View. The focal point is ini-
Managing
file locking: Preventing the ability of tially defined by the end point (where you
Files
another user or program to change, or let go of the mouse button) when dragging
even to access, a file stored on a computer. the Perspective or Render camera tool.
files can be locked in Chief Architect to The focal point is used by the camera tools
prevent the confusion caused by two or for rotating or moving in or out along the
more users changing the same plan at the line of sight. The focal point will be
Managing
same time. moved as the camera is changed with the

Files
other camera movement tools.

fillet: A corner that has been radiused
(curved) instead left square. The fillet tool
759
font: The complete set of numbers, letters worse image quality since they “lose”
and symbols in a specific typeface (Arial, some of the data by compressing it.
Modern etc.) girder truss: A truss designed to cover
footing: A footing is used to support a foun- long spans and which usually supports
dation wall. The footing is wider than the other trusses that butt into it.
foundation wall and runs continuously Glulam: see laminated lumber beam.
under the base of the wall.
laminated lumber beam: Horizontal fac-
footprint: See plan footprint. tory-glued laminated beam. Trade name
frieze: A trim member at the top of the exte- Glulam.
rior wall where the underside of the eave Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI): A type of
(soffit) and exterior wall meet. electrical outlet commonly placed in bath-
full camera: see perspective view. rooms, exteriors, or other water-prone
full gable wall: A wall in Chief Architect areas that is designed to prevent electrocu-
can be designated as a full gable wall if it tion.
is going to be at the end of a gable roof. ground plane: See lot perimeter.
full height cabinet: A full height cabinet gull wing roof: A gull wing roof is the
typically goes from the floor all the way to reverse of a gambrel roof. It has two
the top of the wall cabinets and has a toe pitches on either side of the ridge, but a
kick but not a counter top. Often used as a gull wing has the first (lower) pitch shal-
pantry cabinet. lower than the second pitch.
full overview: see overview. gutters: A channel designed to carry away
gable: The triangular portion of an external rainwater that runs off a roof surface.
wall below a pitched roof. They are attached to the fascia at the (low
horizontal) eaves of the roof.
gable line: A CAD line used to designate a
portion of a wall as having a gable section half hip: A half hip roof has two gable ends.
at its top, and producing gable roof sec- Toward the top of each gable is a small hip
tions over it. that extends to the ridge.
gable roof: A pitched roof terminating in a hardware lock/key (dongle): A com-
gable at one or both ends. puter hardware device plugged into the
parallel (printer) port which is used for
gambrel roof: A gambrel roof is a gable
protecting the software from unauthorized
roof with two pitches on each side of the
use.
ridge. The first (lower) pitch is steeper
then the second pitch. hatch wall: A wall marked so that it is
drawn with cross hatching in a Plan View.
GFI: see Ground Fault Interrupt.
header: The large framing member that
GIF: A picture file format for storing bit-
spans the top of window and door open-
maps in a compressed form. They are con-
ings.
siderably smaller then bitmaps but have
hearth: A platform, at floor level or raised
slightly above, that extends in front of a
760
fireplace. This platform can be raised off Imperial: The English measuring system
the floor, in which case it is called a raised (inch, feet, etc.), as opposed to the metric
hearth. system which is based on units of ten (mil-
herringbone: A zigzag type of pattern limeters, centimeters, kilometers, etc.)
which can be used when laying out brick, inactive camera: A camera symbol in a
tile, or wood and often used for flooring. Plan View that represents a elevation or
hip roof: For every exterior wall, a hip roof cross section view that has been saved and
Glossary
slopes upward toward the house interior. is not currently open.
This causes every exposed edge, or eave, insulation: A CAD tool used for drawing
of the roof to be level. Hip roofs are gen- insulation symbols in cross section details.
erally pyramidal in shape, and with level interpolate: To approximate a value
eaves all around. between two known values based on a
hopper window: A hopper window is one trend or known formula or curve. (defined
which pivots inward at the bottom to only as it is used in CAD applications)
open. Also know as a bottom-hung win- isometric view: A projection of an object
dow. upon a plane equally inclined to the
Howe Truss: A roof truss with vertical object's three principal axes, so that the
members at mid-point and quarter points dimensions parallel to these are repre-
Managing
and connected by diagonal bracing. sented in their true proportions. Isometric
views can be printed to scale and mea-
Files
HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Condi-
tioning equipment. sured along their axes. An isometric view
is a special case of Chief Architect's plan
icon: An icon is a simple picture. It is usu-
and full overviews.
ally in the form of a button that you can
select by pointing at it with your cursor Joint Photographic Experts Group
Managing
and clicking the left mouse button. In (JPEG): A compressed graphics file format
Files
Chief Architect, an icon or button will that works well with photographs with
launch various drawing modes like walls continuous tones.
or doors or cause Chief Architect to per- joist: A horizontal framing member usually
form various functions like zooming or spaced at regular intervals and used to
place a view camera. support a floor or ceiling.
Managing
image: A picture or bitmap which repre- king post: The vertical member of a trian-
Files
sents an individual object, such as a tree, gular truss that connects the peak with the
flower, car, person, etc. It is represented as center of the joist chord.
a special 2D symbol in Plan Views and is knee wall: A short wall on an upper floor
visible in any 3D View or rendered view. which is cut off by a roof section. A knee
Images can represent a very detailed
Managing
wall usually runs parallel to the main exte-

object as only one surface instead of rep- rior walls but is set back several feet from
Files
resenting the same object with many 3D the outer surface.

surfaces.
761
landing (stair): The level platform that is above each of the four walls. It can be
between two sections of stairs. thought of as a hipped gambrel roof. The
layout facility: That feature of Chief second slope begins at the same height
Architect designed for assembling full above each wall. Usually the lower slope
working drawings of a house plan. Each is much steeper than the upper slope.
layout file can contain 200 layout pages manual reach: Specifies how far from a
each of which can contain multiple views, manually drawn dimension line an item
details, CAD, etc. (wall cabinet, window, etc.) can be and
library browser: A window in Chief still be located by the initially draw line.
Architect that allows you to inspect and marker: A plan symbol that may be used to
select various objects stored in a library or indicate level lines, test boring informa-
collection of these objects. tion, or point elevations. It can also be
lites (window): The separated glass areas used as a reference point for laying out
of a window. floor, wall, and roof framing.
living Area: The living area label defines marquee: A resizable rectangular area that
the square footage of the true livable areas is used for selecting groups of objects.
of a house. Exterior, garage, and “open master list: The master list contains all of
below” areas are not included in this cal- the materials, suppliers, and prices that are
culation. Living area should not be mis- used throughout Chief Architect for gen-
taken for actual square footage of a house. erating Material Lists.
lookout: Usually used when a hammer is metafile (WMF): A standard Windows file
dropped from a roof section. Also, a fram- format in which CAD data can be repre-
ing member that attaches to the gable fas- sented as actual lines instead of pixels.
cia and supports the gable overhang area. Metafiles can be smaller in size then bit-
It extends over the gable wall or end truss map files that represent the same view and
and ties off on an interior truss of rafter. can be rescaled without any loss of picture
LVL: See Laminated Veneer Lumber beam quality. Chief Architect can export meta-
files from plan, CAD detail, and 3D
Laminated Veneer Lumber beam: Ver-
Views.
tical factory laminated beam. Trade name
LVL. metal drip edge: A type of flashing often
used on the edge of roof surfaces to divert
macro: In computer programming, a macro
water away from the fascia.
is a way of combining a number of differ-
ent commands into one command, thus millwork: A library of 3D objects represent-
saving time. Keyboard macros in Chief ing objects such as door trim, fireplace
Architect allow you to substitute one or mantels, corbels, copulas, and columns.
two keystroke entries for a complicated mitre: A diagonal or bevel joint between
series of cursor movements. two framing members or moldings of
mansard roof: A mansard roof is a hip equal cross sections which is typically at
roof with two slopes on the roof sections 45 degrees.
762
monolithic slab: A single slab foundation north pointer: The north pointer defines
for a house that incorporates footings at its the direction of true north in relation to the
edge without any joints. house. If north is not defined, north is
mud sill: The bottom most horizontal mem- assumed to be straight up. There can only
ber of a wall frame which lays on top of a be one north pointer per plan.
slab or foundation. Typically made from object-oriented software: For architec-
treated, rot-resistant, lumber that is bolted tural CAD users, a type of CAD software
Glossary
to the top of a foundation stem wall or at that allows you to draw using 3D objects
the edge of a slab foundation. The floor like walls, windows, doors, and furniture,
joists or wall framing is then attached to instead of just 2D geometric entities like
the mud sill. lines, circles, and arcs.
mulled windows: A group of windows opaque glass: Opposite of transparent. If
that have been combined into a single unit glass is designated as opaque it will be
such that trim pieces are used between the drawn as a solid color which can't be seen
individual windows and casing surrounds through. This is often done to simplify and
the unit. speed up elevation and exterior views.
multi-layered wall: A wall which has been OpenGL (Open Graphics Language):
made up of multiple wall layers. A powerful software interface to graphics
Managing
muntin bar: A wood or metal member used hardware which is the newest industry
to divide up window lites. Often these are standard for high quality 3D graphics.
Files
vertical or horizontal, but they can be open below: A room designation used
diagonal or even curved. Traditionally whenever a room does not have a floor
these were structural, enabling windows and is not used in living area calculations.
to be made up from smaller, less expen- overview: An overview is an isometric
Managing
sive, panes of glass. They are often just for view of a plan which can be viewed from
decoration.
Files
any orientation. A plan overview shows
nested: A CAD block is a group of CAD the model for a single floor while the full
items that behaves like a single object and overview shows all floors.
can be treated like any other CAD item. pad (foundation): Foundation pads are
Any CAD block which is contained by usually square or rectangular and are used
Managing
another CAD block is said to be nested. to support beams inside of a footing type
Files
newel: A support post at regular intervals foundation.
along a railing, usually with rails and bal- pan: The process of moving the current dis-
usters between them. play area within a window up/down or
no locate (wall): A no locate attribute in a left/right by using the scroll bar, arrow
wall prevents dimension lines from locat-
Managing
buttons, or dragging the cursor with the

ing a wall in most cases. control key held.
Files
normal: A line that is perpendicular to parallel light: A parallel light source will
another line or a plane, often referring to a simulate light coming from a certain
perpendicular to a 3D face.
763
direction and from an infinite distance plan check: A Chief Architect feature
away, such as light from the sun. where a plan is checked for anything that
parquet: A geometric pattern often used in appears to violate common building codes
hardwood flooring. or practices.
pattern: Chief Architect uses patterns to plan footprint: An automatically pro-
enhance the appearance of surfaces and duced polyline in a CAD detail which
simulate real world materials such as traces the plan's exterior walls. Portions of
flooring, brickwork, roofing, etc., by the plan, usually walls, windows, doors
drawing additional CAD lines on the sur- and sometimes the roof, can also display
faces in 3D Views. patterns can also be within this polyline.
drawn within CAD items in Plan Views. Plan View: A view of an architectural
PC: A personal computer usually based on model that is taken from above looking
the design by IBM. You need one of these down, with no perspective aspect. By con-
to run Chief Architect. vention it is usually a 2D view of a single
floor of the house with the top portion cut
pier (foundation): Foundation piers are
away at the four foot level.
produced by filling a drilled hole in the
ground with steel reinforced concrete. plinth block: A decorative block of wood
They will appear as a circle under a wall often used at the bottom of door casings
or beam in a Plan View. where the baseboard meets the door.
perspective view: A view of an architec- plumb cut (eaves): Roof eaves can be
tural model that simulates how the design plumb cut, where they are cut vertically,
would look to the human eye. In a per- or square cut, where they are cut perpen-
spective view parallel lines diminish back dicular to their length.
to a vanishing point. In Chief Architect PNG: see Portable Network Graphics
there are 2 types of perspective views. A pocket door: A door designed to slide into
plan camera will generate a perspective an opening into a wall instead of swinging
view of the current floor only, and a full open. Typically used for interior doors in
camera will generate a perspective view of situations where there is not enough room
a whole house model. for the door to swing outward.
pillar: The post or newel that is used in rail- point elevation: A marker that designates
ings can be designated as pillars if it is the height of the ground (outside the plan)
desired for it to extend up beyond the or the floor (inside the plan).
height of the rail.
point light: A point light source will simu-
pixel: A single dot on a computer screen late the light coming from a specified
that can be represented by a single color. point. It is typically used to model light
plan: A plan in Chief Architect can refer to that would come from a light bulb that can
the entire model of a house, a single floor shine in all directions.
in a house model, or the current 2D Plan polar: A way of specifying the location of a
View of one floor of the house. point by using the relative distance and
764
angle from an existing point. The angle started from there. The information in the
can be specified in either degrees or as a profile plan can be modified so that users
bearing relative to the north pointer. can better customize Chief Architect to
polyline: A polyline consists of two or suit their individual needs.
more line and/or arc segments that are pull-down menu: A menu of commands
attached together at their endpoints. If the available in Chief Architect displayed by
polyline connects back to it's start point, it either selecting the first item on the main
Glossary
is said to be closed. If there is a gap in the menu bar or by selecting a menu choice
polyline it is said to be open. with a small triangle after it.
pony wall: The framed wall that extends queen post: One of two vertical members
short basement foundation walls to full in a queen post roof truss which lies
ceiling height. These are commonly used between the tie beam and the principle
for split entry type homes where the base- rafter. Often used for making an attic area
ment walls are around 3-4 feet tall. using trusses.
Portable Network Graphics (PNG) quoin: Large squared stones set at the exter-
"ping": A graphics file format that is an nal corners of buildings.
alternative to CompuServe GIFs and radio button: A small circular button that
allows for transparent backgrounds. appears in dialog boxes in groups of two
Managing
POV-ray: A 3D rendering program which or more where only one of the buttons can
can be used to simulate realistic views of a be selected at a time.
Files
Chief Architect house model. To be used, rafter: An inclined roof framing member
a model must be exported from Chief extending from the eave to the ridge and
using the extended POV-ray feature when carrying the outer roof covering.
exporting a DXF file.
railing shoe: See shoe.
Managing
prairie style (windows): A style of win-
raked wall: A raked wall is one in which
Files
dow lites where all of the central muntin
the top and/or bottom wall edge is not hor-
bars have been removed leaving only the
izontal.
two outside muntin bars both horizontally
and vertically. rebar: Reinforcing bar used for reinforcing
concrete structures.
primitive: A library of 3D objects each rep-
Managing
resenting a basic shape like a box, cylin- reference floor: The plan or floor that is
Files
der, wedge, sphere, cone, etc. being used as a reference for the current
working plan. The reference plan can be
print to layout: The act of sending a user
displayed and used to maintain the correct
produced drawing or CAD information to
relationship between two different floors.
the layout portion of Chief Architect.
reference toggle: The ability to display
Managing
profile plan: A profile plan is used to store

and hide the current reference plan when
all of the default settings for wall types,
Files
there are multiple floors available.

materials, windows, cabinets, etc. When-
ever a new plan is created, a copy of the
profile plan is made and the new plan is
765
reflect: The ability in Chief Architect to sash (window): A separate, framed unit
take any plan or portion of a plan and which surrounds and holds the glass and
reflect it about a CAD line. may be either fixed or movable. In a dou-
relative location: A way of specifying the ble hung window, the sashes can be desig-
location of a point by using the relative nated as the top sash and bottom sash.
distances from an existing point. The dis- separation (cabinet): The amount of
tances are specified as a horizontal (x) dis- space between the openings in cabinets,
tance and a vertical (y) distance. thus representing the exposed width of the
RGB: A way of representing color on a face frame members. For European style
computer with various amounts of Red, cabinets this value is typically 0.
Green, and blue. sheathing: The outer covering of a wall
ridge: The highest part of a sloped roof, frame or roof section.
usually where two roof sections meet shed roof: A single sloped roof section
along a horizontal seam. A sloping seam which covers an entire area. Shed roofs
where two roof sections meet is called a can cover multiple portions of a structure
hip ridge or a valley. and meet at opposing angles, or cover dor-
ridge cap: A covering over a ridge to pro- mer sections.
vide a continuous cover and a weather seal shoe (railing): The lower rail used in a
where two roof sections meet. railing to which the balusters are con-
ridge vent: A special kind of ridge cap that nected.
allows ventilation of an attic area. sill (window): The horizontal member
rim joist: A joist at the outer edge of a ceil- which projects out from a wall below a
ing or (more often) floor platform to window.
which the ends of other joists attach. slab foundation: A foundation in which
riser (stair): The vertical face of a step in a the concrete foundation floor forms the
flight of stairs. first floor for the house. Can be built with
a stem wall and footings around it's edge,
room definition wall: An Invisible wall
or as a monolithic slab having no stem
used to define different room areas.
wall or footings incorporated at its edges.
room label/name: The text name that
slider door: A door which typically has
appears with each room which helps to
two glass sections, one of which will slide
define the type of room and it's associated
open instead of swinging open.
characteristics. The text can be changed,
but it is important to define the room type snap to: The ability to located exactly, or
properly to get desired behavior. “snap”, to a given point on a plan when
trying to place an object.
roof truss: see truss.
soffit: A boxed in area usually built above
saltbox roof: A saltbox roof is a type of
cabinets to fill in the gap between the top
gable roof with the ridge off center
of the wall cabinets and the bottom of the
because there is a different pitch on each
ceiling. In Chief Architect, soffits are a
of the two roof sections.
766
general tool for building solid 3D objects stub wall: A short section of wall that is
and can be used for such things as exposed only attached at one end. In Chief Archi-
beams, posts, sidewalks, or any place a tect, it is better to create stub walls by lay-
user needs a 3D box that can be moved, ing out a straight wall first and then using
resized, or angled. a resized doorway to create the desired
splice: The combining of multiple con- wall portion.
nected collinear lines into a single line in a stud: A vertical framing member used pri-
Glossary
layout picture produced from a 3D or ele- marily in framing wall sections.
vation view. sun angle: A CAD object used to show the
spline: A line or polyline used to draw free direction of sunlight on a plan and to cre-
form curves. ate a shadow area from a house model. It
split level: A house in which the various calculates the sun in relation to the 3D
sections of the plan have different floor house according to any specified date,
and ceiling heights. time, latitude and longitude. Also used as
a light source in Render Views.
spot light: A light used to simulate light
coming from a specified point but also SVGA: Acronym for Super Video Graphics
having a direction and a limited cone of Array.
illumination. Similar to light coming from SWT: Stem Wall Top or the top of the stem
Managing
a recessed lighting fixture or flashlight. wall, see also stem wall.
Files
stacked windows: Stacked windows are tangent: A line that intersects a circle or arc
created by placing one window over and is perpendicular to the line between
another. the intersection point and the center.
stem wall: A foundation wall section which termite flashing: Sheet metal placed
lies above the footing and below the fram- where the wall framing meets the concrete
Managing
ing. foundation to prevent insects from cross-
Files
stepped foundation, stepped wall: A ing from the foundation to the wooden
wall whose bottom edge is made up of structure.
multiple horizontal sections at different texture: A bitmap file which is used to
levels. For a foundation wall the footing show details of surface objects such as
will follow these steps and thus be calls a brick, tile, wood grain, carpet, etc. These
Managing
stepped footing. can be applied to Chief Architect materi-
Files
stile (cabinet): A vertical face frame mem- als and are only visible in a Render View.
ber of a cabinet. Used in Chief to allow for top plate: The framing member placed
a frame member between a pair of doors across the top ends of studs used to carry
in a single cabinet module. the ceiling joists and support the rafters.
Managing
stringer (stair): The angled members of a transom window: A window that is

Files
stairway which support the risers and placed above a doorway.

treads.
767
trimmer: A vertical framing member which wall cabinet: A cabinet typically mounted
supports the end of a window or door on a wall above the base cabinets and not
header. having a toekick or counter top.
truss: A structural frame used for bridging wall elevation: see elevation view.
long spans and supporting loads. Typically wall layer: A component of a wall system.
used for roof framing and often arranged i.e. sheetrock, framing, sheeting, and sid-
in a series of stable triangles. ing are possible exterior wall layers.
truss base: The surface which forms a wall offset: The wall offset handle can be
boundary between the standard trusses used to move a selected wall in 1/32”
and valley fill trusses which rest on top of increments perpendicular to it's length. It
them. is used for aligning collinear (in-line)
truss chord: The length of a truss span. walls containing sections of unequal
Also a framing member, often made of width.
lumber but sometimes made of steel or webbing (trusses): Truss webbing is the
other materials, from which a truss is con- collection of framing members that attach
structed. The top chords are at the roof at each end to truss chords and that are
and the bottom chords are at the ceiling. used to fill in the truss structure. Most
valley flashing: A shaped sheet metal often the webbing is arranged in a series
flashing that is typically used in the valley of triangular shapes.
of a roof, where two sloped roof sections winder: A triangular or wedge shaped stair
meet. tread that is used where curved or angled
VGA: Acronym for Video Graphics Array. stairways change direction.
VRML: Virtual Reality Modeling Language. working plan: The currently active plan or
A Chief Architect model can be exported floor that is being displayed and worked
as a VRML (WRL) file. The supplied on when you have more then one floor.
Cosmo viewer will read and display these See also reference plan.
files. WMF: see metafile.
walkthrough: A recording of a series of WP outlet: A waterproof electrical outlet
camera movements in a 3D View such that designed to be used in exterior locations.
it appears that a user is walking through a
zoom: The process of repositioning a view
model of a house. Walkthroughs can be
to move closer to any given area on the
recorded and then played back at a much
plan or 3D View. In other words, it magni-
faster speed then it takes to generate each
fies the view.
original view. Walkthroughs can also be
done using the Cosmo viewer and the zoom window: A small window with a
VRML export capability. bird's eye view of the entire plan which
facilitates zooming and panning of the
main window.
768
Appendix A
Technical Support
Preparation for Technical Support

If you have a problem with the software, see if your question has already been
please do the following before contacting answered.
technical support:
Technical
8. If you are asked to send in the plan file,
Support
1. Look up items related to your problem make sure that all the files necessary are
in the index of the Chief Architect Ref- saved to the disk or included in a zip file
erence Guide, the electronic User's for email.
Guide and the online Help file.
2. Check that you have some free space on The easiest way to do this is to open the
your hard disk. If you have less than plan, then choose File>Save As and
100K bytes, you will probably have save the plan directly to the disk. If ART
asks for your plan file, it will not use your
trouble with Chief Architect as well as
plan for any other purpose and will
with many other Windows® applica- destroy it once the problem has been
tions. satisfactorily resolved. It cannot, however,
3. If you have difficulties using your sign non-disclosure or other limiting
agreements regarding plan files or any
printer with Chief Architect, check first
other information that it receives, and
that the printer works with other graph- cannot return these materials to you.
ics programs running under Windows®,
such as Paint.
9. If a layout sheet is being sent, choose
4. If an error box appears, record any error Options>Layout Files from within the
numbers. These may appear within the layout. Make note of all files present in
box, in its title bar, or both. layout, and be sure to save all those files
5. Try to reproduce the problem so you can to disk as well.
better explain it to us. 10. If you call ART for support, you should
6. Save to disk the plan in which the prob- have Chief Architect running. Please
lem is occurring. Restart your system, have some additional information about
restore the file, and if possible reproduce your computer system for us. We would
the problem. like to know the following:
7. Check the technical support section our • Your serial number (Select Help> About).
Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com to
747
• The Chief Architect version and release • An estimate of the amount of free disk
date. (Select Help> About). space you had at the time the problem
• The printer or plotter you are using. occurred.
• The version of Windows you are using. • The amount of memory, or RAM, on your
• Names and types of any other programs, machine, and
such as screen savers, virus detection soft- • The video driver you are using (Display
ware, etc., that also are running when you Properties from the Control Panel)
use Chief Architect.
ART Technical Support: 208-666-0518
748
Appendix B
Material.txt
Introduction
The MATERIAL.TXT describes how the The following brief explanation is based on a
Material List works. This file may be found Material List generated from the sample file
on the CD-ROM, and should also be in your Richmond. Open Richmond, and choose
installation directory. This file may help Options>Materials>Calculate all floors.
those who are exporting the Material List to The following is a partial view of the Mate-
understand how to read the exported file, rial List which is generated.
especially if the information is to be linked to
an estimating program.
Material.txt
File
If that same file is exported as a text file with the explanation. The borders have also
[File>Export>Materials (TXT)], and been added.) Notice how the General Cate-
opened in a spreadsheet program, it will have gory information in the Materials.txt file cor-
Libraries
a slightly different appearance. In this illus- responds with the exported Material List
Symbol
tration, Microsoft Excel® was the spread-

sheet program used to open the text file.
(None of the column names are exported.
These descriptions have been added to help
749
In the Materials.txt file, the following provides the explanation for the General category.
750
Introduction
The same information can be used to under-
Managing
stand the Subfloor category.
Files
Managing
Files
Part of the Subfloor category from the Materials.txt.
Material.txt
File
Some of the numbers have a
(“) or an “=” to the left. The
“+” indicates that this is an
addition to Chief 6.0. The “=”
indicates that this has not yet
been added to the program,
Managing
but will be in the future.
Files
The Material.txt file contains
information about all the other
categories as well. A careful
comparison between the
Material.txt and the exported
Managing
Material List should yield a

Files
greater understanding of how

to read the exported list.
751
752
Index
Index
Managing
Files
Numerics Perspective View .................................. 584
Managing
Perspective, full camera ........................ 584
Files
Show Items .......................................... 593
0", Show ........................................ 139, 470
16, 32, 64, 128 bit
Definition .............................................. 749
220 Volt Outlet ........................................ 50 A
2D symbols ............................................ 524 Absolute Location
2nd floor, create ................................... 168 Definition .............................................. 747
2nd pitch ................................................ 350 Move point ........................................... 522
New line end ........................................ 504
3D ........................................................... 747
New point ............................................. 522
Face ..................................................... 624
Generation, increase speed ................... 595 Active Cameras ...................................... 88
Managing
Remove 3D views ................................. 597 Add New Floor ........................................ 50
Index
Add to Library ........................................ 50
Files
3D DXF see DXF
3D Face Added Lights ........................................ 613
Definition .............................................. 753 Adding a Molding to the Library ........ 443
3D Home Architect Adding an Image .................................. 448
Definition .............................................. 747
Adding CAD Blocks to the Library ..... 537
Opening files ........................................... 57
Adding floors ........................................ 168
3D Images .............................................. 447
Adjust
3D Menu ................................................... 34
Walls in 3D ........................................... 225
3D Preferences ..................................... 449 Adjust Lights ........................................ 608
3D Preferences dialog ........................... 87 Adjust Material Definition .... 594, 610, 686
3D Terrain .............................................. 155
Adjusting the View Angle .................... 592
3D Views ................................................ 583 Adobe Acrobat Reader
Index
Edit from ............................................... 596

Definition .............................................. 747
Elevation .......................................599– 600
Framing back clip .................................... 88 Alcove (Minimum)
Panels .................................................... 88 Definition .............................................. 747
769
Align ...................................................... 238 Chord angle .......................................... 552

Curved stairs between floors ................. 310 Chord direction ...................................... 507
Curved walls between floors .................. 238 Chord length ......................................... 552
Ends of curved stairs to walls or CAD .... 307 Definition .............................................. 747
Foundation wall ...............................95, 175 Degrees in arc ....................................... 507
Walls .................................................... 204 Direction of bend ................................... 507
Walls between floors ............................. 212 Draw using center and radius ................. 507
Allowed Angles ...................................... 92 Drawing along arc ................................. 506
Editing .......................................... 506, 552
Ambient Light ....................................... 611
Length of arc ......................................... 507
Definition .............................................. 747
Length of chord ..................................... 507
Angled dormer hole Length, definition ................................... 747
see also Framing, Hole, Roofs ....... 135, 376 Locked center ....................................... 507
Angled Walls see Walls Modify parameters ................................. 557
Angled Windows .................................. 116 Parallel button, affects ........................... 530
Radius .......................................... 507, 552
Angles
Regular ........................................... 48, 502
Additional allowed ................................... 92
Start direction ........................................ 507
Allowed for CAD ..............................71, 543
Tangent, make ........................ 50, 238, 510
Allowed for walls ..............................92, 206
Allowed, diagram showing ..................... 207 Area
Definition .............................................. 747 Living .................................................... 192
Restrict/Unrestrict ............................49, 505 Minimum which will dimension ........ 140, 472
View of model, changing ....................... 592 Polyline ................................................. 510
Room, display ....................................... 191
Anti-aliasing ........................................... 84
Definition .............................................. 747 Arrange icons ........................................ 582
Apex Array see Replicate
Definition .............................................. 747 Arrow
Appearance Bend ..................................................... 488
Color, background & reference ................ 65 Include .................................................. 488
Contextual menus ................................... 64 Joint ..................................................... 488
Preferences ............................................ 64 Special use ........................................... 490
Text ...................................................... 482
Appliances ............................................ 406
see also Arrowhead
Library .................................................. 430
Outlets, where placed ........................... 458 Arrow, text
see also Cabinets Default color ............................................ 67
Default size ............................................. 67
Apron Window
Include, default ........................................ 67
Definition .............................................. 747
Arrowhead
Arched Door ................................... 107, 249
Color ............................................ 484, 497
Architectural Layers ............................ 151 Default settings ............................. 143, 474
Architectural mode ................................ 12 Height ........................................... 143, 474
Arcs Modified individually .............................. 475
About center ............................ 48, 502, 507 Size ............................... 143, 474, 484, 497
Affect CAD stops .................................. 527 Special use ................................... 484, 497
Angle ................................................... 552 Tab ............................................... 143, 474
Change to lines ....................................... 51 Type ............................................. 143, 474
770
see also Arrow Create .............................................88, 450
ART, Inc Definition ....................................... 609, 748
Index
Definition .............................................. 747 Background
Attenutation .......................................... 617 Colors .................................................... 65
Render ............................ 88, 436, 449, 609
Attic
Retain attic wall ..................................... 212 Balcony
Walls .................................................... 212 Room label ........................................... 191
Balusters ........................................ 100, 215
Managing
Auto rebuild floors & ceilings ............ 357
Definition .............................................. 748
Auto snap .................................75, 531, 548
Files
Spacing ......................................... 101, 216
Definition .............................................. 748
Priority ............................................ 75, 548 Base cabinet
Definition .............................................. 748
Automatic
Outlet placed above .............................. 458
Dimensions, exterior .............................. 468
Exterior dimensions ............................... 468 Baseboard
Managing
Locate opening, dimensions ........... 140, 472 Definition .............................................. 748
Files
Overall dimension ......................... 140, 472 Molding ......................................... 128, 186
Reach, definition ................................... 748 Baseline (Roofs) ............................ 339–340
Room naming ........................................ 703 Definition .............................................. 748
Automatic framing ................................ 359 Basic roof shapes ................................ 726
Automatic Roof Generator .................. 342 Batten
Definition .............................................. 748 Definition .............................................. 748
Autosave Bay window ........................................... 289
Definition .............................................. 748 Bay Component ............................. 133, 373
File extension ................................... 59, 69 Bay Trimmers ................................ 133, 373
Files ....................................................... 59 Definition .............................................. 748
PAn files ........................................... 59, 69 Roof over, dialog .................................. 293
Setting time between saves ............... 59, 69 see also Windows
Managing
Temporary directory .......................... 59, 69 Beams
Index
Files
Awning Window Definition .............................................. 748
Definition .............................................. 748 Exposed ............................................... 198
Soffits .................................................. 198
Bearing line ................................... 364, 367
B Creating ............................................... 562
Custom ................................................ 562
Back clip Definition .............................................. 749
Before editing walls in 3D ...................... 225 From lines ............................................ 562
Cross sections .........................87, 225, 601 Special CAD item ........................... 561– 562
Definition .............................................. 748 Bearings ..................................... 77– 78, 550
Framing .................................................. 88 Definition .............................................. 749
Back Splash Relative to North pointer ....................... 569
Definition .............................................. 748 Bench seat, creating ............................ 292
Index
Height ................................................... 122 Bifold Door

Backdrop Definition .............................................. 749
Add new ......................................... 88, 450 see also Door
771
Bi-levels ................................................ 183 Break Wall ............................................. 230

Bill of Materials see Materials list Definition .............................................. 749
Bird’s eye view Brick Veneer .......................................... 426
Definition .............................................. 749 Bridging
Zoom window ....................................... 579 Definition .............................................. 749
Birdsmouth ........................................... 339 Build
Definition .............................................. 749 Additional Floors ................................... 168
Bit Ceiling Framing ..................................... 131
Definition .............................................. 749 Framing, roof ........................................ 375
new floor ............................................... 168
Bitmaps
Wall Framing ......................................... 131
Definition .............................................. 749
Directories ............................................ 449 Build Menu ....................................... 28, 576
Exporting .............................................. 628 Build New Floor .................................... 168
Import .................................................. 629 Build Roof dialog .................................. 342
Insert button ....................................51, 502
Building codes ...................................... 703
Rescaling ............................................. 629
Resizing ............................................... 629 Built-in fixtures
Create .................................................. 436
Blips/Blipmode ..................................... 568
Delete ................................................... 436
Block see CAD, Block
Buttons .................................................... 51
Boolean Algebra
Byte
Definition .............................................. 749
Definition .............................................. 749
Borders (Layout) ........................... 651, 654
Double ................................................. 654
Rounded .............................................. 655
Show/Hide ............................................ 660 C
Both Wall Surfaces, dimension to .... 141, Cabinet Modules
473 Definition .............................................. 749
Bottom Chord ................................ 136, 377 Cabinets ................................................. 397
Bottom plate Angled front .................................. 403, 416
Number of ..................................... 132, 372 Attach to wall ........................................ 415
Thickness ...................................... 132, 372 Base Cabinet ........................................ 397
Bow window .......................................... 289 Bevel ............................................ 124, 407
Definition .............................................. 749 Blind ..................................................... 417
see also Windows Cabinet mode ........................................ 119
Box window .......................................... 289 Copy, (individual, multiple, stacked) ....... 410
Definition .............................................. 749 Corner
Roof over, dialog .................................. 293 Corner, creating .................................... 398
see also Windows Corner, resize ....................................... 413
Counter top ........................................... 404
Box, 2D
Countertop, custom ....................... 399–400
see CAD box .......................................... 48
Custom Molding .................................... 125
Box, 3D .................................................. 438 Default Setup ........................................ 119
Break Delete face items .......................... 123, 407
CAD item ....................................... 525, 530 Delete, (individual or multiple) ................ 410
Partial .................................................. 531 Dimension to corners/sides ............ 142, 473
772
Door library ........................................... 430 Angles, restriction ............................49, 505
Door style ..................................... 403, 410 Arc ..................................................48, 502
Door, glass ................................... 124, 407 Arcs about center .............................48, 502
Index
Door, on back ............................... 124, 407 Auto snap ........................................75, 548
End cabinets ......................................... 415 Basic editing ......................................... 503
Face Style ............................................ 403 Bitmap, insert ..................................51, 502
Filler ..................................................... 414 Block ....................................... 50, 525, 535
Flat sides ...................................... 124, 407 Block, copy ........................................... 535
Managing
Full height ............................................. 398 Block, create ........................... 50, 525, 535
Glass doors .................................. 124, 407 Block, delete ......................................... 535
Files
Handles ................................................ 401 Block, edit ............................................ 535
Label .................................................... 122 Block, fill by block ............................76, 549
Lazy Susan ................................... 124, 407 Block, fill by item ..............................76, 549
Library, doors styles .............................. 403 Block, rotate ......................................... 535
Material ................................................ 409 Block, scale .......................................... 535
Managing
Min. Width ............................................ 399 Block, select ......................................... 535
Mode .................................................... 397 Box ................................. 48, 502, 518, 552
Files
Module lines ......................................... 414 Box, change style ................................. 552
Move (individual or multiple) .................. 411 Box, drawing ........................................ 518
Move, restrictions .................................. 412 Box, editing ................................... 518, 552
Move, with wall ..................................... 415 Box, framing ......................................... 518
Normal ......................................... 403, 415 Box, set angle ....................................... 552
Options ................................................. 123 Box, set length ...................................... 552
Outlet placement ................................... 458 Box, set width ....................................... 552
Partition ................................................ 399 Break ................................................... 530
Peninsula radius ........................... 403, 415 Callout ................................................. 536
Radius end ................................... 403, 415 Chamfer .................................. 50, 525, 533
Resize .................................................. 413 Changing current layer .......................... 150
Restrictions, move ................................. 412 Circle ...................................... 49, 502, 520
Managing
Reverse fixture ...................................... 407 Circle about center ................................ 520
Index
Files
Roll-out shelves .................................... 407 Color on/off toggle ................................ 502
Rotate (individual or multiple) ................ 413 Concentric copy ...............................74, 547
Select handles ...................................... 401 Concentric edit type .........................73, 546
Separation .................................... 124, 407 Concentric Jump ..............................73, 546
Shaped ................................................. 415 Copy ............................... 74, 524, 528, 547
Shelves, roll out ............................ 124, 407 Copy Point to Point ............................... 574
Soffit see Soffits Copy, Point to Point ....................... 527, 574
Special shape ............................... 403, 415 Creating details .................................... 524
Stile .............................................. 124, 407 Cross box ................................ 49, 502, 519
Toolbar ................................................... 46 Default Line Style ................................. 550
Wall ...................................................... 415 Definition .............................................. 749
CAD .......................................................... 49 Delete points ................................. 502, 568
Align Edges ............................................ 50 Delete Points Tool Button ........................ 48
Aligning edges ...................................... 525 Detail window ................................ 503, 570
Index
Allowed angles ................................ 71, 543 Dimension ..................................... 502, 540

Always available ................................... 565 Dimensions, locate settings ............ 142, 474
Angled, adjusting .................................. 715 Edit polyline parts ............................49, 549
Edit see also Edit CAD item
773
Explode Block ......................................... 50 Point, keyboard input ............................. 522

Explode block ................................ 525, 536 Point, moving (general) .......................... 522
Extend ............................ 50, 525, 530, 533 Point, moving along line ......................... 523
Fence .............................. 50, 525, 532– 533 Polyline ................................................. 333
Fill block by item ..............................76, 549 Polyline, rectangular (tool) ..................... 519
Fillet ........................................ 50, 525, 533 Positioning Unit ............................... 72, 543
Fillet type ........................................75, 548 Preferences dialog .................................. 71
Framing ................................... 48, 502, 518 Pull down menu ..................................... 503
Group edit ............................................ 524 Rectangular polyline tool .......................... 49
Hole in roof ........................................... 564 Resize ...............................71, 75, 543, 547
Insulation ................................ 49, 502, 519 Restrict/Unrestrict angles ......................... 49
Joist direction ....................................... 365 Rotate around ................................. 71, 543
Layer 9, cross section ........................... 541 Rotate items .................................... 71, 543
Layers .................................................. 149 Rotate Jump .................................... 71, 543
Layers, changing current ....................... 150 Rotation point ........................................ 545
Layers, Display .............................. 149, 540 Select ........................................... 501, 524
Layers, Line color .......................... 149, 541 Setup dialog ................... 501, 542, 545, 569
Layers, Line size ................................... 541 Setup, Auto Snap .................................. 548
Layers, Line style ........................... 149, 541 Setup, Concentric Jump ......................... 546
Layers, Line weight ............................... 149 Setup, Default Line Style ....................... 550
Layers, Lock .................................. 149, 541 Setup, Edit Polyline Parts ...................... 549
Layers, Name ....................................... 540 Setup, Fillet ........................................... 548
Layers, Reference plan .................. 149, 540 Setup, Resize ........................................ 547
Line ........................................ 48, 501, 503 Snap To ................................................ 565
Line Properties ....................................... 77 Stair landing .......................................... 564
Line thickness visibility .......................... 572 Stops affected by curves ........................ 527
Line to Arc button ................................... 51 Sun Angle see Sun Angle
Locate ends & corners ................... 142, 474 Tangent button ................................ 50, 510
Make Parallel/Perp. ............................... 525 Text ...................................................... 502
Make Parallel/Perpendicular .................... 50 Toggle ............................................ 49, 501
Marker ................................................. 536 Toolbar, detailed ................................... 503
Mastering ........................................71, 542 Trim .................................50, 525, 530, 533
Menu see Menu CAD Block
Move by dragging ................................. 526 Adding to Library ................................... 537
Move Corners ..................................73, 544 Definition .............................................. 749
Move Point to Point ........................ 527, 574
CAD Detail
Move with precision .............................. 525
Definition .............................................. 750
Multiple Copy button ............................... 51
Plot plan, tutorial ................................... 711
Multiple copy button ....................... 525, 528
Trusses ................................................. 385
North pointer ........................................ 551
Number style ........................................ 561 CAD Facility
Oval ........................................ 49, 502, 521 Definition .............................................. 750
Parallel button ...................................... 530 CAD Layers .................................... 149, 152
Partial break ......................................... 531 Definition .............................................. 750
Plan Footprint ....................................... 503 CAD Line Properties ............................... 77
Point ....................................... 49, 502, 521
CAD Menu ................................................ 35
Point, creating ...................................... 521
Point, current ................................. 504, 521 CAD Menu see Menu
774
CAD mode ................................................ 12 Remove Wall within ....................... 145, 589
CAD toggle .............................................. 49 Restrict to room ...................................... 87
Rotate .................................................. 586
Index
Calculate
Save .................................................... 603
All Floors ................................................ 48
Materials ................................................. 13 Cape Cod
Materials on soffits ................................ 698 Platforms, combine ............................... 367
Room area ............................................ 192 Cartesian coordinates
Calculate All Floors ................................ 50 Definition .............................................. 750
Managing
Calculating Floor Heights ................... 194 Cascade
Files
Views ................................................... 582
Callouts ................................................. 502
Windows .............................................. 582
Arrows .................................................. 498
Button ..................................................... 45 Casement window
CAD ..................................................... 536 Definition .............................................. 750
Color .................................................... 498 Casing
Managing
Copy .................................................... 498 Definition .............................................. 750
Files
Create .................................................. 495 Ignore for opening resize ......................... 92
Cross section line .................................. 495 Cathedral ceiling
Delete ................................................... 498
Ceiling
Editing .................................................. 498
Basement ........................................94, 175
Height ................................................... 496
Build .................................................... 342
Layer .................................................... 498
Cathedral ............................................. 197
Move .................................................... 498
Coffered ............................................... 197
Resize .................................................. 498
Custom ................................................ 356
Rotate .................................................. 498
Custom ceiling planes ........................... 355
Selecting .............................................. 497
Diagram ............................................... 194
Size ...................................................... 498
Different styles ..................................... 183
Text ...................................................... 498
Managing
Dropped ............................................... 196
Camera Movements ................................ 18
Index
Exposed beams .................................... 198
Files
Camera Setup dialog ............................ 145 False .................................................... 196
Cameras Flat ceiling over this room ..................... 187
Adjusting in Perspective View ................ 586 Height ........................................... 184–185
Change individual settings ..................... 588 Height, floor below ................................ 186
Clip Surfaces within ....................... 145, 589 Lowered ............................................... 196
Color (red & green) ................................. 88 Manual Planes ...................................... 355
Definition .............................................. 750 Planes .................................................. 355
Degrees each rotate ...................... 145, 588 Remove flat ceiling ............................... 187
Floor ..................................................... 584 Tiles ..................................................... 196
Full ....................................................... 584 For deck ............................................... 222
Green in Plan View .................................. 88 Ceiling Height ................................ 127, 195
Height above floor ......................... 145, 588 Ceiling Planes ...................................... 355
Inches each move ......................... 145, 588
Index
Center
Lower ................................................... 586
Curved walls, maintain location ............. 236
Move .................................................... 586
Doors ................................................... 256
Perspective ........................................... 584
Handle, curved walls ............................. 235
Raise .................................................... 586
775
Lock, arc .............................................. 507 Click

Snap point ............................................ 551 Definition ................................................ 15
Window along wall ................................ 280 Clipboard
Window to sink ..................................... 280 Definition .............................................. 750
Chair rail ........................................ 128, 187 Close
Definition .............................................. 750 Active window ......................................... 58
Molding ......................................... 128, 186 Plan ........................................................58
Chamfer ................................................. 533 View ..................................................... 582
Button .............................................50, 525 Close All .................................................. 58
Definition .............................................. 750
Closed polyline
Change Definition .............................................. 503
Arc to line ............................................. 308 see also Polylines
Line to arc ............................................ 308
Closet
Roof Pitch or Height dialog .................... 337
Automatically named ............................. 703
Change Floor/Reference dialog ......... 169 see also Rooms
Checkbox Coffered ceiling
Chief Architect see also Ceiling
Definition .............................................. 750 Color
Release date .......................................... 39 Background ............................................. 65
Serial number ......................................... 39 In cross section ..................................... 604
Version number ...................................... 39 In elevation ........................................... 604
Chief Architect Interface ....................... 14 Printing ................................................. 594
Chief Architect Objects ......................... 12 Reference plan ........................................ 65
Text ...................................................... 483
Chief Architect Terms ........................... 12
Color On/Off toggle ...................... 502, 594
Chief Architect Windows ...................... 18
Chimneys Columns ................................................. 438
Material list settings .................................79
Masonry fireplaces ................................ 466
Tabs ..................................................... 483
Metal fireplaces .................................... 466
Text ...................................................... 487
Chord
Common rafters .................................... 393
Angle, arc ............................................. 552
Definition .............................................. 750 Compatibility with Previous Versions ...2
Direction, arc ........................................ 507 Components ............................................ 50
Length, arc ........................................... 552 Definition .............................................. 751
Chord Angle Components dialog .............................. 436
Definition .............................................. 750 Compound Angled Walls ..................... 226
Circles ...................................... 49, 502, 520 Concave
Circle about center ...........................49, 520 Walls and resulting roofs ........................ 240
Creating ............................................... 520
Concentric
Diameter .............................................. 552
CAD Edit type ................................. 73, 546
Draw using center and radius ................ 520
Copy, CAD ...................................... 74, 547
Editing ........................................... 520, 552
Definition .............................................. 751
Clearing the Terrain ............................. 166 Jump, CAD ..................................... 73, 546
Clerestory ............................................. 738 Jump, warning ....................................... 547
776
Cone ....................................................... 438 see also Rooms
Connect CPU
Index
Circuit ................................................... 453 Definition .............................................. 751
Create .................................................. 453 Craftsman style
Electrical, extra ..................................... 454 see Lites
Walls .................................................... 220 Definition .............................................. 751
Walls, edit button .................................. 239
Create
Connecting Walls ................................. 220 New floor .............................................. 168
Managing
Contextual Menus ................................... 64 Create Muntins ................................50, 283
Files
Definition ........................................ 16, 751
Creating a new plan ............................... 55
Control key ............................................ 524
Creating a Profile plan ........................ 146
Definition .............................................. 751
Move, forced ......................................... 280 Creating Terrain Features ................... 163
Copy ................................................. 50, 525 Cross Box ................................ 49, 502, 519
Managing
Area see Edit Area Creating ............................................... 519
Definition .............................................. 751
Files
Cabinets (individual or multiple) ............. 410
CAD ................................ 74, 524, 528, 547 Editing .................................................. 519
To disk ................................................... 61 see also CAD box
Doors (individual or multiple) ................. 253 Cross sections ..................................... 599
Double click for multiple ......................... 528 Back clip ....................................... 225, 601
Electrical .............................................. 457 CAD Layer 9 .................................. 541, 602
Floor plan see Edit Area CAD lines ............................................. 602
Layout distances ................................... 380 Definition .............................................. 751
Layout files ............................................. 61 Edit walls in 3D ..................................... 225
Layout view ........................................... 660 Exterior elevation .................................. 601
Library item ........................................... 432 Line on callouts .................................... 495
Material list ........................................... 696 Lines .................................................... 602
Multiple ....................................50, 525, 528 Save .................................................... 603
Managing
Plan files ................................................ 61 Text ..................................................... 488
Index
Files
Plan see Edit Area Through house ..................................... 601
Point to Point ................................ 527, 574 Update to layout ................................... 665
Windows (individual or multiple) ............. 277 Crown molding ...................... 128, 186–187
Copy Layout Distances dialog .... 136, 377 Definition .............................................. 751
Corner cabinets see Cabinets Ctrl key
Corner trim ............................................ 699 Pan the display ..................................... 580
Corner windows .................................... 282 Cubes ..................................................... 438
Corners, rounding see CAD, fillet Current
Floor, export ......................................... 623
Cosmo Player .................................... 8, 632
Layer, dimensions .......................... 140, 472
Definition .............................................. 751
Point ............................................. 504, 521
Counter top Current Floor ................................. 168–169
Custom for base cabinets ...............399–400
Index
Delete .................................................. 169

overhang .............................................. 122
Special CAD item .................................. 561 Current Point
Definition .............................................. 751
Court
Room label ........................................... 191 Cursor
777
Definition .............................................. 751 Default Materials Dialog .............. 143–144

Curvature Default Railing dialog .......................... 100
Handle, curved wall ............................... 234 Default Wall Heights ............................. 213
Curved Default Wall Type dialog ........................ 98
Center point ..........................................231
Defaults Setup menu ............................ 146
Stairs, merge ........................................ 305
Wall type, locked center ........................ 236 Define Material dialog .......................... 687
Wall type, normal .................................. 233 Defining Lights ..................................... 614
Walls, align between floors .................... 238 Definition
Walls, concave ..................................... 240 Polyline ................................................. 503
Walls, connect to straight wall ............... 220
Degrees in arc ....................................... 507
Walls, how to draw ................................ 231
Walls, jumpy when drawing ................... 231 Delete ............................................... 50, 525
Walls, roof over .................................... 239 3D Surface ............................................ 596
Walls, which type to use ........................ 238 Area see Edit Area
Cabinets (individual or multiple) ............. 410
Curved Stairs ........................................ 302
CAD items ............................................. 529
Custom CAD points .............................. 48, 502, 568
2D symbols .......................................... 524 Dimension section ................................. 476
Bearing line .......................................... 562 Door ..................................................... 253
Custom Muntins ................................... 283 Edge of polyline ..................................... 531
Cylinders ............................................... 438 Electrical ............................................... 457
Hatch, walls .......................................... 220
Keyboard .............................................. 568
D Landing ................................................. 301

Layout view ........................................... 660
Library item ........................................... 432
Dash Plans ......................................................61
Add to dimensions ......................... 139, 470 Railings ................................................ 219
Date Stairs/Stair section ................................ 301
Sun angle ............................................. 706 Text ...................................................... 485
Decimal feet ............................... 77– 78, 550 Wall hatch ............................................. 220
Deck Walls .................................................... 219
Ceiling over .......................................... 222 Warning .................................................. 92
Creating ............................................... 222 Windows ............................................... 277
Room label ........................................... 191 Delete a Molding ................................... 445
Def. Level .............................................. 111 Delete All Roofs ...................................... 50
Default Delete Current Floor ............................. 169
Arrowheads ................................... 143, 474 Delete Foundation ................................ 182
Line Style, CAD Setup .......................... 550 Delete Items ........................................... 701
Plan Setup ............................................. 92
Delete Surface ....................................... 608
Roof, restoring to .................................. 357
see also Preferences .............................. 63 Deleting Walls ....................................... 219
Text arrows ............................................ 67 Depth ...................................................... 371
Text items .............................................. 67 Fireplace ............................................... 462
Default Lights ....................................... 611 Framing ........................................ 130, 371
778
Detailing a Section/Elevation .............. 603 Material List - Show Items ..................... 694
Diagram Materials .............................................. 676
Move Point ........................................... 522
Index
Floor & ceiling ....................................... 194
Footing ................................................. 178 New Arc ............................................... 506
Room cross section ............................... 186 New Floor ............................................. 168
New Line End ....................................... 504
Dialog
New Point ............................................. 522
3D Preferences ....................................... 87
Overview ................................................ 16
Adjust Lights ......................................... 615
Managing
Plan Check ........................................... 703
Bay/Bow Window Roof .......................... 293
Plan Defaults ......................... 206– 207, 468
Files
Bow Window Specification ..................... 291
Preferences ............................................ 63
Build Roof ..................................... 342, 345
Quoins ................................................. 701
Cabinet Default ..................................... 120
Read DXF File ...................................... 620
Cabinet Specification ............................. 403
Roof Hole Specification ......................... 355
CAD Preferences .................................... 71
Roof Plane Edit ..................................... 338
CAD Setup ..................... 501, 542, 545, 569
Managing
Room Specification ........................ 184, 703
Change Roof Pitch ................................ 337
Rotate Plan View .................................. 702
Files
Components ......................................... 697
Schedule Specification .......................... 491
Default Materials ........................... 144, 688
Set Dimension Line ............................... 479
Default Wall Type .................................... 98
Show Items .......................................... 540
Define Material ...................................... 678
Soffit Size and Height ........................... 422
Definition .............................................. 751
Special CAD Item ................................. 561
Delete Items ......................................... 701
Special CAD item .................................. 561
Dimension Setup ........................... 138, 469
Stair Specification ................................. 320
Dimension setup ........................... 467, 502
Stair Style ............................................ 324
Door Specification ................................. 244
Symbol ................................................. 456
Edit Arc ........................................ 506, 552
Terrain Features ................................... 163
Edit CAD Item ................ 526, 550, 552, 563
Terrain Properties ................................. 160
Edit Dimension Line .............................. 475
Text Entry ............................................. 482
Managing
Edit Layout Lines .................................. 666
Toolbar Customization ............................ 42
Electrical Service Specification .............. 455
Index
Files
Truss Specification ........................ 382– 383
Enter Marker Text ................................. 499
View Angle ........................................... 592
Enter Text for Callout ............................ 495
Wall Corner Specification ...................... 700
Fireplace Specification .......................... 463
Wall Hatch ............................................ 221
Fixtures ................................................ 464
Wall Height Specification ....................... 226
Foundation Setup ............................ 93, 174
Wall Specfication .................................. 209
Framing ........................................ 129, 369
Wall Specification .......................... 346, 350
Framing Defaults ................................... 130
Window Specification ............................ 264
Furniture/Fixture Specification ............... 434
Windows Standard Color ....................... 710
General access ..................................... 524
Image Specification ............................... 447 Diameter
Joist Specification ................................. 366 Circle ................................................... 552
Layers ...........................................148– 149 Diamond style
Layout Files .......................................... 670 Definition .............................................. 751
Index
Light Specification ................................. 616 see Lites

Line Style ............................................. 558 Dimension Setup dialog ............... 138, 469
Locate Items .......................... 141, 467, 472
Dimension Toolbar ................................. 45
Material Export Options ......................... 631
Dimensions ........................................... 502
779
1st line offset ................................. 140, 471 Modifying individual dimensions ..... 475, 477
Add extension ....................................... 479 Move CAD item ............................. 476, 479
Arrow see Arrowhead Move extension ..................................... 478
Automatic reach ............................. 140, 471 Move number ........................................ 477
To cabinets ........................... 141– 142, 473 Move walls ............................................ 480
To CAD ..........................141– 142, 473, 540 Moving walls ......................................... 205
Color in cross section ............................ 604 Number height ............................... 139, 471
Create interior ...................................... 468 Number Size, individual dimension ......... 475
Current layer ................................. 140, 472 Offset ........................................... 140, 471
Customizing individual .......................... 475 To openings ................... 141– 142, 473– 474
Default settings .............................. 142, 474 Overall .......................................... 140, 472
Delete complete line ............................. 476 Point to point ......................................... 468
Delete extension line ............................. 478 Positioning ............................................ 469
Deleting section .................................... 476 Printing size .................................. 139, 471
Diagram of components ........................ 467 Reach, automatic .......................... 140, 471
Distance between .......................... 140, 471 Rule for moving ..................................... 479
Drawing ................................................ 467 Screen size, minimum .................... 139, 471
Editing .................................................. 477 Separation ............................. 140, 471– 472
To electrical items .................. 141– 142, 473 Setup dialog .......................................... 467
Erasing ................................................ 476 Snap to other surface ............................ 477
Exterior ................................................ 468 Snap unit ...................................... 139, 471
Fireplace, suppress dimension .............. 463 Temporary ............................................ 480
Font ................................................66, 476 To Electrical items ......................... 142, 473
General settings ............................ 139, 471 To walls (surface, center, main layer) .... 141,
Handle locations ................................... 477 473
Height ........................................... 139, 471 When automatic does not work ............... 468
Imperial ......................................... 139, 470 Directory
Inches only .................................... 139, 471 Autosave ........................................... 59, 69
Individual, modifying ............................. 475
Display
Interior ................................................. 468
Arc centers, ends .................................. 551
Items located ................................. 142, 473
Center of curved wall ............................. 231
Line separation .............................. 140, 472
Electrical ............................................... 459
Locate CAD .......................................... 540
Format of line angles ............................. 550
Locate electrical ................................... 457
Format of line length .............................. 550
Locate items .................................. 141, 472
Framing only ........................................... 89
Locate no locate walls ........................... 212
Inactive Views ......................................... 88
Locate on walls .............................. 141, 472
Line angle in bearings ................ 77– 78, 550
Locate opening automatically ......... 140, 472
Line angle in degrees ................ 77– 78, 550
Locate overall ................................ 140, 472
Text ...................................................... 486
Locate railing ........................................ 212
Locate specified items ........................... 467 Distance Above Floor ........................... 129
Manual ................................................. 467 Dithering
Manual reach ................................. 140, 471 Definition .............................................. 751
Metric ............................................ 139, 470 Divided Lites see Lites
Min. size on screen ........................ 139, 471 Dockable Toolbar
Minimum area ................................ 140, 472 Definition .............................................. 752
Minimum number size .................... 139, 471
Mode .................................................... 467 Dongle
780
Definition .............................................. 752 Style ............................................. 103, 245
Door Defaults dialog ............................ 102 Swing, changing for bifold ..................... 258
Swing, changing for hinged ................... 257
Index
Door Specification dialog .................... 102
Swing, changing for pocket ............. 242, 258
Door Toolbar ........................................... 46 Swing, changing for slider ..................... 257
Doors Threshold ...................................... 260, 704
6-panel see Doors, Library Transom window ................................... 260
Arch ............................................. 107, 249 Trim .............................................. 105, 247
Managing
Bifold .................................................... 243 Trimmers ....................................... 132, 373
Casing, interior and exterior ........... 105, 247 Type ..................................... 103, 241, 245
Files
Centering .............................................. 256 Use to make opening in railing ............... 222
Copy (individual or multiple) ................... 253 Wrapped opening .................................. 260
Curved doors ........................................ 252 Doorways .............................................. 241
Custom, placing .................................... 243 Library .................................................. 430
Delete ................................................... 253 see also Doors
Managing
Door style, library .......................... 103, 245
Dormer
Edit ...................................................... 244
Files
Angled hole for framing .................. 135, 376
Entry .................................................... 285
Definition .............................................. 752
Frame ........................................... 105, 247
Gable ................................................... 745
Gable over ............................................ 256
Shed .................................................... 746
Garage ................................................. 243
see also Roofs
Headers ........................................ 134, 374
In curved walls ...................................... 252 Dot Matrix .............................................. 635
Library ................................... 103, 243, 245 Double Hung Window
Lites (across and vertical) .............. 106, 248 Definition .............................................. 752
Materials ....................................... 104, 246 Double Sill see Windows
Mode .................................................... 241
Double truss see Trusses
Move (individual or multiple) .................. 254
Move by dragging .................................. 254 Double-click
Managing
Move restrictions ................................... 255 Definition ................................................ 15
Index
Files
Move using dimensions ......................... 254 Drag
Muntin Width ................................. 106, 248 Definition ................................................ 15
Opening ................................................ 242 Draw
Opening, wrapped ................................. 260 Curved railing ....................................... 231
Plinth block, add ........................... 104, 246 Curved wall .......................................... 231
Pocket .................................................. 242 Custom Moldings .................................. 443
Railing opening ..................................... 261 Framing Members ................................. 359
Recessed ..................................... 104, 246 Walls .................................................... 202
Replicate .............................................. 253
Drawing Area .......................................... 19
Resize .................................................. 259
Rough opening .............................. 132, 372 Drop Hip Truss see Trusses
Schedule .............................................. 491 Dropped ceiling
Select (individual or multiple) ................. 244 Definition .............................................. 752
Slider .................................................... 242 Dutch Gable Roof
Index
Special casings ..................................... 252 Definition .............................................. 752

Special doors see Door, Library Dwang (blocking)
Specification dialog ............................... 244 Definition .............................................. 752
Standard ............................................... 242
781
DXF CAD Item, Show length .......................... 559

3D DXF layers ......................................
624 Doors .................................................... 244
Definition ..............................................
752 Polyline Parts .................................. 49, 549
Export 2D, all floors ..............................
622 Polyline Parts, illustration ................. 76, 549
Export 2D, cross section .......................622 Stairs .................................................... 320
Export 2D, current floor .........................
622 Walls in 3D ........................................... 225
Export 2D, elevation ..............................
622 Edit Area
Export 2D, layers ..................................
623 Copies, position exactly ......................... 575
Export 2D, overview ..............................
622 Copy area ..................................... 574–575
Export 3D, layers ..................................
624 Copy area between floors ...................... 575
Export 3D, model ..................................
624 Copy area between plans ....................... 575
Extended, for POV-ray .....................76, 549 Copy plan
Import, assign layers .............................
621 Copy, hold position between floors ......... 576
Import, mapping layers ..........................
621 Copy, reflected ...................................... 575
Layers ..................................................
623 Delete area ........................................... 574
Mapping layers on import ...................... 621 Delete contents of plan .......................... 574
Miscellaneous information ..................... 622 Delete floor ........................................... 574
Dynamic Defaults ................................. 109 Hold position ......................................... 576
Mirror area ............................................ 575
Move .................................................... 573
E Move, point to point ............................... 574

Moving speed ................................ 140, 471
Reflect around line ................................ 575
Eave Fascia ........................................... 376
Reflective Copy ..................................... 575
Eaves Rotate area ........................................... 573
Definition .............................................. 752 Stack copies exactly .............................. 575
Fascia .................................................. 136
Edit buttons
Plumb cut ............................................. 345
Connect walls ........................................ 239
Square cut ............................................ 345
Curved walls ......................................... 238
Edge Flashing
Edit CAD Item dialog ............................ 382
Definition .............................................. 752
Edit Menu ................................................. 27
Edit
Arc, dialog ..................................... 506, 552 Edit Toolbar ....................................... 21, 45
CAD Item, dialog ........... 526, 550, 552, 563 Edit Type
CAD Item, general access ..................... 524 Concentric ...................................... 73, 546
CAD Item, Layer ................................... 559 Fillet ............................................... 75, 548
CAD Item, Line Color ............................ 559 Move Corners .................................. 73, 544
CAD Item, Line Style ............................. 559 Reset defaults ....................................... 547
CAD Item, Line Weight .......................... 559 Resize ............................................ 75, 547
CAD Item, Move relative to self ............. 552 see also CAD
CAD Item, Move to front ........................ 559 see also CAD
CAD Item, Move, polar .......................... 552 Editing in a 3D View ............................. 596
CAD Item, Replicate ............................. 552
Editing Walls in 3D ............................... 224
CAD Item, Reverse ............................... 552
CAD Item, Set angle ............................. 552 Egress (Windows)
CAD Item, Set Length ........................... 552 Definition .............................................. 752
CAD Item, Show angle .......................... 559 Electrical
782
Buttons ................................................. 451 Estimating software ............................. 690
Connect ................................................ 453 Exiting Chief Architect .......................... 59
Connect Additional ................................ 454
Index
Explode
Copy .................................................... 457
Block ............................................. 525, 536
Delete ................................................... 457
Block,button ........................................... 50
Dimension to ................................. 142, 473
Display in 2D ........................................ 459 Export
Display in 3D ........................................ 459 3D DXF, Color or Material Indicator ....... 625
Bitmaps ................................................ 628
Managing
General ................................................ 451
Library .................................................. 430 Definition .............................................. 752
Files
Light ..................................................... 452 DXF, 2D layers ..................................... 623
Locate, dimensions ............................... 457 DXF, 3D model ..................................... 624
Mode .................................................... 451 File types ............................................. 619
Move by dragging .................................. 457 General information .............................. 619
Move using dimensions ......................... 457 Material list ........................................... 690
Managing
Options ................................................. 451 Materials ....................................... 631, 696
Outlet ................................................... 452 Metafile ................................................ 630
Files
Outlets, automatic ................................. 455 Render view ......................................... 607
Rotate .................................................. 458 Spreadsheet ......................................... 619
Switch .................................................. 453 VRML ................................................... 632
Symbol library ....................................... 456 Wall layers ........................................... 626
Symbol, create ...................................... 456 WMF .................................................... 630
Electrical Toolbar ................................... 47 Exposed beams .................................... 198
Elevation Data ....................................... 156 Extend .................................... 525, 530, 533
Button .............................................50, 525
Elevation Line Properties dialog ........ 157
Fence .............................. 50, 525, 532–533
Elevation Lines and Splines ............... 157 Handle, curved wall ............................... 234
Elevation Points ................................... 157 Exterior
Elevations .............................................. 599
Managing
Deck .................................................... 222
Create .................................................. 600 Dimensions .......................................... 468
Index
Files
Definition .............................................. 752 Door, threshold ..................................... 704
Exterior see Cross section Elevation see Cross section
Interior .................................................. 601 Room type ............................................ 189
Kitchen ................................................. 600 Rooms ................................................. 189
Save ..................................................... 603 Trim, corner .......................................... 699
Update to layout .................................... 665 Walls .................................................... 212
End Truss see Trusses Exterior Deck ........................................ 222
Enduser Exterior Plinth Block .................... 104, 246
Definition .............................................. 752 Exterior rooms ...................................... 189
Energy heel ........................................... 384 External only ................................. 141, 473
Engineered lumber ....................... 131, 371
Definition .............................................. 752
F
Index
Enter Marker Text dialog ..................... 158

Entering Dimensions ............................. 16
Entry ....................................................... 198 F6 key
Fill window ........................................... 578
783
Face PL2 ....................................................... 167

Definition .............................................. 753 PL3 ....................................................... 167
False ceiling PL4 ....................................................... 167
Definition .............................................. 753 PLB ........................................................62
Pln ..........................................................61
Fan ......................................................... 456
TAn ........................................................61
see also Electrical
TMn ........................................................61
Fascia ............................................. 136, 376 TXT ........................................................62
Definition .............................................. 753 WLK ....................................................... 62
Plumb cut or square cut ........................ 340 WMF ....................................................... 61
Roof .............................................. 136, 376 WRL ....................................................... 62
Top ...................................................... 339
Fill
Fence .............................................. 532– 533 Polyline ................................................. 560
Button .............................................50, 525 Window ................................................. 578
Definition .............................................. 753
Fillet ....................................................... 533
File Button ............................................. 50, 525
Definition .............................................. 753 CAD edit type .................................. 75, 548
File Extension Definition .............................................. 753
Definition .............................................. 753 Notes .............................................. 75, 548
File locking ............................................. 70 Roofs, special case ............................... 534
Definition .............................................. 753 Special use, roofs .................................. 534
File Management .................................... 55 Final plots
Layout .................................................. 674
File Menu ................................................. 25
Final View .............................................. 608
File types
CAn ....................................................... 61 Fireplace .......................................... 50, 461
DAT ....................................................... 62 Chimneys .............................................. 466
DLL ........................................................ 62 Definition .............................................. 753
DXF ....................................................... 62 Depth .................................................... 462
EXE ....................................................... 62 Dimensions, suppress ............................ 463
HLP ....................................................... 62 Direction facing ..................................... 461
INT ........................................................ 62 Fire box definition .................................. 753
L2x ........................................................ 62 Freestanding ......................................... 462
L3A ........................................................ 62 Hearth height ........................................ 463
L3C ........................................................ 62 Interior wall ........................................... 461
L3F ........................................................ 62 Masonry ................................................ 461
L3S ........................................................ 62 No Fire Box ........................................... 464
LA1 ........................................................ 61 Prefabricated ........................................ 464
LBA ........................................................ 62 Resizing ................................................ 462
LBF ........................................................ 62 Specification dialog ............................... 463
LBS ........................................................ 62 Symbol ................................................. 464
LCK ....................................................... 70 Fix Wall Connections ..................... 50, 220
MAT ....................................................... 61 Fixture/Furniture Resize ........................ 92
PAn .............................................59, 61, 69
Fixtures .................................................. 428
PBn ........................................................ 61
Built-in, create ....................................... 436
PL0 ...................................................... 167
Built-in, delete ....................................... 436
PL1 ...................................................... 167
Cabinet front ......................................... 436
784
Counter top ........................................... 436 Setup ................................................... 481
Definition .............................................. 753 Text ....................................................... 66
Dialog ................................................... 464 Toolbar .................................................. 66
Index
Library .......................................... 430, 461 Footings ................................... 94, 174, 177
Stand alone .......................................... 436 Alignment ............................................. 178
Under cabinet ....................................... 436 Centered on main layer ......................... 214
Wall ...................................................... 436 Centered on wall ................................... 214
Flat Sides Definition .............................................. 754
Managing
Definition .............................................. 753 Diagram ............................................... 178
Files
Flip layers see Walls Foundation ........................................... 177
Height ........................................... 194, 214
Floating Slab
Special use arrow ................................. 490
Definition .............................................. 753
Stem wall ............................................. 178
Floor ......................................................... 12 Stepped ............................................... 230
Build ..................................................... 342 Wall height ........................................... 177
Managing
Combine platform with ceiling ................ 367 Wall thickness ...................................... 177
Diagram ................................................ 194
Files
Wall type .............................................. 177
Export all .............................................. 623 Width ................................................... 214
Export current ....................................... 623
Footprint ............................................... 192
Height ............................................184– 185
Definition .............................................. 754
Insert .................................................... 169
Foundation .............................................. 13
Floor & Ceiling Heights ....................... 194
Foundation Setup dialog ........ 93, 174, 191
Floor Above Height .............................. 186
Foundation wall type ......................95, 175
Floor Camera ........................................ 584
Foundations
Floor Defaults dialog ................... 127, 183
Alignment ............................................. 178
Floor height ........................................... 127 Automatic ............................................. 174
Floor Overview ...................................... 590 Below Garage ....................................... 182
Managing
Floor Plan Build blank plan .................................... 174
Build from 1st floor ................................ 174
Index
Drawing .................................................. 21
Files
Centering footings (2 methods) .............. 214
Floor to Top ........................................... 111
Create .................................................. 174
Fluorescent ........................................... 456 File extension ....................................... 173
see also Electrical Footing ................................................. 173
Fly-by Footing width and height ....................... 214
Create .................................................. 593 Footings specification ........................... 177
Foam Seal General information .............................. 173
Definition .............................................. 753 Height .................................................. 194
Fonts How room name affects ......................... 182
Changing defaults ................................... 66 Living space ......................................... 173
Choosing .............................................. 481 Mesh ...............................................96, 176
Default .................................................. 481 Monolithic slab .................................95, 175
Definition .............................................. 754 Pier ...................................................... 173
Index
Different ............................................... 481 Piers specification .......................... 179–180

Dimensions ..................................... 66, 476 Piers, adding manually .......................... 180
Material list ..................................... 66, 697 Piers, automatic ...............................95, 176
Multiple ................................................. 481 Piers, editing ........................................ 180
785
Rebar ..............................................96, 176 Manually drawn ..................................... 359

Room supplies floor .............................. 187 Material list ........................................... 696
Setting up ........................................93, 174 Material list, how affects ........................ 361
Slab ..................................................... 173 Multiple Copy button ................................ 51
Slab at top of stem wall ....................94, 174 Multiple copy button ....................... 525, 528
Slab, monolithic ....................... 95, 175, 180 Multiple copy to place ............................ 375
Slab, normal ......................................... 180 Platform ........................................ 130, 370
Slabs, create two ways .......................... 180 Platform thickness ......................... 130, 370
Stem wall ........................................94, 174 Rafter information .......................... 136, 376
Stem wall height by room ...................... 177 Reference marker .................................. 363
Thickness ............................................. 214 Resize items ......................................... 359
Turning wall into ................................... 211 Roof ..................................................... 375
Types ...................................... 94, 173–174 Rough opening .............................. 132, 372
Wall ..................................................... 214 Sill thickness ................................. 133, 373
Fractional format ....................... 77– 78, 550 Spacing, rafters ..................................... 375
Stick ..................................................... 375
Frame Inset ........................................... 113
Stud spacing ................................. 132, 372
Frame Width .......................................... 112 Stud thickness ............................... 132, 372
Framing ................................................. 518 Top plates, number ........................ 132, 372
Angled dormer hole ........................ 135, 376 Trimmers ...................................... 132, 373
Automatic ............................................. 359 Trusses ......................................... 136, 377
Automatic, dialog ........................... 129, 369 Trusses and rafters mix ......................... 362
Automatic, understanding ...................... 362 Type ............................................. 136, 376
Back clip ................................................ 88 Use framing reference ........................... 375
Bearing line .......................................... 364 Wall ...................................................... 368
Bottom plates, number ................... 132, 372 Wall detail window ................................. 368
Build roof framing ................................. 375 Walls and materials list .......................... 369
Butt over support ........................... 130, 370 Width ............................................ 130, 371
CAD ................................................48, 502 see also CAD box
Ceiling, automatic .......................... 130, 370 Framing Box Tool Button ...................... 48
Creating ............................................... 518
Framing Defaults ........... 129–130, 369–370
Depth ............................................ 130, 371
Dialog ........................................... 129, 369 Framing dialog ...................................... 370
Display only framing ................................ 89 Framing reference
Dormer .......................................... 135, 376 Rafters .................................................. 375
Double sill ..................................... 133, 373 Framing Reference Markers ................ 363
Editing .................................................. 518 Trusses ................................................. 381
Fascia ........................................... 136, 376
Framing Type ................. 134, 136, 374, 376
Floor, automatic ............................. 130, 370
Engineered lumber ......... 131, 136, 371, 376
Framing Reference button ....................... 51
Glulam ........................... 131, 136, 371, 376
Framining reference button .................... 525
I-joist ............................. 131, 136, 371, 376
General ................................................ 359
Joist ............................................. 131, 371
Headers specification ..................... 134, 374
Lumber .......................... 131, 136, 371, 376
Headers, precut ............................. 134, 374
LVL ................................ 131, 136, 371, 376
Joist direction ....................................... 365
Rafters .......................................... 136, 376
Lap over support ............................ 130, 370
Steel box ....................... 131, 136, 371, 376
Layer ................................................... 210
Steel-I ............................ 131, 136, 371, 376
Lookouts ....................................... 136, 376
786
Frieze GFCI see GFI Outlets
Definition .............................................. 754 GFI Outlets ............................................ 452
Index
From Line End GIF
Move point ............................................ 523 Definition .............................................. 754
Notes .................................................... 523
Girder trusses ...................................... 395
Full Camera Definition .............................................. 754
Definition .............................................. 754
Glass
Full Gable wall .............................. 213, 347
Managing
Opaque .................................................. 87
Definition .............................................. 754
Glulam ............................................ 131, 371
Files
Full Height Cabinet Definition .............................................. 754
Definition .............................................. 754
Grids
Full Overview .................................590– 591 Materials list reports ................................ 80
Definition .............................................. 754
Ground Fault Interrupt
Furniture ...................................50, 428, 430
Managing
Definition .............................................. 754
Library .................................................. 430 see GFI Outlets
Files
Stand alone .......................................... 438
Ground Plane
Table item ............................................. 439
Definition .............................................. 754
Wall item .............................................. 439
Group select ........................................... 19
Click method .......................................... 20
G Same type item, editing ........................... 21

Gull wing
Roof ..................................................... 744
Gable
Definition .............................................. 754 Gutters
Dormer ................................................. 745 Definition .............................................. 754
Over window ................................. 256, 281 Remove ................................................ 343
Roof ............................................. 348, 739
Managing
Roof examples ...................................... 736
H
Index
Files
Roof, design manually ........................... 717
Special CAD item .................................. 561
Gable Line Half hip
Gable Roof Roof ..................................................... 745
Definition .............................................. 754 Half walls see Railings, solid
Gable/Roof Line ............................ 332, 352 Handles ................................................. 504
Gambrel Roof ........................................ 743 Cabinets ............................................... 401
Definition .............................................. 754 Center, curved walls ............................. 235
Curvature, curved wall .......................... 234
Garage ................................................... 189
Curved stairs ........................................ 301
Door ..................................................... 242
Curved walls ......................................... 233
Foundation ............................................ 182
Curved walls, locked center ................... 236
Room label ........................................... 191
Index
Extend, curved walls ............................. 234

Door see also Door
For wall fireplace .................................. 462
Generating the Terrain ......................... 159 Identification by .................................... 504
Getting Started ....................................... 19 Midpoint ............................................... 546
787
Move, curved walls ............................... 234 High Shed/Gable ................................... 348

Resize, curved walls ............................. 236 Hip Roof ..................................348, 726, 745
Stairs ...................................................301 Definition .............................................. 755
Wall offset ............................................ 204
Hip Truss ............................................... 391
Wall offset, curved ................................ 235
see also Trusses
Hardware Lock .......................................... 8
Hold position button ............................ 576
Definition .............................................. 754
Drivers ..................................................... 9 Hole
Angled dormer ............................... 135, 376
Hatch
In roof, CAD polyline .............................. 564
DXF ..................................................... 221
Patterns ............................................... 560 Hopper Window
Polyline ................................................ 560 Definition .............................................. 755
Spacing .................................................. 93 House Wizard ........................................ 708
Wall, definition ...................................... 754 Room Boxes ......................................... 708
Walls .................................................... 220 How to Draw a Plan ................................ 21
Headers .......................................... 134, 374 Howe Truss
Precut ........................................... 134, 374
H-shaped house .................................... 735
Solid ............................................. 134, 374
Thickness ...................................... 134, 374 HVAC
Type ............................................. 134, 374 Definition .............................................. 755
Library .................................................. 430
Hearth
Definition .............................................. 754
Depth ................................................... 463
Height .................................................. 463 I
Height
Basement ceiling .............................94, 175 Icons
Ceiling .................................................. 185 Arrange ................................................. 582
Ceiling on floor below ............................ 186 Definition .............................................. 755
Diagram ............................................... 194 I-joist .............................................. 131, 371
Dimension numbers, printing .......... 139, 471 Image Specification dialog .................. 447
Floor for room ....................................... 185 Images
Footing ................................................. 194 3D, adding ............................................ 447
Foundation ........................................... 194 Adding new ................................... 447, 450
Railings ......................................... 101, 216 Create .................................................. 450
Restore, walls ....................................... 226 Definition ...............................446, 609, 755
Stem wall by room ................................ 177 Display, 2D ........................................... 448
Help Display, 3D ........................................... 448
Displaying .............................................. 19 In Layout ............................................... 449
Menu ...................................................... 39 Print ............................................. 607, 644
Online .................................................... 23 Resizing ................................................ 446
Tips ....................................................... 23 Select from library ................................. 447
Herringbone Specification dialog ............................... 447
Definition .............................................. 755 Transparent color .................................. 447
Hexagon Imperial .......................................... 139, 470
Tutorial ................................................. 714 Definition .............................................. 755
788
see Units Isometric View ............................... 590, 592
Import Definition .............................................. 755
Index
2D DXF ................................................ 619
Bitmaps ................................................ 629
DXF, assign layers ................................ 621
DXF, mapping layers ............................. 621
J
Files ..................................................... 619 Jack trusses see Trusses
General information ............................... 619
Join Roofs ............................................. 336
Managing
Wall layers ............................................ 627
Joist
Files
Import Layer Sets ................................. 154
Direction, Special CAD item .................. 561
Inactive Camera
Joist depth ............................................ 130
Definition .............................................. 755
Joist Direction Line ...................... 365, 367
Inches Only see Dimensions
Joist Specification dialog ................... 366
Inches scrolled
Managing
By arrow key ........................................... 93 Joists .............................................. 361, 371
Automatically create .............................. 362
Files
For panning .......................................... 580
Bearing line .......................................... 364
Ink Jet
Definition .............................................. 755
Plotters ................................................. 635
Direction ............................................... 365
Printers ................................................. 635
Draw new, manually .............................. 361
Insert Framing reference ................................ 371
Bitmap .................................................. 502 Framing Type, Engineered lumber .. 131, 371
Insert a Floor ......................................... 169 General information .............................. 359
Insert Bitmap .......................................... 51 Height .................................................. 361
Specification dialog ............................... 366
Insert Image ............................................ 50
Thickness, individual platform ................ 366
Installing Type, Glulam ........................................ 371
Chief Architect .......................................... 3 Type, I-joist .......................................... 371
Managing
Insulation ..................................49, 502, 519 Type, Lumber ....................................... 371
Index
Files
Creating ................................................ 519 Type, LVL ...................................... 131, 371
Definition .............................................. 755 Type, Steel box ..................................... 131
Editing .................................................. 519 Type, Steel-I ......................................... 131
see also CAD box see also Framing
Interior
Dimensions ........................................... 468
Fireplace, wall ....................................... 461
Room type ............................................ 189
K
Interior Elevations ................................ 600 Keyboard Commands ............................ 17
Interior Rooms ...................................... 189 Kingpost ................................. 136, 377, 383
Interior Stairwell ................................... 223 Definition .............................................. 755
Interpolate Kitchen elevation ................................. 600
Definition .............................................. 755 Knee wall ............................................... 349
Index
Invisible Definition .............................................. 755

Walls ............................................ 211, 223
789
L Default Set ............................................ 153

Display in Reference ............................. 150
Layer Sets ............................................ 153
Labels
Tabs ..................................................... 148
Room, automatic ................................... 703
Trusses ................................................ 385 Layers dialog ......................................... 149
Laminated Lumber Beam Layout
Definition .............................................. 754 100 pages ............................................. 651
Add lines ............................................... 666
Laminated Veneer Lumber
Adding CAD .......................................... 652
Definition .............................................. 756
Border .......................................... 651, 654
Landing Border, show ......................................... 660
CAD ..................................................... 564 CAD Detail .................................... 657, 664
Definition .............................................. 756 CAD, add .............................................. 652
see also Stairs CAD, modify .......................................... 652
Landings ............................................... 302 Camera views ............................... 659, 664
Lap Change line length ................................ 666
Framing ......................................... 130, 370 Change scale of views ........................... 657
Changing pages .................................... 651
Laser
Check plots ........................................... 673
Plotters ................................................ 635
Copy view ............................................. 660
Printers ................................................ 635
Copying files ........................................... 61
Layer Creating ................................................ 651
3D DXF ................................................ 624 Cross section ........................................ 665
Current CAD, changing ......................... 150 Current page ......................................... 651
Current, dimensions ....................... 140, 472 Current screen ...................................... 658
Dimension, individual ............................ 475 Delete lines ........................................... 666
Edit CAD lines ...................................... 559 Display contents .................................... 663
Export 2D ............................................. 623 Double border ....................................... 654
Export 3D ............................................. 624 Edit lines ............................................... 665
Layer Sets ............................................ 150 Editing views ......................................... 659
Properties ............................................. 149 Elevation ............................................... 665
Soffits .................................................. 422 Entire plan ............................................ 658
Tables .................................................. 148 Files ..................................................... 671
Text ..................................................... 483 Filleted border ....................................... 655
Text, changing ...................................... 486 Final plots ............................................. 674
Wall, exporting ...................................... 626 Find view .............................................. 669
Wall, importing ...................................... 627 Images .................................................. 449
Layer Alignment tab ............................ 228 Layer Sets ............................................ 154
Layer Properties ................................... 149 Line color .............................................. 668
Line weight ........................................... 658
Layer Sets .......................147, 150, 153– 154
Lines .................................................... 665
Layer Spec Tab ..................................... 217 Lines, changing ..................................... 668
Layer Tables ......................................... 148 Lines, printing weight ............................. 668
Layer Tabs ............................................ 148 Missing view ......................................... 669
Layers .................................................... 147 Move view page .................................... 661
Architectural Layers .............................. 151 Moving views ........................................ 659
CAD Layers .......................................... 152 Overview ....................................... 649, 664
790
Overviews ............................................. 659 Adding Bitmap Images .......................... 450
Page down ............................................ 651 Appliances ........................................... 430
Page up ................................................ 651 Browser ................................................ 427
Index
Page zero ............................................. 651 Cabinet doors ....................................... 430
Plan view ...................................... 657, 664 CAD Block ............................................ 445
Plot from ............................................... 674 Copy item ............................................. 432
Preparation ........................................... 650 Delete item ........................................... 432
Print from ...................................... 639, 674 Doors ............................................ 103, 245
Managing
Print Layout .......................................... 656 Doorways ............................................. 430
Print test ............................................... 652 Electrical symbol ............................ 430, 456
Files
Print to ................................................. 639 Fixtures ................................................ 430
Printer relationship ................................ 673 HVAC ................................................... 430
Printer selection .................................... 650 Material list related ............................... 436
Printing line weight ................................ 668 Millwork ................................................ 430
Resize view .......................................... 662 Molding ................................................ 439
Managing
Rotating views ...................................... 659 Move item ............................................ 432
Scaling ................................................. 657 Place item ............................................ 431
Files
Select lines ........................................... 666 Primitives ...................................... 430, 438
Selecting views ..................................... 659 Range Hood ......................................... 436
Sending views to ................................... 656 Select item ........................................... 431
Show border ......................................... 660 Sunrooms ............................................. 430
Show items ........................................... 660 Windows .............................................. 430
Suppress line merge .............................. 658 Library Browser .................................... 427
Template .............................................. 654 Definition .............................................. 756
Testing ..........................................651– 652 Navigation Window ............................... 429
Text .............................................. 488, 652 Toolbar & Status Bar ............................. 429
Title block ............................................. 655
Library Types ........................................ 430
Understanding ...................................... 651
Using .................................................... 656 Light Specification dialog ................... 616
Managing
View, contents ...................................... 663 Lights
Index
Files
View, delete .......................................... 660 Attenuated ............................................ 617
View, resize .......................................... 662 Auto Intensity ....................................... 616
View, scaling ......................................... 657 Casts Shadows ..................................... 618
Views, changing .................................... 659 Color .................................................... 616
Layout Facility Connect to switch ................................. 453
Definition .............................................. 756 Create globe ......................................... 452
Cut Off Angle ........................................ 617
Layout Toggle ......................................... 52
Dir Angle .............................................. 617
Layout Toolbar ........................................ 53 Drop Off Rate ....................................... 617
LCK see File types Floor Number ....................................... 617
Left button Height .................................................. 617
Definition ................................................ 14 Light Fixtures ........................................ 612
Light Sources ....................................... 610
Length
Light Types ........................................... 611
Index
Of arc ................................................... 507

Tilt Angle .............................................. 617
Of chord ............................................... 507
Type .................................................... 616
Library
Line Weight ............................................. 65
Add a Molding ....................................... 443
791
Lines ................................. 48, 501, 503, 645 Walls, both surfaces ...................... 141, 472
Change to arcs ....................................... 51 Walls, centers ............................... 141, 472
Color in cross section ............................ 604 Walls, surfaces .............................. 141, 472
Color, layout ......................................... 668 Lock
Color, plotting ....................................... 669 Arcs, lock center .................................... 507
Cross section ........................................ 602 CAD layer ..................................... 149, 541
Define color, by layer ..................... 149, 541 Center of curved walls ........................... 236
Define color, selected CAD .................... 559 Center, curved wall type ........................ 236
Define line weight by layer .................... 149 Files ....................................................... 70
Define style, by layer ..................... 149, 541 Roof planes ........................................... 343
Define weight, selected CAD ................. 559
Lock Center button ....................... 236, 238
Define width, by layer ............................ 541
Delete, layout ....................................... 666 Lookout .................................................. 136
Drawing ................................................ 503 Definition .............................................. 756
Joist direction ....................................... 365 Lookouts ................................................ 376
Move .................................................... 505 Louver .................................................... 115
Parallel button ...................................... 530 Lower
Select ................................................... 505 Pony wall .............................................. 228
Select, layout ........................................ 666 Pony wall, show ...................................... 92
Separation, dimensions .................. 140, 472
Showing weight on screen ....................... 65 Lowered ceiling .................................... 195
Style dialog .......................................... 558 L-shaped house .................................... 735
Style, Edit CAD item ............................. 559 Lumber ........................................... 131, 371
Thick lines displayed on screen ........65, 572 LVL ................................................. 131, 371
Weight ................................................... 65 Definition .............................................. 756
Weight, printing .................................... 668
LinesTo Arc button ................................ 51
Lites
Craftsman ..................................... 115, 272
M
Definition .............................................. 756 Macro
Diamond ........................ 106, 115, 248, 272 Definition .............................................. 756
Normal .......................... 106, 115, 248, 272
Main
Prairie ........................... 106, 115, 248, 272
Layer surfaces .............................. 141, 473
Living Area ............................. 128, 189, 192
Main Layer ....................................... 99, 210
Calculated ..................................... 189, 192
Definition .............................................. 756 Make arc tangent
Deleting ................................................ 192 Edit button ............................................ 238
Label .................................................... 192 Mansard
Restoring ............................................. 192 Definition .............................................. 756
vs. Square footage ................................ 192 Roof ..................................................... 741
Living Area vs. Footprint .................... 192 Manual Dimensions .............................. 467
Locate Manual framing ..................................... 359
Dimensions will find .............................. 467 Manual reach
External only ................................. 141, 472 Definition .............................................. 756
Items Dialog .................................. 141, 472 Dimensions ................................... 140, 471
Openings, automatically ................. 140, 472
Manual Tips ............................................. 24
792
Manual.pdf ............................................... 24 Framing, how affects ............................. 361
Mapping Generate .............................................. 690
Grid display on reports ............................ 80
Index
DXF layers to Chief layers ..................... 621
Library sizes ......................................... 436
Markers .................................................. 502
Master list .......................................82, 692
CAD ..................................................... 536
Material, define ..................................... 676
Create .................................................. 499
Price ............................................. 692, 694
Definition .............................................. 756
Report style ............................................ 80
Deleting ................................................ 500
Managing
Supplier ......................................... 692, 694
Framing reference ................................. 363
Wall framing ......................................... 369
Files
Move .................................................... 500
Rotate .................................................. 500 MATERIAL.TXT ..................................... 765
Selecting .............................................. 499 Materials .................................................. 13
Tool Button ............................................. 45 Assigning Default Materials ................... 143
Type to create ....................................... 499 Calculating, on soffits ............................ 698
Calculation ........................................... 698
Managing
Marquee
Definition .............................................. 756 Categories ............................................ 681
Files
Color .................................................... 678
Masonry ................................................. 466
Define for material list ........................... 676
Fireplace .............................................. 461
Export ................................... 631, 634, 696
see also Fireplace
Import .................................................. 634
Master list ................................................ 50 Line Color ............................................. 679
Columns to display .................................. 82 Material list ........................................... 676
Definition .............................................. 756 on Walls ............................................... 188
Material list ..................................... 82, 692 Render properties ................................. 684
Name of file ............................................ 82 Rules for calculating on soffits ............... 698
see also Material list Rules for calculation ............................. 698
Master plan see Profile Plan Textures ............................................... 683
Material see also Material List
Managing
Categories, Display ............................... 694 Maximize ................................................. 19
Index
Files
Material list ................................... 689, 765 Menu
Add information ..................................... 694 CAD ..................................................... 565
Calculate from all floors ......................... 690 CAD, overview ...................................... 565
Calculate from Area ............................... 691 Menus ...................................................... 16
Calculate from Room ............................. 691 3D .......................................................... 34
Categories, Suppress ............................ 694 Build ...............................................28, 576
Change information ............................... 694 CAD ....................................................... 35
Code .................................................... 694 Contextual .............................................. 16
Columns to display .................................. 79 Edit ........................................................ 27
Comment .......................................693– 694 File ........................................................ 25
Copying ................................................ 696 Help ....................................................... 39
Create .................................................. 690 Options .................................................. 32
Default Settings ...................................... 79 Tools ...................................................... 37
Estimating software ............................... 690 Window .................................................. 38
Index
Exporting ............................... 690, 696, 765

Mesh
Extra Amount ........................................ 695
Specify for foundation ......................96, 176
Font ......................................... 66, 696– 697
Framing ................................. 136, 376, 696 Metal Drip Edge
793
Definition .............................................. 756 Window ................................................. 276

Metric Monolithic Slab ............................... 95, 175
Dimensions ................................... 139, 470 Definition .............................................. 757
Display ...................................... 77– 78, 550 Movable Size ......................................... 111
see also Units
Move
Mfr. Offset ............................................. 113 Cabinet, individual ................................. 411
Middle button Cabinets by dragging ............................. 412
Definition ................................................ 14 Cabinets using dimensions .................... 412
Millwork Cabinets, multiple .................................. 411
Definition .............................................. 756 Cabinets, restrictions ............................. 412
Library ........................................... 430, 437 CAD item, polar ..................................... 552
CAD item, relative to self ....................... 552
Minimum
CAD item, to front .................................. 559
Number Size .................................. 139, 471
CAD point ............................................. 522
Minimum Alcove ................................... 344 CAD Point to Point .................................. 50
Minimum Separation ............................ 111 CAD point to point ................................. 525
Minimum System Requirements ............. 1 Control key ........................................... 280
see also Optional Components Corners, polyline ............................. 73, 544
Display ................................................. 580
Mirror
Door by dragging ................................... 254
Area see Edit Area, Reflect
Door using dimensions .......................... 254
see also Reverse (Edit CAD)
Door, single .......................................... 254
Mitre Doors as a group ................................... 254
Definition .............................................. 756 Drag ..................................................... 526
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls ........... 132, 372 Electrica by dragging ............................. 457
Molding ........................................... 125, 183 Electrical using dimensions .................... 457
Above cabinets ..................................... 187 Forced .................................................. 280
Add to Library ....................................... 443 Handle, curved wall ............................... 234
Baseboard ..................................... 128, 186 Layout view ........................................... 661
Cabinet ................................................ 124 Library item ........................................... 432
Chair rail ....................................... 128, 186 Moving speed ................................ 140, 471
Crown ........................................... 128, 186 Multiple items ........................................ 412
Custom ................................................ 443 Out ....................................................... 578
Defaults ................................................ 187 Point to Point ................................ 527, 574
Defining ................................................ 187 Polyline ................................................. 545
Delete from Library ............................... 445 Precision ............................................... 525
Door ..................................................... 250 Restriction, stairs .................................. 300
Drawing ................................................ 443 Stairs .................................................... 300
Follow soffits ........................................ 187 Stairs, restrictions .................................. 300
Height .................................................. 187 Straight and curved walls ....................... 237
Library .................................................. 439 Text ...................................................... 485
Position ................................................ 187 Text on Layout page .............................. 486
Remove ................................................ 187 Walls, straight and curved ...................... 237
Room ................................................... 186 Window, single ...................................... 278
Set per room ................................. 128, 186 Windows as a group .............................. 278
Specifying Custom ................................ 187 Windows by dragging ............................. 278
Width ............................................ 128, 186 Windows using dimensions .................... 278
794
Move Handle .......................................... 203 Plan ..................................................... 167
Move to Framing Reference button ..... 51, Plan see Plan, New
Point dialog .......................................... 522
Index
525
Moving speed New Floor dialog .................................. 168
Temporary change ........................ 139, 471 New Plan ................................................. 55
Moving Walls ......................................... 203 Newel
With Dimensions ................................... 205 Definition .............................................. 757
Spacing ......................................... 101, 216
Managing
Mud Sill
Definition .............................................. 757 Next
Files
Mulled windows Enter next end point .............................. 505
Definition .............................................. 757 Select next CAD item ............................ 524
Multi-layered wall No Locate
Wall ..................................................... 212
Managing
Multiple
Select, CAD .................................. 524, 552 Normal
Files
Curved wall type ................................... 233
Multiple Copy button ..............51, 525, 528
Definition .............................................. 757
Multiple Floors Normal style see Lites
Reverse Plan .................................. 32, 703
Normal Walls layer ................................. 98
Multiple select ........................................ 19
Click method ........................................... 20 North Pointer
Same type item, edit ................................ 21 Definition .............................................. 757
Muntin bars North pointer ........................................ 551
Definition .............................................. 757 Notes
see Lites Fillet ................................................75, 548
Muntin Width ................................. 106, 248 Number
Above line, dimensions .................. 139, 470
Managing
of Bottom plates ............................. 132, 372
Index
N
Files
Height, definition ........................ 77– 78, 550
Height, dimensions ........................ 139, 471
Style in dialogs ..................................... 561
Name
of Top plates ................................. 132, 372
CAD layer ............................................. 540
Of room for plancheck ........................... 703
Room ................................................... 185
Name/Code ..................... 103, 111, 122, 245 O
Nested
Object-Oriented Software
Definition .............................................. 757
Definition .............................................. 757
Network
Offset
Locking files ............................................ 70
Curved wall handles .............................. 235
New Dimensions, first line ...................... 140, 471
Index
Arc dialog ............................................. 506 Handles, walls ...................................... 204

Dimensions, features ............................. 467 Wall handles, curved ............................. 235
Line End dialog ............................. 504, 711
Offset Handles ...................................... 204
Master list ............................................... 82
Opaque glass .......................................... 87
795
Definition .............................................. 757 Overview .................................................. 11

Open Create .................................................. 590
2nd floor plan ......................................... 57 Definition .............................................. 757
3D Home Architect files ........................... 57 Full ....................................................... 590
Definition ................................................ 19 Plan ...................................................... 590
Different file types ................................... 57
Directory ................................................ 57
Last four plans recently opened ............... 58
Plan ....................................................... 57
P
Polyline, definition ................................. 503 Pads
Open Below .................................... 190, 199 Definition .............................................. 757
Definition .............................................. 757 see Piers
Open Item Page
CAD ...................................... 524, 526, 552 Down .................................................... 651
Open Item Button ..............................49–50 Up ........................................................ 651
OpenGL ................................................. 605 Pan
Definition .............................................. 757
OpenGL see Recommended System
Display ................................................. 580
Openings ................................................. 13 Using arrow keys ................................... 580
Dimension locate ........................... 140, 472 Using Control key .................................. 580
Dimensions to ................................ 142, 474 Using scroll bars .................................... 580
Ignore casing for resize ........................... 92
PAn see File types
Size .............................................. 132, 372
Trimmers ....................................... 132, 373 Panels (View)
Increase number for speed .................... 595
Optional Components
17" Monitor ............................................... 2 Paper
Printers & Plotters ..................................... 2 Orientation .................................... 639, 650
Three Button Mouse .................................. 2 Size ...................................................... 650
Options Menu ......................................... 32 Parallel light .......................................... 614
Definition .............................................. 757
Outlets
see Lights ............................................. 613
Above cabinet ....................................... 458
Automatic ............................................. 455 Parallel/Perpendicular ................... 50, 525
Dishwasher .......................................... 452 Illustrated .............................................. 529
Exterior ................................................ 452 Roof edges ........................................... 337
For appliance ........................................ 458 Parquet
GFI ...................................................... 452 Definition .............................................. 758
Interior ................................................. 452 Partial break .......................................... 531
Manual ................................................. 452
Partition ................................................. 399
Sink ..................................................... 452
WP ....................................................... 452 Path
To Master list .......................................... 82
Ovals .................................................49, 502
CAD ..................................................... 521 Patterns
Creating ............................................... 521 Definition .............................................. 758
Editing ........................................... 521, 552 PC
Overall Dimension ........................ 140, 472 Definition .............................................. 758
Overhang ............................................... 340 Pen plotters ........................................... 635
796
Pentagon Definition .............................................. 758
Tutorial ................................................. 712 Restarting ............................................. 703
Index
Perspective View .................................. 583 Plan Defaults dialog ............... 92, 206, 468
Definition .............................................. 758 Plan Footprint ....................................... 503
Piers ................................................. 95, 176 CAD item .............................................. 571
Automatic ............................................. 179 Definition .............................................. 758
Beam, relationship ................................ 180 Plot layout ............................................ 571
Create automatically .............................. 179 Polyline ................................................ 571
Managing
Create manually .................................... 180 Plan View
Files
Default size ........................................... 180 Definition .............................................. 758
Default spacing ..................................... 180
PlanCheck
Definition .............................................. 758
And room labels .................................... 189
Delete ................................................... 180
Using ................................................... 703
Editing .................................................. 180
Foundation ............................................ 180 Plans
Managing
Manually adding .................................... 180 Copying files ........................................... 61
Files
Move .................................................... 180 Creating a new plan ................................ 56
Move by dragging .................................. 180 Delete .................................................... 61
Move, by dimensions ............................. 180 New ....................................................... 56
Moving ................................................. 180 Opening ................................................. 57
Resize .................................................. 180 Saving .................................................... 56
Transfering ............................................. 61
Pillars
Definition .............................................. 758 Platform
Railings ........................................ 101, 215 Thickness, default ................................. 128
see also Soffits Platforms
Pitch ........................................ 339, 349– 350 Cape Cod, combine .............................. 367
Show as degrees .................................... 92 Combine floor and ceiling ...................... 367
Define thickness individually .................. 366
Pixels
Managing
Thickness, information .......................... 186
Definition .............................................. 758
Index
Files
Dimension height .......................... 139, 471 Plinth block
Definition .............................................. 758
PL0 see File types
Exterior ......................................... 104, 246
PL1 see File types Interior .......................................... 104, 246
PL2 see File types Plot
PL3 see File types Final plots ............................................ 674
PL4 see File types From layout .......................................... 674
Place outlets ......................................... 455 Plot plan ................................................ 711
Affected by room label ....................189– 190 North pointer ........................................ 569
Tool ...................................................... 189 Number height of property lines ............. 551
Plan Footprint ....................................... 571
Place Outlets tool ................................. 224
Plotters
Plan
Ink Jet Plotters ..................................... 635
Definition .............................................. 758
Index
Pen Plotters .......................................... 635

Drawing .................................................. 21
Testing ................................................. 636
Rotate view ........................................... 702
Types ................................................... 635
Plan Check ............................................ 703 see also Printers
797
Plotting Warning ................................................ 544

see also Print Posts
Plumb cut eaves ................................... 345 Railings ........................................ 101, 215
Definition .............................................. 758 To overhead beam ........................ 101, 216
Pocket Door see also Soffits
Definitionr ............................................. 758 POV-ray
see Doors Definition .............................................. 759
Point Extended DXF ................................. 76, 549
CAD, for accuracy ................................. 521 Prairie style
Placing, CAD ...................................49, 502 Definition .............................................. 759
see also CAD point see Lites
Point Elevation Precut ............................................. 134, 374
Definition .............................................. 758 Preferences
Point Elevation Marker ........................ 159 3D ..........................................................87
Point light ............................................. 614 Appearance ............................................. 64
Definition .............................................. 758 Color ......................................................65
Contextual menus .................................... 64
Point to Point
Default settings ....................................... 63
Dimensions .......................................... 468
Global settings ........................................ 63
Move .................................................... 527
Show line weight .....................................65
Move, Area ........................................... 574
Status bar ............................................... 64
Polar
Price
Definition .............................................. 758
Material list ........................................... 692
Polyline ................................................. 503
Primitives
Adjusting .........................................73, 544
Definition .............................................. 759
Area ..................................................... 510
Library .......................................... 430, 438
Auto snap ........................................75, 548
Definition ............................... 503, 508, 759 Print
Edit components of ..........................76, 549 Across multiple pages ............................ 645
Edit parts toggle ..................................... 49 Direct .................................................... 637
Rectangular, tool to create ...................... 49 Drivers .................................................. 636
Reshaping .......................................73, 544 Final prints ............................................ 674
Stretching ........................................73, 544 From layout ................................... 637, 674
Tool to create rectangular ..................... 519 From view ............................................. 637
Full page ............................................... 674
Pony walls ...................................... 224, 227
General information ............................... 637
Changing wall types .............................. 227
Image ........................................... 607, 644
Choosing which displays in plan view ..... 229
In color ................................................. 594
Creating ............................................... 227
Introduction ........................................... 635
Definition .............................................. 759
Layout, definition ................................... 759
Show lower ............................................. 92
Line weight ........................................... 645
see also Railings, solid
Setup .................................................... 650
Porch Tiled ..................................................... 645
Room label ........................................... 191 To layout ............................................... 656
Positioning Unit ..............................72, 543 To scale ................................................ 644
Notes ..............................................72, 544 Print Image ............................................ 608
Tip ..................................................72, 544
798
Printers Draw new, manually .............................. 361
Dot Matrix ............................................. 635 Framing reference ................................ 375
Ink Jet Printers ...................................... 635 General ................................................ 359
Index
Laser Printers ....................................... 635 Height .................................................. 361
Layout relationship ................................ 673 Mixing with trusses ............................... 386
Setup .................................................... 650 Spacing ................................................ 375
Testing ................................................. 636 Trusses mix .......................................... 362
Types ................................................... 635 Vertical width ........................................ 339
Managing
Problems see also Framing
Railing Types ........................................ 100
Files
With your plan ....................................... 703
Profile plan ...................................... 56, 146 Railings .......................................... 100, 221
Creating your own ................................. 146 Baluster spacing ............................ 101, 216
Definition .............................................. 759 Balusters ....................................... 100, 215
Materials ............................................... 676 Changing wall into railing ...................... 211
Connect walls ....................................... 220
Managing
profile.pl1 .............................................. 146
Creating ............................................... 100
Program Tips .......................................... 23
Files
Curved, jumpy when drawing ................. 231
Property lines ....................................... 504 Deleting ................................................ 219
Definition .............................................. 759 Exterior Materials ........................... 101, 216
North pointer ......................................... 569 Fix connections ..................................... 220
Number height ...................................... 551 Half walls ...................................... 100, 215
Proportional resize ......................... 75, 547 Height defined ............................... 101, 216
Pull Down Menu Large posts/pillars ......................... 101, 215
Definition .............................................. 759 Located by dimension lines ................... 212
Newel spacing ............................... 101, 216
No Rail .......................................... 100, 215
Q No Shoe ........................................ 101, 216

Open rail type ................................ 100, 215
Managing
Open with middle rail ..................... 100, 215
Queen Post Opening ............................................... 261
Index
Files
Definition .............................................. 759 Pillar to ceiling/beam ...................... 101, 216
Quoins ................................................... 700 Post to overhead beam .................. 101, 216
Raise Shoe .................................... 101, 216
Selecting in Plan View ........................... 203
R Shoe,definition ...................................... 759
Solid ............................................. 100, 215
Radio Button Type .................................................... 215
Definition .............................................. 759 Raise
Radius .................................................... 507 Off plate ............................................... 344
Edit arc ................................................. 552 Off plate, truss ...................................... 384
Shoe ............................................. 101, 216
Rafters .................................... 136, 361, 376
Automatically create .............................. 362 Raked walls ........................................... 224
Common ............................................... 393 Creating ............................................... 226
Index

Depth ........................................... 339, 363 Range Hood .......................................... 436
Depth, individual roof plane ................... 339 Reach
799
Automatic dimensions .................... 140, 471 Graphics card ........................................ 605

Manual dimensions ........................ 140, 471 Interior Ambient ..................................... 611
Rebar ................................................96, 176 Light Fixtures ........................................ 612
Definition .............................................. 759 Light Sources ........................................ 610
Nighttime Ambient ................................. 611
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .............. 50
OpenGL ................................................ 605
Recessed Preferences ............................................ 84
Door .............................................. 104, 246 Preview ................................................. 608
Recommended System ............................ 1 Save view ............................................. 607
Rectangular Setting the Camera ................................ 587
Polyline tool .....................................49, 519 Rendering Tools ................................... 608
Reduce Gable ....................................... 384 Repairing Broken Walls ....................... 220
Reference Floor ............................. 168– 169 Replicate
CAD layers ........................................... 172 Edit CAD item ....................................... 552
Color ...............................................65, 172 Report style
Definition .............................................. 759 Grid display settings ................................ 80
Display items ........................................ 172 Material list ............................................. 80
Reference toggle .................................. 170 see also Material list
Definition .............................................. 759 Rescale
Reflect Layout view ........................................... 662
Area see Edit Area View, layout .......................................... 662
Definition .............................................. 760 Resize ............................................... 75, 547
Refresh Display ...................................... 38 Cabinet ................................................. 413
Tool Button ............................................. 48 Corner cabinet ...................................... 413
Refresh display .................................... 502 Doors .................................................... 259
Enable for symbols .................................. 92
Relative
Fireplace ............................................... 462
to Current Point, new line end ............... 504
Framing items ....................................... 359
to Current Point, new point .................... 522
Handle, curved walls ............................. 236
to Current Point, polar, new line end ...... 505
Ignore casing .......................................... 92
to Current point, polar, new point ........... 522
Image ................................................... 446
to Itself, move point ............................... 523
Layout view ........................................... 662
to Previous Point, move point ................ 523
Windows ............................................... 281
Relative Location
Restore
Definition .............................................. 760
Wall heights in 3D ................................. 226
Remove 3D .......................................50, 597
Restrict
Remove Backdrop .................................. 88 Camera to room ...................................... 87
Render Restrict Angles/Unrestrict Angles ........ 49
Added Lights ........................................ 613
Restrictions
Ambient light ........................................ 611
Move door ............................................. 255
Contextual Menu ................................... 607
Move stairs ........................................... 300
Create a Render View ........................... 606
Move window ........................................ 280
Daytime Ambient .................................. 611
Default Light ......................................... 611 Retain
Export view ........................................... 607 Attic wall ............................................... 212
Final ..................................................... 608 Reverse
800
Edit CAD item ....................................... 552 Extend slope downward ......... 213, 347, 349
Fixture, cabinet ..................................... 407 Fascia ........................................... 136, 376
Wall layers ............................................ 212 Fascia top ............................................ 339
Index
Reverse Plan ................................... 32, 703 Fillet, special case ................................ 534
Multiple Floors ................................ 32, 703 Framing ................................................ 375
Full gable wall ............................... 213, 347
Revert, roof ........................................... 340
Gable ............................................ 348, 739
RGB Gable dormer ....................................... 745
Definition .............................................. 760
Managing
Gable examples .................................... 736
Ridge .............................................. 136, 376 Gable line ............................................. 353
Files
Definition .............................................. 760 Gable tutorials ...................................... 736
Top, editing roofs .................................. 339 Gable, automatic .................................. 348
Ridge Cap Gable, define ........................................ 348
Definition .............................................. 760 Gable, manually design ......................... 717
Gable/Roof Line Tool ............................ 352
Ridge Vent
Managing
Gambrel ............................................... 743
Definition .............................................. 760
Gull wing .............................................. 744
Files
Right button .......................................... 524 Gutters ................................................. 345
Definition ................................................ 14 Half hip ................................................ 745
Rim Joist ............................................... 130 High shed/gable ..................... 213, 347–348
Definition .............................................. 760 Hip ....................................................... 348
Rim joist ................................................ 370 Hip roof ......................................... 726, 745
Riser (Stair) Hole for skylights .................................. 355
Definition .............................................. 760 Hole, special polyline ............................ 564
H-shaped house ................................... 735
Roof Baseline ........................................ 333 Join roof sections .................................. 336
Roof Group ............................................ 186 Knee walls ............................. 213, 347, 349
Roof Hole Specification dialog ........... 355 Lock ..................................................... 331
Roof Mode ............................................. 332 Lock roof planes ................................... 343
Managing
Lookouts ....................................... 136, 376
Roof Plane ....................................... 13, 332
Index
Files
L-shaped house .................................... 735
Roof Plane Edit dialog ......................... 338 Mansard ............................................... 741
Roof Toolbar ........................................... 47 Material, individual roof ......................... 340
Roof Truss Min. Alcove ........................................... 344
Definition .............................................. 760 Opposing shed ..................................... 738
Over concave walls ............................... 240
Roofs .............................................. 331, 336
Over this room ...................................... 187
2nd pitch ................................ 213, 347, 350
Overhang ............................................. 340
Baseline ................................ 333, 339– 340
Pitch ............................. 213, 339, 347, 349
Basic shapes ........................................ 726
Plumb cut eaves ................................... 345
Birdsmouth cut ...................................... 339
Plumb cut fascia ................................... 340
Change pitch, dialog .............................. 337
Rafter depth, individual roof plane ......... 339
Change shape ....................................... 722
Raise off plate ...................................... 344
Concave walls ....................................... 240
Restore to default ................................. 357
Index
Over curved wall ................................... 239

Revert .................................................. 340
Dormer, gable ....................................... 745
Ridge/top ............................................. 339
Dormer, Shed ....................................... 746
Roof Plane ........................................... 332
Double Shed ......................................... 738
Roof Plane Edit dialog ........................... 338
801
Saltbox ................................................. 739 Chair rail molding .......................... 128, 186

Second pitch ........................................ 350 Cross section in dialog ........................... 185
Shed .................................................... 737 Crown molding .............................. 128, 186
Shed dormer ......................................... 746 Defaults ................................................ 184
Shed, double ........................................ 738 Define deck as ...................................... 222
Shed, opposing ..................................... 738 Define stairwell as ................................. 223
Show all ridges ..................................... 345 Diagram ................................................ 186
Show pitch as degrees .....................92, 340 Editing information ................................. 184
Skylights .............................................. 355 Exterior (of house) ................................. 184
Square cut eaves .................................. 345 Exterior type .......................................... 189
Square cut fascia .................................. 340 Floor height ........................................... 185
Story-and-a-half .................................... 349 Foundation floor definition ...................... 187
Supply .................................................. 345 Foundation, effect on ............................. 182
Trusses ................................................ 343 Height, ceiling ....................................... 185
Two pitches .......................................... 350 Height, floor .......................................... 185
Upslope Mark ....................................... 340 Interior type ........................................... 189
Vertical rafter width ............................... 339 Labels ................................................... 189
Room Boxes .......................................... 708 Labels, editing ....................................... 190
Molding specification ..................... 128, 186
Room Definition ................................... 183
Name ............................................ 184, 189
Room Definition Wall Name for PlanCheck .............................. 703
Definition .............................................. 760 Naming ................................................. 185
Room Interior Area ....................... 190–191 Naming, automatic ................................. 703
Room Interior Dimensions ........... 190– 191 Opening for specification ....................... 184
Platform thickness ................................. 186
Room Labels ......................................... 190
Roof over this ........................................ 187
Area ..................................................... 190
Selecting ....................................... 184–185
Changing text ....................................... 190
Size, display .......................................... 191
Definition .............................................. 760
Specification dialog ....................... 184, 703
Deleting ................................................ 190
Structure ............................................... 184
Dimensions .......................................... 190
Type ..................................................... 189
Edit ...................................................... 190
Foundation, effect on ............................ 181 Rotate
Move .................................................... 190 Area, see Edit Area
Name options ....................................... 185 Cabinet, individual ................................. 413
Cabinets, multiple .................................. 413
Room Names ......................................... 190
CAD items ....................................... 71, 543
Room Sizes ........................................... 191 Camera Views ....................................... 587
Room Specification dialog .. 128, 183–184, Electrical ............................................... 458
219 Jump .............................................. 71, 543
Room Standard Area ........................... 190 Plan View .............................................. 702
Text ...................................................... 486
Rooms ..................................................... 13
Area calculations .................................. 192 Rotation point ....................................... 545
Area, display ........................................ 191 Rough Opening ............................. 132, 372
Baseboard ..................................... 128, 186 Rounding corners ........................... 75, 548
Below stairs .......................................... 327
Ceiling height ....................................... 185
802
S Room ................................................... 185
Set kept when zooming ........................... 21
Stairs ................................................... 298
Index
Saltbox Roof
Text ..................................................... 484
Definition .............................................. 760
Using fence .......................................... 532
Sash Walls in cross section ........................... 225
Definition .............................................. 760 Window, individual ................................ 264
Depth ................................................... 112 Windows, multiple ................................. 264
Inset ..................................................... 112
Managing
Select Backdrop ..................................... 88
Width .................................................... 112
Files
Select Items ............................................ 44
Save
Bitmap .................................................. 608 Select Material dialog .......................... 129
Camera ................................................ 603 Selecting Items ....................................... 19
Cross section ........................................ 603 Selecting Walls ..................................... 203
Directory ................................................. 56
Send to layout
Managing
Elevation .............................................. 603
Entire plan ............................................ 658
Plan .................................................. 56–57
Files
Line weight ........................................... 658
Section/Elevation Cameras .................... 603
Scale ................................................... 658
see also Autosave
Separation
Save As .................................................... 56
Between dimension lines ................ 140, 472
Save Plan File dialog ............................. 56
Separation (Cabinet)
Saved Cameras ....................................... 88 Definition .............................................. 760
Scale Set
Layout view ................................... 657, 662 Angle ................................................... 552
Printing ................................................. 644 Length ........................................... 510, 552
Scissor Truss ........................................ 395 Width ................................................... 552
Scroll bars ....................................... 89, 580 Set Dimension Line dialog ........... 193, 479
Managing
Defining amount of movement .................. 93 Shadows see Sun Angle
Pan ...................................................... 580
Index
Files
Shape ..................................................... 735
Section see Cross section Roof, change ........................................ 722
Section/Elevation ................................. 601 Walls .................................................... 224
View ..................................................... 599 Window ......................................... 116, 273
Select ............................................. 501, 524 see also Roofs
By handles ............................................ 504 see also Windows
Click method ........................................... 20 Sheathing
Door, individual ..................................... 244 Definition .............................................. 760
Doors, multiple ...................................... 244 Shed
Double click for CAD Setup .................... 524 Dormer ................................................. 746
Editing same type item ............................ 21 see also Roofs
Group, drag method ................................ 19
Shed Roof
Group, marquee method .......................... 19
Definition .............................................. 760
How to .................................................. 524
Index
Library item, single ................................ 431 Shelf

Library items, multiple ........................... 431 Create .................................................. 399
Multiple CAD items ................................ 524 Shift key ................................................ 524
Multiple items .......................................... 20
803
Shoe Attaching to line end .............................. 523

Definition .............................................. 760 Intersection ........................................... 565
None for railing .............................. 101, 216 Item ...................................................... 565
Raise for railing ............................. 101, 216 Item End ............................................... 565
Short extensions ........................... 139, 470 Line Midpoint ........................................ 565
Point ......................................503, 551, 565
Show
0" .................................................. 139, 470 Snap To
Angle ................................................... 559 Definition .............................................. 760
Dash in dimensions ........................ 139, 470 Snap units
Dimensions, inches only ................. 139, 471 Dimensions ................................... 139, 471
Dimensions, metric ........................ 139, 470 Soffits ............................................. 198, 399
Imperial dimensions ....................... 139, 470 Angled .......................................... 198, 421
Inches only, dimensions ................. 139, 471 Beams .................................................. 198
Items, 2D ............................................. 604 Corner .................................................. 399
Items, 3D ............................................. 604 Create .................................................. 399
Items, dialog ......................................... 540 Definition .............................................. 760
Length .................................................. 559 Depth .................................................... 421
Lower pony wall ...................................... 92 Edit ....................................................... 421
Metric dimensions .......................... 139, 470 Height ................................................... 421
Number above line ......................... 139, 470 Layer .................................................... 422
Pitch as degrees ..................................... 92 Material ................................................ 423
Short extensions ............................ 139, 470 Place under ceiling ................................ 423
Show all ridges ..................................... 345 Place under Roof ................................... 423
Show pitch as degrees ........................ 340 Rules for calculating materials ............... 698
Sloped soffit .................................. 421, 423
Shutters ................................................. 115
Sloped, place under roof ........................ 423
Sill Width .................................................... 421
Definition .............................................. 760
Solid fill .................................................. 560
Double .......................................... 133, 373
Thickness ...................................... 133, 373 Spacing
Baluster ........................................ 101, 216
Site ........................................................... 13
Newels .......................................... 101, 216
Size Wall hatch ............................................... 93
Room, display ....................................... 191
Special CAD Item
Skylights ........................................ 355, 564 Bearing line ........................................... 561
Slab ................................................. 180, 190 Counter top ........................................... 561
At top of stem wall ...........................94, 174 Gable/Roof line ..................................... 561
Monolithic ........................................95, 175 Joist direction ........................................ 561
Thickness ............................................. 191 Special CAD Item dialog ...................... 561
Slab Foundation Special Use Arrow .......................... 68, 490
Definition .............................................. 760
Specification Dialog
Slider Door ............................................ 242 Opening ............................................ 49–50
Definition .............................................. 760
Specifying Custom Moldings .............. 187
Smoke detector .................................... 456
Speed
see also Electrical
3D views ................................................. 88
Snap
Sphere .................................................... 438
804
Splice ..................................................... 658 Tread ...................................................297
Split Tread width .......................................... 323
Treads, define ...................................... 322
Index
Walls .................................................... 205
Treads, define number .......................... 323
Split levels ............................................. 198
Treads, retain number ........................... 322
Definition .............................................. 761
Understanding ...................................... 297
Spot Light .............................................. 614 View in 3D ............................................ 327
Definition .............................................. 761 Winders ......................................... 311, 323
Managing
Square cut eaves .................................. 345 Stairwell ................................................ 223
Stacked Windows
Files
Creating ............................................... 222
Definition .............................................. 761 Opening ............................................... 326
Stairs Standard Toolbar ................................... 15
Adjusting using handles ......................... 301 Start direction ...................................... 507
Align curved stairs ................................. 307
Starter Tread ........................................... 50
Align curves between floors ................... 310
Managing
Align ends of curved .............................. 307 Status bar
Files
Curved ................................................. 307 Position .................................................. 64
Delete ................................................... 301 Steel box ........................................ 131, 371
Delete section ....................................... 301 Steel-I ............................................. 131, 371
Display from floor above ........................ 223
Stem Wall ................................................ 94
Down ............................................ 222, 297
Definition .............................................. 761
Edit ...................................................... 320
Slab at top .............................................. 94
Exterior Colors ...................................... 325
Handles ................................................ 298 Stem wall ............................................... 174
Landing from CAD ................................. 564 Slab at top ............................................ 174
Landing, delete ..................................... 301 Step down hip ....................................... 391
Large Stringer Base .............................. 324 Advantages and disadvantages ............. 394
Length .................................................. 323 Stepped
Managing
Lengthen .............................................. 298 Footings ............................................... 230
Make Reach .......................................... 321
Index
Foundation ........................................... 230
Files
Merge ................................................... 305 Walls ............................................. 224, 230
Move .................................................... 300 Stepped Foundation
Open underneath .................................. 324 Definition .............................................. 761
Opening ................................................ 326
Reach next floor .................................... 321 Stepped Wall
Revert .................................................. 321 Definition .............................................. 761
Rise angle ............................................ 323 Stick
Riser .................................................... 297 Framing ................................................ 375
Room below .......................................... 327 Stile (Cabinet)
Section width ........................................ 323 Definition .............................................. 761
Sections, merge .................................... 305 Story-and-a-half ................................... 349
Select ................................................... 298 Platforms, combine ............................... 367
Shorten ................................................. 298
Stringer (Stair)
Index

Definition .............................................. 761
Stairwell, creating .................................. 326
Style dialog ........................................... 324 Stub walls
Subsection ............................................ 321 Definition .............................................. 761
805
Stud Switch
Definition .............................................. 761 Create .................................................. 453
Spacing ......................................... 132, 372 Current Floor/Reference Floor ................ 171
Thickness ...................................... 132, 372 Double .................................................. 453
Stud Spacing ........................................ 372 In circuit ................................................ 453
Three way ............................................. 453
Style
Line style dialog box ............................. 560 SWT
Definition .............................................. 761
Sub girder hip
Advantages and disadvantages ............. 394 Symbol
2D, adding ............................................ 448
Subfloor .......................................... 130, 370
Dialog ................................................... 456
Subfloor thickness ........................ 131, 371 Electrical, create ................................... 456
Subgirder hip ........................................ 392 Enable resizing ....................................... 92
Submenu Library, electrical ........................... 430, 456
Definition ................................................ 16 Special ................................................. 456
Subsection System Default Walls ..................... 97, 209
Stairs ................................................... 321 System Layers ...................................... 152
Sun Angle ....................................... 613, 704
Arrow ................................................... 704
CAD Layer, changing ............................ 708
Creating ............................................... 705
T
Date ..................................................... 706 Tab key ........................................... 524, 526
Definition .............................................. 761
Tabs
Deleting Shadows ................................. 708
Changing .............................................. 483
Layer, changing .................................... 708
Columns ............................................... 483
Render Data ......................................... 707
Easy spacing ......................................... 487
Shadows .............................................. 618
Text ...................................................... 483
Take off see Material list
Sun Angle Specification dialog .......... 705
Tangent
Sunlight Toggle .................................... 608
Cuved walls .......................................... 238
Sunrooms Definition .............................................. 761
Library .................................................. 430 Make arc, edit button ............................. 238
Super VGA (SVGA) Make Tangent button ............................... 50
Definition .............................................. 761 Tangent button ...................................... 510
Superimpose Technical Support ................................ 763
Plan items ............................................ 524
Termite Flashing
Supplier Definition .............................................. 761
Material list ........................................... 692
Terms ....................................................... 12
Supply ................................................... 345
Terrain Feature dialog .......................... 163
Gutters ................................................. 345
General Tab .......................................... 163
for Roofs .............................................. 345
Terrain Features ................................... 163
Swap Work-Reference ......................... 171
Clipping ................................................ 163
Swing, door Height ................................................... 163
Changing .............................................. 257
Terrain Modeler ..................................... 155
806
3D Views .............................................. 166 Delete .................................................. 485
Adding Elevation Data ....................156– 157 Display ................................................. 486
Build Terrain ................................. 156, 159 Edit ...................................................... 481
Index
Building Pad Elevation ........................... 160 Elevation .............................................. 488
Clearing Terrain .................................... 166 Height .................................................. 482
Contour Line Smoothing ........................ 162 Include Arrow ................................ 484, 497
Contours ............................................... 162 Include arrow by default .......................... 67
Displaying Terrain ................................. 165 Layer ............................................ 483, 486
Managing
Elevation Lines/Splines ......................... 157 Layer, changing .................................... 486
Elevation Points .................................... 157 Layer, default ....................................... 486
Files
Enter Marker Text ................................. 158 Layout .................................................. 488
Generating Terrain ................................ 159 Move .................................................... 485
Plan View ............................................. 165 Move in Layout ..................................... 486
Point Elevation Marker .......................... 159 Paste ................................................... 486
Primary Contours .................................. 162 Reshape ............................................... 485
Managing
Properties ............................................. 160 Restrictions .......................................... 487
Sun Shadows ........................................ 166 Select ................................................... 484
Files
Terrain Features ................................... 163 Spacing for columns ............................. 487
Terrain Perimeter .................................. 156 Tabs .................................................... 483
Terrain Surface Quality .......................... 160 Tool bar ................................................ 502
Terrain Surface Smoothing .................... 160 Text Arrows .......................................... 488
Zooming ............................................... 165
Text Toolbar ............................................ 45
Terrain Properties
Texture Painter .............................. 608, 687
Clipping ................................................ 160
Textures
Terrain Properties dialog .................... 160
Add new ............................................... 450
Contours Tab ........................................ 162
Apply to items ....................................... 683
General Tab .......................................... 160
Apply to materials ................................. 683
Text Create .................................................. 450
Managing
Arrow .................................................... 482 Definition ....................................... 609, 761
Index
Arrow, bend .......................................... 488
Files
Viewing ................................................ 683
Arrow, include ....................................... 488
Thermostat see Electrical
Arrow, joint ........................................... 488
CAD ..................................................... 481 Thick lines ............................................... 65
Character height ................................... 482 Thickness
Color .................................................... 483 Bottom plate, wall .......................... 132, 372
Color in cross section ............................ 604 Headers ........................................ 134, 374
Column spacing, easy ........................... 487 Individual platform sections ................... 366
Columns ............................................... 487 Stud .............................................. 132, 372
Copy .................................................... 486 Top plate, wall ............................... 132, 372
Create .................................................. 481 Trusses ................................................ 382
Cross section ........................................ 488 Threshold
Cut ....................................................... 486 For exterior door ................................... 704
Default arrow .......................................... 67 see also Doors, Threshold
Index
Default color ........................................... 67

Tile
Default Font ............................................ 66
Views ................................................... 581
Default height ................................. 67, 482
Windows .............................................. 581
Default settings ....................................... 67
807
Time Definition .............................................. 762

Autosave ................................................ 59 Truss Base ............................................. 386
Tips Definition .............................................. 762
Edit Polyline Parts ................................ 549 Truss Base Specification dialogDialog
Tool ....................................................... 23 Truss Base Specification ....................... 386
Title Bar Truss Chord
Main Window .......................................... 19 Definition .............................................. 762
Title block ............................................. 651 Truss Detail ........................................... 385
Create .................................................. 655
Truss Info button .................................. 382
Toe Kick ................................................ 121 Truss Spacing ............................... 136, 377
Toe Kick Height/Depth .................. 122, 404
Truss Specification dialog . 136, 377, 382–
Tool Buttons ........................................... 50 383
CAD Point .............................................. 49
Trusses ........................... 136, 343, 377, 379
File Save ................................................ 50
Bottom chord ..........................136, 377, 383
Toolbars ............................................ 15, 41 Button ................................................... 379
Adding Tools .......................................... 42 Copying ................................................ 380
Customizing ........................................... 41 Creating ................................................ 380
Deleting Tools ........................................ 43 Detail .................................................... 385
Edit ........................................................ 45 Double truss .......................................... 393
Font ....................................................... 66 Drop Hip truss ............................... 383, 394
Text ....................................................... 45 End truss .............................................. 383
Tools Menu ............................................. 37 Energy heel ........................................... 384
Top Chord ...................................... 136, 377 Framing reference ................................. 381
Girder ................................................... 395
Top plates
Hip ............................................... 391–394
Definition .............................................. 761
Hip jack ................................................ 392
Number ......................................... 132, 372
Hip systems, comparisons ..................... 394
Thickness ...................................... 132, 372
Hip, step down ...................................... 391
Transferring plans ................................. 61 Hip, subgirder ........................................ 392
Transom Window Jack ...................................................... 392
Definition .............................................. 761 Kingpost, require ........................... 136, 377
Transom Window see Windows, stacked Labeling ................................................ 385
Labels, move as group ........................... 386
Transparent color ................................ 447
Laying out ............................................. 380
Treads Mix with rafters, preparation ................... 362
Define number ...................................... 323 Mixing with standard framing .................. 386
Retain number in section ....................... 322 Move labels as group ............................. 386
Trim ......................................... 525, 530, 533 Moving .................................................. 381
Button .............................................50, 525 Multiple Copy button ................................ 51
Corner .................................................. 699 Multiple copy button ............................... 525
Fence .............................. 50, 525, 532– 533 Raise off plate ....................................... 384
Trimmers ........................................ 132, 373 Reduce gable ........................................ 384
Definition .............................................. 762 Require kingpost ................................... 383
Truss Scissor ................................................. 395
Button .................................................... 47 Specification dialog ............................... 382
Step down hip ............................... 391, 394
808
Sub girder ............................................. 394
Subgirder hip ........................................ 392 V
Thickness ............................................. 382
Index
Valley Flashing
Top chord .............................. 136, 377, 383
Definition .............................................. 762
Truss Base ........................................... 386
Updating ............................................... 381 Vertical rafter width ............................. 339
Webbing .................136, 377, 382–383, 385 VGA
Webbing specification ............................ 385 Definition .............................................. 762
Managing
Tutorial View Angle dialog ................................ 592
Files
Hexagon ............................................... 714 View windows ......................................... 19
Manual roofs ......................................... 717 see also Window Types
Pentagon .............................................. 712
Viewing Images .................................... 448
Plot plan ............................................... 711
Roof, change shape .............................. 722 Views
Roofs, manually editing ......................... 717 Cascade ............................................... 582
Managing
Definition .............................................. 748
Missing from layout ............................... 669
Files
U Tile ...................................................... 581
Volume
Materials .............................................. 681
Unconnected wall
Min. length .............................................. 93 VRML .............................................. 633– 634
Cosmo Player ....................................... 632
Undo
Definition .............................................. 762
Zoom .................................................... 577
Export .................................................. 632
Units Images ................................................. 634
Changing ...................................... 139, 470 Textures ............................................... 634
Dimensions, show imperial ............ 139, 470 Walkthroughs ....................................... 632
Dimensions, show metric ............... 139, 470
Imperial ........................................ 139, 470
Managing
Imperial dimensions ...................... 139, 470
W
Index
Files
Metric ........................................... 139, 470
Untitled plan
Walkthroughs
see New Plan
Definition .............................................. 762
Upper wall Exterior ......................................... 589, 593
Pony wall .............................................. 228 Fly-by ................................................... 593
Use Exterior Materials ................. 104, 246 Interior ................................................. 589
Use framing reference .. 130, 135, 371, 376 Play ..................................................... 590
Record ................................................. 589
Use Mesh ......................................... 96, 176
Show .................................................... 590
User Layers ........................................... 148 VRML ................................................... 632
User Specified Walls ...................... 97, 209 Wall .......................................................... 45
U-shaped house .................................... 735 Wall & Opening Snap Unit ........... 139, 471
Using the Mouse ..................................... 14
Index
Wall Assemblies ................................... 209

Utility ........................................................ 51 Wall Cabinet
Definition .............................................. 762
Wall Defaults .......................................... 97
809
Wall Elevation Creating foundation wall ........................ 214

Definition .............................................. 762 Creating new wall types ......................... 210
Wall Framing Detail ...................... 132, 368 Creating railing ...................................... 100
Curved, align between floors .................. 238
Wall Framing Details ........................... 372
Curved, center point .............................. 231
Wall Hatch dialog ................................. 221 Curved, concave ................................... 240
Wall Height Specification dialog ........ 226 Curved, edit buttons .............................. 238
Wall Heights .......................................... 219 Curved, handles .................................... 233
Curved, how to draw .............................. 231
Wall Layer
Curved, jumpy when drawing ................. 231
Definition .............................................. 762
Curved, lock center button ..................... 238
Wall Offset Curved, locked center type .................... 236
Definition .............................................. 762 Curved, maintain center location ............ 236
Handles ................................................ 204 Curved, meeting straight ........................ 220
Wall Specification dialog 97, 209, 346, 350 Curved, normal type .............................. 233
Walls ......................................... 12, 201, 212 Curved, resize handle ............................ 236
5 sides, tutorial ..................................... 712 Curved, which type to use ...................... 238
6 sides, tutorial ..................................... 714 Default Wall Type .................................. 209
Accurate move ...................................... 205 Defaults .................................................. 98
Adjusting in 3D ..................................... 225 Deleting ................................................ 219
Align foundation ...............................95, 175 Deleting hatch ....................................... 220
Aligning between floors ......................... 212 Dimension location ................................ 210
Aligning end-to-end ............................... 204 Dimensioning to centers ........................ 210
Aligning exterior walls ........................... 210 Dimensioning to main layer .................... 210
Allowed angles ..................................... 206 Dimensioning to surfaces ....................... 210
Allowed angles diagram ........................ 207 Drawing ................................................ 202
Angled, 5 sides ..................................... 712 Editing in 3D ......................................... 225
Angled, 6 sides ..................................... 714 Editing wall attributes ............................ 203
Angled, adjusting .................................. 715 Exporting wall layer definitions ............... 626
Angled, compound in 3D ....................... 226 Exterior ................................................. 212
Angled, Hexagon tutorial ....................... 714 Fireplace in ........................................... 462
Angled, Pentagon tutorial ...................... 712 Fix connections ..................................... 220
Attic wall .............................................. 212 Flip layers ............................................. 212
Back clip to edit .................................... 225 Footing width & height ........................... 214
Blocked from moving ............................. 205 Foundation thickness ............................. 214
Bottom plate .................................. 132, 372 Foundation wall ..................................... 211
Bottom plates, number ................... 132, 372 Framing ................................................ 368
Breaking in 3D ...................................... 226 Gazebo, tutorial ..................................... 714
Center handle, curved ........................... 235 Handle, extend ...................................... 234
Centering footings (2 methods) .............. 214 Handles ................................................ 204
Changing into railings ........................... 211 Hatch spacing ......................................... 93
Co-linear .............................................. 204 Hatching ............................................... 220
Combining walls ................................... 220 Height change ....................................... 219
Compound angles ................................. 226 Hexagon, tutorial ................................... 714
Connect curved to straight ..................... 220 Importing wall layer definitions ............... 627
Connect Walls ...................................... 220 Interior, fireplace in ................................ 461
Connect, edit button .............................. 239 Invisible ................................................ 211
Connecting ........................................... 220 Invisible (Room Def) .............................. 211
810
Layers, exporting .................................. 626 Truss chords ................................. 136, 377
Layers, importing .................................. 627 Winders
Lower height in 3D ................................ 225
Index
Create .................................................. 311
Minimum length if unconnected ................ 93 Definition .............................................. 762
Moving ......................................... 204, 220 Stairs ................................................... 323
Moving by dimensions ........................... 205
Window Defaults .................................. 109
No Locate ............................................. 212
No locate .............................................. 212 Window Menu ......................................... 38
Managing
No Room Def ........................................ 212 Window Toolbar ..................................... 46
Offset handles ....................................... 204 Window Types
Files
Pentagon, tutorial .................................. 712 CAD Detail .............................. 19, 503, 570
Pony wall .............................................. 224 Camera .................................................. 18
Pony wall, upper & lower ....................... 228 Elevation ................................................ 18
Positioning ............................................ 715 Frame Window ........................................ 18
Railing .................................................. 100 Layout .................................................... 19
Managing
Raise height in 3D ................................. 225 Library Browser ...................................... 19
Raked ................................................... 224
Files
Materials ................................................ 19
Restoring top & bottom heights .............. 226 Overview ................................................ 18
Retain attic wall ..................................... 212 Plan ....................................................... 18
Room Def (invisible) .............................. 211 Walkthrough ........................................... 19
Selecting in cross section .............. 203, 225 Wall Detail ............................................ 368
Selecting in Plan View ........................... 203 Zoom window ....................................... 579
Setting up for 3D editing ........................ 225
Windows ................................................ 115
Solid railings ................................. 100, 215
Angled ................................................. 116
Specifying Foundation ........................... 214
Bay ...................................................... 289
Splitting ................................................ 205
Bay Trimmers ................................ 133, 373
Stepped ................................................ 224
Bay, gable roof ..................................... 294
Stud spacing ................................. 132, 372
Bay, roof over ....................................... 293
Stud thickness .............................. 132, 372
Managing
Bench seat ........................................... 292
Top plate ...................................... 132, 372
Bow ..................................................... 291
Index
Files
Top plates, number ....................... 132, 372
Bow, gable roof ..................................... 294
Understanding ................................ 97, 208
Bow, roof over ...................................... 293
Upper & lower pony wall ........................ 228
Box, gable roof ..................................... 294
Wall Detail ............................................ 368
Box, roof over ....................................... 293
Working With Walls ................................. 97
Cascade ............................................... 582
Walls In Section/Elevation .................. 203 Center along a wall ............................... 280
Warning ................................................. 544 Center to sink ....................................... 280
Before deleting ........................................ 92 Copy, multiple ....................................... 277
Concentric jump .................................... 547 Copy, single ......................................... 277
Webbing ................................................. 383 Corner, special ..................................... 282
Horizontal span ..................................... 385 Curved, in curved walls ......................... 282
Custom Muntins .................................... 283
Webbing (Trusses)
Default ................................................. 109
Definition .............................................. 762
Index
Default dialog ....................................... 109

Wedge .................................................... 438 Default level ......................................... 284
Width Default type ................................... 110, 265
Framing ........................................ 130, 371 Delete .................................................. 277
811
Divided lites .......................................... 271 Windows MetaFile see WMF

Double sill ..................................... 133, 373 WMF
Edit from .............................................. 596 Export ................................................... 630
Gable over, automatically ...................... 281
Working plan ................................. 168, 170
Glass, opaque ........................................ 87
Definition .............................................. 762
Headers ........................................ 134, 374
In curved walls ...................................... 282 WP Outlet ............................................... 452
Layers see Window Levels Definition .............................................. 762
Levels .................................................. 285 www.chiefarchitect.com ........................ 24
Library ........................................... 288, 430
Lites see Lites
Match roof ............................................ 274
Mode .................................................... 263 Z
Move as a group ................................... 278
Zoom ...................................................... 577
Move by dragging ................................. 278
Closer ................................................... 577
Move restrictions .................................. 280
Definition .............................................. 762
Move using dimensions ......................... 278
Extents ................................................. 578
Move, control key .................................. 280
F6 key to fill window .............................. 578
Move, single ......................................... 278
Fill window/Fill Screen ........................... 578
Muntin bars .......................................... 271
General overview .................................. 577
Muntins ................................................ 283
Move out ............................................... 578
Opaque glass ......................................... 87
Perspective views .................................. 589
Replicate .............................................. 277
Selection set kept .................................... 21
Resize .................................................. 281
Tools ......................................................51
Rough opening .............................. 132, 372
Undo ..................................................... 577
Schedules ............................................ 491
Select, individual .................................. 264 Zoom Window ................................ 579–580
Select, multiple ..................................... 264 Bird’s eye view ...................................... 579
Sill thickness ................................. 133, 373 Closing ................................................. 579
Stacked ................................................ 285 Create .................................................. 579
Tile ...................................................... 581 Definition .............................................. 762
Trimmers ....................................... 132, 373
812

Chief Architect Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Chief Architect Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Copyright © 1992-2000 by Advanced Relational Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America.

No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in

Registered Trademark Information

Chief Architect Interface ..................................................................14

The Standard Toolbar ......................................................................15

Camera Movement Tools ................................................................52

Chapter 5: File Management

Chapter 6: Preferences & 3D Preferences

Arch Tab ........................................................................................107

Window Defaults Setup...................................................................109

Chapter 9: Terrain Modeler

Editing Terrain Data ......................................................................156

Elevation Points ...............................................................................157

Chapter 10: Multiple Floors

Specifying Custom Moldings ........................................................187

Chapter 13: Walls & Railings

Editing Walls in 3D .........................................................................224

Chapter 14: Curved Walls

Doors in Curved Walls....................................................................252

Copying Doors .................................................................................253

Chapter 16: Windows

Automatically Mulled Units............................................................285

Selecting Components ...................................................................287

Chapter 17: Stairs

Stair Specification Dialog................................................................320

Creating a Stairwell......................................................................... 326

Chapter 18: Roofs

Chapter 19: Joists & Rafters

Using Framing References ............................................................364

Joist Specification Dialog................................................................366

Chapter 20: Roof Trusses

Chapter 22: Soffits

Chapter 25: Fireplaces

Chapter 26: Dimensions

Printing Text ....................................................................................487

Text in Wall Elevation and Cross Section Views.......................... 488

Chapter 28: Callouts & Markers

Splines into Polylines ....................................................................517

Applications for Splines ................................................................517

Edit Polyline Parts .........................................................................549

Advanced Splines ..........................................................................550

Chapter 31: Zoom & Window Tools

Chapter 32: Perspectives & Overviews

Chapter 33: Section/Elevation Views

Chapter 34: Render Views

Importing Bitmap Images...............................................................628

Resize Factor .................................................................................629

Chapter 36: Printing & Plotting

Moving Layout Views ...................................................................660

Copying Views .............................................................................. 660

Chapter 39: Material List

Chapter 40: Other Features

Chapter 42: Manual Roof Tutorials

Adding Attic Walls to Fill Gable....................................................730

Chapter 43: Auto Roof Tutorials

Glossary ................................................................................. 747

Technical Support ................................................................ 763

Material.txt ............................................................................. 765

Index ....................................................................................... 769

Three-Button Mouse Printers, Plotters, Etc.

Compatibility with Previous Versions

Installing Chief Architect